Technical Documentation: Technische Dokumentation

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION
TECHNISCHE DOKUMENTATION
GEA Westfalia Separator centripack
EDITION / AUSGABE - 09.04.2021
CUSTOMER / KUNDE: Taizhou Sanfu Ship Engineering Co., Ltd.

WS-ORDER NO. / WS-BESTELL 2451088515
NR.:
PROJECT / PROJEKT: SF130208
MODEL / MODELL: 1 x CCP2 for HFO
REVISION / REVISION: 00
engineering for a better world www.gea.com

2451088515 / 00 / 09.04.2021
Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

diese Dokumentation betreffend. Sie können gesandt werden an
The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

improving the documentation. They can be sent to
© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com

2451088515 / 00 / 09.04.2021
CONTENTS / INHALT
COVER SHEET
DECKBLATT
1 SAFETY
SICHERHEIT
1.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATIONS
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE FUER ANLAGEN
1.2 QUALIFICATION PERSONNEL
QUALIFIKATION PERSONAL
1.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND USER INFO
SICHERHEITS- UND BENUTZERHINWEISE
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SYSTEMBESCHREIBUNG
2.1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN
3 DOCUMENTS RELATING TO ORDERS
PROJEKTBEZOGENE DOKUMENTE
3.1 GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
GRAFIKSYMBOLE
3.2 ORDER INFORMATION SPARE PARTS FOR INSTALLATIONS
BESTELLINFO ERSATZTEILE F. ANLAGEN
3.3 EQUIPMENT LIST
GERAETELISTE
3.4 INSTALLATION PLAN
AUFSTELLUNGSPLAN
3.5 DATA SHEET
PROZESSDATENBLATT
3.6 INSTALLATION DIAGRAM
INSTALLATIONSSCHEMA
4 CONTROL UNIT
STEUER- UND REGELEINRICHTUNG
4.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
4.2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
STROMLAUFPLAN

2451088515 / 00 / 09.04.2021
5 CENTRIFUGE
ZENTRIFUGE
5.1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
5.2 PARTS CATALOGUE
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
5.3 PARTS CATALOGUE
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
6 PUMP
PUMPE
6.1 GEAR PUMP UNIT WITH MOTOR CPL.
ZAHNRADPUMPENAGGREGAT M.MOTOR V.
SBG-4C
7 HEAT EXCHANGER
WAERMETAUSCHER
7.1 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
PLATTENWAERMETAUSCHER
BPHE
8 VALVES, FITTINGS, ASSEMBLY

VENTILE, ARMATUREN, ZUBEHÖR
8.1 3/2-WAY PISTON-TYPE CONTR.VALVE CPL
3/2-WEGE-KOLBENSTEUERVENTIL VOLLST.
DN25/PN16
8.2 3/2 WAY SOLENOID VALVE
3/2-WEGE-MAGNETVENTIL
DIRECT-CONTROLLED
8.3 SHUT OFF FLAP

ABSPERRKLAPPE
IM-10-BFV
WA-WM
RE
8.4 SPRING SAFETY VALVE

FEDERSICHERHEITSVENTIL
67.961
SAFE

2451088515 / 00 / 09.04.2021
8.5 BALL VALVE

KUGELHAHN
IM-10-BV
8.6 SOLENOID VALVE

MAGNETVENTIL
330+331+332
8.7 SOLENOID-VALVE BLOCK, COMPLETE

MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST.
5281
10168
TFU006
10168
8.8 BALL VALVE

MUFFENKUGELHAHN
NK
8.9 NON-RETURN VALVE

RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL
RVA
M14X1,5 CW614N-MS FKM
RVA55
8.10 SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.

SENSORBLOCK VOLLST.
IM-47-SB_2062-8828-000_-010
8.11 CONTROL VALVE

STELLVENTIL
BR440-446
PREMIO-1.6KN
9 MEASUREMENT
MESSTECHNIK
9.1 PRESSURE GAUGE
DRUCKMESSGERAET
213.40
213.53

2451088515 / 00 / 09.04.2021
9.2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

DRUCKTRANSMITTER
8256NAE
9.3 MACHINE THERMOMETER

MASCHINENTHERMOMETER
IM-31-THER
9.4 PROXIMITY SENSOR

NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
NJ5-11-N-G
9.5 WATER DETECTOR

WASSERDETEKTOR
CLS 50 0022 001V1
9.6 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER

WIDERSTANDSTHERMOMETER
2XPT100
W083
W083
W083
10 MOTOR
MOTOR
10.1 THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
DREHSTROMMOTOR
IM-133-MOT

Safety precautions
for plants
No.: 9001
Edition: 0712
Designation: Safety precautions
engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

2 9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
Subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to
GEA Mechanical Equipment

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com,· www.westfalia-separator.com
GEA Westfalia Separator Group

9001 / 0712 / Safety precautions / 25.07.2012 3
For your safety

• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.
This avoids damage to the plant or plant components.
• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the plant components and the
processes.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply uncondi-
tionally to the operation of the plant. The plant operator must ensure
compliance with these regulations.
• Follow the instructions in the manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
Repair and maintenance work that goes beyond the scope described
in this manual may not be carried out.

1 Safety precautions
1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning ......................................................... 5
1.2 Performing work on a plant ...................................................................... 8
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ......................... 8
1.2.2 Spare part requirements .......................................................................... 9
1.2.3 Electrical installation ................................................................................ 9
1.2.4 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 10
1.2.5 Start-up .................................................................................................. 11
1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off« ......................................................... 13

1.1 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesives and metal plates) are attached to all plants, on
the hood and frame of the respective plant component in such a way that they
are clearly visible.
All safety markings on the plant, control system and plant components must al-
ways be in perfect condition.
• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

The following safety markings must be attached to the monitoring system as
adhesive labels:
Be sure to adhere to the plant

documentation!
• Every person who is assigned the
task of installing, operating, main-
taining and repairing the plant must
have read and understood the doc-
umentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete kept near to the installation
and be readily accessible to the op-
erators. It must be available to the
operators at all times!
Fig. 1
Disconnect power prior to start-

ing work!
Risk of injury due to electrical voltage
and unintended start-up of the plant!
Before carrying out work on the

plant and electrical plant compo-
nents:
• Make sure the plant is at a standstill.
• Switch off all electrical appliances
via the main switch,
• Lock the installation to prevent it
Fig. 2 from being accidentally switched on.

Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency convert-
er, do not exceed the admissible
speed (see nameplate)!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 3
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the plant components

can be hot!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 4
Danger due to electrical current!

Non-compliance with the protective
measures can result in serious dam-
age to persons or property.
Before working on electrical com-

ponents:
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can
carry voltage even when the main
Fig. 5 switch is off!
• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national orovisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or EVU
(Europäische Vereinigung für Unfallforschung und Unfallanalyse / European
Association for Accident Research and Analysis) institutions.
• The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).

Potential equalisation (protec-

tive-earth terminal)
The grounding protection is a measure
which, in the case of a malfunction,
leads off the touch voltage into the
earth.
Fig. 6

1.2 Performing work on a plant
The plant works reliably, provided that

it is operated and maintained in ac-
cordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 7
Special attention must be given to:

• assembly
• electrical installation
• before start-up
• start-up
• shut-down
• maintenance and repair
1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Operating, maintaining or repairing the plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

or unauthorized personnel!
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
who
• have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
The operator of the plant

• is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.
• is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.
• must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-
essary to carry out their work.

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

ing courses. You can obtain further information from Westfalia Separator or from
one of the authorized representatives.
1.2.2 Spare part requirements
• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
– safety risks,
– less durability and availability,
– increased service requirement.
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
spare parts, this may have legal consequences
Fig. 8 for the responsible persons. In such cases,
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or war-
ranty claims.
1.2.3 Electrical installation
• Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized electri-
cian!
• The governing accident prevention
regulations apply for the electrical
appliances and installations.
• Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of Westfalia
Separator.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 9
• Carry out voltage equalization.

• Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
– Low-voltage guideline 73/23/EWG
– Electro-magnetic compatibility 89/336/EWG.
– Guidelines of the classification societies.

1.2.4 Before start-up
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 10
• Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas blanketing,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 11
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
• Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately by new or reconditioned
parts.
Fig. 12

1.2.5 Start-up
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 13
In case of frequency converter

operation:
• Do not under any circumstances
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible speed
(see nameplate).
• The plant may only be operated with
an independent device for speed
limiting.
Fig. 14
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• Do not operate the equipment in ex-
plosion-hazarded areas.
Note:
This is except for plants equipped for
operation in explosion-hazarded areas.
Fig. 15

• The plant may be fed with inflam-

mable product only when being in-
ert-gas blanketed.
• The oxygen level has to be kept be-
low limit of inflammability by means
of an appropriate inert gas.
Fig. 16
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Wear protective clothing.
Fig. 17
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– components,
– vessels
o
reach temperatures over 80 C
o
(176 F).
Fig. 18

1.2.6 Shut-down and »Emergency-Off«
• For shut-down refer to the chapter

"Operation".
Fig. 19

Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Для записей
Muistiinpanot
Σημειώσεις
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Qualification of staff
Edition: 0712
Designation: Qualification of staff
engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

2 0712 / Qualification of staff
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving the
documentation. They can be sent to

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488

0712 / Qualification of staff 3
Qualification of staff
Work on / with separators requires special skills.

• Provide staff with special training / instruction for the following tasks:
– Operation,
– Maintenance,
– Repair.
• Clearly define responsibilities:
– Work performed by authorised persons only.
Type and source of danger:

Storage, transportation, erection, operation and maintenance of the sep-
arator / system by insufficiently trained staff.
Possible consequences of failure to observe:

Danger Incorrect operation, assembly and handling errors can cause serious damage,
injury / death.
Measures to prevent the danger:

– Use Westfalia Separator service.
– Take advantage of training opportunities.
– Read/follow operating manuals / operating instructions.
Westfalia Separator offers a comprehensive range of training measures.
The owner-operator is responsible for the training of staff.
NOTE
Contact Westfalia Separator or your nearest representative for more infor-

mation.
The owner-operator must select staff who, for example, fulfil the following re-
quirements:
• Minimum requirement:
– Read / understand the markings on the separator,
– Read / understand user instructions.
• Further requirements and skills:
– Basic general technical skills.
– Content of the operating manual / operating instruction.
– Measures for the prevention of accidents.
– Planning and implementation of installation.
– Securing of loads.
– Planning and implementation of start-up.
– Operation of the separator / system.
– Cleaning of the separator / system.
– Maintenance of the separator / system.
– Repair of the separator / system.
– Storage in case of extended periods of stoppage.

– Decommissioning of the separator / system.

– Disposal of operating material.
– Disposal of the separator / system.
• Other suitability:
– Only assign tasks to dependable persons.
– Minimum age of 18 years.
• Only employ persons undergoing training / apprenticeship under supervision.
The required skills and knowledge depend on the

tasks assigned.
NOTE
We reserve all rights to these documents. They may only be passed onto third parties after obtaining prior consent from Westfalia Separator Group GmbH.


Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note


Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Pos : 1.2 /BA/Standard/00_Titel_R üc ks eite/D ec kblatt_CD _2016_Ins tall ationsric htlini en @ 34\mod_1465543921873_18.doc x @ 1343889 @ @ 1
Safety Precautions and User Information

Machine and Skid Components
No.: 9953-9001-010
Version: 19.10.2016
About this document 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
ORIGINAL INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Contents subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for remarks and sugges-

tions for improving the documentation. These can be sent
to:
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
59302 Oelde, Germany
Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Titelseite ===
2 GEA Westfalia Separator Group

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 About this document
1 About this document 5
1.1 Sphere of application ................................................................................. 6

1.2 Qualification of the personnel .................................................................... 6
1.2.1 Operating personnel .................................................................................. 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel..................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation ................................................................. 7
1.4 Symbols used ............................................................................................ 7
1.5 Structure of the safety references ............................................................. 7
2 Safety precautions 9
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 10

2.2 Foreseeable use ...................................................................................... 10
2.3 Residual risk ............................................................................................ 11
2.4 Safety marking ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ....................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning .................................................................. 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ........................................................................... 13
2.8.1 Electrical energy ...................................................................................... 13
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances ................................................ 13
3 Description 15
3.1 Description and functional principles ....................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions ................................................................................ 16
4 Transport and storage 17
4.1 Transport ................................................................................................. 18

4.2 Storage .................................................................................................... 18
5 Assembly and installation 19
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation. ............................................... 20

5.2 Assembly ................................................................................................. 20
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection ............................................... 20
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection .............................................. 20
5.3 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 21
5.4 Pneumatic connection ............................................................................. 21
5.5 Ex zone .................................................................................................... 21
6 Repair 23
6.1 Cleaning and care.................................................................................... 24

6.2 Maintenance ............................................................................................ 24
6.3 Repair ...................................................................................................... 24
GEA Westfalia Separator Group 3

7 Decommissioning 25
7.1 Machine disposal ..................................................................................... 26
8 Spare parts 27
8.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ................................................................. 28

Pos : 3 /BA/Standar d/00_Übersc hriften/Kapi tel/01_Z u_di es em_D okument @ 0\mod_1315832097673_18.doc x @ 409 @ 1 @ 1

1 About this document

1.2 Qualification of the personnel .................................................................... 6
1.2.1 Operating personnel .................................................................................. 6
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel..................................................................... 6
1.3 Structure of the documentation ................................................................. 7
1.4 Symbols used ............................................................................................ 7

Pos : 4 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Geltungs ber eich_Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e @ 38\mod_1472029688939_18.doc x @ 1383566 @ 2 @ 1
1.1 Sphere of application

These Safety precautions and User Information are an important aid to
• avoid risks,
• reduce repair costs and downtimes and
• prolong the lifecycle of components.
The term “component” will be used in singular although this document is applicable
to all components incorporated in the separators/plants.
To assure reliable information of the component, the safety precautions and user
information must be read and understood before carrying out the following work:
• Installation
• Transport, storage
• maintenance work (cleaning and care, maintenance, servicing, repair) and
• Disposal
For questions that cannot be solved with the aid of this documentation, please
check back with GEA Westfalia Separator Group.
Pos : 5 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Qualifi kation_des_Personals @ 38\mod_1472030224751_18.doc x @ 1383601 @ 233 @ 1
1.2 Qualification of the personnel

Using these safety and user instructions and direct handling of the component re-
quire specialist qualification of the staff. For identifying the qualification level GEA
Westfalia Separator Group uses the following standard terms:
1.2.1 Operating personnel

• Qualified staff have the necessary technical know-how and extensive experi-
ence enabling them to avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical or
mechanical components. Knowledge of English is required.
• Trained staff are instructed or supervised by qualified staff to enable them to
avoid the risks that can arise when handling electrical or mechanical compo-
nents.
When installing, operating and testing the equipment, the staff has to adhere to the
safety rules applicable in the respective industry.
1.2.2 Service and repair personnel

Service and repair work require specialist knowledge and skills. Such work may be
carried out only by competent persons in terms of specialist knowledge and skills.
Documents in English are provided for this circle of persons. It is essential that this
circle of persons has an adequate command of English.
Pos : 6 /---Neue Seite--- @ 0\mod_1317283043850_0.doc x @ 550 @ @ 1

Pos : 7 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Struktur _der_D okumentati on @ 38\mod_1472030598771_18.doc x @ 1383638 @ 2 @ 1
1.3 Structure of the documentation
WARNING Risk due to non-observance of the documentation
There is a threat of serious injuries if the instructions in all documents are not fol-
lowed.
 Refer to the instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down
instructions for skids.
 Pay attention to the safety precautions and user instructions in machine and skid
documentation.
 Refer to the component manual.
 All safety precautions and warning instructions given in the documents have to
be adhered to.
 Access to the documentation must always be assured at the deployment site.
The documentation for components normally consists of:

• Instruction manuals for separators and/or start-up and shut-down instructions for
skids.
• Safety and user instructions on machine and plant documentation (this docu-
ment).
• Reference to component manual and / or technical datasheet of the component.
Pos : 8 /BA/2000_C ommod_Sep/Sic her hei ts-_und_Benutzer hinweise/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Ver wendete_Symbole @ 38\mod_1472032765550_18.doc x @ 1383675 @ 2 @ 1
1.4 Symbols used
This symbol gives information for better understanding the compo-

nent and its functions.
 The direction arrow marks work and/or operating steps. Keep to the order shown
from top to bottom.
• The bullet point marks lists.
Pos : 9 /BA/Standar d/01_Zu_dies em_Dokument/Sig nal wörter /Signal wörter_für _War nhi nweise @ 8\mod_1385644090593_18.doc x @ 475171 @ 2444 @ 1
1.5 Structure of the safety references

The centrifuge has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operat-
ed safely. Reference will be made in this manual to further potential risks by using
warnings where appropriate.
A differentiation is made between hazards which result in damage to the centri-
fuge, plant components and environment and hazards which lead to possible or
probable injury or loss of life.
Signal words and their meaning
DANGER Denotes impending danger. If the preventive measures are not implemented, death
or serious injury will be the consequence.
WARNING Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, death or serious injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION Denotes a potentially dangerous situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, minor injury may be the consequence.

NOTICE Denotes a potentially damaging situation. If the preventive measures are not im-
plemented, the centrifuge or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.
Danger signals
This is the danger signal. It warns of injury risks.

 Comply with all measures marked with the danger signal to avoid injury or
death.
Structuring of the safety references according to the 5-point rule

1. Danger signals as a warning of injury risks.
2. Signal words signal the degree of risk.
3. The type and source of the hazard indicate from where the hazard origi-
nates.
4. Explanation of the hazard and consequences in the case of non-
compliance describe the threat and the consequences of human error.
5. Measures give instructions to avoid the hazard.
DANGER Type and source of the hazard
Explanation of the hazard and the consequences in the event of non-compliance.

 Measures to avert or minimise the hazard.
WARNING Type and source of the hazard

CAUTION Type and source of the hazard

NOTICE Type and source of the hazard

Pos : 11 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/02_Sicherheits hinweis e @ 0\mod_1315831900616_18.doc x @ 402 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Safety precautions
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 10

2.2 Foreseeable use ...................................................................................... 10
2.3 Residual risk ............................................................................................ 11
2.4 Safety marking ......................................................................................... 12
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel ....................................................... 12
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning .................................................................. 12
2.7 Maintenance and servicing ...................................................................... 12
2.8 Special types of hazard ........................................................................... 13
2.8.1 Electrical energy ...................................................................................... 13
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances ................................................ 13

Safety precautions 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 12 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Allgemeines _Sic herheit @ 38\mod_1472109455088_18.doc x @ 1384479 @ @ 1
The machine or skid components have been designed state-of-the-art and in ac-
cordance with the recognised safety regulations. However, when using the compo-
nent, risks may arise for the user or third party or the component or other assets
might get impaired if it is
• operated by persons who have not been trained or briefed,
• not used for the intended application,
• not correctly repaired or maintained.
Pos : 13 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Besti mmungsgemäß e_Verwendung @ 38\mod_1472033909992_18.doc x @ 1383710 @ 2 @ 1
2.1 Intended use
The component is incorporated in machines and plants.

Precise details on the function of the component are found in the component man-
ufacturer’s manual.
The type of medium specified in the data sheet as well as the limit values for pres-
sure and temperature of the medium as per the specification must be complied
with at all times (see data sheet of the component manufacturer).
The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component have to
be observed and adhered to.
Usage in an explosion-hazarded zone is not permitted. The only exception: this is
confirmed in the order or is in the manual or data sheet of the manufacturer.
Pos : 14 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Vorhersehbar e_Fehlanwendung @ 38\mod_1472036879825_18.doc x @ 1383745 @ 2 @ 1
2.2 Foreseeable use

A different usage or a usage which goes beyond the scope is not in compliance
with the intended use. The operator of the machine/skid is exclusively liable for any
damage resulting from such usage. This applies likewise for unauthorized modifi-
cations.
Non-intended use is the use of
• materials with excessively high temperature,
• materials with excessively high pressure,
• materials with smouldering, burning or sticky particles.
• highly explosive and pasty materials,
• materials that act chemically with the materials of the component.
Changing the process conditions, operating conditions and environmental condi-
tions without the consent of the manufacturer are not in accordance with the in-
tended use.
WARNING Serious injury or death possible due to foreseeable misuse
Death or severe bodily injury to persons or damage to assets through disregarding

mechanical, chemical and electrical risks.
 The specific values stated in the documents furnished with the component have
to be observed and adhered to.

Pos : 16 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Res trisi ko @ 38\mod_1472037332032_18.doc x @ 1383780 @ 2 @ 1
2.3 Residual risk

An element of risk will remain when using the components, even when strictly ad-
hering to all safety rules and regulations.
All persons working with the component must be familiar with this residual risk and
follow all instructions that prevent accidents or damage.
DANGER Danger to life through electric voltage
When working on live leads, there is a risk of electric shock. An electric shock
leads to serious injury or death.
 Work on electrical apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
 Disconnect the power to electrical equipment if necessary.
 Secure against unintentional switching back on.
 Attach a warning sign that prohibits switching on.
WARNING Serious injury due to non-use of personal protective gear
Fatal injuries due to non-use of personal protective gear!

 Make it compulsory for the maintenance personnel to wear personal protective
gear.
 Depending on the specific circumstances, wear safety shoes, protective gog-
gles, hearing protection etc.
 When surface temperatures of > 50 °C or < 0 °C (> 122 °F or < 32 °F) prevail,
wear temperature-resistant protective gloves when working on components.
Serious injury as a result of uncoordinated work in the area of the compo-

WARNING
nent
There is a threat of serious crushing, cuts and grazes as a result of uncoordinated
work in the area of the component.
 Be sure to work/move carefully in the area around the component.
Serious eye and/or skin injuries due to discharge of the medium under high
WARNING
pressure
Risk of burns when handling materials with abrasive or corrosive properties.
 Wear protective goggles or mask with eye protection to offset the risk of medium
spurting out.
Pos : 17 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Sic her heits kennz eichnung @ 38\mod_1472038802245_18.doc x @ 1383815 @ 2 @ 1

2.4 Safety marking

The following markings (adhesive and metal plates) are fastened to the component
or its accessories:
Warning of dangerous voltage
The sign is attached to the electric terminal box.

The terminal box may only be opened by a qualified electrician.
Nameplate The nameplate contains specific component specifications.
All safety markings must always be in perfect condition.

 Clean dirty safety markings.
 Replace damaged safety markings.
 Note the safety marking.
Pos : 18 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Sic her heits hinweise_Pers onal @ 38\mod_1472039143285_18.doc x @ 1383850 @ 2 @ 1
2.5 Safety instructions for the personnel

Use only components that are in perfect technical condition in accordance with
their intended use, paying attention to safety and hazard awareness and following
the instructions in the documentation.
Eliminate all faults immediately, especially those that can negatively impact safety!
Clearly define and comply with competencies for activities relating to operation and
maintenance. Only in this way can mistakes -- especially in risk situations - be
avoided.
Do not fit the component until all protective and safety devices are fitted and opera-
tional. Do not remove them during operation.
In the event of functional faults or safety-relevant changes in the operating behav-
iour , shut down and secure the separator or skid. Have faults eliminated by quali-
fied personnel immediately.
Discharge leakage from hazardous materials so that no risk arises for the operator
or the environment.
Do not touch damaged, cracked and, in particular, live components.
Pos : 19 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Ei nstellar beiten_Inbetriebnahme @ 38\mod_1472039414715_18.doc x @ 1383885 @ 2 @ 1
2.6 Adjustments / commissioning

Through commissioning the component, the flow of medium can be changed or in-
terrupted. Prior to commissioning, make sure that possible adjustments cannot re-
sult in risks for persons or environment.
Check for correct functioning after each adjustment.
Implement suitable measures to avoid the crushing of limbs by moving actuators.
Pos : 20 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Instandhaltung @ 38\mod_1472109648159_18.doc x @ 1384513 @ 2 @ 1
2.7 Maintenance and servicing

When carrying out maintenance work, strictly adhere to all rules and regulations
applicable for handling the component or the medium (e.g. protective clothing, no
smoking).
Adhere to mandatory recurring tests and the intervals given in the documentation
for such tests and inspections.
Regularly check cables and hose connections, particularly on moving parts, for
damage and replace if necessary.
Pos : 21 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/02_Sicher heit/Spezielle_Gefahrenar ten @ 38\mod_1472039510559_18.doc x @ 1383920 @ 233 @ 1

2.8 Special types of hazard
2.8.1 Electrical energy

Never carry out work on live parts!
Do not modify constructional features in a way that impairs safety. Do not reduce
clearances and creepage distances through insulation.
Check the condition of cables on a regular basis and replace if necessary.
2.8.2 Oils, fats and other chemical substances

When handling oils, fats and other chemical substances, pay attention to and com-
ply with the valid regulations and safety data sheets issued by the manufacturers of
these substances regarding storage, handling, use and disposal!
First-aid measures after skin contact:
 Take off all contaminated pieces of clothing.
 Rinse off the skin thoroughly with water or take a shower.
 consult a doctor immediately.
First-aid measures after eye contact:

 Rinse out with plenty of water.
 consult a doctor immediately.
Pos : 23 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/03_Besc hr eibung @ 0\mod_1315902879297_18.doc x @ 467 @ 1 @ 1


9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Description
3 Description
3.1 Description and functional principles ....................................................... 16

3.2 Operating conditions ................................................................................ 16

Description 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 24 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Bes chr eibung _und_F unkti ons weis e @ 38\mod_1472040215048_18.doc x @ 1383957 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 Description and functional principles

The detailed description and functional principle of the respective component are
given in the corresponding component manual.
Pos : 25 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Eins atz bedi ngungen @ 38\mod_1472040299849_18.doc x @ 1383992 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Operating conditions

The housing and sealing materials are selected to suit the operating conditions.
The operating conditions have a major impact on the life of the component.
 Technical characteristics and the essential permissible limit values, especially
for pressure and temperature of the medium, are given in the manufacturer’s
manual.
 Care must be taken that the component is only used where the rating criteria
comply with the values stated on the nameplate. Proper and correct transport
and storage is essential.
 Faults arising from moving elements must be prevented by taking appropriate
measures.
Pos : 27 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/05_Trans port_und_Lager ung @ 0\mod_1326207116268_18.doc x @ 12410 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Transport and storage
4 Transport and storage
4.1 Transport ................................................................................................. 18

4.2 Storage .................................................................................................... 18

Transport and storage 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 28 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Tr ans port @ 38\mod_1472040425733_18.doc x @ 1384027 @ 2 @ 1
4.1 Transport
The following conditions must be observed:
WARNING Danger through contact with substances hazardous to health
The component can come in contact with substances potentially harmful to health
during operation.
 De-contaminate the component prior to packing and/or transport.
• Use hoists to transport components that are too heavy to move by hand.
• Screw eye bolts or lugs into the component, attach properly to the hoist and then
transport the components.
• When using lifting straps, place them around the component, provide sharp-
edge protection if required, and watch for proper weight distribution.
• Protect the component against outside force during transport (impacts, vibra-
tions etc.).
• Protect the sealing surfaces of the connections against damage.
• Do not remove the corrosion protection layer.
Pos : 29 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/03_Produktübersicht/Lag erung @ 38\mod_1472040914661_18.doc x @ 1384062 @ 2 @ 1
4.2 Storage
Protect the component against external impacts and contamination.
• Keep the storage room dry and dust-free.
• Avoid condensate formation.
• Protect connection openings against dirt.
Pos : 31 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/06_M ontage_und_Installati on @ 0\mod_1326806855797_18.doc x @ 12953 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Assembly and installation
5 Assembly and installation
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation. ............................................... 20

5.2 Assembly ................................................................................................. 20
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection ............................................... 20
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection .............................................. 20
5.3 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 21
5.4 Pneumatic connection ............................................................................. 21
5.5 Ex zone .................................................................................................... 21

Assembly and installation 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 32 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Allgemeines_Installati on @ 38\mod_1472041207296_18.doc x @ 1384097 @ @ 1
• Refer to the component manual for specific information on the component.

• Before installation, read and follow the instructions in the chapter “Safety pre-
cautions”.
• Observe accident prevention regulations!
Pos : 33 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/M aß nahmen_vor_der _Installati on @ 38\mod_1472041459351_18.doc x @ 1384132 @ 2 @ 1
5.1 Measures to be taken prior to installation.
CAUTION Injuries as a result of non-compliance with safety requirements
Transport and/or storage may result in damage to the packaging to the extent that
the component no longer meets the safety requirements.
 Check for potential damage prior to fitting.
 Do not fit a damaged component.
Before fitting, pay attention to the following:

 Check the piping and component for absolute cleanliness.
 Remove the protective caps from the caps only just before fitting.
 Do not damage the sealing surfaces or threads.
Pos : 34 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/M ontage @ 38\mod_1472042030055_18.doc x @ 1384167 @ 2433 @ 1
5.2 Assembly
 Remove all the packaging parts directly before fitting.
 No dirt particles must be allowed to enter the component.
 When required, keep to the flow of direction shown on the component.
After fitting
 Perform a leakage and function test.
 Create the specified operating status.
5.2.1 Fitting in the case of threaded connection

 Use a suitable sealant.
 Lay the piping so that no flow of forces runs through the component.
5.2.2 Fitting in the case of a flanged connection

 Fit the specified screws. Use all flange bores provided.
 Fit suitable gaskets and center between flanges.
 Tighten the screws evenly and crosswise to avoid distortion. A pipe must under
no circumstances be pulled against the component.
 Pay attention to correct seating of the gaskets.
 Tighten the screws with the specified torque.
Pos : 35 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Elektrisc her _Ansc hlus s @ 38\mod_1472042244966_18.doc x @ 1384205 @ 2 @ 1

5.3 Electrical connection

For components with electrical accessories.
DANGER Danger to life through electric voltage
When working on live leads, there is a risk of electric shock. An electric shock
leads to serious injury or death.
 Work on electrical apparatus and/or on live component equipment must be per-
formed by qualified staff only.
 Disconnect the power to electrical equipment if necessary.
 Secure against unintentional switching back on.
 Attach a warning sign that prohibits switching on.
 Ground the component in accordance with the local regulations.
 Comply with the protective measures when connecting the component in ac-
cordance with the provisions of the responsible power company.
Pos : 36 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Pneumatisc her _Ansc hlus s @ 38\mod_1472042436028_18.doc x @ 1384240 @ 2 @ 1
5.4 Pneumatic connection

Actuate only with conditioned compressed air. Install a compressed air control unit
upstream if required.
Pos : 37 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/04_Ins tall ation/Ex-Z one @ 38\mod_1472042494120_18.doc x @ 1384278 @ 2 @ 1
5.5 Ex zone
Usage in an explosion-hazarded zone is not permitted. The only exception: this is
confirmed in the order or is in the manual or technical data sheet of the manufac-
turer.
Pos : 39 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/12_Instands etzung @ 0\mod_1328003270613_18.doc x @ 14220 @ 1 @ 1


9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Repair
6 Repair
6.1 Cleaning and care.................................................................................... 24

6.2 Maintenance ............................................................................................ 24
6.3 Repair ...................................................................................................... 24

Repair 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 40 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Allgemei nes_Ins tandhaltung @ 38\mod_1472042876993_18.doc x @ 1384313 @ @ 1
This chapter is divided into the sections cleaning and care, maintenance and re-
pair.
 Before carrying out maintenance and repair, read and follow the instructions in
the chapter “Safety precautions”.
Pos : 41 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/R einig ung_und_Pfleg e @ 38\mod_1472042973596_18.doc x @ 1384347 @ 2 @ 1
6.1 Cleaning and care
NOTICE Damage to the component due to a dirt layer coating
Blockage of function openings. Reduction of heat dissipation.

 Arrange for efficient covering of the component when carrying out dirty work
near the separator or the plant (e.g. laying concrete, brickwork, painting, sand-
blasting).
 Clean the component regularly.
NOTICE Functional fault and damage to the component
There is a threat of damage to property due to improper cleaning.

 When cleaning with aqueous cleaning agents, pay attention to the type of pro-
tection of the electric components. In case of doubt, do not use it!
 Do not use aggressive detergents. The latter can attack metal and plastic sur-
faces as well hose connections.
 Never clean sensitive components with coarse brushes under strong mechanical
pressure.
 Functional
Pos : 42 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Wartung @ 38\mod_1472043384840_18.doc x @ 1384382 @ 2 @ 1
6.2 Maintenance
 The maintenance intervals have to be re-determined (shortened) by the operator
according to prevailing operating conditions.
 Check or maintain the component for safety reasons. Note the following mini-
mum requirements:
- Regular check of the outer condition of the component and the accessories.
- Regular actuation so as not to impair the smoothness of action of all movable
parts through excessively long standstill times.
Pos : 43 /BA/2000_Commod_Sep/Sicherheits- _und_Benutz erhi nweis e/05_Ins tandhaltung/Ins tandsetz ung @ 38\mod_1472043537652_18.doc x @ 1384417 @ 2 @ 1
6.3 Repair
NOTICE Material damage due to mechanical stressing of the components
Tread load, stress through connected pipes, excessively high ambient temperature
destroy the component.
 Fit without using force. Avoid stresses.
 No additional stress, e.g. tread load (use as unauthorized climbing aid).
 No welding and heat treatment.
 No tool machining (e.g. drilling).
Pos : 45 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/13_Auß erbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1328016515064_18.doc x @ 14509 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Decommissioning
7 Decommissioning
7.1 Machine disposal ..................................................................................... 26

Decommissioning 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 46 /BA/Standard/13_Außer betriebnahme/Z entrifuge_ents orgen/Maschi ne_ents orgen @ 16\mod_1416303007584_18.doc x @ 869138 @ 2 @ 1
7.1 Machine disposal

When the machine has reached the end of its useful service life, the plant operator
is responsible for proper and correct disposal.
It is recommended to commission a company specialized in the disposal of ma-
chines or to obtain information from GEA Westfalia Separator service.
 Observe the local disposal regulations.
 Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Have electrical connections disconnected by qualified personnel, e.g. electri-
cians.
IMPORTANT: Residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines can cause injury. Pro-
tective clothing must therefore be worn when dismantling lines.
WARNING Danger of acid and alkali burns
After cleaning, hot lye and acid residues can still be in the machine and the pipe-
lines. When working on the machine, contact with the lyes and acids can cause
burns.
 Wear acid-resistant safety gear, e.g. safety goggles, safety gloves, protective
overalls or protective suits.
 Take special care.
 Observe the plant operator's SOPs on handling acids and lyes as well as local
disposal regulations.
 Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation.
 Drain residual liquids in feed lines and utility lines into suitable vessels and dis-
pose of them properly.
 Observe regulations on product contact.
 Dismantle feed lines and utility lines, clean superficial impurities caused by lubri-
cants or product with suitable media and dispose of separately.
 Dismantle all seals and non-metallic materials, clean them to remove lubricants
and dispose of them separately or recycle.
 Separate and sort metal parts and recycle them.
Pos : 48 /BA/Standard/00_Ü berschriften/Kapitel/14_Ersatzteile @ 0\mod_1328016648937_18.doc x @ 14543 @ 1 @ 1

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Spare parts
8 Spare parts
8.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ................................................................. 28

Spare parts 9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16
Pos : 49 /BA/Standard/14_Ers atzteile/Original _Ersatzteile/Original _Ers atzteile_M asc hine @ 17\mod_1416476908928_18.doc x @ 872255 @ 2 @ 1
8.1 Use only genuine spare parts.

All spare parts, wear parts and operating materials are originally packed by GEA
Westfalia Separator.
The original packing is provided with the

marking shown.
Fig. 1
WARNING Danger due to defective spare parts
Non-original or unauthorized parts or supplies endanger the personnel working on

the machine.
Non-genuine or non-approved spare parts or operating materials reduce the avail-
ability of the machine.
 Use only genuine spare parts from GEA Westfalia Separator to assure the oper-
ating safety and optimum availability of the machine.

9953-9001-010 / 19.10.16 Spare parts
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt ===

Pos : 52 /BA/Standard/00_Ti tel _Rüc ks eite/Ruec ks eite_CD_2016 @ 33\mod_1463040149761_18.doc x @ 1329773 @ @ 1
We live our values.

Excellence • Passion • Integrity • Responsibility • GEA-versity
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and operations in more than 50 countries.
Founded in 1881, the company is one of the largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology.
GEA Group is listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 index.
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 Tel +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ruec ks eite ===
Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
Installation guidelines
Separator
No. 2058-9601-020
Edition 0717
ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
The authors are always grateful for remarks and sugges-

tions for improving the documentation. Remarks and sug-
gestions can be sent to:
GEA Deutschland
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
Tel. +49 2522 77-0 info@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com


1.2 Other applicable documents ...................................................................... 8
2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 12
3.1 Safety during transport ............................................................................ 14

3.2 Transport in the transport packaging ....................................................... 14
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist .............................................................. 14
3.2.2 Transport with fork-lift trucks ................................................................... 15
3.3 Transporting the separator ...................................................................... 15
3.4 Storage after delivery .............................................................................. 20
3.4.1 Separator ................................................................................................. 20
3.4.2 Control cabinet......................................................................................... 20
3.5 Preservation measures on site ................................................................ 21
4 Installation 23
4.1 Installation ................................................................................................ 24
5 Separator 27
5.1 Space requirement for the separator ....................................................... 28

5.2 Bowl weights ............................................................................................ 30
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators........................................................... 30
5.4 Ventilating the separator room ................................................................ 31
5.5 Foundations ............................................................................................. 32
5.6 Installing the separators .......................................................................... 34
5.6.1 Separators …SD 2 and …TC 2, 3 ........................................................... 34
5.6.2 Separators …SD 6, 18, 35, 60 – …SE 5, 10, 20, 40, 30, 80, 120 –
…TC 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 ............................................................................. 34
5.7 Screw torques .......................................................................................... 36
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm) ................................................... 36
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ......................................... 37
5.8 Fastening the foundation frame (shipboard operation) ........................... 38
5.8.1 Installing the separator (shipboard operation) ......................................... 39
5.9 Vibrations ................................................................................................. 40
5.10 Feed and discharge lines on the separator ............................................. 41
5.10.1 Feed and discharge lines ........................................................................ 41
5.10.2 Operating, filling and displacement water lines ....................................... 43
6 Operating, filling and displacement water 45
6.1 Operating, filling and displacement water discharge lines ...................... 46

6.2 Water quality ............................................................................................ 46

6.3 Supply pressure and temperature ........................................................... 46

6.4 Rating the water lines .............................................................................. 48
6.5 Water volume........................................................................................... 50
7 Compressed air 51
7.1 Compressed air quality ............................................................................ 52

7.2 Configuration of the compressed air line (per separator) ........................ 52
8 Product line 53
8.1 General .................................................................................................... 54

8.2 Pipe cross-sections ................................................................................. 54
8.2.1 Selection diagram .................................................................................... 55
8.3 Piping network ......................................................................................... 56
8.4 Product feed pump .................................................................................. 58
8.4.1 Pressure line ............................................................................................ 58
8.5 Strainers and pre-strainers ...................................................................... 59
8.6 Plate heat exchangers and tubular heat exchangers .............................. 60
8.6.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller............................ 61
8.6.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller ........................ 62
8.6.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller .................... 63
8.6.4 Thermal oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller ................. 64
8.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger................................................................ 65
8.8 Safety valve ............................................................................................. 66
9 Solids tank 67
9.1 Solids tank ............................................................................................... 68

9.2 Solids tank ventilation .............................................................................. 68
9.2.1 Solids tank venting .................................................................................. 70
9.2.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting ............................................................. 71
9.3 Solids discharge lines .............................................................................. 72
9.3.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap .................................................. 73
9.3.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps ...................................................... 74
9.4 Operating and dirty water discharge lines ............................................... 75
10 Electrical installation 77
10.1 Installing control cabinets ........................................................................ 78

10.1.1 Installation site and operation .................................................................. 78
10.1.2 Control cabinet D10 ................................................................................. 79
10.1.3 Control cabinet E40 ................................................................................. 81
10.1.4 Control cabinet IO .................................................................................... 83
10.1.5 Assembly example for control cabinets ................................................... 85
10.1.6 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 85
10.1.7 Type of protection .................................................................................... 86
10.1.8 External voltages ..................................................................................... 86
10.1.9 Shipboard operation ................................................................................ 86
10.1.10 Onshore operation ................................................................................... 87
10.2 EMC-compliant installation ...................................................................... 87
10.3 Solenoid valves........................................................................................ 88
10.3.1 Solenoid valve block ................................................................................ 88
10.3.2 Sensor block ............................................................................................ 89
10.3.3 Terminal box ............................................................................................ 90
10.4 Double thermometer PT 100 ................................................................... 91

10.5 Electric motors and sensors .................................................................... 92

10.6 Execution of the lectrical installation........................................................ 93
10.6.1 Voltage equalization of the separator ...................................................... 93
10.6.2 Equipotential bonding of the electric heater ............................................ 94
10.6.3 Equipotential bonding of the foundation plate ......................................... 95
10.6.4 Equipotential bonding of the control cabinet ........................................... 96
10.7 Electric motors procured by the customer ............................................... 97
11 Spare parts 99
11.1 Use only genuine spare parts. ............................................................... 100

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot




This document represents an integral part of the contract when procuring separator
installations and is part of the complete documentation. The document describes
the specifications for the design, manufacture and implementation of separator
systems.
For the plant operator, this document is considered to be a basis for planning and
executing the installation of separator installations.
1.2 Other applicable documents

• P&ID (Piping & Instrumentation Diagram)
• Installation diagram and equipment list
• Dimensioned drawing
Information on space requirement for operation and maintenance, minimum
clearance from walls/pillars or other machines
• Centrifuge operating manual
• Control unit manual
• Instruction manuals for components from other manufacturers such as motors
and valves.
• Further order-specific documents if relevant.
1.3 Structure of the safety references

The centrifuge has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operat-
ed safely. Reference will be made in this manual to further potential risks by using
warnings where appropriate.
A differentiation is made between hazards which result in damage to the centri-
fuge, plant components and environment and hazards which lead to possible or
probable injury or loss of life.
plemented, the centrifuge or something else in its vicinity can get damaged.
Danger signals

death.


nates.



NOTICE Type and source of the hazard

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 12

2.1 Materials
• All components are functional and of the best possible materials in terms of suit-
ability for the application.

3.1 Safety during transport ............................................................................ 14

3.2 Transport in the transport packaging ....................................................... 14
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist .............................................................. 14
3.2.2 Transport with fork-lift trucks ................................................................... 15
3.3 Transporting the separator ...................................................................... 15
3.4 Storage after delivery .............................................................................. 20
3.4.1 Separator ................................................................................................. 20
3.4.2 Control cabinet......................................................................................... 20
3.5 Preservation measures on site ................................................................ 21

3.1 Safety during transport

When the centrifuge is transported with hoists and fork-lift trucks, hazards can oc-
cur. Risk of injury and material damage are a threat when unqualified persons are
deployed and unsuitable or damaged lifting gear is used.
Therefore, pay attention to the following points during transportation:
 Assign only qualified personnel with the task of transporting the centrifuge.
 Use approved and intact lifting gear and hoists for transportation.
 Use only suitable hoists with adequate lifting capacity.
- For the weight of the centrifuge, refer to the separator manual, chapter "Tech-
nical Data / Weights".
3.2 Transport in the transport packaging
3.2.1 Transport with the aid of a hoist
 Always secure the goods to be trans-

ported in a suitable way against slip-
ping and tilting.
 When transporting the centrifuge in the
transport packaging, use only suitable
vehicles or suitable cranes.
 Ensure an even pressure distribution
on the bottom panel.
Fig. 1
Packaging example: Centrifuge with belt

drive
Fig. 2

3.2.2 Transport with fork-lift trucks
 Remove side walls, filling material and

all loose parts.
 Use the bottom panel of the transport
packaging as a pallet for transporting
the centrifuge with a fork-lift truck.
 Ensure an even pressure distribution
on the bottom panel.
Fig. 3
3.3 Transporting the separator
WARNING Danger of injury due to overturning of the separator during transport
Separators and their transport packagings can cause injuries through impacts and
crushing and tilting or slipping.
 Transport only by briefed and assigned persons.
 Pay attention to separator weight specifications (see separator manual, chapter
"Technical Data".
 Comply with the instructions for safe transportation.
 Secure separators adequately against slipping and tilting.
 Refer to the chapter "Transport" in the separator manual for suitable suspension
points and correct fastening methods.
 Remove the bowl from the frame be-

fore transporting the separator.
IMPORTANT: The separator is normally

delivered without installed bowl.
An exception to this rule are the separa-
tors…SD 2, …TC 2 and …TC 3. They
are delivered and transported with fitted
bowl.
Fig. 4
The examples below show how the transport ropes must be attached to the differ-
ent frames (see Fig. 5 – Fig. 14):

Separators …SD 6, 18 – …SE 5, 10, 20, 30 – …TC 5, 10, 20
 Unscrew screw plug (1) from the lower

section of the frame.
Fig. 5
 Screw double nipple (1) into the hole in

the frame.
Fig. 6
 IMPORTANT: Do not use the horizon-

tally screwed-in eye bolts of the motor
to suspend the separator.
 Hang in the transport ropes.
- Do not damage any machine com-
ponents when fastening the
transport ropes.
- Swing the transport ropes around
the machine A and the double nip-
ple and hang it in the load hook of
the hoist.
- Prevent the frame from overturning:
Place part of the rope around the
load hook in such a way that the
frame is lifted horizontally (see de-
tail).
- Make sure that the transport ropes
cannot slip.
- Ensure even load distribution.
Fig. 7

Separators …SD 35, …SE 40, …TC 40
 Unscrew screw plug (1) from the lower

Fig. 8
 Screw two eye bolts (1) into the upper

 Screw double nipple (1) into the hole in
the frame.
Fig. 9

transport ropes.
- Thread shackle (1) through the eye
bolts.
- Arrange the transport ropes around
the double nipple (2), pull through
the two shackles (1) and hang into
the load hook of the hoist.
tail).
cannot slip.
Fig. 10

Separators …SD 60, …SE 80, …TC 80
 Screw two eye bolts (1) into the upper

 Screw two eye bolts (2) with fitted
washers (3) into the intermediate
flange / holes in the frame.
Fig. 11

transport ropes.
bolts (1) and (2).
- Pull the transport ropes through the
four shackles and hang in the load
hook of the hoist.
tail).
cannot slip.
Fig. 12

Separator …SE 120
 Screw two eye bolts (1) (M 12) tightly

into the upper part of the frame.
 Screw two eye bolts (2) (M 20) tightly
into the intermediate flange / holes in
the frame.
Fig. 13

transport ropes.
bolts (1) and (2).
- Pull the transport ropes through the
four shackles and hang in the load
hook of the hoist.
tail).
cannot slip.
Fig. 14

3.4 Storage after delivery

• The original transport packaging must not be stored in the open.
• All parts must be stored in their original transport packaging in a suitable place
until commissioning.
• IMPORTANT: When stored under proper conditions, all separator parts are ad-
equately protected for maximum one year. A storage duration longer than 12
months is only possible after prior consultation with the manufacturer.
Pay attention to the following notes on storage and transport packaging:
• Handle delicate goods with care.
• Protect the goods against moisture and humidity.
• Protect the goods against heat.
• Pay attention when erecting the goods.
3.4.1 Separator
• If the separator is not installed immediately after delivery, it must be stored in the
original transport packaging.
• The storage location must be a closed, dry room.
• The storage temperature must not be lower than 5 C (41 F) and must not ex-
o o
o o
ceed 50 C (122 F).
• A storage duration longer than 12 months is only possible after prior consultation
with the manufacturer.
- If the machine is in storage for longer than 12 months, the maintenance inter-
vals specified in the separator manual must be adhered to.
3.4.2 Control cabinet

IMPORTANT: Improper storage discharges the manufacturer or supplier from the
warranty obligation.
• If the control cabinet is not installed immediately after delivery, it must be stored
in the original transport packaging in a protected place.
• The control cabinet must not come in contact with dusty and corrosive atmos-
phere.
• The storage location must be a closed, dry room.

• The control cabinet may not be exposed to foreign heat sources (e.g. direct sun-
light, heater fans etc.).
Additional requirements to be met by the place of storage
Ambient temperatures +5 to +45 °C (41 to 113 °F)

Air humidity max. 50 % at 40 °C (104 °F)
max. 90 % at 20 °C (68 °F)
Transport temperatures -25 to +55 °C (-13 to 131 °F)
3.5 Preservation measures on site
After installation until commissioning

• The spindle and drive chamber are lubricated at the factory. This affords them
protection for 12 months.
• After this time (12 months) has elapsed, it must be checked at 12 month inter-
vals whether all roller bearings and the spindle are adequately lubricated.
• Required lubricants:
- Shell Oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE 50) for roller bearings and spindle
- Roller bearing grease for the spindle cone.

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Installation
4 Installation
4.1 Installation ................................................................................................ 24

Installation 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
4.1 Installation
Fig. 15 Installation example
1 Separator
2 Separator foundation
3 Control unit
4 Control cabinet
5 Preheater
6 Solids tank
7 Vent on solids tank
8 Crane
9 Cleaning table
10 Supply air
11 Vent
• The prevailing regulations and standards of classification societies or other au-

thorized bodies must be complied with.
• All lubricating points and the drive housing of the separator must be easily ac-
cessible without having to remove pipes or gratings.
• All operating elements must be within easy reach of the operator and at an ap-
propriate height.
• Operating elements must not be mounted higher than 1800 mm above the work-
ing platform.
• All devices must be arranged so that they do not cramp the working area and so
that they can be safely serviced and operated.
• All fixed pipes and fittings must be securely attached in order to minimize vibra-
tions and movements.
• Contact points and supports must be attached in such a way that pipes can still
move in the event of temperature variations without causing stresses in the
lines.
• Pipes and pipe joints must be accessible for maintenance.
• Pipes may not be used to support electric distributors or devices.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Installation
• These installation guidelines do not apply for small, specially manufactured

components whose durability, accessibility and operation are not impacted.
These components must be mounted in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer.
• No galvanized parts may be fitted in product-carrying lines (e.g. heavy oil, diesel
oil, steam lines and thermal oil lines). This does not apply when type-tested pipe
connections are attached to pipe trace heaters.
• Y strainers must be preferably attached horizontally, whereby the filter element
must face downwards or to the side (turned through 90°).
If this is not possible for space reasons, the strainer can be installed vertically
with a flow from top to bottom. In this case, make sure that the filter element can
be removed.

Installation 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5 Separator
5.1 Space requirement for the separator ....................................................... 28

5.2 Bowl weights ............................................................................................ 30
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators........................................................... 30
5.4 Ventilating the separator room ................................................................ 31
5.5 Foundations ............................................................................................. 32
5.6 Installing the separators .......................................................................... 34
5.6.1 Separators …SD 2 and …TC 2, 3 ........................................................... 34
5.6.2 Separators …SD 6, 18, 35, 60 – …SE 5, 10, 20, 40, 30, 80, 120 –
…TC 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 ............................................................................. 34
5.7 Screw torques .......................................................................................... 36
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm) ................................................... 36
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb) ......................................... 37
5.8 Fastening the foundation frame (shipboard operation) ........................... 38
5.8.1 Installing the separator (shipboard operation) ......................................... 39
5.9 Vibrations ................................................................................................. 40
5.10 Feed and discharge lines on the separator ............................................. 41
5.10.1 Feed and discharge lines ........................................................................ 41

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.1 Space requirement for the separator

• IMPORTANT: Apart from the feed and discharge pipes of the separator, ni pipes
may be laid in the operating area.
• it must be ensured that the separator is readily accessible from all sides.
• Minimum clearance to walls of buildings and other machines must be observed.
- All machine parts must be readily accessible for maintenance and repair work.
- For removing and fitting the drive motor F and the bowl G.
• In the case of an installed foundation, pay attention to the actual overall height
E including the height of the foundation frame.
- refer to the installation plan in the order-specific final documentation.
Front view and top view of the separator.
 See the following table to determine

the operating area (shaded).
Fig. 16

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
Operating range for separators
Dimensions in mm
Separator
A B C D E F G H X Y Z
…SD 2 100 100 500 100 750 100 250 280 500 425 700
…SD 6 150 150 750 400 1500 175 350 550 900 550 900
…SD 18 150 150 750 400 1700 175 425 640 1050 575 1025
…SD 35 200 150 750 300 2100 250 600 850 1325 750 1300
…SD 60 200 150 750 525 2150 225 700 1020 1650 875 1550
…SE 5 150 150 500 275 1200 175 326 375 790 460 770
…SE 10 150 150 750 400 1500 175 350 550 900 550 900
…SE 20 150 150 750 400 1700 175 425 640 1050 575 1025
…SE 30 150 150 750 400 1800 175 425 680 1060 660 1100
…SE 40 200 150 750 300 2100 250 600 850 1325 750 1300
…SE 80 200 150 750 525 2150 225 700 1020 1650 875 1550
…SE 120 200 200 750 250 2750 200 850 1040 1800 1200 1950
…TC 2 100 100 500 100 750 100 250 250 500 300 575
…TC 3 100 100 500 100 750 100 250 250 500 300 575
…TC 5 150 150 500 300 1500 175 326 360 650 350 875
…TC 10 150 150 750 300 1600 175 350 550 700 500 1000
…TC 20 150 150 750 300 1700 175 425 640 825 550 1150
…TC 40 200 150 750 300 2100 250 600 850 1050 625 1350
…TC 80 200 150 750 300 2250 225 700 1020 1650 775 1700

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.2 Bowl weights
Hoist rating specifications
Fig. 17
Bowl weight
Separator b h
(kg)
...SD 2 200 195 10
...SD 6 255 270 45
...SD 18 300 320 75
...SD 35 425 420 190
...SD 60 540 530 360
...SE 5 220 225 30
...SE 10 260 270 50
...SE 20 315 315 65
...SE 30 360 355 100
...SE 40 440 450 205
...SE 80 560 570 400
...SE 120 660 645 660
...TC 5 220 215 25
...TC 10 265 260 40
...TC 20 315 310 55
...TC 40 440 435 140
...TC 80 560 560 240
5.3 Hoist specifications for separators

• The hoisting equipment must be mobile or swivel-type.
• The hoist be rated to enable the following:
- Vertical removal and fitting of the bowl (see chapter “Space requirement for
the separator", table - dimensions E).
- Horizontal removal and fitting of the drive motor (see chapter “Space require-
ment for the separator", table - dimensions G).

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.4 Ventilating the separator room

• Pay attention to the correct attachment of the air intake and exhaust lines.
- Efficient aeration and deaeration of the separator room.
- No vacuum in the air intake lines and air exhaust lines.
o
- Do not exceed the permitted room temperature (normally max. 45 C
o
(113 F) ).
IMPORTANT:
• Dimensioning of the electrical devices is crucial in this connection.
• If the permissible temperatures are exceeded, special action must be taken. The
maintenance intervals and measures may have to be adapted accordingly.
Installation example of a ventilation sys-

tem
Fig. 18
1 Supply air
2 Vent
Approximate values on air exchange
-1
For small, closed separator rooms 30 – 50 h
-1
For large separator rooms 15 – 20 h
-1
For engine rooms (beside main or auxiliary engines) 50 – 70 h

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Air volume (pressed out of the separator frame)
Air volume
Separator
(m³/h)
...SD 2 10
...SD 6 35
...SD 18 45
...SD 35 55
...SD 60 75
...SE 5 10
...SE 10 40
...SE 20 50
...SE 30 55
...SE 40 60
...SE 80 80
...SE 120 150
...TC 2 10
...TC 3 10
...TC 5 10
...TC 10 10
...TC 20 50
...TC 40 60
...TC 80 80
5.5 Foundations
• To avoid the influence of foreign vibrations, foundations and foundation frames
for separators which have contact with other foundations must not exceed the
specified vibration values (see chapter "Vibrations").
IMPORTANT: If the foundation frame does not have an appropriate rigidity and
bending strength, this can result in loss of warranty.
Installation example for a foundation

frame
Fig. 19
1 Foundation frame

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
• The foundation frames must be de-

signed so that dimensions a and b in
• When other parts are used, the mo-

the table below are adhered to.
ment of resistance of the U-sections

may not be below the value stipulated
• The foundation frame must have a

in DIN 1026.
rigidity with a maximum permitted de-
• The separator feet must be fastened at

flection of 1:1000.
the neutral axis of the foundation

frame.
Fig. 20
Dimensioning of the foundation frame
Dimensions in mm
Separator
a b
...SD 2 80 45
...SD 6 140 60
...SD 18 140 60
...SD 35 180 70
...SD 60 180 70
...SE 5 140 60
...SE 10 140 60
...SE 20 140 60
...SE 30 140 60
...SE 40 180 70
...SE 80 180 70
...SE 120 220 80
...TC 2 80 45
...TC 3 80 45
...TC 5 80 45
...TC 10 140 60
...TC 20 140 60
...TC 40 180 70
...TC 80 180 70

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.6 Installing the separators

The following chapters will show how the different separators are installed.
5.6.1 Separators …SD 2 and …TC 2, 3
Assembly of the separators on a steel

foundation room with the aid of rubber-
metal cushions.
Fig. 21
 Screw rubber-metal cushions (4) into

foundation frame (5).
 Screw studs (2) into rubber-metal
cushions (4).
- Torque: 30 Nm
 Place plate (3) over the studs.
 Position the separator on the plate (3)
and bolt tight using hexagon nuts (1).
Fig. 22
5.6.2 Separators …SD 6, 18, 35, 60 – …SE 5, 10, 20, 40, 30, 80, 120 – …TC 5,
10, 20, 40, 80
 Align separator (1) with feet (2) and

plates (3) on foundation frame (4).
 Tack plates (3) in position.
 Loosen hex head screws (5).
 Raise the separator with feet, see
chapter "Transporting the separator".
 Weld plates (3) to foundation frame
(4).
 Position the separator on the plates (3)
and bolt tight using hex head screws
(5).
 Tighten the hex head screws (6) firmly
(the torques are specified in the table
Fig. 23 below).

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
Hex head screw Torque

Separator
(6) (Nm)
...SD 6
M 12 52
...SD 18
...SD 35
M 16 100
...SD 60
...SE 5
...SE 10
M 12 52
...SE 20
...SE 30
...SE 40
M 16 100
...SE 80
...SE 120 M 20 200
...TC 5
...TC 10 M 12 52
...TC 20
...TC 40
M 16 120
...TC 80

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.7 Screw torques

The torques apply for the following conditions:
• Metric screws with coarse-pitch threads.
- Hex head screws according to DIN EN ISO 4014
- Allen screws according to DIN EN ISO 4762
• Through holes according to DIN ISO 20273 (medium).
• Greased screws (total minimum coefficient of friction = 0.10).
• Torque wrench with a scatter (tolerance) of ±10 %.
• Material combinations:
- Steel-steel
- Stainless steel-stainless steel.
IMPORTANT: Screws whose torque deviates from this table are marked with the
required torque in the manual.
5.7.1 Screw torques in Newton meters (Nm)
Super
A2-70 A2-80 Hastelloy
Strength class 8.8 10.9 12.9 Duplex
A4-70 A4-80 2.4819
1.4501
Yield stress/yield strength 640 450
940 1100 600 550 360
in N/mm² 660 250
Parameter Torque in Nm
M4 2.6 3.9 4.5 1.9 2.5 1.9 1.5
M5 5.2 7.6 8.9 3.6 4.8 3.6 2.9
M6 9.0 13.2 15.4 6.3 8.4 6.3 5.0
M8 21.6 31.8 37.2 15.2 20.2 15.2 12.1
M 10 43.0 63.0 73.0 30.0 40.0 30.0 24.0
M 12 73.0 108.0 126.0 52.0 69.0 52.0 42.0
M 14 117.0 172.0 201.0 82.0 109.0 82.0 65.0
M 16 180.0 264.0 309.0 126.0 168.0 126.0 100.0
M 18 259.0 369.0 432.0 177.0
M 20 363.0 517.0 605.0 248.0
M 22 495.0 704.0 824.0 187.0
M 24 625.0 890.0 1041.0 237.0
M 30 1246.0 1795.0 2077.0 472.0
M 36 2164.0 3082.0 3607.0
Screws made of Super Duplex 1.4501 are treated like A4-70 screws while neglect-
ing the higher yield stress.
In the case of screws larger than M 16, an individual drop in strength due to the
degree of deformation of the screw raw material and the thread rolling procedure
must be taken into account.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.7.2 Screw tightening torques in inch-pound (inlb)

The following formula is used to convert the torques (Ma) from “Nm“ to “inlb“:
Mainlb = MaNm x 8.85
Example:
Mainlb = Wanted (screw tightening torques in “inch-pound”)

MaNm = 50 (screw tightening torques in “Newtonmeter“)
Mainlb = 50 Nm x 8.85
Mainlb = 442.5 inlb

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.8 Fastening the foundation frame (shipboard operation)
• The foundation frame (2) can be di-

rectly welded onto the steel structure
(1).
Fig. 24
The detail view X shows an example for

welding the foundation frame to the steel
structure.
Fig. 25
X Fillet weld
Example 1
• The weld seams must be 100 mm long.
• The distance between the weld seams must be approx. 350 mm.
That means that three weld seams with a length of 100 mm stretch for a distance
of one metre.
Example 2
• The foundation frame can also be welded all the way round.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.8.1 Installing the separator (shipboard operation)
• The supports (1) must be attached
• The dimensional specifications a and b

beneath the separator feet.
for the clearance of the supports (1)

must be observed (see figure and ta-
• The position of the separator feet can

ble below).
be seen in the chapter "Space re-

quirement for the separator".
Fig. 26
Dimensional specifications a and b for

the clearance of the suports of the re-
spective separator.
Fig. 27
Dimension "a" Dimension "b"

Separator
[mm] [mm]
...SD 2 452 237
...SD 6 350 220
...SD 18 425 270
...SD 35 555 380
...SD 60 700 460
...SE 5 326 220
...SE 10 350 220
...SE 20 425 270
...SE 30 425 270
...SE 40 555 380
...SE 80 700 460
...SE 120 850 620
...TC 2 452 237
...TC 3 452 237
...TC 5 326 220
...TC 10 350 220
...TC 20 425 270
...TC 40 555 380
...TC 80 700 460

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
5.9 Vibrations
Fig. 28
Tolerable vibration Limits for Vibro 2

Permissible vibra- Limits for Vibro 1
values at the sepa- with installed vibra-
tion value at the with installed vibra-
Separator rator contact area tion sensor (3)
reference point (2) tion sensor (3)
(footprint) [1] (mm/s)
(mm/s) (mm/s)
max. (mm/s)
...SD 2 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SD 6 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SD 18 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SD 35 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SD 60 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 5 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 10 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 20 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 30 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 40 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 80 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...SE 120 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 2 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 3 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 5 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 10 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 20 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 40 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
...TC 80 2.0 4.5 4.5 7.0
(1) Measured at separator standstill and normal ship operation.
(2) Measured when separators are running.
(3) The vibration sensor is fitted in this area.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.10 Feed and discharge lines on the separator

The general configuration of the piping network is described in the following chap-
ters:
5.10.1 Feed and discharge lines

• The feed and discharge lines must be laid in conformity with the guidelines of
GEA Westfalia Separator or the specifications of the classification societies.
WARNING Danger due to defective spare parts or operating materials
Non-original or unauthorized parts or operating materials endanger the personnel

working on the centrifuge.
ability of the centrifuge.
ating safety and optimum availability of the centrifuge.
• The lines must be flushed before commissioning to protect the valves and units.
• The following lines must be connected to hoses or compensators to prevent vi-
brations:
- Product feed line and product discharge line
- Operating, filling and displacement water lines
- Solids discharge
- Dirty water discharge line
- Frame drain
Special requirements apply for shockproof separators.
• The connection dimensions of the feed and discharge lines are given in the or-
der-specific dimensioned drawing.
• hoses and protective sleeves for cables:
Protective sleeve for cables
 IMPORTANT: Avoid abrasion.

- Fit protective sleeve (1) along the
full length of the cable harness (con-
tact points to the machine).
- Adapt the length of the protective
sleeve (1).
Fig. 29

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Corrugated hose with braiding
 IMPORTANT: Do not twist corrugated

hose.
- Fit corrugated hose without torsion.
 Fix side of corrugated hose (1) with
screws and align.
 Fix side of corrugated hose (2) with
screws.
 Tighten all bolts fully.
Fig. 30
 IMPORTANT: Do not over-bend cor-

rugated hose.
- Fit corrugated hose as shown.
- Fit a pipe bend to divert if neces-
sary.
Fig. 31
 IMPORTANT: Do not kink corrugated

hose.
 Remove all corrugated hoses for ser-
vicing work (before removing the
hood).
Fig. 32

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Separator
5.10.2 Operating, filling and displacement water lines
• The water lines must be laid so that

they can be drained completely at the
lowest point without having to be dis-
• Y-strainers are fitted horizontally at the

mantled.
factory, whereby the filter elements (1)
• The solenoid valves for operating,

face downwards.
filling and displacement water to the

separator are fitted so that the hose
between the separator and solenoid
valves cannot drain.
Fig. 33

Separator 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Operating, filling and displacement water
6 Operating, filling and displacement water
6.1 Operating, filling and displacement water discharge lines ...................... 46

6.2 Water quality ............................................................................................ 46
6.3 Supply pressure and temperature ........................................................... 46
6.4 Rating the water lines .............................................................................. 48
6.5 Water volume........................................................................................... 50

Operating, filling and displacement water 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
6.1 Operating, filling and displacement water discharge lines

• Operating, filling and displacement water discharge lines may not be led into
public sewage systems, draining ditches and waters.
- Comply with environmental protection legislation.
6.2 Water quality

• IMPORTANT: When desalinated water or condensate is used, corrosion must
be reckoned with.
• The use of boiler feed water is not permitted.
• land water is not recommended since its degree of hardness is normally too
high.
• The water must be as pure as possible and meet the following standards:
Hardness
- up to 55 °C (131 °F) separating temperature < 12° dH
- above 55 °C (131 °F) separating temperature < 6° dH
The different hardness values are linked by the following relationships:
1° dH = 1.79° fH = 1.25° eH = 17.9 ppm CaCO3
pH 6.5 – 7.5
Chloride ions < 100 mg/l
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/l
Particle size max. 50 µm
dH = German hardness | fH = French hardness | eH = English hardness
6.3 Supply pressure and temperature
Fig. 34
IMPORTANT: The pressure downstream of the water pressure reducer must be

set to 0.25 Mpa (2.5 bar) when the operating water valve is open.

 Refer to the dimensioned drawing of the separator.
• The supply pressure and the temperature for the operating, filling and displace-
ment water must meet the following specifications:
Supply pressure 0.3 – 1.0 MPa (3 – 10 bar)

Temperature min. 10 °C (50 °F)
max. 85 °C (185 °F)
6.3.1 Operating, filling and displacement water lines
• The water lines must be laid so that

they can be drained completely at the
lowest point without having to be dis-
• Y-strainers are fitted horizontally at the

mantled.
factory, whereby the filter elements (1)
• The solenoid valves for operating,

face downwards.
filling and displacement water to the

separator are fitted so that the hose
between the separator and solenoid
valves cannot drain.
Fig. 35

6.4 Rating the water lines

• Manifolds must be dimensioned in such a way that the separators are always
supplied with an adequate water volume to ensure smooth operation.
• The manifolds must be laid in such a way as to enable fitting and removing the
solenoid valves and filters,
• In the case of a separator, the mani-

fold must have the same nominal width
• The nominal width R is given in the

as the separator feed lines.
following table.
Fig. 36 1 Separator
Fig. 37 2 Separators
With two separators:

IMPORTANT: When two separators request water simultaneously, the water sup-
ply can be dimensioned as for one separator.
• The manifold must have a nominal width S (see following table).
• The feed lines to the separator must have a nominal diameter R (see the follow-
ing table).
With three and more separators

• The manifold must have a nominal width of DN 32.
• The feed lines to the separator must have a nominal diameter R (see the follow-
ing table).

Nominal diameter (DN)

Separator Manifold Feed line
S R
...SD 2 25 20
...SD 6 25 20
...SD 18 25 20
...SD 35 32 20
...SD 60 32 20
...SE 5 25 20
...SE 10 25 20
...SE 20 25 20
...SE 30 32 20
...SE 40 32 20
...SE 80 32 20
...SE 120 32 20
...TC 2 25 20
...TC 3 25 20
...TC 5 25 20
...TC 10 25 20
...TC 20 25 20
...TC 40 32 20
...TC 80 32 20

6.5 Water volume

The following water quantities are required for precise program control with simul-
taneous actuation of the solenoid valves.
Solenoid valve Total con- Total con-

V2 V2 V3 sumption sumption
per cycle per cycle
Filling water Displace- Operating
Separator without
ment water water * filling wa-
ter
l/s l/s l/s l (approximate)
...SD 2 0.25 0.25 0.25 2 1.5
...SD 6 0.1 0.1 0.5 3 2
...SD 18 0.1 0.1 0.8 5 3.5
...SD 35 0.1 0.1 0.8 10 6.5
...SD 60 0.1 0.1 0.8 23 13
...SE 5 0.1 0.1 0.5 1.6 1.1
...SE 10 0.1 0.1 0.5 2.3 1.5
...SE 20 0.1 0.1 0.5 3.2 2.0
...SE 30 0.1 0.1 0.5 6.4 4.2
...SE 40 0.1 0.1 0.8 11.6 7.6
...SE 80 0.1 0.1 0.8 25.4 15.4
...SE 120 0.5 0.5 1.0 46 31
...TC 2 0.1 0.1 - 1.5 0.8
...TC 3 0.1 0.1 - 2.4 1.2
...TC 5 0.1 0.1 - 2.9 1.3
...TC 10 0.1 0.1 - 4.5 2.0
...TC 20 0.1 0.1 - 6.6 3.1
...TC 40 0.1 0.1 - 17.7 9.0
...TC 80 0.1 0.1 - 42.6 21.0
* Ejection cycle = Σ (filling water + displacement water + operating water)

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Compressed air
7 Compressed air
7.1 Compressed air quality ............................................................................ 52

7.2 Configuration of the compressed air line (per separator) ........................ 52

Compressed air 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
7.1 Compressed air quality

• The compressed air must be free from impurities and dry.
- Comply with all pertinent national and international regulations.
7.2 Configuration of the compressed air line (per separator)
Fig. 38 Example of a separator
1 Pressure reducer
• IMPORTANT: The standard scope of delivery for separators does not in-
clude a compressed air control assembly.
• When other pneumatic components are operated, the corresponding in-
structions on air quality and air purity must be followed.
Pressure of compressed air supply and compressed air consumption
Permitted supply pressure 0.3 – 1.0 MPa (3 – 10 bar)

Supply pressure 0.3 MPa (3 bar)
downstream of the pressure reducer (1)
Max. compressed air consumption (per separa- 3
0.01 Nm /h
tor)

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8 Product line
8.1 General .................................................................................................... 54

8.2 Pipe cross-sections ................................................................................. 54
8.2.1 Selection diagram .................................................................................... 55
8.3 Piping network ......................................................................................... 56
8.4 Product feed pump .................................................................................. 58
8.4.1 Pressure line ............................................................................................ 58
8.5 Strainers and pre-strainers ...................................................................... 59
8.6 Plate heat exchangers and tubular heat exchangers .............................. 60
8.6.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller............................ 61
8.6.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller ........................ 62
8.6.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller .................... 63
8.6.4 Thermal oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller ................. 64
8.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger................................................................ 65
8.8 Safety valve ............................................................................................. 66

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.1 General
• Pay special attention to the chapter "Installation"!
• The suction lines must be as short as possible to avoid pressure losses.
• When dimensioning the suction line, it must be ensured that the total pressure
loss in the suction line does not exceed the maximum suction head of the pump.
• The pipes must be installed at an adequate distance from the electronic compo-
nents.
• IMPORTANT: Liquid seals (siphons) in the pipes must be avoided. The liquid
must be able to flow off freely.
• When different products, e.g. diesel oil and heavy oil, are fed to the separator, it
must be ensured that the respective product feed lines are not interchanged.
8.2 Pipe cross-sections

• All pipes, valves, fittings and instruments must be laid so that an insulation of 40
mm is possible.
• The dimensions of the pipes are given in the corresponding dimensioned draw-
ing.
• The pipes can be selected using the diagram below. The specifications in the
dimensioned drawing have priority.
• The pipe resistances must be kept as low as possible.
• Under consideration of the total pressure losses the flow velocities must be:
- between 0.5 m/s and < 1 m/s in suction lines
- between 1 m/s and 3 m/s in pressure lines

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.2.1 Selection diagram
Fig. 39
Q Flow
v Velocity in m/s
Example:
3
A flow rate of 5 m /h produces a velocity of 1.2 m/s with a nominal width of 40.

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.3 Piping network

IMPORTANT: A return line into the suction side of the pump is not allowed.
Fig. 40 Lubrication oil schematic
1 Lube oil tank
• When separating lube oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve can be led into the
product discharge line of the separator.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
Fig. 41 Diesel oil schematic
1 Diesel oil tank

2 Service tank
3 Heat exchanger (option)
• When separating diesel oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve must be led into
the DO tank (1).
Fig. 42 Lubrication oil schematic
1 Settling tank
2 Service tank
• When separating heavy oil, the return line of the 3/2-way valve must be led into
the settling tank (1).

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.4 Product feed pump
Product feed pump

- Gear pump Max. 0.04 MPa (0.4 bar)
- Worm pump Max. 0.05 MPa (0.5 bar)
Required pressure head approx. 0.3 MPa (3 bar)
Viscosity of the oil to be conveyed < 1 000 cSt
Feed pressure in the suction line Max. 0.05 MPa (0.5 bar)
IMPORTANT:
• The total pressure loss in the pipe must not exceed the maximum suction height
of the pump.
• The viscosity of the oil to be conveyed must be kept below the specified value, if
necessary by means of preheating and trace heating.
• To protect the preheater against overheating, a pump post-running time must be
programmed for the pump units and the product preheating.
8.4.1 Pressure line

• When dimensioning the pressure line, it must be ensured that the total pressure
loss in the pipes does not exceed the maximum pressure head of the pump.
• The pressure line from the product feed pump via the orifice plate, the pre-
heater and the 3/2-way valve to the separator must be kept as short as possible.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.5 Strainers and pre-strainers

• The strainers and pre-strainers are fitted in the suction line of the feed pump to
protect it from coarse impurities.
• During installation, special attention must be paid to the fitting position, see
chapter "Installation".
• Use only strainers with the following

characteristics:
Fig. 43
Nominal width Filter element (1)

(DN) Mesh width
mm mm
15 – 50 1.00
65 – 80 1.25
> 100 1.60
• Use only pre-strainers with a mesh

width of the filter element (1) of 0.63
mm.
Fig. 44

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.6 Plate heat exchangers and tubular heat exchangers

• The heat exchanger must be installed so that no heat is given off to the control
cabinet.
• IMPORTANT: To avoid accidents during venting due to releasing hot vapours
and liquids, the discharge lines of the vent valves must be laid at minimum floor
height.
• The discharge line of the safety valve must be laid so that there is no accident
risk when the safety valve responds due to overpressure.
• The discharge line must be laid so that it can always be monitored. It must not
be concealed by pipes, valves or other components.
• Steam traps
– must be attached horizontally between two connections.
– may not be insulated to assure correct operation.
– must be installed in such a way that the condensate can discharge without
backpressure.
• At least one proportional-integral controller must be used for the heat exchang-
ers.
The following installation examples are set out in the next chapters:
• Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller
• Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller
• Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller
• Thermal-oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.6.1 Steam-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller
Fig. 45
A Oil inlet
B Oil outlet
C Steam inlet
D Condensate outlet
0.1 Spring safety valve
1.0 Plate heat exchangers
1.1 Resistance thermometer (PT 100)
2.1 Strainer
2.2 Control valve
2.3 Ball float condensate trap

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.6.2 Steam-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller
Fig. 46
A Oil inlet
B Oil outlet
C Steam inlet
D Condensate outlet
2.1 Strainer
2.2 Control valve
2.3 Ball float condensate trap

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.6.3 Thermal oil-heated plate heat exchanger with PI controller
Fig. 47
A Oil inlet
B Oil outlet
C Thermal oil inlet
D Thermal oil outlet
2.1 Control valve

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.6.4 Thermal oil-heated tubular heat exchanger with PI controller
Fig. 48
A Oil inlet
B Oil outlet
C Thermal oil inlet
D Thermal oil outlet
1.0 Tubular heat exchanger
2.1 Control valve

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Product line
8.7 Soldered plate heat exchanger
IMPORTANT:
• Deformations, distortion or any other kind of stress of the soldered connecting
points must be prevented.
• The pipes must be securely in place.
Fastening plate heat exchangers:

 Prepare an assembly plate support
and bolt it to the foundation.
 Fasten assembly plate (50) with
screws (70) and nuts (80) to the as-
sembly plate support.
 The assembly plate must be installed
vertically relative to the pipe axis.
 IMPORTANT: The assembly plate
must not be welded to the support.
 Fasten heat exchanger with gaskets
(40), counterflanges (30), lock washers
(20) and screws (10) to the assembly
plate.
 Attach the pipes to the counterflanges
by tack-welding.
 Dismantle the heat exchanger and
gaskets.
 Completely weld the pipes to the coun-
terflanges.
 Finally, re-assemble the parts as per
instruction.
Fig. 49
A A The illustrated channel steel must be provided by the shipyard.

B Recommendation: U-section in accordance with DIN 1026-1-50.
Allen Lock Counter- Assembly Hex head Hexagon

Gasket
Type screw washer flange plate screw nut
(10) (20) (30) (40) (50) (70) (80)
ISO 4017 – ISO 3032 –
ISO 4762 – DIN127 – B10 1 in - 32.92 x 3.53 352 x 125 x 12
M 12 x 40 M 12
B 10 M 10 x 45 (16 x) SAE3000PSI (8 x) (1 x)
(2 x) (2 x)
(16 x) (4 x)
ISO 4762 - DIN127 – B12 5.08 cm - 56.74 x 3.53 563 x 290 x 12 ISO 4017 – ISO 3032 –
M 12 x 55 (16 x) SAE3000PSI (8 x) (1 x) M 12 x 40 M 12
B 45 (16 x) (4 x) (2 x) (2 x)

Product line 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
8.8 Safety valve
Safety valve in vertical fitting position
Fig. 50
• IMPORTANT: Do not use galvanized
• The safety valve outlet should be led

components and hoses.
• A discharge line is welded to the fun-

via a funnel (1).
nel (1) through which the medium is

discharged.
Fig. 51

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
9 Solids tank
9.1 Solids tank ............................................................................................... 68

9.2 Solids tank ventilation .............................................................................. 68
9.2.1 Solids tank venting .................................................................................. 70
9.2.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting ............................................................. 71
9.3 Solids discharge lines .............................................................................. 72
9.3.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap .................................................. 73
9.3.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps ...................................................... 74
9.4 Operating and dirty water discharge lines ............................................... 75

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
9.1 Solids tank

IMPORTANT: This chapter does not apply to the separators with sludge transfer
units (STU) from GEA Westfalia Separator.
• There should always be separate sol-

ids tanks (also called sludge tanks) for
• A tank heating system (3) must be

the lube oil and fuel systems.
installed depending on the viscosity
• The general designs and constructions

and ambient temperature respectively.
are subject to the valid regulations.
Fig. 52
1 Monitoring
2 Ventilation
3 Tank heating
4 Utilizable volume
Minimum volume of the solids tank

Volume Maximum usable volume
Separator
(l) (%)
...SD 2 80 60
...SD 6 200 60
...SD 18 200 60
...SD 35 300 60
...SD 60 300 60
...SE 5 80 60
...SE 10 200 60
...SE 20 200 60
...SE 30 250 60
...SE 40 300 60
...SE 80 300 60
...SE 120 450 60
9.2 Solids tank ventilation

The following criteria must be taken into consideration when ventilating the tank:
• Installation in accordance with the guidelines of the classification societies
• Controlled discharge of oil and water vapours
• An uncontrolled discharge of the solids (e.g. sludge) must be avoided.
• The vent lines of the solids tank must be laid so that a suction effect is created.
This suction effect must be strong enough to ensure that the air geneated by the
running separator can be ld off under all operating conditions (see chapter
"Venting the separator room").
The volume of air generated during each bowl ejection must additionally be tak-
en into account.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
Bowl top
Volume
Separator
(l)
...SD 2 1
...SD 6 1.5
...SD 18 3
...SD 35 8
...SD 60 21
...SE 5 1
...SE 10 2
...SE 20 3.6
...SE 30 6
...SE 40 10
...SE 80 23
...SE 120 42
• Vent lines may not be laid horizontally.

o
They must have a slope of at least 5 .
• When laying vent lines, avoid water

pockets.
Fig. 53
• All possible bends in the vent lines

must be arranged stepwise.
Fig. 54

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
9.2.1 Solids tank venting

• IMPORTANT: Connect the solid tank vent to the local venting system only.
Separators
• If one or more separators are connected to a solids tank, the nominal sizes DN
from the following table must be used.
Separators Solids tank venting

per solids DN in mm
tank ...SD 2 ...SD 6 ...SD 18 ...SD 35 ...SD 60
1 50 80 80 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150
...SE 5 ...SE 10 ...SE 20 ...SE 40 ...SE 80 ...SE 120

...SE 30
1 50 80 80 125 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150 150
• When combining separator models at a solids tank, the total number of all sepa-
rators must be used as a basis and the nominal width DN of the largest model
must be used.
Separators with sludge transfer units (STU)

• If one or several separators with sludge transfer unit (STU) are connected to the
venting system, the standard tank vents of the STU must be equipped with ex-
tensions in accordance with the following table. The extension must, if possible,
be executed from the existing pipe socket or at the latest from the hose piece
supplied.
Separators Solids tank venting

per solids DN in mm
tank ...SD 2 ...SD 6 ...SD 18 ...SD 35 ...SD 60
1 50 80 80 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150
…SE 5 …SE 10 …SE 20 …SE 40 …SE 80 …SE 120

…SE 30
1 50 80 80 125 125 125
2 50 100 100 150 150 150
≥3 80 125 125 150 150 150
• When combining separator models with STU to a manifold, the total number of
all separators must be used as a basis and the nominal width DN of the largest
model must be used.

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
Example:
2 separators OSE 40 with STU and 1 separator OSE 10 with STU at common man-
ifold.
 Extend tank venting for each separator OSE 40 to DN 125.
 Extend tank venting for each separator OSE 10 to DN 80.
 Prepare manifold for 3 tank ventings in DN 150.
9.2.2 Set-up of the solids tank venting

The nominal width DN is specified in the table above (see chapter "Solids tank
venting").
. Solids tank with one separator
Fig. 55
Solids tank with several separators
Fig. 56
Solids tank with surge plates

A solids tank with surge plates is required
if the movements of the ship cause a
• If surge plates are used, each individ-

malfunction in the level monitoring.
• The vent lines must be joined.

ual section must be vented.
Fig. 57

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
9.3 Solids discharge lines
• IMPORTANT: This piping arrange-

ment is not permissible.
Fig. 58
• The solid discharge lines must, if pos-
• The solids discharge line must always

sible, always be vertical.
• The solid discharge line must never be

end 50 – 100 mm below the tank top.
located below the maximum level in
• The maximum level in the solids tank

the solids tank.
must be monitored with the aid of a
• The pipeline network of the solids dis-

level switch.
charge lines must be attached without
• The length of 2 m may not be exceed-

reduction and with compensators.
Fig. 59
ed without trace heating.
• If there is a deviation from the vertical

arrangement, an angle of 45° must not
be exceeded.
Fig. 60

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
9.3.1 Solids discharge lines with shut-off flap
Fig. 61
• A shut-off valve (4) in the solids discharge line (1) prevents vapours from enter-
ing a stationary separator while another separator is operating.
• If more than one separator is used for a solids tank, a shut-off flap (4) must be
installed in the solids discharge line (1).
GEA Westfalia Separator recommends monitoring the shut-off flap (4) by means
of a limit switch. It prevents the separator from being switched on when the shut-
off flap is closed.
• When several separators or separators with sludge transfer unit are connected
to a vent manifold, a shut-off flap (4) must be installed in the solids discharge
line (1). Alternatively, the shut-off flap (4) can also be fitted in the respective line
of the solids tank vent (3) of the STU.
• GEA Westfalia Separator recommends monitoring the shut-off flap (4) by means
of a limit switch. It prevents the separator from being switched on when the shut-
off flap is closed.
• Shut-off flaps (4) are not included in the standard supply schedule of GEA West-
falia Separator. They can, however, be delivered by GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Centri-Packs kids or modules delivered with a solids tank from GEA Westfalia
Separator and equipped with more than one separator are always delivered with
shut-off flaps.

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
9.3.2 Standard installation of shut-off flaps
...SD- and ...SE separators
Fig. 62
1 Solids tank discharge line

2 Hood and frame drain
3 Solids tank venting
4 Shut-off flap
• IMPORTANT: The shut-off flaps must be open during separator operation.

• The discharge lines (1) and (2) must be installed as shown in the illustration be-
low.
• The solids discharge line must always

Shut-off flap
• For the dimension X see chapter "Sol-

end below the solids tank cover.
ids discharge lines", first figure.
Fig. 63
1 Shut-off flap
2 Flange
3 Pipe
4 Hose (is delivered with the separator)
5 Solids tank cover

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Solids tank
9.4 Operating and dirty water discharge lines

• IMPORTANT: Operating and dirty water discharges may not be led into public
sewage systems, draining ditches and waters.
- Comply with environmental protection legislation.
• The discharge lines for operating and waste water can be conveyed into a sepa-
rate tank for oily water.
• The pipeline network for the operating and waste water must be attached verti-
cally, without reduction and with vibration compensators. There is no upper
length limit.
Separators ...SD, ...SE and OTC
• The water discharge must be im-

mersed (longitudinal / transverse incli-
• The dimension h1 is:

nation)
- min. 50 mm for shipboard operation,

- min. 20 mm for onshore operation,
Fig. 64

• If a siphon is installed, the frame drain

does not have to be immersed to un-
der the minimum fill level, as a liquid
• Dimensions h1 and h2 are given in the

seal is ensured.
table below.
Fig. 65

4 Siphon for hood and frame drain

Solids tank 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
Siphon length (mm)

Separator
h1 h2
...SD 6
200 150
...SD 18
...SD 35
300 200
...SD 60
...SE 5
...SE 10
200 150
...SE 20
...SE 30
...SE 40 200
...SE 80 300
250
...SE 120
…TC 2 - -
…TC 3 - -
…TC 5 - -
…TC 10 - -
…TC 20 - -

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Electrical installation
10 Electrical installation
10.1 Installing control cabinets ........................................................................ 78

10.1.1 Installation site and operation .................................................................. 78
10.1.2 Control cabinet D10 ................................................................................. 79
10.1.3 Control cabinet E40 ................................................................................. 81
10.1.4 Control cabinet IO .................................................................................... 83
10.1.5 Assembly example for control cabinets ................................................... 85
10.1.6 Electrical connection ................................................................................ 85
10.1.7 Type of protection .................................................................................... 86
10.1.8 External voltages ..................................................................................... 86
10.1.9 Shipboard operation ................................................................................ 86
10.1.10 Onshore operation ................................................................................... 87
10.2 EMC-compliant installation ...................................................................... 87
10.3 Solenoid valves........................................................................................ 88
10.3.1 Solenoid valve block ................................................................................ 88
10.3.2 Sensor block ............................................................................................ 89
10.3.3 Terminal box ............................................................................................ 90
10.4 Double thermometer PT 100 ................................................................... 91
10.5 Electric motors and sensors .................................................................... 92
10.6 Execution of the lectrical installation........................................................ 93
10.6.1 Voltage equalization of the separator ...................................................... 93
10.6.2 Equipotential bonding of the electric heater ............................................ 94
10.6.3 Equipotential bonding of the foundation plate ......................................... 95
10.6.4 Equipotential bonding of the control cabinet ........................................... 96
10.7 Electric motors procured by the customer ............................................... 97

Electrical installation 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18
10.1 Installing control cabinets

• Control cabinets may only contain electrical components, assemblies or systems
specified in the circuit diagram.
• Incorrect and improper installation discharges the supplier from his warranty ob-
ligation.
10.1.1 Installation site and operation

• The control cabinets may not be installed in the open.
• Select the installation site so that
- the control cabinet does not come in contact with dust and corrosive atmos-
phere.
- the control cabinet is not installed in an excessively moist or damp environ-
ment.
- the sun does not shine on the control panel or the displays since this would
make operation and monitoring more difficult.
- heating up of the controls is avoided.
• If necessary, check screwed connections and plug-in connections for reliable

contact.
• Connect the thermostat-controlled control cabinet heating to an external energy
source and switch on to avoid damage.
• The control cabinet heating must be switched on before the temperature drops
below the dew point.
Dewing can occur during the night which is not good for the electrical compo-
nents.
• Check that the mains voltage and frequency correspond to the connection data
of the control system (see nameplate).
Permissible installation and operation data:
Voltage fluctuations +/- 10 % of the mains voltage

Frequency fluctuations +/- 2 % of the mains frequency
o o
Ambient temperatures + 5 to + 45 C (41 to 113 F)
o o
Air humidity max. 50 % at 40 C (104 F)
o o
max. 90 % at 20 C (68 F)
Installation height up to 1000 m above sea level
o o
Transport temperatures – 25 to + 55 C (–13 to 131 F)

10.1.2 Control cabinet D10
Control cabinet configuration (front

view)
Fig. 66
1 Interlock
2 Control unit
3 OFF/ON keys for separator
4 OFF/ON keys for product feed pump
5 Manual swiches for optional function
6 Main switch

Control cabinet configuration (inner

view)
Fig. 67
1 Isolator amplifier for analog output (option)

2 WMS-Relais (WMS = Water Content Monitoring System), if applicable
3 Full motor protection module
4 Interface relay
5 Auxiliary contactor
6 Main contactor
7 Current transformer
8 Power supply for PLC and valves
9 Connection strip
10 Control transformer for heating and air (option)
11 Main switch
12 Control voltage transformer (option)
13 Motor protection switch
14 Safety cut out

10.1.3 Control cabinet E40
Control cabinet configuration (front

view)
Fig. 68
1 Interlock
2 Control unit E40
5 MANUAL/0/AUTOMATIC selector switch for solids pump (option)
6 Main switch

Control cabinet configuration (inner

view)
Fig. 69
1 Door locking devices (180°)

2 CPU / expansion modules
3 Power supply unit (24 V DC)
4 Switch amplifier (optional)
5 Interface relay
6 Duct for wiring
7 Terminal strip
8 Motor starter
9 Contactor
11 Safety cutout
12 Control transformer (option)

10.1.4 Control cabinet IO
Fig. 70 Control cabinet configuration (front view)
1 Interlock
2 Control unit IO
5 MANUAL/0/AUTOMATIC selector switch for solids pump (option)
6 Main switch

Fig. 71 Control cabinet configuration (inner view)
1 Door locking devices (180°)

2 CPU / expansion modules
3 Power supply unit (24 V DC)
4 Switch amplifier (optional)
5 Interface relay
6 Duct for wiring
7 Terminal strip
8 Motor starter
9 Contactor
11 Safety cutout
12 Control transformer (option)

10.1.5 Assembly example for control cabinets
Fig. 72
1 Gasket (10.5 x 23 x 5)
2 Threaded bolt (M 8) (embedded in the wall)
3 Washer
4 Rear panel of the control cabinet
5 Washer
6 Wall
• The control cabinet

- must be allocated to the respective separator by means of a code.
- must be mounted on a frame or a wall in the vicinity of the separator.
• It must be possible to open the control cabinet door wide so that the door fas-
tener can lock in place.
• Select the installation site so that
- the control cabinet can be easily operated and monitored.
- an ambient temperature of 50 °C (122 °F) is not exceeded. If necessary, en-
sure that an adequate supply of fresh air is present.
• If the control cabinet is mounted on a wall, a wall clearance of 20 mm must be
observed to achieve a vibration-free fastening arrangement.
• Although the buttons and switches as well as the electronic control unit are pro-
tected against moisture by the protective foil and door seal, the control cabinet
may nevertheless not be installed in an excessively damp and moist environ-
ment.
• IMPORTANT: To keep the temperature constant inside the control unit after
starting, the main switch should remain switched on even when the separator is
at a standstill.
10.1.6 Electrical connection

• The control system is designed for the connection voltage specified on the
nameplate in the control cabinet.
• In the case of a version without motor starter, the rated connection voltage is
115 VAC or 230 VAC, which must be protected by a 6-A slow blow fuse.

10.1.7 Type of protection

• Type of protection IP 54 applies as a minimum for control cabinets set up in the
vicinity of the separator or skid.
• Cable ducts, fans or other openings made afterwards must comply with the said
type of protection as a minimum requirement.
10.1.8 External voltages

• The deenergized contacts of the output modules
- carry foreign voltage (even if the main switch is off!).
- can be determined by the orange cable.
- can be used up to 250 VAC for external control systems.
• A cross-section of 1.5 mm Cu is appropriate for all control lines and interlocking
2
lines.
10.1.9 Shipboard operation

• The standard control cabinets are equipped with halogen-free, oil-resistant plas-
tic.
• Only cables of type "MGCH“ conforming to DIN 89158.
• All cables must meet the test requirements for the spread of fire when bundling
cables in accordance with IEC 60332-3 or IEEE 45-18.13.
• All cable materials must be halogen-free in accordance with IEC 60754-1 and
must not generate toxic gases in accordance with IEC 60754 and no corrosive
gases in accordance with IEC 60754-2.
• All cables must be approved by the responsible classification society.
• Insulation resistance 0.6/1KV
• Standard: Nexans MPRX 0.6/1kV
• Connecting and control cables can be laid jointly without clearance
• IMPORTANT: In the case of HFO separators in series operation, the signal ex-
change between the control cabinets must be in accordance with the circuit dia-
gram (see chapter "Electromagnetically compatible installation").
Cable glands for shipboard installation
Female Cable outer Grounding device +

Cable gland
thread Ø (mm) Design of the inner parts
M 16 x 1,5 4 – 11 M 24 x 1,5
M 20 x 1,5 8 – 13 M 24 x 1,5
M 25 x 1,5 11 – 17 M 36 x 1,5
M 32 x 1,5 15 – 21 M 36 x 1,5
M 40 x 1,5 19 – 28 M 36 x 1,5

10.1.10 Onshore operation

• The local regulations and guidelines of the plant operator must be complied with.
• "Ölflex" cables are normally used and "NSSHÖU" for outer installation.
• Commercially available cable glands can be used.
• Separate cable routing must be used for connecting and control lines.
• Cable entries with plastic or metal glands are permitted.
10.2 EMC-compliant installation

• The control cabinet is designed to meet requirements for electromagnetic com-
patibility (EMC).
• The following must be taken into consideration for EMC-compliant electrical in-
stallation:
- Grounding straps
- Equipotential bonding
- Shielding of cables
- Separate cable routing
- Use of cut-off elements in the case of inductance
• In the case of HFO series operation, procedure must be in accordance with the
circuit diagram below.
Fig. 73
A Switch ON
B Control cabinet HFO No. 1
C Control cabinet HFO No. 2
D Connecting terminals
F Cable type
E Customer shipboard installation
• IMPORTANT: use only data cable UNITRONIC-BUS-FD P L2/F.I.P

2
(1 x 2 x 0.25 mm + screen).

• IMPORTANT: Do not lay data cables directly next to connecting cables since
this can cause problems with the electromagnetic compatibility.
• Pay attention to the different software statuses of the control system.
- 1. Unit has the MPI addresses 1 / 2
• Faulty or broken cable connections are displayed with error code no. 551.
- Check all connections.
10.3 Solenoid valves

Only original solenoid valves with integrated suppressor diodes and protection
against battery discharge in the connection head may be used for the filling, dis-
placement and operating water lines (see chapter "Use only original spare parts").
10.3.1 Solenoid valve block
This diagram shows an original valve

block which is used in filling, displace-
ment and operating water lines.
Fig. 74
Connections:
Fig. 75
A Connecting terminal + 24 V DC
B Connecting terminal + 0 V DC
C Grounding
D Status LED

10.3.2 Sensor block

The sensor block serves to measure pressure, to detect oil or water and to control
the product flows. Depending on the separator version, it can consist of the parts
set out below that are wired to the terminal box.
Fig. 76
1 Pressure transmitter (product discharge line)

2 Pressure transmitter (unitrolplus system – SMS-function)
3 2/2-way solenoid valve (water discharge)
4 2/2-way solenoid valve (circuit)
5 Water detector (unitrolplus system – WMS function)
6 Test flange (product discharge pressure)
7 Test flange (circulation pressure unitrolplus system)
8 Terminal strip and cabling

10.3.3 Terminal box

• All solenoid valves and supervisory equipment are installed ready-to-connect in
a local terminal box on the separator.
• The connection to the control cabinet must be created with the aid of a connect-
ing cable in accordance with the order-specific circuit diagram.
Separator without sensor block (example)
Fig. 77

Separator with sensor block (example)
Fig. 78
10.4 Double thermometer PT 100
The double thermometer (1) serves to

monitor and display the temperature of
the dirty oil after the pre-heater. It also
regulates the required separating tem-
perature.
IMPORTANT: The double thermometer

(1) is used only in conjunction with a
control system.
Fig. 79

Connection plan
• The double thermometer (1) is inte-

grated in the 3/2-way piston control
• All sensors must be installed so that

valve.
they are continuously flushed with oil.
Fig. 80
10.5 Electric motors and sensors

• Connection of electric motors and sensors with the aid of a cable loop enables
easy replacement and function testing of the components (see examples).
Example 1: Electric motor
Fig. 81

Example 2: Sensor
Fig. 82
10.6 Execution of the lectrical installation

The following standards and guidelines must be taken into consideration in the
electrical installation unless the specifications and standards of classification socie-
ties have to be met:
• EN 60204-1 or VDE 0113-1
Safety of machines - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General re-
quirements
• Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EC
• Electromagnetic Compatibility 89/336/EC
• …
10.6.1 Voltage equalization of the separator
IMPORTANT: Protective grounding is a

measure which in the event of a fault,
routes a hazardous contact voltage to
earth.
• The separator must always be

grounded.
The grounding connection is marked
with this symbol (see separator frame).

• Including the insulated installed sepa-

rator in the voltage equalization of the
installation is done via the voltage
equalization connection on the motor
side.
• If there is no protective conductor in-

corporated in multi-core cables (e.g., in
the armoured marine cable), the drive
motor must also be integrated in the
equipotential bonding.
The same applies for pump motors and
electric pre-heaters.
Fig. 83
, • The cross-section of the equipotential

bonding cable, which is normally insu-
lated green-yellow, is connected to the
largest external equipotential bonding
cable in the customer network.
• In practice, table 1 from EN 60204-1 is

used for this.
• GEA Westfalia Separator chooses:

2 2
10 mm < S < 25 mm Cu
Fig. 84
10.6.2 Equipotential bonding of the electric heater
Fig. 85

10.6.3 Equipotential bonding of the foundation plate
• The customer must fit a marked con-

necting bolt to the foundation frame for
equipotential bonding.
Fig. 86
Fig. 87

10.6.4 Equipotential bonding of the control cabinet

• The connection is via the PE bar or terminal inside the control cabinet to the
frame connection.
PE connection
Fig. 88
PE connection
Fig. 89
PE connection
Fig. 90

10.7 Electric motors procured by the customer

• When the motors are procured by the customer, they must have the following
specifications and comply with the following standards:
Design IM B5* according to IEC 34 – Part 7)

Rating Classification according to IEC 72 – Teil 2
Type of protection IM B5 according to IEC 34 – Part 5
Vibration severity Quality grade N * / S *(according to IEC 34 –
Part 14)
Full key balanced * / Half-key balanced *
Synchronous speed 50 Hz 60 Hz
3000 * / 1500 * 3600 * / 1800 *
Type of cooling 1C411 according to IEC 34 – Part 6
Flange sizes according to IEC 72
Shaft sizes according to IEC 72
Direction of rotation According to IEC 34 – Part 8
Insulation material class F according to IEC 34 – Part 1
Motor protection PTC thermistors as full motor protection
(PTC = Positive Temperature Coefficient)
• The PTC resistors must be fitted in the end

windings - one per strand.
• PTC resistors – temperature feelers which
are mounted on the winding package from
the outside are not acceptable.
Operating mode SI according to IEC 34 – Part 1
* depending on the separator type
IMPORTANT: Consequential damage to the separator caused by motors provided

by the customer cannot be asserted as warranty claims with GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator.

Note
注释
Noter
Notas
Notes
‫وﺗﻼﺣظ‬
Notater
Notatki
Notizen
Notities
Бележки
Pastabos
Märkmed
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot

2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Spare parts
11 Spare parts

Spare parts 2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18


marking shown.
Fig. 91


2058-9601-020 / 16.01.18 Spare parts

We live our values.
GEA Germany
59302 Oelde, Germany Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS ACCORDING TO DIN ISO 10628-2 (DIN EN 62424)
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE IN ANLEHNUNG AN DIN ISO 10628-2 (DIN EN 62424)
GEA EQUIPMENT HEATER AND COOLING EQUIPMENT PUMPS / PUMPEN SEPARATION EQUIPMENT MIXING AND MILLING EQUIPMENT
WÄRMEAUSTAUSCHER ABSCHEIDER MISCHER UND MÜHLE
DEFOAMING PUMP PUMP (GENERAL)

STATIC MIXER
ENTSCHÄUMUNGSPUMPE PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER PUMPE (GENEREL) DOUBLE BASKET FILTER
STATISCHER MISCHER
PLATTENWÄRMEAUSTAUSCHER DOPPELTER KORBFILTER
SEPARATOR
BELT DRIVE
FINISCHER CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
DYNAMIC MIXER
NACHWÄSCHER KREISELPUMPE
DYNAMISCHER MISCHER
CONVEYING
TUBE BUNDLE HEAT EXCHANGER
FLOUR MIXER ROHRBÜNDELWÄRMEAUSTAUSCHER DIAPHRAGM PUMP FÖRDERUNG
MEMBRANPUMPE MALAXEUR
MEHLMISCHER
SCREW CONVEYOR MALAXEUR
SCHNECKENFÖRDERER PHI_INSERTPOINT
SEPARATOR ECCENTRIC SCREW PUMP

GEAR DRIVE VESSELS / BEHÄLTER WASSERKÜHLER EXZENTERSCHNECKENPUMPE AGITATOR
CONVEYOR BELT
WATER COOLER RÜHRWERK
FÖRDERBAND
PISTON PUMP AGITATOR

VESSEL BASIC SYMBOL
BEHÄLTER BASIS SYMBOL
KOLBENPUMPE CONVEYOR BELT RÜHRWERK
FÖRDERBAND
AIR COOLER
LUFTKÜHLER
DISPLACEMENT PUMP
VERDRÄNGUNGSPUMPE MILL
SEPARATOR MÜHLE
DIRECT DRIVE COMPRESSING
VERDICHTER
CONICAL BOTTOM VESSEL VACUUM PUMP
STEAM / WATER COIL
BEHÄLTER MIT KONISCHEM BODEN VAKUUMPUMPE
DAMPF / WASSER ROHRSCHLANGE
COMPRESSOR
VERDICHTER
STEAM JET INJECTOR
STRAHLPUMPE
HEAT EXCHANGER VENTILATOR
WÄRMEAUSTAUSCHER VENTILATOR
DOME ROOF VESSEL
SEPARATOR BEHÄLTER MIT DOMDACH GEAR PUMP
INTEGRATED DIRECT DRIVE ZAHNRADPUMPE
M
SPIRAL HEATER
SCREW PUMP
SPIRALWÄRMETAUSCHER MOTOR / MOTOR
SCHRAUBENSPINDELPUMPE
HORIZONTAL VESSEL
BEHÄLTER HORIZONTAL
DECANTER ELECTRIC MOTOR
M ELEKTROMOTOR
GREASE PUMP
TUBULAR PREHEATER
FETTSCHMIERPUMPE Processing functions for (N) actuators - motors
BALANCE TANK RÖHRENVORWÄRMER
AUSGLEICHSBEHÄLTER Verarbeitungsfunktionen für (N) Aktoren - Motoren
NS On / Off
An/ Aus
ROTARY BRUSH STRAINER CYCLONE FC normal overload For small loads
DREHBÜRSTENSIEB ZYKLON NCN
FU Normal Overload Bei geringen Belastungen
350 mm
TUBULAR PREHEATER NCH FC high overload Preset

RÖHRENVORWÄRMER FU High Overload Voreinstellung
OPERATING WATER SIPHON
STEUERWASSERSIPHON
350 mm
ELECTRIC PREHEATER
ELEKTROVORWÄRMER
Aktualisierung der Symbole D. Bregenhorn
H Updating the symbols 04.05.2018
SETTLING VESSEL
ABSETZBEHÄLTER Revision Revisionsbeschreibung Rev.-Datum Rev.-Name
Revision Description of Revision Rev.-Date Rev.-Name
Datum Name Beschreibung Zeichnungs.-Nr.
Date Name Description Drawing-No.
gez.
created 05.05.2015 2323VE GEA Group
D-59302 Oelde
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS 9901-8104-300
Copyright reserved Blatt / Blätter Format
letzte Änderung We reserve all rights on this drawing Sheet / Sheets Size
last modified 05.07.2017 BREG Für diese Zeichnung behalten GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE 1/7 A2
wir uns alle Rechte vor.
SYMBOLS AND CODE LETTERS FOR MSR ACCORDING TO DIN EN 62424 - CATEGORY
BILDZEICHEN UND KENNBUCHSTABEN FÜR MSR IN ANLEHNUNG AN DIN EN 62424 - KATEGORIE
Code letter /
Kenn- Application Verwendung
buchstabe
Analysis Analyse PCE CATEGORY PCE PROCESSING (NEXT LETTER)
A
PCE KATEGORIE PCE VERARBEITUNGSFUNKTION (FOLGEBUCHSTABEN)
Burner control, Brennersteuerung,
B flame monitoring Flammenüberwachung A ANALYSIS
Freely usable ANALYSE
C Frei verwendbar
N S T AH PART OF MCC OR PLC B BURNER CONTROL/ FLAME DETECTION
D Density Dichte xxx-9-xxx/M1 xxx-9-xxx FUNKTION IN DER STEUERUNG BRENNERSTEUERUNG/ FLAMMENÜBERWACHUNG
E Electrical voltage Elektrische Spannung D DENSITY
DICHTE
F Flow rate Durchfluss TE LOCAL MEASURING ELEMENT E ELECTRICAL VOLTAGE
G Distance, length, position Abstand, Länge, Stellung
M xxx-9-xxx/B1 LOKALER MESSAUFNEHMER ELEKTRISCHE SPANNUNG
F FLOW
Manual input, DURCHFLUSS
H Handeingabe, Handgriff
manual intervention G DISTANCE, LENGHT, POSITION, STRETCHING
WEG, LÄNGE, POSITION, AUSDEHNUNG
I Electrical current Elektrischer Strom
H MANUAL
J Electrical output Elektrische Leistung MANUELL
K Time-based functions Zeitbasierte Funktionen MEASURING AND CONTROL EXAMPLES I CURRENT

ELEKTRISCHER STROM
MESS - UND REGELUNGSBEISPIELE
L Filling level Füllstand J POWER
LEISTUNG
M Humidity Feuchte 0 - xx m³/h 0 - xx bar K TIME
ZEIT
•
Regulating member FI PI
▲
N Stellglied ( Motor) ■
(motor) xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx
L LEVEL
NIVEAU
0 Optical measurement Optische Messung xxx-9-xxx/B1
xxx-9-xxx/B1 DN M MOISTURE
DN FEUCHTIGKEIT
P Pressure Druck
N ACTUATOR (MOTOR)
Q Quantity or number Menge oder Anzahl 0 - xx m³/h STELLGLIED (MOTOR)
R Radiation variables Strahlungsgrößen

FICALAH
O OPTICAL
xxx-9-xxx OPTISCH
S
Speed, speed of rotation, Geschwindigkeit, Drehzahl, GSH/GSL FIT P PRESSURE
frequency Frequenz YC1 xxx-9-xxx/B1 DRUCK
T Temperature Temperatur Q QUANTITY

xxx-7-xxx DN MENGE, ZÄHLER
U Do not use Nicht benutzen DN
NO R RADIATION QUANTITY
0 - xx bar
STRAHLUNGSMENGE
V Vibration, oscillation Vibratin, Schwingung PAL S SPEED, rpm, FREQUENCY
xxx-9-xxx GESCHWINDIGKEIT, rpm, FREQUENZ
W Weight, mass Gewicht, Masse
PIS T TEMPERATURE
X Other variables *1 Sonstige Größen *1 xxx-9-xxx/B1
TEMPERATUR
Regulating member DN V VIBRATION
Y Stellglied (Ventil) VIBRATION
(valve)
W WEIGHT, MASS
Z Freely usable Frei verwendbar GEWICHT, MASSE
Y ACTUATOR (VALVE)
STELLGLIED (VENTIL)
LOCAL DISPLAY RELEVANT TO GMP
•
LOKALE ANZEIGE GMP RELEVANT
CENTRAL CONTROL CENTER RELEVANT TO SAFETY

ZENTRALER LEITSTAND
▲ SICHERHEITSRELEVANT
H Aktualisierung der Symbole
Updating the symbols 04.05.2018 D. Bregenhorn
Revision Revisionsbeschreibung Rev.-Datum Rev.-Name

LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
LOKALER STEUERSCHRANK ■ RELEVANT TO QUALITY
QUALITÄTSRELEVANT
Datum
Date
Name
Name
Beschreibung
Description
Zeichnungs.-Nr.
Drawing-No.
gez.
D-59302 Oelde
SYMBOLS AND CODE LETTERS FOR MSR ACCORDING TO DIN EN 62424 - PROCESS
BILDZEICHEN UND KENNBUCHSTABEN FÜR MSR IN ANLEHNUNG AN DIN EN 62424 - PROZESS
Kenn- Appplication Verwendung

buchstabe
A Alarm, message Alarm, Meldung PCE CATEGORY PCE PROCESSING (NEXT LETTER)
PCE KATEGORIE PCE VERARBEITUNGSFUNKTION (FOLGEBUCHSTABEN)
B Limit, restriction Beschränkung, Eingrenzung
A ALARM/ NOTIFICATION
C Control Regelung ALARM/ MELDUNG
D Difference Differenz N S T AH PART OF MCC OR PLC B LIMITATION / DEFINING
xxx-9-xxx/M1 xxx-9-xxx FUNKTION IN DER STEUERUNG BESCHRÄNKUNG/ EINGRENZUNG
E Element Element
C CONTROLLER
Ratio Verhältnis REGLER
F
TE LOCAL MEASURING ELEMENT DIFFERENCE
G Not applicable Nicht anwendbar M xxx-9-xxx/B1 LOKALER MESSAUFNEHMER
D
DIFFERENZ
Top limit value, oberer Grenzwert, E ELEMENT
H on, open ELEMENT
an, offen
Analogue display Analoganzeige F PROPORTION
I PROPORTION
J Not applicable Nicht anwendbar H UPPER LIMIT/ ON/ OPEN
OBERER GRENZWERT/ AN/ OFFEN
K Not applicable Nicht anwendbar MEASURING AND CONTROL EXAMPLES I INDICATION
Bottom limit value, unterer Grenzwert, MESS - UND REGELUNGSBEISPIELE ANZEIGE
L aus, geschlossen LOWER LIMIT/ OFF / CLOSED
off, closed L
UNTERER GRENZWERT/ AUS/ GESCHLOSSEN
M Not applicable Nicht anwendbar 0 - xx m³/h 0 - xx bar
O LOCAL OR PCS STATUS OF BINARY SIGNALS
•
FI PI
N Not applicable Nicht anwendbar ▲ LOKALE ODER PCS STATUSANZEIGE VON BINÄRSIGNALEN
xxx-9-xxx xxx-9-xxx ■
lokale oder Q SUMMARY
Local or PCS status xxx-9-xxx/B1 SUMME
0 PCS Statusanzeige xxx-9-xxx/B1 DN
display of binary signals
von Binärsignalen DN R RECORDED VALUE
AUFGEZEICHNETER WERT
P Not applicable Nicht anwendbar 0 - xx m³/h S BINARY CONTROL FUNCTION OR SWITCHING FUNCTION
FICALAH BINÄRE STEUERUNGSFUNKTION ODER SCHALTFUNKTION
Q Integral, sum Integral, Summe
T TRANSMITTER
xxx-9-xxx
R Recorded value Aufgezeichneter Wert GSH/GSL FIT TRANSMITTER

YC1
Y CALCULATOR FUNCTION
xxx-9-xxx/B1
Binary control function Binäre Steuerfunktionen RECHENFUNKTION
S or switching function oder Schaltfunktion xxx-7-xxx DN BINARY CONTROL FUNCTION OR SWITCHING FUNCTION
(not relevant to safety) (nicht sicherheitsrelevant) DN
NO Z (RELEVANT SAFETY)
0 - xx bar BINÄRE STEUERUNGSFUNKTION ODER SCHALTFUNKTION
T Transmitter Transmitter PAL (SICHERHEITSRELEVANT)
xxx-9-xxx
U Not applicable Nicht anwendbar
PIS
V Not applicable Nicht anwendbar xxx-9-xxx/B1
DN
W Not applicable Nicht anwendbar
X *1 *1
Y Calculating function Rechnerfunktion

Binary control function Binäre Steuerfunktionen Aktualisierung der Symbole
H 04.05.2018 D. Bregenhorn
Z or switching function oder Schaltfunktion Updating the symbols
( relevant to safety) (sicherheitsrelevant) Revision

Revision
Revisionsbeschreibung
Description of Revision
Rev.-Datum
Rev.-Date
Rev.-Name
Rev.-Name
gez.
D-59302 Oelde
ACCESSORIEST LIST
Example/ Beispiel: 1 60 - 3 - 001 / M1
LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4 ANHÄNGE
Accessory tag: 1 letter / Zubehör: 1 Buchstabe
Count number: 1 digit / Zählnummer: 1 Zahl LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4
LEVEL 3 / EBENE 3 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

B1
COMPONENT TAGGING Component tag: 1 digit / Komponentennummer: 1 Zahl
MESSGERÄTE
Count number: 3 digits / Zählnummer: 3 Zahlen MOTOR
KOMPONENTENBESCHREIBUNG M1
MOTOR
LEVEL 2 / EBENE 2 ILUMINATION
L1
Subsection: 2 digits / Untersektion: 2 Zahlen BELEUCHTUNG
LEVEL 1 / EBENE 1 GSH / GSL LIMIT SWITCHES

GRENZSCHALTER
Section: 1 digit / Sektion: 1 Zahl
YS1 PILOT VALVES - OPEN / CLOSE
STEUERVENTILE - AUF / ZU
YC1 REGULATING VALVES

STELLARMATUR GEREGELT
YD DIRECT ACTUATED SOLEVOID VALVE

DIREKT GESTEUERTES MAGNETVENTIL
Example/ Beispiel: FAT - 160 PL004 - D4404S52 - WI40 HTe
LEVEL 6 / EBENE 6
Heat tracing specification: 3 letters
Begleitheizungsspezifikation: 3 Buchstaben
LEVEL 5 / EBENE 5
Insulation specification / Isolierspezifikation
Insulation type: 2 letters / Isoliertyp: 2 Buchstaben
Insulation thickness in mm: 2 digits / Isolierstärke in mm: 2 Zahlen
LEVEL 4 / EBENE 4
PIPING DESCRIPTION Piping specification / Rohrleitungsspezifikation
Standard: letter(s) / Norm: Buchstabe(n)
ROHRLEITUNGSBESCHREIBUNG Material: digits / Material: Zahlen
Connection type: letter(s) / Anschlussart: Buchstabe(n)
Seal material: digits / Dichtungswerkstoff: Zahlen
Note: project-specific (large projects)
Hinweis: projektspezifisch (Großprojekte) LEVEL 3 / EBENE 3
Pipe line number: PL + 3 digits
Rohrleitungsnummer: PL + 3 Zahlen
LEVEL 2 / EBENE 2
Section + subsection number: 3 digits
Sektion + Untersektion Nummer: 3 Zahlen
LEVEL 1 / EBENE 1
Product short code: 2 to 4 letters
Medium Kurzzeichen: 2 bis 4 Buchstaben


gez.
D-59302 Oelde
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - PIPE FITTINS, VALVES
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - LEITUNGSFITTINGE, ARMATUREN
Actuator, manually operated (secured)
Actuator with rotating system, general

Stellantrieb mit rotierendem System,
Stellantrieb, handbetätigt (gesichert)
Stellantrieb mit Elektromagnet

Stellantrieb mit schrägen Sitz
Stellantrieb mit Elektromotor

Actuator, manually operated
Actuator with electromagnet

PIPE FITTINGS
Stellantrieb mit Schwimmer

Actuator with electric motor
Stellantrieb mit Membrane

Actuator with slanted seat
Valves with safety function Non return fittings
Stellantrieb, handbetätigt
Actuator with diaphragm

Rückschlagarmaturen LEITUNGSFITTINGE
Stellantrieb mit Kolben

Armaturen mit Sicherheitsfunktionen
Stellantrieb mit Feder

Actuator with spring
Actuator with piston
Stellantrieb mit Lift
Actuator with float

Non return fitting
Actuator with lift

Safety valve Rückschlagarmatur
Sicherheitsventil COMPENSATOR
allgemein
KOMPENSATOR
Non return valve
Safety valve Rückschlagventil HOSE
Sicherheitsventil
Valves symbols Non-return flap SCHLAUCH
Symbole Armaturen M Rückschlagklappe
DIRT STRAINER
Double check valve SCHMUTZFÄNGER
Shut-off fitting (general) M Doppelrückschlagventil
Needle valve RESTRICTION ORIFICE
Absperrarmatur (allgemein)
Nadelventil
BLENDE
Gate valve M Needle valve
SIGHT GLASS
Absperrschieber Nadelventil
SCHAUGLAS
Shut-off valve M
GERADE
Absperrventil SIGHT GLASS WITH LIGHT

Pressure valves SCHAUGLAS MIT BELEUCHTUNG
Druckventile
Shut-off flap M
IN-LINE HOUSING
Absperrklappe
PI IN-LINE GEHÄUSE
Stopcock M
Self acting back-pressure regulator
Absperrhahn Constant-pressure valve PULSATION DAMPER
internal sensing
Konstantdruckventil
PI Selbsttätiges Druckminderventil PULSATIONSDÄMPFER
Diaphragm valve M
Membranventil
STEAM TRAP
KONDENSATABSCHEIDER
Control valve M
Regelventil
PI FUNNEL
Pressure reducer with strainer TRICHTER
Pinch valve
Quetschventil Druckminderventil mit Filter
SPRAY BALL
ECK
Angle shut-off fitting PI SPRÜHKOPF

Pressure reducer with strainer and oiler
Absperrarmatur in Eckform
Druckminderventil mit Filter und Öler TRAP
ABSCHEIDER
Three-way shut-off fitting
PI
Dreiwegearmatur AIR FILTER
Maintenance unit
Wartungseinheit LUFTFILTER
Three-way shut-off valve
DREIWEG
Absperr-Dreiwegeventil OIL FILTER

ÖLFILTER
Three-way stopcock
Safety position
Dreiwegehahn
Sicherheitsposition DIFFERENTIAL METERING PISTON
T - Shut-off valve DOSIERKOLBEN
T - Absperrventil
NO NORMALLY OPEN STRAINER
T - Diaphragm valve FEDERÖFFNEND FILTER
T - Membranventil xxx-7-xxx xxx-7-xxx
DN DN
xxx-7-xxx
NC NORMALLY CLOSED
= NO
DN
NC
DISTRIBUTER UNIT
MULTI-
FEDERSCHLIESSEND
PORT
MULTIPORT VERTEILER
MULTIPORT = INDIFFERENT


gez.
D-59302 Oelde
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, LABELS, BREAK IDENTIFIERS
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - ROHRLEITUNG, LEITUNGSFITTINGE, BESCHRIFTUNG, TRENNSTELLEN
PIPE SYMBOLS PIPE FITTINGS BREAK IDENTIFIERS

ROHRLEITUNGSSYMBOLE LEITUNGSFITTINGE TRENNSTELLEN
PROCESS MAIN PIPE

FLANGE SET CHANGE IN PIPE LINE ID NUMBER
PROZESS HAUPTLEITUNG
FLANSCHPAAR LEITUNGSNUMMERNWECHSEL
SECONDARY PROCESS PIPE / UTILITIES PIPE

PROZESS NEBENLEITUNG TRI CLAMP
... ...
TRI CLAMP CHANGE IN PIPING CLASS
CROSSING OF PIPES ROHRKLASSENÄNDERUNG
LEITUNGSKREUZUNGEN SCREW COUPLING
VERSCHRAUBUNG
CONNECTION OF PIPES
BLIND FLANGE L ...
LEITUNGSANSCHLUSS SCOPE OF SUPPLY
BLINDFLANSCH
LIEFERGRENZE
CONCENTRIC / EXCENTRIC REDUCER
HOSE CONNECTION
KONZENTRISCHE / EXZENTRISCHE REDUZIERUNGEN
SCHLAUCHVERBINDUNG
... ...
INSTRUMENT AIR / COMPRESSED AIR SCOPE OF SUPPLY
INSTRUMENTENLUFT / DRUCKLUFT SLEEVE LIEFERGRENZE
MUFFE
NITROGEN
STICKSTOFF CONNECTOR
L ... L = GEA WS Supplied and controlled
STUTZEN
INSTRUMENTATION SIGNAL GEA WS liefert und steuert
INSTRUMENTIERUNG SIGNAL P = GEA WS supplied, Customer controlled
INJECTION NOZZEL
GEA WS liefert, Kunde steuert
FLOW DIRECTION SPRITZDÜSE
... ...
FLUSSRICHTUNG C = Customer supplied, GEA WS controlled
Kunde liefert, GEA WS steuert
2%
SLOPE INDICATOR
S = Customer supplied and controlled
PHI_INSERTPOINT PHI_INSERTPOINT
GEFÄLLE Kunde liefert und steuert
LIMITS W = --- (freely definable in project)

GRENZEN (im Projekt frei definierbar)
± 0m REFERENCE SYMBOL FOR LEVEL INDICATION

HÖHENANGABE
BOTTOM
BODEN
ISOLATION
ISOLIERUNG


gez.
D-59302 Oelde
GRAFICAL SYMBOLS - MEDIUM CONSUMPTION, CROSS REFERENCE
GRAPHISCHE SYMBOLE - MEDIENVERBRAUCH, QUERVERWEIS
MEDIUM CONSUMPTION CONNECTION TABLE

MEDIENVERBRAUCH ANSCHLUSSTABELLE
DRAWING CONNECTOR
MEDIUM ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS
CONNECTION TABLE / ANSCHLUSSTABELLE
MEDIUM
Product feed
Produktzulauf
Pos. Description / Benennung DN / INCH Execution
PRESSURE
DRUCK 3 bar 30 °C 11 11 Product feed 50 SHOULDERED CONNECTOR BUNDSTUTZEN
15 m3/h POSITION Produktzulauf DIN 11864-BS-A-53x1.5-1.4404- H3
FLOW RATE
POSITION 12 Discharge stand. milk 65 SHOULDERED CONNECTOR BUNDSTUTZEN
FÖRDERSTROM
TEMPERATURE Ablauf stand. Milch DIN 11864-BS-A-70x2.0-1.4404- H3
TEMPERATUR CONNECTION POINT FOR TABLE
13 Discharge surplus cream 40 SHOULDERED CONNECTOR BUNDSTUTZEN
ANSCHLUSSPUNKT FÜR TABELLE
Ablauf Überschußrahm DIN 11864-BS-A-41x1.5-1.4404- H3
14 CIP 25 SHOULDERED CONNECTOR BUNDSTUTZEN
CIP DIN 11864-BS-A-29x1.5-1.4404- H3
15 Cream to homogenizer 40 BLIND FERRULE BLIND-BUNDSTUTZEN
DRAWING CONNECTOR Rahm zum Homogenisator DIN 11864-1-A-RA-DN40-1.4435
ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS 16 Cream from homogenizer 50 BLIND FERRULE BLIND-BUNDSTUTZEN
MEDIUM Rahm vom Homogenisator DIN 11864-1-A-RA-DN50-1.4435
MEDIUM
Product feed 17 Raw milk feed 50 SHOULDERED CONNECTOR BUNDSTUTZEN
PRESSURE Produktzulauf 11 Rohmilch Zulauf DIN 11864-BS-A-53x1.5-1.4404- H3
DRUCK 3 bar POSITION 18 Discharge skim milk 50 SHOULDERED CONNECTOR BUNDSTUTZEN
15 m3/h POSITION Ablauf Magermilch DIN 11864-BS-A-53x1.5-1.4404- H3
FLOW RATE 30 °C
19 Discharge cream 25 SHOULDERED CONNECTOR BUNDSTUTZEN
FÖRDERSTROM CONNECTION POINT FOR TABLE Ablauf Rahm DIN 11864-BS-A-29x1.5-1.4404- H3
ANSCHLUSSPUNKT FÜR TABELLE
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATUR
POSITION MEDIUM NOMINAL DIAMETER TYPE OF CONNECTION

POSITION MEDIUM NENNWEITE ANSCHLUSSESART
CROSS REFERENCE
QUERVERWEIS
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
Product feed
FUNCTION Produktzulauf DRAWING CONNECTOR
FUNKTON Q001 ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS
PID002.A1
P&ID NO. SQUARE
P&ID NR. QUADRAT
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
Product feed DRAWING CONNECTOR
FUNCTION Produktzulauf ZEICHNUNGSANSCHLUSS Aktualisierung der Symbole
H Updating the symbols 04.05.2018 D. Bregenhorn
FUNKTON Q001
PID002.A1 Revision Revisionsbeschreibung Rev.-Datum Rev.-Name
P&ID NO. SQUARE Revision Description of Revision Rev.-Date Rev.-Name
P&ID NR. QUADRAT Datum Name Beschreibung Zeichnungs.-Nr.
gez.
D-59302 Oelde
GEA Service
Ordering of replacement parts and other consumable items for centrifuge-specific GEA
systems.
For all questions concerning technical support, the ordering of replacement parts or to
request on-site support for your systems please contact your nearest GEA agent.
IF YOU DO NOT HAVE THE CONTACT DETAILS TO HAND, YOU CAN ACCESS
THEM QUICKLY AND CONVENIENTLY AT:
gea.com/Service
If you do not have access to the internet please call our German head office in Oelde and
ask for the contact details for your location:
Tel.:+49 2522 77 – 0
To speed up your request and to ensure that we deliver the right parts please include the
following information:
- For model designation and serial number of the equipment please refer to the nameplate
- Number of parts required
- Part numbers and designations as per parts list
- Your enquiry / order number
- Preferred delivery date (from GEA works)
- Your company address
• Your complete company name or customer number
• Your invoice address (if it differs from the delivery address)
• Your delivery address
THE GEA SERVICE PHILOSOPHY

Our integrated approach to service partnership ensures long-term business success – for our
customers and for GEA.
We work alongside our customers as a partner and support you over the whole life cycle of
your system as well as that of the particular equipment.
From tailored installation and commissioning to professional maintenance that guarantees a
smooth production run, from proactive process improvement to continuing customer service
–we are always on the spot to maximise the safety, performance and reliability of our
customers’ systems.
Fig. 1:GEA Service – Four levels for lasting success
The service products

FIELD SERVICE
Our customers expect that as a service provider, GEA will have the necessary expertise
and experience to carry out all the maintenance measures needed for a specific machine
or process. Service activities have to be supplied globally, regardless of which local
market our customers are active in and where the value-added process takes place.
We are always close at hand and can provide you with advice and practical support
within Germany, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Original GEA replacement parts provide reliability and protect your investment.
Our high quality replacement parts will keep your operation running with maximum efficiency.
Original replacement parts are manufactured to the highest quality standards. Moreover, the
advance identification of critical parts, short delivery periods and constant availability will
ensure the safe and reliable operation of your plant.
We can give you the assurance of:

• Tested high standard of processing and delivery quality:
• The development of new machinery and hence the further development of spare
parts
• Maximum operational security for your equipment
• Permanent and partly very long-term availability of parts
• Optimised logistics processes and locations of our logistics centres
• Short delivery periods
REPAIRS – CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

The GEA repair service is always close at hand.
We not only carry out repairs all over the world, but also optimisation measures individually
tailored to your GEA equipment using state-of -the-art technology.
We can guarantee you:
• The same care, precision and responsibility as we exercise in the manufacture of
GEA equipment
• Certification to DIN EN ISO 9001
• Original spare parts
• Attractive upgrade options
• Proven safety, quality and performance
RENTAL AND EXCHANGE COMPONENTS

GEA constantly endeavours to maintain the safety and availability of your systems at the
highest possible level. To do this, we can offer rental bowls and a trade-in and part exchange
service, so that downtimes can be reduced to the absolute minimum. In addition to bowls and
screws, various other exchange components are available for centrifuges.
UPGRADES / MODERNISATION / OPTIMISATION

Our proactive service concept includes ongoing identification and introduction of possible
optimisations of processes and systems.
Do your systems require an upgrade or modernisation as a result of market conditions or
new regulations? We will support you on the path to energy savings, cost reductions,
capacity adjustments and enhanced security. We will provide you with our expertise and
latest innovations in order to implement precisely the optimisations that you require.
Our global consultancy and certification framework is part of the GEA service philosophy and
will be of benefit to you all over the world..
We can guarantee you:
• A longer service life
• Lower capital expenditure compared to purchasing new equipment
• A reduction in production costs
• The maintenance of individual safety standards with qualified information on industrial
safety with corresponding specialist machine safety audits.
• Reliability and optimal benefit-cost ratio
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Our GEA PerformancePlus service concept takes an intelligent and economic approach to
ensuring plant availability and security.
The availability of historic and actual measurement data provides you and also GEA with a
detailed insight into the status of the plant. This enables a forward-looking introduction of
corrective, and in particular, planned measures.
We can guarantee:
• The planning of optimal service intervals
• Concise status information
• Minimum unplanned downtimes
• Enhanced plant security
• Optimised plant availability
PERFORMANCE AGREEMENTS
Even the best plant is worthless without the right service.GEA provides an approach for
preventing expensive cost traps.
Our service packages, individually tailored to your requirements, place particular emphasis
on plant availability, security and cost controls. Let the GEA experts take over the inspection,
maintenance and status control of your plant.
Our service modules can be adapted to changes in production conditions in all life cycle
phases without additional costs.
We can guarantee:
• A high level of plant availability
• A reduction in downtimes
• Optimised plant operation
• Maximum planning security
• Short response times
TRAINING
Our qualified staff will train your employees on site in one of our excellently equipped training
centres.
GEA training modules are tailored to your individual requirements. Our experienced
engineers offer comprehensive practical training, impart process expertise and raise
awareness in your employees of plant status to ensure safe, professional plant operation
from the outset.
We can guarantee:
• Optimal plant efficiency
• High availability and reliability
• Highly qualified personnel
• Awareness of plant status
• Motivation
USED MACHINES – FACTORY-REFURBISHED PLANT

Used GEA systems are efficient, reliable and are rapidly installed in situ where they still have
many years of operation ahead of them.
Because the systems were manufactured by GEA, we have the technical expertise to
guarantee their efficient and safe operation.
We can guarantee:
• Factory-refurbished systems
• Service for refurbished systems
• Shorter delivery periods than for new systems
• Excellent price-performance ratio
• The expertise of the manufacturer
• Safety, quality, performance and guarantee
SERVICE CONSULTANCY
Service consultancy is an essential stage in the optimisation and adaptation of operating
processes. Even in this area we have set ourselves the goal of fulfilling the requirements of
our clients with a market-leading service through the use of the latest technology – so that
you can provide your customers with superb products. That is why we bring all the necessary
tools and latest technical know-how together with our experience to bear on the problem
analysis, assessments and complex solutions to problems, in order to jointly overcome the
challenges.
Customer: Taizhou Sanfu Ship Engineering Project-/Order-No.: 30195154 / 2451088515
Co.,Ltd
Location:SF130207_208_209_210 Project-title: 2XOSE10-0136-067/6
GEA Westfalia Separator
Equipment List
Order-No.: 2451088515
Project - title: 2XOSE10-0136-067/6
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Date: 30.05.2019 Dept.: PMS
Type: Singleseparators Corr. Drawing: P2451088515-9913-PID000A Belongs to:
Repl for: --- Repl. by: --- Std. checked: ---
Explanations:
Priority(A): Procurement (B): Scope of supply (C):
N = Obligatory M = Must be obtained from Westfalia L = Scope of supply by WS
E = Recommended K = May be obtained from Westfalia S = Supplied by client
P = Possible Z = Supplied by client F = to be removed
U = --- V = --- W = loose supply
Created Date: 30.05.2019 Checked Date: 30.05.2019 Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
By: Harold.wang By: Amanda.wang By: P2451088515-9913-DVL000A A 1/9
Copyright. © All rights reserved

Co.,Ltd
Location: SF130207_208_209_210 Project-title: 2XOSE10-0136-067/6
Equipment List
ID Quantity Description Size/Type Power Comments Part-No. A B C
Usage Nominal Bore PID Code
10-1-001 1 Pcs Separator OSE 10-0136-067/6 N M L
10-1-001/M1 1 Pcs Motor Frame size 112 N M L
10-3-001 1 Pcs Gear Pump 9085-2604-000 N M L

1"
10-4-001 1 Pcs Duplex Filter Typ 2.04.5 0018-8982-220 N M L
DN40
10-5-001 1 Pcs Plate Heat Exchanger BL30-48D 9085-1304-060 N M L
1"
10-7-001 1 Pcs Shut off valve VL-551B-SC 0018-8944-230 N M L
DN40
10-7-002 1 Pcs Safety Valve 67.961/6bar 0018-7445-400 N M L
G1/2"
DN25
DN25
10-7-005 1 Pcs Throttle Valve belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
DN25
10-7-006 1 Pcs 3/2-Way Feed Valve Assembly 0018-7621-000 N M L
DN25
10-7-008 1 Stk Pressure gauge cock --- --- 0018-7958-630 N M L
1/4’’

1/4’’

Co.,Ltd
Equipment List
10-7-010 1 Pcs 2/2 Way Solenoid Valve 0331 0018-8133-600 N M L
10-7-012 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge Cock belongs to *0-1-001 N M L

1/4"
10-9-001/B1 1 Stk Pressure Gauge - --- 0001-1433-600 N M L
--- PI
10-9-002/B1 1 Stk Pressure gauge - --- 0001-1432-600 N M L

PI
10-9-006 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer 2 x PT 100 TE 0001-1579-400 belongs N M L

1/2" to 10-7-006
10-9-007 1 Pcs Temperature Regulator TC integrated in Control N M L

Cabinet
10-9-009 1 Pcs Pressure Transmitter NAE PT 0005-1533-300 N M L

1/4"
10-9-010 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer TE installed in Motor N M L
10-9-011 1 Pcs Current Transformer TA32710B500 IAL 0005-0924-240 N M L
10-9-013 1 Pcs Water Detector CLS50 0022 001V1 CS 0005-1464-070 N M L

1/4"
10-9-016 1 Pcs Thermometer TI 0001-1731-600 N M L
1/2"

Co.,Ltd
Equipment List

1/2"
10-9-018 1 Pcs Proximity sensor SIS 0005-0868-000 N M L
11-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Valve part of centrifuge N M L

1"
1/4"
DN25
11-9-001 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge 213.40 / 0..10bar PI 0001-1572-600 N M L
1/4"
1/4"
12-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Flap belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
DN 25
DN25
14-7-001 1 Pcs Butterfly Valve WA 532 0018-6612-400 N M L
DN80
14-9-001 1 Pcs Limit Switch ZS belongs to *4-7-001 N M L

DN20
16-7-002 1 Pcs Motor Control Valve 23.440 - kvs 2,5 0018-8164-220 N M L
DN20

Co.,Ltd
Equipment List

DN25
18-7-002 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
1/4"
19-7-002 1 Pcs Ball Valve 0018-1763-630 belongs N M L
3/4" to *9-7-003
19-7-003 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve Assembly compl. 0018-7614-000 N M L

3/4"
19-7-004 1 Pcs 2/2-Way Solenoid Valve belongs to *9-7-003 N M L
1/2"
1/4"
19-8-001 1 Pcs Y-Strainer belongs to *9-7-003 N M L
3/4"
19-9-001 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge 213.40 / 0..10bar PI 0001-1572-600 belongs N M L
to *9-7-003
20-1-001 1 Pcs Separator OSE 10-0136-067/6 N M L
20-1-001/M1 1 Pcs Motor Frame size 112 N M L
20-3-001 1 Pcs Gear Pump 9085-2604-000 N M L

1"
20-4-001 1 Pcs Duplex Filter Typ 2.04.5 0018-8982-220 N M L
DN40
20-5-001 1 Pcs Plate Heat Exchanger BL30-48D 9085-1304-060 N M L
1"

Co.,Ltd
Equipment List

DN40
20-7-002 1 Pcs Safety Valve 67.961/6bar 0018-7445-400 N M L
G1/2"
DN25
DN25
20-7-005 1 Pcs Throttle Valve belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
DN25
20-7-006 1 Pcs 3/2-Way Feed Valve Assembly 0018-7621-000 N M L
DN25
1/4’’

1/4’’

1/4"
DN25
20-9-001/B1 1 Stk Pressure Gauge - --- 0001-1433-600 N M L
--- PI

Co.,Ltd
Equipment List
20-9-002/B1 1 Stk Pressure gauge - --- 0001-1432-600 N M L

PI
20-9-006 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer 2 x PT 100 TE 0001-1579-400 belongs N M L

1/2" to 10-7-006
20-9-007 1 Pcs Temperature Regulator TC integrated in Control N M L

Cabinet

1/4"
20-9-010 1 Pcs Resistance Thermometer TE installed in Motor N M L
20-9-011 1 Pcs Current Transformer TA32710B500 IAL 0005-0924-240 N M L
20-9-013 1 Pcs Water Detector CLS50 0022 001V1 CS 0005-1464-070 N M L

1/4"
1/2"
1/2"
20-9-018 1 Pcs Proximity sensor SIS 0005-0868-000 N M L
21-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Valve part of centrifuge N M L

1"
1/4"

Co.,Ltd
Equipment List

DN25
21-9-001 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge 213.40 / 0..10bar PI 0001-1572-600 N M L
1/4"
1/4"
22-7-001 1 Pcs Non-Return Flap belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
DN 25
DN25
24-7-001 1 Pcs Butterfly Valve WA 532 0018-6612-400 N M L
DN80
24-9-001 1 Pcs Limit Switch ZS belongs to *4-7-001 N M L

DN20
26-7-002 1 Pcs Motor Control Valve 23.440 - kvs 2,5 0018-8164-220 N M L
DN20
DN25
28-7-002 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve belongs to *0-7-006 N M L
1/4"
29-7-002 1 Pcs Ball Valve 0018-1763-630 belongs N M L
3/4" to *9-7-003
29-7-003 1 Pcs Solenoid Valve Assembly compl. 0018-7614-000 N M L

3/4"

Co.,Ltd
Equipment List

1/2"
1/4"
29-8-001 1 Pcs Y-Strainer belongs to *9-7-003 N M L
3/4"
29-9-001 1 Pcs Pressure Gauge 213.40 / 0..10bar PI 0001-1572-600 belongs N M L
to *9-7-003

Customer: Project-/Order-No.:
Taizhou Sanfu Ship 30195154 / 2451088515
Engineering Co.,Ltd
Location: Project-title: GEA Westfalia Separator
SF130207_208_209_210 2XOSE10-0136-067/6
Process Condition Data Sheet
Order overview
Hull No.: IMO No.: Classification: Project No.: Order No.:

SF130207 - DNV_GL 30195154 2881088515
SF130208 - DNV_GL 30216262 2881168510
SF130209 - DNV_GL 30245753 2881252395
SF130210 - DNV_GL 30278796 2881304708
Oil to be processed
Application: HFO
Viscosity: 380cst at 50°C
Density: 1.01g/ml15°C
Inlet temperature: 50 °C
Separating temperature: 98 °C
Throughput capacity: 1600 l/h
Separator
Type: OSE 10-0136-067/6
Operation mode:
Ejection method: total
Clean oil discharge: 1 bar g
Finish color: Munsell 7.5 BG 7/2
Total weight: 205 kg
Bowl speed: 12000 rpm
Bowl weight: 49 kg
Separator motor
Type: Frame size 112
Output: 4 kW
Speed: 3000 rpm
IP class: 55
Weight: 25 kg
Feed Pump
Kind: geartype
Type: SBG-2C
Rated capacity: 1930 l/h
Suction height: 5 mWS (0,5 Bar)
Delivery height: 30 mWS (3 Bar)
Output: 1,5 kW
IP class: 55
Weight: 38 kg
Heating Medium: thermaloil / hotwater

Pressure inlet: 3 bar abs
Temperature inlet: 180 °C
Temperature outlet: 140 °C
Consumption: 2867 l/h
Created Date: Checked Date: Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
30.05.2019 30.05.2019 P2451088515-9913-PDS000A A 1/2
By: Harold.wang By: Amanda.wang By:
Customer: Project-/Order-No.:
Taizhou Sanfu Ship 30195154 / 2451088515
Engineering Co.,Ltd
Location: Project-title: GEA Westfalia Separator
SF130207_208_209_210 2XOSE10-0136-067/6
Process Condition Data Sheet
Ambient Conditions
Ambient temperature: +45°C
Humidity: up to 92%
Atmospheric pressure: up to 1000 m Above Sea Level
Electrical Supply
Control unit type: IO / Final color: Munsell 7.5 BG 7/2
Infeed voltage: 380 Volt AC ± 10%
Frequency: 50 Hz ± 2%
Valve operating voltage: 24 DC
Control Voltage: 220 Volt AC
IP class: 54
Weight: See Circuit Diagram - Arrangement drawing
Operating water
Hardness: < 55°C 12° dH
> 55°C 6° dH
Chloride Ions: < 100 mg/l
PH - Value: 6,5 - 8,5
Temperature: +10°C up to +85°C
Feed Pressure: 3 - 10 bar (min.3bar)
Required Capacity: 0,5 l/s
Consumption / Ejection: 3-4l
Compressed Air (if mentioned on P&ID)

Standard operating compressed air pressure: min. 3 bar / max. 10 bar
Adjustments and set points

Type: P&ID tag no.: Set point:
Inlet temperature controller TC *0-9-007 98°C
Inlet temperature alarm high TAH *0-9-006 108°C
Inlet temperature alarm low TAL *0-9-006 88°C
Water pressure reducer PCV *9-7-003 3 - 10 bar g
Pressure alarm low PAL (Clean oil discharge) *1-9-002 1 bar
Pressure alarm high PAH (Clean oil discharge) *1-9-002 3 bar
Pressure transmitter PT (Sludge monitoring system) *0-9-014 1 bar
Created Date: Checked Date: Approved Date: Document No.: Revison: Page:
30.05.2019 30.05.2019 P2451088515-9913-PDS000A A 2/2
By: Harold.wang By: Amanda.wang By:
Instruction manual
Designation: Operating panel
Model: GEA IO 4
No. 8555-9001-050
Edition 27.11.2017
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Contents subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for remarks and suggestions

for improving the documentation. These can be sent to:
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
Tel +49 2522 77-0 e-mail@gea.com

Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com


1.2 Note on figures and descriptions ............................................................... 8
1.4 Structure of safety notices ....................................................................... 10
1.5 Target groups .......................................................................................... 11
1.5.1 Operator ................................................................................................... 11
1.5.2 Skilled worker .......................................................................................... 12
1.5.3 Trained specialist ..................................................................................... 12
1.6 Service offers ........................................................................................... 12
1.6.1 Service ..................................................................................................... 12
1.6.2 Training .................................................................................................... 12
1.7 Additional documentation ........................................................................ 13
2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 16

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 16
2.3 Qualification of personnel ........................................................................ 16
2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 17
2.5 Modifications or manipulation of the unit ................................................. 17
2.6 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device ................................................. 17
2.6.1 Open equipment ...................................................................................... 18
2.6.2 Electrical power ....................................................................................... 18
2.6.3 Operating the HMI device safely ............................................................. 18
2.6.4 Areas at risk of explosion ........................................................................ 18
2.6.5 High-frequency radiation ......................................................................... 18
2.6.6 Instructions for using the device .............................................................. 18
2.7 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials ........................... 19
2.8 Liability ..................................................................................................... 19
3 Description 21
3.1 Personal safety gear ................................................................................ 23

3.2 Function of control unit and GEA IO operator panel ............................... 23
3.3 HMI device ............................................................................................... 23
3.3.1 4“ HMI device........................................................................................... 24
3.3.2 Interfaces ................................................................................................. 26
3.4 Features ................................................................................................... 27
3.5 Getting to know the operator panel of your GEA IO ................................ 27
3.5.1 Treating the GEA IO user interface properly ........................................... 27
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel ............................................................ 29
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area ................................... 29
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays ................................................................ 31
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens ................................................. 32
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements .................................................. 33
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off ................................................ 35
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines .................................................................. 35
3.5.9 Displaying output fields ............................................................................ 36
3.5.10 Displaying input fields .............................................................................. 37
3.6 Editing data in input fields ........................................................................ 38
3.6.1 Opening input fields ................................................................................. 38
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields ................................................................ 38
3.7 Password protection ................................................................................ 40

3.8 Commissioning ........................................................................................ 40

3.9 Commissioning (Easyline) ....................................................................... 41
3.10 Factory settings ....................................................................................... 42
3.11 I/O check .................................................................................................. 45
3.11.1 Test digital inputs ..................................................................................... 47
3.11.2 Test digital outputs .................................................................................. 49
3.11.3 Test analogue inputs ............................................................................... 50
3.11.4 Test analogue outputs ............................................................................. 51
3.12 Data backup............................................................................................. 52
3.12.1 Backup data ............................................................................................. 52
3.13 User management ................................................................................... 53
3.14 Operation ................................................................................................. 55
3.14.1 Display and set feed data ........................................................................ 56
3.14.2 Displaying and setting machine data ....................................................... 64
3.14.3 Displaying and setting discharge data ..................................................... 67
3.14.4 Displaying alarms and warnings .............................................................. 69
3.14.5 Opening the “Motor" screen..................................................................... 70
3.14.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen ...................................................... 72
3.14.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen ......................................................... 76
3.14.8 Opening the “Valve" screen ..................................................................... 76
3.14.9 Open the “Controller” screen ................................................................... 78
3.14.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen ....................................................... 81
3.15 Help ......................................................................................................... 85
3.15.1 Documentation......................................................................................... 86
3.15.2 Colour concept......................................................................................... 86
3.15.3 Messaging function .................................................................................. 87
3.15.4 Remote operation .................................................................................... 88
3.15.5 Screen settings ........................................................................................ 89
3.15.6 Machine information ................................................................................ 94
3.15.7 Measurements ......................................................................................... 95
3.16 Service ..................................................................................................... 97
3.16.1 Contact/hotline ......................................................................................... 97
3.16.2 4.2 Preventative maintenance ................................................................. 98
3.17 Training .................................................................................................. 100
3.18 GEA Westfalia Separator ...................................................................... 101
4 Technical data 103
4.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................... 104

4.1.1 Certificates and approvals ..................................................................... 104
4.1.2 Directives and declarations ................................................................... 104
4.1.3 Dimensional drawings of 4" Operator panel .......................................... 104
4.1.4 Technical data of the Operator panel .................................................... 104
5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device ........................................................... 110

5.1.1 Safety during transport .......................................................................... 110
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures ..................................................... 110
5.1.3 Check for transport damage .................................................................. 110
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions ..................................... 110
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage ................ 110
6 Assembly and installation 111
6.1 Safety information .................................................................................. 112

6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection ................................. 112
6.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 112

6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use ............................................ 112

6.2.2 Use with additional measures................................................................ 112
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions ............................................................. 112
6.3 Specify mounting position ...................................................................... 113
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out ............................................................. 114
6.5 Installing the HMI device ....................................................................... 115
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps ........................................................................... 115
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket ............................................................... 116
6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device ........................................................................ 116
6.6 Connecting the HMI device ................................................................... 117
6.6.1 Connection instructions ......................................................................... 117
6.6.2 Equipotential bonding ............................................................................ 117
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding ................................................ 118
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply ................................................................ 119
6.6.5 Connecting the configuration PC ........................................................... 120
6.6.6 Connecting the control unit .................................................................... 121
6.6.7 Connecting a USB device ...................................................................... 121
6.6.8 Connecting a printer .............................................................................. 122
6.6.9 Connecting an audio device .................................................................. 122
6.6.10 Switching on and testing the HMI device .............................................. 123
7 Settings 125
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device ............................................................. 126

7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel ............................................... 126
7.2 Visualisation file in the HMI device ........................................................ 128
7.2.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”) ............................................. 128
7.2.2 Backing up the current visualisation ...................................................... 132
7.3 Set IP address ....................................................................................... 136
8 Commissioning 141

8.1.1 Safety during commissioning................................................................. 142
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device ............................................................. 142
8.2.1 Program memory ................................................................................... 142
8.2.2 Front panel controls ............................................................................... 144
8.3 Setting the CPU to RUN mode .............................................................. 144
8.4 Using the service concept ..................................................................... 146
8.4.1 Activating the service concept ............................................................... 146
8.4.2 Replacing HMI device ............................................................................ 146
8.4.3 Deactivating the service concept ........................................................... 146
8.5 Commissioning the project .................................................................... 147
8.5.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device .................................................. 147
8.5.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project ........................................ 147
8.5.3 Operating modes of the HMI ................................................................. 147
8.5.4 Change operating mode ........................................................................ 147
8.5.5 Possibilities of data transfer ................................................................... 148
8.5.6 Set transfer mode .................................................................................. 148
8.5.7 Start transfer .......................................................................................... 149
8.5.8 Test project ............................................................................................ 150
8.5.9 Backup and restore data ....................................................................... 151
8.5.10 Update operating system ....................................................................... 151
8.5.11 Manage options and license keys ......................................................... 151
9 Operation 153
9.1 Operate device IO.................................................................................. 154

9.1.1 Use on-screen keyboard ....................................................................... 154

9.2 Initial Commissioning (Easyline)............................................................ 154
9.2.1 Select user language ............................................................................. 155
9.2.2 Setting the time ...................................................................................... 155
9.2.3 Selecting the software ........................................................................... 156
10 Trouble shooting 159
10.1.1 Status and fault indication ..................................................................... 160
11 Maintenance 163
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance ............................................... 164

11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen ...................................................................... 164
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices ...................................... 164
11.2.2 Cleaning the screen ............................................................................... 165
12 Repair 167
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work ...................................... 168

12.1.2 Hazards from electricity ......................................................................... 168
12.2 Repair .................................................................................................... 168
13 Decommissioning 169
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal ...................................................... 170
14 Spare parts 171
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts ............................................................... 172



1.2 Note on figures and descriptions ............................................................... 8
1.4 Structure of safety notices ....................................................................... 10
1.5 Target groups .......................................................................................... 11
1.5.1 Operator ................................................................................................... 11
1.5.2 Skilled worker .......................................................................................... 12
1.5.3 Trained specialist ..................................................................................... 12
1.6 Service offers ........................................................................................... 12
1.6.1 Service ..................................................................................................... 12
1.6.2 Training .................................................................................................... 12
1.7 Additional documentation ........................................................................ 13


This document applies to all persons who work with or on the system. It applies to
the plant operator as a basis for compiling standard operating procedures (SOP)
for conduct at the workplace on the HMI device of the machine/system.
This manual is valid for HMI devices with 4" operating panels.
This document is part of the HMI device and is also required for repeat commis-
sioning:
• Retain documents supplied and supplementary documents throughout the life-
time of the HMI device.
• Pass on all retained documents to the subsequent owner of the HMI device.
Due to the colour scheme, approved copies of this document of any kind are only
valid if prepared using the RGB (red-green-blue) colour space. Black and white co-
pies are not admissible.
1.2 Note on figures and descriptions

This operating unit is used for many machines / systems in many different versions
and for many processes.
The figures, diagrams and layout examples shown in this manual serve only to il-
lustrate the text of this manual and should be regarded as exemplary.
Content in texts and tables may apply also to features that are optional and do not
necessarily match the actual type or version of the machine/system delivered in
any case.
GEA cannot accept any liability or responsibility for claims that are asserted be-
cause of differences between the figures in this manual and the actual application.
We reserve the right to make general program changes in the course of further de-
velopment, without replacing these instructions through change management. If
necessary, please contact the GEA Service.
1.3 Other applicable documents

The following documents contained in the full plant documentation apply in addition
to this instruction manual:
• Safety information about the machine/plant
• Operating manual of the controller manufacturer
• Manual entitled "Settings and faults"
• Operating manual of the machine/plant
• Project-related documents
• Set of drawings
• Data sheets
• Plans and lists
• P&ID (Piping and Instrumentation Diagram)
• Documentation on the control of the machine/plant
• Operating manuals for the components of other manufacturers, such as motors,
heaters, pumps, measuring technology valves and fittings.
Pertinent standards and regulations:
• DIN EN 62079 for operating manuals


1.4 Structure of safety notices

The device has been designed and built so that it functions and can be operated
safely. This manual will refer to further potential risks by using warning notices at
the relevant points.
A distinction is made between hazards which result in damage to the device, to
system components and to the environment and hazards which lead to potential or
probable injury or loss of life to staff.
plemented, the device or something else in its vicinity may be damaged.
Danger signals

death.


nates.



NOTICE Type and source of hazard
1.5 Target groups

The target groups for this documentation are all persons involved in installing, as-
sembling, operating, maintaining and repairing the machine.
What work may be carried out by what target group depends on the qualification of
the personnel and on the type of work.
In the tables in the chapters entitled "Troubleshooting" and "Maintenance", the re-
sponsible target group is specified in addition to the activity.
1.5.1 Operator
Abbreviation: Op
The operator is employed by the customer and has been briefed in the following
operations:
• Starting and shutting down the machine.
• Monitoring the machine and process (e.g. by means of indicators).
• Execution of easy re-lubrication and cleaning operations.
When given specific directions, the operator is able to carry out simple modifica-
tions to the process, e.g.:
• Adjusting temperatures, pressures and throughput capacities.
• Dosing additives.

1.5.2 Skilled worker

Abbreviation: Skilled
The skilled worker is normally employed by the customer and has been briefed in
the following areas:
• Performing easy assembly work
• Performing routine maintenance work or servicing
• Limited settings and parametrization on the components and control system
The skilled worker has basic technical knowledge. The basic knowledge corre-
sponds to a technical apprenticeship (mechanical or electrical).
The skilled worker is selected and deployed by the employer (plant operator).
GEA Westfalia Separator will carry out the briefing only in specific technical fea-
tures that are part of the supply schedule and and will indicate potential hazards.
This briefing is no substitute for an apprenticeship.
1.5.3 Trained specialist

Abbreviation: Tspec
The trained specialist normally belongs to the service team of GEA Westfalia Sep-
arator Group.
In exceptional cases, skilled workers employed by the customer can obtain a cor-
responding qualification by attending training courses held by GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator Group.
1.6 Service offers
1.6.1 Service
GEA Westfalia Separator offers comprehensive service for the following areas:
• Assembly
• Commissioning
• Regular maintenance
• Repairs
• Checking the operating state
• Checking in dismantled state
• Decommissioning for a long-term shut-down
• Storage and conservation during long-term standstill
• Restarting
• Decommissioning and disposal
• Training
1.6.2 Training
GEA Westfalia Separator regularly holds training courses for customer employees.
Training content is aimed at the customer's operating and service staff who work
with the machine. The operator must know how the machine functions.
Trained operators assure the operating safety of the machine.
Many different applications require competent process engineering know-how. On-
ly adequately trained employees in service ensure a high quality standard. This re-
quires ongoing further training.

The demands on the qualification of the service staff are growing increasingly.
GEA Westfalia Separator consequently offers a qualification model and training
concept.
• Contact the following addresses for training courses for operating and service
staff.
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Werner Habig Straße 1 • 59302 Oelde
(Germany) • Tel. +49 (0)2522 77-1469 • Fax +49 (0)2522 77-31469 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • gea.com
• GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH • Hammerbrook Straße 90 • 20097 Ham-
burg (Germany) • Phone +49 40 589650-0 • Fax +49 40 7380585 • in-
fo.learningcenter@gea.com • gea.com
1.7 Additional documentation

Request further information and technical documentation from the following places:
• Directly from GEA Westfalia Separator in Oelde.
• From the nearest representative of GEA Westfalia Separator.
• Per Internet under: gea.com
• Vie e-mail at: wsinfo@gea.com


2.1 Intended use ............................................................................................ 16

2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse ............................................................. 16
2.3 Qualification of personnel ........................................................................ 16
2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator ......................................................... 17
2.5 Modifications or manipulation of the unit ................................................. 17
2.6 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device ................................................. 17
2.6.1 Open equipment ...................................................................................... 18
2.6.2 Electrical power ....................................................................................... 18
2.6.3 Operating the HMI device safely ............................................................. 18
2.6.4 Areas at risk of explosion ........................................................................ 18
2.6.5 High-frequency radiation ......................................................................... 18
2.6.6 Instructions for using the device .............................................................. 18
2.7 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials ........................... 19
2.8 Liability ..................................................................................................... 19

2.1 Intended use

The operator panel in conjunction with the control unit is for
• Visualization of the machine / skid with all required actuators, valves and regula-
tors.
• menu-controlled user guidance.
• Measurement of the specific machine parameters. e.g. bowl and gear speeds.
• monitoring sensors and safety functions.
• Controlling/locking pumps and peripheral equipment.
2.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

The manual contains instructions for the intended use. Any operation of the HMI
device that does not fall under the intended use constitutes unintended use and is
considered to be misuse.
Reasonably foreseeable misuse includes:
• Use of unsuitable spare parts
• Use of non-approved external storage media.
• Exceeding the defined limits.
• Modification or extension of the HMI device.
• Changing the process conditions, operating conditions and environmental condi-
tions without the manufacturer's consent.
Any misuse of the control may cause personal injury and property damage.
 Use the unit only as intended.
2.3 Qualification of personnel

Special expertise is required for working on and with the HMI device. The qualifica-
tion of the personnel with this expertise is an important requirement for the opera-
tional reliability. The requirements for the qualification are described in the individ-
ual chapters of the instruction manual. They depend on the tasks assigned.
Faulty operation, installation errors and handling errors can result in danger to life
and limb as well as severe damage to property.
The plant operator must implement measures for the qualification of its personnel:
 Assign only reliable persons to work on the HMI device.
 Allow only authorised individuals to work on the HMI device.
 Give special training and briefings to the personnel for the tasks assigned.
 Clearly define responsibilities.
 Make sure that the assigned individuals have read and understood the safety in-
formation before beginning work.
 Make sure that the assigned individuals have read and understood all sections
of the instruction manual required for their work before beginning work.
 Give special briefings to persons who cannot read, and monitor their work.
 Persons still undergoing training may only be deployed under supervision.

2.4 Responsibility of the plant operator

The operation of a machine/system and its control unit is subject to rules and regu-
lations for occupational health and safety.
The order of the rules and regulations listed below is not a reflection of their priori-
ty. The list lays no claim to completeness:
• Regulations relating to safety and health (accident prevention regulations) based
on Article 118a of the treaty establishing the EEC, e.g. directive 89/655/EEC and
follow-up versions or corresponding national regulations issued by the country of
operation.
• Regular check of safety devices
• Compliance with regulations governing occupational health and safety of em-
ployees in areas at risk of explosion, e.g. directive 1999/92/EC or corresponding
national regulations issued by the country of operation.
• Compliance with directive 94/9/EC (ATEX), directive 2004/108/EC (electromag-
netic compatibility), directive 2006/95/EC (low-voltage directive) or correspond-
ing national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
• Compliance with directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive) or corresponding
national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within the
responsibility of the manufacturer.
• Compliance with the German Equipment and Product Safety Act or correspond-
ing national regulations issued by the country of operation when working within
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
The plant operator is responsible for complying with rules and regulations and the
safety-conscious and hazard-conscious work of the assigned persons. These in-
clude the following measures:
 Ensuring that the statutory and other binding regulations on safety, accident pre-
vention and occupational safety are known and complied with.
 Assigning only qualified and authorised staff with technical understanding and
fundamental technical knowledge and skills to work on the control unit.
 Clearly defining and communicating responsibilities for tasks.
 Operating the control of the machine/system only when it is in perfect working
order in accordance with intended use, see the section entitled "Intended use“.
 Checking all safety devices for proper functioning before each startup.
 Having the control unit checked regularly by qualified persons for its operational
reliability. Having the control unit checked in accordance with the maintenance
schedule.
2.5 Modifications or manipulation of the unit

Modifications to the operator terminal are prohibited. They represent an unintended
use and endanger the operational reliability of the machine / system. This may
cause physical injury and damage to property.
 If modifications to the operator terminal are necessary, e.g., due to new opera-
tional sequences, contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
 Clarify the planning and the measures for the modifications to the control unit
with GEA Westfalia Separator.
2.6 Avoiding hazards due to the HMI device

2.6.1 Open equipment

The HMI device is an open piece of equipment. In other words, the HMI device
may only be fitted in housings or cabinets. The HMI device is operated from its
front.
Only qualified staff may open the switch cabinet in which the HMI device is located.
Keys or a special tool should be used for this.
2.6.2 Electrical power

When the switch cabinet is open, individual areas or components may carry a le-
thal voltage.
If it is possible for these areas or components to be contacted, death or electric
shock may result.
2.6.3 Operating the HMI device safely

Directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive) regulates inter alia precautions to be
taken during the startup and operation of machines within the European Economic
Area.
Ignoring these regulations is a breach of the machinery directive and the plant op-
erator is liable for the consequences. Depending on the machine being operated,
personal and material damage over and above this is not excluded.
Only start up the HMI device in a machine/system which complies with the terms of
directive 2006/42/EC (machinery directive).
2.6.4 Areas at risk of explosion

The HMI device is suitable for use in areas at risk of explosion under special condi-
tions.
Follow the instructions in the manufacturer's manual.
2.6.5 High-frequency radiation

High-frequency radiation, e.g. from a mobile phone, interferes with the HMI de-
vice's functions and can lead to it malfunctioning.
 For further information, see the chapter of the same name in the manufacturer's
manual for the HMI device.
2.6.6 Instructions for using the device

Requirement for place of use
If the HMI device is operated outside closed indoor areas, it may be damaged. To
prevent damage, take suitable measures. Discuss suitable measures with GEA
 Use the HMI device only indoors.
Place of use
The HMI device is not intended for use in residential areas. If the HMI device is
used in residential areas, radio or television reception may be affected.
If the HMI device is used in a residential area, limit value class B to EN 55011 with
regard to the emission of radio interference must be ensured.

Suitable measures for achieving radio interference suppression of limit value class
B include, for example:
• fitting the HMI device in earthed switch cabinets
• using filters in power supply cables
Separate approval is also required.
2.7 Requirements for spare parts and operating materials

Spare parts, wear parts, and operating materials can cause bodily injury and prop-
erty damage if they do not meet the requirements.
Genuine spare parts and operating materials from GEA Westfalia Separator Group
satisfy all pre-conditions for the operating safety of the unit.
 Use only genuine spare parts.
 Use only genuine operating materials.
 Use the order-specific spare parts catalog supplied.
 See the chapter "Spare parts" for ordering spare parts and operating materials.
 Comply with limits.
2.8 Liability
Reasons for the immediate passing of liability to the plant operator independent of
existing warranty and guarantee periods.
• Improper installation by inadequately trained persons.
• Improper handling in deviation from the intended use.
• Non-observance of the user instructions.
Warranty and liability conditions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of GEA
Westfalia Separator are not extended by the above information.
Note:
GEA Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified or
unauthorised personnel.


8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3 Description
3.1 Personal safety gear ................................................................................ 23

3.2 Function of control unit and GEA IO operator panel ............................... 23
3.3 HMI device ............................................................................................... 23
3.3.1 4“ HMI device........................................................................................... 24
3.3.2 Interfaces ................................................................................................. 26
3.4 Features ................................................................................................... 27
3.5 Getting to know the operator panel of your GEA IO ................................ 27
3.5.1 Treating the GEA IO user interface properly ........................................... 27
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel ............................................................ 29
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area ................................... 29
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays ................................................................ 31
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens ................................................. 32
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements .................................................. 33
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off ................................................ 35
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines .................................................................. 35
3.5.9 Displaying output fields ............................................................................ 36
3.5.10 Displaying input fields .............................................................................. 37
3.6 Editing data in input fields ........................................................................ 38
3.6.1 Opening input fields ................................................................................. 38
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields ................................................................ 38
3.7 Password protection ................................................................................ 40
3.8 Commissioning ........................................................................................ 40
3.9 Commissioning (Easyline) ....................................................................... 41
3.10 Factory settings ....................................................................................... 42
3.11 I/O check .................................................................................................. 45
3.11.1 Test digital inputs ..................................................................................... 47
3.11.2 Test digital outputs .................................................................................. 49
3.11.3 Test analogue inputs ............................................................................... 50
3.11.4 Test analogue outputs ............................................................................. 51
3.12 Data backup............................................................................................. 52
3.12.1 Backup data ............................................................................................. 52
3.13 User management ................................................................................... 53
3.14 Operation ................................................................................................. 55
3.14.1 Display and set feed data ........................................................................ 56
3.14.2 Displaying and setting machine data ....................................................... 64
3.14.3 Displaying and setting discharge data ..................................................... 67
3.14.4 Displaying alarms and warnings .............................................................. 69
3.14.5 Opening the “Motor" screen..................................................................... 70
3.14.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen ...................................................... 72
3.14.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen ......................................................... 76
3.14.8 Opening the “Valve" screen ..................................................................... 76
3.14.9 Open the “Controller” screen ................................................................... 78
3.14.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen ....................................................... 81
3.15 Help ......................................................................................................... 85
3.15.1 Documentation......................................................................................... 86
3.15.2 Colour concept......................................................................................... 86

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.15.3 Messaging function .................................................................................. 87

3.15.4 Remote operation .................................................................................... 88
3.15.5 Screen settings ........................................................................................ 89
3.15.6 Machine information ................................................................................ 94
3.15.7 Measurements ......................................................................................... 95
3.16 Service ..................................................................................................... 97
3.16.1 Contact/hotline ......................................................................................... 97
3.16.2 4.2 Preventative maintenance ................................................................. 98
3.17 Training .................................................................................................. 100
3.18 GEA Westfalia Separator ...................................................................... 101

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.1 Personal safety gear

Follow the instructions on general requirements for working on electrical installa-
tions.
To prevent danger to life and limb, the specified personal safety gear must be
worn. If a machine or system belongs to the HMI, the personal safety gear speci-
fied for this machine/system must also be worn for operation. The safety gear must
also be worn for maintenance and repair work on the HMI or the machine/system,
see the chapter entitled "Personal safety gear" in the machine/system manual.
3.2 Function of control unit and GEA IO operator panel

Visualizing and operating the control unit
The GEA IO operator panel is programmed at the factory for the required operation
of the control task.
The motors and valves connected to the control unit are actuated in accordance
with the control task in question.
Measuring (control unit)

The speeds of the connected machines are measured and displayed. This is ef-
fected via speed sensors installed on the machines, see the section entitled "Areas
of application".
Displays (GEA IO operator panel)

The following measured/calculated values can be displayed:
• speeds, e.g. bowl speeds
• torques of drives
• state of the connected valves and motors
• feed quantities, discharge quantities, pressures, temperatures.
Controlling (control unit)

Speeds can be controlled fully automatically on some machines, e.g. In the case of
summation drives. In this connection, the use of frequency converters for the mo-
tors plays an important role.
NOTE: The plant operator is not authorized to carry out program modifications.
The plant operator can make the following settings on the touchscreen of the Op-
erator panel:
• machine-specific, product-specific and process-specific preselections
• threshold values
• System-specific settings
3.3 HMI device

This chapter describes the control hardware of the 4“ HMI device.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.3.1 4“ HMI device
Fig. 1 HMI device user interface with function keys
NOTE: The function keys (1) are not used.
Rear view
Fig. 2 Rear view of the HMI device
1 Nameplate
2 Slots for SD memory cards-– accessible from the side of the unit

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Side view
Fig. 3 Side view of the HMI device
1 Clamps
2 Interfaces
3 Mounting gasket
4 Slots for SD cards

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.3.2 Interfaces
Interfaces of the HMI device
Fig. 4 Interfaces of the HMI device
Legend 1 X2 PROFIBUS (Sub-D RS422/485)
2 Port for equipotential bonding (earthing)
3 X60 USB type Mini-B
4 X1 PROFINET (LAN), 10/100 Mbps
5 X61 USB type A
6 X80 port for power supply
NOTE:
• Use the X1 interface or X60 interface to connect a configuration PC.
• Use the X61/X62 interfaces to connect peripherals, such as a printer or key-
board.
• Use the X90 interface to connect a speaker.
• Secure USB and PROFINET connection cables with cable ties on the rear of the
HMI device.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.4 Features
The HMI device has the following features:
• Graphic display for machine monitoring and machine control
• Control system with modular expandability
• Multilingual text display
• Touch screen or function keys with LED status display
• Programmable logic control
• Control voltage 24V
• High operational reliability
• Long service life
3.5 Getting to know the operator panel of your GEA IO

The user interface of the "GEA IO" was developed in accordance with the new
standardized operating philosophy at GEA Westfalia Separator. All operator panels
are equipped with touchscreens. The fixed arrangement of the screen and stand-
ardised symbols ensure rapid orientation.
NOTE: The touchscreen is adapted for use in industry. Gentle touching of the pan-
el, like that on tablets, is not sufficient to execute the command. Noticeable pres-
sure needs to be exerted on the panel.
3.5.1 Treating the GEA IO user interface properly

The GEA IO user interface is operated using the touchscreen. All the control ob-
jects required for operation are shown on the touchscreen after the operator panel
is started up.
Fig. 5 Start screen after switching on and booting of the Operator panel
If you press one of the symbols with your finger, the respective menu opens.
The following points should be observed when operating the touchscreen:

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
 Do not execute several operations simultaneously.

This may trigger an unintended action.
 Always press only one control object on the screen.
 Do not touch the touchscreen with sharp or pointed objects.
 Avoid contacting the screen by hitting it with hard objects.
Both can lead to a significant reduction in lifetime up to and including total failure of
the touchscreen.
 Only touch the operator panel touchscreen with a finger.
 If necessary, use protective films for the touchscreen.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.5.2 Arrangement of the control panel

The control panel is divided up into fixed areas.
Fig. 6
1 Visualisation (process, assistance systems,...)
2 Process operation tool bar
3 Main navigation area
3.5.3 Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area

On the right-hand side is the main navigation area with the assistants. The mean-
ing of the icons is explained below.
The active or selected assistant is white, the others are shown in grey.
S8555002 Fig. 7

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Meaning of the icons in the main navigation area
Commissioning
Factory settings, commissioning information, I/O check, customer-

specific extensions
Operation
Operation, overview of system, process status information
Help Desk
Documentation, colour concept, remote access facilities, screen

settings, customer-specific extensions
Service
Contact/hotline, servicing information, customer-specific extensions
Training
Safety instructions, separation technology, operating simulation,

customer training
Company portrait
General information about GEA
Screenshot
Screenshot function for current screen display; image saved to USB

stick.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.5.4 Meaning of the status displays
Show status display
Example of a status display
Fig. 8 Example: Skid with separator, start screen with status indicators
Icons can display a status using various forms and indicator colours. Status dis-
plays can be found on modules or complex components.
Status relates to the complete sensor system on this module or the component.
The indicator colours correspond to traffic light colours.
NOTE: The status displays are designed in such a way that people with a disability
in colour vision are also able to correctly assign them from their shape.
Meaning of the status displays
Green indicates a correct status.
Yellow defines an incorrect status, a warning.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Meaning of the status displays
The red triangle indicates a fault/alarm.
When the status display is pressed, the message screen for associated active
warnings and alarms opens.
Status displays are found only on modules which are also equipped with sensor
systems. The sensor system must be able to generate warnings and alarms.
Faults and alarms can be acknowledged, see the section entitled "Alarms, warn-
ings and message screens".
3.5.5 Alarms, warnings and message screens
The Operation icon in case of alarm
The "Operation" icon starts flashing red. This alarm can always be
seen, regardless of the current display being shown.
NOTE: No additional pop-up screen appears.
After pressing the "Operation" icon, the "Process" overview screen appears.
Pressing on a yellow or red status indicator opens a screen containing the associ-
ated and currently active alarms or warnings.
02.05.01 Fig. 9 Example for alarm messages, here the alarm archive
The status of the messages is "K", i.e. "Alarm message has arrived".
The following designations show the status of the alarm message:
Designation of alarm message status
K Alarm message has arrived

KQ Alarm message (has arrived and) has been acknowledged

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Designation of alarm message status
KQG Alarm message (has arrived, has been acknowledged) and has
gone
Acknowledging alarms and warnings
Acknowledgement key
Acknowledge active alarm messages individually or en masse,

depending on application.
 Press the icon for the acknowledgement key to acknowledge
messages and alarms.
No alarms or warnings active.
Active alarms and warnings are acknowledged with the "Acknowledgement" key.
The status of the acknowledged warnings and alarms in each case switches to
"KQ". When all active alarms and warnings have been acknowledged, the colour of
the acknowledgement key switches from red to white.
Alarm key
The "Alarm memory" screen can also be opened via the "Alarm
key" in the toolbar of the "Active alarm messages/warnings"
screen.
The "Alarm memory" shows all the alarms including active ones.
Pressing the "Alarm key" again returns you to the "Active alarm messag-
es/warnings" screen
3.5.6 Displaying active and inactive elements

In addition to the indicator colours, other colours are used for elements:
• White icons are active. They are significant for the selected screen or show the
user where he or she currently is. When pressed, the assigned function (e.g. "X"
to close a screen) is executed.
• Grey icons are inactive elements. Grey icons occur in the navigation bar. When
they are selected, the level is changed and their colour changes to white.
Displaying active and inactive elements
The white colour indicates an active element.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
The grey colour indicates an inactive element.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.5.7 Displaying icons for switching on and off

Different functions can be switched on and off. The icons used for this are shown in
white, supplemented by a green or red icon to activate or deactivate the function in
question.
Examples for icons for switching on and off
Activate process.
Disable process.
Open valve.
Close valve.
3.5.8 Displaying media in pipelines

The colours assigned to pipelines on the operating panel depend on the media be-
ing transported in them and are generally based on “ISO 2403 marking of pipelines
on seagoing ships”.
These colours are assigned to the following media:
Colour display Main colour Medium
Yellow Product
Green Water
Red Steam
Blue Air
Brown Solids
Green Centrate
Purple Polymer
Orange Acid

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
NOTE:
• Standards which deviate from this colour system may be followed on the basis
of a specific application.
• Persons with a disability in colour perception may only be able to assign these
colours to a limited extent . This should be taken into account when selecting
operating staff.
3.5.9 Displaying output fields

Measured values are shown in green typeface on a black background.
If they are assigned to a module, they are shown as follows, e.g. on the feed side:
Example: Displaying the measured values of a module
Rectangles with
• rounded corners,
• a white edge and
• green typeface on a
• black background.
Pressing on a "measured value" opens the associated screen to the analogue val-
ue.
Example: Displaying output values which are not measured values
Other output values or display values

which are not measured values are
shown in white typeface on a black
background.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.5.10 Displaying input fields

Input fields are kept GEA IO-compliant with black typeface on a white background.
Example: Displaying input fields
07.00.01 Fig. 10 Example of input fields
 For changing data and entering characters, see the chapter entitled "Editing data
in input fields".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.6 Editing data in input fields

In input fields, it is possible to enter on the control panel numbers and text required
for the process.
Certain input fields are password-protected and may only be changed by author-
ised persons.
3.6.1 Opening input fields

Input fields are present in various menus.
02/01/2003 Fig. 11 Example: Opening input fields
3.6.2 Changing values in input fields
Changing a value in an input field
 Press on the white input field to change values.
The numerical or alphanumerical input field for manual entry appears on the
screen.
Manual input of numerical values
Manual input
 Press on keys to enter values.
 Press the ENTER key.

The value entered is saved.
Display switches back to previous page.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the
previous menu level.
Manual input of alphanumerical data
Manual input
 Press keys to enter text or numbers.
 Press the ENTER key.

The value entered is saved.
Display switches back to previous page.
Exit input field

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.7 Password protection

Certain entries and functions are only possible after entering a password.
• Company-related basic settings (password level 1)
• Readout of CPU data (password level 2)
When selecting enter the required pass-

word after being asked to do so.
NOTE: You can obtain the password
from GEA Westfalia Separator.
If no operation is carried out for 10
minutes, the programme returns to entry
level 0 (logout). For further processing
the password has to be entered again.
Fig. 12
IMPORTANT: However, the menu opened now is not protected. This means that
unauthorised persons can make changes in this menu.
To protect the control unit against unauthorised access, go back in the menu until
only the freely accessible menus are shown on the display.
3.8 Commissioning
The Start-up assistant includes assistance systems which support both initial
commissioning of the machine and optimisation of the machine's performance
characteristics.
Further assistants can be installed here depending on machine type and applica-
tion, sales & marketing requirements or customer requirements.
Opening the Start-up menu

 Press the "Start-up" icon in the navigation bar.
The icon changes colour from grey (inactive) to white (active).

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
01:00 Fig. 13 Example of commissioning menu
Commissioning menu
1.1 Factory settings Machine-specific default settings.
NOTE: This area is password-protected and

accessible only to authorised persons.
1.2 I/O test Digital and analogue inputs and outputs can be
tested, see section entitled "I/O check".
1.5 Data backup Contents of the menu:

• Data backup on memory card,
• load data from memory card
• Reset data to factory settings
1.6 User management As soon as a user has registered with his

password, he is entered in a list of users in the
user management system.
For further information, see chapter “User Man-
agement”.
The start-up menus are standard in all controls.
3.9 Commissioning (Easyline)

NOTE: For the separator series Easyline with the types Easycream, Easyrefine
and Easyclear, settings must be carried out after the initial commissioning of the
operating device. These are described in chapter Operation / Initial Commission-
ing (Easyline).

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.10 Factory settings

Basic settings to the machine or system before initial commissioning are made in
the menu “Factory Settings”.
These settings can be made at the following locations:
• On GEA test rigs
• During the switch cabinet test
• At the customer’s premises
Changes to factory settings are password-protected and can only be made by
trained specialists if the following conditions are met:
• All machine-specific GEA safety instructions have been noted and complied
with.
• The associated machine record is available and has been followed.
• The customer-specific installation is understood and has been followed.
Settings in the factory settings are made on a menu-guided basis. The user is led
systematically step-by-step through the values to be set. All the values which have
to be set once can be found in the factory settings.
Values which only have to be changed in exceptional circumstances are likewise
stored here.
 Switch on the operator panel and wait until the project starts.
Opening the "Start-up" menu.
 Press the "Start-up" icon in the navigation bar.
The icon changes colour from grey (inactive) to white (active).
Opening the "Factory settings" menu
1.1 Factory settings  To display the “Factory Settings” menu, press

the factory settings icon.
NOTE: This area is password-protected and

accessible only to authorised persons.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
1.1.01 Fig. 14 Example: Factory settings
 To change data, press the respective input field and select the desired data in
the selection window.
Accept and save selection
 Press the icon to accept and save the selection.
To navigate in the menu
 Press arrow for next page.
 Press arrow for previous page.
NOTE: This table lists examples of some general works settings for the
skid/machine together with a a description of their meaning. Further machine-
specific details are given in the machine-specific manual of the GEA IO.
Basic machine values
Designation input field Description
Process This is where the fields of application of the

machine/plant can be selected, e.g. chemi-
cals/pharma, milk/whey, drinks etc.
Machine type Press input field to select the type of installed
centrifuge according to the application, e.g.
Easyscale or FSD 10.
…

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Basic machine values
Designation input field Description

…
…
Machine type Enter the machine type e.g. RSE 50
Machine no. Enter the machine no. / serial no.
Software no. Current software no.
Schematic no. Current schematic no.
 Press the icon to return to the Start-up Assistant overview.
Backup data
 Press on the field “1.5 “Data backup” to open the “Data backup”
menu.
 Press on the memory card icon in the area “Save commissioning
data on a memory card”.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.11 I/O check

NOTE: These specifications are examples. Further descriptions are set out in the
machine-specific control manuals.
In this menu, it is possible to open and test all digital and analogue inputs and out-
puts.
The I/O functions can differ depending on the various applications. The assignment
of the I/O functions is visible in plain text on the current wiring diagram of the con-
trol device, and is essential for the test described below.
NOTE: Access to the menu is password-protected and requires the name of the
user and their password
Open menu I/O check
1.2 I/O test  Press icon to open the I/O menu.
01/02/2000 Fig. 15 I/O check portal
 Press the designations to open the inputs or outputs.

All inputs and outputs are grouped numerically and their individual statuses dis-
played.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Digital inputs:
1.2.1.01 Fig. 16 Example for displaying the inputs DI 0.0 to1.xx
Digital outputs:
1.2.2.01Fig. 17 Example for displaying the outputs DQ0.0- DQ 1.xx
An icon in the form of a square shows the status of the signal and links to the rele-
vant screen.
NOTE:
Only the input numbers are displayed, e. g. DQ0.0. The precise designation (input
assignment) of the signal is contract-specific and can be found on the wiring sche-
matic.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
The following icons are used:

Icons for inputs and outputs
Signal "0" in automatic mode.
Signal "1" in automatic mode.
Signal "Fault" in automatic mode.
Signal "0" in simulation mode/manual mode, yellow frame flashes.
Signal "1" in simulation mode/manual mode, yellow frame flashes.
Signal "Fault" when simulation mode/manual mode are switched

on, yellow frame flashes.
When any input or output is selected, the associated screen component in which
simulation or manual mode can be selected opens.
 Press the arrow to return to the previous menu item.
3.11.1 Test digital inputs
Open digital inputs
Digital inputs  Press icon to open the pages of the digital

inputs.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
1.2.1.01 Fig. 18 Example: Digital inputs
NOTE:
Only the input numbers are displayed, e. g. DQ0.0. The precise designation (input
matic.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.11.2 Test digital outputs
Open digital outputs
Digital outputs  Press icon to open the pages of the digital

outputs.
01.02.02.01 Fig. 19 Example: Digital outputs
NOTE:
Only the output numbers are displayed, e. g. DQ0.0. The precise designation (out-
put assignment) of the signal is contract-specific and can be found on the wiring
schematic.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.11.3 Test analogue inputs
Open analogue inputs
Analogue inputs  Press icon to open the pages of the ana-

logue inputs.
01.2.01.04 Fig. 20 Examples for analogue inputs
NOTE:
Only the input numbers are displayed, e. g. AI.128. The precise designation (input
matic.
 For changing data and entering characters, see the chapter entitled "Editing data
in input fields".

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.11.4 Test analogue outputs
Open analogue outputs
Analogue outputs  Press icon to open the pages of the ana-

logue outputs.
01.02.03.01 Fig. 21 Examples for analogue outputs
NOTE: Only the output numbers are displayed, e. g. AQ.64. The precise designa-
tion (output assignment) of the signal is contract-specific and can be found on the
wiring schematic.
 Press the icon to return to the overview page of the Start-up menu.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.12 Data backup
Display the “Data backup” menu
1.5 Data backup  Press field.

The login window for the input of a password is
opened.
The data backup, loading of data from a memory card or resetting to factory set-
tings is reserved to authorised persons after having entered a password.
 Enter password.
 Press again on the field “Data backup”
to open the menu “Data backup”.
 Should you have any questions, kindly
contact GEA Service, see chapter
“Service”.
Fig. 22
3.12.1 Backup data
Fig. 23
 Insert a suitable memory card in the HMI device, see chapter “HMI devices 4 –
9”.
IMPORTANT: If no saved data is available yet, the button <Load from memory
card> is hidden.
Data for the following areas can be saved or loaded in the Data Backup menu:
• Factory settings
• Commissioning data
• The latest settings

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Backup or load data or reset it to factory settings.
 Press field to backup settings to memory card.
 Press field to load settings from memory card.
IMPORTANT: Pressing the button <Load from memory card> in the column “Facto-
ry Settings” takes you to the “Presetting software” area. Further details can be
found in the chapter “Settings” and subsection “Switching on for the first time”
Returning to the Main Menu
 Press the icon to return to the input window of the “Start-up” menu.
3.13 User management

The User Management menu lists all users of the HMI device and the time that
they have used the HMI.
Display the “Data backup” menu
1.6 User management  Press on field to open the User Management

menu.
Leaving the list
 Press the icon to exit the User Management menu.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Returning to the Main Menu
 Press the icon to return to the input window of the “Start-up” menu.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.14 Operation
Open the "Operation" menu
 Press the "Operation" icon in the navigation bar.
Fig. 24 Example of operation menu, here for a separator
The overview operation screen shows the feed top left, the machine/skid in the
middle and the discharge bottom right.
NOTE: The icons displayed below are general. Machine-specific icons are de-
scribed in the respective machine-specific documentation.
Basic measured values are assigned to the following areas here:
Meaning of the Operation Menu icons
If you press "Feed", the "Feed" page is shown, e.g. feed

rates for product/water, feed paths, controls in the feed
… to the extent that these are recorded by sensors.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting feed
data".
When the centrifuge icon is pressed, the "Centrifuge"

page is displayed.
Information about the machine, including its speed and
power reserves, is also displayed.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting ma-

chine data".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Pressing the discharge icon displays the "Discharge"

page, including discharge quantities, discharge paths,
discharge controls … to the extent that these are record-
ed by sensors.
 See the section entitled "Displaying and setting dis-
charge data".
Pressing this button is powers up the machine until the standby mode
is reached.
Pressing this button stops the process stops and shuts down the ma-
chine .
Pressing this button starts the production and terminates the standby
mode
Pressing this button halts the process. Valves and pumps are shut or
stopped and the machine continues in standby mode.
Pressing this button stops the production and starts a cleaning pro-
cess (CIP).
When this button is pressed, the cleaning process is stopped (CIP)

and production is started.
When this button is visible the machine is in standby mode.

Pressing this button supplies water to the machine
When this button is visible, water is supplied to the machine.

Pressing this button blocks the water supply.
3.14.1 Display and set feed data

Display product feed rates
Display product feed data
 Press the rectangle in the main menu to display and amend

product feed data.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
02/01/2001 Fig. 25 Example: 2. Menu level, feed of a separator
Display and set feed data
 Press the pump icon to display the pump motor

screen and to edit settings.
 Press the valve icon to display the valve screen and

to edit settings.
Output field for feed temperature and icon for controller

“WXY”.
 Press the controller icon to display and modify cur-

rent control parameters and graphs of controller
characteristics.
 Press the icon to carry out settings on the product /

CIP feed.
 Press the icon to edit settings on the water inlet.
Display and set pump data
 Press the pump icon to display the pump motor

screen and to edit settings.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
07/03/2001
Fig. 26 3. Menu level: Settings for feed pump motor ,example
 Description of the icons and timer see chapter “Display “Motor” window”.
 To amend input, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to exit the screen and return to the previous
menu level.
Back
 Press the "Mode" icon to return to the overview on the first menu
level.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Show valve data
Display and set valve data
 Press the valve icon to display the valve screen and

to edit settings.
07/01/2001 Fig. 27 Window: Valve, automatic mode, example
Set manual mode, terminate automatic mode.
 Press icon to exit automatic mode and activate manual mode.

This area is protected and requires the entering of a password.
Fig. 28 Window: Valve, manual mode, example
In this window settings can be made to the timers of the valve.

 For a description of the icons and timer see chapter “Valve screen” window.
 To amend values, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Terminate manual mode, activate automatic mode.
 Press the icon to activate automatic mode.
Display product feed and control data
Display and set product feed
 Press on the analogue value “100%” to open the

analogue window of the product feed.
2.1.01. Fig. 29 Analogue window feed controller, example
 For a description of the data and designations see chapter “Display analogue in-
put” window”.
 To edit threshold values and areas, see chapter "Editing data in input fields".
Exit input field
 Press the "X" icon to return to the overview on the first menu lev-
el.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Display and adjust the product feed control data
 Press on controller symbol “WXY” to open the con-

troller analogue window.
07.04.01-1 Fig. 30 Controller window, example
 For a description of the data and designations see chapter “Display controller
window”.
 To edit threshold values and areas, see chapter "Editing data in input fields".
Feed data settings
 Press the icon to display the feed data settings.
Fig. 31 Example: “Settings” window: Feed
NOTE: These data are machine-specific and application-specific and are not de-
scribed at length here. They are described in the specific GEA IO manuals.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Activates and deactivates the feed ramping

Only selectable with dynamic feed regulation turbidity monitoring
Return to the controller window
 Press the icon to return to the Feed menu.
Navigating back
level.
Setting product/CIP feed data
 Press the icon to carry out settings on the product /

CIP feed.
2.1.3.01 Fig. 32 Example of the menu window for product / CIP feed
Return to Feed menu
 Press the icon to return to the discharge menu.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Water data settings
 Press the icon to edit settings on the water feed.
2.1.4.01 Fig. 33 Example of the menu window for product / CIP feed
2.1.4.01 Fig. 34 Example of the settings window for water feed

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Exit input field
menu level.
Back
level.
3.14.2 Displaying and setting machine data

Open second menu level

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
2. Open menu level
 Press the "Machine" icon to display machine data.
02/02/2001 Fig. 35 Example: 2. Menu level: Machine data of a separator
Control water val- Control water valves

ves
 Press on the valve icons to display the "Control water
valves" menu and edit settings.
Note: Input is protected and a password is required to
make changes.
For further information refer to the section “Setting times

for control water valves”.
Process valves Process valves
 Press on individual valve icons to open the "Valve"

screen and edit settings.
make changes.
For more information, see the section entitled "Display

"Valve" screen".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Drive motor
 Press the "!" status symbol to display alarm messages.

For the meaning of the icons refer to the section
“Alarms, warnings and message screens” in the chapter
“Getting to know the operating panel”.
 Press the green analogue value “Bowl Speed” to display
the analogue screen “Bowl Speed”
 Further descriptions see chapter “Display analogue
input screen”.

make changes.
Motor  Press on the motor icon “M” in the “motor” window.

The “Motor” screen opens.
 Further details see section “Displaying the Motor
screen”.
 Press on the analogue value “Motor Current” to display
the “ Analogue Input” screen.
- Press the input icon to display the current of the drive
motor during ejection monitoring and to specify a set
difference.
- Press the “Progression Curve” icon to display the
electric current progression curve. For further details
see chapter “Displaying the analogue input screen”.
 Press the icon to shut down the machine /plant.
 Press the icon to display the speed settings and edit timer settings
for centrifuge functions e.g. run-up time.
 For the values for speeds, timers and counters refer to the corre-
sponding GEA IO manual and the centrifuge manual.
Descriptions of the “Speed Settings” window:
No. Function Description

Speed min. If the value is undercut, the machine is shut
down.
Overspeed If the value is exceeded, the machine is shut
down.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Exiting screen
menu level.
Back one menu level
 Press the "Mode" icon to return to the first level of the operation
menu
3.14.3 Displaying and setting discharge data

From first Menu level:
 Press in a rectangle bottom right to display and edit
the discharge data.
2.3.1.00 Fig. 36 2. Menu level: Discharge menu of a separator (example)
NOTE: The display will vary depending on the sensors and/or actuators used in the
discharge. The preselection is made in the factory settings, see chapter entitled
"Description”, section “Factory Settings”.
Editing discharge settings
 Press the icon to display the “Discharge settings” screen and to

check the discharge settings.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Fig. 37 Example of settings at the discharge of a separator
 Press the icon to exit the screen and return to the previous menu
level.
Exit input field
 Press icon to exit the screen and get to the first menu level.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.14.4 Displaying alarms and warnings
 Press the status symbol to have alarm messages

displayed.
02/05/2001 Fig. 38 Example: From first + second Menu level: Displaying alarm messages
Acknowledging active alarm messages

 Press the icon for the acknowledgement key to
acknowledge messages and alarms. individually or
en masse, depending on application.
Symbol is white, i.e. all alarm messages have been

acknowledged.
 Press the "Alarm screen" icon to switch between the

"Active alarm messages" and "Alarm memory"
screens.
 Press the "info" icon to display help texts.
Exit input field

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.14.5 Opening the “Motor" screen

The “Motor” screen is divided into 3 levels.
In the top level, the system number and a free description (max. 12 characters)
about the motor are displayed, together with an icon for closing the "Motor" screen.
The next level includes the manual/automatic modes and a status display for the
motor.
In the bottom level, delay times can be set.
M004 Fig. 39 "Motor" screen
Meaning of the icons in the “Motor” screen
System number of the motor and its designation, e.g. PID

no./motor name.
Closes the “Motor” screen and displays the previous

screen.
Switch off motor.
Switch on motor.
Activate manual mode.
Activate automatic mode.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Alarm delay
 To edit input, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input

fields".
Switch-on delay

fields".
Switch-off delay

fields".
Status display of motor
Motor fault
Motor Off
Motor On
No motor feedback.
Motor in manual mode.
Motor locked or simulating.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.14.6 Opening the “Analogue input” screen

The information on the analogue input is presented in three screens (1-3).
In all three screens is the same top level, which consists of information on the ana-
logue input and the current value of the analogue input.
“Analogeingang” screen 1 is used to make basic settings for the measuring range
and the limits.
In the “Analogeingang” screen 2, the short time curve or the current curve is dis-
played below the first level.
In the “Analogeingang” screen 3, the long time archive of the measured value of
the analogue input is displayed below the first level.
Opening the “Analogeingang” screen 1
07.00.01 Fig. 40 Analogue input screen1
Description of the icons in the top level of the 3 “Analogue input” screens
System number of the analogue input, e.g. “A4”.

Right field, PID no. or name of the analogue input.
Current measured value of the analogue input with unit.
Closes the “analogue input” screen and displays the previ-

ous screen.
Description of the icons in the medium level of the 3 screens:
Setting the measuring range of the analogue

value.
Option: Compensation of the measured value (for PT 100

only).

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Description of the icons in the lower level of the 3 screens:
Limit for alarm “Low Low”.

limit
Limit for alarm “Low”.

limit
Limit for alarm “High”.

limit
Limit for alarm “High High”.

limit
Press <I> to get further information about the meaning of

the input fields in the medium and bottom level of the
screen.
Open the progression curves
Opens screen 2, curve representation of the measured

value of the analogue input, e.g. here the short time curve.
Display “Analogue input” screen 2

The “Analogeingang” screen 2 displays the short time curve of the measured val-
ue. The right-hand pane shows the current time value; the stored values move to
the left in the display. If necessary, the scaling of the time axis can be adjusted us-
ing the zoom buttons.
Fig. 41 Analogue input screen 2

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Meaning of the icons in “Analogue input” screen 2
Opens the curve representation of the measured value of

the analogue input, e.g. here the long time curve.
Zooms into the curve.
Zooms out of the curve.
Opening the “Analogeingang” screen 3

The “Analogue input” screen 3 displays the long time curve of the measured value.
The right of the screen initially shows the time value when switching to the long-
term archive. The archived values can be viewed using the arrow buttons depend-
ing on the sampling frequency. If necessary, the scaling of the time axis can be ad-
justed using the zoom buttons.
Fig. 42 Analogue input screen 3
Scrolls the long-term curve to the left.
Scrolls the long-term curve to the right.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Zooms into the curve.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.14.7 Opening the “Digital signal” screen

The “Digital signal” screen is divided into 3 levels.
The top level displays information about the digital signal and an icon for closing
the "Digital signal" screen.
The next level includes the simulation/automatic modes and a status display for the
digital signal.
D_000. Fig. 43 "Digital signal" screen
Meaning of the icons in the “Digital signal” screen
Code/designation of digital signal
Closes the “Digital signal” screen and displays the previ-

ous screen.
Alarm delay

fields".
Status display of the digital signal
No digital signal/input 0
Digital signal active/input 1
Fault
Digital signal simulating (yellow square flashing)/input 1
3.14.8 Opening the “Valve" screen

The “Valve” screen is divided into 3 levels.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
The top level displays information about the valve and an icon for closing the
"Valve" screen.
valve.
V 000. Fig. 44 "Valve" screen
Description of the icons in the “Valve” screen
System number of the valve and PID no. or valve name
Close "Valve" screen and display previous screen.
Close valve.
Open valve.
Manual mode ON.
Automatic mode ON.
Alarm delay

fields".
Alarm delay

fields".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Description of the icons in the “Valve” screen
Switch-off delay

fields".
Select NC (normally closed)
Select NO (normally open)
Status display of the valve
Valve fault.
Valve closed.
Valve open.
No valve response.
Valve in manual mode.
Valve locked or simulating.
3.14.9 Open the “Controller” screen

The “Controller” screen is divided into 4 sections.
The top level displays the system number of the controller, the measuring point
used and the manipulated variable of the controller.
The middle level contains information on the analogue input in the left section, and
on the analogue output driven by the controller in the right section.
In the lower level, the behaviour of the controller can be set.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
07.04.01-1 Fig. 45 “Controller” screen
Description of the icons in the “Regler” screen
System number of the controller.
The analogue input “A 003” is the measuring point of con-

troller “C 105”, the analogue output “Q 000” is the assigned
manipulated variable.
Closes the “Regler” screen and displays the previous

screen.
Measuring range of the analogue input “A 000”.
Actual value (controlled variable)
Current value of the analogue input.
Setpoint
Specifies the setpoint of the analogue input

fields".
Proportional coefficient (P term of the controller)
The actual value of “x” varies proportionally with the set-

point “y”. The proportional coefficient is proportional factor.
“Gain> 1” has an increasing effect
“Gain <1” has a decreasing effect

fields".

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Description of the icons in the “Regler” screen
Integral time (I term of the controller)
The integral term responds sluggishly to a deviation. Devi-

ations are added over time. The greater the integration
time, the slower the changes of the I term of the controller.
The I term makes the controller more stable but also slow-
er (more sluggish).

fields".
Calculation of control difference
The difference of nominal and actual value is the control

difference. For purposes of suppression of a minor contin-
uous oscillation due to the variable quantisation (e.g. with
a pulse-width modulation with PULSEGEN) the control
difference is guided via a deadband. With DEADB_W = 0
the deadband is switched off.

fields".
The output parameter “output signal positive impulse” is

set, if an impulse is to be emitted.

fields".
The output parameter “output signal negative impulse” is

set, if an impulse is to be emitted.

fields".
 Press icon to call up the controller graphs.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
07.04.01-2 Fig. 46 Time progression curve of the controller
 Display real time progression time progression curve.
 Stop real rime progression of the time progression curve.
 Zoom into the time progression curve.
 Zoom out of the time progression curve.
Return to the controller window
 Press icon to return to the controller window.
Back
level.
3.14.10 Open the “Step motor valve" screen

The “Step motor valve” screen is divided into 3 levels.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
The top level displays information about the step motor valve and an icon for clos-
ing the "Valve" screen.
valve.
07/01/2001 Fig. 47 Screen “Step motor valve”, automatic mode
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen
System number of the valve and PID no. or valve name
Close "Valve" screen and display previous screen.
Manual mode ON.
Automatic mode ON.
Run time of the motor control valve from 0 to 100%.

fields".
The output parameter “Output signal negative impulse” is

set for the set time.

fields".

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen

set, if an impulse is to be emitted. In case of manual mode
an impulse is emitted once.

fields".
Current position in % of the motor control valve.
Set manual mode
 Press the icon to activate manual mode.
Fig. 48 Open the “Step motor valve manual mode" screen
Settings for the timers of the step motor can be effected in this window.
 To change timer settings, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Description of the icons in the “Step motor valve” screen in manual mode

set, if an impulse is to be emitted. Pressing the button
emits a singe pulse
The valve is in manual mode.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Status display of the valve
Valve fault.
Valve closed.
Valve open.
No valve response.
Valve in manual mode.
Valve locked or simulating.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.15 Help
Opening Help and information
Open Help
 Press the “Help” icon in the navigation bar.
03.00 Fig. 49 Example: Opening the Help Desk
Help menu
3.1 Documentation Documentation relating to the job, such as the

manual, can be retrieved here.
3.2 Colour concept Details on the colour concept of the control panel,
colour allocations, notes on standards and suitable
operating staff.
 Further information on the colour concept can
be found in chapter “Getting to know the operat-
ing panel”.
3.3 Notification function Notes on the option of sending SMS or email mes-
sages from the control unit (e.g. in the event of an
alarm).
3.4 Remote access Notes on the option of visualising or controlling the

control unit via a wide variety of IT components
from your own network or on an Internet-supported
basis.
3.5 Panel settings In this menu, it is possible to make various screen

settings, such as cleaning the screen, calibrating
the screen or brightness.
3.6 Machine information In this menu different information about the system
can be displayed, e.g. serial number of the separa-
tor, date of commissioning, program number etc.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
3.7 Measurements Display machine data, measured values and set-

tings.
3.15.1 Documentation
Opening the “Documentation” help menu
3.1 Documentation Display documentation
 Press the “Documentation” icon.
03/01/2001 Fig. 50 Help: View documentation through PDF viewer (example)
NOTE: Depending on the application, various documents may be stored in the

control unit. At the USB port on the operator panel, there is the option of updating
these documents using a memory stick.
Open documentation
Open documentation
 Press the PDF icon of the desired documentation.
PDF viewer opens, the desired document is displayed.
NOTE: The 4“ monitor is not suited to display documents.
3.15.2 Colour concept
Open the “Colour concept” help menu
3.2 Colour concept Display colour concept
 Press the “Colour concept" icon.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
03/02/2001 Fig. 51 Help: Information about the colour concept of the IO operator panel (example)
 For further notes see chapter “Displaying pipeline media”.

NOTE:
• Standards which deviate from this colour system may be followed on the basis
of a specific application.
• Persons with a disability in colour perception may only be able to assign these
colours to a limited extent . This should be taken into account when selecting
operating staff.
3.15.3 Messaging function

This menu displays information about the messaging function.
Open the "Messaging function" menu
3.3 Messaging Notes on the option of sending SMS or email

messages from the control unit (e.g. in the event
of an alarm).

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
03/03/2001 Fig. 52 Help: Information about the messaging function of the operator panel( example)
NOTE: All GEA Westfalia Separator IO Operator panels provide the option of
sending SMS or email messages to fixed addresses in defined operating situa-
tions. Essentially this requires an email address for the Operator panel and a link
between the control unit and a local SMTP server. SMS messaging is also de-
pendent on the provider and the receiver's associated mobile wireless contract.
For details, please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
3.15.4 Remote operation

This menu includes information about the option of operating the panel remotely.
Opening the "Remote operation" menu
3.4 Remote operation Open remote operation
 Press the “Remote operation" icon.
03/04/2001 Fig. 53 Help: Information about remote access to the control unit( example)

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
NOTE: All GEA Westfalia Separator IO Operator panels offer the option of visualis-
ing or even operating the control unit via remote IT components (PCs, mobile
phones, tablets …). This essentially requires the control unit to be connected either
to a local network or the Internet. Additional measures (for the technical security of
this "Smart Service", for example) may be necessary depending on use.
For details, please contact GEA Westfalia Separator.
3.15.5 Screen settings

In this menu it is possible to make adjustments to the screen and call up other in-
formation.
Open the “Screen settings” menu
3.5 Screen settings Open the “Screen settings” menu
 Press the "Screen settings" icon.
This area is protected and can only be opened after entering a user name and
password.
 Enter user name and password, see chapter “Password protection”.
03/05/2000 Fig. 54 Help: Screen settings (example)
Configuring screen settings
Terminate runtime
 Press the icon to terminate the programme. The execution requires
the input of a password and is accessible only to authorised per-
sons.
Change language setting

 Press the icon, see Section “Change language”.
Cleaning the screen

 Press the icon, see Section “Cleaning the screen”.
 Clean the screen with a soft cloth.
Functions are blocked until the progress bar is complete.
Adjust the brightness

 Press the icon, see section entitled “Adjusting the brightness”.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Calibrating the screen

 Press the icon, see Section “Calibrating the screen”
Set the date and time

 Press the icon and make the desired settings.
Changing language
3.5.03 Fig. 55 Help: Screen settings - changing language (example)
Changing language
 Type to change language
Exit language setting
Cleaning the screen
Cleaning the screen
 Press the icon to clean the screen.

 Watch the screen cleaning time elapse.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Please clean the screen!
Fig. 56 Help: Screen settings: Cleaning the screen (example)
The screen should be cleaned with a soft cloth. During screen cleaning, remaining
time is indicated by a grey progress bar shrinking to the left.
 Clean the screen, see also chapter entitled “Maintenance”.
Changing the brightness
Adjust the brightness

 Press the icon, see section entitled “Adjusting the brightness”.
03/05/2002 Fig. 57 Help: Screen settings , brightness control (example)
 Enter the desired percentage value in the input field.

Max. brightness at 100 %.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
 Press the icon to save the setting.

 Press the icon to calibrate the screen.
Fig. 58 Help: Screen settings: Calibrating the screen (example)
 Briefly press the centre of the calibration target.

The calibration crosshairs are displayed at the next position.
 Proceed as outlined above for each of the following four positions of the calibra-
tion target.
When the calibration target has been contacted in all positions, the following dia-
logue is displayed:

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
03/06/2004 Fig. 59 Help: Confirm screen settings / calibration (example)
 To accept the calibration, touch the touchscreen within 30 seconds.

After touching within 30 seconds, the new calibration is saved and the display
changes back to the “Screen settings” overview screen.
Otherwise, the calibration is discarded and the original calibration is used.
Setting the time and date

 Press the icon to calibrate the screen.
03/05/2001 Fig. 60 Help: Screen settings: Display or edit time and date (example)

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
 Press on the input field.

An input keyboard is shown.
 Enter the current data using the input keyboard.
Further information, see chapter "Description”, section “Editing data in input fields".
 Press the icon to save the setting.
3.15.6 Machine information

Information about the machine/system can be retrieved in this menu.
Open “Machine information” menu
3.6 Machine information

 Press “Machine information” field.
03/06/2001 Fig. 61 Help: Display machine information (example)
The following information can be retrieved:

• Machine type
• Serial number of the machine
• Software programme number
• Wiring schematic number

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
Fig. 62 Help: Display machine information (example)
The following information can be retrieved:

• Standard HMI IP address: 10.202.55.151
• Standard HMI subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
NOTE: A smart client function is optionally available.
3.15.7 Measurements
This menu shows information on actual measured data of the centrifuge.
Open the "Measurements" menu.
3.7 Measurements Calling up measurements
 Press the “Measurements" icon.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
03/04/2001 Fig. 63 Help: Information about remote access to the control unit
Overview of all registered measured values
Measurements
Measured value: Description / Unit of measurement

Main motor current / power [A]
Bowl speed [rpm]
Product throughput [hl/h]
Discharge pressure [bar]
Turbidity [%]
Concentrate [hl/h]

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
3.16 Service
This menu provides the relevant information for servicing and maintenance of the
system, e.g. service intervals or contact data.
Open the "Service" menu
 Press the "Service" icon in the navigation bar.
04:00 Fig. 64 Open the "Service" menu
Description of the icons in the “Service” menu
4.1 Contact/hotline Contact data and hotline for GEA Westfalia Separator.
4.2 Preventative main- Information about the benefits of the GEA preventative
tenance maintenance service.
4.3 Condition monito- Information about condition monitoring of the machine
ring by GEA Westfalia Separator wewatch®.
3.16.1 Contact/hotline
Open“Contact/ Hotline” menu
4.1 Contact/Hotline  Press field to open the “Contact/Hotline”

menu.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Fig. 65
IMPORTANT: The data is filled in during start-up
Press the icon to return to the start page of the service menu.
3.16.2 4.2 Preventative maintenance
Open the “Preventative maintenance” menu
4.2 Preventative maintenance  Press field to open the “Preventative mainte-

nance” menu.
Fig. 66
The “Preventative maintenance” menu shows the service interval arranged in a cir-
cle. The next service is always at the top.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
When the date for the next service is approaching the Service icon in the naviga-
tion bar is highlighted.
Displaying the upcoming service
When the service icon in the navigation bar is flashing yellow, the
next service is due. Then there is only 10% of the interval left before
the next service.
When the service icon in the navigation bar is flashing red, the time
for the next service has arrived.
The meaning and function of the service cycle
Fig. 67
Key to the service cycle
Item Meaning
1 This service at the top is the next upcoming on 01.04.2017 or after 1500
operating hours, whichever is the sooner. Kit A (ordering instructions)
must be ready for the service.
2 The next service but one, with date or after operating hours, and the re-
quired service kits.
3 The next service but two, with date or after operating hours, and the re-
quired service kits.
4 Date and operating hours of the last service.
5 Current total operating hours

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Editing preventative service settings
Setting service dates
 Press the icon to edit preventative service settings.

This menu is restricted to service technicians and requires a pass-
word.
Fig. 68
 To change settings, see chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
Saving data changes
After all current data has been entered, press the memory card icon to
accept and save the settings.
Press the icon to return to the start page of the service menu.
3.17 Training
In this menu general information can be retrieved about centrifuges, their safety,
centrifugal separation technology and also about training offers for operating staff
run by GEA .
Opening the "Training" menu
Opening the Training menu

 Press the "Training" icon in the navigation bar.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Description
05:00 Fig. 69 Opening "Training" (example screen)
"Training" menu
5.1 Separation technology General information about separation technology

and how it is used at GEA.
5.2 GEA IO Information about the concept of the new genera-

tion of GEA IO controls.
5.3 Customer training Information on training offers.
5.4 E-Learning Information on online training offer from GEA.
3.18 GEA Westfalia Separator

In this chapter you can find information about the GEA Westfalia Separator.
Open the "Company portrait" menu
Open GEA
 Press the "Company portrait" icon in the navigation bar.

Description 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
06:00 Fig. 70 Open company portrait
IMPORTANT: Documents are only available for screen sizes above 9”.
Company profile menu
GEA Group company profile
Company profile of GEA Westfalia Separator

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Technical data
4 Technical data
4.1 Technical specifications ......................................................................... 104

4.1.1 Certificates and approvals ..................................................................... 104
4.1.2 Directives and declarations ................................................................... 104
4.1.3 Dimensional drawings of 4" Operator panel .......................................... 104
4.1.4 Technical data of the Operator panel .................................................... 104

Technical data 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
4.1 Technical specifications
4.1.1 Certificates and approvals

For certificates and approvals for the operator panel, see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
The certificates and approvals include:
• CE approval
• UL approval
• FM approval
• Ex approval
• Marking for Australia
• Marking for Korea
4.1.2 Directives and declarations

For directives and declaration for the operator panel, see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
The directives and declarations include:
• Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• ESD guidelines (electrostatic sensitive device)
4.1.3 Dimensional drawings of 4" Operator panel

For the dimensions of the Operator panel, see the manufacturer's operating in-
structions in Chapter “Technical information”.
4.1.4 Technical data of the Operator panel

The information provided here is the technical data of the 4” operator panel em-
ployed by GEA. .
For more information and details of the operator panel, see the manufacturer's op-
erating instructions in Chapter “Technical information”.
Technical data of the Operator panels
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
Weight [kg] 0.6 1.4 1.9 5.2
Active display area [mm] 4.3“ 7.0“ 9.0“ 15,4“
95x53 152x91 195x117 331x207
Resolution [Pixels] 480x272 800x480 800x480 1280x800
Number of colours up to 16 million

Brightness control Yes, value range 0 to 100 1, 0 = backlight off
Backlight [h] LED
Half brightness Life time 80000
(MTBF 2)

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Technical data
Technical data of the Operator panels
Device type
Unit 4“ 7“ 9“ 15“
Pixel error class according II I
ISO 9241-307
Function keys 4 - - -
Labelling strips Yes - - -
Usable memory for [Mbytes 4 12 12 24
user data ]
Usable memory for [Mbytes 0.512 2 2 4
Recipe data ]
Additional memory for [Mbytes 4 12 12 24
options ]
Memory card 2 x MMC/SD combination slot
Interfaces
1 x RS 422/485 [Mbps] 12
(PROFIBUS) (Applies to DP mode)
Ethernet (PROFINET) 1 x RJ45 2 x RJ45 10/100Mbps

10/100
Mbps
Ethernet (PROFINET - - - 1 x RJ45
basic functionality) 10/100/
1000
Mbps
Audio Line In and Line Out
USB 2.0 1 x Host 2 x Host
1 x De- 1 x Device
vice
Power supply
Rated voltage [DC V] 24
Permissible voltage range [V] +19.2 V to +28.8 V
Rated current [A] 0.13 0.5 0.75 1.5
Inrush current I2t [A²s] 0.5
Rating [W] 3.1 12 18 36
Max. permissible tran- [V] 35 (500ms)
sients
Minimum time between [s] 50
two
transients
Internal protection Electronic
Other
Buffered real-time clock Yes
Sound Onboard Integrated or external via Line OUT
beeper
Magnetic field strength 50/60 Hz;
100 A/m RMS

Technical data 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for the operator panel are specified in the table
in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.
Frequency range f Continuous Occasional
5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz 1 Amplitude 0.0375 mm Amplitude 0.075 mm

8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz Constant acceleration 0.5 Constant acceleration 1
g g
1) Frequency range for 4“ operator panel: 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 9 Hz
Climatic ambient conditions
Ambient conditions Permissible range Remarks
Temperature [°C]:
Vertical installation 0 to 50 °C
(Landscape)
0 to 40 °C
(Portrait) Inclination angle
Inclined installation 0 to 40 °C max. 35°
(Landscape)
0 to 35 °C
(Portrait)
Relative humidity 10 to 90%
without condensation
Air pressure 1 080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an alti-
tude of
-1000 m to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 vpm; Test : 10 cm³/m³;
Relative humidity 10 days
< 60%,
no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 vpm; Test : 10 cm³/m³;
Relative humidity 10 days
< 60%,
no condensation
Insulation test
Test voltages
The insulation strength is demonstrated by the type test using the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with rated voltage Ue rela- Test voltage

tive to other circuits or ground
24 V 520 VDC or 370 VAC
For Ethernet port: 1500 VAC

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Technical data
Protection class
Protection class I acc. to IEC 61140, i.e. earthing conductor connected to mounting
rail required!
Foreign body and water protection
Protection class Explanation

acc. to
IEC 60529
Front face in built-in condition
 IP65
 Front face only Type 4X/Type 12 (indoor use only)
Back cover IP20
Protection against contact with standard probes.
Not protected against ingress of water!
Note:
The protection class at the front can only be ensured if the mounting seal rests
completely against the mounting cut-out.

Technical data 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20

5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device ........................................................... 110

5.1.1 Safety during transport .......................................................................... 110
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures ..................................................... 110
5.1.3 Check for transport damage .................................................................. 110
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions ..................................... 110
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage ................ 110

5.1 Safe transport of the HMI device
5.1.1 Safety during transport

Note the following information for transport and storage:
• Transport the HMI device only in the original packaging.
• Note the transport instructions on the packaging.
5.1.2 Hazards from ambient temperatures

The HMI device has sensitive electronic components. The HMI device can be
damaged as a result of frost or high temperatures.
 To avoid damage, prevent the effects of frost during transport and storage.
 Avoid installing or storing the HMI device near objects with string heat radiation.
5.1.3 Check for transport damage

Check the package contents for visible transport damage and completeness.
Damaged parts
A damaged part leads to malfunctions of the operator terminal.
Do not install damaged parts included in the package.
Contact GEA Westfalia Separator if there are any damaged parts.
5.2 Conditions of transport and storage conditions
5.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of transport and storage

The HMI device exceeds the requirements of IEC 61131-2 regarding transport and
storage conditions. The following specifications apply for an HMI device that is
transported and stored in its original packaging.
The climatic conditions conform to the following standards:
• IEC 60721-3-2, Class 3K7 for storage
• IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transport
The mechanical conditions are compliant with IEC 61131-2.
Avoid condensation
If the HMI device was exposed to low temperatures or extreme temperature fluctu-
ations, moisture may condense on or inside the HMI device. Condensation may
occur. This can cause malfunction.
Before commissioning, the HMI device must be allowed to reach room tempera-
ture.
 Do not exposed the HMI device to direct heat radiation from a heater.
 In case of condensation, switch on the HMI device only after complete drying af-
ter a waiting time of approximately 4 hours.
Problem-free and safe operation of the HMI device requires proper transport, stor-
age, installation and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Failure to comply with these provisions will void the warranty of the HMI device.

6 Assembly and installation

6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection ................................. 112
6.2 Operating conditions .............................................................................. 112
6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use ............................................ 112
6.2.2 Use with additional measures................................................................ 112
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions ............................................................. 112
6.3 Specify mounting position ...................................................................... 113
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out ............................................................. 114
6.5 Installing the HMI device ....................................................................... 115
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps ........................................................................... 115
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket ............................................................... 116
6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device ........................................................................ 116
6.6 Connecting the HMI device ................................................................... 117
6.6.1 Connection instructions ......................................................................... 117
6.6.2 Equipotential bonding ............................................................................ 117
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding ................................................ 118
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply ................................................................ 119
6.6.5 Connecting the configuration PC ........................................................... 120
6.6.6 Connecting the control unit .................................................................... 121
6.6.7 Connecting a USB device ...................................................................... 121
6.6.8 Connecting a printer .............................................................................. 122
6.6.9 Connecting an audio device .................................................................. 122
6.6.10 Switching on and testing the HMI device .............................................. 123

6.1 Safety information
6.1.1 Avoid hazards during installation and connection

Choose the installation location of the HMI device.
The following must be observed when installing the HMI device:
• Position the HMI device such that it is not exposed to direct sunlight.
• Place the HMI device in a position that is ergonomically convenient to the opera-
tor.
• Choose an appropriate installation height.
• Avoid glare from light.
• Avoid covering the vents of the HMI device by the installation.
• Observe the permissible mounting positions.
6.2 Operating conditions
6.2.1 Mechanical and climatic conditions of use

The HMI device is designed for weather-protected locations. The operating condi-
tions meet the requirements according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
• Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
• Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
6.2.2 Use with additional measures

Do not use the HMI device in the following locations without additional measures:
• In locations with a high degree of ionising radiation.
• In locations with difficult operating conditions, for example by: corrosive vapours,
gases, oils or chemicals,
• strong electric or magnetic fields,
• in installations requiring special monitoring, for example, in lifts or elevators,
• in systems in particularly hazardous areas.
6.2.3 Mechanical ambient conditions

The mechanical ambient conditions for the HMI device are listed in Chapter “Tech-
nical data”.
Reducing vibrations
If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations, acceleration or the
amplitude must be reduced by appropriate measures.
We recommend to mount the HMI device or the control cabinet on damping mate-
rials, for example, elastic mounts.
Check conditions of use

Check the following points before installing the HMI device:
 standards, approvals, EMC parameters and technical information on the applica-
tion of the HMI device.

You can find this information in the following chapters:

• “Technical data”, Section “Certificates and approvals”
• “Technical data”, Section “Electromagnetic compatibility”
Check the mechanical and climatic ambient conditions for operation of the HMI de-
vice; see Chapter “Technical data”, Section “Ambient conditions”.
 See the information on the local use of the HMI device; see Chapter “Safety”,
Section “Usage notes”.
Permissible rated voltage and corresponding tolerance range:
• Rated voltage: +24 VDC
• Tolerance range: 19.2 V to 28.8 V
6.3 Specify mounting position

Determine the installation position of the HMI device; see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions for the HMI device.
• Mounting the HMI device horizontally.
For vertical installation (0° inclination

angle), a max. ambient temperature of
+50 °C is permissible, +40 °C for installa-
tion at an angle.
Fig. 71
The HMI device is designed for installation in:

• Built-in cabinets
• Control cabinets
• Control panels
• Panels
All of these mounting options are referred to as “control cabinet”.
The HMI device is self-ventilated and allowed for inclined installation up to an angle
of +/-35° in stationary control cabinets.
Damage by overheating
When installed at an angle, the convection through the HMI device is reduced,
which also lowers the maximum permissible ambient temperature during operation.
If there is sufficient forced ventilation, the HMI device can also be operated at an
inclined mounting position up to the maximum permissible ambient temperature for
vertical installation. Otherwise, the HMI device may be damaged and its approvals
and warranty may be void.

For information on the ambient conditions, see Chapter “Technical data”, Section
“Ambient conditions”.
Check clearances
Required clearance around the HMI device to ensure sufficient self-ventilation must
be maintained.
X clearance at least 15 mm.

Y clearance at least 50 mm.
Z clearance at least 10 mm.
Fig. 72
NOTE:
For installation in control cabinets and specifically in closed housings, be sure not
to exceed the permitted ambient temperature.
6.4 Preparing the mounting cut-out

The following requirements must be observed for selecting the installation location:
• The material around the cut-out must be sufficiently stable to ensure a secure at-
tachment.
• The material must not be deformed by the fastening elements, so that the re-
quired protection classes are achieved.
Protection classes
For the requirements to comply with the protection classes, see also the manufac-
turer's operating instructions for the HMI device:
• material thickness for protection class IP65 or protection class front face only
Type 4X/Type 12 (indoor use only) at the mounting cut-out: 2 mm to 6 mm
• Permissible deviation from flatness at the mounting cut-out: ≤ 0.5 mm
• This condition must be fulfilled also for the installed HMI device.
• Permissible surface roughness around the mounting gasket: ≤ 120 μm (Rz
120)

Compatibility of the mounting cut-out with other HMI devices

For mounting cut-outs of other HMI devices, see the manufacturer's operating in-
structions for the HMI device.
Dimensions of the mounting cut-out
Note:
For vertical installation, width and height
have to be changed accordingly.
Fig. 73
Dimensions of the mounting cut-outs
HMI device W [mm 0/+1]] h [mm 0/+1]

4“ 122 98
6.5 Installing the HMI device
6.5.1 Positioning the clamps

Position the clamps as shown below so that the specified protection class is
achieved.
Insert the clamps as follows:
 Position the clamps at the cut-outs, note the embossing.
 Insert one clamp into each embossing.
The table below shows the type, number and location of the clamps for the HMI
device.
Clamps at the HMI device
HMI device Clamps

Type Quantity Location on the HMI device
4“ plastic clamps 4

The following requirements must be met before installing the HMI device:
• All the packaging components and protective foils on the HMI device have been
removed.
• The mounting clamps from the accessory kit are complete.
• The mounting gasket on the HMI device is present.
6.5.2 Inserting the mounting gasket
CAUTION Property damage caused by improperly installed mounting gasket.
The assured protection class is not ensured If the mounting gasket is damaged,
twisted or protrudes beyond the HMI device.
 Check the fit of the mounting gasket; it must not be damaged, twisted or pro-
trude in order to avoid leaks.
 Replace damaged mounting gasket.
6.5.3 Inserting the HMI device
 Insert the HMI device from the front

into the mounting cut-out.
Fig. 74
 1. Insert the clamp into the cut-out

provided on the HMI device.
 2. Tighten the set screw to secure the
clamp, tightening torque 0.2 Nm.
 Repeat the steps 1 and 2 until all
clamps are installed.
 Check the fit of the mounting gasket.
Fig. 75

6.6 Connecting the HMI device
6.6.1 Connection instructions

Conditions for connection:
• The control unit is installed in accordance with the specifications of this instruc-
tion manual.
• Only use standard shielded cables for data cables.
Order of connections
Failure to follow the proper order in making the connections may cause
CAUTION
damage to the HMI device.
The HMI device may be damaged if it is not connected in the order described be-
low.
 Connect the HMI device in the order listed below.
Connect the HMI device in the following order:

• Equipotential bonding
• Power supply
 Perform a power-on test to make sure that the power supply is not connected
with reverse polarity.
• Control unit
• Configuring PC if required
• Peripherals if required
IMPORTANT:
If the HMI device ever has to be disconnected, it must be done in reverse order.
Connecting the cables

Connect the HMI device with the connecting cable to the terminal box of the asso-
ciated machine/system; see circuit diagram.
Information on the connecting cable:
 Route the cable from the HMI device to the machine/system without using the
terminal block in the control cabinet.
Only this will ensure that a proper and EMC-compliant connection of the proximity
switches is established to the evaluation unit.
 Cut excess cable length. If it is not possible to cut the cable. wrap up the cable
and secure it with cable ties.
 When connecting the cables, make sure that the contact pins are not bent.
 Secure the cable connectors to the socket with screws.
 Provide adequate cable strain relief.
6.6.2 Equipotential bonding

Differences in potential
Differences in potential can occur between spatially separated system parts. The
potential differences can lead to high transient currents over the data cables there-

by destroying their interfaces. Transient currents can develop if the cable shielding
is terminated at both ends and earthed at different system parts.
Potential differences can be caused by different power inputs.
6.6.3 Requirements for equipotential bonding

Potential differences must be reduced by means of equipotential bonding to a level
that does not affect the proper functioning of the electronic components.
When fitting the equipotential bonding, note the following:
• The effectiveness of equipotential bonding increases, the smaller the impedance
of the equipotential bonding conductor or the large the cross-section of the equi-
potential bonding conductor.
• If two system parts are connected to each other via shielded data cables whose
shields are both connected to the protective earthing conductor, the impedance
of the additional equipotential bonding conductor must not exceed 10% of the
shield impedance.
• The cross-section of an equipotential bonding conductor must be rated for the
maximum transient current. In practice, equipotential bonding conductors with a
minimum cross-section of 16 mm² have proved effective.
• Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanised steel.
• Connect the equipotential bonding conductors over a large area to the protective
earthing conductor and protect them from corrosion.
• Clamp the shield of the data cable flat to the equipotential bonding rail using a
cable tie. Keep the cable length between the HMI device and the equipotential
bonding rail as short as possible.
• Route the equipotential bonding conductor and data cables parallel to each oth-
er with minimum clearance.
Connection diagram
CAUTION Unsuitable cables may damage interface components.
Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding. Equipotential bonding

conductors must have a minimum cross-section of 16 mm², otherwise the interface
modules can be damaged.
 Use only prescribed equipotential bonding conductors.

Connection of equipotential bonding by the example of the 7" HMI device.
Fig. 76 Equipotential bonding by the example of the 7" HMI device.
1 Earth connection
2 Cable tie
3 PROFIBUS data line
4 PROFINET data line
5 Equipotential bonding conductor
6 Equipotential bonding rail
7 Control cabinet
6.6.4 Connecting the power supply
Damage to the HMI device by external voltages or excessive operating volt-

CAUTION
ages.
There is a risk of property damage, if the connection voltages do not match the
specifications on the nameplate of the HMI device. Potential-free contacts of cou-
pling relays carry external voltages that need to be considered.
 Connect the HMI device only to voltages that are specified on the nameplate in-
side the HMI device.
 Only use power supplies with DC 24V supply voltage and safe electrical isolation
in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41 (VDI 0100, part 410), for
example, according to PELV standard.
For a non-isolated system setup:
Connect the GND 24V port of the 24V power supply output to the equipotential
bonding for uniform reference potential. Choose a central connection point if possi-
ble.

Power supply connection diagram
 Note when connecting:

The electrical mains terminal for connec-
tion of the supply voltage is included in
the accessory kit.
The electrical mains terminal is rated for
cables with a cross-section of max.
1.5 mm².
 Do not tighten the cable fastening
screws of the mains terminal with a
screwdriver, if it is already plugged into
the HMI device.
Fig. 77 The pressure by the screwdriver might
damage the socket in the HMI device.
Reverse polarity protection

The HMI device has reverse polarity protection.
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

The uninterruptible power supply is connected to the 24V input and to a type A
USB port on the HMI device.
When connected to the USB interface of the HMI device, the following uninterrupti-
ble power supplies are supported:
SITOP DC UPS modules from a current rating of 6 A, e.g. 6EP1931-2DC42
For details on the uninterruptible power supply, refer to the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions.
6.6.5 Connecting the configuration PC

Connection diagram
 Refer to Chapter “Technical data” for a

description of the interfaces.
1 = connection to the configuration PC
via USB type Mini-B.
2 = connection to the configuration PC

via PROFINET (LAN).
Note:
Alternatively, the HMI device can also be
connected to the configuration PC via
PROFIBUS. However, the transfer
speeds are lower, the transfer times
Fig. 78 longer.
Information on the USB type Mini-B

Note the following points before using the USB type Mini-B:
• The USB type Mini-B interface is suitable only for commissioning or mainte-
nance purposes.
• For connecting to the USB type Mini-B interface, a USB 2.0 certified cable is re-
quired.
• Max. USB cable length is 1.5 m.

 Switch off the HMI device.

 Connecting the configuration PC
 Connect the PROFINET interface or USB type Mini-B with the configuration PC.
 Note for the USB connection:
- Connect the USB Mini-B connector to the USB Mini-B socket of the HMI de-
vice.
- Connect the USB A plug to a free USB interface on the configuration PC
 Switch on the HMI device.
IMPORTANT:
For further details on connecting the configuration PC, see the operating instruc-
tions of the manufacturer of the HMI device, e.g., assigning an IP address, updat-
ing the operating system, or connecting several HMI devices.
6.6.6 Connecting the control unit

Connection diagram
Malfunction if control is connected to the HMI device with non-approved ca-

CAUTION
bles.
The use of non-approved cables for connecting a control may cause malfunctions.
 Use only approved cables to connect a control.
 Standard cables are available for cou-

pling. For details see the operating in-
structions of the manufacturer of the
HMI device.
1 = connection to control via PROFIBUS
2 = connection to control via PROFINET

(LAN)
Fig. 79
For more information on connecting a control, refer to the operating instructions of

the manufacturer of the HMI device, for example on connecting via PROFINET.
6.6.7 Connecting a USB device

Note the following when connecting to the USB type A interface:
• The USB type A interface is not suitable for commissioning.
• A USB 2.0 certified cable is required.
• Max. USB cable length is 1.5 m.
• Malfunction of the USB interface.
• Note the maximum load to avoid overloading USB interface with excessive cur-
rent.
For more information on connecting to the USB type A interface, refer to the oper-
ating instructions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.

The following devices can be connected to the USB type A interface of the HMI
device:
• External mouse
• External keyboard
• Printer
• USB memory stick
• Industrial USB hub 4
The industrial USB hub 4 can be obtained from GEA Westfalia Separator if re-
quired.
6.6.8 Connecting a printer
Malfunctions can occur when using connection cables without a metallic

CAUTION
braid shield.
If lines are used without a metallic braid shield between the HMI device and the
printer, malfunctions may occur.
 Use only connecting cables with metallic shields earthed at both end.
The figure shows the connection be-

tween the printer and the HMI device.
Note:
For further details on connecting a printer
to the HMI device, refer to the operating
instructions of the manufacturer.
Fig. 80
6.6.9 Connecting an audio device
CAUTION Interference when cable is connected to “Line Out” port.
If an audio device is connected to the “Line Out” port, the connecting cable of the
audio device may cause increased interference.
 Use inadequately shielded audio devices, such as headsets and headphones, at
the “line-out” port only during commissioning.
If audio devices are used during production operation, the connecting cables of this
audio equipment must be shielded such that the current guidelines for interference
emission are adhered to.
The following ports can be used for audio devices:
• “Line Out”, for example, for active speakers or other audio amplifiers.
• “Line In” for audio sources with line-in level.

IMPORTANT:
For more information on connecting audio devices, refer to the operating instruc-
tions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.
6.6.10 Switching on and testing the HMI device

 Switch on the power supply.
After switching on the power supply, the monitor screen lights up.
An animated graphic is displayed during the start-up process.
If the HMI device does not start, the wires on the mains terminal may be reversed.
 Check the connected wires and change their connection if necessary.
After starting the operating system, the loader is displayed.
Under the following conditions, the HMI device automatically enters “transfer”
mode during commissioning:
• No project is defined on the HMI device.
• At least one data channel is configured.
Meanwhile, the transfer is performed.
If the transfer is to be aborted, use the “Cancel” button.
The loader appears again.

IMPORTANT:
When restarting the system, a project may already exist on the HMI device. The
project will then start after an adjustable delay time or via the “Start” button.
The project is exited with the appropriate control object.
Refer to the system documentation for more detailed information.
Function test
After commissioning, run a functional test.
If any of the following conditions occurs, the HMI device is functional:
• The “Transfer” dialogue box is displayed.
• The loader is displayed.
• A project is started.
Switching off the HMI device

Exit the project on the HMI device before the HMI device is turned off.
The following options are available to switch off the HMI device:
• Cut off the power supply.
• Pull out the mains terminal on the HMI device.


8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device ............................................................. 126

7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel ............................................... 126
7.2 Visualisation file in the HMI device ........................................................ 128
7.2.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”) ............................................. 128
7.2.2 Backing up the current visualisation ...................................................... 132
7.3 Set IP address ....................................................................................... 136

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
7.1 Parameterizing the HMI device

The following parameters can be set for the HMI device; see the operating instruc-
7.1.1 Displaying functions of the control panel
After starting the HMI device, the “Start

centre” is displayed.
If a project (operating program of the

machine/system) exists in the HMI de-
vice, it is automatically started after a
delay time.
If the button “Settings” is pressed during

the delay time, an overview page opens
in the operating system of the HMI de-
vice. All symbols shown there are listed
and described below.
Fig. 81
The following parameter can be shown and set on the overview page in the operat-
ing system of the HMI:
Setting option in the operating system of the HMI device
Symbol Description
Import and delete certificates.
Set date and time.
Change the monitor settings.
Configure the on-screen keyboard.
Change general Internet settings.

Set proxy server.
Change security settings.
Set the character repeat.
Set double-clicking characteristics.
Change network settings.
Change login data.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Settings
Display system data of the HMI device.
Change password protection.
Change print settings.
Activate PROFINET services.
Country-specific settings
Set the screen saver.
“Service & Commissioning”

Backup to an external storage device.
Restore from an external storage device.
Enable sound and adjust sound volume.

Assign a sound to an event.
View system settings.

View memory allocation.
Set the computer name of the HMI device.
Configure the data channel.

Set the delay time.
Set the storage location.
Change MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings.
Switch on the uninterruptable power supply.
Status of the uninterruptible power supply.
Change e-mail settings.

Configure Telnet for remote control.
 For more information on settings, refer to the operating instructions of the manu-
facturer of the HMI device.

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
7.2 Visualisation file in the HMI device

It is possible to load a new program of the visualisation interface into the HMI de-
vice without a programming device (“Restore”) or to store the current program
stored on a storage medium as a backup (“Backup”).
7.2.1 Restoring a new visualisation (“Restore”)
Fig. 82
1 Slot “X51”
2 HMI Memory Card, SD Card
 Disconnect power to the control.

 Import the HMI memory card (2) into the “X51” slot (1).
IMPORTANT: Alternatively, the visualisation can also be updated from other stor-
age media, such as a USB stick. The restore procedure is then analogous to the
process described here. Only the selection of the storage medium is to be adapted.
 Switch the power back on.
The loader is briefly displayed in the start phase of the operator panel.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Settings
 Touch “Settings” button in the “Start

centre”.
An overview screen in the operating sys-
tem of the HMI device opens, which is
shown below.
Fig. 83
Fig. 84
 Open the “Service & Commissioning” button with a double-click.
 Touch the “RESTORE” button to start

the “Restore a visualisation” operation.
 Touch the “Next” button.
Fig. 85

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Multiple storage media can be connected

to the controller. The available storage
media are displayed.
 Select the desired-storage medium.

Only then the next step can be executed.
Fig. 86
The visualisation files available on the

selected storage medium are scanned
and listed automatically in a new screen.
Fig. 87
 Select the desired visualisation file.

Only then further options are available.
 Touch the “Restore” button to restore
the selected visualisation file.
When selecting the “Details” button,
properties of the selected file are availa-
ble.
Fig. 88
IMPORTANT: The “Delete” button is used to delete the selected file from the stor-
age medium.
Selecting the “Details” and “Delete” buttons opens another screen that can be
closed by touching the “X” icon.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Settings
Touching the “Restore” button opens the

screen shown here with an additional
security prompt.
 When you touch the “Yes” button, the

visualisation currently stored in the
panel visualization is deleted and re-
placed with the previously selected
new visualisation file from the storage
medium.
Fig. 89
The storage process is automatic and

may take a few minutes. The status of
the process is displayed by a progress
bar.
Fig. 90
When the restore operation is complete, the system displays an appropriate mes-
sage in an additional screen.
 Touch the “OK” button to confirm.
The panel will then automatically reboot, which may take a few minutes.

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
7.2.2 Backing up the current visualisation
Fig. 91
1 Slot “X51”
2 HMI Memory Card, SD Card

 Import the HMI memory card (2) into the “X51” slot (1).
IMPORTANT: Alternatively, the visualisation can also be updated from other stor-
age media, such as a USB stick. The backup procedure is then analogous to the
process described here. Only the selection of the storage medium is to be adapted.
 Touch “Settings” button in the “Start

centre”.
An overview screen in the operating sys-
tem of the HMI device opens, which is
shown below.
Fig. 92

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Settings
Fig. 93
 Open the “Service & Commissioning” button with a double-click.
 Touch the “BACKUP” button to start

the “Backup the current visualisation”
operation.
Fig. 94
Multiple storage media can be connected

to the controller. The available storage
media are displayed.
 Select the desired-storage medium.

Only then the next step can be executed.
Fig. 95

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
The selected storage medium is first

scanned and the contents are automati-
cally listed in a new screen.
Fig. 96
The files available on the selected stor-

age medium are listed.
 Touch the “Backup” button to save the

current visualisation as a file on this
storage medium.
Fig. 97
The settings shown here are recom-

mended to backup the current visualisa-
tion.
 Touch the “File name” input screen.
Fig. 98

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Settings
Fig. 99
 Enter a file name for the backup of the current visualisation file.
The storage process is automatic and

may take a few minutes. The status of
the process is displayed by a progress
bar.
Fig. 100
When the restore operation is complete,

the system displays an appropriate mes-
sage in an additional screen.
The panel will then automatically reboot,

which may take a few minutes.
Fig. 101

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
7.3 Set IP address

For using data communication with the HMI device, connection to existing net-
works/systems or commissioning of replacement components, it may be necessary
to set the IP address of the HMI device.
This is possible on the HMI device without additional hardware.
IMPORTANT: When setting the IP address of the HMI device, be sure to observe
also the IP address assigned to the control (CPU) to avoid compromising the
communication between the HMI device and the CPU.

 Touch the “Control Panel” button in the

loader.
An overview page opens in the operating
system of the HMI device, see image
below.
Fig. 102
Fig. 103
 Open the “Transfer” button with a double click.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Settings
To transfer data, settings can be made

for different selectable data connections
in this screen.
The default data transfer method of the
IO control is “Ethernet”.
 Touch the “Properties...” button to

configure the properties of the Ether-
net connection.
Fig. 104
 Touch the “PN_X1” button to select the

Ethernet interface to be configured.
Fig. 105
Fig. 106
In the settings screen of the Ethernet interface, enter the “IP Address” and the as-
sociated “Subnet Mask”.

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
 Touch input fields to open the alphanumeric keyboard.
Fig. 107 Keyboard display for input
IMPORTANT: The alphanumeric keyboard can be moved on the screen so the in-
put field remain visible during the entry.
Move alphanumeric keyboard on the menu image
 Press symbol and move while pressing to position the keyboard.
 Accept the input by double-clicking on the designated area of the keyboard.

 After finishing the entry, exit the settings screen with “OK”.
Fig. 108
 Press button “X” to close the configuration page

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Settings
 Close the settings screen by touching

the “OK” or “X” button.
Fig. 109

Settings 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Commissioning
8 Commissioning

8.1.1 Safety during commissioning................................................................. 142
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device ............................................................. 142
8.2.1 Program memory ................................................................................... 142
8.2.2 Front panel controls ............................................................................... 144
8.3 Setting the CPU to RUN mode .............................................................. 144
8.4 Using the service concept ..................................................................... 146
8.4.1 Activating the service concept ............................................................... 146
8.4.2 Replacing HMI device ............................................................................ 146
8.4.3 Deactivating the service concept ........................................................... 146
8.5 Commissioning the project .................................................................... 147
8.5.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device .................................................. 147
8.5.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project ........................................ 147
8.5.3 Operating modes of the HMI ................................................................. 147
8.5.4 Change operating mode ........................................................................ 147
8.5.5 Possibilities of data transfer ................................................................... 148
8.5.6 Set transfer mode .................................................................................. 148
8.5.7 Start transfer .......................................................................................... 149
8.5.8 Test project ............................................................................................ 150
8.5.9 Backup and restore data ....................................................................... 151
8.5.10 Update operating system ....................................................................... 151
8.5.11 Manage options and license keys ......................................................... 151

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
8.1 Safety information
8.1.1 Safety during commissioning

Commissioning
The commissioning of the HMI device serves to import project data and enter op-
erating parameters, if this has not already been done at the factory. This may only
be performed by trained personnel of the operator or by service personnel or by
commissioning personnel of GEA Westfalia Separator.
Follow the commissioning check list for the machine/system

To commission the machine/system with the HMI device, follow the check list of the
machine/system and perform the necessary tests; refer to the operating instruc-
tions of the machine/plant, Chapter “Commissioning”.
8.2 Commissioning the HMI device
8.2.1 Program memory

The HMI device uses the following memory types:
• Internal memory
• Memory card
• System memory card
• USB mass storage
Internal memory
The following data is stored in the internal memory:
• Operating system
• Project file
• Licence keys
• User management
• Control program
Note:
Cyclic write access to internal memory is not allowed; see the operating instruc-
Use only external memory cards for the storage of data and archives.
Memory card
The following data is stored on the memory card:
• Archives
• Backups
• Control program
Standard SD(IO/HC) or MMC type commercial memory cards can be used. For da-
ta consistency, we recommend memory cards of the manufacturer; see the operat-
ing instructions of the manufacturer of the HMI device.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Commissioning
NOTE:
Data consistency:
• If the HMI device is switched off, consistency of stored data is only ensured for
the 2 GB or higher memory card recommended by the manufacturer.
• In commercially available memory cards, shutdown of the device may result in
the loss of stored data, e.g. due to a power outage.
• In archives, consistency of the stored data is only ensured if you use the RDB
format.
System memory card

The system memory card is part of the service concept of the HMI devices. If the
service concept is enabled, all data in the internal memory of the HMI device are
transferred to the system memory card.
If the HMI device fails, insert the system memory card into the replacement device.
In this way, downtime of your machine/system is reduced to a minimum.
The system memory card is not visible in the user interface of the HMI device and
is not available for data storage.
In order to be recognised by HMI device, insert the system memory card into the
slot provided.
NOTE:
Format of the system memory card:
• Only the 2GB or more memory card offered by the manufacturer is allowed as
system memory card. All other memory cards are not recognised as system
memory card by the HMI device.
Slots for memory cards and system memory cards

On the 4" HMI device, the slots for memory cards and system memory cards are
on the side of the housing.
On the 7" to 15" HMI device, the slots are on the rear of the housing. The memory
cards and system memory cards are therefore accessible from the rear inside the
control cabinet.
Memory cards and system memory cards are protected by a safety latch.
Memory cards and system memory cards can be inserted and removed during op-
eration of the HMI device.
Replacing the memory card

Memory cards and system memory cards are protected by a safety latch.
Memory cards and system memory cards can be inserted and removed during op-
eration of the HMI device.
CAUTION Potential data loss if memory card is pulled out during data transfer.
If the HMI device is accessing data on the memory card when pulling the memory
card, the data may be destroyed on the memory card.
 Do not pull the memory card during data access.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
 Note corresponding messages on the screen.
NOTE: The project is terminated if the system memory card is pulled out during a
running project.
Prerequisite
There is no write access to the memory cards.
Replace the memory card as follows:

 Move the safety latch to the appropriate position.
 To remove the memory card and/or system memory card, briefly push on the
card.
The card is released and can be removed.
This step does not apply during commissioning.
 Insert the new memory card and/or system memory card.
 Move the safety latch back into the original position.
After the system memory card has been inserted, the HMI device will prompt the
operator to enable the service concept.
The memory card and/or system memory card is swapped.
For more details, refer to the manufacturer's instruction manual for the HMI device.
8.2.2 Front panel controls

The front panel controls are described in Chapter “Description”, Section “Getting to
know the GEA IO user interface”.
 Read the description of the touch user interface in Chapter “Description”, Sec-
tion “Getting to know the GEA IO user interface”.
8.3 Setting the CPU to RUN mode

If the CPU (Central Processing Unit) has to be restarted after a program change or
update, depending on the scope of the change, it does not happen automatically
after switching on and HMI start-up. The CPU has to be manually started from the
HMI as follows:
Open the "Start-up" menu.
 Press the icon to display the overview page of the Start-up menu.
1.2 I/O check  Press in the field to display the "I/O check" start page.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Commissioning
Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert

Fig. 110
Setting the CPU to RUN mode
 Press the icon to start the “CPU” menu.
IMPORTANT: This page can only be accessed if the CPU is in stop mode.
Fig. 111
Starting the CPU
 Press the button to restart the CPU.

This process can take some time.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Fig. 112
The CPU is running.
Exiting the menu
8.4 Using the service concept

If the service concept is activated, the HMI device saves all the necessary operat-
ing data on the system memory card. The system memory card can be used in any
device of identical design. Once the data have been copied and the HMI device
has been re-started, it is ready for operation.
IMPORTANT: System memory cards can only be used in HMI devices of identical
design.
8.4.1 Activating the service concept

Service concepts may only be activated by authorised persons.
For more detailed information, see the chapter of the same name in the manufac-
turer's manual for the HMI device.
8.4.2 Replacing HMI device

HMI devices may only be replaced by authorised persons.
8.4.3 Deactivating the service concept

If you do not want to continuously back up the data of an HMI device to a memory
card for information security reasons, the service concept can be deactivated.
Service concepts may only be deactivated by authorised persons.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Commissioning
8.5 Commissioning the project
8.5.1 Transfer the project to the HMI device

To visually display automated work processes, a project, the image of the work
process, is programmed. Thus the term project stands in this text for the operating
programme of the machine/system.
Projects must only be transferred to the HMI device by authorised persons and
transfer processes are password protected.
There are the following possibilities to transfer a projet to the HMI device:
• Transfer from the projecting PC.
• Restore via ProSave from a PC.
Here a saved project is transferred from a PC to the HMI. It is not necessary that
the projecting software is installed on this PC.
• Insertion of a system memory card filled with project data from an identical HMI.
For further information, see “Activate service concept” in the manufacturer's manu-
al for the HMI device.
• Restoring from an external storage medium from an identical HMI (restore).
8.5.2 Initial commissioning and restart of a project

Initial commissioning
On initial commissioning there is no project in the HMI. This is also the case when
the operating system has been updated.
Restarting
During restarting a project already existing on the HMI is replaced.
8.5.3 Operating modes of the HMI

The following operating modes of the HMI are possible:
• Offline
• Online
• Transfer
8.5.4 Change operating mode

To change the operating mode of the HMI during the running operation, the project
engineer must have projected the associated operating objects.
Operating mode “offline”

In this operating mode there is no communication connection between HMI and
control. The HMI can be operated, however no data are transferred to the control
or received from the same. To familiarise yourself with the HMI, see chapter “De-
scription”.
Operating mode “online”

In this operating mode there is a communication connection between HMI and con-
trol. The machine/system is operated with the HMI according to the project.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Operating mode “transfer”

The following can be carried out in this operating mode:
• A project can be transferred from the projecting PC to the HMI device.
• Backup and restore data of the HMI device.
The following possibilities are available to switch the HMI device to the “transfer”
operating mode:
• When starting the HMI device
The “transfer” operating mode is started manually in the “start centre” of the HMI
device.
• In running operation
The “transfer” operating mode is started manually with an operating object within
the project. In case of automatic transfer, the HMI device changes to “transfer” op-
erating mode if a transfer is started at the projecting PC.
8.5.5 Possibilities of data transfer

A table in the operating manual of the manufacturer in chapter “Possibilities of data
transfer” shows the possible data transfers between the HMI device and a project-
ing PC.
8.5.6 Set transfer mode

The data transfer can be effected manually or automatically.
If automatic transfer is activated, the HMI device changes to the transfer mode af-
ter starting the connected projecting PC.
NOTE
In case of automatic transfer, the HMI device changes only to the “transfer” operat-
ing mode, if the project is running on the HMI device.
The automatic transfer is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project, as
the transfer is effected without intervention from the HMI device.
If automatic transfer is activated on the HMI device and if on the projecting PC a

transfer is started, the running project is automatically terminated. The HMI device
automatically changes to the “transfer” operating mode.
Deactivate automatic transfer after the commissioning phase so that the HMI de-
vice does not enter transfer mode unintentionally. The transfer mode can trigger
unintentional reactions in the system.
A password is assigned in the control panel to block access to the transfer settings
and thus avoid unauthorised modification.
Pre-conditions:
• Control panel is open.
• Runtime software is terminated.
Open dialogue “Transfer settings”

 Press button “Transfer” in the control panel.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Commissioning
 Change to “General” in register.

 Select data channel in “Transfer chan-
nel” and set via “Properties” if possible.
 Select “Automatic” to start the “Trans-
fer” operating mode automatically.
 Select “Automatic” to start the “Trans-
fer” operating mode manually.
 Close dialogue with “OK”.
 Close control panel.
 Activate the transfer mode with “trans-
fer” in the “start centre”.
Fig. 113
Result
The project is transferred to the HMI device from the projecting PC via the selected
data channel. If required, set the data channel also on the projecting PC. The data
are written to the internal memory of the HMI device.
Further information see operating manual of the HMI device’s manufacturer, e.g.
“Alternative procedure” when setting the “Transfer” operating mode and “Parame-
terise data channel”.
8.5.7 Start transfer

The project must be transferred to the HMI device so that the machine/ system can
be operated. It must be specified if the existing data on the HMI device should be
overwritten.
Preconditions for the data transfer are:
• Project is open in WinCC on the projecting PC.
• Project navigation is shown.
• Projecting PC is connected to the HMI device.
• The transfer mode is set on the HMI device.
The procedure is as follows:

 Select the command “Load in device > software" in the context menu.
 If the dialogue “Extended loading” is opened, configure the “Settings for loading”.
Ensure that the “Settings for loading” meet the “Transfer settings” on the HMI:
- – Select the protocol used, e.g. Ethernet or USB.
If you use Ethernet or PROFINET, the network address can also be configured in
WinCC in the editor "Devices & networks". Further information on this topic can be
found in the online help of WinCC.
 –Configure appropriate interface parameters at the projecting PC.
 –If required effect settings related to interfaces or protocols.
 –Click on “load".
The dialogue “Extended loading” can be opened at any time via the menu com-
mand "Online >Extended loading in device…".
The dialogue “Load preview” is opened. The project is translated at the same time.
The result is shown in the dialogue “Load preview”.
 Check shown presettings and edit if required.
 Click on “load”.
The project is not transferred to the selected HMI device.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
If errors or warnings occur during transfer, appropriate messages will be displayed

under "Info > Load".
The project can be run on the HMI device after successful transfer.
8.5.8 Test project

If a project should be tested, there are the following possibilities:
• Test project on the projecting PC.
You can test a project on a projecting PC using the simulator. Detailed information
can be found in the online help of WinCC.
• Test project offline on the HMI device.
Offline testing means that the communication is interrupted between HMI device
and control during the tests.
• Test project online on the HMI device.
Online testing means that the HMI device and control communicate with each other
during the tests.
Carry out the tests in the sequence “Offline test” and “Online test”.
Note
Always test the project on the HMI device on that the project is used.
Test the following:
 Check images for proper display.
 Check image hierarchy.
 Check input objects.
 Enter variable values.
The test increases the safety that the project runs without errors on the HMI de-
vice.
Offine test
Pre-conditions:
• Project was transferred to the HMI device.
• HMI device is in “Offline” mode.
The project can be tested without influence from the control. Control variables are
not changed.
Note
Customer-specific machine parameters/ system parameters can be entered in of-
fline test, see chapter “Description”, section “Show and edit input fields”.
Online test
Note
An online test corresponds to a test run of the machine/ system, see operating
manual of the machine/ system, section “Carry out test run”. The checks and in-
structions listed there are to be followed to prevent risks with consequences for life
and limb.
Pre-conditions:
• Project was transferred to the HMI device.
• HMI device is in “Online” mode.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Commissioning
• Customer-specific parameters were checked and updated, if needed.

• I/O test was carried out and all errors rectified.
The project can be tested with influence from the control. Control variables are
changed.
8.5.9 Backup and restore data

During backup the contents of the internal memory are stored.
Message archives and process value archives are not backed up. If required, the
contents of the external memory card must be backed up manually.
If the HMI device is integrated in a network, the data can also be backed up to a
network drive.
The following data are backed up:
• Project and HMI device image
• User management
• Recipe data
• Licence keys
Use WinCC for backup and restore.
NOTICE Data loss possible in case of power cut.
If complete restoring is interrupted by a power cut at the HMI device, the operating
system of the HMI device can be deleted. In this case, reset the HMI device to fac-
tory settings. The operating device changes automatically to “bootstrapping” mode.
 Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer
in chapter “Backup and restore”.
8.5.10 Update operating system

Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer in
chapter “Update operating system”.
8.5.11 Manage options and license keys

Further information see operating instructions of the HMI device’s manufacturer in
chapter “Options and license keys”.

Commissioning 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Operation
9 Operation
9.1 Operate device IO.................................................................................. 154

9.1.1 Use on-screen keyboard ....................................................................... 154
9.2 Initial Commissioning (Easyline)............................................................ 154
9.2.1 Select user language ............................................................................. 155
9.2.2 Setting the time ...................................................................................... 155
9.2.3 Selecting the software ........................................................................... 156

Operation 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
9.1 Operate device IO

After starting the HMI device, the “Start centre” is displayed automatically. If an op-
erating programme is available on the HMI device, it is automatically started after
the delay time.
NOTE: The display of the “Start centre” is part of the initialisation of the HMI device
after switching on. It can take up to 40 seconds and should not be interrupted
manually.
If the “Start centre” is operated during this delay time, the project is no longer start-
ed automatically.
If “Runtime” is terminated on the HMI device or if the Windows CE desktop is faded
it, the “Start centre” is opened automatically.
The figure shows “Start centre” with ver-

sion details in title bar.
Fig. 114
Depending on the software installed, other icons can be shown in the status bar of
the desktop.
9.1.1 Use on-screen keyboard

The on-screen keyboard can be used to enter values on an HMI device with touch
screen.
The on-screen keyboard is operated like a normal keyboard.
If an operating object with value input is touched, the on-screen keyboard opens
automatically. Depending on the operating object, either the alphanumerical or
numerical on-screen keyboard will open.
The appearance and the layout of the on-screen keyboard depends on the HMI
device used.
Depending on the configuration in the control panel, the on-screen keyboard can
be moved or its size can be changed.
Further information on on-screen keyboards for touch screens can be found in the
operating manual of the HMI device’s manufacturer in the eponymous chapter.
9.2 Initial Commissioning (Easyline)

NOTE: These chapters and the settings apply only to the separator series
Easyline with the types Easycream, Easyrefine and Easyclear.
When the control is switched on for the first time, the HMI device must be config-
ured with the basic settings.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Operation
9.2.1 Select user language
Fig. 115 Menu presetting language (example)
Language setting
 Keep pressing the icon until the desired language is displayed.
Navigate to the next menu item
9.2.2 Setting the time
Fig. 116 Menu presetting time (example)

Operation 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Set the date and time
local set  Press in the input field <local set value>.

value  To edit input, refer to chapter entitled "Editing data in input fields".
 Press the icon to save the entries and update the display.
Navigate to the next menu item
9.2.3 Selecting the software
Fig. 117 Menu presetting software (example)
 Enter the number of the circuit diagram, see documentation of the machine /
system.
After the number of the circuit diagram was entered, all associated settings are au-
tomatically adopted.
 Press the accept key to confirm the entries, to save them and to
proceed to the next menu page.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Operation
Select further options
Fig. 118
Fig. 119 Selection window software (example)
 Enter in menu:
- Machine type
- Machine no.
- Software no.
- Schematic no.
Save settings
 Press the icon to save the presettings.
Presetting has been finalised.

Operation 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
Menu end presettings
 Press the icon to exit the Presetting menu.
NOTE: The Presetting menu can be opened at any time via the 1.0 Startup
menu.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Trouble shooting
10 Trouble shooting
10.1.1 Status and fault indication ..................................................................... 160

Trouble shooting 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
10.1.1 Status and fault indication

NOTE: The control cabinet may only be opened by appropriately qualified person-
nel.
The processor is located on the mounting plate in the control cabinet.
Fig. 120
The operating mode indicator (1) indicates the different operating modes by way of
colour-coded LEDs. The states of the digital inputs integrated in the processor unit
are indicated via LEDs (2). The same apples for the digital outputs(3).
Fault and status are indicated by the following LEDs:
Fault and status indication of the LEDs
Display Meaning
RUN / STOP (green • Yellow continuous light indicates the operating state
/ yellow) STOP.
• Green continuous light indicates the operating state
RUN.
• Flashing (green and yellow alternately) indicates that
the CPU is in the operating mode STARTUP.
ERROR (red) • Flashing indicates a fault, e.g. an internal fault in the
CPU, a fault in the memory card or a configuration fault
(incompatible modules).
• A red continuous light indicates defective hardware.
• All LEDs flash when a fault is identified in the firmware.
MAINT (green) • Flashing, when starting the CPU, when the memory
card is inserted, during the LED test, in the case of de-
fective CPU firmware or unknown/incompatible version
of the CPU configuration.
• A green continuous light indicates that servicing is re-
quired.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Trouble shooting
Fault and status indication of the LEDs
Display Meaning
RUN (green)
Operating state RUN of the control unit CPU.
• This LED lights up when the control unit is processing
the user program.
• This LED flashes (2 Hz) during the control start-up (the
STOP LED then also lights up; when the STOP LED
goes out the outputs are released).
STOP (yellow)
Operating state STOP of the control unit CPU.
The LED:
• lights up when the control unit is not processing the user
program.
• flashes slowly when the control unit requests a master
reset.
• flashes fast when the control unit executes a master
reset.

Trouble shooting 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance ............................................... 164

11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen ...................................................................... 164
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices ...................................... 164
11.2.2 Cleaning the screen ............................................................................... 165

Maintenance 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
11.1 Preventing hazards during maintenance

The HMI device is designed for low maintenance operation. However, the touch
screen and keyboard membrane should be cleaned regularly.
Pay attention to the following points during maintenance and cleaning:
• Unintentional response
If the touch screen or an HMI device with keyboard membrane is cleaned while ac-
tivated, operating errors may be triggered.
 Switch off the HMI device or clean the touch screen during operation only in
locked condition.
 Note that the locked state of the touch screen is automatically terminated after
15 seconds.
• Damage caused by non-approved cleaning agents
The use of compressed air, steam cleaners or aggressive solvents or scouring
agents may damage the HMI device.
 Do not clean the HMI device using compressed air or steam cleaners.
 Do not use aggressive solvents or scouring agents.
11.2 Cleaning the touchscreen
11.2.1 Cleaning screen on touchscreen HMI devices

The touchscreen of the HMI device can be cleaned when switched on and with a
project running. For this purpose, a control object must be available in the project
which can be used to call up the Cleaning screen. Once the Cleaning screen has
been activated, the touchscreen is locked for operation for the projected time span.
The time span for lockout can be between 5 and 30 seconds. The time remaining
until the end of lockout is indicated by a progress bar.
Note the information below when cleaning the touchscreen.

Unintended reactions
When the touchscreen is being cleaned, touching keys may trigger an unintended
reaction in the control unit.
 If the device is running, only clean the touchscreen with the Cleaning screen ac-
tivated or switch off the HMI device.
No operation with the Cleaning screen active

If the Cleaning screen is active, the HMI device cannot be operated.
 To call up the Cleaning screen, see the chapter entitled "Descrip-
tion/Help/Screen settings/Clean screen".
 Wait for the Cleaning screen time span.
After this, the system can then be operated with the HMI device.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Maintenance
11.2.2 Cleaning the screen

A damp cleaning cloth and commercial detergent or foaming screen cleaner can be
used for cleaning.
 Switch off the HMI device or lock the touchscreen with the Cleaning screen.
 Spray detergent onto the cleaning cloth.
 Do not spray directly onto the HMI device.
 Clean the HMI device.
 When cleaning, wipe from the edge of the screen inwards.

Maintenance 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Repair
12 Repair
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work ...................................... 168

12.1.2 Hazards from electricity ......................................................................... 168
12.2 Repair .................................................................................................... 168

Repair 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
12.1.1 Preventing hazards in the case of repair work

Safety and availability of the system are dependent on proper carrying-out of re-
pairs.
Repairs may only be carried out by persons qualified to perform these activities,
e.g., technicians from GEA Westfalia Separator and personnel trained and author-
ized (certified) by GEA Westfalia Separator.
12.1.2 Hazards from electricity

The following must be observed for handling of electricity when performing repairs:
• Observe the values for the power supply specified on the system.
• Perform only repair work that is described in the manual.
• Do not touch electrical components with wet hands!
• Before working on electrical components, switch off the power supply and se-
cure it to prevent switch-on.
• Defective cables must be replaced by qualified personnel as soon as possible.
12.2 Repair
For repairs, the HMI device must be returned to GEA Westfalia Separator or to an
authorised representative.
The operator is not authorised to carry out any repairs.
Assign only a qualified specialist, such as an electrician, with disconnecting and
removing the HMI device.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Decommissioning
13 Decommissioning
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal ...................................................... 170

Decommissioning 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
13.1 Preventing hazards during disposal
Do not dispose of HMI devices as normal household waste, as dam-

age to humans and the environment is possible.
Dispose of or recycle electronic components and plastics in accordance with the

applicable rules at the location of operation.
The described HMI devices can be recycled due to their low pollutant design.
Assign a certified disposal organisation with the environment-friendly recycling and
disposal of waste equipment.

8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Spare parts
14 Spare parts
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts ............................................................... 172


Spare parts 8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20
14.1 Notes on ordering spare parts

Rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order con-
tains the following details:
• Type: see the nameplate on the rear of the HMI device
• Order number with the main item of the associated machine/system
The information must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.


marking shown.
Fig. 121


8555-9001-050 / 28.07.20 Spare parts

We live our values.
GEA Germany
59302 Oelde, Germany Fax +49 2522 77-2950 gea.com
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Werner-Habig-Str. 1 - 59302 Oelde ( Germany ) - Phone +49 2522 77-0
Customer : -
Designation of plant : -
Drawing no. : 8560-3100-359
Internal order no. : -
Manufacturer (company) : GEA Westfalia Separator
Name of project : -
Type : IO/OSE 10-0136
Language
: EN
Technical data : 380V AC 50 Hz +/-5%
Prepared 23.05.2019 Processed 23.05.2019 Applied standards : IEC 61346

IEC 61355
IEC 60617
Date 13.02.2015 Customer: - Description: =

GEA Westfalia - Rev.00
Editor Paul.Du Title- / cover sheet +
Project: - Separator
Tested DCC Bl./Sh. 1
Language: En Drawing No.:
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EAA 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents
Document type Page Page description Plant Mounting place Date Editor
&EAA 1 Title- / cover sheet 13.02.2015
&EAB 2 Table of contents 23.05.2019
&EBH 6 Revision 23.05.2019
&EDB 7 Structure identifier overview 12.09.2017
&EDB 8 Information sheet 12.09.2017
&EDB 9 Information sheet 12.09.2017
&EFS 10 Incoming =0 12.09.2017
&EFS 11 Control Voltage AC =0 23.05.2019
&EFS 12 Emergency stop =0 23.05.2019
&EFS 13 Separator =01 23.05.2019
&EFS 14 Separator =01 23.05.2019
&EFS 15 Separator speed measuring =01 12.09.2017
&EFS 16 Separator signals =01 12.09.2017
&EFS 17 Separator vibro =01 23.05.2019
&EFS 18 Separator valves =01 12.09.2017
&EFS 19 Separator sludge flap =01 23.05.2019

Editor Paul.Du Table of contents +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EAB 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents
&EFS 20 Feed Pump =11 23.05.2019
&EFS 21 Feed Pump =11 12.09.2017
&EFS 22 Product temperature control =11 23.05.2019
&EFS 23 PT Feed flow =11 23.05.2019
&EFS 25 Sludge pump =16 23.05.2019
&EFS 26 Signal exchange =100 23.05.2019
&EFS 27 PLC overview =00 12.09.2017
&EFS 29 PLC power supply =00 12.09.2017
&ELU 35 Arrangement drawing 23.05.2019
&ELU 36 Operating elements 23.05.2019
&ELU 37 Arrangement drawing 12.09.2017
&ELU 38 KTP 400 12.09.2017
&ELU 39 Emergency stop box 12.09.2017

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents
&EMA 40 Terminal diagram =0+-PE =0 23.05.2019
&EMA 41 Terminal diagram =0+-PE =0 23.05.2019
&EMA 42 Terminal diagram =0+-X1 =0 23.05.2019
&EMA 43 Terminal diagram =0+-XQ1 =0 12.09.2017
&EMA 47 Terminal diagram =01+JB-1X10 =01 +JB 23.05.2019
&EMB 53 Cable layout 23.05.2019
&EMB 54 Cable layout 23.05.2019
&EMB 55 Terminal box overview 12.09.2017
&EMB 56 Instructions for installation 12.09.2017
&EPB 57 Parts list 23.05.2019

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table of contents

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Revision overview
Revision name Rev.00
Index Device Date Author Revision description Revision on the basis of change
1 2019.05.23 Paul.Du Rev.00 As built

Editor Paul.Du Revision +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EBH 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Structure indicator
Complete name Labelling Structure descprition Complete name Labelling Structure descprition
&EAA Document type Cover sheet
&EAB Document type Table of contents
&EBH Document type Revision overview
&EDB Document type Structure indentification overview/instructions
&EFS Document type Circuit diagram
&ELU Document type Arrangement drawing
&EMA Document type Terminal connection diagram
&EMB Document type Cable layout
&EPB Document type Parts list
=0 Higher-level function Incoming
=01 Higher-level function Separator
=11 Higher-level function Feed Pump
=16 Higher-level function Sludge pump
=100 Higher-level function Signal exchange
=00 Higher-level function PLC
=Heater Higher-level function Heater
=Additions Higher-level function Addition
=Customer Higher-level function Customer
+JB Mounting location Junction box
+L Mounting location Local
+.T Mounting location
+.X Mounting location
+SB Mounting location

Editor Paul.Du Structure identifier overview +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EDB 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Instruction / specification
Control cabinet : Version:
Denomination control cabinet CC Core indentification YES
Protective rating IP54 Potential designation NO
Ambient temperature (+5) - (+50 °C) Halogen free wiring / channels NO
Cable marking plates YES
Classification
ABS, BV, CCS, DNV, GL, KR,
LRS, NKK, RINA, RMRS
Labels PLASTIC SILVER, LETTERS BLACK
Language labels en
Interface:
Bus connection to customer PLC NO
Incoming:
Main- / connection voltage

380V AC
Main frequency 50 Hz
Rotary field CLOCKWISE ROTATION
Voltage tolerance +/-5%
Cable inlet BOTTOM
Incoming redundant NO
Control voltages:
Control voltage 1 230V AC
Control voltage 2 24V DC

Editor Paul.Du Information sheet +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Wiring
Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section Electrical circuits Conductor Colour Cross-section
Main circuits L1 Black ≥ 1,5mm² Control voltage L Red ≥ 0,75mm²

230V AC
380V AC
L2 Red/white
Black " N "
L3 Black "
N Light blue ≥ 1,5mm²
PE Green / yellow ≥ 2,5mm²
Control voltage L+ Dark blue ≥ 0,75mm²

24V DC
M Blue / white
"
Analog screened + white ≥ 0,75mm²
- Brown
"
Measuring circuit white ≥ 0,75mm²
Current transformer lines Black ≥ 2,5mm²
Conductors with external voltage (AC/DC) Orange ≥ 1,00mm²

Editor Paul.Du Information sheet +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380V AC
L1 / =01/13.0
L2 / =01/13.0
L3 / =01/13.0
380V AC
L1.2 / =11/20.0
L2.2 / 11.0
L3.2 / 11.0
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 13 21

Q1
17...23A 14 22
In:18A
=100/26.1
I> I> I>

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
2 4 6
Data incoming:
PE PE -SC PE PE PE
Min. Cross-section : 4mm²
-PE
-PE
-SC
-PE
-PE
-PE
Pre-fuse : -
Max ambient temperature (+5) - (+50 °C)

-WD001 GNYE
.-J PE PE PE
4G4 mm² Max. Cable length: 50 m
Supplied by customer
1M 1T 1G
U:
380V AC
Earthing mounting plate 1

L1 L2 L3 PE f: 50 Hz
P: max. 8 kW
=Customer
Earthing Cabinet 1
+L-X Icn: 50/10 kA
Earthing Door 1
Earthing screen
Kunde
Full load current: ~18 A
Incoming
Date 12.09.2017 Customer: - Description: = 0

Editor Paul.Du Incoming +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EFS 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380V AC 380V AC
10.9 / L2.2 L2.2 / =11/20.0
10.9 / L3.2 L3.2 / =11/20.0
230V AC
L.A / =01/13.4
Primary voltage Connection (X1, X2) Setting MOP
N.A / 12.0
380VAC 380-0 1,16A 230V AC
400VAC 400-0 1,10A
L.X / 12.0
1 3 5
420VAC 420-0 1,05A
N.X / =11/20.4
-F1 440VAC 440-0 1,00A
0,90-1,25A
setting: see table 460VAC 460-0 0,96A
I> I> I> 480VAC 480-0 0,92A
2 4 6
N/L2
L1
-T1 x1 x2 -T2
400VA 120/230VAC INPUT
24VDC/5A GEA
POWER
GND
230V 0
O FF
230V AC
ON
A
B
OUTPUT
PE
L+'
L+
PE
M'
M
1
-F2 M.A / =01/15.0
6A -PE
2 M.K / =00/27.0
M.R / =01/14.0
1
-24M
PE
M.X / =01/18.0
=00-K2 =00-K2 M.T / =00/28.0
24V DC
Pt 100 Pt 100 L+.A / 12.7
24V DC
=00/31.6 L+.K / =00/29.0
AI 104 =00/31.6 =00/31.6 =00/31.6 24V DC
L+.X / =01/16.0
24V DC
-X12 -X12 -X12 -X12 L.T / =00/28.0
6
5
-X1 1 2 -X1 3 4 5 6
-PE
-PE
L N
1
M
-M1
28/24W 1~ -R1
Cabinet fan PT100 2
PE
Measurement cabinet
inner temperature
Spare Control Voltage AC Control Voltage DC

Editor Paul.Du Control Voltage AC +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
230V AC 230V AC
11.9 / L.X L.X / =11/22.0
230V AC
1L.X / =01/13.4
230V AC
1L.A / =11/20.4
24V DC 24V DC
11.9 / L+.A L+.A / =01/14.0
11
-K1
11 /12.6 12 14
-S01
RED 12
DI a.7
7
-X11
=00-K4:DI 2.7
=00/33.4
=00-K4
Separator
emergency stop
A1
-K1
AC 230V A2
11.9 / N.A PE PE
N.A / =01/13.4
-PE
-PE
-X1 7 8 -X1 9 10
Remove link when external

Emergancy stop connected -WG001 -WG002
.-J .-J 14
3G1,5 mm² 3G1,5 mm² 11 /12.8
12
Supplied by customer Supplied by customer
21 21
PE PE
-1S01 -1S02
22 22
Emergency stop external Emergency stop external(spare) Emergency stop

Editor Paul.Du Emergency stop +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380V AC 230V AC 230V AC

=0/10.9 / L1 =0/11.9 / L.A L.A / =11/22.0
=0/10.9 / L2 =0/12.9 / 1L.X
=0/10.9 / L3
Current measuring
separator
=00-K2
~0-1A = 0-50A
=00/31.6
=00/31.6
AI 106
-X13 -X13
2
13
-F1
/13.4 14
1 3 5
-Q1 11
/13.8 2 4 6 -K1
/14.1 12 14
s1
-B1 21
50/1A
s2 -S1
/13.8 22
13 13
-S1 -Q1
/13.8 14 /13.8 14
T1 A1 A1
-F1 M -Q1
T2 A2 220VAC A2
PE PE
=0/12.9 / N.A N.A / =11/20.4
=0-PE
=0-PE
-X1 1 2 3 -X2 1 2
-WD001 -WG003
.-J .-J
4G4 mm² 3G1,5 mm²
Anti-clockwise rotation U1 V1 W1 PE 13 14 /13.8 1 2 /13.1

21 22 /14.2 3 4 /13.1
M
5 6 /13.1
*0_1_001 3~
13 14 /13.9
380V/50Hz/4,0kW/6,9-8,2A
Θ
21 22
T2 T1 33 34 /14.1
43 44 =100/26.2
51 52
61 62
Separator PTC-feeler Separator

separator operation

Editor Paul.Du Separator +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
=0/12.9 / L+.A L+.A / 15.0
33 21
-Q1 -F1
/13.8 34 /13.4 22
8
-X10 -X10
DI0.0 DI0.1
=00/30.3 =00/30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Separator Separator
operation failure
=00-K5
=00/34.3
DQ 2.0
-X10
4
A1
-K1
A2
=0/11.9 / M.R M.R / =11/21.0
14
11 /13.8
12
Separator
Start/Stop

Editor Paul.Du Separator +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
14.9 / L+.A L+.A / 17.0
=0/11.9 / M.A =0-M.A / =11/22.0
=00-K1
0-12000 rpm
=00/30.3
DI0.2
-X10
9
5
-T1
Out
8
-
24VDC
7
+
In
1+ 2-
-X2 3 4
-WG004
.-J
7G1,5 mm²
/16.0
+JB
-1X10 1 2
+JB-WG101 1 2
.-O
2x0,34 mm²
+
*0_9_020
SI
+ BN = brown -
- BU = blue
Speed monitoring device

Editor Paul.Du Separator speed measuring +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K3 =00-K3
4-20mA 4-20mA
=00/32.4 =00/32.4
=00-K3:AI 110 =00-K3:AI 112
-X10 -X10 =00-K1
AI 0 M0+
AI 1 M1+
=00/30.3
DI1.3
4
6
-X10
DI b.3
18
24V DC 24V DC
=0/11.9 / L+.X L+.X / 19.0
PE
=0-PE
-X2 5 6 7 8 9 10
-WG004 6
.-J
7G1,5 mm²
/15.1
+JB
24V DC
L+.1X10 / 17.0
-1X10 4 5 3 6 7 PE
+JB-WG102
.-J
5G1,5 mm²
+SB
PE.1X20 / 18.6
M.1X20 / 18.5
-1X20 2 1 3 4 6 5 7
+SB-WG201 +SB-WG202 +SB-WG203

.-O .-O .-O
2x0,34 mm² 2x0,34 mm² 3x0,75 mm²
A/Q
+
+ - + -
-
*1_9_002 *0_9_014 *0_9_013

PSL/H I SMS I WMS
4-20mA P 4-20mA P
Clean-oil Sludge space monitoring Water discharge

discharge pressure

Editor Paul.Du Separator signals +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC 24V DC
15.9 / L+.A L+.A / =11/21.0
=00-K1 =00-K1
=00/30.3 =00/30.3
DI1.4 DI1.5
-X10 -X10
19
20
-X2 11
-WG011
.-J
7G1,5 mm²
/18.2
+JB 24V DC
16.4 / L+.1X10
M.1X10 / 18.3
-1X10 8 11 9 10
(optional) NAHH Separator

vibration monitoring

Editor Paul.Du Separator vibro +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
=00/30.5 =00/30.5 =00/30.5 =00/30.5 =00/30.5

DQ0.0 DQ0.2 DQ0.1 DQ0.3 DQ0.4
-X12 -X12 -X12 -X12 -X12
DQ a.0
DQ a.2
DQ a.1
DQ a.3
DQ a.4
3
7
=0/11.9 / M.X M.X / 19.0
PE PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
-X2 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
-WG011
.-J
7G1,5 mm²
/17.3
+JB 17.1 / M.1X10

PE PE
-1X10 12 13 PE 15 14 PE 16 18 17 PE
+JB-WG106
.-J
4G1,5 mm²
+SB 16.4 / M.1X20

PE.1X20 / 16.4
-1X20 8 9 PE 11 10 PE
-WG010 +JB-WG104 +JB-WG105 +SB-WG204 GNYE +SB-WG205

.-J .-J .-J .-J .-J
3G1,5 mm² 3G1,5 mm² 3G1,5 mm² 3x0,75 mm² 3x0,75 mm²
+ + + + +
PE PE PE PE PE
*8_7_002 *9_7_004 *9_7_005 *0_7_010 *0_7_011
- - - - -
Feed valve Operating water Displacement- and Circulation valve Water discharge valve
filling water

Editor Paul.Du Separator valves +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K5 =00-K1
=00/34.6 =00/30.3
DQ 3.5 DI1.2
-X13 -X10
17
5
16.9 / L+.X =0-L+.X / =16/25.0

18.9 / M.X M.X / =16/25.0
PE
=0-PE
-X2 20 21 22 23
-WG013
.-J
3G1,5 mm²
13
PE
-S02
14
Feedback
Spare sludge discharge flap

Editor Paul.Du Separator sludge flap +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
380V AC 230V AC
=0/10.9 / L1.2 =0/12.9 / 1L.A
=0/11.9 / L2.2
=0/11.9 / L3.2
-Q1 1 3 5
17
LUB12 L1 L2 L3
A1 13 21 -Q1
/20.2 18
A2 14 22
1,25-5A
110-220V DC/AC
LUCA05FU Steuereinheit
In:...A
21 11
-S1 -K2
/20.7 22 /21.1 14 12
LUA1C20 17 97
18 98
/20.7 /21.2
T1 T2 T3
2 4 6
11 13 11
-K1 -S1 =100-K1
/20.7 12 14 /20.7 14 =100/26.1 12 14
A1 A1
-K1 -Q1
A2 /20.2 A2
=01/13.9 / N.A
PE
=0/11.9 / N.X N.X / 22.0
=0-PE
-X1 1 2 3
-WD001
.-J
4G2,5 mm²
Clockwise rotation U1 V1 W1 PE 14
11 /20.7
12
M 24
21 /21.1
*0_3_001 22
0,55-2,2kW 3
1,32-4,8A
Attention!
Before switch-on feed pump, adjust the circuit breaker
to nominal current of the motor (look at motor label)
Feed Pump Feed Pump

Editor Paul.Du Feed Pump +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
=01/17.9 / L+.A =01-L+.A / 22.0
21 97
-K1 -Q1
/20.7 22 24 /20.3 98
15
16
-X10 -X10
DI1.0 DI1.1
=00/30.3 =00/30.3
=00-K1 =00-K1
Feed pump Feed pump
operation failure
=00-K5
=00/34.3
DQ 2.1
-X10
5
A1
-K2
A2
=01/14.9 / M.R M.R / 22.2
14
11 /20.8
12
Feed pump on
/ Off

Editor Paul.Du Feed Pump +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
24V DC
21.9 /L+.A =01-L+.A / 23.0
=01/15.9 / M.A
230V AC
=01/13.9 / L.A
230V AC
=0/12.9 / L.X
20.9 / N.X
Temperature indication
=00-K1
=00-K2 =00-K2 =00-K2 =00-K2
11 11' 11 11'
Pt 100 Pt 100 Pt 100 Pt 100 4~20mA
-K3 -K4 =00/30.5
/22.3 /22.4 =00/31.3 =00/31.3
14 14' 14 14' AQ92
=00/31.3 =00/31.3 AI 102 =00/31.3 AI 100 =00/31.3 =00/31.3 =00/31.3
-X11 -X11 -X11 -X11 -X10 -X10 -X10 -X10 -X11
3
4
5
-SC
=0-SC
11 12
-T1
+ In -
Clamp 40 is attached only with "Spring-loaded"
0/4-20mA
52
-
PS I
51 24VDC
+
=00-K1 =00-K1 -SC
I
Out
=00/30.5 =00/30.5 SC + 4-20mA - -SC
=0-SC
DQ1.0 DQ1.1 41 42
-X12 -X12
=0-SC
=0-SC
11
12
control valve
A1 A1
-K3 -K4
A2 A2
-PE
21.9 / M.R M.R / =100/26.0
=0-PE
-X1 4 5 6 7 -X2 1 2 3 4 SC -X2 5 6 SC
SH SH
-WG002 -WG003 -WG004

.CY-O .CY-O
.-J 4x0,75 mm² 2x1,5 mm²
5G1,5 mm²
2/13
3/11
PE
40
1
11 14 /22.2 11 14 /22.2
*6_7_002 11' 14' /22.2 11' 14' /22.2 *0_9_006 =Customer
+L-X
open
close
1 3 -X
Kunde
PT100 PT100
M 2 4
Motor valve
1 ~
Regulating valve - heating medium Regulating valve Regulating valve Product Min / max 4-20mA
open closed temperature control temperature monitoring temperature indication

Editor Paul.Du Product temperature control +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PT Pressure transmitter
=00-K3
=00/32.4
=00-K3:AI 116
AI 3 M3+
-X11
22.9 / L+.A
-X2 13 14
-WG007
.-O
2x0,34
-10_9_009 1 2
I
PSL/H
P
PT pressure transmitter

Editor Paul.Du PT Feed flow +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT L INPUT

LOW 1 LOW 1 LOW 0 LOW 0
HIGH 0 HIGH 0 HIGH 1 HIGH 1
ALARM 0 ALARM 0
=00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1 =00-K1
=00/30.3 =00/30.3 =00/30.3 =00/30.3

DI0.6 DI0.7 DI0.5 DI0.4
-X10 -X10 -X10 -X10
13
14
12
11
24V DC
=01/19.8 /L+.X
=01/19.8 / M.X
=00-K5
=00/34.3
DQ 2.2
-X10
6
-X2 1 3 2 4 7 6 5 8 9 11 12 10 14 13 15 16 17 18
Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare

Editor Paul.Du Sludge pump +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K5 =00-K1
=00/34.3 =00/34.6 =00/34.6 =00/34.6 =00/30.5

DQ 2.7 DQ 3.0 DQ 3.1 DQ 3.2 DQ0.7
-X11 -X12 -X12 -X12 -X12
10
7
6
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-K1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
24VDC A2 24VDC A2 24VDC A2 24VDC A2 24VDC A2
=11/22.4 / M.R
14 14 14 14 14
11 =11/20.8 11 /26.3 11 /26.4 11 /26.5 11 /26.6
12 12 12 12 12
24
21 /26.0
22
22 24 21 43 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14
-K1 =0-Q1 =01-Q1 -K2 -K3 -K4 -K5
/26.1 21 =0/10.1 22 =01/13.8 44 /26.3 11 /26.4 11 /26.5 11 /26.7 11
PE PE PE PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
=0-PE
-X2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
-WG001 GNYE -WG002 -WG003 -WG004

.-J .-J .-J .-J
5G1,5 mm² 3G1,5 mm² 3G1,5 mm² 3G1,5 mm²
=Customer
+L-X PE PE PE PE
Kunde
-X
Common failure Separator Spare TAH temperature TAL temperature Spare

operation alarm max alarm min

Editor Paul.Du Signal exchange +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1 -K1 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3 -K3
/30.5 /30.5 /32.4 /32.4 /32.4 /32.4 /32.6 /32.6

AI90 AI92 AI110- AI112- AI114- AI116- AQ 110 AQ 112
-X11 -X11 -X10 -X10 -X11 -X11 -X13 -X13
5
6
0V
=0/11.9 / M.K M.K / 29.0
Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog Earth analog

Editor Paul.Du PLC overview +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-P1 KTP400
X2 X61
Profibus Profinet USB
Power DC
24V 0V PA A B SC A B SC
-PE
24V DC
=0/11.9 / L.T
=0/11.9 / M.T Ethernet / 29.0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=00+-K1 =00+-K2 =00+-K3 =00+-K4 =00+-K5
24VDC OUTPUTS
RTD ANALOG INPUTS
24VDC INPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
X10
X10
X10
1M .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 2M AQ90 3M IW0
X11
DI a DI b AQ92 IW2
X11
24VDC INPUTS ANALOG ANALOG
X11
X11
OUTPUTS INPUTS
24 24
M+ M- I+ I- AI 100 VDC L+ M 0+ 0- 1+ 1- AI X10 1M .0 .1 .2 .3 DI a VDC L+ M .0 .1 .2 .3 DQ a
X50
MC M+ M- I+ I- AI 102 2+ 2- 3+ 3- X11 2M .4 .5 .6 .7 .4 .5 .6 .7
0 1 .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
DIAG
0 1 2 3
DIAG
DIAG
DIAG
.0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5
RUN / STOP
ERROR
MAINT
DI a DI b AI AI DI a DQ a
SM 1231 SM 1234 SM 1221 SM 1222
RTD AI/AQ DC DC
DQ a DQ b AI AQ 0 DI b DQ b
.0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .0 .1 2 3 0 1 .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
LINK 6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 X12 M+ M- I+ I- AI 104 X12 X12 3M .0 .1 .2 .3 X12 .0 .1 .2 .3

X13 M+ M- I+ I- AI 106 X13 0M 0 1M 1 AQ X13 4M .4 .5 .6 .7 DI b X13 .4 .5 .6 .7 DQ b
Rx / Tx
RTD ANALOG INPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUTS
24VDC OUTPUTS
6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0
6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0
6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0
6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0
24VDC INPUTS
DQ a 24VDC OUTPUTS DQ b
X12
X1 P1 X1 P2 4L+ 4M .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .0 .1
PROFINET (LAN)
MAC ADRESS
Ethernet 1:
Ethernet 2:
DQ a 4L+:
DQ a L+:
DI b 3M:
DI b 4M:
DI a 1M:
DI a 2M:
DQ a M:
DQ a 4M:
DI a 1M:
AQ 2M:
AI 3M:
AI L+:
L+ M L+ M
AI M:
X10
GND:
GND:
GND:
GND:
L+:
M:
24VDC 24VDC
X1:P1
X1:P2
X10:6
X11:1
X11:4
X12:1
X12:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:1
X10:2
X11:1
X10:3
X11:3
X12:3
X13:3
X11:1
X10:2
X10:1
X10:2
X10:3
X10:4
X10:5
X10:1
-PE -PE -PE -PE -PE
24V DC
=0/11.9 / L+.K
0V
27.9 / M.K
28.9 / Ethernet

Editor Paul.Du PLC power supply +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K1
Rack 0
Slot 2
S7-1200 SIEMENS
CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC, 200K -X11:1
2M
-X11:2
-X10:1
+ AQ90
+ - AQ 0
L+
-X10:2 -X11:3
+ AQ92 =11/22.8 Temperature indication
M AQ 1
-X10:3
PE
-X11:4
-X10:4 + - 3M
L+
-X10:5 -X11:5
+ AI90 /27.1 =0-T2:M' Earth analog
M AI 0
-X10:6 - + -X11:6
+ AI92 /27.2 -K1:-X11:5 Earth analog
1M AI 1
-X10:7 - + -X12:1
Separator operation =01-Q1:34 =01/14.1 DI0.0
DI a 4L+
-X10:8 -X12:2
Separator failure =01-F1:22 =01/14.2 DI0.1
DI a 4M
-X10:9
Speed monitoring device =01-T1:5 =01/15.2 DI0.2 -X12:3
DI a
-X10:10 DQ0.0 =01/18.1 =0-T2:M Feed valve
DQ a
DI0.3 -X12:4
DI a
-X10:11 DQ0.1 =01/18.4 =01-*9_7_005:+ Displacement- and filling water
DQ a
=16-X2:15 =16/25.6 DI0.4 -X12:5
DI a
-X10:12 DQ0.2 =01/18.3 =01-*9_7_004:+ Operating water
DQ a
=16-X2:10 =16/25.5 DI0.5 -X12:6
DI a
-X10:13 DQ0.3 =01/18.5 =01-*0_7_010:+ Circulation valve
DQ a
=16-X2:2 =16/25.1 DI0.6 -X12:7
DI a
-X10:14 DQ0.4 =01/18.6 =01-*0_7_011:+ Water discharge valve
DQ a
=16-X2:5 =16/25.3 DI0.7 -X12:8
DI a
-X10:15 DQ0.5
DQ a
Feed pump operation =11-K1:24 =11/21.1 DI1.0 -X12:9
DI b
-X10:16 DQ0.6
DQ a
Feed pump failure =11-Q1:98 =11/21.2 DI1.1 -X12:10
DI b
-X10:17 DQ0.7 =100/26.7 =100-K5:A1 (optional) Heater release
DQ a
(Optional)Feedback sludge discharge flap =01-S02:13 =01/19.3 DI1.2 -X12:11
DI b
-X10:18 DQ1.0 =11/22.3 =11-K3:A1 Regulating valve open
DQ b
Water discharge =01-*0_9_013 =01/16.3 DI1.3 -X12:12
DI b
-X10:19 DQ1.1 =11/22.4 =11-K4:A1 Regulating valve closed
DQ b
(optional) NAHH Separator vibration monitoring =01-T1:7 =01/17.3 DI1.4
DI b
-X10:20 -X1:P1/PN
(optional) NAHH Separator vibration monitoring =01+JB-1X10:10 =01/17.4 DI1.5
DI b P1/PN
-X1:P2/PN
P2/PN
6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K2
Rack 0
Slot 3
S7-1200 SIEMENS
SM1231 AI 3 x RTD, 1 x AI 0~1A
-X10:1 + - -X12:1
L+ n.c.
-X10:2 -X12:2
M n.c.
-X10:3 -X12:3
PE n.c.
-X10:4 -X12:4
Min / max temperature monitoring =11/22.7 =0/11.5 Measurement cabinet inner temperature
AI 0 M0+ AI 2 M2+
-X10:5 -X12:5
AI 0 M0- AI 2 M2-
-X10:6 -X12:6
Min / max temperature monitoring =11/22.6 AI 100 AI 104 =0/11.4 Measurement cabinet inner temperature
AI 0 I0+ AI 2 I2+
-X10:7 -X12:7
AI 0 I0- AI 2 I2-
-X11:1 -X13:1
AI 106 =01/13.3 Current measuring separator
n.c. AI 3 I1~
-X11:2 -X13:2
A =01/13.3 Current measuring separator
n.c. AI 3 I2~
-X11:3 -X13:3
n.c. n.c.
-X11:4 -X13:4
Product temperature control -K2:-X11:6 =11/22.4
AI 1 M1+ n.c.
-X11:5 -X13:5
Product temperature control =11/22.5
AI 1 M1- n.c.
-X11:6 -X13:6
Product temperature control =11/22.5 AI 102
AI 1 I1+ n.c.
-X11:7 -X13:7
Product temperature control =11/22.5
AI 1 I1- n.c.
6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K3
/29.5
Rack 0
Slot 4
S7-1200 SIEMENS
SM 1234 AI 4 x 13 Bit / AO 2 x 14 Bit
-X10:1 + - -X12:1
L+ n.c.
-X10:2 -X12:2
M n.c.
-X10:3 -X12:3
PE n.c.
-X10:4 -X12:4
V
Clean-oil discharge pressure =01-*1_9_002 =01/16.1 AI 110 A
AI 0 M0+ n.c.
-X10:5 -X12:5
Earth analog -K3:-X10:5 /27.3 AI110-
AI 0 M0- n.c.
-X10:6 -X12:6
V
Sludge space monitoring =01-*0_9_014 =01/16.2 AI 112 A
AI 1 M1+ n.c.
-X10:7 -X12:7
Earth analog -K3:-X10:7 /27.4 AI112-
AI 1 M1- n.c.
-X11:1 -X13:1
n.c. n.c.
-X11:2 -X13:2
n.c. n.c.
-X11:3 -X13:3
n.c. n.c.
-X11:4 -X13:4
V
AI 114 A AQ 110 /27.7 Earth analog
AI 2 M2+ AQ 0M
-X11:5 -X13:5
Earth analog /27.5 AI114- AQ 110
AI 2 M2- AQ 0
-X11:6 -X13:6
V
PT Pressure transmitter =11/23.2 AI 116 A AQ 112 /27.8 Earth analog
AI 3 M3+ AQ 1M
-X11:7 -X13:7
Earth analog /27.6 AI116- AQ 112
AI 3 M3- AQ 1
6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K4
/29.6
Rack 0
Slot 6
S7-1200 SIEMENS
SM1221 DI 16 x 24 VDC
-X10:1 -X12:1
nc n.c.
-X10:2 -X12:2
n.c. n.c.
-X10:3 + - + - -X12:3
DC DC
1M (-) (+) (-) (+) 3M
-X10:4 -X12:4
DI 2.0 DI 3.0
DI a.0 DI b.0
-X10:5 -X12:5
DI 2.1 DI 3.1
DI a.1 DI b.1
-X10:6 -X12:6
DI 2.2 DI 3.2
DI a.2 DI b.2
-X10:7 -X12:7
DI 2.3 DI 3.3
DI a.3 DI b.3
-X11:1 -X13:1
PE n.c.
-X11:2 -X13:2
n.c. n.c.
-X11:3 - + + - -X13:3
DC DC
2M (+) (-) (-) (+) 4M
-X11:4 -X13:4
DI 2.4 DI 3.4
DI a.4 DI b.4
-X11:5 -X13:5
DI 2.5 DI 3.5
DI a.5 DI b.5
-X11:6 -X13:6
DI 2.6 DI 3.6
DI a.6 DI b.6
-X11:7 -X13:7
Separator emergency stop =0-K1:14 =0/12.8 DI 2.7 DI 3.7
DI a.7 DI b.7
6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-K5
/29.7
Rack 0
Slot 6
S7-1200 SIEMENS
SM1222 DO 16 x 24 VDC
-X10:1 + - -X12:1
L+ n.c.
-X10:2 -X12:2
M n.c.
-X10:3 -X12:3
n.c. n.c.
-X10:4 -X12:4
Separator Start/Stop =01-K1:A1 =01/14.1 DQ 2.0 DQ 3.0 =100/26.3 =100-K2:A1 Spare
DQ a.0 DQ b.0
-X10:5 -X12:5
Feed pump on / Off =11-K2:A1 =11/21.1 DQ 2.1 DQ 3.1 =100/26.4 =100-K3:A1 TAH temperature alarm max
DQ a.1 DQ b.1
-X10:6 -X12:6
Spare =16-X2:17 =16/25.7 DQ 2.2 DQ 3.2 =100/26.5 =100-K4:A1 TAL temperature alarm min
DQ a.2 DQ b.2
-X10:7 -X12:7
DQ 2.3 DQ 3.3
DQ a.3 DQ b.3
-X11:1 -X13:1
PE n.c.
-X11:2 -X13:2
n.c. n.c.
-X11:3 -X13:3
n.c. n.c.
-X11:4 -X13:4
DQ 2.4 DQ 3.4
DQ a.4 DQ b.4
-X11:5 -X13:5
DQ 2.5 DQ 3.5 =01/19.2 =01-X2:20 (Optional)Valve sludge discharge flap
DQ a.5 DQ b.5
-X11:6 -X13:6
DQ 2.6 DQ 3.6
DQ a.6 DQ b.6
-X11:7 -X13:7
Common failure =100-K1:A1 =100/26.1 DQ 2.7 DQ 3.7
DQ a.7 DQ b.7
6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
600 mm
560 mm 250mm
Cabinet
m
ø8m
30 mm
100 mm
TOUCH
=00-P1
320 mm
65 mm
540 mm F1 F1 F1 F1
Filter
=01-S1 =11-S1
800 mm
760 mm
=0-Q1
S01
=0-M1
110 mm
50 mm
Scale: 1:3,5 mm
Weight: Ca. 55 kg

Editor Paul.Du Arrangement drawing +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & ELU 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Bedienelemente / Operating elements
Device tag Function Name
=00-P1 Process display Touch panel KTP400 Comfort
=0-M1 Filter / Fan PFG.11632101955
=01-S1 Separator Start/Stop Double push botton complete, spring return, green/red
=11-S1 Feed pump start/stop Double push botton complete, spring return, green/red
=0-Q1 Isolator standard rotary handle circuit breaker accessory
=0-S01

Editor Paul.Du Operating elements +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Mountingplate
25x80
=0-T1
25x80
=01-F1
=01-T1
=11-T1
=100-K1
=11-K1
=11-K3
=11-K4
=100-K2
=100-K3
=100-K4
=100-K5
=01-K1
=11-K2
=0-K1
40x80
=100-X2
=16-X2
=00-K1
=00-K2
=00-K3
=00-K4
=00-K5
25x80
40x80
25x80
=11-Q1
=0-F1
=0-F2
=01-B1
=01-Q1
=0-24M
=0-T2
Glands Yard Cable Size WS part-no.
=0-Q1
10x M16 4,5-10,0 mm 53111010
7x M20 7,0-13,0 mm 53111020
2x M25 9,0-17,0 mm 53111030
6x M16 spare 52006111
16x M16 lock nut 53119010
7x M20 lock nut 53119020 40x80
2x M25 lock nut 53119030
=11-X2
=01-X1
=11-X1
=01-X2
=0-X1

Editor Paul.Du Arrangement drawing +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Control unit KTP 400
TOUCH
=00-P1
160 mm
F1 F1 F1 F1
158 mm
Cutout dimension: (122+1,0 mm) x (98+1,0 mm)

Westfalia Order-no.: 0005-4760-400
Depth : 54 mm
Programm-no.: 1105-1000-0001
Weight : _,_kg

Editor Paul.Du KTP 400 +
0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Emergency stop cabinet with protective collar

71 mm
=Additions
-S01
Not-Halt-Box
54 mm
85 mm
m
m
5
ø
85 mm
109 mm
61 mm
protection class: "IP 65"

M20
8-13mm
Note: Installation should be carry out by customer!
18 mm

Editor Paul.Du Emergency stop box +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Terminal strip designation
.-J 4G2,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 7G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 7G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²

.-J 4G4 mm²
.-J 4G4 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+-PE
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WD001
WD001
WD001
WG013
WG011
WG010
WG004
WG003
WG002
WG001
Link
Function text Target designation Target designation Page / column
=11
=01
=01
=01
=01
=01
=01
=0
=0
=0
Incoming GNYE PE -PE &EFS/10.1
Earthing screen -SC -PE &EFS/10.3
Earthing mounting plate 1 -1M PE -PE &EFS/10.5
Earthing Door 1 -1T PE -PE &EFS/10.6
Earthing Cabinet 1 -1G PE -PE &EFS/10.6
Control Voltage AC -PE -T1 &EFS/11.2
= -PE -X1 6 &EFS/11.3
= -PE -M1 PE &EFS/11.3
Control Voltage DC -PE -T2 PE &EFS/11.6
= -PE -24M 1 &EFS/11.7
Emergency stop external GNYE -1S01 PE -PE &EFS/12.1
Emergency stop external(spare) GNYE -1S02 PE -PE &EFS/12.3
Separator GNYE =01-*0_1_001 PE =01-PE &EFS=01/13.2
PTC-feeler separator GNYE =01-*0_1_001 PE =01-PE &EFS=01/13.3
Water discharge GNYE =01+JB-1X10 PE =01-PE &EFS=01/16.3
Feed valve GNYE =01-*8_7_002 PE =01-PE &EFS=01/18.1
Water discharge valve GNYE =01+JB-1X10 PE =01-PE &EFS=01/18.7
Feedback sludge discharge flap GNYE =01-S02 PE =01-PE &EFS=01/19.3
Feed Pump GNYE =11-*0_3_001 PE =11-PE &EFS=11/20.1

Editor Paul.Du Terminal diagram =0+-PE +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EMA 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 5G1,5 mm²
.-J 5G1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+-PE
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WG004
WG003
WG002
WG001
WG002
Link
=100
=100
=100
=100
=11
Regulating valve - heating medium GNYE =11-*6_7_002 PE =11-PE &EFS=11/22.2
Separator operation GNYE =Customer+L-X PE =100-PE &EFS=100/26.2
Spare GNYE =Customer+L-X PE =100-PE &EFS=100/26.3
TAH temperature alarm max GNYE =Customer+L-X PE =100-PE &EFS=100/26.4
TAL temperature alarm min GNYE =Customer+L-X PE =100-PE &EFS=100/26.5

Editor Paul.Du Terminal diagram =0+-PE +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+-X1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WG002
WG001
Link
=0
=0
Spare 1 &EFS/11.1
= 2 &EFS/11.1
= 3 -F2 2 &EFS/11.2
Control Voltage AC -M1 L 4 -S01 11 &EFS/11.2
= -M1 N 5 -T1 0 &EFS/11.2
= -PE PE 6 =11-X1 4 &EFS/11.3
1 -1S01 21 7 -S01 12 &EFS/12.1
Emergency stop external 2 -1S01 22 8 &EFS/12.1
= 1 -1S02 21 9 &EFS/12.2
Emergency stop external(spare) 2 -1S02 22 10 =01-F1 13 &EFS/12.2
-K1 A1

Editor Paul.Du Terminal diagram =0+-X1 +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 4G4 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=0+-XQ1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WD001
Link
=0
Incoming 1 =Customer+L-X L1 2 -Q1 2/T1 &EFS/10.1
= 2 =Customer+L-X L2 4 -Q1 4/T2 &EFS/10.1
= 3 =Customer+L-X L3 6 -Q1 6/T3 &EFS/10.1

Editor Paul.Du Terminal diagram =0+-XQ1 +
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 4G4 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=01+-X1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WD001
Link
=01
1 -*0_1_001 U1 1 -Q1 4 &EFS/13.1
Separator 2 -*0_1_001 V1 2 -Q1 2 &EFS/13.1
= 3 -*0_1_001 W1 3 -Q1 6 &EFS/13.1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 7G1,5 mm²
.-J 7G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=01+-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WG010
WG011
WG004
WG003
Link
=01
=01
=01
=01
PTC-feeler separator 1 -*0_1_001 T1 1 -F1 T1 &EFS/13.3
= 2 -*0_1_001 T2 2 -F1 T2 &EFS/13.3
1 +JB-1X10 1 3 -T1 1+ &EFS/15.2
Speed monitoring device 2 +JB-1X10 2 4 -T1 2- &EFS/15.2
Clean-oil discharge pressure 3 +JB-1X10 4 5 =0-T2 L+ &EFS/16.1
= 4 +JB-1X10 3 6 =00-K3 -X10:4 &EFS/16.1
Sludge space monitoring 7 &EFS/16.2
= 5 +JB-1X10 6 8 =00-K3 -X10:6 &EFS/16.2
= 9 &EFS/16.3
Water discharge 6 +JB-1X10 7 10 =00-K1 -X10:18 &EFS/16.3
(optional) NAHH Separator vibration monitoring 1 +JB-1X10 10 11 =00-K1 -X10:20 &EFS/17.4
Feed valve 1 -*8_7_002 + 12 =00-K1 -X12:3 &EFS/18.1
= 2 -*8_7_002 - 13 =00-P1-0V &EFS/18.1
Operating water 2 +JB-1X10 12 14 =00-K1 -X12:5 &EFS/18.3
Displacement- and filling water 3 +JB-1X10 15 15 =00-K1 -X12:4 &EFS/18.4
= 16 &EFS/18.4
Circulation valve 4 +JB-1X10 16 17 =00-K1 -X12:6 &EFS/18.5
Water discharge valve 5 +JB-1X10 18 18 =00-K1 -X12:7 &EFS/18.6
= 6 +JB-1X10 17 19 &EFS/18.7
Spare 20 =00-K5 -X13:5 &EFS/19.2
= 21 =16-X2 3 &EFS/19.2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=01+-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WG013
Link
=01
Feedback sludge discharge flap 1 -S02 13 22 =00-K1 -X10:17 &EFS/19.3
= 2 -S02 14 23 =16-X2 1 &EFS/19.3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-O 2x0,34 mm²

.-J 4G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 5G1,5 mm²
.-J 7G1,5 mm²
.-J 7G1,5 mm²

Cable type
Cable type
=01+JB-1X10
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
=01+JB
=01+JB
=01+JB
=01+JB
=01+JB
WG106
WG105
WG104
WG102
WG101
Link
1 -*0_9_020 + 1 -X2 3 1 &EFS+/15.2
Speed monitoring device 2 -*0_9_020 - 2 -X2 4 2 &EFS+/15.2
Clean-oil discharge pressure 1 +SB-1X20 1 3 -X2 6 4 &EFS+/16.1
= 2 +SB-1X20 2 4 -X2 5 3 &EFS+/16.1
= 5 &EFS+/16.1
Sludge space monitoring 3 +SB-1X20 4 6 -X2 8 5 &EFS+/16.2
Water discharge 4 +SB-1X20 5 7 -X2 10 6 &EFS+/16.3
8 &EFS+/17.1
9 &EFS+/17.3
(optional) NAHH Separator vibration monitoring 10 -X2 11 1 &EFS+/17.4
11 &EFS+/17.1
Operating water 1 -*9_7_004 + 12 -X2 14 2 &EFS+/18.3
= 2 -*9_7_004 - 13 &EFS+/18.3
Displacement- and filling water 1 -*9_7_005 - 14 &EFS+/18.4
= 2 -*9_7_005 + 15 -X2 15 3 &EFS+/18.4
Circulation valve 1 +SB-1X20 8 16 -X2 17 4 &EFS+/18.5
Water discharge valve 2 +SB-1X20 10 17 -X2 19 6 &EFS+/18.7
= 3 +SB-1X20 11 18 -X2 18 5 &EFS+/18.6
Water discharge GNYE +SB-1X20 PE PE =0-PE GNYE &EFS+/16.3
Operating water GNYE -*9_7_004 PE PE -PE &EFS+/18.3
Displacement- and filling water GNYE -*9_7_005 PE PE -PE &EFS+/18.4
Water discharge valve GNYE +SB-1X20 PE PE =0-PE GNYE &EFS+/18.7

Editor Paul.Du Terminal diagram =01+JB-1X10 + JB
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 5G1,5 mm²
.-J 4G2,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=11+-X1
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WD001
WG002
Link
=11
=11
Feed Pump 1 -*0_3_001 U1 1 -Q1 2 &EFS/20.1
= 2 -*0_3_001 V1 2 -Q1 4 &EFS/20.1
= 3 -*0_3_001 W1 3 -Q1 6 &EFS/20.1
4 -*6_7_002 1 4 =0-X1 6 &EFS/22.1
Regulating valve - heating medium 1 -*6_7_002 2/13 5 -K3 14 &EFS/22.1
= 2 -*6_7_002 3/11 6 -K4 14 &EFS/22.1
= 3 -*6_7_002 40 7 =0-S01 11 &EFS/22.1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.CY-O 4x0,75 mm²

.CY-O 2x1,5 mm²
.-O 2x0,34 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=11+-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WG007
WG004
WG003
Link
=11
=11
=11
Product temperature control 1 -*0_9_006-PT100 1 1 =00-K2 -X11:6 &EFS/22.5
= 2 -*0_9_006-PT100 2 2 =00-K2 -X11:7 &EFS/22.5
Min / max temperature monitoring 3 -*0_9_006-PT100 3 3 =00-K2 -X10:6 &EFS/22.6
= 4 -*0_9_006-PT100 4 4 =00-K2 -X10:7 &EFS/22.7
= 1 =Customer+L-X 5 -T1 41 &EFS/22.8
4-20mA temperature indication 2 =Customer+L-X 6 -T1 42 &EFS/22.9
PT pressure transmitter BU -10_9_009 1 13 -T1 51 &EFS/23.2
= -10_9_009 2 14 =00-K3 -X11:6 &EFS/23.2
Min / max temperature monitoring SH -WG003 SH SC =0-SC &EFS/22.7
4-20mA temperature indication SH -WG004 SH SC =0-SC &EFS/22.9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable type
Cable type
=16+-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
Link
1 =01-X2 23 &EFS/25.1
Spare 2 =00-K1 -X10:13 &EFS/25.1
= 3 =01-X2 21 &EFS/25.1
= 4 &EFS/25.2
Spare 5 =00-K1 -X10:14 &EFS/25.3
Spare 6 &EFS/25.3
= 7 &EFS/25.2
Spare 8 &EFS/25.3
Spare 9 &EFS/25.4
= 10 =00-K1 -X10:12 &EFS/25.5
= 11 &EFS/25.4
= 12 &EFS/25.4
Spare 13 &EFS/25.6
= 14 &EFS/25.6
= 15 =00-K1 -X10:11 &EFS/25.6
= 16 &EFS/25.6
Spare 17 =00-K5 -X10:6 &EFS/25.7
= 18 &EFS/25.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 3G1,5 mm²
.-J 5G1,5 mm²
Cable type
Cable type
=100+-X2
Connection
Connection
Terminal
Cable name
Cable name
WG004
WG003
WG002
WG001
Link
=100
=100
=100
=100
Common failure 1 =Customer+L-X 1 =0-Q1 22 &EFS/26.1
= 2 =Customer+L-X 2 =0-Q1 21 &EFS/26.1
Separator operation 3 =Customer+L-X 3 =01-Q1 44 &EFS/26.2
= 4 =Customer+L-X 4 =01-Q1 43 &EFS/26.2
Spare 1 =Customer+L-X 5 -K2 11 &EFS/26.3
= 2 =Customer+L-X 6 -K2 14 &EFS/26.3
TAH temperature alarm max 1 =Customer+L-X 7 -K3 11 &EFS/26.4
= 2 =Customer+L-X 8 -K3 14 &EFS/26.4
TAL temperature alarm min 1 =Customer+L-X 9 -K4 11 &EFS/26.5
= 2 =Customer+L-X 10 -K4 14 &EFS/26.5
= 11 -K5 11 &EFS/26.7
Spare 12 -K5 14 &EFS/26.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable layout
Cable name Page / path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Conductors used Cross-section Length Cable gland Remark
=0-WD001 &EFS=0/10.1 =0-PE;=0-XQ1 PE;=Customer+L-X .-J 4G 4 4 mm² M25 9-17 mm Supplied by customer
=0-WG001 &EFS=0/12.1 =0-PE;=0-X1 =0-1S01 .-J 3G 3 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm Supplied by customer
=0-WG002 &EFS=0/12.2 =0-PE;=0-X1 =0-1S02 .-J 3G 3 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm Supplied by customer
=01-WD001 &EFS=01/13.1 =0-PE;=01-X1 =01-*0_1_001 .-J 4G 4 4 mm² M25 9-17 mm
=01-WG003 &EFS=01/13.3 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01-*0_1_001 .-J 3G 3 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm
=01-WG004 &EFS=01/15.1 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01+JB-1X10 .-J 7G 7 1,5 mm² M20 7-13 mm
=01-WG010 &EFS=01/18.1 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01-*8_7_002 .-J 3G 3 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm
=01-WG011 &EFS=01/17.3 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01+JB-1X10 .-J 7G 7 1,5 mm² M20 7-13 mm
=01-WG013 &EFS=01/19.3 =0-PE;=01-X2 =01-S02 .-J 3G 3 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm
=11-WD001 &EFS=11/20.1 =0-PE;=11-X1 =11-*0_3_001 .-J 4G 4 2,5 mm² M20 7-13 mm
=11-WG002 &EFS=11/22.1 =0-PE;=11-X1 =11-*6_7_002 .-J 5G 5 1,5 mm² M20 7-13 mm
=11-WG003 &EFS=11/22.7 =11-X2 =11-*0_9_006-PT100 .CY-O 4x 4 0,75 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm
=11-WG004 &EFS=11/22.9 =11-X2 =Customer+L-X .CY-O 2x 2 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm
=11-WG007 &EFS=11/23.1 =11-X2 =11-10_9_009 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M12 3,5-7,0mm
=100-WG001 &EFS=100/26.1 =0-PE;=100-X2 =Customer+L-X .-J 5G 5 1,5 mm² M20 7-13 mm
=100-WG002 &EFS=100/26.2 =0-PE;=100-X2 =Customer+L-X .-J 3G 3 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm
=01+JB-WG101 &EFS=01/15.1 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*0_9_020 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M12 3,5-7,0mm Part of separator

Editor Paul.Du Cable layout +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EMB 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable layout
Cable name Page / path Source (from) Target (to) Cable type Wires total Conductors used Cross-section Length Cable gland Remark
=01+JB-WG102 &EFS=01/16.0 =01+JB-1X10 =01+SB-1X20 .-J 5G 5 1,5 mm² M20 7-13 mm part of 1X10
=01+JB-WG104 &EFS=01/18.2 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*9_7_004 .-J 3G 3 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm part of 1X10
=01+JB-WG105 &EFS=01/18.4 =01+JB-1X10 =01-*9_7_005 .-J 3G 3 1,5 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm part of 1X10
=01+JB-WG106 &EFS=01/18.5 =01+JB-1X10 =01+SB-1X20 .-J 4G 4 1,5 mm² M20 7-13 mm part of 1X10
=01+SB-WG201 &EFS=01/16.0 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*1_9_002 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M12 3,5-7,0mm part of 1X20
=01+SB-WG202 &EFS=01/16.2 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*0_9_014 .-O 2x 2 0,34 mm² M12 3,5-7,0mm part of 1X20
=01+SB-WG203 &EFS=01/16.2 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*0_9_013 .-O 3x 3 0,75 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm part of 1X20
=01+SB-WG204 &EFS=01/18.5 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*0_7_010 .-J 3x 3 0,75 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm part of 1X20
=01+SB-WG205 &EFS=01/18.6 =01+SB-1X20 =01-*0_7_011 .-J 3x 3 0,75 mm² M16 4.5-10 mm part of 1X20

Editor Paul.Du Cable layout +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EMB 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Control cabinet Terminal box Separator +JB-1X10 Sensor block +SB-1X20

PE-BUS
PE
=01+-X2 =JB+-1X10
PE
1
PE
PE
PE
2
1 1
brown N
1
3
2
-WG004
7x1,5mm² 2 blue
2x0,34mm²
-WG101 Speed monitoring device =SB+-1X20
I
2
1
4
M20 (8-13mm) +JB-WG102 white

P
1
5x1,5mm² 2x0,34mm² PSL/H clean oil
4 3 1
discharge pressure
3
+
-WG201
5
M16 (5-10mm) 2 black

+ I
+
3 4 2
+
+
6
+ black P
+
2x0,34mm² SMS sludge space monitoring
+
5
+
-WG202
7
+
3
white I
4
5 5 3
6
8
4
black
S
6 4
9
S
+
brown 3x0,75mm²
+ water monitoring system
+
-WG203
+ brown
+
10
8
- grey
-
1 + black
11
+
1 brown
8
4x0,75mm² PC H
-WG103 vibro PCH1220 +JB-WG106 3x0,75mm²
1
10
white 4x1,5mm² -WG204 Circulation valve
12
blue
-
9
M16 (5-10mm)
-
- blue
11
-
13
-
2 blue
10
-
-
2 3x0,75mm²
2 -WG011
12
brown Water discharge valve

14
3 -WG205
brown
7x1,5mm²
11
3x1,5mm² Operating water
4 M20 (8-13mm) -WG104
- blue
13
-
15
PE
PE PE
14
3 - blue
-
16
-
PE PE
PE
3x1,5mm²
3 -WG105 Displacement- and filling water
brown
15
17
4 1
16
18
5
- 2
17
-
19
6
3
18
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE-BUS
order-no.:0005-1827-280
Date Customer: =
客户 : GEA Westfalia Seperator EPLAN Software & Service Description/描述:
Editor Paul.Du - +
Project: Terminal box overview
Tested 项目 : - Language: Drawing No./图号: DCC Bl./Sh. 55
en_US
语言 :
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-
8560-3100-359 & EMB 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Hinweise zur Installation von Kabeln und Leitungen

Directions for installation from cables and conductors
* Schutzmaßnahmen nach Bestimmungen des VDE bzw. zuständigen EVU ausführen

All protective measures are to be taken in accordance with electric codes, rules and regulations
* Generell sind die Vorgaben des lokalen Energieversorgers zwingend einzuhalten
In general the the rules and regulations of the lokal power authorities has to be followed
* Kabel und Leitungen sind so auszuwählen und zu verlegen, dass eine Gefährdung von Personen und der Umgebung ausgeschlossen ist.
Die angegebenen Kabelquerschnitte sind bezogen auf eine Kabellänge von 50m, Kupfer als Leitematerial, Verlegeart "C" und
eine maximale Umgebungstemperatur von 30°C. Siehe hierzu DIN VDE 0298-4 (Verwendung von Kabeln und isolierten Leitungen für Starkstromanlagen - Teil 4:
Empfohlene Werte für die Strombelastbarkeit von Kabeln und Leitungen für feste Verlegung in und an Gebäuden und von flexiblen Leitungen).
Neben der Strombelastung sind bei der Errichtung von Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen weitere Faktoren zu berücksichtigen.
Siehe hierzu IEC 60364-5-52 (Errichten von Niederspannungsanlagen - Teil 5: Auswahl und Errichtung elektrischer Betriebsmittel - Kapitel 52: Kabel- und Leitungsanlagen)
Cables and lines must be selected and laid in a way to eliminate any risk to persons and the environment.
The cable cross-sections specified in these drawings are based on a max. length of 50m, copper as conducting material,laying version "C" and a maximum ambient temperature of 30°C.
Refer also to DIN VDE 0298-4 (Usage of cables and cords in power installations - Part 4:
Recommended current-carrying capacity for sheathed and nonsheathed cables for fixed wirings in and around buildings and for flexible cables and cords).
Besides the current load are in the erection of wiring systems additional parameters to take into account.
Refer also to IEC 60364-5-52 (Erection of low voltage installations - Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Chapter 52: Wiring systems)
* Messleitungen sind grundsätzlich abgeschirmt zu verlegen

Measuring lines must always be laid shielded
WD-Kabel getrennt vom WF-/WG-Kabeln verlegen
*
WD-cables to be installed separate from WF-/WG-cable
* Alle Kabel müssen eine Abnahme der relevante Abnahmegesellschaft haben. Isolierungsfestigkeit: 0.6/1KV * GEA WSPN Standard: Nexans MPRX 0.6/1kV.
All cables must have an approval of the relevant classification society. Insulating strength: 0.6/1KV
WD-Kabel Energiekabel < 1kV WE-Kabel Erdungs-/Potentialausgleichsleiterleiter

WD-cable = Energy cable < 1kV WE-cable = Earth-/ Equipotential bonding conductor
WF-Kabel Datenbus WG-Kabel Steuer-/ Messkabel WH-Kabel Lichtwellenleiter

WF-cable = Data bus WG-cable = Control-/measuring cable WH-cable = Optical fibre
*
Legende Kabeltypen (Kabelliste)
Legend cable typ (list of cables)
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter Motorkabel FU mit konzentrischem Außenleiter (PE)

-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor FC.CY = Motor cable FC with concentric outer (PE)
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter Potentialausgleichsleiter
-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor PL = Equipotential bonding conductor
Kabel / Leitung mit Schutzleiter geschirmt Steuerleitung blau für eigensichere Stromkreise
CY-J = Cable / conductor with protective conductor screened Ex-CY = Control line blue for intrinsically safecircuits
Kabel / Leitung ohne Schutzleiter geschirmt Datenleitung paarverseilt
CY-O = Cable / conductor without protective conductor screened CY-TP = Data line twisted pair
Motorkabel FU geschirmt mit Schutzleiter
FC.CY-J = Motor cable FC screened with protective conductor
Date Customer: =
客户 : GEA Westfalia Seperator EPLAN Software & Service Description/描述:
Editor Paul.Du - +
Project: Instructions for installation
Tested 项目 : - Language: Drawing No./图号: DCC Bl./Sh. 56
en_US
语言 :
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved.
-
8560-3100-359 & EMB 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Article parts list
Function sign Page / path WS part - no Manufacturer order no. Name Manufacturer
=0-Q1 &EFS=0/10.1 0005-1437-050 GV2PM21C motor circuit breaker GV2-P - 17..23 A SCHNEIDER
=0-Q1 &EFS=0/10.1 0005-1517-000 GVAE11 auxiliary contact, 1 NO + 1 NC SCHNEIDER
=0-Q1 &EFS=0/10.1 0005-1437-230 GV2APN02 standard rotary handle circuit breaker accessory SCHNEIDER
=0-F1 &EFS=0/11.2 0005-1872-670 3RV24110KA10 CIRCUIT-BREAKER SZ S00, FOR TRANSFORMER PROT. A-RELEASE 0.9...1.25A SIEMENS
=0-F2 &EFS=0/11.2 0005-1551-120 IC65H1PC6A Miniature Circuit Breaker, iC65H, C6A, 1 Pole, Icn: 10KA SCHNEIDER
=0-M1 &EFS=0/11.2 PFG.11632101955 PFG.11632101955 PFG.11632101955 Pfannenberg
=0-M1 &EFS=0/11.2 PFG.11720001955 PFG.11720001955 PFG.11720001955 Pfannenberg
=0-24M &EFS=0/11.7 0005-4708-890 1031400000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 1.5/ZZ Weidmüller
=0-R1 &EFS=0/11.4 32 209 210 Heraeus.32 209 210 Temperatursensor Pt100, To92, Temperaturbereich: -50...+150°C Heraeus
=0-T1 &EFS=0/11.2 MURR.866864 866864 Transformer, 400VA,MET 0400-380-420-440-460-480/230 MURR
=0-T2 &EFS=0/11.6 1478110000 1478110000 Switched-mode power supplies PRO MAX 120W 24V 5A Weidmüller
=0-X1 &EFS=0/11.1...&EFS=0/ 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 2.5 Weidmüller

11.3;&EFS=0/12.1;&EFS
=0-K1 &EFS=0/12.6 1122820000 TRS 230VUC 1CO Relay module, 1 CO contact, 230 V UC, Screw connection Weidmüller
=0-S01 &EFS=0/12.1 EAT.1433001010226 EAT.1433001010226 Emergency stop button red Eaton Electric
=0-S01 &EFS=0/12.1 EAT.254453 EAT.254453 Fixator Eaton Electric
=0-S01 &EFS=0/12.1 EAT.254458 EAT.254458 Switch element 2NC normal mounting Eaton Electric
=0-S01 &EFS=0/12.1 EAT.231273 EAT.231273 Protection cover Eaton Electric
=0-S01 &EFS=0/12.1 1877270000 1877270000 Label blanco 49x15mm CC 15/49 K MC Weidmüller
=01-B1 &EFS=01/13.1 KLY-M30I-50/1A-1-2.5 KLY-M30I-50/1A-1-2.5 Current transformer, 50/1A COMPLEE

Editor Paul.Du Parts list +
Changes Date Name © This document is COPYRIGHTED by GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH. All rights being reserved. 8560-3100-359 & EPB 59 Bl./Sh.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Article parts list
=01-F1 &EFS=01/13.4 0005-1100-070 3RN1010-1CM00 Thermistor motor protection 230V AC 1S+1NC SIEMENS
=01-Q1 &EFS=01/13.8 0005-4743-090 3RT6024-1AN20 CONTACTOR, AC-3, 5.5KW/400V, 1NO+1NC, AC 230V 50/60HZ SIEMENS
=01-Q1 &EFS=01/13.8 0005-4741-010 3RH6911-1HA22 AUX. SWITCH BLOCK , 2NO+2NC COND. PATHS: 1NC, 1NC, SIEMENS
=01-Q1 &EFS=01/13.8 3RT6926-1CD00 3RT6926-1CD00 SURGE SUPPRESSOR, RC COUPLING SIEMENS
=01-S1 &EFS=01/13.8 0005-0082-190 3SB3100-8AC21 Double push botton complete, spring return, green/red SIEMENS
=01-S1 &EFS=01/13.8 0005-0076-060 3SB34000B 3SB3 switch element 1NO normal mounting SIEMENS
=01-S1 &EFS=01/13.8 0005-0076-050 3SB34000C 3SB3 switch element 1NC-contact normal mounting SIEMENS
=01-S1 &EFS=01/13.8 3SB3922-0AY 3SB3922-0AY 3SB3 signplate holder SIEMENS
=01-S1 &EFS=01/13.8 RES.SCHILD 12,5X27-2RES.SCHILD 12,5X27-2 Label blanco RES.SCHILD 12,5X27-2 BLUMENBECKER
=01-X1 &EFS=01/13.1 0005-3504-890 1020100000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 4 Weidmüller
=01-X2 &EFS=01/13.3;&EFS=01 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 2.5 Weidmüller

/15.2;&EFS=01/16.1...&
=01-K1 &EFS=01/14.1 1122770000 TRS 24VDC 1CO Relay module, 1 CO contact, 24 V DC, Screw connection Weidmüller
=01-T1 &EFS=01/15.2 0005-4509-010 7505501 Amplifier MK1-2RP/24VDC Turck
=11-K1 &EFS=11/20.7 1123540000 TRS 230VUC 2CO Relay module, 2 CO contact, 230 V UC, Screw connection Weidmüller
=11-Q1 &EFS=11/20.0 0005-1730-000 LUB12 Tesys model U motor feeder up to 12A LUB 12 SCHNEIDER
=11-Q1 &EFS=11/20.0 0005-1730-120 LUCA05FU standard control unit LUCA - class 10 SCHNEIDER
=11-Q1 &EFS=11/20.0 0005-1730-310 LUA1C20 add-on contacts block LUA SCHNEIDER
=11-S1 &EFS=11/20.7 0005-0082-190 3SB3100-8AC21 Double push botton complete, spring return, green/red SIEMENS
=11-S1 &EFS=11/20.7 0005-0076-060 3SB34000B 3SB3 switch element 1NO normal mounting SIEMENS

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Article parts list
=11-S1 &EFS=11/20.7 0005-0076-050 3SB34000C 3SB3 switch element 1NC-contact normal mounting SIEMENS
=11-S1 &EFS=11/20.7 3SB3922-0AY 3SB3922-0AY 3SB3 signplate holder SIEMENS
=11-S1 &EFS=11/20.7 RES.SCHILD 12,5X27-2RES.SCHILD 12,5X27-2 Label blanco RES.SCHILD 12,5X27-2 BLUMENBECKER
=11-X1 &EFS=11/20.1;&EFS=11 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 2.5 Weidmüller

/22.1
=11-K3 &EFS=11/22.3 0005-1898-030 RCLS3L024 Relay, 1 CO contact, 24 V DC , 16 A, Plug-in connection Weidmüller
=11-K3 &EFS=11/22.3 8693930000 SRC 2CO N Relays accessories, Base Weidmüller
=11-K3 &EFS=11/22.3 0005-1901-000 RIM 2 24/60VDC Relays accessories, LED/protection module Weidmüller
=11-K4 &EFS=11/22.4 0005-1898-030 RCLS3L024 Relay, 1 CO contact, 24 V DC , 16 A, Plug-in connection Weidmüller
=11-K4 &EFS=11/22.4 8693930000 SRC 2CO N Relays accessories, Base Weidmüller
=11-K4 &EFS=11/22.4 0005-1901-000 RIM 2 24/60VDC Relays accessories, LED/protection module Weidmüller
=11-T1 &EFS=11/22.8 WEI.7760054114 WEI.7760054114 Signal Converter/Insulator ,ACT20P-CI-CO Weidmüller
=11-X2 &EFS=11/22.5...&EFS=1 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 2.5 Weidmüller

1/22.9;&ELU/37.7;&ELU/
=16-X2 &EFS=16/25.1...&EFS=1 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 2.5 Weidmüller

6/25.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Article parts list
=100-X2 &EFS=100/26.1...&EFS= 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 2.5 Weidmüller

100/26.5;&EFS=100/26.
=00-P1 &EFS=00/28.2;&ELU/38. 0005-4760-010 6AV2124-5DC00-0AC0 Touch panel KTP400 Comfort SIEMENS

0
=00-P1 &EFS=00/28.2 0005-3668-100 6AV2181-8XP00-0AX0 Memory card, 2 GByte, SD SIEMENS
=00-K1 &EFS=00/29.1 0005-4760-090 SIE.6ES7215-1AL40-0XB0 CPU module, SIMATIC S7-1200, CPU 1215C, 14DI/10DO/2AI/2AO SIEMENS
=00-K1 &EFS=00/29.1 0005-4278-060 6XV1850-2GH20 SIMATIC NET, IND. ETHERNET TP CORD SIEMENS
=00-K1 &EFS=00/29.1 0005-3668-110 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 6ES7954-8LE02-0AA0 SIEMENS
=00-K2 &EFS=00/29.4 0005-4281-060 6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0 6ES7231-5PD30-4AC0 SIEMENS
=00-K3 &EFS=00/29.5 0005-4281-100 6ES7234-4HE32-0XB0 ANALOG I/O SM 1234, 4AI/2AO SIEMENS
=00-K4 &EFS=00/29.6 0005-4280-040 6ES7221-1BH32-0XB0 DIGITAL INPUT SM 1221, 16DI, 24V DC SIEMENS
=00-K5 &EFS=00/29.7 0005-4280-060 6ES7222-1BH32-0XB0 DIGITAL OUTPUT SM1222, 16 DO, 24V DC SIEMENS
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-0058-500 AE 1058.500 Compact enclosure AE, sheet steel WHD 600 x 800 x 250 mm RITTAL
-Cabinet &ELU/35.2 0005-1412-000 SZ.2519000 Door stay for the AE range RIT
=0-S01 &ELU/35.4
-Ground_plate &ELU/37.0 5311 1010 5311 1010 Cable gland M16 4,5-10,0mm, RAL7001 LAPP
-Ground_plate &ELU/37.0 5200 6111 5200 6111 Sealing screw polyamide M16, RAL7001 LAPP
-Ground_plate &ELU/37.0 5311 9010 5311 9010 Screw-nut RAL 7001 M16 LAPP

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Article parts list
=01-X1 &ELU/37.6 0005-3503-890 1020000000 Feed-through terminal, WDU 2.5 Weidmüller
=Additions &ELU/37.7 0005-1554-000 1860120000 Label blanco 60mm SFX 11/60 white Weidmüller
=Additions &ELU/37.7 8555-9001-040 8555-9001-040 Instruction manual IO GEA

Instruction manual
Designation Mineral oil centrifuge with self-cleaning bowl
Type OSE 10-0136-067
No. 2065-9001-001
Edition 1010
GEA Mechanical Equipment / GEA Westfalia Separator Group

2 2065-9001-001 / 1010

The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be addressed to:

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com, www.westfalia-separator.com
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 3

Type S/N:
Year of manufacture
-1
Max. admissible rated bowl speed in min
3
Max. admissible density in kg/dm of product
Heavy 3
liquid kg/dm
3 Solids kg/dm
3
Min/max throughput m /h
Min/max temp. of product in °C
Min/max housing pressure range in bar
This nameplate must be filled in by the operator.

Please transfer the data from the centrifuge nameplate.
®
Westfalia Separator
4 2065-9001-001 / 1010
For your safety

• Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life!
• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.

This avoids damage to the separator and other equipment.
Note: • This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the separator or plant compo-
nents and the processes.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply uncondi-
tionally to the operation of the separator. The plant operator must en-
sure compliance with these regulations.
• When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

ous voltage.
Before working in electrical components, take adequate preventive
measures according to the national provisions (in Germany in accor-
dance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein Deutscher
Elektrotechnik / Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
the local electric power company.
Non-compliance with the protective measures can result in serious
damage to persons or property.
Any work on electrical components may only be carried out by an au-
thorized electrician.
• Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

tain and repair the separator.
Corresponding training courses take place in the manufacturer’s plant
or are held on site by the manufacturer.
• Follow the instructions in the manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
Repair and maintenance work that goes beyond the scope described
in this manual may not be carried out.
• Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process

and operating parameters
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 5
• Maintain the separator

as specified in this manual.
• Carry out safety checks on the separator,

as described in chapter "Safety precautions" in this manual
• Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.

Liability for the function of the machine passes unconditionally to the
owner or operator irrespective of existing warranty periods in so far as
the machine is improperly maintained or serviced by persons other
than GEA Westfalia Separator service personnel or if the machine is
not applied in accordance with the intended use.
GEA Westfalia Separator shall not be liable for damage which occurs
as a result of non-observance of the above. Warranty and liability con-
ditions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator are not extended by the above.
®
Westfalia Separator
6 2065-9001-001 / 1010
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.2 Non-compliance with the intended use .................................................. 11
1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meaning ....................................................... 13
1.4 Basic operating principles ...................................................................... 17
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ....................... 18
1.5.2 Spare part requirements ........................................................................ 19
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 Electrical installation .............................................................................. 22
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off" ........................................................... 27
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation .............................................................. 28
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 29
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils ... 36
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures ............................. 36
2 Machine description 37
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator ................................... 38

2.2 Section through separator ..................................................................... 40
2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ...-0136-... ...................................................................................... 41
2.4.1 Separator with water content and sludge space monitoring system
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment ................................................... 42
2.5 Main components of the separator ........................................................ 43
2.5.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 45
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block .............................................................................. 51
2.6 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 55
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter ............................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Water detector ....................................................................................... 56
2.6.3 Solenoid valve ....................................................................................... 58
2.6.4 Vibration monitoring (Option) ................................................................. 60
2.6.5 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 61
2.7 Product feed line and product discharge line ........................................ 62
2.7.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A) ......................................... 62
2.7.2 Throughput determination (product feed line A) -
only for control D10 ................................................................................ 63
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B) .................................... 64
2.8 Technical data ....................................................................................... 65
3 Operation 67
3.1 Technical information ............................................................................. 68
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 7
3.1.1 Separating with the unitrolplus system .................................................. 68

3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 68
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 70
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair ........................ 70
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 72
3.3 Starting the separator ............................................................................ 73
3.4 Monitoring of operation .......................................................................... 74
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 76
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 76
3.6 Ejecting the bowl .................................................................................... 77
3.7 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 78
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off" .................................................................. 80
3.8 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.2 Bowl faults.............................................................................................. 84
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair 91
4.1 Installation of the separator ................................................................... 92

4.1.1 Transporting the separator .................................................................... 94
4.1.2 Installing the separator .......................................................................... 96
4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 97
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl ........................................................... 100
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 101
4.2 Fitting orifice plates, flow indicator, pressure transmitter .................... 103
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates ................................................................... 104
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 105
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 105
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 112
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 113
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 116
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils ........................................................................ 118
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from
GEA Westfalia Separator ..................................................................... 119
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 120
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 122
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 138
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 139
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 139
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 140
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl ................................... 141
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 143
4.4.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top) ......................................... 157
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 166
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 167
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 170
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive ...................... 172
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly ................................... 174
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly ....................................................... 178
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch ........................................................ 180
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly ................................................................ 184
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch ................................................................. 186
4.6.7 Fitting the motor ................................................................................... 192
4.7 Height adjustment ................................................................................ 197
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 197
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance ................................................................. 198
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator ....................................... 200
®
Westfalia Separator
8 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator ................................... 200

4.9.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 200
4.9.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 201
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 202
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 202
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 202
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 202
4.11 Before restarting .................................................................................. 203
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 204
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 204
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids ................................................................................... 205
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 205
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 206
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 208
5 Spare parts 211
5.1 Spare part requirements ...................................................................... 212

5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts .............................................................. 212
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 9
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.2 Non-compliance with the intended use .................................................. 11
1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meaning ....................................................... 13
1.4 Basic operating principles ...................................................................... 17
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ....................... 18
1.5.2 Spare part requirements ........................................................................ 19
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 Electrical installation .............................................................................. 22
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off" ........................................................... 27
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation .............................................................. 28
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 29
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils ... 36
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures ............................. 36
®
Westfalia Separator
10 2065-9001-001 / 1010
1.1 Correct usage

Centrifugal separators – called separators in short – are used
• for the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liquids, with simulta-
neous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
• for removing (clarifying) solids from a liquid.
The separator is designed

• for a very high bowl speed.
The admissible bowl speed depends on the chemical and physical properties
of the product:
– Temperature
– Density of the fluid and solid components.
• for products which contain no corrosive and erosive components.
The aggressiveness of the product influences the careful selection of the bowl
material.
Only products conforming to the specifications on the nameplate may be
processed.
• in accordance with the method of application of the separator agreed with
GEA Westfalia Separator. Refer to the data sheet and contractually agree-
ments.
• in accordance with the admissible utilities (cleaning agents, lubricants, operat-
ing liquids etc.) specified in the documentation or on the data sheet.
Intended use involves

• paying attention to the safety precautions, the instruction manual of the sepa-
rator and the safety markings on the separator.
• adhering to the data on the nameplate, e.g. maximum admissible bowl speed.
Further information on the intended use of the separator such as
– agreed areas,
– density of the product
– throughput capacities
– temperatures
– pressures etc.
is given in the documentation or the data sheet furnished with the documenta-
tion.
The contractually agreed conditions agreed with GEA Westfalia Separator on
the intended use of the separator must be passed on to the operating personnel
by the plant operator.
Any operating mode deviating from this is not intended use and can result
in severe damage to property and persons!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 11
1.2 Non-compliance with the intended use

Any use that deviates from the intended use is considered to be non-
compliant.
The separator may not be operated by:

• Persons who have not read and understood these basic safety precautions.
• Persons who have not read and understood the instruction manual of the
separator.
• Persons who have not been briefed on proper and correct operation.
• Persons who have not been adequately trained.
• Persons who have not reached the minimum age of 18 years.
The separator may not be operated

• when the product fed does not conform to the specifications on the name-
plate.
– Product with excessively high density
– Solids with excessively high density
– Product with excessively high temperature
• when the max. admissible bowl speed has been exceeded through electrical
or electronic manipulation of the drive.
• in an incomplete state of assembly, e.g.
– required supervisory equipment is not activated or has been switched off.
– the required safety and/or protective covers have not been installed.
• by persons who are not adequately trained.
• when the separator is operated with spare parts which do not come from GEA
Non-compliance with intended use can result in severe damage to prop-

erty and persons!
®
Westfalia Separator
12 2065-9001-001 / 1010
1.3 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesive and metal plates) are attached to all separators
on the hood and frame of the respective separator in such a way that they are
clearly visible.
All safety markings on the separator, control system and plant components must
always be in perfect condition.
• Clean dirty safety markings.
• Replace damaged safety markings.
Fig. 1 Example of markings on a separator
1 Pictograms (safety stickers)

2 Oil quality
3 Plates
4 Nameplate
5 Maker's nameplate
The texts and part numbers of the safety markings change depending on the
languages required by the customer.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 13
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meaning

The following safety markings must be attached to the separator as adhesive
labels.
Fig. 2
Refer to the machine documen-

tation!
• Every person who is assigned the
task of installing, operating, main-
taining and repairing the machine
must have read and understood the
documentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete kept near to the machine and
be readily accessible to the opera-
tors. It must be available to the op-
erators at all times!
Fig. 3
®
Westfalia Separator
14 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Before carrying out work, dis-

connect power to all compo-
nents of the monitoring system!
Risk of injury due to electrical voltage
and unintended start-up of the separa-
tor!

separator and electrical plant com-
ponents:
• Make sure the separator is at a
standstill.
Fig. 4 • Switch off all electrical appliances
from being accidentally switched on.
Danger to life and limb through

rotating machine parts!
• Do not loosen any part and do not
carry out maintenance or repair
work on the separator before the
separator is at a standstill.
Methods of how to check standstill
are described in the machine docu-
mentation.
Fig. 5
Warning of unusual noises or

vibrations!
When unusual noises or vibrations
• Immediately shut down the separa-

occur on the separator:
tor with filled bowl via “emergency-
• Never trigger a bowl ejection!

off”.
• Evacuate the room.

• Do not re-enter the room until the
centrifuge has come to a standstill.
Fig. 6
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 15
Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency con-
verter, do not exceed the admissible
bowl speed (see nameplate)
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Fig. 7
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the separator and

plant components can be hot!
Note:
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 8
Danger due to electrical voltage!

Non-compliance with the protective
measures can result in serious dam-
age to persons or property.
Before working on electrical separa-

tor/plant components:
via the main switch.
Fig. 9
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can carry voltage even when the main
switch is off!
• Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national provisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein
Deutscher Elektriker / Association of German Electrical Engineers) or of the
local electric power company.
• The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).
®
Westfalia Separator
16 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Pictograms with warning text

Pictograms can be meaningfully supplemented as illustrated in the two following
examples:
– With warning text (Voltage is also present . .),
– with signal word (ATTENTION!) and warning text.
Bei ausgeschaltetem Sous tension même

Danger through external voltage!
Hauptschalter en position d’arrêt de
unter Spannung! l’interrupteur principal !
Voltage also present Con el interruptor

Voltage also present when main switch
when main
switch is turned off!
principal desconectado se
encuentra bajo tensión! is turned off!
CAUTION:
The circuits marked in this way can
switch is off!
Fig. 10 Example 1
ACHTUNG! Danger through external voltage!

Auch bei ausgeschaltetem
Hauptschalter können
orangefarbige Leitungen
unter Spannung stehen.
ATTENTION!
ATTENTION!
Also in case of switched off main isola-
Also in case of switched off tor orange coloured cores can be un-
main isolator orange coloured cores
can be under voltage. der voltage.
ATTENTION!
Lorsque le commutateur principal
est éteint les files orange
peuvent être sous tension. CAUTION:
The circuits marked in this way can
switch is off!
Fig. 11 Example 2
No te :
Orange coloured leads are fitted as standard at GEA Westfalia Separator.
Different colour leads can be fitted if requested by the customer!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 17
Potential equalisation (protec-

tive-earth terminal)
The grounding protection is a measure
which, in the case of a malfunction,
leads off the touch voltage into the
earth.
Fig. 12
1.4 Basic operating principles

Separators are used for the separation of liquid mixtures or for the separation of
solids out of liquids or liquid mixtures.
High centrifugal forces are produced in

the rotating bowl.
Fig. 13
Under the influence of the centrifugal forces, separation of the liquid mixture
and/or ejection of the solids particles takes place most rapidly.
The specifically heavier components are displaced to the bowl periphery, whe-
reas the specifically lighter components are displaced towards the centre of the
bowl.
The high centrifugal force is produced by very high bowl speeds. On the one
hand, high bowl speeds signify high efficiency, while on the other hand, they
signify high material stressing of the separator.
®
Westfalia Separator
18 2065-9001-001 / 1010
1.5 Operations on the separator
The separator works reliably, provided

that it is operated and maintained in
accordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 14
Special attention must be given to:

• Assembly
• Electrical installation
• Before start-up
• Start-up
• Shut-down
• Maintenance and repair
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator or the separator plant requires
specialized knowledge.
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
GEA Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by un-

qualified or unauthorized personnel!
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
• have reached a minimum age of 18 years.

who
• are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
ing.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
• is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.

The operator of the separator or separator plant
• is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.

• must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-
essary to carry out their work.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 19
GEA Westfalia Separator offers an extensive range of training and advanced

training courses. You can obtain further information from GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator or from one of the authorized representatives.
1.5.2 Spare part requirements
• Use only genuine spare parts from GEA

Westfalia Separator. The original spare parts
are listed in the spare parts catalog.
– safety risks,
– reduced durability of these parts,
– reduced availability of the separator and
Fig. 15 If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
for the responsible persons. In such cases, GEA
ranty claims.
1.5.3 Assembly
• If the plant has several centrifuges,

be careful not to interchange parts of
different bowls since each bowl has
been balanced individually.
The bowl parts are marked with the
serial-number of the machine or with
the last three digits of the serial-
number.
Fig. 16

parts.
Fig. 17
®
Westfalia Separator
20 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Some bowl parts may be pre-

CAUTION:
assembled and balanced only by

specialists from GEA Westfalia
Separator or in workshops au-
thorized by Westfalia Separator.
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life.
Fig. 18
• To avoid unbalance, when replacing

some bowl parts like
– Lock ring
– Bowl top
– Distributor
– Bowl bottom
– Water chamber bottom
GEA Westfalia Separator must be
consulted.
These parts
– are marked with a footnote in the
separator manual (see section
“Bowl”).
Fig. 19 – are marked in the column “ETS” of
the parts list with a 3 or 4.
• Some bowl parts are arranged in

fixed positions relative to one an-
• Locking devices and alignment

other.
marks must be in perfect condition.

The bowl must otherwise not be op-
erated.
Fig. 20
• When transporting and assembling

machine parts, avoid crushing and
shear strain.
Fig. 21
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 21
• When assembling the bowl, be sure

to strictly adhere to the assembly in-
structions in order to avoid undue
• Before starting the bowl, be sure to

imbalance.
fit all parts.
Fig. 22
• Tighten the bowl lock ring securely:

the "O" marks on the bowl bottom or
bowl top and on the lock ring must
• Pay attention to the position of the

be in line with each other.
marks!
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring can endanger life!
Fig. 23
• Tighten the spindle screw with the

separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
CAUTION:
A loose spindle screw can endanger
life!
Fig. 24
• Tighten the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring or cover securely (left-
hand thread).
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring or cover can en-
danger life!
Fig. 25
®
Westfalia Separator
22 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Carefully fasten hood 1, feed and

discharge housing 2 and centripetal
pump 3.
Fig. 26
• Check if the machine is completely

assembled and properly installed.
Fig. 27
1.5.4 Electrical installation
• Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized electri-
cian!
• The governing accident prevention
regulations apply for the electrical
appliances and installations.
• Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of GEA West-
falia Separator.
• The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 28
• Carry out voltage equalization.

• Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
– Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/EC,
– Electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC,
– Guidelines of the classification societies.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 23
1.5.5 Before start-up
• Check that the bowl lock ring has

been firmly tightened.
• The "O" marks on bowl bottom or
bowl top and on the lock ring must
be aligned.
Fig. 29
• The bowl must rotate in clockwise

direction (see arrow on frame or sol-
ids collector).
Fig. 30
• The separator may only be operated

with protection devices conforming
to EN 294.
• Equip solid and liquid discharges
accordingly where appropriate.
Fig. 31
®
Westfalia Separator
24 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 32
• Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
• When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
– inert gas blanketing,
– cooling,
– steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
Fig. 33
• Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
• Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
• Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
parts.
Fig. 34
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 25
1.5.6 Start-up
• Refer to chapter “operation”.

• Note nameplate. The values for
– bowl speed,
– density of the heavy liquid,
– density of the solids (centrifugally
dry)
are maximum values and must not
be exceeded.
Fig. 35
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 36

operation:
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible bowl
speed (see nameplate).
• The separator may only be operated
with an independent device for
speed limiting.
Fig. 37
®
Westfalia Separator
26 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
• The separator must not be used in
areas where explosion protection is
required.
Fig. 38
• When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
• Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
• Use protective gear, e.g.
– Protective clothing
– Eye protection
– Protective mask
Fig. 39

• Never trigger a bowl ejection!

off”.

separator has come to a standstill.
Fig. 40
Only in case of hot operation:

• Product-contacting parts such as
– pipes and hoses,
– hood,
– solids catcher
o
reach temperatures over 80 C .
o
(176 F).
Fig. 41
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 27
• The bowl is not allowed to run with-

out liquid supply for more than 15 –
30 minutes, as otherwise it would
result in overheating of the bowl ma-
terial.
Fig. 42
1.5.7 Shut-down and “Emergency-Off"
• For shut-down of the separator refer

to the chapter "Operation" of this
manual and follow the start-up and
shut-down instructions.
Fig. 43
®
Westfalia Separator
28 2065-9001-001 / 1010
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation

When the voltage is cut off for longer than one second during operation, the
control system switches off automatically and the separating process is aborted.
Important:
– The bowl is not emptied. Product and solids remain in the bowl.
– The separator motor and product feed pump will be switched off.
– The control system switches itself back on automatically when the power
returns.
After the power returns

• Switch on the separator motor and product feed pump.
A closing water pulse after run-up of the separator triggers a total ejection
automatically.


off”.

Fig. 44
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 29
1.5.9 Maintenance and repair

Unfavourable operating conditions may require shorter maintenance intervals.
The factors listed below are unfavourable because they either attack the sepa-
rator material directly or impair the lubrication/cooling system:
• Aggressive product (chemical or physical)
• High product temperature
• Product with grease-decaying properties
• Environment: Temperature, dust, vapours
Particularly high-stressed separator

parts like
– Bowl lock ring,
– bowl bottom,
– bowl top and
– other bowl parts with a large outer
diameter
must be checked regularly to assure
safe and efficient operation.
Fig. 45
Timely maintenance of the separator and replacement of worn or damaged ma-

chine parts is essential for safe operation of the machine.
Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, safety
risks may arise (see section 1.5.2)
Carry out the required cleaning thoroughly.

One-sided solid deposits in the bowl cause severe unbalance!
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out to the extent described in
this instruction manual.
Maintenance and repair work not described in this manual may only be
carried out by the manufacturer or by "repair shops" authorized by the
manufacturer.
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator in-
spected by our service engineers at regular intervals. These checks help to
maintain the operating safety and avoid unexpected downtime.
®
Westfalia Separator
30 2065-9001-001 / 1010

ponents:
• Make sure the separator is at a
standstill.
Fig. 46
• Do not loosen any part and do not

carry out maintenance or repair
work on the separator before the
separator is at a standstill.
The standstill check is described in
the section “bowl”.
Fig. 47
• Do not climb onto or stand on the

machine or parts of the machine.
• Make provision for and use a sturdy
working platform.
Fig. 48
• Place dismantled machine parts on

a suitable base, e.g. rubber mat.
• Secure machine parts from rolling
away and overturning using suitable
aids!
Fig. 49
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 31
• Do not heat bowl parts with the

naked flame.
• Bowl parts must never be welded.
This also applies for hood and
solids catcher parts of steam-
sterilizable separators.
• Even during cleaning the bowl parts
the temperature must not exceed
100 °C (212 °F).
Fig. 50
• Load-carrying equipment such as

– lifting devices for bowl or distribu-
tor,
– chains etc.
may only be used for their intended
purpose, i.e. the work routines as
described in this instruction manual.
• Do not use damaged or incomplete
load carrying equipment.
Fig. 51
• All load suspension devices have to be checked for completeness and for
possible damage at least once a year.
• In addition, when using load suspension devices and hoists, the applicable
legislation and safety rules have to be strictly observed.
• Do NOT step under hanging load.

CAUTION: Danger to life when transporting heavy parts!
• Special tools (e.g. compressing, assembly devices, pin spanners) may only
be used for their intended purpose, i.e. the work routines as described in this
instruction manual.
• Before using the standard and special tools supplied, check them for damage
and completeness.
Make sure that
– all moving parts are correctly aligned and not seized.
– that no parts are broken and that there is otherwise no damage which could
affect the operation of the tool.
• Have damaged tools repaired by specialists before using them again.
– Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, the
safety of the tool can be impaired.
• Keep the tools clean and keep them in a dry, safe place.
Properly maintained and cleaned tools work more precisely and can be
checked better.
®
Westfalia Separator
32 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

of slipping or product infection.
• When handling waste oils note:
– They can be injurious to health,
depending on their chemical com-
position.
– Waste oil must be disposed of in
accordance with local regulations.
Fig. 52
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 33
1.6 Corrosion
Corrosion can also affect bowl parts made of stainless steel. This corrosion can
be flat-spread or pit- or crack-shaped and merits special attention.
Corrosion on stainless steel bowl material should be examined thoroughly and
documented.
Flat-spread corrosion can usually be measured (reduction of wall thickness)
Pit- or crack-shaped corrosion cannot be measured without the risk of damage.
At the initial stage pit-shaped corrosion is generally caused by chlorine ions.
Depending on the stressing of the part, pit-shaped corrosion can result in crack-
shaped corrosion.
Possible formation of pit-shaped cor-

rosion.
Fig. 53
Such pittings can only be investigated by a materials expert.
In case of crack-shaped corrosion attack with or without superposed flat-

spread and pit-shaped corrosion on main bowl components, the machine
must be shut down immediately.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-

nation.
Pittings
Pittings which are close together or
form a linear pattern can signify crack
formation beneath the surface.
Such pittings should be investigated by
a materials expert.
Fig. 54
®
Westfalia Separator
34 2065-9001-001 / 1010
1.7 Erosion
Erosion is caused by solid particles in the process liquid.
These solid particles grind marks into the surfaces with which they come into
contact.
The following factors favour the occurrence of erosion:
• hard solids particles
• high throughput capacities
The first signs of erosion should be carefully observed and documented. Ero-
sion can deepen rapidly, thereby weakening the bowl material.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-

nation. Information on the nature of the damage can be provided by photos,
plaster casts or lead molds.
Fig. 55
The surfaces most susceptible to erosion are:
1) the bottom of the distributor, the rising channels and the ribs,
2) the centripetal pump (cavitation),
3) all surfaces in the area of the solids discharge ports,
4) the nozzles.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 35
Signs of erosion which you should

immediately report to your nearest
• The bottom of the erosion mark has

Westfalia Separator representative:
a radius smaller than 1 mm (large
• The depth of erosion mark exceeds

notch effect).
1 mm (0.04 inch) at the deepest

point.
Fig. 56
®
Westfalia Separator
36 2065-9001-001 / 1010
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils
As a result of the deterioration in quality of fuel oils, the danger has arisen that the heavy oils used on
board contain greater amounts of substances injurious to health. These include:
- polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons,
- lead compounds,
- chemical residues.
An increased amount of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons is also present in used lube oils (waste oils).
The health hazards for the engine room staff depend to a large extent
• on the concentrations of the dangerous substances,
• the ambient air (inhalation of oil vapours/oil mist),
• the intensity and duration of the contact with the skin or mucous membrane.
Possible short-term effects:

• headaches,
• dizziness,
• nausea,
• itching or burning of the skin,
Possible long-term effects:

• allergic reactions, especially skin allergies,
• festering inflammation of the skin pores (oil-acne),
• damage to the central nervous system after inhalation over a long period,
• skin cancer caused by direct skin contact over a long period,
• Lung cancer or cancer of the digestive organs after inhalation over a long period
(not certain as the causes are difficult to separate from the effects of smoking and alcohol).
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures
• Avoid skin contact with heavy oils or lube oils if possible!

- Wear suitable protective gloves.
- Apply a protective ointment to the skin (e.g. ointment no. 76), especially if no protective gloves are
worn!
• Avoid breathing in oil vapours if possible!
• If possible, improve the air circulation in the room!
Fully open the air regulation flaps in the outlets of the air supply ducts in the centrifuge and filter area.
• Wash affected areas of skin frequently and thoroughly!
Apply protective ointment to the skin!
• Personal hygiene is of the utmost importance!
• Change dirty overalls regularly!
• Exercise special care when carrying out maintenance work on and cleaning heavy oil and lube oil cen-
trifuges and filters!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 37
2 Machine description
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator ................................... 38

2.2 Section through separator ..................................................................... 40
2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ...-0136-... ...................................................................................... 41
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment ................................................... 42
2.5 Main components of the separator ........................................................ 43
2.5.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 45
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block .............................................................................. 51
2.6 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 55
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter ............................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Water detector ....................................................................................... 56
2.6.3 Solenoid valve ....................................................................................... 58
2.6.4 Vibration monitoring (Option) ................................................................. 60
2.6.5 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 61
2.7 Product feed line and product discharge line ........................................ 62
2.7.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A) ......................................... 62
2.7.2 Throughput determination (product feed line A) -
only for control D10 ................................................................................ 63
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B) .................................... 64
2.8 Technical data ....................................................................................... 65
®
Westfalia Separator
38 2065-9001-001 / 1010
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator
• For further information see installation guidelines.

Min. lifting capacity of hoist: 500 kg
For maintenance and repair
Bowl, motor
The complete bowl can then be

transported via the adjacent
separators of the same type.
Centre of gravity
Solids discharge Filling, displacement and

operating water supply
Water / operating water discharge
Product discharge
Product feed
Water / operating water discharge Solids discharge
These functional dimensions must be adhered to!

Discharge must not feed into public water system!
Fig. 57 Note project-specific dimensioned drawing!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 39
Pressure transmitter (product discharge)

Pressure transmitter (self-thinker)
2/2-way solenoid valve (water outlet)
2/2-way solenoid valve (circuit)
Water detector
Centre of gravity
Connector:
Product discharge
Discharge via the centripetal pump
installed in the separator
Product feed
Filling, displacement and operating water

supply
Terminal box
Solids discharge
Solenoid valve block

Water detector
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
Service side
The foundation must not contact the foundations of other units (e.g. auxiliary diesel en-
gines, pumps) in order to prevent damage to ball and roller bearings.

®
Westfalia Separator
40 2065-9001-001 / 1010
2.2 Section through separator
Fig. 59
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 41
2.3 General
The machine described in this manual is a high-speed centrifugal separator with
self-cleaning bowl.
"Separation" means the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liq-
uids, with simultaneous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
"Clarification" is the removal of solids from a liquid.
Prerequisite for treatment technology (separation) is that the components of the
product
– can be separated mechanically,
– have different densities and
– do not emulsify.
2.4 OSE ...-0136-...

The OSE separator ...-0136-... with unitrolplus-System is equipped with a self-
cleaning disk bowl. It is used for clarification and purification of fuel oil (heavy oil
up to a density of 1.01 g/ml).
The separator with unitrol plus-System has two built-in monitoring functions:
– WMS - (water content monitoring system)
– SMS (sludge space monitoring system)
®
Westfalia Separator
42 2065-9001-001 / 1010
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment
The simultaneous water content and sludge space monitoring systems (WMS
and SMS) are used for the continuous purification of fuel oil.
Fig. 60 Example of monitoring
1 Dirty oil feed 11 Sensing liquid pump

2 Clean oil discharge 12 Centripetal pump (clean oil)
3 Displacement water 13 Separating disk
4 Pressure transmitter (clean oil) 14 Dirty water discharge
5 Water detector: 15 Solids holding space
6 Pressure transmitter 16 Solids discharge
7 Solenoid valve circuit 17 Operating water discharge
8 Solenoid valve water discharge 18 Operating water feed
9 Partial flow 19 Solenoid valve block
10 Control and monitoring device 20 Throttle
The fuel oil is conveyed to the separator via a separate pump.
The dirty oil feed occurs (1) through a closed line system.
The clean oil is discharged (2) under pressure by centripetal pump (12) via the
clean oil discharge.
The bowl is automatically opened and closed for desludging at full bowl speed
by means of a solenoid valve (19) in the operating water line.
The partial flow (9) diverted from the bowl via the separating disk (13) and the
sensing liquid pump (11) is monitored by a water detector (5) and a pressure
transmitter (6).
When the water detector (5) registers water (high capacity), the solenoid valve
(8) opens and the water is discharged through the dirty water outlet (14).
If the high capacity (water) changes due to oil flow (low capacity), the solenoid
valve (8) closes and the solenoid valve (7) opens intermittently. The partial flow
(9) is then recycled into the dirty oil feed (1).
When the sensing liquid inlet becomes blocked with water or solids accumula-
tion in the sludge space (15), the pressure transmitter (6) sends a pulse to the
control unit (10 and the automatic ejection program is initiated.
The control and monitoring unit (10) ensures unmanned operation.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 43
2.5 Main components of the separator
Fig. 61
Pos. Designation Function

connection • connects centripetal pump and hood.
• holds the filling and displacement water supply
1 Handle
piece
line.
2 Centripetal pump See section 2.5.1

Sensing liquid pump
• covers the rotating bowl.

• holds the feed and discharges (see section
3 Hood
2.7).
• is fitted to the hood.

• can be replaced as a complete unit.
4 Sensor block
• contains the following parts:

– Regulating ring (see section 2.6.1)
– Pressure transmitter (unitrolplus system –
SMS function) (see section 2.6.1)
– 2/2-way solenoid valve (water outlet) (see
section 2.6.3)
– 2/2-way solenoid valve (circulation) (see
section 2.6.3)
– Water detector (unitrolplus system – WMS
function) (see section 2.6.2)
5 Bowl: See section 2.5.2

Bowl hydraulics See section 2.5.3
• contains the drive parts.

• supports motor, bowl and hood.
6 Frame
®
Westfalia Separator
44 2065-9001-001 / 1010

7 Sight glass allows checking the oil level.
8 Sight glass for checking the drive belt.
9 Solenoid valve block See section 2.5.5
10 Drive See section 2.5.4
11 Motor • accelerates the separator to the required
• is protected against overload during operation.

speed.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 45
2.5.1 Centripetal pump
Fig. 62
• discharges the purified liquid under pressure.

• is firmly connected to hood 2 of the separator.
1 Centripetal pump
• The disk provided with channels

dips into the liquid rotating with the
bowl.
• The liquid
– is pared off by the centripetal
pump and
– flows through its spiral channels
from the outside to the inside.
By this means the kinetic energy is
converted into pressure energy
which makes possible discharging
the liquid under pressure.
3 Sensing liquid pump • operates on the same principle as centripetal
• conveys the sensing liquid to the monitoring

pump 1.
system.
®
Westfalia Separator
46 2065-9001-001 / 1010
2.5.2 Bowl
Fig. 63

1 Bowl produces high centrifugal forces through rotation
making possible separation and clarification.
2 Distributor accelerates the product fed in through feed A to
the rotational velocity of the bowl and then con-
veys it into the disk stack.
3 Disk stack • splits the liquid mixture consisting of a light
and heavy phase, e.g. oil-water, into its com-
• consists of a large number of conical disks

ponents.
positioned on top of one another.

Each disk is provided with spacers so that pre-
cisely defined interspaces are formed between
the individual disks.
The smooth disk surfaces facilitate sliding of the
solids and hence self-cleaning of the disks.
Separation chamber The separation space consists of a large number
of parallel chambers of low height. This pro-
duces very small radial sedimentation paths for
the product.
Solids collect on the upper wall of each disk interspace

and slide down into the solids holding space.
4 Solids holding space collects the solids separated in the disk stack.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 47
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics
A B
Fig. 64
A Separation – Bowl closed

B Ejection – Bowl open
1 Operating liquid In the rotating bowl the incoming, rotating oper-

(usually water) ating liquid generates a high centrifugal pres-
sure. This pressure is utilised for actuating the
annular piston and sliding piston which closes
and opens the bowl.
• is inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
2 Annular piston
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,
• is located inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
3 Sliding piston
• is axially movable.
other bowl parts,
®
Westfalia Separator
48 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Closing the bowl (separation)
A B
Fig. 65

After starting the separator the solenoid valve for operating liquid is actuated
with the aid of the control unit, and the bowl is closed as follows:
1 Operating liquid • flows into the injection chamber 4 of bowl
• from there through feed holes into closing

bottom 5 and
chamber 6.
This initiates closing of the bowl.
2 Annular piston • moves into closed position.
3 Sliding piston • is raised due to the hydrostatic pressure in
• is pressed against the gasket 7 of bowl top

closing chamber 6.
• closes the bowl.

due to the hydrostatic pressure and
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 49
Opening the bowl (ejection)
A B
Fig. 66

The solenoid valve for operating liquid is opened with the aid of the control unit,
and the ejection cycle is triggered as follows:
• flows first into injection chamber 4 and

• from there into opening chamber 8.
1 Operating liquid
• rises and
• empties closing chamber 6.
2 Annular piston
• moves downwards and

• opens the ejection ports in bowl bottom 5 for
3 Sliding piston
the separated solids 9.
®
Westfalia Separator
50 2065-9001-001 / 1010
2.5.4 Drive
Fig. 67

1 Drive motor drives the separator.
Power transmission to the bowl spindle is via the
centrifugal clutch to the motor belt pulley and via
the drive belt.
2 Centrifugal clutch • ensures power transmission between motor,
• accelerates the bowl gradually to rated

drive belt and spindle.
• is gentle on the drive belt and motor.

speed;
Important!
– The driving effect of new clutch shoes will
improve after several starts.
– Smoking of the centrifugal clutch during the
first few starts is perfectly normal and will dis-
appear after a short time of operation.
– Wear to the clutch shoes depends on the
number of starts and the ejection frequency
(see section 4.3.1).
3 Drive belt transfers the drive power of the drive motor 1 to

the bowl spindle 4.
Regularly check the seat and condition of the
drive belt. The inspection and replacement inter-
vals are given in the maintenance schedule (see
4.3.1).
4 Bowl spindle supports the bowl.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 51
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block

The solenoid valve block for operating, filling and displacement water consists of
two 2/2-way solenoid valves with servo control. They are equipped with a man-
ual override for testing purposes.
Fig. 68
10 Pressure controller 90 Diaphragm

20 Sleeve-type ball valve 100 Magnet core
30 Pressure gauge 110 Coupler socket
40 Filter insert 130 Hose
70 Magnet coil
80 Housing A Manual override
Manual override A
The manual override can only be

actuated with a screwdriver!
1 closed
2 open
Fig. 69
®
Westfalia Separator
52 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Adjusting the pressure setpoint

- pressure controller 10
• Correct the pressure setpoint by

If necessary:
turning the setpoint screw 1 (jaw

span 7).
Pressure setpoint correction

• Open the operating water valve
using the manual override (see Fig.
69).
• Increase the pressure setpoint.

Pressure setpoint is too low.
– Turn setpoint screw clockwise.
• Decrease the pressure setpoint.

Pressure setpoint is too high.
– Turn setpoint screw counter-

clockwise.
The adjusted pressure setpoint is indi-

cated on pressure gauge 30.
SW = jaw span
Fig. 70
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 53
Technical data
• Note the specifications on the nameplate of the solenoid valve block and
ATTENTION:
• the installation guidelines.
Part-No. see parts list

Operating principles 2/2-way solenoid valve
NC
Material: Gasket EPDM
Housing CuZn
Solenoid
Coil size 32 mm
valves:
Nominal diameter
13 mm
(DN)
Operating voltage: 24 V DC
Rating 8 W (per solenoid valve)
Coupler socket with built-in electronics,
24 V DC, LED and free-wheeling diode
with fitted cable (1.5 m long)
Pressure Medium 0 to 10 bar
Control range 1 to 6 bar
Pressure setpoint 2 bar
with open operating water solenoid
valve
Temperature: Medium -10 to +80 °C (14 – 176 °F)
In case of electrical faults
• Switch off the main switch and lock it.

CAUTION: Danger due to electrical current!
• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.
CAUTION: Danger of injury through very hot separator parts!

When carrying out maintenance work, there is a danger of injury through hot
o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C(158 – 212 °F)).
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve block.
ATTENTION:
• Direct intervention in the solenoid valve block only by authorised specialists

and with suitable tools!
®
Westfalia Separator
54 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Problem Cause Action
Solenoid valve does Control unit is defective. Contact service backup

not function. support.
Wire break in the connect- Replace wire.
ing terminal.
Connecting terminal on the Tighten the screw of the
connector block is loose. connecting terminal.
Bad contact on the con- Clean or replace the con-
necting terminal. tact.
Coupler socket loose. Tighten coupler socket.
Magnet coil defective. Replace the solenoid head.
Diaphragm defective. Replace diaphragm.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 55
2.6 Supervisory equipment

The separating process is monitored and controlled by an automatic control unit.
For further details, refer to the control unit manual.
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter
Pressure transmitters PT1 and PT2

(Pressure Transmitter)
– are included in the standard scope
of supply,
– provide alarm logging PAH (Pres-
sure Alarm High) and PAL (Pres-
sure Alarm Low),
– switch process-specifically in case of
pressure drop or increase,
– can be software-checked for correct
functionality and
can be adjusted to their switching
points,
Fig. 71 – are maintenance-free.
The pressure transmitter
– PT1 is installed in the product discharge line.
– PT2 is installed on the Unitrolplus-System.
Note:
Refer to the circuit diagram in the control cabinet and the manual of the control
system.
Setting the switching points

The switching points are set at the factory using appropriate software.
Factory settings
Product discharge line Unitrolplus-System
Pressure transmitter Pressure transmitter
PT1 PT2
PAL PAH PAL
(1) (2)
1.0 bar 3.0 bar 0.5 bar
(1)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar above the switching point.
(2)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar under the switching point.
• Pay special attention to order-specific settings (see operating data sheet in

IMPORTANT:
the order documentation)!
®
Westfalia Separator
56 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Technical data
Voltage 24 V DC
Range 0 – 16 bar
Output signal 4 – 20 mA
Pressure connection G 1/4in outer (O-ring seal)
Tightening torque
Pressure connection max. 25 Nm
Connector plug M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Cable PUR-2 core, 1.5 m
Cable box M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Pin1-, white; Pin4+, black
Enclosure IP 67
Working temperature :
-40 to +125 °C (-40 to +257 °F)
Medium temperature
2.6.2 Water detector
The WMSwater detector (WMS sen-

sor)
– is included in the standard equip-
ment,
– is built into the unitrolplus-System,
– monitors the partial flow that is dis-
charged from the bowl via the sepa-
rating disk and the sensing liquid
pump.
– can be checked for functionality
using appropriate software.
Fig. 72
Note:
Refer to the terminal connection plan in the control cabinet and the manual of
the control system.
Setting the switching points

The switching points are preset for the specific area of application (HFL or LO)
at the factory.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 57
Technical data
Switching hysteresis Depending on the process HFO/LO
Ambient temperature -30 to +125 °C (-22 to +257 °F)
(LED: -30 to 100 °C / -22 to 212 °F )
Temperature drift dependent on medium
Enclosure (according to IEC 60529) Terminal strip: IP 54
Probe: IP 68 – 10 bar
Housing material MS
Immersion tube: PTFE
Connector plug Terminals
See terminal allocation
Connection M 30 x 1.5
Jaw span 32
Supply voltage UB 10 to 35 V DC
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
Conformity
according to IEC 60947-5-2)
®
Westfalia Separator
58 2065-9001-001 / 1010
2.6.3 Solenoid valve
The solenoid valve is a 2/2-way diaph-

ragm straight-way valve with internal
piloting.
Main components:
1 Diaphragm
2 Emergency locking manual override
A Operating mode
B Emergency manual override
Fig. 73
Note: The emergency manual override (2)

– is secured against accidental activation: see operating status (A).
– can be pressed and turned through 90°: see emergency manual override (B).
Technical data
Part-No. see parts list
Operating principles 2/2-way valve normally closed
Nominal width 3 mm
Gasket material FKM
Material CuZn
Line connection G-1/4 sleeve
Voltage 24 V
Kind of current DC (direct current)
Rating 8W
In case of electrical faults


o
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve.

IMPORTANT:
• Direct intervention in the solenoid valve may only be done by authorised spe-
cialists and with suitable tools!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 59
Problem Cause Action

Valve does not Control unit is defective. Contact service backup
function. support.
Wire break in the connect- Replace wire.
ing terminal.
Connecting terminal on the Tighten the screw of the
connector block is loose. connecting terminal.
Bad contact on the con- Clean or replace the con-
necting terminal. tact.
Magnet coil defective. Replace the solenoid head.
Diaphragm defective. Replace diaphragm.
®
Westfalia Separator
60 2065-9001-001 / 1010
2.6.4 Vibration monitoring (Option)

The separator is protected against inadmissibly high vibrations by means of an
electronic vibration monitoring system.
Fig. 74 Installation example
• is installed at the upper part of the frame.

• converts the separator vibrations into electric
1 Vibration pick-up
signals.
2 Terminal box • is mounted at the lower part of the frame.
Vibration monitoring • is installed in the control cabinet.
• evaluates the signals coming from the vibra-
3
unit
tion pickup.
The evaluation of the signal – depending on the version – takes place
in the control cabinet, on the control unit or directly on the vibration
pickup.
When the limit value or values are exceeded, an alarm and follow-up
measures are triggered and the separator motor switches off automati-
cally.
The operating status can be read off on the control unit.
ATTENTION!
• instruction manual of the vibration monitoring system

Pay attention to the following instructions and plans:
• instruction manual of the control unit

• terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the control cabinet
• circuit diagram
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 61
2.6.5 Speed monitoring

Speed monitoring device
• displays bowl speed.
Speed deviations of up to 5 % are permissible.
• monitors speed drop as well as excess of speed and starting time.
Fig. 75
1 Spindle • rotates and generates speed pulses at prox-

imity switch 2.
2 Proximity switch • transmits the pulses triggered from the spindle

to control unit 3.
ATTENTION!
Align the proximity switch as illustrated.
The distance X between the spindle and the
proximity switch must be 2.5 mm.
• evaluates the speed pulses.

• triggers an alarm if the bowl speed is too low
3 Control unit
• initiates a shut-down process if the bowl speed

or too high.
• indicates the current bowl speed and

is too low or too high.
• permits setting of limit values.
ATTENTION!
Pay attention to the terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the
refer to the instruction manual of the control unit.
®
Westfalia Separator
62 2065-9001-001 / 1010
2.7 Product feed line and product discharge line
Fig. 76
The separator is adapted to local conditions for throughput capacity and line
pressure by means of orifice plates installed in product feed line A and product
discharge line B (see section 4.2).
2.7.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A)

The effective throughput capacity of the separator is stated on the project de-
pendent data sheet.
The inner diameters of the orifice plates required for the different throughput ca-
pacities can be read from the following table:
Flowmeter – Scale: 0 – 10
Inner diameter of orifice
Throughput capacity
plate
[l/h] [mm]
1 000 – 1 400 6
1 400 – 2 200 8
2 200 – 3 300 10
3 300 – 4 800 12
4 800 – 7 000 14
7 000 – 13 000 no orifice plate
When using a D10 control unit

• During commissioning mark the respective scale area on flowmeter 4 (see
Fig. 76 with the sticker supplied.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 63
When using an E10 control unit

The effective throughput capacity is displaced on the control unit via the pres-
sure transmitter 5.
Throughput values deviating between the actual value and the setpoint value
can be adapted in the control unit.
2.7.2 Throughput determination (product feed line A) - only for control

D10
Fig. 77 Diagram for determining the throughput rate
A Inner diameter of orifice plate (mm)

B Throughput capacity (x 1000 l/h)
C Scale area of flowmeter
The throughput capacity of the separator (volume of product to be treated fed by

unit of time) can be determined with the aid of the diagram.
®
Westfalia Separator
64 2065-9001-001 / 1010
3/2-way valve with flow indicator 4

Procedure:
• Read the value on the scale of flowmeter 4 (see Fig. 76).
e.g. 3
• From the value read from the scale (e.g. 3) draw a line up to the curve of the
inner diameter of the built-in orifice plate A (e.g. Ø 10).
• Read the throughput rate B appearing vertically below:
e.g. 2.7 (= 2 700 l/h)
The precision in throughput determination depends on the following characteris-
tics of the product to be processed:
– Viscosity
– Temperature
– Density
The parameters mentioned here can lead to inexact determination of the
throughput rate.
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B)

The pressure in the discharge line is displayed on pressure gauge 1 (see Fig.
76).
• Note factory adjusted switch points (see section 2.6.1).
The inner diameters of the orifice plates required for the different throughput ca-
pacities can be read from the following table:
Pressure gauge - Measuring range: 0 – 10 bar

Inner diameter of orifice
Throughput capacity
plate
[l/h] [mm]
1 000 – 1 800 6
1 800 – 2 800 8
2 800 – 4 300 10
4 300 – 6 300 12
6 300 – 9 100 14
9 100 – 13 000 no orifice plate
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 65
2.8 Technical data

The order-specific process data are given on the operating data sheet in-
cluded in the documentation.
Bowl
3
Solids holding space (total) 0.9 dm
–1
Speed 12 000 min
– for densities of the product up to
3 o (see name-plate)
1.01 kg/dm (at 15 C) and
– for densities of the separated solids up to
3
1.4 kg/dm
Speed for higher densities contact the factory
Starting time approx. 2 – 4 min

Run-down time (after switching off the motor
45 min
with drive belt))
Run-down time (without drive belts, i.e. in
the case of torn, jumped off or defective drive 90 min
belt)
Centripetal pump
Output (depending on medium) max. 6 500 l/h

Pressure head 1 – 2 bar
Operating water
Qty. min. 1 800 l/h

Pressure (with open valve) 2–3 bar
Standard operating water specification
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/l

Particle size max. 50 µm
Hardness:
o o
– up to 55 C separating temperature < 12 dH
o o
– above 55 C separating temperature < 6 dH
To convert the hardness values stated use the following equation:
1° dH = 1.79 ° fH = 1.25 ° eH = 17.9 ppm CaCO3
Chlorine ions < 100 mg/l

pH 6.5 – 7.5
®
Westfalia Separator
66 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Normal separating temperature of the product
DO 20 °C (68 °F)
MDO 40 °C (104 °F)
LO 90 °C (194 °F)
LO HD 95 °C (203 °F)
HFO 98 °C (208 °F)

Due to the large number of products to be treated, it is not possible
to specify an exact separating temperature of the product in this
manual.
The exact separating temperature of the product (in °C) is stated in
the order-specific data sheet.
Motor
Power rating 50 Hz 4 kW
60 Hz 4.8 kW
Speed 50 Hz 3 000 RPM

60 Hz 3 600 RPM
Design IM V1
Enclosure IP 55
Drive 50/60 Hz
Oil filling approx. 2.5 l
Oil quality, see section 4.3.3
Product feed pump
Pump unit (gear or screw pump)
Output depending on plant rating
Suction height max. 0.4 bar
Pressure head 2 bar
Weights
Separator (with motor, without bowl) 160 kg

Bowl 45 kg
Motor 25 kg
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 67
3 Operation
3.1 Technical information ............................................................................. 68

3.1.1 Separating with the unitrolplus system .................................................. 68
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 68
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 70
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair ........................ 70
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 72
3.3 Starting the separator ............................................................................ 73
3.4 Monitoring of operation .......................................................................... 74
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 76
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 76
3.6 Ejecting the bowl .................................................................................... 77
3.7 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 78
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off" .................................................................. 80
3.8 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.1 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 82
3.8.2 Bowl faults.............................................................................................. 84
®
Westfalia Separator
68 2065-9001-001 / 1010
3.1 Technical information

Take note of the following sections:
3.1.1 Separating with the unitrolplus system

The separator with unitrol plus-System has two built-in monitoring functions:
– water content monitoring system - WMS
– sludge space monitoring system - SMS
Procedure:
• Select the desired operating mode on the control unit.
• Set the separating time on the control unit.
• Start the separator (see 3.2).
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection

The bowl is ejected automatically at full speed during the program sequence.
The time at which the ejection is triggered is
• determined by the preset separating time
or
• by the solids level in the bowl,
if:
– SMS was selected on the control unit,
– the sludge space is full before the separating time has elapsed.
For determining the separating time see 3.5.
Sequence of an ejection (example without “Filling”)

1. Separating time has elapsed.
2. Product feed valve is closed.
3. Displacement water displaces the fuel oil to the clean oil side.
4. Operating water opens and closes the bowl hydraulically at full bowl
speed.
5. Waiting time for speed recovery.
6. Product valve is opened.
7. Separating time resumes.
Displacement
• When separating, the loss of feed liquid unavoidable during ejection can be
reduced to a minimum by displacing the feed liquid with water before sludge
ejection takes place (especially important when processing valuable feed liq-
uid).
• The duration of displacement water supply is given in the timer overview (see
control unit manual).
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 69
• If the displacement time is too long, water will discharge through the light liq-
uid outlet.
• If the displacement time is too short, part of the product remains in the bowl
and is lost during desludging.
Flush ejection
If the solids cant be completely ejected,
– due to an excessively long dwell time in the bowl or
– are stuck too firmly on the wall of the solids holding space due to the solids
properties,
• either the separating time must be shortened or
• a flush ejection must be carried out after the total ejection by filling the bowl
with water or product and emptying it again.
Program control
• "Displacement", "ejection" and "flush ejections" at precisely defined intervals
are best carried out with the automatic control unit.
• The clean oil discharge and water discharge can be monitored.
• Faults can be signalled visually or audibly.
®
Westfalia Separator
70 2065-9001-001 / 1010
3.2 Before start-up
Note:
• Safety precautions in chapter 1.
• Instruction manual of the corresponding control unit.
• Instructions “Settings and malfunctions”
• Instruction manuals for other auxiliary equipment
• Process-related deviations are possible
(refer to the order-specific operating data sheet!)
3.2.1 Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair
ATTENTION!
In order not to endanger the operating safety of the separator, keep
to the recommended maintenance intervals.
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due
• check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table

to a long standstill period or storage),
• Replace if necessary.
“Maintenance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest”).
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g.
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule

due to a long standstill period or storage),
(table “Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the lat-
• replace if necessary.
est),
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
• the bowl height is correct (see section 4.7.1).
• the bowl can be rotated by hand.
• the machine is correctly assembled.
– Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the spindle screw with the separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump chamber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
• the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 71
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).

• the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.
• the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.
– Pay attention to the air and water pressures (see order-specific operating
data sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
– Pay attention to the volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific
operating data sheet).
• the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
air control unit etc. are operational.
• the motor is correctly connected (see 4.1.3).
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.
• Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.
®
Westfalia Separator
72 2065-9001-001 / 1010
3.2.2 Before every start-up
Ensure that
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
• the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
• the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
• the machine is correctly assembled.
– Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
– Tighten the spindle screw with the separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
– Tighten the centripetal pump chamber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
• the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
• the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
• the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
• the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).
• the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.
• the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.
– Pay attention to the air and water pressures (see order-specific operating
data sheet).
• the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
– Pay attention to the volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific
operating data sheet).
• the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
air control unit etc. are operational.
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 73
3.3 Starting the separator

• See section 3.2.1 or 3.2.2
• Switch on the control unit.
• Switch on the separator motor.
Compare the starting current and starting time with the diagram (section
4.1.3) until the bowl reaches the speed specified on the separator nameplate.
Note:
The run-up phase of the separator motor is signalled by slow flashing of the
LED in the “Status Separator” key.
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work
• Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.

on the separator -
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct when the drive belt rotates
clockwise (check through the sight
glass in the frame).
When the direction of rotation is incor-
rect the motor connections must be
reversed by an authorised specialist.
Fig. 78
• Switch on the product feed pump (option).

– Ensure that the product feed valves to the suction and pressure side are
open!
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up – after maintenance and repair work
• Check the direction of rotation of the product feed pump.

on the product feed pump -
The direction of rotation of the product feed pump is correct when the fan
wheel of the pump motor rotates clockwise.
• Put the preheater in operation (option).
P re -c o n d itio n s :
– Steam or thermal oil feed and discharge valves are open!
– Electric preheater is switched on!
• Open the product discharge valve in the product discharge line (option).
®
Westfalia Separator
74 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Open the shut-off flap in the solids

discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 79
• Start the program.

P re -c o n d itio n s :
– Continuous lighting of the LED in the “Status Separator” button.
– The specified separating temperature has been reached.
– The solids tank has been released (level switch LSHH).The solids tank is
empty.
• After the product feed valve has automatically opened.
– Set the backpressure in the product discharge line to approx. 1.5 to 2.5 bar
(see order-specific operating data sheet).
– Adjust the desired throughput capacity; while doing so, maintain the back-
pressure in the product discharge line in the specified area.
• Check the discharges for solids and dirty water; there must be no oil flow
ATTENTION!
during the separating process!
3.4 Monitoring of operation

The machine is monitored largely by the separator control.
Operations to be carried out regularly:

• On your daily round, especially during the first 1500 operating hours, pay at-
tention to the following:
– Oil level
– Temperatures
– Pressures
– Leakage
– Vibrations
– Current consumption
– Starting time
– Hoses and hose pipes
– Pipe joints
• Keep to the maintenance schedule (see 4.3.1)!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 75
• Inspection
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator in-
spected by our service engineers once a year. These checks help to
– maintain the operating safety of the machine and
– avoid unscheduled downtime.
Im p o rta n t!
• Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs
of aging and mechanical damage.
®
Westfalia Separator
76 2065-9001-001 / 1010
3.5 Setting the separation time

When using time-dependent automatic control programs, accurate setting of the
separation time (time between ejection cycles) is only possible if the throughput
capacity and solids loading in the feed remain constant. If this is not the case, it
may be necessary to correct the settings during operation.
• the preselected operating mode (partial or total ejection mode),

The separating time depends on
• the solids loading in the feed,

• the consistency of the solids,
• the effective solids space volume in the bowl,
• the separator throughput.
Given constant conditions, the separating time can be determined by calcula-
tion.
The following times have proven appropriate in practice (examples):
Product Total ejection Partial ejection

HFO max. 2 h max. 1 h
MDO max. 2 h max. 1 h
DO max. 4 h max. 2 h
LO mild max. 4 h max. 2 h
LO HD max. 2 h max. 1 h
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation

Example for mathematical calculation of the separating time:
(1)
Given: Solids content p = 0.05 %
Solids holding space volume V = 0.9 l
Solids holding space given 75 % utilisation V' = 0.675 l
(1) o
Throughput capacity V = 2 000 l/h
Wanted: Separating time t = ? min
The separating time to be set is calculated as follows:
V’ 0.675
t = ——— • 60 • 100 = —————— • 6 000 = 40.5 min = 0.7 h
V° • p 2 000 • 0.05
(1)
Solids content and throughput capacity must be determined on site or taken from
the order specification.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 77
3.6 Ejecting the bowl
Automatic operation
• Initiate ejection program by pressing the key ”Process START”:

– Product feed is closed.
– Displacement
– Bowl ejection
– Speed recovery
– Filling water (process-dependent)
• The product valve opens again.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut–down)
• Close the product feed line.

– Close the product feed valve manually.
• Eject the bowl:
– Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for approx. 2 –
3 seconds.
• Speed recovery
– Wait for approx. 20 – 30 seconds.
• New separating operation
– Open the product feed valve manually.
®
Westfalia Separator
78 2065-9001-001 / 1010
3.7 Shutting down the separator
Automatic operation
• End the separation program with the key "Process STOP”.

– Two total ejections are performed automatically.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut–down)
• Switch off the preheater (option).

– Continue to feed product for a few minutes since the preheater continues
to heat for a short time.
• Close the product feed line.
– Close the product feed valve manually.
• Displacement:
– Open the displacement water valve using the manual override.
(The bowl contents are displaced without loss by opening the displace-
ment water valve).
• Eject the bowl:
– Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for approx. 2 –
3 seconds.
• Speed recovery
– Wait for approx. 20 – 30 seconds.
• Switch off the product feed pump (option).

– The product feed pump continues to run (timer 23)!
– The LED in the “FEED” button shows the post-run phase by slow flashing.
– The control valves for thermal oil and steam preheater close automatically.
ATTENTION!
If the control unit or the control voltage 24 VDC fails, the automatic post-run
phase of the product feed pump is disabled.
The product feed pump may never be switched off to the steam shut-off valve
without a delay time. The pre-heater could get damaged!
All heaters (e.g. steam-fired, thermal oil, electric heaters) must be manually
shut down.
Manual shut-down of the product feed pump must be carried out delayed.
• Close the product feed valve in the suction side of the product feed pump (op-
tion).
• Switch the separator motor off.
• Close the discharges.
• Close the supply lines such as heating steam, water, compressed air lines
with hand valves.
• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
CAUTION: Danger to life through high-speed rotating separator parts!
still.
– The run-down time of the bowl is 45 minutes after switching off the motor.
– Bowl standstill is indicated by standstill of the drive belt.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 79
Standstill of drive belt

• Shine a torch through the frame
• Visually check that the drive belt is

sight glass.
no longer moving.
Fig. 80
• Unscrew the sight glass,

When the sight glass is turbid:
• shine a torch through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Check ONLY visually that the drive belt is no longer moving.

CAUTION: Danger of injury through rotating drive belt!
– Do NOT touch the drive belt through the sight glass opening in the frame!
• Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.
In the case of torn or defective drive belts or if the belts have come off:
• Be sure to observe the run-down time of 90 minutes until dismantling the

still.
separator!
ATTENTION!
• Close the shut-off flap in the solids

Only after standstill of the bowl,
discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 81
Risk of injury due to electrical volt-

age and unintended start-up of the
separator!

ponents:
Fig. 82
®
Westfalia Separator
80 2065-9001-001 / 1010

o o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 F).
3.7.1 Shut-down “Emergency-Off"

In a hazardous situation (unusual noises or vibrations) or in the case of damage
to the separator or plant components (e.g. burst hoses), a manual quick shut-
down of the installation can be carried out.
Depending on the version, the control cabinet is equipped with:
– a main switch (yellow-red) with integrated “Emergency-Off” function and
additional connection for an external “Emergency-Off”-switch (example 1),
– an “Emergency-Off” switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection for an external “Emergency-Off”-switch (example 2) or
– an “Emergency-Off” switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection, via approved “Emergency-Off” relay for several “Emer-
gency-Off”-switches (example 2).
Main switch (yellow-red) with inte-

grated “Emergency-Off” function
• Actuate the main switch with “Emer-
gency-Off” function.
– The complete control unit is de-
energised.
– No bowl ejection is performed.
• CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

Fig. 83 Example 1
“Emergency-Off”-switch (yellow-
red) and main switch (grey-black)
• Actuate the “Emergency-Off switch.
– The complete drives of the control
unit are de-energised.
– The separator is shut down in a
controlled manner with two total
ejections.
• CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

Fig. 84 Example 2
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 81
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
82 2065-9001-001 / 1010
3.8 Trouble shooting

The following tables are an aid for locating and eliminating faults.
If assembly operations have to be carried out refer to the section "Maintenance
and Repair".
3.8.1 Trouble shooting
Failure Possible causes Action

The bowl does not come up Oil has run down the spindle onto the • Clean belt contact surface of the
• Replace the drive belt.

to rated speed or takes too drive belt; the drive belt is slipping on spindle and clutch pulley.
long to do so. the bowl spindle.
Motor is incorrectly connected. • Check connection.

Insufficient number of clutch shoes. • Increase the number of clutch
shoes.
• Make sure that the
clutch shoes are
evenly spaced.
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace drive belt.

on the bowl spindle.
Drive belt has not been fitted correctly. • Check position of drive belt on cen-
Liquid or dirt has collected in the upper • Check operating water discharge:
trifugal clutch and bowl spindle.
• Clean inside of upper section of

section of frame and is braking the Liquid must flow off freely.
bowl.
• Wipe dry friction surfaces.

frame.
• ATTENTION: Do not use

The bowl speed drops during Friction surfaces of clutch shoes are
operation. oily.
benzene, trichlorethy-
lene or any other sol-
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace the drive belt.
vent!
on the bowl spindle.

The motor speed drops during opera- • Check motor and line voltage.
tion.
• Reduce the number of clutch shoes.
• Make sure that the
The bowl reaches the rated Too many clutch shoes are used.
speed too fast (in less than
1.5 minutes). The starting clutch shoes are
current of the motor is hence evenly spaced.
inadmissibly high.(Imax >2 x IN).
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 83

Uneven run of the centrifuge. Bowl is out of balance for the following For pos. 1 - 4:
reasons: • Shut down separator.
• Close the product feed and dis-
charge.
• Bowl must not be emptied

CAUTION:
as otherwise the vibrations

occurring during shut-down
will intensify.
If bowl leaks,
• Completely open the water supply.
1. The separated dirt has deposited • Clean bowl.
unevenly in the bowl.
2. Bowl has not been correctly as- • Assemble bowl properly.
sembled or parts of different bowls
(if plant has several separators)
have been interchanged.
3. The tension in the disk stack has
slackened:
– The bowl top is not screwed on CAUTION: A loose bowl
until O mark alignment. top can endanger life!
• The O marks of
the bowl bottom
and the bowl top
must be aligned.
– Insufficient number of disks. • Check number of disks; add a spare
• Send bowl to factory for repair.

disk if necessary.
4. Bowl parts are damaged.
CAUTION: Do not carry out
your own repairs!
Do not weld or solder as this
would weaken the bowl!
Ball bearings are worn. • Replace damaged bearings.
ATTENTION!
Use only the ball bearings
specified in the parts list.
®
Westfalia Separator
84 2065-9001-001 / 1010
3.8.2 Bowl faults
Fig. 85 Bowl and operating water feeding system
1 Gasket (bowl top) 11 Operating water feeding system

2 Gasket (bowl top) 12 Injection chamber
3 Gasket (sliding piston) 13 Closing chamber bottom
4 Gasket (annular piston) 14 Bowl bottom
5 Gasket (closing chamber bottom) 15 Drain hole
6 Gasket (annular piston) 16 Annular piston
7 Gaskets (closing chamber bottom) 17 Drain hole
8 Gasket (bowl bottom) 18 Sliding piston
9 Piston guide ring (bowl bottom) 19 Bowl top
10 Gasket (water chamber bottom) 20 Solenoid valve block
21 Solenoid valve for operating water
22 Solenoid valve for filling and displacement water
23 Filling and displacement water line
24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve
26 Operating water line
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 85
The bowl does not close. Operating water

Control unit is defective or • Check the control unit.
• Check or reset program parameters.
ATTENTION: Motor is not correctly set.
– Product flows out of the
(See control unit documentation.)
solids discharge.
– Current consumption is too
• Set 1 seconds (see also control unit

high.
Closing water pulse too short.
• Close shut-off cock 25.

documentation).
Strainer 24 in the operating, filling and
displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 24 (see 4.4.4).
The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.
Operating water data:

– Pressure 2 – 3 bar (with open valve)
the capacity by litres) ≅ 1.0 l in

– Volume flow min. 1 800 l/h (gauge
• Clean or replace operating water

3 secs
The operating water line 26 has be-
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line 26.
tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection cham-
The operating water solenoid valve 21 • Check solenoid valve 21 and re-
ber.
does not open properly. place if necessary.

Bowl hydraulics
• Remove hood and
• dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled.
or
• Thoroughly clean all bores.

section 4.4.1 and 4.4.2).
Gaskets and piston guide ring are • Replace all sealing elements.
damaged or Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
(see list of spare parts).
Important: Time-consuming instal-
• Change polyamide gasket 5 only

lation!
when it is damaged (see section

4.4.9).
Sealing rim of sliding piston 18 is • Lightly remachine the sealing sur-
damaged. face of the sliding piston – max. 1
• send in the sliding piston for repair.

mm! – see section 4.4.10) or
®
Westfalia Separator
86 2065-9001-001 / 1010

24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 87
The bowl does not open or Operating water

not properly Control unit is defective or • Check the control unit.
Motor is not correctly set. • Check or reset program parameters.
• Set 3 – 4 seconds (see also control

(See control unit documentation.)
Time for opening water too short.
• Close shut-off cock 25.

unit documentation).
Strainer 24 in the operating, filling and
displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 24 (see 4.4.4).
The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.


• Clean or replace operating water

3 secs
The operating water line 26 has be-
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line 26.
tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection cham-
The operating water solenoid valve 21 • Check solenoid valve 21 and re-
ber.
does not open properly. place if necessary.

Bowl hydraulics
• Remove hood and
• dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled
or
• Thoroughly clean all bores.

section 4.4.1 and 4.4.2).
– Thoroughly check outlet bore 17
• Replace all sealing elements.

and clean if necessary.
Gaskets and piston guide ring are
damaged. Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
(see list of spare parts).
Important: Time-consuming instal-
• Change polyamide gasket 5 only

lation!
when it is damaged (see section
• Thoroughly check polyamide gasket

4.4.9).
5 for proper location in its groove.
®
Westfalia Separator
88 2065-9001-001 / 1010

24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 89

The bowl does not empty The operating water capacity is too • Check line pressure, increase if
completely. Solids remain in low. necessary.
the bowl.

The separating time has been set too • Shorten the separating time (see
3 secs
long with the result that the solids con- section 3.5).
• Readjust the closing water impulse

tent is too high.
The bowl opens during sepa- Closing water pulse is too short.
ration. – Closing water evaporates. (see control unit documentation).
Closing water pulse is too long.
– Closing water impulse opens the
bowl.
®
Westfalia Separator
90 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 91
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair
4.1 Installation of the separator ................................................................... 92

4.1.1 Transporting the separator .................................................................... 94
4.1.2 Installing the separator .......................................................................... 96
4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 97
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl ........................................................... 100
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 101
4.2 Fitting orifice plates, flow indicator, pressure transmitter .................... 103
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates ................................................................... 104
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 105
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 105
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 112
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 113
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 116
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils ........................................................................ 118
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from
GEA Westfalia Separator ..................................................................... 119
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 120
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 122
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 138
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 139
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 139
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 140
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl ................................... 141
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 143
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 166
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 167
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 170
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive ...................... 172
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly ................................... 174
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly ....................................................... 178
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch ........................................................ 180
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly ................................................................ 184
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch ................................................................. 186
4.6.7 Fitting the motor ................................................................................... 192
4.7 Height adjustment ................................................................................ 197
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 197
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance ................................................................. 198
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator ....................................... 200
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator ................................... 200
4.9.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 200
4.9.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 201
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 202
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 202
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 202
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 202
4.11 Before restarting .................................................................................. 203
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 204
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 204
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids ................................................................................... 205
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 205
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 206
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 208
®
Westfalia Separator
92 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.1 Installation of the separator
• For further information see installation guidelines.

Min. lifting capacity of hoist: 500 kg
For maintenance and repair
Bowl, motor
The complete bowl can then be

transported via the adjacent
separators of the same type.
Centre of gravity
Solids discharge Filling, displacement and

operating water supply
Water / operating water discharge
Product discharge
Product feed
Water / operating water discharge Solids discharge

®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 93

Water detector
Centre of gravity
Connector:
Product discharge
Discharge via the centripetal pump
installed in the separator
Product feed

supply
Terminal box
Solids discharge
Solenoid valve block

Water detector
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
Service side
The foundation must not contact the foundations of other units (e.g. auxiliary diesel en-
gines, pumps) in order to prevent damage to ball and roller bearings.

®
Westfalia Separator
94 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.1.1 Transporting the separator
• CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

– Be sure to use suitably rated, intact hoists for transport and installation.
• CAUTION: Danger to life under hoists!

– Do NOT step under hanging load.
• Always transport the separator without installed bowl!
• For special tools, see section 4.14 or parts list.
• Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the

lower part of the frame.
Fig. 90
• Screw double nipple 1 into the hole

in the frame.
Fig. 91
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 95
• CAUTION! Do not use the eye bolt

of the motor to suspend the sepa-
rator.
• ATTENTION: Do not damage any

machine attachment parts when fas-
tening the ropes.
• Attach the transport ropes

– to the machine A as illustrated,
– around the double nipple and
– hang them into the load hook of
the hoist as illustrated.
ATTENTION: Prevent the ropes from
• Wind one piece of rope twice round

slipping!
the hook (see detail).
• Make sure the machine touches

down gently.
Fig. 92
• Unscrew double nipple 1
Fig. 93
• Screw in the screw plug 1.
Fig. 94
®
Westfalia Separator
96 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.1.2 Installing the separator

• Before installing the separator make sure that
– sufficient space is available for operating and dismantling the machine.
– the foundation is not connected to foundations of other vibrating units to
avoid the transfer of vibrations.
• Align separator 1 with feet 2 and

plates 3 on foundation 4.
• Tack plates 3.
• Unscrew screws 5.
• Lift separator with feet (see section
4.1.1).
• Weld plates 3 to foundation 4.
• Place the separator on plates 3 and
• bolt tight with hexagon nuts 5.
• Screw tight hex head screws 6.
Fig. 95
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 97
4.1.3 Motor
Fig. 96 Start-up diagram (current and speed characteristics) – example
at
De- Enclo-
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
sign sure *
rpm min s kW rpm rpm
IP 55
see name- approx. 2 – IM V ISO-

3 4 4.8 3 000 3 600
plate 4 1 class
F*
* WS standard
The separator is driven by a three-phase AC motor via a centrifugal clutch and
the drive belt.
The specified motor ratings are minimum values which are based on the in-
creased starting current. Since the current consumption of the motor drops after
start-up, overloading of the motor during operation is not possible.
The starting time depends on the
– flywheel effect of the bowl,
– number of clutch shoes used,
– condition of the clutch shoes.
The starting current can peak at about 1.8 - 2 times the rated current (see start-
up diagram). This is to be considered when selecting switches, lead-in wires
and fuses.
The motor
– can be started direct online (WS standard) or via a motor control for star-
delta switching (Ex-zone).
®
Westfalia Separator
98 2065-9001-001 / 1010
– is protected against overheating by thermal overload releases or a PTC

thermistor as sole protection.
(As WS standard, the motor is protected against overheating by three PTC
thermistors).
– can be equipped with a frequency converter if requested by the customer.
When using thermal overload releases, the motor has to be protected as fol-
lows:
– during operation by a release set to the rated current and
– during start-up by a second release set to 1.8 - 2 times the rated current.
The release set to the rated current must be bridged during start-up.
Note:
• The temperature feelers must be connected to a commercial tripping device.
• External voltage higher than 2.5 volts must not be applied to the connection
terminals of the temperature feelers.
• When testing for continuity, use an ohmmeter and not a test lamp.
Electrical connection
CAUTION: Danger to life and limb through electric current!

There might be residual voltage!
In the case of motors with space heaters, residual voltages in the motor
terminal box are possible despite switched off main switch.
• Refer to the motor nameplate.

Prior to working on the motor:
• Refer to the motor instruction manual.

Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Associa-
tion of German Electrical Engineers) or of the local electric power company.
• Any work on the motor may be carried out by an authorized electrician
only.
• Connect the motor.

Refer to the motor instruction man-
ual.
Fig. 97 Connection scematic
The terminal board in the terminal box can be connected in star or delta.
• Check correct switching of the motor (star or delta).
Refer to the motor instruction manual.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 99
Star switching (example)
Fig. 98
Delta switching (example)
Fig. 99
• In the case of additional electrical components, PTC thermistors or space

IMPORTANT:
heaters, refer to the motor manual.
Shipboard operation
• When operating the machine on board of ship, pay attention to the installation
guidelines issued by the respective classification societies.
• When using ship wiring cables, cable entry must be by means of marine-type
glands.
®
Westfalia Separator
100 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl
Provided that:
– The drive chamber is filled with oil
up to the half way mark on the sight
glass.
• Switch on motor.
Fig. 100
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct when the drive belt rotates
clockwise (check through the sight
glass in the frame).
When the direction of rotation is incor-
rect the motor connections must be
reversed by an authorised specialist.
Fig. 101

operation:
• Before working on the motor,
note that residual voltage may be
present!
• In this connection:
– Read the documentation supplied
by the frequency converter manu-
facturer.
– Have protective measures imple-
mented by suitably qualified per-
sonnel.
Fig. 102
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 101
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl
Speed see name-plate

– for densities of the product up to
3
max. 1.01 kg/dm and
– for densities of the separated solids up to max.
3
1.4 kg/dm
Starting time approx. 2 – 4 min
The bowl speed has been rated so as to ensure the operating safety of the
separator.
Before the first start-up

• Check spindle speed (= bowl speed)
with a hand tachometer before fitting
the bowl.
CAUTION!
Risk of injury through rotating
• Keep a safe distance away from the

spindle.
• Do not wear long, open hair or wide,

rotating spindle.
• Wear a hairnet!
loose clothing!
• IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the

maximum spindle running time of
1 minute!
• Speed deviations of up to 5 % are

permissible.
Fig. 103
®
Westfalia Separator
102 2065-9001-001 / 1010
In case of frequency converter operation:

The frequency converter is equipped with a reliable frequency limitation to pre-
vent operation at inadmissibly high bowl speeds.
• Operate the separator with fre-

CAUTION!
quency converter, speed monitor-

ing device and hardware-
controlled speed shut-off device.
manipulate the frequency con-
verter to exceed the permissible
bowl speed (see nameplate)!
• Check from time to time that
– the bowl speed (see nameplate)
and
Fig. 104 – motor frequency (see nameplate
and frequency converter display!)
coincide with the separator speed.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 103
4.2 Fitting orifice plates, flow indicator, pressure transmitter

A set of orifice plates (with different inner diameters) and a set of commissioning
parts are supplied with the separator.
– The set of orifice plates is fastened to the separator hood.
– The set of commissioning parts comprises the flow indicator 4 or the pres-
sure transmitter 5.
By installing an orifice plate the separator throughput can be monitored.
Fig. 105
A Product feed line

B Product discharge line
1 Pressure gauge
2 Orifice plate
3 Orifice plate
4 Flow indicator (option – for control D10)
5 Pressure transmitter (option – for control E40)
6 3/2-way valve
ATTENTION! Before starting up the separator check that the following

parts are installed:
• Select the orifice plates from the set of plates supplied, according to the re-
Orifice plates 2 and 3
quired throughput capacity (see section 2.7).

• Install orifice plate 3 in product feed line A (see chapter 4.2.1).
• Install orifice plate 2 in product feed line B (see chapter 4.2.1).
• Remove the plug from the corresponding hole of 3/2-way valve 6.

Flow indicator 4 (option – for control D10)
• Secure the thread of flowmeter 4 with Loctite 245.

• Install flowmeter 4 into 3/2-way valve 6.
®
Westfalia Separator
104 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Remove the plug from the corresponding hole of 3/2-way valve 6.

Pressure transmitter 5 (option – for control E40)
• Fit pressure transmitter 5 in the 3/2-way valve 6 and connect to the control
unit in accordance with the order-specific circuit diagram. The circuit diagram
is kept inside the control cabinet.
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates

Installation of the orifice plates is explained here for product feed line B for ex-
ample.
Required material:
– Open ended wrench
– Lubricating grease
• Unscrew corrugated hose 3.

• Insert the selected orifice plate 2 into
connection piece 1 and press in
evenly, by hand.
Fig. 106
• Slightly grease the threaded area of
• Insert corrugated hose 3 and firmly

connection piece 1
tighten with hexagon nut 2.
Fig. 107
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 105
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication
• Special care must be taken when performing maintenance and lubrication

operations.
Conscientiously performed maintenance and lubrication operations improve
the service life of the separator.
• In the case of accessories (motor, product pump, preheater, solenoid valve
block etc.) the manufacturer’s maintenance and lubrication instructions must
be observed.
• Maintenance and repair work may be carried out only by persons
– who are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings
and training.
– who are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
• Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
• Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator.
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule
ATTENTION!
The following maintenance intervals are recommendations which apply only for normal operating
conditions.
Negative operating conditions (e.g. low-grade fuel, excessively high temperature, strong vibrations,
frequent starting and stopping of the separator etc.) can necessitate shorter maintenance intervals.
To assure correct functioning and operating safety,

• in case of non-routine shut-down, see section 3.7 - manual operation.
• Pay attention to the following points during servicing:
– Oil level – Current consumption
– Temperatures – Starting time
– Pressures – Hoses and hose pipes (see 4.3.2)
– Leakage – Pipe joints
– Vibrations
• Before every assembly, grease the main components of the bowl at guide and contact surfaces (see section 4.3.4 -
lubrication schedule).
• in the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and in power plants, the
condition of the clutch shoes must be checked more often than stated in this schedule. It is not possible to state a defini-
tive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1000 operating hours or after 2 months at the latest.
• We recommend having the separator checked by a WS service specialist once a year.
®
Westfalia Separator
106 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Fig. 108 Set of spare parts "bowl/hood“ (operation: 1 year or 8000 hours)
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 107
Commissioning date:
(to be filled in by user)
Maintenance work Remark

– After 4000 operating hours – after 6 months at the latest
– After 12,000 operating hours – after 1 ½ years at the latest
• Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump.
• Clean the bowl and centripetal pump parts and check for
Bowl inspection
• Clean all holes, nozzles and chambers of the hydraulic

corrosion and erosion.
• The cones of bowl and spindle must be clean and dry

system.
• Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“

when fitting.
Replace gaskets (see accompanying illustration).
(Operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours).
See spare parts list.
Important: Time-consuming installation!
Only replace polyamide gasket 100 if damaged (see section
4.4.9)!
Check the motor. • See instructions of motor manufacturer
• See section 4.3.3 - oil quality and oil change.

Re-lubricate motor bearings (if required)
When using mineral oil:
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4.
system on the self-cleaning separator.
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5.
water feed and rinse with water.
Check the functionality of the non-return valve.
Carefully clean the water detector (if installed) with a soft
cloth, use diesel oil if necessary.
Clean the sight glass/glasses in the frame for observation
of the drive belt.
Check the hoses and hose pipes and replace when neces-
sary.
Clean the filter in the suction line of the product feed pump
(option).
®
Westfalia Separator
108 2065-9001-001 / 1010
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 109

– After 8000 operating hours – after 1 year at the latest
– After 24,000 operating hours – after 3 years at the latest
Bowl inspection • Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump.


system.
Replace gaskets and piston guide ring (see adjacent fig- • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
when fitting.
ure). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).

See parts list.
Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged (see
• Remove bowl.
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
bearings of spindle.
Check grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch and re- • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace vibration absorber.
place if necessary. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).

Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when See parts list.
h smaller than 18 mm.
• See instructions of motor manufacturer

New condition of clutch shoe h = 26 mm
Check the motor.
(2)
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil
(2)
• See section 4.7.1.

When using synthetic oil
Check the bowl height.
• Check only after motor or drive replacement.
In case of direct current:
Check the spindle speed (bowl).
Check the starting time. • See section 4.1.5.
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4
water feed and rinse with water.

Carefully clean the water detector (if provided) with a soft
Clean the sight glass(es) in the frame for observing the
drive belt.
sary.
Check that vibration absorbers are fully functional (option).
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and power plants shorter maintenance
intervals are required It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operating
hours or after 2 months at the latest.
(2) See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change
®
Westfalia Separator
110 2065-9001-001 / 1010
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 111

Bowl inspection • Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump.


system.
Replace gaskets, piston guide ring and guide strips (see • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood“
when fitting.
adjacent figure). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).

See parts list.
Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged (see
• Remove bowl.
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
bearings of spindle.
Replace vibration absorber.
Replace grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch.
Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when
h smaller than 18 mm.
• See instructions of motor manufacturer

New condition of clutch shoe h = 26 mm
Check the motor.
(2)
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil
(2)

When using synthetic oil
Check the bowl height.
• Check only after motor or drive replacement.
In case of direct current:
• Check only after drive replacement.
In case of three-phase current:
Check the starting time. • See section 4.1.5.
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4
operating water feed.

Carefully clean the water detector (if provided) with a soft
Clean the sight glass(es) in the frame for observing the
drive belt.
sary.
Check that vibration absorbers are fully functional (option).
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and power plants shorter maintenance
intervals are required It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operating
hours or after 2 months at the latest.
(2) See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change
®
Westfalia Separator
112 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Maintenance work
Equip the separator with new vibration isolators.

We recommend having the separator checked by a WS service engineer.
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes

Replace hose pipes when an inspection reveals one or more of the following de-
fects:
• Damage of the outer layer down to the fabric (e. g. chafe marks, cuts or
cracks).
• Leaky spots.
• Damage to or deformation of the hose fittings.
– Slight surface damage is not a reason for replacement.
• The hose becomes dislodged from the fitting.
• Corrosion of the fitting diminishing function and strength.
Protective hose 1
• Fit the protective hoses at all contact

points to the separator.
• Adapt the length of the protective

hose.
Fig. 111
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 113
4.3.3 Lubrication
The spindle bearings are splash-lubricated from a central oil bath.
MOTOR BEARINGS
For re-greasing the motor bearings, refer to the instructions of the motor manu-
facturer.
OIL QUALITY (mineral oil)

The mineral gear oil tested by Westfalia Separator with the designation "Separa-
tor lube oil CLP 100" meets the requirements and should preferably be used.
Designation according to DIN

51502 CLP
100
Designation as per ISO 3498 CC 100
Viscosity class SAE 30
o o 2
Viscosity (at 40 C/104 F) 100 ± 10 mm /s (cSt)
Part Number 0015-0003-080 (2.5 litres)
Dispose of the oil as per instructions of the oil manufacturer.
The viscosity class SAE 30 covers a larger viscosity range than specified here.
However, only oils with the viscosity range specified here may be used.
OIL QUALITY (synthetic oil)

Use the synthetic lube oil tested by Westfalia Separator AG!
Viscosity class (ISO) VG 68

Viscosity
o o 2
– at 40 C (104 F) 65 mm /s
o o 2
– at 100 C (212 F) 10,4 mm /s
Viscosity index (VI) 147
o o
Density (at 15 C/59 F) 0.857 g/ml
based on Polyalphaolefin
Part Number 0015-0020-010 (1 litre)
Dispose of the oil as per instructions of the oil manufacturer.
®
Westfalia Separator
114 2065-9001-001 / 1010
OIL QUANTITY
IMPORTANT: Do not forget to top up the oil in good time!
Filling in oil
Fill the drive with oil before commis-
sioning the separator.
• Unscrew the screw plug and
• fill in oil through the charge hole.
Filling quantity approx. 2.5 litres
Fig. 112
Oil level
• Check the oil level only when the

IMPORTANT:
• The oil level must never drop below

separator is at standstill.
the lower third of the sight glass dur-

ing operation.
1 Maximum oil level

2 Minimum oil level
Fig. 113
Minimum oil level approx. up to lower third of sight glass

(at separator standstill)
Maximum oil level up to middle of sight glass
(at separator standstill)
OIL CHECK
• Check the oil level every week!
• From time to time undo the oil drain screw and check whether there is water
in the oil bath. When the oil exhibits a milky colouring (emulsification), the oil
must be changed immediately.
OIL CHANGE
• Change oil after about
– 4000 operating hours or 6 months at the latest (mineral oil).
– 8000 operating hours or 1 year at the latest (synthetic oil).
• Clean sight glass.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 115
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
116 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart
Fig. 114 Lubrication schedule
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 117
Lubricant Lubrication frequency

Lubricat- Amount of
after Lubrication point
ing point lubricant
Designation Designation operating per year
hours
CLP
100
Lube oil DIN 51502 3

4 000 2x 2 500 cm Drive chamber
(mineral)
1
CC 100
ISO 3498
Lube oil 3
ISO VG 68 8 000 1x 2 500 cm Drive chamber
(synthetic)
2 according to instructions of motor manufacturer Motor bearings
Threads and sliding sur-

3 2x
faces of bowl
Lubricating see
as required apply sparingly
grease parts list
4 1x Threads of fittings
• Check oil level regularly through sight glass.

• Manual lubrication
• Refer to lube oil table (see section 4.3.5):
®
Westfalia Separator
118 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils
Lubricating oil sorts suggested by some firms
Manufac-
Viscosity
Designation at 40 °C (104 °F)
turer
mm2/s (cSt)
Lubricating oil table
for separators in onshore and shipboard opera- BLASIA 100
tion RADULA 100 100
DIESEL GAMMA 30
Separator Lube oil
ATLANTA MARINE 30
Viscosity 105
(Designation accord-
DISOLA M 3015
ing to DIN 51502)
MONTANOL HK 100 100

Oil filling
Symbol
Kinematic
Type viscosity ENERGOL GR-XP 100 100
at 40 °C ENERGOL DL-MP 30 114
(104 °F)
2
l mm /s (cSt) HYSPIN AWS 100
100
BTC 3 ALPHA ZN 100
CTC 1 MARINE HEAVY 99
CTC 3
MTC 3 1.3 GST OIL 100
100
OTC 2 NL Gear Compound 100
OTC 3 Veritas Marine Oil R&O 30 108
WTC 2 DELO 3000 Marine Oil 30 104
OSE 5 1
ATLANTA MARINE 30
105
CSD 1 DISOLA M 3015
OSD 2 TURBINE T 100 95
SD 1 1.3
SSD 2 EXX-MAR XP 110
TSD 2 NUTO H 100
100
SPARTAN EP 100
ESD 18 GULF HARMONY 100 95

GSC 15 VERITAS 30 110
OSD 6 CLP 90 to 110 0015-0003-080
OSD 18 2.5 100 (2.5 l) HIDRAOIL HD 70 95
WSD 8
WSD 18
OSE 10 MOBILGARD 312 106
OSE 20
GADINIA 30 104
GSC 25 ROTELLA MX SAE 30 105
OSD 20
OSD 25
OSD 30 3.7 HYDRA WAY HMA 100
100
OSD 35 LOAD WAY EP 100
SD 30
WSD 35
OSE 40 DORO AR SAE 30 119
OSD 50 TARO XD SAE 30 105
OSD 60
OSD 80
5.0
SD 50
WSD 60
OSE 80
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 119
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from GEA Westfalia Separator
Faultless functioning of separators very much depends on the proper type of lubricating oil used, since a
high grade oil, selected to meet all service requirements, will minimize the wear, thus extending the ser-
vice life and increasing the operating safety.
For the lubrication of our separators we recommend to use the oils specified by us since continuous qual-
ity checks are performed by GEA Westfalia Separator. Oils proposed from some firms are not subjected
to these tests.
Therefore, GEA Westfalia Separator cannot give a performance guarantee for those oils.
Be sure to select only high grade solvent refined products.
The specified oil types meet the requirements according to DIN. Under unfavourable operating condi-
tions, e.g. high temperatures, the quality of the oils may be insufficient so that more efficient oils, e.g.
synthetic oils, must be used. If necessary, consult GEA Westfalia Separator.
For the different separator types and oil types the viscosity ranges are specified in the table of lubricating
oils.
The operating temperature of the separator exceeds normally 80 oC (176 oF). At those temperatures
some oils age quickly, so that they have to be changed prematurely.
Be sure not to use lubricating oils with viscosities lower than those specified in the table. Due to the pos-
sibility of the oil film breaking down, oil of too low a viscosity will give insufficient lubrication, resulting in
increased wear. However, oils with a slightly higher viscosity than specified may be used.
Bear in mind that the viscosity groups SAE 30, 40 and 50 (SAE = Society of Automotive Engineers)
cover larger viscosity ranges and be sure to select lubricating oils with viscosities not lower than the
minimum values of the viscosity ranges restricted for the different separator types.
®
Westfalia Separator
120 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.4 Bowl
Fig. 115 Exploded view of the bowl and centripetal pump
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 121
Pos. Designation Dimensions
20 (1) Bowl bottom, compl.

30 Gasket
40 Piston guide ring
50 (2) Water chamber bottom
60 Gasket
70 Gasket
80 Allen screw ISO 4762 – M 8 x 16 – A4-80
90 Annular piston
100 Gasket
110 Gasket
120 Closing chamber bottom
130 Gasket
140 Gasket
150 Gasket
180 Sliding piston
200 Gasket
210 (1) Distributor
220 Disk stack, complete

230 Separating disk
240 (1) Bowl top
250 Gasket
260 Gasket
290 Threaded pin ISO 4026 - M 10 x 10 -1.4571
310 Gasket
320 Centripetal pump chamber
cover
330 Centripetal pump chamber
cover
340 Lock ring
350 Spindle screw:
360 Gasket
510 Centripetal pump, compl.
520 Gasket
530 Sensing liquid pump
540 Gasket
550 Spacer ring
560 Gasket
570 Gasket
(1) IMPORTANT: This part can only be replaced by a WS service specialist!

The complete bowl must be re-balanced in one of our authorized workshops or in the manufacturer’s plant.
(2) IMPORTANT: This part can only be replaced by a WS service specialist!
A vibration check must be carried out on the machine by a WS service specialist.
®
Westfalia Separator
122 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl

still.


sight glass..
no longer moving.
Fig. 116



still.
separator!

o



Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/ Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
only.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 123
• Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by

– precise positioning,
– no diagonal pull!
– selecting the low lifting speed of the hoist.
• Use suitably rated, intact hoists.

CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

• Use tools only for their intended use!

CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using undamaged, complete tools!
– For special tools, see section 4.14 or spare parts catalog.

– For standard tools, see section 4.13.
• Do not use force when removing or fitting parts.
• Treat all bowl parts

– gently.
– Always set them down on a rubber mat or a wooden pallet.
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance!
• Do not interchange parts from different bowls.

If an installation is equipped with several separators:
The bowl parts are marked with the serial number of the machine or the last
three digits of the serial number.
• Certain bowl parts (see sect. 4.4)

CAUTION:
may be pre-assembled and bal-

anced only by specialists from
Westfalia Separator or in work-
shops authorized by Westfalia
Separator.
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life.
Fig. 117
®
Westfalia Separator
124 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Hinging up the hood
• Unscrew filling and displacement

water line 1.
Fig. 118
• Unscrew handle connection piece 1

by lightly hammering with a mallet
• hold the centripetal pump with offset

(left-hand thread); at the same time
screwdriver 2.
Fig. 119
• Remove handle connection piece 1.
Fig. 120
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 125
• Unscrew three hex head screws with

their washers.
Fig. 121
• Hinge up the hood.
CAUTION: Danger of injury by in-
• The stirrup must register properly.

correct hinging up of the hood!
Fig. 122
If necessary (see section 4.3.1):

• Take gasket 1 out of the upper sec-
tion of the frame.
Fig. 123
®
Westfalia Separator
126 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Removing the centripetal pump
Required special tool

– Double hook wrench
• Loosen the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring using the double hook
wrench (left-hand thread) and re-
move it.
Fig. 124
• Screw handle connection piece into

the centripetal pump (left-hand
thread).
• Remove the complete centripetal
pump together with the centripetal
pump chamber covers.
Fig. 125

– Pressure piece 1
• Insert pressure piece 1 into spacer

ring 2.
• Pull off spacer ring 2 with fitted gas-
kets with the aid of a commercial
puller.
Fig. 126
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 127
• Remove the following parts if nec-

essary:
– centripetal pump chamber cover
1,
– sensing liquid pump 2 with in-
serted gaskets,
– centripetal pump chamber cover 4
with gaskets 3 and 5,
– centripetal pump 6 with inserted
gasket.
Fig. 127
Lifting out the bowl

– Socket wrench 1
• Unscrew the spindle screw (with

inserted gasket) with socket wrench
1 and a commercially available rat-
chet wrench (left-hand thread) and
remove it.
Fig. 128

– Eye bolt 1
Bolt unit 1 comprises ring nut, hexagon

nuts, and bolt.
CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using
undamaged and complete tools!
The ring nut and the upper hexagon
nut must always be screwed into the
bolt and be secured with Loctite 275.
Fig. 129
®
Westfalia Separator
128 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Unscrew hexagon nut 2.

• Screw eye bolt 1 into the bowl bot-
tom.
• Press off the bowl from the spindle
cone by at least 10 mm.
Fig. 130
• CAUTION: Danger to life when

transporting heavy parts!
• Lift the bowl out of the frame with

• Set the bowl down on a rubber mat

the aid of a hoist.
or a wooden pallet for further dis-

mantling.
Fig. 131
Compressing the disk stack
Required special tools

Compressing device
– Eye bolt 1
– Bell-shaped piece 3
• Grease the contact surface of bell-
• Place bell-shaped piece 3 on the

shaped piece 3 (see chapter 4.3.4).
• Unscrew hexagon nut 2

bowl top.

tom.
Fig. 132
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 129
• Compress the disk stack firmly.

– Screw tight hexagon nut 1.
Fig. 133
Lifting off the bowl top
• Unscrew two threaded pins out of

the bowl top with a screwdriver.
Fig. 134

– ring spanner 1
• Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
Fig. 135
®
Westfalia Separator
130 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• The O-marks of the bowl top and of

Important:
the bowl bottom must be visible.

– Do NOT hide them under ring
• The arrow and the "open" mark must

spanner 1!
show upwards.
• Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.

• Screw in two hex head screws 2 of
the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
Fig. 136
• CAUTION: Danger of injury

through rotating lever!
– Be careful when working in the
area around the lever.
• ATTENTION: Pay attention to the

point of impact A!
• Strike open the bowl top with a mal-

let (left-hand thread) and unscrew
it.
Fig. 137
• Remove eye bolt, bell-shaped piece,

and ring spanner.
Fig. 138
• Lift off the bowl top with fitted

gaskets by hand.
Fig. 139
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 131
Removing the separating disk
• Remove the Separating disk from

the distributor neck.
Fig. 140
Removing the disk stack and the distributor
• Remove the disks out of the distribu-

tor, one by one or group-wise.
Fig. 141
• Remove the distributor.
Fig. 142
®
Westfalia Separator
132 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Removing the sliding piston
• Insert the spindle screw into the hub.
Fig. 143

– Eye bolt 1
Fig. 144
• Assemble eye bolt 1 and bell-

shaped piece 2:
– Screw eye bolt 1 into bell-shaped
piece 2
– Screw eye bolt 1 into hexagon nut
3 by approx. 20 mm.
Fig. 145
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 133
• Grease the thread of sliding piston 1
• Screw the bell-shaped piece with

(see chapter 4.3.4).
fitted eye bolt into the thread of the

sliding piston.
Fig. 146

– Socket wrench 1
• Press off the sliding piston from the

bowl bottom by turning the socket
wrench clockwise.
Fig. 147
• Remove the sliding piston (with fitted

gasket) with bell-shaped piece and
• Remove the bell-shaped piece and

eye bolt.
the eye bolt.
Fig. 148
®
Westfalia Separator
134 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Removing the annular piston and the closing chamber bottom

– Socket wrench 1
• Unscrew the Allen screws holding

the bowl bottom and the closing-
chamber bottom together.
Fig. 149

– Eye bolt 1
– Assembling device 3
Fig. 150

shaped piece 2:
piece 2
– Screw eye bolts 1 into hexagon
nut 3 by approx. 20 mm.
Fig. 151
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 135
• Place the bell-shaped piece with
• Fit assembling device 3 onto the

fitted eye bolt into the bowl bottom.
• Loosen three Allen screws 4 using

bell-shaped piece.
the ratchet wrench (with extension
• Slip three disks 5 of the assembling

and socket).
device towards the periphery, under
• Make sure that disks 5 are properly

the rim of annular piston 6.
positioned in the mounting groove of
• Firmly re-tighten Allen screws 4.

Fig. 152
the annular piston.
• Force off closing chamber bottom 3

together with annular piston 4 by
turning wrench 5 clockwise.
Fig. 153
• Remove closing chamber bottom 3

and annular piston 4 (with fitted
gaskets) with the bell-shaped piece

and the eye bolt.
the eye bolt.
Fig. 154
• Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

ing chamber bottom 2 by tapping
with a mallet – as illustrated.
Fig. 155
®
Westfalia Separator
136 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Unscrew spindle screw 1.
Fig. 156
• Remove gasket 1 and piston guide

If necessary:
ring 2.
Fig. 157
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 137
Removing the water chamber bottom

– Socket wrench 1
• Turn bow bottom through 180 (up-

o
side down).
• Unscrew four Allen screws 2 from
water chamber bottom 3.
Fig. 158
• Force off water chamber bottom 1

with a screwdriver and remove it
with inserted gaskets.
Fig. 159
®
Westfalia Separator
138 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl

It is generally not necessary to dismantle self-cleaning bowls for cleaning after
separation unless
– the nature of the product makes it necessary,
– the separator is to be shut down for a lengthy period (see section 4.9).
• Dismantle and clean the bowl for checking from time to time. See section
4.3.1 - Maintenance schedule.
• Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.
• Dissolve dried scale with citric acid.
• For cleaning the individual disks and bowl parts

Do not use metal scrapers and metal brushes!
• Take the gaskets out of the bowl

parts.
• Clean the grooves and gaskets to
avoid corrosion in the grooves.
• Replace damaged, very swollen,
hardened or brittle gaskets immedi-
ately.
Fig. 160
• Clean the small holes for the feed and discharge of the operating liquid with
particular care to ensure trouble-free bowl ejections.
• Clean the distributor between the

ribs with the brush on the inside and
outside.
When the distributor neck is very
dirty, the feed clogs which can
cause overflow.
Fig. 161
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the guide surfaces and threads of the bowl
parts after drying (see 4.3.4 Lubrication schedule).
• Reassemble the bowl immediately after cleaning!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 139
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame
• Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.

CAUTION: Danger to life through electrical components!
• Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

ATTENTION!
Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.

• Dissolve dried scale with citric acid.
• Clean the inside of the upper section of the frame from time to time:
To do this:
– Refer to the maintenance schedule (section 4.3.1),
– dismantle the bowl (section 4.4.1).
ATTENTION: Escaping cleaning

liquid!
When the bowl has been removed, no
cleaning liquid must spill onto the
drive belt via the spindle.
• Make sure that protective cap 2 and
spindle cap 1 with inserted gasket
are installed.
Fig. 162
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system
• The strainer and the operating water feeding system must be cleaned de-
pending on the quality of the operating water and overall load. See section
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule
• Use citric acid in case of furring.
• Thoroughly clean the parts with water.
Replacing or cleaning the filter element


o
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 C (158 – 212 °F) ).
®
Westfalia Separator
140 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Undo screw 1 (jaw span 22) with

fitted gasket 2.
• Remove filter element 3.
• Clean or replace filter element 3.
– Use citric acid in case of furring.
– Thoroughly clean the parts with
water.
Fig. 163
• Fit the cleaned or new filter element 3.

IMPORTANT: Cooper strip to the inside!
• Firmly screw in screw 1 with fitted gasket 2 so that it seals well.
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor
• Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.

CAUTION: Danger to life through electrical components!
• Keep the motor clean as specified in the manual.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 141
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl

When the bowl has not been correctly assembled or is inadequately cleaned,
forces can be produced in the high-speed rotating bowl which endanger the
operating safety of the separator!
Therefore, the cleaning instructions (section 4.4.2) and assembling instructions
(section 4.4.7) must be exactly followed.
P a y p a rtic u lar atte ntio n to th e fo llowin g:
• Before assembling the bowl, check to be sure that the guide and contact sur-
ATTENTION!
faces of the bowl are clean.

• Grease the guide surfaces as specified in the lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4).
• Some bowl parts are arranged in

fixed positions relative to one an-
• Locking devices and alignment

other.
marks must be in perfect condition.

IMP ORTANT:
The bowl must otherwise not be op-
erated.
Fig. 164
• When fitting the bowl parts, make

sure that the "O" marks on all parts
are aligned.
(Only then will the parts fit correctly
over arresting pins and guide ribs).
Fig. 165
• Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by



®
Westfalia Separator
142 2065-9001-001 / 1010


• If the plant has several separators,

be sure not to interchange parts of

different bowls.
The parts are marked
– with the serial number or
– the last three digits of the serial
number.
Fig. 166
• Thoroughly clean the gasket

grooves of the individual bowl parts
and apply a thin coat of grease.
• After fitting check that
– the gaskets are not twisted,
– the gaskets are evenly positioned
in the groove.
Fig. 167
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 143
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl
• Pay special attention to sections “Safety”, 4.4.2 and 4.4.6

• For dimensions of the parts see 4.4 - exploded view.
Installing the water chamber bottom

– Socket wrench 4
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the

grooves of the water chamber bot-
tom.
• Turn bow bottom through 180 (up-
o
side down).
• Place water chamber bottom 3 on
the bowl bottom.
– The O marks of the bowl bottom
and the water chamber bottom
must be aligned.
• Screw in the four Allen screws 5
holding the water chamber bottom
and bowl bottom together tight.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 168
Installing the annular piston and the closing chamber bottom
• Grease guide surfaces as specified

in the lubrication schedule (see
• Insert gasket 1 and piston guide

4.3.4).
ring 2 into the grooves of the bowl

bottom.
Fig. 169
®
Westfalia Separator
144 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• For replacing the polyamide gasket

1 see section 4.4.9.
• Place gasket 2 into the groove of the
annular piston and press in evenly
and firmly.
4.3.4).
Fig. 170
• Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 171

Compressing device
– Eye bolt 1
Fig. 172
• Turn sliding piston 3 through 180

o
• Place sliding piston 3, bell-shaped

(upside down).
piece 2 and eye bolt 1 on the annu-

lar piston.
Fig. 173
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 145
• Press the annular piston 1 into the

bowl bottom by turning hexagon nut
2 clockwise with the wrench.
• Remove special tools and sliding

piston.
Fig. 174

grooves of the closing chamber bot-
tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 175
• Insert closing chamber bottom 1 into

the annular piston.
– The O marks of the closing cham-
ber bottom and the bowl bottom
must be aligned.
Fig. 176
• Fasten closing chamber bottom 1

onto the bowl bottom by tightening
Allen screws 2 crosswise.
Fig. 177
®
Westfalia Separator
146 2065-9001-001 / 1010

– Socket wrench 1
• Screw tight the Allen screws holding

the closing chamber bottom and the
bowl bottom together.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 178
• Make sure that piston guide ring 1 is

firmly located in the groove.
Fig. 179
Installing the sliding piston
• Insert the gasket in the groove of the

sliding piston.
4.3.4).
Fig. 180
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 147

Compressing device
– Eye bolt 1
Fig. 181
Bolt unit 1 comprises ring nut, hexagon nuts, and bolt.

CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using undamaged and complete tools!
– The ring nut and the upper hexagon nut must always be screwed into the bolt
and be secured with Loctite 275.
• Grease thread 1 of the sliding piston
• Screw bell-shaped piece 2 into the

(see chapter 4.3.4).
thread of the sliding piston.
Fig. 182
• Install the sliding piston (with fitted

gasket) into the bowl bottom, with
• Screw the eye bolt into the bowl

screwed-in bell-shaped insert.
bottom through the bell-shaped
• Press the sliding piston into its seat,

piece.
as far as it will go, by turning hexa-

gon nut 1 clockwise with an open-

ended wrench.
the eye bolt.

Fig. 183
®
Westfalia Separator
148 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Installing the distributor and the disk stack
• Insert the distributor into the sliding

piston.
– Pay attention to correct position-
ing.
– The "O" marks must be aligned.
Fig. 184
ATTENTION: Pay attention for cor-

rect total number of disks!
It is marked on the blind disk, e.g.
84/1:
– Total number of disks A and B = 84
(number of disks with spacers A +
number of blind disks B)
– Number of blind disks B = 1
Fig. 185
ATTENTION: The last disks must be

properly located in the guide ribs of
the distributor!
• Carefully stack the disks on the dis-

tributor neck, one by one or group-
wise .
Fig. 186
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 149
Fitting the separating disk
• Mount the separating disk.

ing!
– The "O" marks must be aligned.
Fig. 187
• Slightly compress the disk stack with

the bell-shaped piece and the eye
bolt.
Fig. 188
Installing the bowl top
• Thoroughly clean the grooves for

gaskets 1 and 2 in the bowl top.
• Check gaskets 1 and 2:
– replace when damaged,
– install if missing.
• Check the inserted gasket 3.
– replace when damaged,
– For replacing the polyamide gas-
ket 3 see section 4.4.8.
Fig. 189
®
Westfalia Separator
150 2065-9001-001 / 1010
ATTENTION: Prevent seizing of
• The following parts must be carefully

threads!
cleaned, wiped dry and greased in

accordance with the lubrication
schedule (see 4.3.4).
– threads and guide surfaces of
bowl bottom and bowl top
– contact surfaces of bowl top and
sliding piston
Fig. 190

– ring spanner 1
• Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
• If threaded pins are screwed into the

Important:
bowl top, undo them with a screw-
• The O mark of the bowl top must be

driver.
visible.
– Do NOT hide them under ring
Fig. 191
• The arrow and the "open" mark must

spanner 1!
show upwards.
• Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.
– Screw in two hex head screws 2 of the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
• Screw the bowl top by hand into the

bowl bottom as far as it will go (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 192
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 151
Compressing the disk stack
• Compress the disk stack firmly.

– Screw tight hexagon nut 1.
Fig. 193
• Compress the disk stack again and

• Screw in the bowl top using the ring
spanner (left-hand thread).
Fig. 194
• CAUTION: Danger of injury

through rotating lever!
– Be careful when working in the
area around the lever.

point of impact A!
CAUTION:
• Strike the bowl top with a mallet until

A loose bowl top can endanger life!
the "O" mark is reached (left-hand

thread).
Fig. 195
®
Westfalia Separator
152 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Remove eye bolt, bell-shaped piece,

and ring spanner.
Fig. 196
• Screw in two threaded pins using a

screwdriver.
Fig. 197
Installing the complete bowl and the centripetal pump
• Clean and wipe dry the spindle

cone with a suitable cloth.
ATTENTION: Do not grease the
conical parts!
Fig. 198
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 153

– Eye bolt 1

tom.
Fig. 199
• Turn bowl through 90 (opposite the

o
fitting position).
• Clean the bowl hub with a suitable
cloth.
ATTENTION: Do not grease the
bowl hub!
Fig. 200

• Carefully place the bowl using eye

• Unscrew the eye bolt from the bowl

bolt and hoist on the spindle cone.
bottom and remove the hoist.
Fig. 201
Required tools
– Socket wrench
– Torque wrench
• Provide spindle screw 2 with gasket

1.
• Put spindle screw into socket
wrench and screw in (left-hand
thread).
Fig. 202
®
Westfalia Separator
154 2065-9001-001 / 1010
CAUTION:
A loose spindle screw can endanger
life!
• Tighten spindle screw.

Torque: 50 Nm
Fig. 203
• Check that the spindle and bowl are

centric.
The control dimension B
– is 3.5 ±1.5 mm
– between the bowl and the upper
• Pay attention to bowl height A (see

section 4.7.1.
Fig. 204
• Insert gasket 1 in the centripetal

pump groove.
• Lightly grease threads and contact
surfaces of the centripetal pump.
• Install centripetal pump 2.
Fig. 205

grooves of the centripetal pump
chamber cover.
Fig. 206
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 155
• Mount the centripetal pump chamber

cover with fitted gaskets.
– The “O” marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the
bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 207
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the sensing

liquid pump grooves.
• Grease guide surfaces.
• Install sensing liquid pump.
Fig. 208
• Mount the centripetal pump chamber

cover.
– The “O” marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the
bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 209

– Double hook wrench
• Grease the threads on the bowl top

and on the centripetal pump cham-
ber lock ring as specified in the Lu-
brication schedule (see 4.3.4).
CAUTION:
A loose centripetal pump chamber
• Screw tight the centripetal pump

lock ring can endanger life!
chamber lock ring using the double

Fig. 210 hook wrench (left-hand thread).
®
Westfalia Separator
156 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in spacer

ring.
• Grease the guide surfaces of the
centripetal pump as specified in the
lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4).
• Fit spacer ring.
Fig. 211
• Pay attention to section 4.7.1.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 157
4.4.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top)

• For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL
ATTENTION: Sensitive bowl part!
– Do NOT damage the bowl top
groove when drilling!
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
– with a 2 mm drill bit
– at a distance of approx. 50 to
60 mm.
Fig. 212

– Do NOT damage the bowl top
groove when screwing in!
• Screw two wooden screws in the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
• lever it bit by bit out of the groove

with the wood screws and
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 213
Note:
If the polyamide gasket can’t be removed, repeat this procedure.
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the groove.
• Heat the gasket in approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
o
• Wipe dry the gasket.
• Fit the gasket into the groove of the

bowl top (with the narrow side facing
• Place on a smooth wooden block.

the bowl top).
• hammer the gasket evenly into the

groove.
Fig. 214
®
Westfalia Separator
158 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Assemble the bowl and centripetal pump and fit in the separator (see section
4.4.7 "Assembling the bowl".
• Close the hood (see section 4.5 “Closing the hood”).
• Start the separator (see section 3.3 “Starting the separator”).
ATTENTION! Do not start the program!
• Start the program.

Only after a running time of 30 minutes
This running time must be adhered to so that the polyamide gasket is pressed
properly into the bowl top.
• switch on the separator motor by pressing the start key.

If the separator is switched off by the program,
• Compare the starting current and starting time with the diagram (section
4.1.3) until the bowl reaches the speed specified on the separator nameplate.
Note:
The run-up phase of the separator motor is signalled by slow flashing of the
LED in the “Status Separator” key.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 159
4.4.9 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top)

Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged.
• For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL

– Do NOT damage the ring piston
groove when drilling!
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
– with a 2 mm drill bit
– at a distance of approx. 50 to
60 mm.
Fig. 215

– Do NOT damage the ring piston
groove when screwing in!
• Screw two wooden screws in the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
• lever it bit by bit out of the groove

with the wood screws and
using a screwdriver.
Fig. 216
Note:
If the polyamide gasket can’t be removed, repeat this procedure.
®
Westfalia Separator
160 2065-9001-001 / 1010
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the

groove.
• Heat the new polyamide gasket in
o
approx. 80 C (176 °F) water for 5
minutes.
• Wipe the gasket dry and press it
evenly and firmly into the groove, at
four opposite points
Fig. 217
• Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 218

Compressing device
– Eye bolt 1
Fig. 219
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 161
• Turn sliding piston 3 through 180

o
• Place sliding piston 3, bell-shaped

(upside down).
piece 2 and eye bolt 1 on the annu-

lar piston.
Fig. 220
• Press the annular piston 1 into the

bowl bottom by turning hexagon nut
2 clockwise with the wrench.
• Remove special tools and sliding

piston.
Fig. 221

grooves of the closing chamber bot-
tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 222
• Clamp mounting ring 1 under the rim

of the closing chamber bottom.
Fig. 223
®
Westfalia Separator
162 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Insert closing chamber bottom 1 into

the annular piston.
– The O marks of the closing cham-
ber bottom and the bowl bottom
must be aligned.
Fig. 224
• Fasten closing chamber bottom 1

onto the bowl bottom by tightening
Allen screws 2 crosswise.
Fig. 225

– Socket wrench 1
• Screw tight the Allen screws holding

the closing chamber bottom and the
bowl bottom together.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 226
• Insert spindle screw 1 into the hub.
Fig. 227
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 163
• Unscrew the Allen screws holding

the bowl bottom and the closing-
chamber bottom together.
Fig. 228

– Eye bolt 1
– Assembling device 3
Fig. 229

shaped piece 2:
piece 2
– Screw eye bolts 1 into hexagon
nut 3 by approx. 20 mm.
Fig. 230
• Place the bell-shaped piece with
• Fit assembling device 3 onto the

fitted eye bolt into the bowl bottom.
• Loosen three Allen screws 4 using

bell-shaped piece.
the ratchet wrench (with extension
• Slip three disks 5 of the assembling

and socket).
device towards the periphery, under
• Make sure that disks 5 are properly

the rim of annular piston 6.
positioned in the mounting groove of
• Firmly re-tighten Allen screws 4.

Fig. 231
the annular piston.
®
Westfalia Separator
164 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Force off closing chamber bottom 3

together with annular piston 4 by
turning wrench 5 clockwise.
Fig. 232
• Remove closing chamber bottom 3

and annular piston 4 (with fitted gas-
kets) with the bell-shaped piece and

the eye bolt.
the eye bolt.
Fig. 233
• Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

ing chamber bottom 2 by tapping
with a mallet – as illustrated.
• Remove the mounting ring.
Fig. 234
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 165
• Unscrew the spindle screw.
Fig. 235
• By carrying out several measure-

ments around the entire circumfer-
ence of the annular piston, check
that the polyamide gasket is seated
parallel in the groove.
Fig. 236
®
Westfalia Separator
166 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston
• the sealing surface A of the sliding piston (Fig. 237) (Sealing surface A as de-
The bowl seal consists of
• the polyamide gasket B of the bowl top (Fig. 239).

livered 2 mm high) and
When worn, the sealing surface A of

the sliding piston can be remachined
up to max. 0.5 mm several times be-
fore it has to be replaced.
When the first erosion marks (0.2

mm deep) are detected, i.e. as soon
• Remachine the sealing surface of

as the bowl starts to leak:
the sliding piston.
Fig. 237
• When remachining, make sure that

– the sealing surface is machined
cleanly and
– shoulder H at diameter X is still at
least 1.5 mm high.
Fig. 238
Standard parameters for remachining the sealing surface

Surface quality Ra 2 µm (Rz 12.5 µm)
Tool Hard metal steel of ISO quality M 30 or K 20
-1
Speed 55 min
Cutting depth max. 0.15 mm
Forward feed max. 0.1 mm/revolution
• fit a new polymide gasket B into the

After facing
bowl top (see section 4.4.8)!
Fig. 239
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 167
4.5 Closing the hood
If the gasket has been removed to
• insert a new gasket 1 in the groove

keep to the service intervals:
of the upper part of the frame.
Fig. 240
CAUTION: Danger of injury!

• Unlock the shackle.
• Carefully close the hood.
Fig. 241
• Screw in three hex head screws (M

12 x 30) with washers.
Fig. 242
®
Westfalia Separator
168 2065-9001-001 / 1010
If the gaskets 2 have been removed
• Provide handle connection piece 1

to keep to the service intervals:
with new gaskets 2.
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the

guide surfaces and threads of the
handle connection piece as speci-
fied in the lubrication schedule (see
4.3.4).
Fig. 243

– Offset screwdriver 2
• Introduce handle connection piece 1
• Hold the centripetal pump with the

into the hood.
offset screwdriver and tighten it by

lightly hammering the handle con-
nection piece with a mallet (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 244
• Carefully clean the holes in the non-
• rinse with water.

return valve and
• Check the functionality of the non-

return valve.
Fig. 245
• Assemble the filling and displace-

ment water line 1 and connect it.
Fig. 246
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 169
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
170 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.6 Drive
Fig. 247 Exploded view of the drive
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 171
Pos. Designation Dimensions
1 Retaining ring 95 x 3
3 Clutch pulley
4 Grooved ball bearing
5 Spacer bush
8 Clutch driver
9 Clutch shoe
10 Washer 11 x 27 x 4
11 Hex head screw M 10 x 65
12 Washer
14 Drive belt
15 Spindle
17 Bearing cover
18 Bearing cover
20 Retaining ring 35 x 1.5
21 Ball bearing protection ring
22 Angular contact ball bearing
23 Bearing sleeve
24 Gasket
25 Rubber-metal cushion
26 Pivoting bearing
28 Gasket
29 Bearing cover
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loctite 275.)
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loctite 275.)
33 Washer
34 Cup spring
®
Westfalia Separator
172 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive

still.


sight glass.
no longer moving.
Fig. 248



still.
separator!

o



Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/ Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
only.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 173
• Avoid damage to drive parts when fitting and removing by





• Treat all drive parts
– gently.
– Always set them down on a rubber mat or a wooden pallet.
ATTENTION: Before fitting the drive parts

• Thoroughly clean and dry the drive chamber.
Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch.
Use only the ball bearings specified in the parts list!
• always operate the separator with installed bowl!

ATTENTION: To avoid bearing damage,
®
Westfalia Separator
174 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly
• Pay special attention to section 4.6.1.
• Undo the oil drain screw and

• Drain the oil into an oil pan (approx.
2.5 l).
Fig. 249
• Undo three hex head screws 1.

• Take off cover 2.
Fig. 250
• Unscrew four hex head screws 1.
Fig. 251
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 175
• Pull the motor out of the flange

guide by means of the hoist (approx.
5 mm).
– Drive belt is slackened!
• Pull the drive belt off the clutch pul-

ATTENTION!
ley (centrifugal clutch) downwards.
Fig. 252
• Lift the motor with centrifugal clutch

out of the lower section of frame.
Fig. 253
Remove the operating water feeding

device in the upper section of
• Undo nut 2.
frame:
• Take off pipe 3.
Fig. 254
• Remove spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket.
Fig. 255
®
Westfalia Separator
176 2065-9001-001 / 1010

• Remove ring 2 and protective cap 3
with inserted gasket 4.
Fig. 256
Removing the speed monitoring
• Unscrew hex head screw 1.

device:
• Take off speed monitoring device 2

and lay it down in the lower section
of frame.
Fig. 257
• Take the drive belt out of the lower

section of frame.
Fig. 258

• Unscrew spindle assembly 2 from
the lower part of the frame.
(For dismantling the spindle assem-
bly, see section 4.6.3.)
Note:
If the vibration absorber is also pulled out
• Loosen it from the spindle assembly by

of the lower section of the frame:
striking the spindle on a wooden base.
Fig. 259
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 177
• Remove from the lower part of

frame:
– Gasket 1
– Rubber-metal cushion 2
Fig. 260
If necessary:
• remove bearing cover 2 with sealed
hex head screws, disk and cup
springs 3 from the lower part of the
frame.
Fig. 261
If necessary:
• Take out gasket 1.
Fig. 262
®
Westfalia Separator
178 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly
Spindle assembly
Required tools:
– pulling device
– open ended wrench
– pliers with outer snap jaws
Fig. 263
• Detach the bearing sleeve 1 from

the spindle.
Fig. 264
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 179
• Pull off from the spindle:

– angular contact ball bearing 2
– ball bearing protection ring 3
Fig. 265
• Remove the retaining ring.
Fig. 266
• Pull off from the spindle:

– grooved ball bearing 1
– bearing cover 2
– bearing cover 3
Fig. 267
®
Westfalia Separator
180 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch

• Take off cover 2.
Fig. 268
Fig. 269
• Pull the motor out of the flange

guide by means of the hoist (approx.
5 mm).
– Drive belt is slackened!
• Pull the drive belt off the clutch pul-

ATTENTION!
ley (centrifugal clutch) downwards.
Fig. 270
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 181

• Lift the motor with fluid clutch out of

the lower section of the frame.
Fig. 271
• Turn the motor together with the

o
centrifugal clutch 90 (upside down)
with the aid of the hoist.
• CAUTION: Secure from rolling
away and overturning using suit-
able aids!
Fig. 272
• Undo retaining ring 1.

• Take off disk 2.
Fig. 273
• Pull the clutch shoes out of the

clutch driver.
Fig. 274
®
Westfalia Separator
182 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Arrest the clutch driver 1 with an

open-ended wrench.
• Unscrew hex head screw 2 from the
motor shaft end.
• Take off disk 3.
Fig. 275
Required special tool:

– Threaded pin 2 = M 16 x 50

open-ended wrench.
ATTENTION! For protecting the mo-
• Screw threaded pin 2 into the thread

tor shaft end:
of the motor shaft end.
Fig. 276
Required special tool:

– Eye bolt 1
– Socket wrench 3

• Screw eye bolt 1 into the clutch
driver.
• Arrest the clutch driver with an open-
ended wrench.
• Force the centrifugal clutch off the
motor shaft end by turning the eye
bolt clockwise.
Fig. 277
• Remove eye bolt 1 from the clutch

driver and threaded pin 2 from the
motor shaft end.
Fig. 278
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 183

• Place the clutch pulley and clutch
driver on a wooden base using
transport ropes and hoist.
able aids!
• Take the retaining ring out of the
clutch driver groove.
Fig. 279
• Position wooden block.

• Drive the clutch driver downwards
by means of light hammer blows.
• Loosen the clutch driver from the
seat of the two ball bearings.
Fig. 280
• Turn the clutch pulley through 90

o
(opposite the fitting position) with the

aid of the hoist.

able aids!
• Take the retaining rings out of the

clutch drum grooves.
Fig. 281
Required tools
– Disk (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer
• Turn the clutch pulley through 180

o
• place it on wooden supports as

and
shown.
• Drive the grooved ball bearing and
spacer bush out of the clutch pulley.
Fig. 282
®
Westfalia Separator
184 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly

• For dimensions of the parts see 4.6 - exploded view.
• Insert gasket 1 in the groove in the

If necessary:
lower section of frame.
Fig. 283
If necessary:
ATTENTION: Pay attention to the

correct fitting position of the cup
• Fit bearing cover 1 (with sealed hex

springs 2!
head screws and washer) with cup

springs 2 and bolt tight with three
hex head screws 3.
Fig. 284

correct fitting position of the rub-
ber-metal cushion!
– The two opposite inner holes 2 of
the rubber-metal cushion must be
directed upwards.
• Fit rubber-metal cushion 1.
• Insert gasket 3 in the groove in the
lower section of frame.
Fig. 285
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 185
• Turn spindle through 180 (upside

o
down).

correct fitting position of the bear-
• Mount bearing covers 1 and 2.

ing cover!
• Heat grooved ball bearing 3 in oil up

o o
to 100 C (212 F) and slip it onto
the spindle.
• Insert retaining ring 4 in the spindle
groove.
Fig. 286
• Heat ball bearing protection ring 1

and angular contact ball bearings 2
o o
in oil up to 100 C (212 F).
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is

caused by incorrect fitting!
– When fitting angular contact ball
bearing 2 on the spindle, make sure
that the narrow rim of each ball
bearing inner ring faces upwards.
• Slide ball bearing protection ring 1
and angular contact ball bearings 2
onto the spindle.
Fig. 287
• Heat bearing sleeve 1 in oil up to

o o
100 C (212 F).
• Important! Before fitting bearing
sleeve 1, make sure that the in-
stalled angular contact ball bearing
has cooled down to room tempera-
ture.
• Slide bearing bush 1 over the angu-
lar contact ball bearing and the ball
bearing protection ring.
Fig. 288
• Install the assembled spindle as-

sembly 1 in the lower part of the
frame.
ing!

correct fitting position of the spin-
dle!
– The holes in the bearing cover must
be aligned with the holes in the
lower section of the frame.
Fig. 289
• Bolt tight spindle with the three hex
head screws 2.
®
Westfalia Separator
186 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch

• For dimensions of the parts see 4.6 - exploded view..
• Clean the clutch pulley.

• Insert retaining ring 1 in the lower
groove.
• Check that retaining ring 1 is cor-
rectly fitted.
Fig. 290
Required tools:
– Disk 2 (Ø 86 – 94 mm)
– Wooden block
– Hammer

– Disk 2 may only contact the outer
ring of grooved ball bearing 1!
• Carefully drive the first grooved ball

bearing 1 with disk 2 up to the re-
taining ring.
Fig. 291
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 187

– Distance bush 1 may only contact
the inner ring of grooved ball bear-
ing 2!
• Place distance bush on the ball

bearing inner ring.
Fig. 292

– Disk 2 may only contact the outer
ring of grooved ball bearing 1!
• Carefully drive the second grooved

ball bearing 1 with a suitable disk 2
up to the distance sleeve.
Fig. 293
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance by
• Insert retaining ring 2 180 offset

incorrect fitting!
o
relative to retaining ring 1 in the up-

per groove.
Fig. 294
®
Westfalia Separator
188 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Required tool:
– Disk 1 (Ø 61 – 69 mm)

• Turn clutch pulley with fitted grooved

o
ball bearings through 180 .
Fig. 295
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is caused by incorrect fitting!

– Disk 1 may only contact the inner ring of the grooved ball bearing!
• Place the ball bearing inner ring on disk 1.

correct fitting position of the dis-
tance bush!
– Distance bush 1 must be flush with
the inner rings of the grooved ball
bearings.
Fig. 296
Required tools:
– Wooden block
– Rubber hammer
• Carefully hammer the clutch driver

into the grooved ball bearing with
light blows.
Fig. 297
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 189
• Turn the clutch pulley through 180 .

o
• Fit the retaining ring in the groove of

the clutch driver.
Fig. 298

• Turn the motor through 90 with the
o
aid of the hoist.

able aids!
Fig. 299
Required tools:
– ring spanner 2
– Hex head screw 3 (M 10 x 200)
– Hexagon nut 4 (M 10)

feather key groove.
• Fit the assembled centrifugal clutch
on the motor shaft end.
open-ended wrench.
• Insert ring spanner 2 - as shown -
• Screw hex head screw 3 with hexa-

and
gon nut 4 into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 300
®
Westfalia Separator
190 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Pull the centrifugal clutch onto the

motor shaft end as far as it will go,
by turning hexagon nut 4 with a sec-
ond open-ended wrench.
Fig. 301
• Undo hex head screw 3 together
• detach ring spanner 2.

with hexagon nut 4 and
Fig. 302
With driver 1 arrested:

• Provide hex head screw 2
(M 12 x 60) with washer 3 and
thread it into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 303

– Be sure to replace all clutch shoes
simultaneously!
Never replace individual clutch
shoes.
– Make sure that the clutch shoes are
evenly spaced!
• Fit clutch shoes.
Fig. 304
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 191
• Insert disk 2.
• Fit the retaining ring 1 in the groove
of the clutch driver.
Fig. 305
®
Westfalia Separator
192 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.6.7 Fitting the motor
• Carefully place the motor with pre-

assembled centrifugal clutch on
lower section of frame by means of
a hoist.
– Do not yet let the motor flange
lock into the frame opening.
Fig. 306
• Degrease the belt contact surfaces

ATTENTION:
of the spindle and clutch drum.

• Fit the drive belt:
– through upper section of frame
opening 1 and
– through brake housing opening 2
• Pay attention to correct seating of

(centrifugal clutch).
the drive belt on clutch pulley and

spindle pulley.
Fig. 307
• Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the

lower part of the frame.
Fig. 308
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 193
• Screw hex head screw 1 (M 10 x

200) with hexagon nut 2 and washer
3 through the frame bore into the ta-
phole of the centrifugal clutch.
• ATTENTION: To avoid damage to
the grooved ball bearing:
– do not screw in hex head screw 1
all the way.
• Tension the drive belt by turning hex
head nut 2 clockwise until the mo-
tor flange locks into the frame open-
ing.
Fig. 309
• Fasten the motor with four hex head

screws 2 (M 12 x 30).
• Unscrew hex head screw 1 (with

hexagon nut and washer) from the
centrifugal clutch.
Fig. 310
• Screw in the screw plug 1.

• Remove the hoist.
Fig. 311
Note:
Due to the design concept used, the spindle is at an inclined angle relative to
the opposite side of the motor when the drive belt has not been fitted or ten-
sioned (see Fig. 312, pos. 2).
The spindle is pulled into the centric axis when the belt is tensioned (see Fig.
312, pos. 1).
®
Westfalia Separator
194 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Check
– that the spindle 1 can be turned
easily.
– whether the spindle 3 has been
pulled into the centric axis by
tensioning the drive belt 3 (see
Fig. 204).
Fig. 312
Installing the speed monitoring de-

vice:
• Place speed monitoring device 2 on
• fasten with hex head screw 1.

the lower section of frame and
Fig. 313
• Align proximity switch 1 as illu-

strated.
ATTENTION!
The distance X between the spindle
and the proximity switch must be 2.5
mm.
Fig. 314
• Insert protective cap 3 with fitted
• bolt tight with four hex head screws

gasket 4 and ring 2 and
1 (M 8 x 12).
Fig. 315
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 195
• Place spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket on the spindle.
ing!
Fig. 316
Fitting the operating water feeding

device in the upper section of
• Slide nut 2 over pipe 3.

frame:
• Fit pipe with nit into the screwed

connection 1 and slide on as far as it
will go.
ATTENTION: The narrow end of the

pipe must be directed upwards!
• Tighten nut 2 firmly.

Fig. 317
• Fit cover 2 to the lower section of

the frame with three hex head
screws 1 (M 8 x 20).
Fig. 318
• Screw in oil drain screw 1 with fitted

gasket.
• Screw in the sight glass 2.
• Fill in oil as described in section
• Screw in plug 3 with gasket.

4.3.3 and
Fig. 319
®
Westfalia Separator
196 2065-9001-001 / 1010
• Have the motor connected by an authorized electrician!

Danger to life and limb through electric current!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 197
4.7 Height adjustment
• bowl height
For reasons of operating reliability, adjustment of
• and centripetal pump play

must be performed with particular care.
4.7.1 Bowl height
ATTENTION: The bowl height must not be adjusted on this separator!

The bowl height may only be measured with fitted and tightened drive
belt!
A bowl height check is necessary, e.g.
– after replacing the drive parts,
– after fitting another bowl,
– after fitting a different centripetal pump,
– as soon as the centripetal pump exhibits grinding marks.
CAUTION:
A loose bowl top can endanger life!
• Tighten the bowl top firmly.

– The O marks of the bowl bottom
and the bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 320
The control dimension A

– is 33.5 ±2 mm
– between upper edge of bowl top and
upper section of frame.
Fig. 321
If it does prove necessary to readjust the bowl height, consult the factory.
®
Westfalia Separator
198 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance
• Move the centripetal pump axially to

and fro in the centripetal pump
chamber.
• Measure the total clearance A
(approx. 10 Mm).
• Close the hood.
• Check:
– Is the hood correctly seated on
the frame rim?
– Are the hood screws tightened
firmly?
Fig. 322
• Lightly apply a thin coat of lubricant

to the threads of the centripetal
pump as specified in the lubrication
schedule.
• Fit handle connection piece 1 into
the centripetal pump.
• Hold the centripetal pump with offset
screwdriver 2.
• Screw handle connection piece into
the centripetal pump as far as it will
go (left-hand thread).
Fig. 323
• Hold the handle connection piece 1.

• Turn the offset screwdriver 2 until
the handle connection piece is
raised slightly from the hood
(approx. 0.5 mm).
Fig. 324
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 199
• Raise the handle connection piece

to its maximum.
• Measure the axial clearance.
A/2 = 4 – 6 mm
Fig. 325
®
Westfalia Separator
200 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator
Before starting the separator

Perform the following checks after assembling and before starting the separator
depending on the scope of the repair work:
Checks Section
1. Bowl height 4.7.1
2. Oil level in drive chamber 4.3.3
3. Direction of rotation of the bowl 4.1.4
4. Bowl speed 4.1.5
5. Starting time of bowl / current consumption 4.1.5
6. Running characteristics of the separator 3.8.1
7. Suction line of the product pump (if installed) for leakage
When starting the separator

Perform the following checks after carrying out repairs:
Checks Section
1. Temperature of product
2. Observe discharges for water, solids and oil to see if the 3.3
bowl is operating correctly.
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator

• Disconnect all electrical connections.
• Thoroughly clean the separator (see section 4.4.2, 4.4.3 and 4.4.4).
• Dry and grease the clean bowl parts and all unvarnished machine parts to
avoid corrosion damage.
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place until reuse.
• Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, dust-free dark room to prevent them from be-
coming brittle.
• Check if the shut-off valves for water leak.
• If necessary, disconnect the water lines to prevent damage by dripping water.
4.9.1 Preserving the separator

• Drain the lube oil completely.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the lubricating oil.
• Fill the drive chamber with a slushing oil, e.g. Shell oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE
50), to the middle of the sight glass.
• Let the separator run without bowl for approx. 1 minute to make sure that all
drive parts are coated with slushing oil.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 201
CAUTION!
• Keep a safe distance away from the rotating spindle.

Risk of injury through rotating separator parts.
• After switching off the separator, wait until the spindle has stopped rotating.
• Take off the drive belt.
4.9.2 Preserving the motor

• Follow the instructions of the motor manufacturer.
®
Westfalia Separator
202 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.10 Storage
ATTENTION!
Improper and incorrect storage of the separator and control unit can dam-
age or destroy their components.
Store accessories like spare parts, tools, lubricants properly!
Note:
Gaskets, hoses and hosepipes, for example, change their physical properties in
unfavourable storage conditions. This can result in a shorter service life. They
can be rendered useless due to excessive hardening, softening, permanent de-
formation, flaking, cracks or other surface damage.
• Outdoor exposure is not admissible!

IMPORTANT:
4.10.1 After delivery
• store the separator and control unit in the original transport packaging.
If the separator and control unit are not installed immediately after delivery,
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 – 122 °F)
IMPORTANT:
A storage time of more than 12 months of the separator and control unit is only
possible after consulting the manufacturer.
4.10.2 Separator
The following procedure applies
– for storing the separator before commissioning and
– for storing the separator before a prolonged standstill period.
• Store the separator with dismantled bowl!

IMPORTANT:
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place.

• Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, frost-free, dust-free dark room to prevent
them from becoming brittle.
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 - 122 °F)
• The separator with dismantled bowl must be stored dry and free from vibra-
tions.
(Vibrations during standstill can cause bearing damage!).
• Protect the drive spindle and motor from dust.
• Store all other separator parts dry and frost-free.
4.10.3 Control system

• The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
• Protect from excessive heat!
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 203
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to + 45 °C (41 – 113 °F)
4.11 Before restarting
Before re-starting, the operator must ensure

• that all separators and plant components have been function-checked
by competent personnel (qualified specialists).
• that the maintenance intervals are adhered to.
• that the separator is assembled correctly by competent persons.
Note:
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due to a
• check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table “Mainte-
long standstill period or storage),
nance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest”).
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g. due
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule (table
to a long standstill period or storage),
“Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the latest).
Procedure:
• Drain the slushing oil.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the slushing oil.
• Remove the grease from all unpainted machine parts.
• Check gaskets.
Replace damaged, very swollen, hardened or brittle gaskets immediately.
• Assemble the bowl (see section 4.4.7).
• Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
When damaged, replace the ball bearings immediately !
• Fit drive belt (see section 4.6.5 or 4.6.7).

When damaged, replace the drive belt immediately !
• Assemble the separator correctly.

• Fill the drive chamber with the specified lube oil as specified in section 4.3.3.
®
Westfalia Separator
204 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.12 Disposal
When the equipment is no more useful or the separator has reached the end of
its service life, the operator is responsible for appropriate, environmentally
friendly disposal of its components and materials such as
– metal,
– caoutchouc and rubber
– plastics,
– glass,
– gear and lube oils on a mineral-oil basis,
– synthetic gear and lube oils,
– cleaning liquids,
– electric and electronic apparatus.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
Be sure to adhere to applicable environment-protection legislation!
More information on disposal matters can be obtained from local authorities.
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils
Replacement and disposal of waste

oils recovered during the oil changes
and maintenance work must be carried
• Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

out carefully.
• They can be injurious to health,

of slipping or product infection.
depending on their chemical compo-
• Waste oil must be disposed of in

sition.
accordance with local regulations.
Note:
Fig. 326
Special attention must be paid to
the directive issued by the operator
on handling waste oils and the local
regulations.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 205
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids

Only those cleaning agents may be used that are specified in the overall docu-
mentation (see data sheet).
CAUTION: Danger of chemical burns!

The cleaning agents can be acids and caustics which, if used carelessly,
can cause severe damage to persons.
Note:
Pay particular attention to the directive issued by the operator on handling the
cleaning agents used and the local disposal regulations.
4.12.3 Separator
Before disposing of the separator
• Drain the gear oil and dispose of it properly in accordance with section 4.12.1.
• Dismantle the separator, remove any lubricant sticking to separator parts and
dispose of them separately or recycle them where appropriate.
®
Westfalia Separator
206 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.13 Standard tools

are commercially available tools to be supplied by the customer.
Fig. 327
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 207
Pos. Designation
1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (0 - 100 Nm)
with inserts and extension
3 Caliper gauge
4 Electric oil heater for ball bearings
5 Ratchet
with inserts and extension
6 Standard hammer and mallet
7 Inner snap pliers with offset jaws
(Ø 40 mm)
8 Outer snap pliers (Ø 35 mm)
9 Hand tachometer
10 Wrench, adjustable
11 Brushes
12 Puller (200 x 200 mm (H x W))
13 Open-ended wrench (jaw spans: 19, 32, 55 mm)
14 Wooden blocks
15 Drill
16 Drill bit (Ø 2 mm)
17 Wooden screws (max. Ø 4 mm x 50 mm length)
®
Westfalia Separator
208 2065-9001-001 / 1010
4.14 Special tools
Fig. 328
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 209
• Special tools are provided by the manufacturer.

• For the delivery of special tools, the packing list supplied with the sepa-
rator is applicable.
Pos. Designation
10 Mallet
15 Complete socket wrench (spindle screw)
20 Offset screwdriver (centripetal pump)
30 Double hook wrench (centripetal pump chamber lock ring)
40 Hexagon nut M 10 (centrifugal clutch)
50 Hex head screw M 10 x 200 (centrifugal clutch)
60 Disk (centrifugal clutch)
70 Eye bolt, complete (bowl / centrifugal clutch))
80 Bell-shaped piece (bowl top / disk stack / sliding piston)
90 Assembling device, complete (closing chamber bottom / annular pis-

ton)
100 Ring spanner (bowl top)
110 Mounting ring (annular piston)
120 Double nipple (transporting the separator)
130 Allen screw M 10 x 20 (centrifugal clutch)
140 Disk (centrifugal clutch)
150 Pressure piece (centripetal pump)
®
Westfalia Separator
210 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 211
5 Spare parts
5.1 Spare part requirements ...................................................................... 212

5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts .............................................................. 212
®
Westfalia Separator
212 2065-9001-001 / 1010
5.1 Spare part requirements

– safety risks,
ranty claims.
5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts

A rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order
includes the following details:
• Separator model see name-plate

e.g. OSE 10-0136-067
• Serial-No. see name-plate

e.g. 9000-223
• Designation see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. frame
• Part Number see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. 2050-1100-020
The part number is also marked on almost all the
individual parts.
Only when ordering spare parts for bowls:

• Bowl S/N If this differs from the serial number.
The bowl serial number is engraved on the bowl
lock ring, bowl bottom and bowl top.
Only required when ordering spare parts for pump and pump connection parts:
• Model and number of see pump nameplate

pump
The information provided must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.
Available sets of spare parts

The following sets of spare parts are available depending on the respective
technical maintenance intervals:
– Set of spare parts “bowl and hood” for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
– Set of spare parts “Drive” for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
– Set of spare parts “Drive” for operation of 2 years or 16,000 hours
The maintenance schedule forms the systematic maintenance basis for the use
of these sets of spare parts.
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 213
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
214 2065-9001-001 / 1010
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note
®
Westfalia Separator
2065-9001-001 / 1010 215
®
Westfalia Separator
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
Ersatzteilkatalog / Spare Parts Catalog
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6
Maschinen-Nr. / Serial number of machine

9605-835
Trommel-Nr. / Serial number of bowl

9605-835
Auftrags-Nr. / Order number

2881088515_02
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, D 59302 Oelde
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
ETS Ersatzteilschlüssel / Spare part code
Teil oder Baugruppe lieferbar

Part or assembly available
Teil oder Baugruppe bedingt lieferbar. Rücksprache mit dem Herstellerwerk nehmen.
Part or assembly available to a limited extent. Contact manufacturer.
Teil oder Baugruppe in dieser Fertigungsstufe nicht lieferbar.

Part or assembly not available in this manufacturing stage.
3/59
Pos. Teil-Nummer M ME Benennung ETS Seite
Pos. Part-No. Qty. Unit Designation ETS Page
Baugruppe / Component group
2881088515 SEPARATOR OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 5
2881088515_02 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 SEPARADOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n

9605-835
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
4/59 GEA Westfalia Separator Group
5/59
9987-0489-460 SEPARATOR OSE 10-0136-067_ 6
2881088515 SEPARATOR
1100 2065-1100-000 1 GESTELL VOLLST. 8
SEPARATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
BASTIDOR, COMP.
8800 2065-8800-000 1 HAUBE VOLLST. 25
HOOD, COMPL.
CAPÓ, COMP.
2213 2059-2213-020 1 GREIFER VOLLST. 34
CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
PINZA, COMP.
6600 2065-6600-300 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 36
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
3545 0024-3545-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
7825 5289-7825-139 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 42
Typ / Model THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 9928 2066-9928-010 1 SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN 44
SET OF SHIPBOARD SCREW COUPLINGS
JUEGO RACORES DE TIPO MARINO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 9902 2065-9902-520 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE 46
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR 2 YEARS
9605-835 JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO PARA 2 AÑOS
9769 2058-9769-030 1 SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE 55
SET OF COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUEGO PZAS. PUESTA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO
9901 2065-9901-000 1 SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE 57
9605-835 SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
JUEGO HERRAMIENTAS Y ACCESORIOS
2058-3002-101 1 SCHMIEROELTABELLE EN
Ausgabe / Edition TABLE OF LUBRICATING OILS EN
130 2058-3002-101 1 SCHMIEROELTABELLE EN
18.03.2021 TABLE OF LUBRICATING OILS EN
9601 2058-9601-020 1 INSTALLATIONSRICHTLINIEN EN
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS EN
NORMATIVAS DE INSTALACIÓN EN
Seite/Page
9001 2065-9001-001 1 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG EN
2881088515 INSTRUCTION MANUAL EN
SEPARATOR OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES EN
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
8/59
9/59
10 2065-1001-000 1 GESTELLUNTERTEIL
2065-1100-000 LOWER SECTION OF FRAME
GESTELL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
20 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
FRAME, COMPL.
SPHERICAL PLAIN BEARING
COJINETE ARTICULADO
30 0026-5841-170 1 SICHERUNGSRING
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
70 0019-6933-300 6 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
120 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 15
Typ / Model FOOT, COMPL.
PIE, COMP.
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 140 2065-1002-020 1 GESTELLOBERTEIL
UPPER SECTION OF FRAME
PARTE SUPERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 150 0019-6970-400 11 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE
HEX HEAD SCREW
9605-835 TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
155 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ARANDELA _ DISCO
160 0007-3378-750 1 DICHTRING
9605-835 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
170 0026-1371-300 3 SCHEIBE
Ausgabe / Edition WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
18.03.2021 180 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
CASQUILLO ELASTO-METÁLICO
Seite/Page
200 2065-3050-000 1 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 17
2065-1100-000 SET OF DRIVE PARTS
GESTELL VOLLST. JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
210 0005-0868-000 1 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
PROXIMITY SENSOR
INICIADOR DE APROXIMACIÓN
220 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
HOLDER
SOPORTE
230 0005-1601-700 1 KABELDURCHFUEHRUNGSTUELLE
CABLE SLEEVE
TUBO DE PROTECCIÓN PARA CABLES
240 0019-6105-400 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
250 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
270 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
Typ / Model NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 280 2058-3385-010 1 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 21
CENTRIFUGAL CLUTCH, COMPL.
EMBRAGUE CENTRÍFUGO, COMP.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 290 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
9605-835 ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
310 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
9605-835 WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Ausgabe / Edition HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
18.03.2021 330 0019-1442-900 1 GEWINDESTOPFEN
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
340 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
350 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
2065-1100-000 PROTECTIVE CAP
GESTELL VOLLST. TAPA PROTECTORA
360 2058-1089-000 1 RING
FRAME, COMPL.
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
380 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
400 0018-2477-400 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
410 2065-1464-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
Typ / Model LENGTH OF PIPE
EMPALME DE TUBOS
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 420 0018-3215-400 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 430 0018-7943-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
9605-835 TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
440 0018-7614-000 1 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 23
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BLOQUE DE ELECTROVÁLVULA, COMP.
450 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
9605-835 HOSE
MANGUERA
460 0018-3804-300 2 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE CLIP
ABRAZADERA DE MANGUERA
18.03.2021 470 0018-6479-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
HOSE CLIP
Seite/Page
490 0019-8910-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
2065-1100-000 SCREW PLUG
GESTELL VOLLST. TORNILLO DE TOPE
FRAME, COMPL.
SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
500 0007-1796-550 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
530 0013-0289-150 1 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
540 0018-0992-260 1 STOPFEN
Typ / Model PLUG
TAPÓN
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 550 0005-1720-900 2 SOCKEL
BASE
ZÓCALO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 560 0019-2247-300 2 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
9605-835 TORNILLO CILÍNDRICO
570 0005-1455-900 4 KABELBINDER
CABLE TIE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BRIDA
600 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
9605-835 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
610 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
Ausgabe / Edition COVER
TAPA
18.03.2021 620 0024-4395-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
0024-6327-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Seite/Page
2065-1100-000 ADHESIVE PLATE
GESTELL VOLLST. RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
FRAME, COMPL.
PLATE
RÓTULO
0024-5220-000 1 ABZIEHBILD _PFEIL
DECAL _ARROW
CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Typ / Model ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 0024-3501-010 1 TYPENSCHILD
TYPE PLATE
PLACA DE CARACTERÍSTICAS
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
NOTCHED NAIL
9605-835 REMACHE ESTRIADO
ADHESIVE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
9605-835 PLATE
RÓTULO
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
15/59
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
20 0021-3308-750 4 MASCHINENFUSS
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
17/59
10 2065-3429-000 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 19
2065-3050-000 SPINDLE, COMPL.
SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE HUSILLO, COMP.
20 0021-3345-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
30 0021-3293-870 4 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
19/59
10 2065-3410-000 1 SPINDEL
2065-3429-000 SPINDLE
SPINDEL VOLLST. HUSILLO
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
40 0011-6207-670 1 RILLENKUGELLAGER
GROOVED BALL BEARING
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0008-2008-000 1 KUGELLAGERSCHLUSSRING
BALL BEARING PROTECTION RING
ARO PROTECTOR DE RODAMIENTO DE BOLAS
70 0011-7304-250 1 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER
Typ / Model ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
BOLAS DE CONTACTO ANGULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
MANGUITO DE COJINETE
9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
21/59
10 2058-3365-000 1 KUPPLUNGSSCHEIBE
2058-3385-010 CLUTCH PULLEY
FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. DISCO DEL EMBRAGUE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
30 0026-2501-400 1 ABSTANDSBUCHSE
DISTANCE SLEEVE
CASQUILLO DE SEPARACIÓN
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 2058-3483-000 1 MITNEHMERSCHEIBE MHPA
DRIVER, BALANCED WITH HALF KEY
DISCO ARRASTRADOR EQUILIBRADA CMCH
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
23/59
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
0018-7614-000 PRESSURE REGULATOR
MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. REGULADOR DE PRESIÓN
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
30 0001-1572-600 1 DRUCKMESSGERAET
PRESSURE GAUGE
TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
40 0018-7614-900 1 FILTEREINSATZ
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
Typ / Model SOLENOID
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0018-5947-820 2 MEMBRANE
DIAPHRAGM
9605-835 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NÚCLEO MAGNÉTICO
110 0018-5118-040 2 GERAETESTECKDOSE
9605-835 APPLIANCE SOCKET
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE
MANGUERA
18.03.2021 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
Seite/Page
25/59
10 2065-8808-000 1 HAUBE
2065-8800-000 HOOD
HAUBE VOLLST. CAPÓ
20 0026-2101-000 1 HALTERING VOLLST. 28
HOOD, COMPL.
RETAINING RING, CPL.
ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN, COMP.
50 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE
CUERPO DE LA EMPUÑADURA
60 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 2058-8839-000 1 RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL
NON-RETURN VALVE
VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN
80 0013-1006-600 1 UEBERWURFMUTTER
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
90 0018-7940-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
Typ / Model LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 100 0019-1611-300 3 FLACHKOPFSCHRAUBE
PAN HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO DE CABEZA PLANA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 110 0019-8904-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
SCREW PLUG
9605-835 TORNILLO DE TOPE
PRESSURE GAUGE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
130 0018-6035-030 3 STUTZEN
9605-835 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
140 2065-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF ORIFICE PLATES
JUEGO DE PLACAS PERFORADAS
18.03.2021 150 0018-6656-100 2 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. 30
CORRUGATED TUBE, COMPL.
TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
NON-RETURN VALVE
Seite/Page
170 0018-1566-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
2065-8800-000 LENGTH OF PIPE
HAUBE VOLLST. EMPALME DE TUBOS
180 0018-6652-000 1 STUTZEN
HOOD, COMPL.
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
190 2062-8828-000 1 SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. 32
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
BLOQUE SENSOR, COMP.
220 0005-1741-808 0.7 m SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
230 0005-1827-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
Typ / Model CYLINDRICAL SCREW
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 250 0005-3838-128 1 m SCHIFFSKABEL
SHIPS CABLE
CABLE DE NAVE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 260 0005-4658-088 1 m SCHIFFSKABEL
SHIPS CABLE
9605-835 CABLE DE NAVE

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
28/59
10 2058-7788-010 1 BUEGEL
0026-2101-000 STIRRUP
HALTERING VOLLST. ESTRIBO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
40 0026-2840-890 1 KAPPE
CAP
CAPERUZA
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
30/59
10 0007-1729-830 4 DICHTRING
0018-6656-100 GASKET
WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
32/59
10 0018-8133-600 2 MAGNETVENTIL
2062-8828-000 SOLENOID VALVE
SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. ELECTROVÁLVULA
0018-5545-830 2 MEMBRANE
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
DIAPHRAGM
MEMBRANA
0007-2987-830 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
20 0005-1529-300 2 DRUCKTRANSMITTER
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
TRANSMISOR DE PRESIÓN
30 0005-1464-070 1 WASSERDETEKTOR
WATER DETECTOR
DETECTOR DE AGUA
0005-1464-090 1 ANSCHLUSSKABEL
CONNECTION CABLE
CABLE DE CONEXIÓN
40 0007-2501-830 3 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 50 2062-8828-910 2 ABSPERRVENTIL
SHUT-OFF VALVE
VÁLVULA DE CIERRE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
70 0026-1345-300 3 SCHEIBE
ASHER _ DISK
80 2062-8828-920 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE
9605-835 SET OF SPARE PARTS
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
90 2062-8828-930 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
34/59
10 2058-2241-020 1 GREIFER VOLLST.
2059-2213-020 CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
GREIFER VOLLST. PINZA, COMP.
20 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 2059-2337-000 1 STEUERGREIFER
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
40 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-2925-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 2142-2239-000 1 DISTANZRING
DISTANCE RING
ANILLA DE SEPARACIÓN
70 0007-2485-390 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
36/59
20 2065-6601-010 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL
2065-6600-300 BOWL BOTTOM
TROMMEL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL TAMBOR
30 0007-2385-720 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0004-3274-810 1 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING
PISTON GUIDE RING
ANILLO DE GUÍA DE PISTÓN
50 2065-6698-020 1 WASSERKAMMERBODEN
WATER CHAMBER BOTTOM
BASE DE LA CÁMARA DE AGUA
60 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 90 2065-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 100 0007-3802-840 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
9605-835 JUNTA ANULAR
110 0007-2338-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUNTA ANULAR
120 2065-6426-010 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
9605-835 CLOSING CHAMBER BOTTOM
FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
130 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
Ausgabe / Edition GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
18.03.2021 140 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 0007-3896-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
180 2065-6501-000 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER
2065-6600-300 SLIDING PISTON
TROMMEL VOLLST. VÁLVULA DE MANGUITO
200 0007-2421-760 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-6621-050 1 VERTEILER
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUIDOR
220 2065-6660-010 1 TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. 40
DISC STACK, COMPL.
SOPORTE DE PLATOS, COMP.
230 2065-6652-000 1 SCHEIDETELLER
SEPARATING DISC
PLATO SEPARADOR
240 2065-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
250 0007-3801-840 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 260 0007-3913-830 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 290 0019-6324-400 2 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
9605-835 PRISIONERO
310 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
320 2058-6642-040 1 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL
9605-835 CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
TAPA DE LA CÁMARA DEL RODETE
Ausgabe / Edition CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
18.03.2021 340 2168-6631-020 1 VERSCHLUSSRING
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
350 0019-0960-360 1 SPINDELSCHRAUBE
SPINDLE SCREW
TORNILLO DEL HUSILLO
Seite/Page
360 0007-2393-750 1 DICHTRING
2065-6600-300 GASKET
TROMMEL VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
990 0024-6180-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
BOWL, COMPL.
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
40/59
10 2065-6663-000 88 TELLER VOLLST.
2065-6660-010 DISC, COMPL.
TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. PLATO, COMP.
20 2065-6666-000 2 ABSCHLUSSTELLER
DISC STACK, COMPL.
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
42/59
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-139 FLANGE
DREHSTROMMOTOR BRIDA
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
TOBERA DEL VENTILADOR
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
44/59
10 0005-4487-630 2 VERSCHRAUBUNG
2066-9928-010 SCREW COUPLING
SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN RACOR
20 0013-0131-630 2 MUTTER
NUT
TUERCA
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
46/59
10 2065-9902-000 2 SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE 48
2065-9902-520 SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE JUEGO PIEZAS REPUESTO TAMBOR_CAPÓ
20 2065-9902-010 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB 51
SET OF SPARE PARTS FOR DRIVE
JUEGO PIEZAS RECAMBIO ACCIONAMIENTO
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
48/59
10 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
2065-9902-000 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2730-750 2 DICHTRING
SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2385-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
60 0007-1997-750 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
100 0007-3802-840 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 110 0007-2338-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
140 0007-2069-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
150 0007-3896-750 2 DICHTRING
9605-835 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
200 0007-2421-760 4 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
18.03.2021 250 0007-3801-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-3913-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
310 0007-1861-750 8 DICHTRING
2065-9902-000 GASKET
360 0007-2393-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
370 0007-1936-750 12 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
380 0007-1904-750 8 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 0007-2485-390 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
400 0007-2925-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
410 0007-3378-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 430 0015-0082-000 2 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
GRASA LUBRICANTE
9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
51/59
10 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
2065-9902-010 GASKET
SATZ ERSATZTEILE ANTRIEB JUNTA ANULAR
20 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
60 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model DRIVE BELT
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
53/59
10 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
2065-9902-030 GASKET
20 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 80 0011-6012-680 2 RILLENKUGELLAGER
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0021-3293-870 4 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
9605-835 ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
55/59
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2058-9769-030 GASKET
SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2925-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2485-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 80 0015-0003-080 1 SCHMIEROEL
LUBRICATING OIL
ACEITE LUBRICANTE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0021-3345-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
DRIVE BELT
9605-835 CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
95 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n GRASA LUBRICANTE
9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
57/59
10 0003-0644-300 1 SCHLAGBOLZEN
2065-9901-000 MALLET
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE PERCUTOR
15 0003-0596-320 1 STECKSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
SOCKET WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE DE TUBO, COMP.
0026-1438-170 1 SPRENGRING
SNAP RING
ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN
20 0003-3796-320 1 WINKELSCHRAUBENDREHER
OFFSET SCREWDRIVER
DESTORNILLADOR ACODADO
30 0003-3685-000 1 DOPPEL-HAKENSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
DOUBLE HOOK WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE DE DOBLE GANCHO, COMP.
0026-1558-300 1 KERBSTIFT
NOTCHED PIN
PASADOR ESTRIADO
0026-1671-300 1 KERBSTIFT
Typ / Model NOTCHED PIN
PASADOR ESTRIADO
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 40 0013-0279-300 1 SECHSKANTMUTTER
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
60 0026-0356-300 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
70 2064-9982-000 1 RINGSCHRAUBE VOLLST.
9605-835 EYE BOLT, COMPL.
ANILLA, COMP.
80 2064-9822-000 1 GLOCKE
Ausgabe / Edition BELL-SHAPED PIECE
CAMPANA
18.03.2021 90 2065-9860-000 1 MONTAGEVORRICHTUNG VOLLST.
MOUNTING TOOL, COMPL.
DISPOSITIVO DE MONTAJE, COMP.
100 2058-9943-000 1 RINGSCHLUESSEL VOLLST.
ANNULAR WRENCH, COMPL.
LLAVE ANULAR, COMP.
Seite/Page
120 0018-2916-050 1 DOPPELNIPPEL
2065-9901-000 DOUBLE NIPPLE
SATZ WERKZEUGE U.ZUBEHOERTEILE BOQUILLA DOBLE
SET OF TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
140 2058-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
150 2142-9935-000 1 DRUCKSTUECK
PRESSURE PIECE
PIEZA DE PRESIÓN
210 2064-9939-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-835

9605-835
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
Ersatzteilkatalog / Spare Parts Catalog
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6
Maschinen-Nr. / Serial number of machine

9605-836
Trommel-Nr. / Serial number of bowl

9605-836
Auftrags-Nr. / Order number

2881088515_03
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
GEA Germany
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, D 59302 Oelde
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com
ETS Ersatzteilschlüssel / Spare part code
Teil oder Baugruppe lieferbar

Part or assembly available
Teil oder Baugruppe bedingt lieferbar. Rücksprache mit dem Herstellerwerk nehmen.
Part or assembly available to a limited extent. Contact manufacturer.
Teil oder Baugruppe in dieser Fertigungsstufe nicht lieferbar.

Part or assembly not available in this manufacturing stage.
3/55
2881088515 SEPARATOR OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 5
2881088515_03 SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
5/55
9987-0489-461 SEPARATOR OSE 10-0136-067_ 6
2881088515 SEPARATOR
1100 2065-1100-000 1 GESTELL VOLLST. 7
SEPARATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
BASTIDOR, COMP.
8800 2065-8800-000 1 HAUBE VOLLST. 24
HOOD, COMPL.
CAPÓ, COMP.
2213 2059-2213-020 1 GREIFER VOLLST. 33
PINZA, COMP.
6600 2065-6600-300 1 TROMMEL VOLLST. 35
BOWL, COMPL.
TAMBOR, COMP.
3545 0024-3545-010 1 KLEBESCHILD
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
7825 5289-7825-139 1 DREHSTROMMOTOR 41
Typ / Model THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
MOTOR TRIFÁSICO
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 9928 2066-9928-010 1 SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN 43
JUEGO RACORES DE TIPO MARINO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 9902 2065-9902-520 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE 45
9605-836 JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO PARA 2 AÑOS
9769 2058-9769-030 1 SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE 54
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n JUEGO PZAS. PUESTA EN FUNCIONAMIENTO
9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
7/55
8/55
10 2065-1001-000 1 GESTELLUNTERTEIL
2065-1100-000 LOWER SECTION OF FRAME
GESTELL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
20 0011-8060-000 1 GELENKLAGER
FRAME, COMPL.
SPHERICAL PLAIN BEARING
COJINETE ARTICULADO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 2065-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
120 2058-1015-000 4 FUSS VOLLST. 14
Typ / Model FOOT, COMPL.
PIE, COMP.
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 140 2065-1002-020 1 GESTELLOBERTEIL
UPPER SECTION OF FRAME
PARTE SUPERIOR DEL BASTIDOR
HEX HEAD SCREW
155 0026-1371-400 4 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
160 0007-3378-750 1 DICHTRING
9605-836 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
170 0026-1371-300 3 SCHEIBE
Ausgabe / Edition WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
18.03.2021 180 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
190 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
Seite/Page
200 2065-3050-000 1 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 16
2065-1100-000 SET OF DRIVE PARTS
GESTELL VOLLST. JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE ACCIONAMIENTO
210 0005-0868-000 1 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR
FRAME, COMPL.
PROXIMITY SENSOR
INICIADOR DE APROXIMACIÓN
220 2065-1145-000 1 HALTER
HOLDER
SOPORTE
230 0005-1601-700 1 KABELDURCHFUEHRUNGSTUELLE
CABLE SLEEVE
TUBO DE PROTECCIÓN PARA CABLES
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
250 0005-4485-930 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
270 0000-0006-162 1 ENTFAELLT
Typ / Model NOT APPLICABLE
SE SUPRIME
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 280 2058-3385-010 1 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 20
EMBRAGUE CENTRÍFUGO, COMP.
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 290 2057-3367-000 1 SCHEIBE
WASHER _ DISK
9605-836 ARANDELA _ DISCO
SECURING RING
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
310 0026-2418-400 1 SCHEIBE
9605-836 WASHER _ DISK
ARANDELA _ DISCO
Ausgabe / Edition HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
18.03.2021 330 0019-1442-900 1 GEWINDESTOPFEN
THREADED PLUG
TAPÓN ROSCADO
340 0007-2566-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
350 2066-1066-000 1 SCHUTZKAPPE
2065-1100-000 PROTECTIVE CAP
GESTELL VOLLST. TAPA PROTECTORA
360 2058-1089-000 1 RING
FRAME, COMPL.
RING
ANILLO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
380 0007-2730-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 2066-3266-000 1 SPINDELKAPPE
SPINDLE CAP
CAPERUZA DEL EJE
400 0018-2477-400 1 VERSCHRAUBUNG
SCREW COUPLING
RACOR
410 2065-1464-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
Typ / Model LENGTH OF PIPE
EMPALME DE TUBOS
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 420 0018-3215-400 1 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 430 0018-7943-000 1 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST.
9605-836 TUBO FLEXIBLE DE BAJA PRESIÓN, COMP.
440 0018-7614-000 1 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 22
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BLOQUE DE ELECTROVÁLVULA, COMP.
450 0018-6744-710 1 SCHLAUCH
9605-836 HOSE
MANGUERA
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE CLIP
18.03.2021 470 0018-6479-710 1 SCHLAUCH
HOSE
MANGUERA
HOSE CLIP
Seite/Page
2065-1100-000 SCREW PLUG
GESTELL VOLLST. TORNILLO DE TOPE
FRAME, COMPL.
SCREW PLUG
TORNILLO DE TOPE
500 0007-1796-550 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
510 0001-1457-800 2 SCHAUGLAS
SIGHT GLASS
MIRILLA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
540 0018-0992-260 1 STOPFEN
Typ / Model PLUG
TAPÓN
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 550 0005-1720-900 2 SOCKEL
BASE
ZÓCALO
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
570 0005-1455-900 4 KABELBINDER
CABLE TIE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n BRIDA
600 0018-6620-030 1 STUTZEN
9605-836 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
610 2058-1061-010 1 DECKEL
Ausgabe / Edition COVER
TAPA
18.03.2021 620 0024-4395-010 1 SATZ SCHILDER
SET OF PLATES
JUEGO DE RÓTULOS
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Seite/Page
2065-1100-000 ADHESIVE PLATE
GESTELL VOLLST. RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-6426-000 1 SCHILD
FRAME, COMPL.
PLATE
RÓTULO
0024-5220-000 1 ABZIEHBILD _PFEIL
DECAL _ARROW
CALCOMANÍA DE «FLECHA»
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Typ / Model ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 0024-3501-010 1 TYPENSCHILD
TYPE PLATE
PLACA DE CARACTERÍSTICAS
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 0026-1571-300 4 KERBNAGEL
NOTCHED NAIL
9605-836 REMACHE ESTRIADO
ADHESIVE PLATE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n RÓTULO ADHESIVO
0024-5380-000 1 SCHILD
9605-836 PLATE
RÓTULO
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
14/55
10 2058-1467-000 4 PLATTE
2058-1015-000 PLATE
FUSS VOLLST. PLACA
20 0021-3308-750 4 MASCHINENFUSS
FOOT, COMPL.
MACHINE FOOT
PIE DE MAQUINA
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
16/55
10 2065-3429-000 1 SPINDEL VOLLST. 18
2065-3050-000 SPINDLE, COMPL.
SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE HUSILLO, COMP.
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
DRIVE BELT
30 0021-3293-870 4 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
18/55
10 2065-3410-000 1 SPINDEL
2065-3429-000 SPINDLE
SPINDEL VOLLST. HUSILLO
20 2058-3375-000 1 LAGERDECKEL
SPINDLE, COMPL.
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
30 2058-3375-010 1 LAGERDECKEL
BEARING COVER
TAPA DE COJINETE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0008-2008-000 1 KUGELLAGERSCHLUSSRING
BALL BEARING PROTECTION RING
ARO PROTECTOR DE RODAMIENTO DE BOLAS
Typ / Model ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 80 0010-5205-010 1 LAGERHUELSE
BEARING SLEEVE
MANGUITO DE COJINETE
9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
20/55
10 2058-3365-000 1 KUPPLUNGSSCHEIBE
2058-3385-010 CLUTCH PULLEY
FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. DISCO DEL EMBRAGUE
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
30 0026-2501-400 1 ABSTANDSBUCHSE
DISTANCE SLEEVE
CASQUILLO DE SEPARACIÓN
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
50 2058-3483-000 1 MITNEHMERSCHEIBE MHPA
DRIVER, BALANCED WITH HALF KEY
DISCO ARRASTRADOR EQUILIBRADA CMCH
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
22/55
10 0018-7614-920 1 DRUCKREGLER
0018-7614-000 PRESSURE REGULATOR
MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. REGULADOR DE PRESIÓN
20 0018-1763-630 1 KUGELHAHN
BALL VALVE
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
0018-1763-280 1 GRIFF
HANDLEGRIP
EMPUÑADURA
25 0018-6419-030 2 STUTZEN
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
PRESSURE GAUGE
TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
40 0018-7614-900 1 FILTEREINSATZ
FILTER INSERT
CARTUCHO DE FILTRO
70 0018-6654-010 2 MAGNETSPULE
Typ / Model SOLENOID
BOBINA MAGNÉTICA
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 80 0018-6654-040 2 GEHAEUSE
HOUSING
CARCASA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0018-5947-820 2 MEMBRANE
DIAPHRAGM
9605-836 MEMBRANA
100 0018-7614-930 2 MAGNETKERN
SOLENOID CORE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n NÚCLEO MAGNÉTICO
110 0018-5118-040 2 GERAETESTECKDOSE
9605-836 APPLIANCE SOCKET
CONECTOR HEMBRA
130 0018-7614-910 1 SCHLAUCH
Ausgabe / Edition HOSE
MANGUERA
18.03.2021 140 0018-6654-030 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
Seite/Page
24/55
10 2065-8808-000 1 HAUBE
2065-8800-000 HOOD
HAUBE VOLLST. CAPÓ
20 0026-2101-000 1 HALTERING VOLLST. 27
HOOD, COMPL.
ANILLO DE RETENCIÓN, COMP.
50 2171-2191-020 1 GRIFFKOERPER
HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE
CUERPO DE LA EMPUÑADURA
60 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
NON-RETURN VALVE
80 0013-1006-600 1 UEBERWURFMUTTER
COUPLING NUT
TUERCA DE RACOR
Typ / Model LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 100 0019-1611-300 3 FLACHKOPFSCHRAUBE
PAN HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO DE CABEZA PLANA
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 110 0019-8904-030 1 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE
SCREW PLUG
9605-836 TORNILLO DE TOPE
PRESSURE GAUGE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n TRANSDUCTOR DE PRESIÓN
130 0018-6035-030 3 STUTZEN
9605-836 CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
140 2065-8829-000 1 SATZ BLENDEN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF ORIFICE PLATES
JUEGO DE PLACAS PERFORADAS
18.03.2021 150 0018-6656-100 2 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. 29
TUBO FLEXIBLE ONDULADO, COMP.
NON-RETURN VALVE
Seite/Page
170 0018-1566-000 1 ROHRSTUECK
2065-8800-000 LENGTH OF PIPE
HAUBE VOLLST. EMPALME DE TUBOS
180 0018-6652-000 1 STUTZEN
HOOD, COMPL.
CONNECTOR
TUBO DE EMPALME
190 2062-8828-000 1 SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. 31
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
BLOQUE SENSOR, COMP.
220 0005-1741-808 0.7 m SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
PROTECTIVE HOSE
MANGUERA PROTECTORA
230 0005-1827-280 1 KLEMMENKASTEN
TERMINAL BOX
CAJA DE BORNES
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 250 0005-3838-128 1 m SCHIFFSKABEL
SHIPS CABLE
CABLE DE NAVE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 260 0005-4658-088 1 m SCHIFFSKABEL
SHIPS CABLE
9605-836 CABLE DE NAVE

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
27/55
10 2058-7788-010 1 BUEGEL
0026-2101-000 STIRRUP
HALTERING VOLLST. ESTRIBO
HEX HEAD SCREW
TORNILLO HEXAGONAL
HEXAGON NUT
TUERCA HEXAGONAL
40 0026-2840-890 1 KAPPE
CAP
CAPERUZA
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
29/55
10 0007-1729-830 4 DICHTRING
0018-6656-100 GASKET
WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
31/55
10 0018-8133-600 2 MAGNETVENTIL
2062-8828-000 SOLENOID VALVE
SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. ELECTROVÁLVULA
0018-5545-830 2 MEMBRANE
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
DIAPHRAGM
MEMBRANA
0007-2987-830 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
20 0005-1529-300 2 DRUCKTRANSMITTER
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
TRANSMISOR DE PRESIÓN
30 0005-1464-070 1 WASSERDETEKTOR
WATER DETECTOR
DETECTOR DE AGUA
0005-1464-090 1 ANSCHLUSSKABEL
CONNECTION CABLE
CABLE DE CONEXIÓN
40 0007-2501-830 3 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 50 2062-8828-910 2 ABSPERRVENTIL
SHUT-OFF VALVE
VÁLVULA DE CIERRE
CYLINDRICAL SCREW
70 0026-1345-300 3 SCHEIBE
ASHER _ DISK
80 2062-8828-920 1 SATZ ERSATZTEILE
9605-836 SET OF SPARE PARTS
JUEGO DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
90 2062-8828-930 1 SATZ DICHTUNGEN
Ausgabe / Edition SET OF GASKETS
JUEGO DE JUNTAS
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
33/55
10 2058-2241-020 1 GREIFER VOLLST.
2059-2213-020 CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
GREIFER VOLLST. PINZA, COMP.
20 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 2059-2337-000 1 STEUERGREIFER
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
RODETE DE MANDO
40 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-2925-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 2142-2239-000 1 DISTANZRING
DISTANCE RING
ANILLA DE SEPARACIÓN
70 0007-2485-390 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
35/55
20 2065-6601-010 1 TROMMELUNTERTEIL
2065-6600-300 BOWL BOTTOM
TROMMEL VOLLST. PARTE INFERIOR DEL TAMBOR
30 0007-2385-720 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
50 2065-6698-020 1 WASSERKAMMERBODEN
WATER CHAMBER BOTTOM
BASE DE LA CÁMARA DE AGUA
60 0007-1997-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 90 2065-6503-000 1 RINGKOLBEN
ANNULAR PISTON
PISTÓN ANULAR
GASKET
110 0007-2338-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
120 2065-6426-010 1 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN
9605-836 CLOSING CHAMBER BOTTOM
FONDO DE LA CÁMARA DE CIERRE
130 0007-3541-750 1 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
18.03.2021 140 0007-2069-720 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
150 0007-3896-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
180 2065-6501-000 1 KOLBENSCHIEBER
2065-6600-300 SLIDING PISTON
TROMMEL VOLLST. VÁLVULA DE MANGUITO
200 0007-2421-760 1 DICHTRING
BOWL, COMPL.
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
210 2065-6621-050 1 VERTEILER
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUIDOR
220 2065-6660-010 1 TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. 39
DISC STACK, COMPL.
SOPORTE DE PLATOS, COMP.
230 2065-6652-000 1 SCHEIDETELLER
SEPARATING DISC
PLATO SEPARADOR
240 2065-6611-000 1 TROMMELDECKEL
BOWL TOP
TAPA DEL TAMBOR
250 0007-3801-840 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 260 0007-3913-830 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 290 0019-6324-400 2 GEWINDESTIFT
THREADED PIN
9605-836 PRISIONERO
310 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
9605-836 CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
Ausgabe / Edition CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
18.03.2021 340 2168-6631-020 1 VERSCHLUSSRING
LOCK RING
ANILLO DE CIERRE
350 0019-0960-360 1 SPINDELSCHRAUBE
SPINDLE SCREW
TORNILLO DEL HUSILLO
Seite/Page
360 0007-2393-750 1 DICHTRING
2065-6600-300 GASKET
TROMMEL VOLLST. JUNTA ANULAR
990 0024-6180-000 1 KLEBESCHILD
BOWL, COMPL.
ADHESIVE PLATE
RÓTULO ADHESIVO
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
39/55
10 2065-6663-000 88 TELLER VOLLST.
2065-6660-010 DISC, COMPL.
TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. PLATO, COMP.
20 2065-6666-000 2 ABSCHLUSSTELLER
DISC STACK, COMPL.
BLIND DISC
PLATO DE CIERRE
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
41/55
10 0005-4863-000 1 FLANSCH
5289-7825-139 FLANGE
DREHSTROMMOTOR BRIDA
20 0005-4863-010 1 LAGERSCHILD
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
END SHIELD
PLATO DE COJINETE
30 0005-4863-020 1 LUEFTER
FAN
VENTILADOR
40 0005-4863-030 1 LUEFTERHAUBE
FAN COVER
TOBERA DEL VENTILADOR
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
43/55
10 0005-4487-630 2 VERSCHRAUBUNG
2066-9928-010 SCREW COUPLING
SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN RACOR
20 0013-0131-630 2 MUTTER
NUT
TUERCA
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
45/55
10 2065-9902-000 2 SATZ ERSATZTEILE TROMMEL _ HAUBE 47
2065-9902-520 SET OF SPARE PARTS BOWL _ HOOD
SATZ ERSATZTEILE F. 2 JAHRE JUEGO PIEZAS REPUESTO TAMBOR_CAPÓ
Typ / Model
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
47/55
10 0007-2566-390 2 DICHTRING
2065-9902-000 GASKET
20 0007-2730-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2385-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
PISTON GUIDE RING
60 0007-1997-750 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 6 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
100 0007-3802-840 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 110 0007-2338-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
GASKET
140 0007-2069-720 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
150 0007-3896-750 2 DICHTRING
9605-836 GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
200 0007-2421-760 4 DICHTRING
JUNTA ANULAR
18.03.2021 250 0007-3801-840 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
260 0007-3913-830 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
Seite/Page
310 0007-1861-750 8 DICHTRING
2065-9902-000 GASKET
360 0007-2393-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
370 0007-1936-750 12 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
380 0007-1904-750 8 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
390 0007-2485-390 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
400 0007-2925-750 4 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
410 0007-3378-750 2 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 430 0015-0082-000 2 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
GRASA LUBRICANTE
9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
50/55
10 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
2065-9902-010 GASKET
20 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6

9605-836

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
52/55
10 0007-2581-750 1 DICHTRING
2065-9902-030 GASKET
20 0008-3533-000 1 ULTRA-BUCHSE
RUBBER-METAL BUSH
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
SECURING RING
ANILLO DE SEGURIDAD
60 0007-1958-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 80 0011-6012-680 2 RILLENKUGELLAGER
RODAMIENTO RÍGIDO
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0021-3293-870 4 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ
CLUTCH SHOE
9605-836 ZAPATA DEL EMBRAGUE

9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
54/55
10 0007-1936-750 2 DICHTRING
2058-9769-030 GASKET
SATZ INBETRIEBNAHMETEILE JUNTA ANULAR
20 0007-2925-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
30 0007-2485-390 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
40 0007-1904-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
50 0007-1936-750 1 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
60 0007-1861-750 2 DICHTRING
GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
70 0007-1987-750 1 DICHTRING
Typ / Model GASKET
JUNTA ANULAR
OSE 10-0136-067_ 6 80 0015-0003-080 1 SCHMIEROEL
LUBRICATING OIL
ACEITE LUBRICANTE
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine s/n 90 0021-3345-900 1 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
DRIVE BELT
9605-836 CORREA DE TRANSMISIÓN
95 0015-0082-000 1 SCHMIERFETT
LUBRICATING GREASE
Trommel-Nr. / Bowl s/n GRASA LUBRICANTE
9605-836
Ausgabe / Edition
18.03.2021
Seite/Page
INSTRUCTION MANUAL INSIDE BEARING GEAR PUMP
SBG-C
■SBG TYPE INSIDE BEARING GEAR PUMP
Contents
Foreword
Safety Instructions ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 1
Guarantee・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 2
1. Outline of Construction ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 3
2. Transport ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 3
3. Prevention of Vibration ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 3
4. Installation ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 3
5. Piping ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 3
6. Connection ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 3
7. Operation ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 5
8. Maintenance ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 6
9. Inspection ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 7
10. Troubles and Remedies ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 9
11. Adjusting Procedure for Relief Valve ・・・・・・・・・ 10
12. Clearance ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 11
13. Assembly Drawings ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 12
Foreword
This manual has been prepared for "SBG Type Inside Bearing Gear Pump"
and describes the essential items for handling and maintenance of the pump.
The service life of the pump depends on correct handling and maintenance.
It is imperative, therefore, that the instructions given in this manual should
be closely followed.
If you have any questions regarding this manual, please consult our Head
Office or each branch.
Safety Instructions
CAUTIONS FOR YOUR SAFETY WARNING
Before using this pump, read the TRANSPORTATION and INSTALLATION :
INSTRUCTION MANUAL(S). Follow WARNING TRANSPORTATION work must be carried by
LABEL(S), INSTRUCTION(S) and CAUTION only a LICENSED or AUTHORIZED PERSON(S)
PLATE(S) in order to use it correctly. It is also who has enough knowledge on his or her
highly recommended to ALWAYS KEEP the profession : special attention and caution are
INSTRUCTION MANUAL (S) at the SAME required when fitting a HANGING WIRE in
PLACE for easy access. relation to its weight and center of gravity.
TRANSPORTATION, INSTALLATION, PIPING, (DROPPING or FALLING → DEATH or
WIRING, OPERATION, INSPECTION and SERIOUS INJURY)
MAINTENANCE WORK must be done by ONLY
a LICENSED and / or AUTHORIZED OPERATION and MANIPULATION :
PERSON(S) who has enough knowledge on NEVER ALLOW an UNAUTHORIZED PERSON
health and safety rules and regulations as well to operate the pump. DO NOT TOUCH or
as on his or her profession. contact to ROTATING parts or portion(s).
In any respect, we will NOT GUARANTEE any (ROTATING → ROLLED IN, BIT, PINCHED and
DEATH, INJURIES, DAMAGES AND LOSSES SPILLED (contacted things))
which are result in modification without our
written authorization or using and assembling CAUTION
unauthorized parts. When DISPOSING a pump, OPERATION and MANIPULATION :
any accessories, used parts and oil, follow the DO NOT TOUCH or contact to SEALING part or
safety management standards, environmental HOT parts while the pump is IN OPERATION.
laws, etc. of the country and its local governments. (HOT → BURNED and INJURED)
WARNING LABEL(S) and SIGN in the
instruction manual(s) are classified into INSPECTION and MAINTENANCE :
WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE as When OVERHAULING the pump, carefully
described below. handle the HEAVY weighted parts ; especially,
WARNING fitting a HANGING WIRE.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (DROPPING or FALLING → INJURY)
which, if not avoided, could result in death or Before STARTING a MAINTENANCE work,
serious injury. clearly SIGN IN MAINTENANCE WORK and
CAUTION SHUT DOWN ELECTRIC SUPPLY.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation (ELECTRIC SHOCK → DEATH UNINTENDED
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or ROTATION → ROLLED IN, BIT and PINCHED)
moderate injury, or serious consequences
depending on circumstances. NOTICE
NOTICE OPERATION and MANIPULATION :
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation Without a specific purpose, do not manipulate
which, if not avoided, may result in damaging or the valves and cocks attached to or supplied for
defecting a product. It will be only used for the pump.
protecting the property, but not for personal (WRONG MANIPULATION → DAMAGING or
safety. Footnote : ANSI Z 535 DEFECTING the pump)
1
GUARANTEE
(1)Time and scope of guarantee
(2) Exemption of liabilities for consequential loss and
The guarantee period shall be 1 year after
damage
installation or 18 months from dispatching date
Any loss of chance, damage resulted on other
from the factory, whichever comes earlier.
goods, services and operations in consequence of
In the case of an individual contract, however,
failures of any product supplied by us, whether it
its guarantee period and scope will prevail.
is within the guarantee time period or not, shall be
Should any trouble occurs due to our design or
exempt from the scope of guarantee under this
workmanship of the pump during the guarantee
clause.
period, a remedy will be taken by supplying
replacement parts to the frontier of respective
(3) Maintenance Duration
countries and/ or repair and on an original scope
The durations of periodic inspections, included
of supply, free of charge. The guarantee period
in this manual, are of a general scope.
will be extended for the time required to stop the
Depending on the characteristics or environ-
pump for such repair.
ments of the liquid handled, however, they may
The following troubles, however, will be exempt
need to be shortened even if daily check is
from the guarantee under this clause, even if such
carried out correctly.
troubles occur within the guarantee time period:
a. failures resulting from corrosion, adhesion or
abrasion due to the properties of gases or
dust to be inhaled;
b. failures resulting from force majeure,
including typhoon, earthquake, fire or etc.;
c. failures due to special atmospheres, such as
high temperature, salt damage or etc.;
d. failures attributable to disassembling,
modifications or repairs done other than us
or our designated contractors;
e. failures due to any service conditions not
specified in this Instruction Manual and
Specification Of Supply by us;
f. failures from lack of daily maintenance as
specified in this Instruction Manual.
2
1. Outline of Construction 5. Piping
This Gear Pump is constructed of one set of In installing piping, pay attention to the
gears, a shaft supported by the bearing metals, following : pump must be set as close to the oil
casing, side cover, safety valve, etc. setting tank as possible, and suction head must
This Gear Pump is of the positive displacement be as low as possible.
type. It picks up oil between each of the gear Suction pipe must be as short as possible, and
teeth on the suction side and by the action of the bends of suction pipe and other fittings kept to a
gears turning, continuously carries the oil along minimum.
inside of the casing around to the discharge side. a. Strainer must be provided on the suction pipe
Bearings are inside of the packing and are to protect pump.
lubricated by the oil handled. b. Suction pipe must be free from air or air
After lubricating the bearings, lubricating oil invasion.
returns to the suction side through the oil way c. Valves on the suction side must not allow air
provided in side cover. invasion through their glands.
A relief valve is fitted on the side case to protect d. Flange connection to the suction and the
the pump, motor, and piping line from an discharge nozzles should be placed correctly
abnormal increase in the discharge pressure. in order to avoid disturbance of pump
alignment when flange bolts are unduly
2. Transport tightened or when piping is vibrating.
When transporting the pump, it is necessary to e. Overall packing must be used as flange
proceed as follows : packing, the installation bolts have to tight
a. When lifting, be careful to use cables which evenly.
will safely bear the weight of the unit lifted f. Precaution must be taken so that thermal
and attach them properly. stress or the weight of piping and valves may
b. Be careful to avoid damage to fittings such as not abnormally affect the pump.
piping, valves, cocks, gauges, etc. g. Interior of piping must be as clean as possible.
i. In performing a pressure or airtight test for the
3. Prevention of Vibration pipe lines, care should be taken so that
In order to minimize the vibration of pump and pressure will not be applied to the pump.
piping, Pay close attention to the reinforcement Also, use special care in seal leakage or
of the pump foundation and piping supports. break , because of oil seal is used for shaft
sealing.
4. Installation
For installation, give considerations to the 6. Connection
following : 6.1 Pump/Electric Motor Alignment
a. The base for pump should be rigid and its Procedures
mounting surface must have the same plane. Upon completion of installation, check
b. Allow ample space for operation and alignment. Care must be taken so that
misalignment will not occur after completion of
maintenance.
connection with piping.
c. Locate the pump after carefully considering
Alignment has been carefully made at the
suction pipe losses and suction head.
shipment from the factory. Despite this,
however, if alignment has to be carried out,
loosen the suction and discharge flange bolts
and foundation bolts for realignment.
3
6.2 Pump/Electric Motor Alignment
Check Procedures
a. For couplings, check alignment as per the
procedures shown in Fig.1.
b. Couplings eccentricity and axial
displacement should be as per.
c. Make sure that appropriate clearance is
kept between couplings.
When fitting the coupling on the shaft,
make sure that coupling side face is flush
with shaft end face so that appropriate Fig.1
clearance is secured.
d. For electric motors, check the direction of Check alignment by straight edge at two(2) points,
revolution. 90°apart, on the coupling periphery.
e. Turn the coupling and motor by hand to The below table is maximum value so that please
ensure their smooth movement. use the pump that the value of misalignment is less
f. Coupling ends and side faces should be than them. The life time of coupling bush is largely
free from rust or damage. effected by the precision of alignment.
Table-1
■Maximum Permissible Value of misalignment.
Coupling Size AL-075 AL-095 AL-100 AL-110 ALS-80 ALS-95
Eccentricity (mm) ε 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.28 0.32
Axial Displacement 54.4 61 88 110 114 126
(mm) S ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.7 ±0.7 -0.9～+1.8 -0.5～+2.0
4
7. Operation 7.2 Operation
Operation after installation or reassembly must be a. Check if there exist no irregularities such as noise,
carried out in the following order. vibration or start-up current, and then start the
motor.
7.1 Precaution before Operation b. When pump speed have risen and oil has been
a. Check to make sure the bolts and the nuts on discharged from air vent, close air vent.
each joint are not loosened. The pump is now in operation.
b. Clean and check the strainer. c. Since gears, shafts, bearings and sliding
c. Fully open the valves on both the suction and surfaces of oil seal are lubricated by the
the discharge sides. oil handled, dry operation should be absolutely
d. Ensure that the cocks or the valves of gauges, avoided.
etc. are opened. d. When the air temperature is cold, use care about
e. Turn the pump shaft by hand to see that it turns overload of the motor, noise or vibration of the
smoothly. pump due to increase in the oil viscosity.
f. Check that the rotating direction of pump is the
same as the direction of the arrow on the plate 7.3 Stopping
provided on the side cover. When motor has stopped, close the valve on both
g. Open the vent at the discharge side before the suction and the discharge sides.
starting the pump.
・From the vent there will be the air discharged,
and thereafter oil will come out.
If no oil will come out,then the air can be
assumedly inhaled at the suction side, or the
pump is in position not to be able to function
because of too high resistance in suction.
Stop the pump and check the piping system.
h. If there is a long time after previous operation,
the rotating parts inside the pump is considered
to become dry. In such a case, turn the coupling
by hand, and supply oil to the pump through the
top of casing.
i. If the temperature difference between the oil being
supplied and the pump casing is more than
approx. 40℃, be sure to warm the pump casing
before starting.
・Supply of oil in high temperature to the pump
suddenly could result in misalignment of the
center or seizing due to thermal distortion.
So, it is important that the pump be made warm
to the temperature nearly as high as the oil
being supplied.
※It is advised that the pump be operated at a low
speed by utilizing pressurized oil in the tank head
or the warming pump so as to make its
temperature to the same level as the oil.
5
8. Maintenance
8.2 Cautions during Standstill
8.1 Cautions during Operation
a. Keep the valves on the suction and discharge
a. Be careful to operate as nearly as practical
side closed. For a pump with automatic starting
within the limits of design.
and stopping, it is desirable to provide a foot
b. Monitor the pump for vibration and noise,
valve or a non-return valve on the suction line.
pressure gauge and ammeter. If an abnormal
If oil is retained in the piping, fully open the
condition is observed, stop the pump
valves on the suction and discharge side.
immediately.
b. When the pump is shut down over a long period,
c. Check an increase in the bearing temperature. If
the pump must be rotated by hand or motor
it is too hot by touching with fingers, determine
periodically (once a week or so.)
the temperature by using temperature gage.
c. If there is a stand-by pump, the pump must be
・Permissible temperature of bearing : room
rotated by hand or motor periodically (once a
temperature plus 40℃, or liquid temperature plus
week or so.)
20℃ which is less than higher temperature, and
less than 80℃ in case of normal operation.
d. Never throttle the valves on both the suction and
discharge side. Adjust the flow by means of the
bypass circuit on the discharge side.
e. Do not operate the pump with the discharge
valve being shut.
・It will make the oil temperature inside the pump
high, and could cause seizing.
f. Make sure the standby pump is not reversing
due to the leakage from its non-return valve.
g. For the self-start and stop pump, keep watching
the pressure or the frequency of start and stop.
If it operates too often, investigate the causes
and then eliminate them.
h. For automatic operation under central control
system, monitor the indication of gauge on the
control panel board.
i. Check if the strainer is blocked, and when the
suction resistance is increased, clean the
strainer.
6
9. Inspection
9.1 Periodic Inspection
Except in the case of abnormal conditions, it is desirable to carry out inspection periodically as follows :
since conditions vary according to the method of mounting, place of installation, liquid handled, etc,
the operator should make his plan of inspection accordingly.
Period
Every 3 Every 12 Every 4
Item Action to be taken
months months or years or
8000Hrs. 20000Hrs.
Check sliding surfaces for conditions
of contact and flaw.
Bearing metal
Measure inside diameter and follow ○
the procedures shown in Table 2.
Oil seal
Check amount of leakage. ○
Replace with new ones. ○
Check conditions of contact, flaw in
sliding faces, and bend of shaft.
Shaft
Measure outside diameter and follow ○
the procedures shown in Table 2.
Check surface flaw and condition of
“O” ring
deterioration. ○
Replace it if deformed.
Replace with new ones. ○
Throttle discharge valve and see that
Relief valve the relief valve operates, ○
when discharge pressure has risen.
Check tooth surfaces,
outside diameter, side face and
Gear connection with shaft. ○
Measure width and follow the
procedures shown in Table 2.
Check condition of wear and
Coupling bush renew them if abnormal points ○
are found.
Foundation Check for loosening of foundation
Bolts bolts. ○
Check the alignment between
Coupling
pump and motor, refer to 6 ○
Note : 1) The hours quoted refer to the operating hours.
7
9.2 Overhaul 9.4 Assembly
At overhaul, pay attention to the following : Carry out assembly by reversing the order of
a. Refer to the assembly drawing in order to disassembly and taking attention as follows.
understand the construction of the pump. a. Remove dust and stain from each part by
Perform overhaul in the correct sequence. washing it thoroughly with kerosene oil.
b. When separating fit and flange faces, use Repair any parts on which a flaw is found.
wooden(resin) hammers, and never apply force b. When fitting and combining parts with match
with chisels or drivers. marks, be sure to follow them.
c. When removing the rotating element, take care c. Sliding surfaces of bearing metals and tooth
to avoid creating flaws on sliding faces and faces should be sufficiently lubricated by clean
machined surfaces. In particular, never damage oil.
the mechanical seal mating faces. d. When installing side case, be sure that the
d. Handle long, slender parts such as shaft course of the oil way to bearings for service and
carefully to avoid bending them. return oil is correct in regard to direction of
e. Handle the parts carefully, and arrange them on suction and discharge.
sheets of paper or cloth to keep them in order. e. Install the oil seal carefully.
f. At overhauling, put suitable match marks (as f. Pay attention that bolts, etc. are tightened
many as possible) to avoid mistakes when correctly.
reassembling. g. Check alignment as mentioned in para. 6.
h. Turn the shaft by hand to see that it turns
9.3 Inspection smoothly.
At inspection, measure each part of sliding faces
and follow the procedures shown in Table 2.
8
10. Troubles and Remedies
When troubles have occurred, their causes should be traced and necessary remedies should be carried
out.
The following table describes troubles, their causes, and remedies.
Troubles Causes Remedies
Pump does not start. Motor troubles Repair motor
Pump seizes. Repair pump
No power source. Check electric system
Wiring is broken, or relay etc. are broken. Repair
Foreign matter in the pump. Overhaul and remove foreign matter.
Pump starts, but Oil is not poured into the pump sufficiently. Pour oil once more.
does not discharge oil. Valves are not open. Open valves
Air is not pushed out sufficiently. Open air vent plug (or cock)
Valves will not open. Repair valves.
Pump is sucking air. Check suction system, O-ring and oil seal.
Suction pipe or strainer is clogged. Clean suction pipe or strainer.
Motor rotating direction is wrong. Change wiring.
Pump start, but Pump is sucking air. Check suction system, O-ring and oil seal.
specified capacity Pump speed is too low. Correct electric source.
and pressure are not Relief valve is open. Adjust setting of relief valve (refer to 11)
reached. Suction pipe or strainer is clogged. Clean suction pipe or strainer.
Liquid viscosity is too low. Check the specification.
Gear shaft is worn. Replace gear or shaft with a new one.
Suction pressure is too high. Check specification.
Gauges are wrong. Replace gauges with new ones.
Pump starts and Air pockets exist in suction line. Correct piping.
discharges oil, but Air is sucked into suction system. Check suction system.
soon ceases to Pump is sucking air through stuffing box. Check sealing pipe.
discharge oil. Check packing and oil seal.
Pump starts, but Abnormal metal contact exists in the rotating Check clearance.
motor gets parts.
overloaded. Connection is wrong. Check alignment.
Pump shaft is bent. Replace shaft.
Motor trouble. Repair motor.
Liquid viscosity is too high. Set viscosity to specifications.
Discharge pressure is too high. Set pressure to specifications.
Pump bearings are incorrect. Replace pump bearings.
Pump starts, but Lubrication is not sufficient. Check course of oil way to bearings for
bearings get service and return oil.
overheated. Connection is wrong. Check alignment.
Bearings are wrong. Replace bearings.
Pump shaft is bent. Replace shaft.
Load thrust has increased. Check whether sides of bearings are worn
excessively or suction pressure is too
high.
If abnormal condition is observed, suction
pressure must be set to specification.
Pump starts, but Connection is wrong. Check alignment.
vibration or abnormal Pump shaft is bent. Replace shaft.
noise occurs. Installation is wrong. Correct installation.
Foundation is weak. Reinforce foundation.
Other vibration is transmitted. Reinforce piping.
Cavitation exists. Set suction pressure and viscosity to the
design specifications.
Relief valve is chattering. Repair relief valve.
Foreign matter exists in the pump. Overhaul and remove foreign matter.
Tooth contact is wrong. Repair or replace gear.
9
11. Adjusting Procedure for Relief Valve
We deliver the pumps with customers-required relief
valve working pressures adjusted. Therefore, where
the relief valve is working, the discharge pressure is
assumed to be higher than the scheduled pressure,
and so first take measures to eliminate the cause.
At first, open the discharge and suction valves fully and

close the relief valve adjust screw to its full extent,
and then close the discharge valve little by little to adjust
the discharge pressure to its set pressure. (In the shop
operation test, the suction valve should be closed little
by little so as to provide an suction loss at planned
conditions, where the inlet pressure is 0.05MPa or less).
Next, loosen the adjust screw little by little, and

tighten the lock nut when the discharge or suction
pressure will scarcely move into the non-load side.
After the discharge pressure has been set, open the

discharge and suction valves fully to proceed operation.
If the above mentioned could not troubleshoot, the

cause can be planning conditions for pump, in which
case, the situation should be referred to the sales
agent or our company, upon investigation of the following.
a. Type, manufacturing number, and service of the pump in use.
b. Characteristics of the fluid to be pumped
(type, viscosity, temperature, etc.)
c. Conditions of piping
(suction pressure, location of strainers, mesh sizes, number of bends, etc.)
10
12. Clearance
Table-2 Clearance
A （mm） B （mm）
Type Standard clearance Maximum clearance of
between side face
shaft and bearing
SBG-0.3 0.04～0.12 0.07
SBG-0.5 0.04～0.12 0.08
SBG-1 0.04～0.12 0.08
SBG-1.5 0.04～0.12 0.08
SBG-2 0.04～0.12 0.1
SBG-2.5 0.04～0.12 0.1
SBG-3 0.04～0.12 0.1
SBG-4 0.04～0.12 0.1
SBG-5 0.04～0.12 0.1
SBG-6 0.05～0.15 0.1
SBG-7.5 0.05～0.15 0.12
SBG-10 0.05～0.15 0.12
SBG-12 0.05～0.16 0.12
SBG-15 0.05～0.16 0.12
SBG-20 0.07～0.18 0.12
SBG-25 0.07～0.18 0.12
SBG-30 0.07～0.18 0.15
※Bearing metals are composite material.

It consists of a steel backing to which is bonded a porous sinter bronze and PTFE coating.
If coating wears and steel backing is appeared , replace bearing metals.
Application
The numerical value quoted is the basic design value.
If practical conditions (viscosity, pressure and capacity) differ from design conditions,
the numerical value quoted should not be applied.
11
13. Assembly Drawings
13.1 Pump structural drawing（SBG-0.3C～15C）
12
13.2 Pump structural drawing（SBG-20C～30C）
13
BPHE Instruction Manual
--BAODE HEAT EXCHANGER CO., LTD
www.baode-hex.com
Preface ...............................................................................................................................2
Description .........................................................................................................................3
Function .........................................................................................................................3
Name plates .................................................................................................................4
Installation ..........................................................................................................................5
Mounting .......................................................................................................................5
Installation in general applications ..................................................................... 10
Installation as evaporator or condenser ........................................................... 11
Leaking test................................................................................................................. 12
Insulation ..................................................................................................................... 12
Operation ......................................................................................................................... 13
Start-up ........................................................................................................................ 13
During operation ...................................................................................................... 14
Shut-down .................................................................................................................. 17
Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 18
Warranty Claim ............................................................................................................. 19
BAODE
www.baode-hex.com
Tel: +86 510 86020253
Dax: +86 510 86020233
Email: info@baode-hex.com
© BAODE
No copy without BAODE authorization
1
PREFACE
This manual provides information needed to install, operate and carry out
the maintenance of the BPHE
The individuals who will operate this BPHE have to study the instructions
in this manual and have knowledge of the process. The knowledge
includes media, pressures, the temperatures in the BPHE as well as
specific precautions required for the process.
The person who will install or maintain the BPHE must have the
knowledge and authorization according to the local regulations. This
includes performance work such as piping, welding and maintenance.
General information
The BPHE has been designed to meet the requirement for heat transfer
applications such as refrigeration, heating, and cooling. The plate heat
exchanger must be used and maintained in accordance with the
instructions in this manual. Faulty handling of the plate heat
exchanger may result in serious with injuries and/or property damage.
BAODE will not accept responsibility for any damage or injury caused
as a result of not following the instructions in this manual.
The plate heat exchanger must be used in accordance with the
specified configuration of material, media, temperatures and pressure
for the specific plate heat exchangers.
For any information not described in this manual, please contact BAODE
for advice.
2
BPHE CONSTRUCTION
The BPHE is in principle built up by a plate package of corrugated channel
plates between front and end plate packages. The connections can be
customized to meet specific need and application requirements. During the
vacuum-brazing process, a brazed joint is formed at every contact point
between two plates. The design creates a heat exchanger that consists of two
separate circuits.。
Connections(1）、Front cover plate(2) 、Middle flow plate(3) 、End cover
plate(4）、Media 1 (5) 、Media 2 (6)
MATERIAL
Baode BPHE have 304 and 316 stainless steel. Please refer to the following
chloride concentration table to select the appropriate material.
Chloride Max Temperature
Concentration 60℃ 80℃ 120℃ 130℃
10 ppm SS304 SS304 SS304 SS316
25 ppm SS304 SS304 SS316 SS316
50 ppm SS304 SS316 SS316 NO
80 ppm SS316 SS316 SS316 NO
150 ppm SS316 SS316 NO NO
300 ppm SS316 NO NO NO
>300 ppm NO NO NO NO
*Note：SS= Stainless steel grade, NO = not suitable
3
NAME PLATE
1. Product model
2. Production Date
3. Series No
4. Design temperature: Min and Max temperature for the BPHE
5. Design pressure: The Max working pressure.
6. Testing pressure: 1.5 times pressure of Design pressure
7. Plates group：
8. Flow direction：：D1->D2 means D1 in，D2 out
9. Product approval: for example: UL, CE
10. Connections Mark: the “-->” direct the connection.
Warning!
The mechanical design pressures and temperatures
are marked on the name plate. These must not be
exceeded.
4
MOUNTING
Caution!
Please wear Protective gloves when handling the plate heat
exchanger to avoid hand injuries caused by sharp edges.。
The BPHEs are not suitable for the applications which have pulsation or
excessive cycling pressure or temperature changes, and it is very important
to avoid vibrations are transferred to the heat exchanger. Install vibration
absorbers in such cases. For large connection diameters, an expanding
device in the pipeline is advised.
A rubber mounting strip should be used as a buffer between the BPHE and
the mounting clamp.
In single-phase applications, e.g. water-to-water or water-to-oil, the
mounting direction has little or no effect on the performance of the heat
exchanger, but in two-phase applications, the orientation of the heat
exchanger becomes very important. In two-phase applications, BAODE's
BPHEs should be mounted vertically.
Several mounting suggestions for BPHEs are shown below
1) Suspended directly in the pipework. (small models )
2) Supported from the bottom
3) Sheet metal bracket (rubber insert between bracket and BPHE)
4) Equipped with mounting stud bolts on the front or end plate
5) Support legs are available for big BPHEs
Note!
Regardless of the mounting method minimize the pipe loads
at installation.
5
* Maximum tightening torques for the mounting bolts
Torque
Bolt Dimension
Nm lbf*ft
M5 2.3 1.7
M6 3.8 2.8
M8 9.5 7
M10 19 14
M12 33 24.3
6
CONNECTION TYPES
 Threaded connections –
Threaded connections can be female or male of standards such as
ISO-G, NPT and ISO 7/1. Use a torque wrench when connecting the
pipe and observe the specified limits below
Shear Force, Tension Bending

Thread Torque, Mt
Fs Force, Ft Moment, Mb
size
(KN) (kp) (KN) (kp) (Nm) (kpm) (Nm) (kpm)
1/2‘’ 3.5 357 2.5 255 20 2 35 3.5
3/4‘’ 12 1224 205 255 20 2 115 11.5
1‘’ 11.2 1142 4 408 45 4.5 155 16
1.25‘’ 14.5 1479 6.5 663 87.5 9 265 27
1.5‘’ 16.5 1683 9.5 969 155 16 350 35.5
2‘’ 21.5 2193 13.5 1377 255 26 600 61
2.5‘’ 44.5 4538 18 1836 390 40 1450 148
4‘’ 73 7444 41 4181 1350 138.5 4050 413.5
 Soldering Connections
All BPHEs are vacuum-brazed with either a pure copper filler or a nickel-
based filler. Under normal soldering conditions (no vacuum), the temperature
should not exceed 800 °C. Too much heat could change the material
structure resulting in internal or external leakage at the connection. Because
of this we recommend that all soldering is made with silver solder containing
7
min. 45% silver. This type of solder has a relatively low soldering temperature
and high moistening and fluidity properties. Soldering flux is used in order to
remove oxides from the metal surface, and thereby its property makes the
flux potentially very aggressive. Consequently, it is very important to use the
correct amount of flux. Too much might lead to severe corrosion, so no flux
should be allowed to enter the BPHE.
Soldering Procedure
Degrease and polish the surfaces. Apply flux. Insert the copper tube into the
connection, hold in place and braze with min. 45% silver solder at max.
650ºC. Do not direct the flame at the BPHE. Use a wet rag to avoid
overheating the BPHE. Protect the BPHE's interior from oxidation with N2
gas.
Warning!
Excessive heating can lead to fusion of the copper and thus to
the destruction of the heat exchanger!
 Welding connection
Protect the unit from excessive heating by using a wet cloth around the
connection. Use TIG or MIG/MAG welding. When using electrical welding
circuits, connect the ground terminal to the joining tube, not to the back of
the plate package. Internal oxidation can be reduced by a small nitrogen flow
through the unit.
Note!
Protect the heat exchanger from overheating by wrapping a
piece of wet cloth around the connection while soldering or
8
welding. Excessive heating could melt the internal soldering
metal inside the heat exchanger.
Filter (Strainer)
If any of the media contains particles larger than 1 mm (0.04 inch), we
recommend that a filter with a size of 16-20 mesh (number of openings per
inch) is installed before the exchanger. The particles could otherwise block
the channels, causing bad performance, increased pressure drop and risk of
freezing.
9
INSTALLATION
 Installation in general purpose
Note!
Make sure all foreign objects have been flushed out of the
system before connecting any piping.
Normally, the circuit with the highest temperature
and/or pressure should be connected on the left side
of the heat exchanger. This is because the right-hand
side of the heat exchanger contains one channel
more than the left-hand side, and the hot medium is
thus surrounded by the cold medium to prevent heat
loss. For example, in a typical water to- water
application, the two fluids are connected in a
counter-current flow, i.e. the hot water inlet in connection D4, outlet
D3, cold water inlet D2, outlet D1.
 Evaporator and Condenser Installation
Note！
In phase changing applications, the heat exchanger
must be installed vertically
Single Circuit:: A Evaporator (refrigerant in D3 and out D4) ; B Condenser.
(refrigerant in D4 and out D3)
10
The heat exchanger could be of single or dual circuit type. Flow
direction of a single circuit heat exchanger is normally parallel, while
on dual circuit heat exchanger could be diagonal or parallel. Make
sure that the heat exchanger is installed correctly according to the
current flow direction for the heat exchanger. For detailed information
about flow direction see the name plate.
Connections can be placed in the front or rear of the heat exchanger.
Typical installation of a dual circuit heat exchanger as an evaporator:
A B
Dual circuit: A is diagonal flow; B is parallel flow.
Water/Brine inlet and outlet are typically positioned on the back side.
Freezing Protection
1) Use a filter < 1 mm, 16 mesh
2) Use an antifreeze when the evaporation temperature is
close to liquid-side freezing.
3) Use a freeze protection thermostat and flow switch to
guarantee a constant water flow before, during and after
compressor operation.
4) Avoid” pump-down” function.
5) When starting up a system, wait a moment before starting
the condenser (or have reduced flow through it).
11
 Condenser Installation
The refrigerant (gas) should be connected to the upper left connection,
D4, and the condensate to the lower left connection, D3. The water/brine
circuit inlet should be connected to the lower right connection, D2, and the
outlet to the upper right connection, D1.
LEAKING TEST
Leakage test before placing the plate heat exchanger in operation.
INSULATIONS
If the heat exchanger will be operated at very hot or very cold temperature,
take protective actions, such as insulation, to avoid injuries.
 Insulation for Refrigerant Applications
BPHE insulation is recommended for evaporators, condensers or district
heating applications, etc. For refrigeration, use extruded insulation sheets,
 Insulation for Heating Applications
For heating applications, various types of insulation boxes can be used. The
working temperature range defines which insulation is recommended.
BAODE offer EPP insulation for certain models.
12
RUNNING HEAT EXCHANGER
 Start Up
Note!
Adjustments of flow rates should be made slowly in order to
avoid the risk of water hammer. Water hammer is a short-
lasting pressure peak that can appear during start-up or shut-
down of a system, which causing liquids to travel along a pipe
as a wave at the speed of sound. This can cause considerable
damage to the equipment
1) Check that the Inlet valves (2, 4) for both fluids should be closed, if
there are outlet valves (1, 3), make sure that they are fully opened.
2) Start the pump.
3) Open the inlet valve (2) slowly
4) Repeat steps 1–3 for the second media.
13
 During operation
Note!
Adjustments of flow rates should be made slowly in order to
protect the system against sudden and extreme variations of
temperature and pressure.
 Protection against connection loads
Make sure that the heat exchanger is fastened to avoid or minimize
connection loads during operation.
 Protection against freezing
Bear in mind the risk of freezing at low temperatures. Plate heat exchangers
that are not in operation should be emptied and blown dry whenever there is
a risk of freezing.
Note!
To avoid damage due to freezing, the medium used must
include an anti-freeze agent when operating conditions are
below 5 °C (41 °F) and/or when the
evaporating temperature is below 1 °C (34 °F)
 Protection against blocking
Use a filter as protection against the possible occurrence of foreign particles.
If you have any doubt concerning the maximum particle size, please consult
your BAODE.
 Protection against thermal or/and pressure fatigue
Sudden temperature and pressure changes could cause fatigue damage to
the heat exchanger. Therefore, the following must be taken into consideration
14
to ensure that the heat exchanger operates without fluctuating
pressures/temperatures.
Warning!
The plate heat exchanger is not intended for cyclic processes,
please contact an BAODE Representative for advice.
 Locate the temperature sensor as close as possible to the
outlet from the heat exchanger.
 Choose valves and regulation equipment which give stable
temperatures/pressures for the heat exchanger.
 To avoid water hammer, quick-closing valves must not be
used, e.g. on/off valves.
 Make the amplitude and frequency of the pressure variation
are as low as possible. In automated installations, stopping and
starting of the pumps and actuation of valves must be programmed.
 Protection against corrosion
Caution!
 Do not use the heat exchanger for de-ionized water
which can chemically affect the copper brazing
material.
 Do not install BPHE with galvanized pipes that could
chemically or electrochemically affect or be affected
by the stainless plates and the copper brazing
material.
 Avoid ammonia that could be corrosive the BPHE
material.
15
Recommended limits for Chloride ions, Cl¯at pH 7.5 1
Temperature SS304 SS316
25 °C ≤100 ppm ≤1000 ppm
65 °C ≤50 ppm ≤200 ppm
80 °C ≤20 ppm ≤100 ppm
Other Element （2-50℃）：
Cl2 ≤1.0ppm
SO42- ≤70ppm
NH3 ≤2ppm
Hardness 4.0~8.5°dH
H2S ≤0.05ppm
H2 ≤0.5ppm
HCO3- ≤70ppm
CO2 ≤5ppm
16
 Shut-down
1) Slowly reduce the flow rate in order to avoid water
hammer.
2) When the valve is closed, stop the pump.
3) Repeat steps 1–2 for the other medium/media.
4) If the plate heat exchanger is shut down for a long period,
it should be drained. Also drain the heat exchanger if the
process is shut down and the ambient temperature is below
the freezing temperature of the media. Depending on the
media processed, rinse and dry the heat exchanger and its
connections.
17
MAINTENANCE
Turbulence in BPHEs there is a self-cleaning effect in the channels. However,
in some applications the fouling tendency can be very high, e.g. when using
extremely hard water at high temperatures. In such cases it is always possible
to clean the exchanger by circulating a cleaning liquid (CIP Cleaning In
Place). Use a tank with weak acid, 5% phosphoric acid or, if the BPHE is
frequently cleaned, 5% oxalic acid. Pump the cleaning liquid through the
BPHE.
For optimum cleaning, the cleaning solution flow rate should be a minimum
of 1.5 times the normal flow rate, preferably in a back-flush mode. After use,
do not forget to rinse the heat exchanger carefully with clean water. A
solution of 1-2% sodium hydroxide (NaOH) or sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO )
before the last rinse ensures that all acid is neutralized.
Type of cleaning:
• Acidic cleaning removes inorganic deposits such as limestone.
• Alkaline cleaning removes organic deposits. During the process it is
important to control the pH value and the recommended pH value is 7.5 -
10. Higher pH values increase risk of the copper oxidizing.
• Neutralization of cleaning liquids before draining and flushing the unit
with potable water.
NOTE！
Plate Sheet material Stainless steel can corrode. Chloride
ions are hazardous. Avoid cooling brines containing
chloride salts as NaCI and, most harmful, CaCI2.
Warning!
Use proper protective equipment, such as safety boots, safety
gloves and eye protection, when using cleaning agents.
18
WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER
Storage
BPHEs are to be stored dry. The temperature should not be below 17°C and
not over 50°C. keep the heat exchanger in a protective environment away
from corrosive substances and dust which may affects its performance.
Keep the plastic plugs or caps for the connections in place during storage.
Warranty
BAODE offers a 12-month warranty from the date of installation, but in no
case longer than 15 months from the date of delivery. The warranty covers
only manufacturing and material defects.
Disclaim
BPHE performance is based on installation, maintenance and operating
conditions done in conformance with this manual. BAODE cannot assume
any liability for BPHEs that do not meet these criteria.
19
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
Installation and Maintenance Manual
Bezeichnung Druckgesteuertes 3/2-Wege-Ventil

Pressure controlled 3/2-way valve
No. 9085-9000-000
Edition 0312
GEA Mechanical Equipment / GEA Westfalia Separator Group

2 9085-9000-000 / 0312
ORIGINALBETRIEBSANLEITUNG
Inhaltliche Änderungen vorbehalten!
Für Anmerkungen und Vorschläge zur Verbesserung der Dokumentation sind

die Verfasser stets dankbar. Diese können gerichtet werden an:

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde
Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_

The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be addressed to:

Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 3
• Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung
sorgfältig durch.
• Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt wer-
den.
• Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
________________________________________
• Before installing and maintaining your valve, please read this manual carefully.
• Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
• Please pay attention to the safety advices!
®
Westfalia Separator
4 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Anforderungen an Ersatzteile
• Nur Original-Ersatzteile von GEA Westfalia

Separator verwenden. Die Original-
Ersatzteile sind im Ersatzteilkatalog aufge-
führt.
Der Einsatz von nichtoriginalen Teilen führt zu:
– Sicherheitsrisiken,
– verringerter Haltbarkeit dieser Teile,
– reduzierter Verfügbarkeit des Separators,
Fig. 1
– erhöhtem Servicebedarf.
Realisiert sich ein Sicherheitsrisiko beim Einsatz
von nichtoriginalen Ersatzteilen, ergeben sich
unter Umständen hierdurch auch strafrechtliche
Folgen für die handelnden Personen. GEA
Westfalia Separator übernimmt in diesen Fällen
keinerlei Haftung oder Gewährleistung.
Demands relating to spare parts

– safety risks,
ranty claims.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 5
Anforderungen an Ersatzteile ............................................................................... 4

Demands relating to spare parts .......................................................................... 4
1 DEUTSCH 7
Zu dieser Anleitung ........................................................ 8

Ziel der Anleitung ................................................................................................. 8
Abkürzungen und Symbole .................................................................................. 8
Leistungsbeschreibung .................................................. 9
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ..................................................................... 9
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ........................................................................ 9
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen .......................................................................... 9
Gerätebeschreibung..................................................... 10
Notbetätigung ..................................................................................................... 11
Ersatzteilsets................................................................ 12
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ................................................ 14
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils ...... 14
Wartung ....................................................................... 15
1. Kolbeneinheit .................................................................................................. 15
2. Obere Spindellagerung .................................................................................. 16
3. Rückschlagventil ............................................................................................ 17
2 ENGLISH 19
This manual ................................................................. 20

Intention of this manual ...................................................................................... 20
Shortcuts and symbols ....................................................................................... 20
Specification of service ................................................ 21

Intended usage ................................................................................................... 21
Storage, transport, disposal ............................................................................... 21
Terms of general application .............................................................................. 21
Device description ........................................................ 22

Emergency operation ......................................................................................... 23
Spare Parts .................................................................. 24

Initial operation and maintenance ................................ 26
Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve ............................................ 26
®
Westfalia Separator
6 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Maintenance ................................................................ 27
1. Piston unit ....................................................................................................... 27
2. Upper spindle bearing .................................................................................... 28
3. Check valve .................................................................................................... 29
Faxformular - Fax Form ............................................. 32
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 7
1 DEUTSCH
Zu dieser Anleitung ........................................................ 8

Ziel der Anleitung ................................................................................................. 8
Abkürzungen und Symbole .................................................................................. 8
Leistungsbeschreibung .................................................. 9
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ..................................................................... 9
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ........................................................................ 9
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen .......................................................................... 9
Gerätebeschreibung..................................................... 10
Notbetätigung ..................................................................................................... 11
Ersatzteilsets................................................................ 12
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ................................................ 14
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils ...... 14
Wartung ....................................................................... 15
1. Kolbeneinheit .................................................................................................. 15
2. Obere Spindellagerung .................................................................................. 16
3. Rückschlagventil ............................................................................................ 17
®
Westfalia Separator
8 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen, die Armatur fachgerecht zu

installieren und zu warten. Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes
Personal. Es wird vorausgesetzt, dass bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird
und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kun-
denbetreuer.
Abkürzungen und Symbole
Achtung! Bitte Achtung! Heiße

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente
Information beachten
Verletzungs- Hinweis auf

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 9
Leistungsbeschreibung
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung
Die druckgesteuerte 3/2-Wege-Zulaufarmatur ist zum Einsatz im industriellen Be-
reich geeignet. Die Armatur ermöglicht das Steuern gasförmiger und flüssiger Me-
dien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für das eingesetzte Medium und
den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr!
Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in das Ventil kann zu

schweren Verletzungen führen und sollte unbedingt vermieden werden!
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung

Die Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie
Feuchtigkeit oder Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst
kurz vor Montagebeginn zu entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu
schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei
untergebracht werden.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss
nehmen. Bitte informieren Sie uns unverzüglich, wenn die Ware bereits mit be-
schädigter Verpackung bei Ihnen eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmit-
telbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine Prüfung der technischen Pa-
rameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte Mängel sind unverzüglich
nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als abgenommen.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage

nach Erhalt der Ware schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der
Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchge-
spült werden. Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei
der Inbetriebnahme! Diese Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingun-
gen getestet und eingestellt werden. Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert
und getestet werden. Die Endlagen (offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und
ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter oder andere elektrische Geräte
zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung überprüfen!
®
Westfalia Separator
10 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Gerätebeschreibung
1 Einstellschraube d. Drossel
2 Eingang
3 Ausgang (stromlos offen)
4 Ausgang nach Betätigung
5 Zylinder
6a Sicherungskappe
6b Notbetätigung [Druckventil] (SW 19)
7 Befestigungsbohrungen
8 Schalldämpfer
9 Stecker für Magnetventil
10 Magnetventil
11 Notbetätigung [Magnetventil]
12 Lufteinlass
13 Temperaturfühler PT100
14 Rückschlagventil
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 11
Notbetätigung
Sollte der Versorgungsdruck des Ventils einmal ausfallen, gehen Sie bitte
wie folgt vor:
 Transparente Kappe (6a) am oberen Ende des 3/2-Wege-Ventils ab-

schrauben.
 Sechskantmutter [SW 19] (6b) bis zu deutlich spürbarem Widerstand (ca.
10 mm) einschrauben.
 Ventil ist nun geschaltet. Vergessen Sie nicht, nach der Instandsetzung
der Druckluftversorgung die Notbetätigungsschraube zurück in ihren Ur-
sprung zu versetzen
Sollte die Versorgungsspannung für das Magnetventil (10) einmal ausfallen,

gehen Sie bitte wie folgt vor:
 Mit Schraubendreher die Notbetätigung (11) um 180° drehen , bis das Ven-
til öffnet.
Die Stellung der Notbetätigung ist mit den Buchstaben o = geöffnet (open) und
c = geschlossen (closed) gekennzeichnet. Im Lieferzustand ist die Notbetäti-
gung auf die Position „geschlossen“ eingestellt („c“ steht rechts).
 Für die normale Funktion des Magnetventils muss die Notbetätigung wie-
der zurückgesetzt werden.
 Das Bild „A“ zeigt die geschlossene Stellung, das Bild „B“ die geöffnete
Stellung.
®
Westfalia Separator
12 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Ersatzteilsets
Rückschlagventil (9) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-920
Zylinder (Luft) (3) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-930
Klarsichtkappe mit Dichtung (1) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-940
Pilotventil mit Kabelkopf, Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-600

Skintopverschraubung und
Schalldämpfer mit montierter
Winkelverschraubung1/8 – DN8 und
montierter lösbarer Verschraubung 1/4 - 1/8
mit Drossel (2)
Doppel PT100 (4) Teil-Nr. 0001-1579-400
Spindeleinheit vollständig (6) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-950
Einschraubteil vollständig (5) Teil-Nr. 0018-7621-960
O-Ring - 22x2 - 1 Stk. (7) Teil-Nr. 0007-2412-830
O-Ringe - 12x2 - 3 Stk. (8) Teil-Nr. 0007-1929-830
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 13
1 Klarsichtkappe mit Dichtung

2 Pilotventil mit Kabelkopf
3 Zylinder (Luft)
4 Doppel PT100
5 Einschraubteil vollständig
6 Spindeleinheit vollständig
7 O-Ring 22x2
8 O-Ringe 12x2
9 Rückschlagventil
®
Westfalia Separator
14 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines druckgesteuerten 3/2-Wege-Ventils
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen.
Das Ventilgehäuse mit den Flanschdichtungen vor-

sichtig zwischen die zuvor angebrachten Flansche
schieben.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass die verwendeten Dichtungen für das Durch-
fluss-Medium geeignet ist!
Die Flanschbohrungen zueinander ausrichten und

passende Schrauben oder Stehbolzen in die Bohrun-
gen stecken bzw. einschrauben.
Die Flansche mit passenden Schrauben fest und

kreuzweise befestigen bzw. passende Muttern fest
und kreuzweise auf die Stehbolzen aufschrauben.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 15
Wartung
Eine vorbeugende Wartung oder Reinigung wird in Abhängigkeit von den Be-
triebsbedingungen und bei auffälliger Veränderung von Schaltzeiten oder Schalt-
geräuschen empfohlen.
Je nach Umgebungsbedingungen sind in regelmäßigen Abständen die Magnet-
spulen auf Risse und Schmutzablagerungen und der elektrische Anschluss auf
festen Sitz und sichere Abdichtung zu überprüfen.
Der Betreiber trägt die Verantwortung für die Festsetzung angemessener Prüf-
und Wartungsintervalle in Abhängigkeit von den Einsatzbedingungen der Ventile.
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von geschultem Fachpersonal und mit geeigneten
Werkzeugen durchgeführt werden.
Ablagerungen, Schmutz, gealterte oder verschlissene Dichtungen können zu
Funktionsstörungen führen.
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur bei drucklosem Rohrsystem und von der Span-
nungsversorgung getrennten Magneten durchgeführt werden.
1. Kolbeneinheit
Demontage
Befestigungsschrauben des Zylinders lösen. Zylinder demontieren.
Kolbeneinheit demontieren.
Kolben mit Pneumatikfett (z. B. Molykote 55M) nachfetten oder ggf. austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge
®
Westfalia Separator
16 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Wichtig: O-Ringe schmieren (z. B. mit temperaturbeständigem Mehrzweck-

fett)
Kolben mit Pneumatikfett schmieren (z. B. Molykote 55M)
Kolbeneinheit wieder montieren
2. Obere Spindellagerung
Demontage - Zylinder demontieren
Befestigungsschrauben des Zylinders lösen. Zylinder demontieren.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 17
Kappe demontieren. Obere Spindellagerung demontie-

ren.
O-Ring nachschmieren (z. B. mit temperaturbeständigem Mehrzweckfett) oder

ggf. komplette obere Spindeleinheit austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge.
3. Rückschlagventil
Demontage
Sicherungsblech lösen. Sicherungsblech demontieren.
Rückschlagventil reinigen oder austauschen.
Die Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge.
®
Westfalia Separator
18 9085-9000-000 / 0312
ACHTUNG: Vor Montage der Systemarmatur in die Rohrleitung die korrekte

Sicherung des Haltebleches sicherstellen.
Sicherung des Haltebleches sicherstellen.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 19
2 ENGLISH
This manual ................................................................. 20

Intention of this manual ...................................................................................... 20
Shortcuts and symbols ....................................................................................... 20
Specification of service ................................................ 21

Intended usage ................................................................................................... 21
Storage, transport, disposal ............................................................................... 21
Terms of general application .............................................................................. 21
Device description ........................................................ 22

Emergency operation ......................................................................................... 23
Spare Parts .................................................................. 24

Initial operation and maintenance ................................ 26
Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve ............................................ 26
Maintenance ................................................................ 27
1. Piston unit ....................................................................................................... 27
2. Upper spindle bearing .................................................................................... 28
3. Check valve .................................................................................................... 29
®
Westfalia Separator
20 9085-9000-000 / 0312
This manual
Intention of this manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for
skilled employees only. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve
terminology and that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer
advisor!
Shortcuts and symbols
Attention! Please Danger!

read carefully Hot surface!
Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.
For your Please read

information documents
Attention! Hint to the

Risk of injury! manual part.
Supply items
needed!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 21
Specification of service
Intended usage
These pressure controlled valves are suitable for industrial use. The valve enables
the control of gaseous and liquid media. The housing and sealing compounds
must be suitable for the assigned medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! 1
Do not put parts of your body or articles into the valve. This can cause
heavy injuries and should be absolutely avoided!
Storage, transport, disposal

The products are protected by packaging against external influences such as
humidity or dirt. We recommend that the packaging is removed only briefly before
the beginning of assembly in order to protect the devices against impurities.
Make sure, that the devices are stored dry and dirt-free.
Influencing the handling during transport requires your assistance – please in-
form us immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packaging! An exami-
nation of the technical parameters and a visual check of the products should take
place immediately after delivery. Notice on latent defects is to be given immediate-
ly after detection. Subsequent complaints will not be accepted.
Deficient goods or divergences of the amount must be indicated at the latest

7 days on receipt of the products in writing, otherwise the guarantee claim
will run out!
Terms of general application

It is advised to clean the valve and piping before initial use. Automated valves
need special attention! These devices can be tested under workshop conditions
only. Security positions should be systematically simulated and tested. The final
positions must be checked (open/closed) and re-adjusted if necessary! Additional
switches or other electric devices for the position feedback must be likewise
checked regarding correct settings.
®
Westfalia Separator
22 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Device description
1 Adjusting screw
2 Input
3 Output (normally open)
4 Output after operation
5 Cylinder
6a Safety cover
6b Emergency operation [valve] (SW 19)
7 fixing hole
8 Absorbing duct
9 Connector for solenoid valve
10 Solenoid valve
11 Emergency operation [solenoid valve]
12 Air input
13 Temperature sensor PT100
14 Non-return valve
Emergency operation:
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 23
Emergency operation
In case of a supply pressure deficiency at the valve, please proceed as fol-

lows:
 Unscrew transparent cap (6a) at the upper end of the valve.

 Screw in hexagon nut [SW 19] (6b) up to clearly noticeable resistance
(app. 10mm).
 Valve is switched. Do not forget to screw back the emergency operating
screw into its original position when the compressed air supply is re-
stored.
In case of a supply voltage deficiency at the solenoid valve, please proceed

as follows:
 Turn the manual override (11) about 180° using a screwdriver until the
valve opens. The position of the manual override is marked with o = open
and c = closed. Delivery condition is closed (mark “c” on the right side).
 Reset the manual override to restore normal function.
 Picture „A“ shows the closed and picture B the open position.
®
Westfalia Separator
24 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Spare Parts
Non-return valve (pos. 9) Part no. 0018-7621-920
Cylinder (air) (pos. 3) Part no. 0018-7621-930
Transparent cap with sealing Part no. 0018-7621-940

(pos. 1)
Pilot valve with cable head, Part no. 0018-7621-600

skintop connection and ab-
sorbing duct with mounted elbow
union 1/8 – DN8 and assembled removable
screwing 1/4 - 1/8
with air regulation (pos. 2)
Double PT100 (pos. 4) Part no. 0001-1579-400
Spindle device, complete (pos. 6) Part no. 0018-7621-950
Screw-in fitting, complete (pos. 5) Part no. 0018-7621-960
O-ring 22x2 1 pc. (pos. 7) Part no. 0007-2412-830
O-ring 12x2 3pcs. (pos. 8) Part no. 0007-1929-830
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 25
1 transparent cap with sealing

2 pilot valve with cable head
3 cylinder (air)
4 double PT100
5 complete screw-in fitting
6 complete spindle device
7 o-ring 22x2
8 o-ring12x2
9 non-return valve
®
Westfalia Separator
26 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Initial operation and maintenance

Installation of a pressure controlled 3/2-way valve
Installation in unpressurised state only!
Push the valve housing with the flange seals carefully

between the flanges.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds are suita-
ble for the flowing medium!
Align the flange drillings to each other and put suitable

screws into the drillings
Fix the nuts crosswise and firmly onto the screws.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 27
Maintenance
Preventing maintenance or cleaning is recommended depending on the operating
conditions and in case of significant alteration of switching time or switching nois-
es.
Depending on ambient conditions the coil is to be checked regularly in terms of
cracks and dirt and the electric connection in terms of firm hold and safe sealing.
The operator is responsible for determining adequate maintenance intervals refer-
ring to the given operating conditions of the valve.
Any maintenance work is to be carried out by expert staff only. Adequate tooling is
required.
Functional failures can be provoked by disposal, dirt and aged or worn out sealing
material.
Any maintenance work has to be done with depressurized piping and disconnect-
ed solenoids only.
1. Piston unit
Disassembly
Loosen the fixing screws of the cylinder. Disassemble cylinder.
Dismount piston unit.
Lubricate piston with pneumatic grease (e.g. Molykote 55M) or replace piston
when necessary.
Assembly takes place in reverse order.
®
Westfalia Separator
28 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Important: lubricate o-ring (e. g. using temperature resistant multi-purpose

grease)
Lubricate piston with pneumatic grease (e.g. Molykote 55M).
Mount piston unit.
2. Upper spindle bearing

Disassembly - Dismantle cylinder
Loosen the fixing screws of the cylinder. Disassemble cylinder.
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 29
Dismantle cap. Disassemble upper spindle bear-

ing.
Lubricate o-ring (e. g. using temperature resistant multi-purpose grease) or re-

place complete upper spindle bearing when necessary.
3. Check valve
Disassembly of check valve
Loosen retaining plate Dismount retaining plate
Clean or replace check valve.

®
Westfalia Separator
30 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Attention: make sure the retaining plate is fixed in correct position prior to
mounting the system valve into the piping!
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 31
®
Westfalia Separator
32 9085-9000-000 / 0312
Seite / page: 1-2
Faxformular - Fax Form

(vor Benutzung kopieren! – Copy before use!)
zur / for
Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung
Spare part inquiries Spare part orders
An / To
Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6
D-21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Fax-No.: +49 (0) 40-7380585
Besteller / Orderer
Firma / Company
Name
Straße, Haus-Nr.
Street, house no.
PLZ, Ort / ZIP, City
Telefon / Phone
Fax
Lieferanschrift (falls abweichend) Rechnungsanschrift (falls abweichend)

Delivery address (if different) Invoice address (if different)
Firma Firma
Company Company
Name Name
Straße, Straße,
Haus-Nr. Haus-Nr.
Street, house Street,
no. house no.
PLZ, Ort ZIP, PLZ, Ort
City ZIP, City
Telefon Telefon
Phone Phone
Fax Fax
Gewünschte Lieferzeit:
Desired delivery time:
Kommentar:
Remarks:
Ort, Datum / Place, Date Firmenstempel, Unterschrift / Company stamp, Signature
®
Westfalia Separator
9085-9000-000 / 0312 33
Seite / page: 2-2

Faxformular - Fax Form
(vor Benutzung kopieren! – Copy before use!)
zur / for
Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung
Spare part inquiries Spare part orders
WICHTIG! Bei Anfrage oder Bestellung unbedingt angeben:

IMPORTANT! When submitting your inquiry or order, be sure to state:
Serien-
WSM-Auftrags-Nr. Nr.
WSM Order No.: Serial No. Typ Type
Kundenauftrags-Nr.
Customer Order No.
Pos. (falls
vorhanden) Bestellnummer Menge Bezeichnung
Item (if Part-No. Qty. Description
available)
Ort, Datum / Place, Date Firmenstempel, Unterschrift / Company stamp, Signature
®
Westfalia Separator
34 9085-9000-000 / 0312
®
Westfalia Separator
Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde
Tel. +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
BW-MV-direkt
Magnetventile direktgesteuert
Direct acting solenoid valves DEUTSCH
ENGLISCH
Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung

Installation and Maintenance manual
Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig
durch.
Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!
Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
Installation and maintanance is allowed for skilled employees only.
Please pay attention to the safety advices!
-1-
BW-MV-direkt
©2006 - MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH, Vlotho
Alle Rechte an Texten und Bildern, auch die der Übersetzung, sind vorbehalten.
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder weitere
Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme verarbeitet,
vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH. It is not allowed to change
or duplicate even parts of it without written permission. We do not assume responsibility for correctness and integrity.
Colours of original products can differ from images.
Änderungen sind vorbehalten.

Errors excepted regarding print and technical changes.
Auflage: September 2008, Revision 2

Edition: September 2008, Revision 2
Anfragen richten Sie bitte schriftlich an:

MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH
Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
-2-
BW-MV-direkt
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Seite / page
Zu dieser Anleitung 4
This manual
Abkürzungen und Symbole 4
Leistungsbeschreibung 5
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung 5
Intended usage
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung 5
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen 5
Gerätebeschreibung 6
Device description
Wartung 6
Maintenance
Inbetriebnahme und Wartung 7, 8

Acticity description
Installation und Inbetriebnahme 7, 8
Installation
-3-
DEUTSCH BW-MV-direkt
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen die Armatur fachgerecht zu installieren

und zu warten. Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. Es wird
vorausgesetzt, dass bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische
Zeichnungen gelesen werden können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei
MIT.
Aktuelle Dokumentation im Internet
Wir bitten Sie, sich regelmäßig über aktualisierte Versionen dieser Anleitung zu informieren.
Diese Anleitung unterliegt nicht der Revisionierung und stellt lediglich den zum Zeitpunkt des
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand der MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH dar. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de
abrufen oder telefonisch bei Ihrem zuständigen Kundenbetreuer anfordern.
Gültigkeit der Anleitung
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
Erweiterungen und Änderungen der vorliegenden Anleitung, die dem technischen Fortschritt
dienen, vor.

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
-4-
BW-MV-direkt DEUTSCH
Direktgesteuerte Magnetventile der Baureihen GMV48, 5200, 7200, 7300, 7500, 2138, 2148,
2162, 2167, 2197, 3162, 3163, 3197 und FMV 2300 sind zum Einsatz im industriellen
Bereich geeignet. Die Magnetventile besitzen bei fachgerechter Montage der optional
lieferbaren Stecker eine Schutzart von IP65. Die Verteiler ermöglichen das Schalten
neutraler gasförmiger und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für
das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr
Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Anschlüsse der Armatur kann zu
MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit
oder Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn
zu entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei
untergebracht werden.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich, wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei
Ihnen eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und
sollte eine Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte
Mängel sind unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als
genehmigt.
Warenmängel oder Abweichungen der Menge müssen spätestens 7 Tage nach Erhalt der Ware
schriftlich angezeigt werden, andernfalls erlischt der Gewährleistungsanspruch!
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespült

werden. Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der
Inbetriebnahme! Diese Geräte können bei MIT im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingungen
getestet und eingestellt werden. Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet
werden.
-5-
Gerätebeschreibung
1 - Steckerschraube
2 - Mutter
3 - Steckdose
4 - Steckdosendichtung
5 - elektrischen Anschlüsse
6 - Wellscheibe
7 - Scheibe
8 - Spule
9 - Tubus
10 - Anker
11 - Feder
12 - Gehäuse
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines direktgesteuerten Magnetventils
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen!
Der Einbau der Armatur sollte vorzugsweise senkrecht erfolgen!
Der elektrische Anschluss darf nur von einer hierfür ausgebildeten Fachkraft erfolgen!
Zum Anschluss des Magnetventils an Ihr Leitungssystem werden keine

Sonderwerkzeuge benötigt.
-6-
BW-MV-direkt DEUTSCH
Direktgesteuerte Magnetventile sind in der Grundausstattung immer stromlos geschlossen. In

Ruhestellung verschließt der Anker durch Federkraft direkt den Sitz. Wird durch Anlegen einer Spannung
die Magnetspule erregt, so wird der Anker mit dem Dichtelement direkt vom Sitz angehoben.
Wichtig!
Die Standardventile sind immer stromlos geschlossen (NC)!
Einbau
In der Regel ist die Einbaulage mit stehendem Magneten in waagerechter Leistung vorgeschrieben.
Pfeilrichtung am Gehäuse mit Fließrichtung des Mediums vergleichen. Vor der Montage, Rohrleitung mit
Druckintervallen durchspülen. Bei verschmutzten Medien unbedingt einen Schmutzfänger möglichst nach
dem Ventileingang vorsehen. Wird ein Ventil mit Muffenanschluss montiert, Spule nicht als Hebel
benutzen. Ein Verspannen des Ventilgehäuses durch Einsatz von unsachgemäßem Werkzeug oder
Dichtungsmaterial oder durch nicht fluchtende Rohrleitungen muss vermieden werden. Bitte benutzen Sie
ausschließlich passendes Werkzeug an den Schlüsselflächen des Gehäuses!
Elektrischer Anschluss
Die Magnetsysteme des Standardprogramms haben einen Steckeranschluss oder eine Kabeleinführung
zum Klemmkasten an der Magnetspule. Vor Anschluss der Stromzufuhr die vorgeschriebene Stromart
und Spannung auf Typenschild und Lieferschein beachten. Spannungstoleranz +/-10%. Die
Einschaltdauer beträgt 100%ED. Als Dauerbetrieb (DB) gilt die Funktion, bei der die Spule solange
eingeschaltet bleibt bis die Belastungstemperatur erreicht ist. Achtung - Verbrennungsgefahr! Die
Oberflächen der Magnetspulen können bei Betrieb sehr heiß werden! Elektrische Anschlüsse vor
Feuchtigkeit schützen. Bei Freiluftmontage eine ausreichende Abdeckung vorsehen. Die Schutzart IP 65
ist nur für eine kurze Feuchtigkeitsbelastung ausgelegt. Elektrische Anschlüsse nur durch Fachpersonal
vornehmen lassen. Anschlusskabel entsprechend dem Einsatzfall und den örtlichen Begebenheiten (z.B.
erhöhte Temperaturen) auswählen. Bei zündfähiger Atmosphäre (Ex-Schutz) unbedingt die
Bestimmungen der Zulassungsbehörde beachten.
Anschlussplan
Erdanschluss
Für Gleich- und Mit einem Gleichrichter

Stromanschlüsse Wechselstrom für Wechselstrom
-7-
Wartung und Störungsbeseitigung
Die Magnetventile sind wartungsfrei!
Mögliche Störfälle!!
Bitte zunächst Pfeilrichtung, Spannung, Einsatzort und Betriebsdruck überprüfen!
Anker wird nicht angezogen.

1. Anschlussspannung ist unterbrochen oder nicht ausreichend
2. Magnetspule oder Gleichrichter defekt
3. Anker blockiert im verschmutzten Tubusraum; Wenn der Anker die Hubendlage nicht erreicht, führt
diese bei
erregter Wechselstrom-Spule, schon nach kurzer Zeit, zum Ausfall der Spule (thermische
Überlastung).
4. Nennspannung und Spulenspannung unterschiedlich.
Ventil schließt nicht!

1. Anker blockiert
3. Nennspannung liegt noch an
4. Handbetätigung nicht zurückgestellt
5. Pfeilrichtung mit Durchflussrichtung nicht identisch
Ventil öffnet nicht!

1. Membrane oder Kolben defekt
2. Entlastungsbohrung verstopft (Dichtmittel oder Verschraubung im Ausgang überprüfen)
3. Nennspannung liegt nicht an
4. Magnetspule defekt
5. Nennspannung und Spulenspannung unterschiedlich.
Bei Fehlfunktionen überprüfen Sie, ob der Ventilsitz, das Dichtungselement, der Anker und der Tubus
sauber sind.
Mögliche Instandsetzungsarbeiten dürfen nur vom Fachpersonal durchgeführt

werden!
-8-
ENGLISH
ENGLISH BW-MV-direkt
This manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve. This manual is for skilled
employees only. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve terminology and
that you can read technical documents.
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at
MIT!
Latest documentation on the internet
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited
and represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH at the
time of print. You can get current information of your product at any time on the internet:
www.systemarmaturen.de.
Validity of the manual
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH declares that it reserves its right to modify both the
manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.

Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.


Supply items
needed!
-4-
BW-MV-direkt ENGLISH
Intended usage
Direct acting solenoid valves of the type GMV4800, 5200, 7200, 7300, 7500, 2138, 2148,
2162, 2197, 3162, 3163, 3197 and FMV 2300 made by MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik
GmbH are suitable for the producing industries. The valves have protection class IP65
when you use the optional deliverable plugs of MIT.
The valves are used for switching neutral gaseous and liquid media. The medium and
temperature range and pressure have to be suitable to the body and sealing materials.
Danger of injury
Don´t put parts of your body or other parts into the valve. This can cause heavy injuries
and should be avoided!
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt.
We recommend removing this packing just before assembly in order to protect the devices
against impurities.
During storage make sure that the devices are accommodated dry and dirt-free.
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform
us immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical
parameters and a visual product check should take place emidiately after delivery.
Subsequent complains can not be excepted.
The warranty expires if product failings or quantity divergences are not announced in
writing within 7 days after receipt of goods!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the pipings. Automated valves need a special
attention in time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT Moderne
IndustrieTechnik GmbH only under workshop conditions. Security positions should be
simulated and tested straight.
-5-
BW-MV-direkt
ENGLISH
Device description
1 - Screw for the plug

2 - Nut
3 - Plug
4 - Plug sealing
5 - electric connectors
6 - Washer
7 - Washer
8 - Solenoid
9 - Tube
10 - Plunger
11 - Spring
12 - Body
Activity description
Installation of a direct acting solenoid valve
The installation may occur only in state without pressure.
We recommend the installation with the valve in upright position!
Electric connection is only allowed for skilled employees!
You don't need any special tools to connect the solenoid valve with your piping system.
-6-
BW-MV-direkt ENGLISH
Direct acting solenoid valves are always in the state "normally closed". In rest position the plunger locks
the seat only by spring force. When the solenoid is energized the plunger with its sealing is directly lifted
from the seat.
IMPORTANT!
Our common solenoid valves are always in the state "normally closed"!
Installation
Normally you have to install your solenoid valve with the solenoid in upright position and in a horizontal
piping.
Please compare the arrow on the body with the flow direction of your medium. Before installation keep
in mind to rinse your piping with pressure interval. If you have media with particles we recommend to
use a strainer directly in front of the solenoid valve. If you mount a valve with muffle connection don't
use the coil as hand lever. Avoid twisting of the valve body - this can be caused by wrong tools, sealings
or non-flush pipelines. Remind to use suitable tools at the spanner flats only.
Electric Connection
Our common solenoids have a plug connection or a cable entry point to the terminal box. Please mind
the required current and voltage before connection - you can find them on the type label or the bill of
delivery. The tolerance of voltage is +/- 10%. The duty time is 100%. The continous duty is the time
when the solenoid is energized until the load temperature is reached. Caution - risk of burnig! The
surfaces of the solenoids may become extremely hot! Protect the electric connection from humidity. If
the valve is mounted outside arrange for adequate cover. Protection class IP65 is only for short periods
of humidity. Choose the adequate connection cable according to the surrounding area and the local
conditions, e.g. high temperature. If you have ignitable atmosphere you have to follow the regulations of
your local accreditation agency.
Wiring diagram
Ground
for AC /DC with rectifier for AC

Current connection
-7-
ENGLISH
BW-MV-direkt
Maintenance
Our solenoid valves are maintenance-free!
Possible failures
First of all check the arrow on the body with your medium flow, the voltage, the place of installation and
the working pressure!
Also check if the valve seat, the sealing, the plunger and the tube are clean.
The Plunger is not lifted.

1. The connection voltage is broken or not high enough.
2. The solenoid or the rectifier is broken.
3. The plunger is blocked in the polluted plunger area. If the plunger can not reach the final position this
can lead to a broken solenoid (only with energized AC - solenoid) Thermal overload!
4. Nominal voltage and solenoid voltage are different.
The valve does not close properly!

1. The plunger is blocked.
2. There is still nominal voltage.
3. You did not reset the hand lever.
4. Arrow on the body and medium flow are not in the same direction.
The valve does not open properly!

1. Diaphragm or piston are broken.
2. The relief boring is blocked (please check the sealing compound ort he screwing in the outlet)
3. You don't have nominal voltage.
4. The solenoid is broken.
5. Nominal voltage and solenoid voltage are different.
Repair is allowed for skilled employees only!
-8-
BW-MV-direkt
-9-
BW-MV-direkt
Kontakt / Contact:
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
Email: MIT@Systemarmaturen.de
Internet: www.systemarmaturen.de
- 10 -
Mounting and Operating Manual
Butterfly Valves
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen · Telefon (05731) 7900-0 · Telefax (05731) 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
Impressum
© by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG claims copyright over this documentation.
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded, reproduced nor passed to third parties without the written
aggreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG. This restriction also applies to the corresponding drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right to change parts of the butterfly valves at any time without prior
or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.KG cannot be held
responsible, either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance of the properties is given.

Oberbecksener Straße 78
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 199
Internet: http://www.end.de
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 11/02
2 http://www.end.de 11/02
Contents
Contents
1 Foreword 4
2 General Advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.2 Inward monitoring 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Warranty 5
2.5 Symbols and their signification 6
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal safety 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting 7
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 8
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Butterfly Valve 11
5.1 General 11
5.2 Corresponding use 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting/Disassemble 11
5.4.1 Mounting of the snap-in disc and the handle 12
5.4.2 Mounting of a wafer type butterfly valve 14
5.4.3 Mounting of a LUG type butterfly valve 15
6 Maintenance 16
7 Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC 18
11/02 http://www.end.de 3
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the butterfly valves
rapidly and correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the butterfly valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the butterfly valves we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation
manual.
Yours
General Advice
2 General Advice
2.1 Validity
This mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard versions of the butterfly valves
and their variants.
2.2 Inward monitoring
Please check directly after delivery the butterfly valves for any transport damages and deficiencies
and with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
Do not leave any parts in the package.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage / repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
In case of a return, please mention the following:

• Name and address of the consignee
• Stock-/ ordering-/ article-number
• Description of the defect
2.4 Warranty
For our butterfly valves we give a warranty period in accordance with the sales contract.
The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect.
The warranty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
Symbols and their Signification
2.5 Symbols and their signification
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices; this also includes
advices for averting health risks. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices, this also includes
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
This symbol indicates paragraphs which contain comments / advices or tips.
This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
Safety Advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the butterfly valves
are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account particular safety aspects in
each case!
If, for example, a butterfly valve works a slide in an operational chemical plant, the potential haz-
ards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for test
purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting/adjustment/commissioning,

you may find advices on hazards in the following descriptions which are not relevant to you.
Please observe (only) the advices which applies to your situation!
3.1 Personal safety
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and electrical installation of the butterfly valves must be carried out by trained specialist person-
nel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directive after the mounting and
installing of the butterfly valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the butterfly valve (in a plant which is in operation) inform
the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in order,
for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good time
by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machines
/ plant.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting
As a result of the starting (pneumatic, electric or by hand) of the butterfly valves the flow of
gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of the
starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the
environment!
Safety Advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the butterfly valve.
Check the function of the limit switches (option)!
Check, whether the butterfly valve will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate
limit stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safety
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions described in
this documentation!
Adjusting switches on butterfly valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit
switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrician or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potential hazard!
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the butterfly valve will be under pressure.
Before disassembling the butterfly valve some essential points should be clarified!
• Will the butterfly valve to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant needed to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassembly?
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the butterfly valve is mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
If necessary set up warning signs in order to prevent

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the butterfly
valve is mounted
• the switching on of pilot medium supply, pilot power supply and/or the power supply
of actuators and accessories.
In case of defect in the butterfly valve make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
If you ascertain a damage of the butterfly valve, isolate the device from the mains. Please observe
the safety advices.
Safety Advice
Do not mount, start or adjust the butterfly valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the butterfly valve and the tightness
of the pipe connections.
Also check the function of the accessories e.g. actuators, limit switches, etc.
3.2 Device safety
The butterfly valves

• are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect safety condition.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .
We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the butterfly vales will only be used within their admissible limiting value
(see the technical data) .
The butterfly valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The butterfly valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the butterfly valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the
seals and the bearings.
The operating of the butterfly valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner
parts and the body.
Do not mount, start or adjust the butterfly valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the butterfly valve and the tightness
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
The butterfly valves will be provided with a name-plate, which permits a definite identification of the butterfly
valve and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not displaced or changed.

www.end.de post@end.de
Art./Type: WA/WM PS(bar): 16
Gehäuse/Body: GG-25 GGG-40 1.4408
Scheibe/Disc: GGG-40 1.4408
Dichtung/Seal: EPDM FKM NBR
TS(°C): -20 ... +120 -10 ... +180 -10 ... +80
Mit leicht geöffnerter Scheibe
einbauen! Assembly with slightly
0062 opened disc !
Fig. 4.1 - Name-plate
Type. type of the butterfly valve

Nominal pressure (PS) max. pressure range of the butterfly valve [bar]
Temperature range (TS) max. temperature range of the butterfly valve
Body body material
Disc disc material
Seal seal material
Butterfly Valves
5 Butterfly Valve
5.1 General
Before you are mount, adjust, start, operate or disassemble a butterfly valve you have to read
the
Safety advices
If you have nor read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
5.2 Corresponding use
Butterfly valves will be used to control and to cut off media flow.
It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the butterfly valve will be
resistant. It should also be used for pulverised and past-like media and pouring goods if it suited
to the butterfly valve. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the nominal
temperature range should causes damages on the butterfly valve especially on the seals.
5.3 Operation
The butterfly valve will be opened or closed by using a handle or actuator (option). The snap-in
handle of a hand actuated butterfly valve have to been snapped out during the operation. The
disc has 9 resp. 10 snap-in positions in which the lever could click in, to prevent an inadvertent
misplace.
During the closing operation take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs into the
armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it`s necessary you have to
install a protective device.
5.4 Mounting/Disassemble
The mechanical installation of the butterfly valves differs by the variants of the body. The wafer
type butterfly valve will be squeezed between to flanges and the lug type is able to be mounted
directly on flanges.
Butterfly Valves
5.4.1 Mounting of the snap-in disc and the handle
At butterfly valves which will be actuated by hand the snap-in disc and the handle will be enclosed
the package. Before installing the butterfly valve you have to mount the handle and the snap-in
disc.
Observe the flow direction: the handle should point at the flow direction.
Remove the package and the protective devices (eg. caps and plugs). Take care that there will be
no parts of the package or other parts in the armature.
Clean up the pipes in which the butterfly valve will be mounted. Pollution could affect the safety in
operation and the duration of life of the butterfly valve.
Avoid stress in case of non align pipes.
The flanges have to be align parallel and centircally and must have carefully worked surfaces.
o.k.
o.k.
operation position
Fig. 5.1 - Butterfly valves, mounting of the snap-in disc and the handle (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
Butterfly Valves
The butterfly valve will be squeezed between two flanges. The sealing takes places by the sleeve
of the butterfly valve other sealing compounds are not allowed. Take care that there won`t be
insert any rests of sealing compounds or other pollution into the armature.
The flanges would not been welded into the pipes if the armature is mounted. The increasing
temperatures will destroy the sleeve of the butterfly valve.
At polluted media we recommend to install the butterfly valve horizontally. In this case the lower
disc half have to close in the flow direction.
o.k.
sectional drawing
Fig. 5.2 - Butterfly valves, mounting at pollute media (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
Butterfly Valves
5.4.2 Mounting of a wafer type butterfly valve
In the following description we assume that you have welded the flanges at the end of the pipes
and they are cooled down.
Adjust the disc in a not totally closed position so that the disc won`t be stand out off the body.
Put the butterfly valve between the flanges. The butterfly have to been insert between the flanges
easily so that the sleeve won`t be destroyed.
Align the butterfly valve and put fit screws through the borings of the flanges.
Screw nuts onto the screws and tighten them equaly slightly and crosswise.
Check whether the disc of the butterfly valve will be open and close easily. Let the disc a little bit
open.
Tighten all the screws crosswise and check the function of the butterfly valve again. Observe the
max. torque of the screws.
Check the tightness of all the connections.
disc not Mounting butterfly valves of type HA use

totally closed! suitable flange seals concerning to the
medium and the working conditions.
At butterfly valves type:

TA / TM - WA / WM - BA / BM
sectional drawing
the use of flange seals is not allowed.
Fig. 5.3 - Butterfly valves, mounting of a wafer type butterfly valve (Fig.: Art. TA534010)
Butterfly valves
5.4.3 Mounting of a LUG type butterfly valve
In the following description we assume that you have welded the flanges at the end of the pipes
and they are cooled down.
Adjust the disc in a not totally closed position so that the disc won`t be stand out off the body.
Put the butterfly valve in front of the flange and tighten the screws slightly and crosswise.
Check whether the disc of the butterfly valve will be open and close easily. Let the disc a little bit
open.
Tighten all the screws crosswise and and check the function of the butterfly valve again. Observe
the max. torque moment of the screws.
You have to install a protective device, to prevent the insertion of any objects or limbs into the
butterfly valve.
Install protective devices, to prevent a uncontrolled outflow of the media.
Attention: When using the butterfly valve as end piping the nominal working pressure will be
decreased.
disc not Mounting butterfly valves of type HA use

totally closed! suitable flange seals concerning to the
medium and the working conditions.
At butterfly valves type:

TA / TM - WA / WM - BA / BM
sectional drawing
the use of flange seals is not allowed.
Fig. 5.4 - Butterfly valves, mounting of a LUG - type butterfly valve (Fig.: Art. TA534010/M)
Butterfly Valves
6 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the butterfly valve you have to read the
Safety advice
If you have nor read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
On normal accounts the butterfly valve is maintenance free. In periodical turns the controlling of
the function and the tightness should happen:
• Check the tightness of stem seals

• Check the tightness of the sleeve
• Check the wear of the sleeve
At a leaky stem seal or sleeve you have to disassemble the butterfly valve and sent it back to the
manufacturer.
Don`t try to disassemble the sleeve of the butterfly vale by yourself. Heavy injuries or damages
could be the consequence.
In case of a defect of the valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you determinate that there is a damage to the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant!
However before doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
Notes
(1)
7
Declaration in conformity
Declaration in conformity as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(2)
as defined by Pressure-Equipment-Directive 97/23/EC
(3) This declaration apply to the article groups with the nominal sizes:
Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size Articles Nominal size
Butterfly valves NG DN32 ... DN100 VO DN32 ... DN200 Non-return valves
HA DN50 ... DN300 Ball valves VS DN32 ... DN200 AR 1¼" ... 2"
TA DN40 ... DN300 AG 1¼" ... 2" VT DN32 ... DN100 CK3003 DN65 ... DN200
WA DN50 ... DN300 BK DN32 ... DN100 VU 4" CK5003 DN32 ... DN200
WM DN50 ... DN300 IK 1¼" ... 2" ZA 1¼" ... 4" CK5100 DN65 ... DN250
Gate valves IL 1¼" ... 4" ZA DN32 ... DN100 CK5200 DN65 ... DN250
AB 1¼" ... 2" IW 1¼" ... 2" ZB 1¼" ... 2" CW5400 DN65 ... DN250
AE 1¼" ... 3" KA 1¼" ... 3" ZB DN32 ... DN50 EB 1¼" ... 3"
AE DN32 ... DN80 PD 1¼" ... 2" ZD 1¼" ... 4" EB DN32 ... DN80
CA5014 DN100 ... DN300 TB 1¼" ... 4“ ZD DN32 ... DN100 RG1300 DN32 ... DN100
CA5015 DN65 ... DN300 TF DN32 ... DN200 ZE 1¼" ... 4" RG33xx DN32 ... DN200
CA5214 DN40 ... DN200 TH 1¼" ZE DN32 ... DN100 RK DN32 ... DN400
CD5010 DN32 ... DN200 VD 1¼" ... 4" ZF 1¼" ... 4" TD 4"
CV3010 DN32 ... DN150 VD DN32 ... DN100 ZG 1¼" ... 2" Strainer
CV5010 DN32 ... DN200 VH 1¼" ... 2" ZH 1¼" ... 2" AS 1¼” ... 3”
CV5020 DN32 ... DN200 VH3100 1¼" ... 2" ZK DN32 ... DN100 AS DN32 ... DN200
Pressure reducer VK DN32 ... DN200 ZL 1¼" ... 3" EA 1¼" ... 3"
SD Ǫ" ... 2" VK/PN40 DN32 ... DN200 ZM 1¼" ... 2" EA DN32 ... DN80
Pressure relief valves VL 1¼" ...2", 3" ZP DN32 ... DN200
NG 1¼" ... 1½" VN 1¼" ... 2" ZU 1¼" ... 3"
and all variations of these articles
(4) of the company END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Germany
(5) Herewith we declare that the above-mentioned articles in the conditions of our delivery are in conformity with the regula-
tions of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EG.
(6) Applied conformity assessment procedure: Modul H.
(7) Noti¿ed body for conformity assessment PED an Quality-Management-System:
Bureau Veritas S.A.

Paris / Frankreich
Kennzeichen 0062
(8) Certi¿cate numbers: Quality Management System: INT110198DE

Certi¿cate of System approval PED: 2011/70.10.1777/P
(9) Applied harmonized standards, in particular:
DIN EN 12516:2005 Industriearmaturen - Gehäusefestigkeit
(10) On behalf bH & Co. KG Bad Oeynhausen, 07. July 2011

END-Armaturen Gm . 78
Oberb eck sen er Str
sen · Germany
32547 Bad Oeynhau - 7900-0
Telefon: +49 (0)5731 - 7900-199
Telefax: +49 (0)5731 · post@end.de
http://www.end.de
Friedhelm König Michael End
Technical Manager Quality Manager
Declaration without signature or company stamp shall not be valid. The declaration may be circulated only without alternation.
Extracts or alternations are subject to approval by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG.

Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 · Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen (Germany) · Telefon +49 - 5731 - 7900-0 · Telefax +49 - 5731 - 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
watergates
knife-gate-valves - Stoffschieber
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG END-Automation GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG
Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 341 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 342 Postfach (PLZ 32503) 100 321
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7901-999 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Technische Daten Speciication
Artikel:
BAUFORM DESIGN WA / WM
1-teiliges Zentriergehäuse, mit auswechsel- Body consists of 1 part, with exchangeable
barer Manschette zum Einklemmen zwischen seat to be mounted between two langes acc.
zwei Flansche nach EN 1092-1 Typ 11 Form to EN 1092-1 Typ 11 Form B (PN10/PN16);
B (PN10/PN16); andere auf Anfrage. others on request.
Absperrklappe
PN 10/16
BAULÄNGE FACE TO FACE LENGTH
Nach EN 558-1 Reihe 20. Acc. to EN 558-1 R20.
BETÄTIGUNG OPERATION
GG-25
90°-Drehung des Handhebels, mit 10 Rotation of the handle through 90°, with GGG-40
Einrastmöglichkeiten und Stellungsanzeige. 10 snap-in positions and optical positon
indicator. Edelstahl
ANSCHLUß CONNECTION
Flansch DN 40 bis DN 300 Flange DN 40 up to DN 300
Größere Nennweiten auf Anfrage. Bigger sizes on request.
Flansche PN16 - DN65 werden in 4-Loch- Flanges PN16 - DN65 will be delivered in
Ausführung geliefert! 4-hole execution! WA
BETRIEBSDRUCK PRESSURE RANGE
Artikel WA / WM(zwischen 2 Flanschen) Type WA / WM(between 2 langes)
DN 50 - DN 300: max. 16 bar DN 50 - DN 300: max. 16 bar WM
DN 350 - größer: max. 10 bar DN 350 - bigger: max. 10 bar
Artikel WM (als Endklappe) Type WM (dead end service)

max. 10 bar max.10 bar
MEDIUMTEMPERATUR TEMPERATURE RANGE

NBR: -10°C bis max. + 50°C/65°C NBR: -10°C up to max. + 50°C/65°C
EPDM: -20°C bis max. + 50°C/65°C EPDM: -20°C up to max. + 50°C/65°C
FKM: -10°C bis max. + 50°C/65°C FKM: -10°C up to max. + 50°C/65°C
andere auf Anfrage others on request
WERKSTOFFE MATERIALS
Gehäuse: GG-25 Body: GG-25
Edelstahl 1.4408 Stainless steel 1.4408
Scheibe: GGG-40 Disc: GGG-40 Type:
Edelstahl 1.4408 Stainless steel 1.4408
Wellendichtung: NBR / Delrin Stem seal: NBR / Delrin WA / WM
Welle: Edelstahl 1.4401 Shaft: Stainless steel 1.4401
Manschette: EPDM Seat: EPDM
NBR NBR Butterly valve
FKM FKM
PN 10/16
Handhebel: Sphäroguß, Handle: Spheroidal cast iron,
lackiert varnished
GG-25
ZUSATZAUSSTATTUNG OPTIONS
Pneumatischer oder elektrischer Pneumatic or electric actuator, electric posititon GGG-40
Schwenkantrieb, elektrische Stellungsanzeige, indicator, handle lockable in all positions.
Handhebel stufenlos verstellbar. Stainless steel
Alle Angaben sind freibleibend und The above information is intended for guidance
unverbindlich! only and the company reserves the right to
change any data herein without prior notice!
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-WA -ATEX Rev2 - 1/6 - 03.05.06 -
Art. WA/WM - Seite 1/6

Oberbecksener Str. 78 · D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen · Telefon (05731) 7900-0 · Telefax (05731) 7900-199 · http://www.end.de
Artikel- u. Bestellangaben: z.B. WA534010
= Absperrklappe, GG-25, Edelstahl 1.4408, EPDM, DN 100
1. + 2. Stelle 3. Stelle 4. Stelle 5. Stelle 6. Stelle 7. + 8. Stelle
Produkt Gehäusewerkstoff Scheibenwerkstoff Manschettenwerkstoff Zusatzausstattung Anschlußgröße
WA = 3 = Edelstahl 1.4408 3 = Edelstahl 1.4408 2 = NBR 0 = ohne 07 = DN 50

Absperrklappe 5 = GG-25 5 = GGG-40 3 = FKM 08 = DN 65
WM = (Grauguß) 4 = EPDM 09 = DN 80
Absperrklappe, 10 = DN 100
Anlanschgehäuse 11 = DN 125
12 = DN 150
13 = DN 200
14 = DN 250
15 = DN 300
Größere Nennweiten
auf Anfrage.
Ordering example: e.g.WA534010

= Butterly valve, GG-25, Stainless steel 1.4408, EPDM, DN 100
1. + 2. Digit 3. Digit 4. Digit 5. Digit 6. Digit 7. + 8. Digit
Product Body material Disc material Seat material Options Connection size
WA = 3 = stainless steel 3 = Stainless steel 2 = NBR 0 = no options 07 = DN 50

Butterly valve 1.4408 1.4408 3 = FKM 08 = DN 65
Wafer type 5 = GG-25 5 = GGG-40 4 = EPDM 09 = DN 80
WM = (Grey cast iron) 10 = DN 100
Butterly valve 11 = DN 125
LUG-type 12 = DN 150
13 = DN 200
14 = DN 250
15 = DN 300
Bigger sizes on
request
Hinweis Advice
Bei den in dieser Dokumentation beschrieben Produkten, in der von uns The products descript in this documentation in the conditions of our
gelieferten Form, handelt es sich weder um Maschinen gemäß Artikel 2 delivery are no machinery according to annex 2 paragraph a respectively
Absatz a noch um unvollständige Maschinen gemäß Artikel 2 Absatz g no partly completed machinery according to annex 2 paragraph g of the
im Sinne der Richtlinie 2006/42/EG über Maschinen. directive 2006/42/EC on machinery.

Typenschild / Name plate
+49 (0)5731 - 7900-0 www.end.de
Art.Nr.: WA534010/AX
TA534010/AX
Serie: 313857
Betriebsdruck (PS): 16 bar
Temperatur (TS): -20°C ... +65°C
Größe (DN): 100
Prüfdruck (PT): 24 bar
Fluidgruppe: 1
Herstellung: 05.2003
II2GD c T5
0062
Art.Nr. Artikelnummer des Ventils Article number of the butterly valve
Serie Auftrags- oder Produktionsnummer Serial or Production number
Betriebsdruck (PS) maximal zulässiger Betriebsdruck des Ventils in [bar] Max. pressure range of the butterly valve [bar]
Temperatur (TS) maximaler Temperaturbereich des Ventils Max. temperature range of the butterly valve [°C]
Größe (DN) Anschlussgrösse des Ventils Connection size
Prüfdruck (PT) Prüfdruck des Gehäuses Testing pressure of the valve body
Fluidgruppe zugelassene Fluidgruppe für das Ventil Allowed luid group of the butterly valve
Herstellung Herstelldatum des Ventils Manufacturing date of the butterly valve
II2GD c T5 Explosionsschutzkennzeichnung Explosion proof identiication
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung / Corresponding Use

Absperrklappen werden zur Absperrung und Regelung von Mediumströmen eingesetzt.Es dürfen nur saubere, lüssige oder gasförmige Medien,
gegen die die verwendeten Gehäuse- und Dichtungsmaterialien beständig sind, verwendet werden, sowie pulverförmige, pastöse Medien und
Schüttgüter, soweit sie für die Absperrklappen geeignet sind. Verschmutzungen und/oder Anwendungen außerhalb der Druck- und Temperatu-
rangaben können zu Beschädigungen der Absperrklappe, insbesondere der Dichtungen, führen.
Absperrklappen sind Bauteile mit erhöhter Eigensicherung der Gruppe II, die für die Verwendung in Atmosphären der Kategorie 2G (Zone 1 u.
Zone 2) / 2D (Zone 21 u. Zone 22) ausgelegt sind.
Die max. Medien- und Umgebungstemperaturen dürfen in den einzelnen Temperaturklassen folgende Werte nicht überschreiten:
50°C bei Temperaturklasse 6
65°C bei Temperaturklasse 5
Beim Einsatz der Absperrklappen ist darauf zu achten, dass folgende Stromungsgeschwindigkeiten in der Armatur nicht überschrit-
ten werden:
v ≤ 2 m/s für lüssige Medien
v ≤ 20 m/s für gasförmige Medien
Butterly valves will be used to cut off or regulate media low.

It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the the material of the butterly valve will be resistant. Pollution or using outside the
nominal pressure range and / or the nominal temperature range should causes damages on the armature especially on the seals.
A butterly valve is an work equipment with increased safety, designed for application in atmospheres according to category
2G (zone 1 + zone 2) / 2D (zone 21 + zone 22).
The max. temperature of the media and the ambient should not exceed the following values:
50°C at temperature class 6
65°C at temperature class 5
By using the butterly valves, observe that the low rate inside the butterly valve will be less than:
v ≤ 2 m/s for liquids and
v ≤ 20 m/s for gases.

Aufbau / Construction
10
11
1
8
Pos. Bezeichnung / Desciption Material / Material

1 Gehäuse Body GG-25 GG-25
Edelstahl 1.4408 stainless steel CF8M
2 Scheibe Disc GGG-40 GGG-40
Edelstahl 1.4408 stainless steel CF8M
3 Sitz Seat NBR NBR
EPDM EPDM
FKM FKM
4 Spindel Stem Edelstahl stainless steel
5 Stift Pin Edelstahl stainless steel
6 Buchse Bush POM POM
7 O- Ring O- ring NBR NBR
8 Verstärkungsring Back up ring Kunststoff plastic

9 Buchse Bush Rotguss bronze
10 Rastscheibe Snap- in- disc Stahl steel
11 Handhebel Handle Guss cast iron

Abmnessungen Art. WA
Dimensions Art. WA
E
Zentrierhilfe *
S
H
Q
Ø
ØR
* DN40 - DN65
C
M
ØD L
G ab DN100 *
* DN80
Ød
W
H1
SW
Ø
P
DN C L H M H1 E ØD G ØP Ød SW W kg*
50 50 43 143 65 204 19 96 70 F07 10 11 200 3,0
65 65 46 155 71 216 19 110 70 F07 10 11 200 3,8
80 80 46 162 77 223 19 124 70 F07 10 11 200 4,0
100 91 52 181 107 242 19 148 70 F07 10 11 200 5,2
125 115 56 197 122 258 19 180 70 F07 10 14 250 7,3
150 140 56 210 140 271 19 208 70 F07 10 14 250 8,2
200 186 60 240 165 308 24 259 100 F10 12 17 355 13,5
250 239 68 286 201 354 24 320 100 F10 12 19 355 21,2
300 288 78 309 234 377 24 370 100 F10 12 22 355 32,5

Abmnessungen Art. WM
Dimensions Art. WM
EH
C
M
N L
ØD
ØB
G
W
Ød
H1
SW
Ø
P
G
PN 16 / PN 10(*)
DN C L H M H1 E ØP Ød ØD SW W
N n ØB kg
50 50 43 143 65 204 19 70 F07 10 96 11 M16 4 125 200 3,4
65 * 65 46 155 71 216 19 70 F07 10 110 11 M16 4 145 200 4,0
80 80 46 162 77 223 19 70 F07 10 124 11 M16 8 160 200 4,5
100 91 52 181 89 242 19 70 F07 10 148 11 M16 8 180 200 7,6
125 115 56 197 112 258 19 70 F07 10 180 14 M16 8 210 250 9,5
150 140 56 210 123 271 19 70 F07 10 208 14 M20 8 240 250 10,4
(*)
200 186 60 240 150 308 24 100 F10 12 259 17 M20 8 295 355 17,5
(*)
250 239 68 286 179 354 24 100 F10 12 320 19 M20 12 350 355 26,5
(*)
300 288 78 309 216 377 24 100 F10 12 370 22 M20 12 400 355 43,5
* Flansche PN16 - DN65 werden in 4-Loch-Ausführung geliefert!
Flanges PN16 - DN65 will be delivered in 4-hole execution!

Technische Daten Specification
Artikel:
BAUFORM DESIGN RE
2 Elektrisch-mechanische Microschalter im 2 electric-mechanic limit switch in a protective
Schutzgehäuse inclusive optischer Stellungs- housing with optical position indicator.
anzeige. Endlagenschalter
For mounting on all actuators with mounting
Montage auf allen Antrieben mit Bohrbildern hole spacing acc. to NAMUR and stem heights elektrisch-mechanisch
nach NAMUR und 30mm Wellenhöhe. 30mm.
im Schutzgehäuse
WERKSTOFFE MATERIAL
Gehäuse: Vestamid, schwarz Housing: Vestamid, black
Deckel: Makrolon, glasklar (IP 65) Cover: Makrolon, crystal-clear (IP 65)
IP 65
TEMPERATUR TEMPERATURE RAGE
-20°C bis +100°C (IP 65) -20°C up to +100°C (IP 65)
ANSCHLUSSSPANNUNG LINE VOLTAGE

max. 250 V max. 250 V
SCHALTVERMÖGEN SWITCHING CURRENT

max. 10A (IP 65) max. 10A (IP 65)
MECHANISCHE LEBENSDAUER MECHANICAL OPERATING LIFE

bis zu 5 Mio. Schaltspiele up to 5 Mio. cycles
SCHUTZART PROTECTION
IP 65 nach DIN 40050 IP 65 according to 40050
KABELVERSCHRAUBUNG CONNECTION
1x M20x1,5 (IP 65) 1x M20x1,5 (IP 65)
SCHALTFUNKTION CONTACT
2 Schließer/Öffner 2 closing/opening contact
SONDERAUSFÜHRUNG SPECIAL DESIGN

Induktive Endschalter Proximity limit-switches
Integrierter direkter Anschluss für Direct connection for solenoid vavle inte- Type:
Magnetventil.(Option: /KI) grated. (Option: /KI)
RE
Alle Angaben sind freibleibend und The above information is intended for guidance
unverbindlich! only and the company reserves the right to
change any data herein without prior notice! Position limit switches
electric-mechanic
RExx0303 RExx0303/KI
with protective housing
IP 65
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-RE-1/2 26.06.02. - Änderung: Schaltplan geändert
Art. RE - Seite 1/2

Artikel- u. Bestellangaben: z.B. RE080303/A
= Endlagenschalter für pneumatische Schwenkantriebe, Bohrbild 80 x 30 mm, 30mm Wellenhöhe, auf Antrieb aufgebaut und justiert
1. - 2. Stelle 3. - 6. Stelle 7. + 8. Stelle 9. - 13. Stelle

Produkt Bohrbild Wellenhöhe Ausführung
RE = 0803 = 80 x 30 mm 03 = 30mm Wellenhöhe /A = aufgebaut und justiert

Zusatzausstattung 1303 = 130 x 30 mm
Endlagenschalter
für pneumatische
Schwenkantriebe
Ordering example: e.g. RE080303/A

= Position limit switch for pneumatic actuators, mounting hole spacing 80 x 30 mm, 30mm stem heights, on actuator mounted and adjusted
1. - 4. Digit 5. Digit 6. Digit 7. Digit
Product Mounting hole spacing Stem heights Design
RE = 0803 = 80 x 30 mm 03 = 30mm stem heights /A = mounted and adjusted

Electrical position in- 1303 = 130 x 30 mm
dicator, designed for
pneumatic actuators
Abmessungen /
Dimension
64 152
M12x1,5
74
103
M20x1,5
30
Namur 80 x 30
Namur 130 x 30
*
* = Für Antrieb HD / HE Sk 163 - 210

for actuator HD / HE Sk 163 - 210
Schaltbild1 /
Wiring diagram1
für IP 65 /
for IP 65
Dok.-Nr.: KAT-RE-2/2 26.06.02- Änderung: Schaltplan geändert
1) Der Anschlussplan zeigt den Endschalter in Zwischenstellung, Schalter sind nicht betätigt!
The terminal plan shows the limit switch in intermediate position, switches are not actuated!
Art. RE - Seite 2/2

Operating and installation instructions
Safety valves SAFE
SAFE SAFE-P
(Series 900) (Series 920)
SAFE-TC SAFE-TCP/TCS
(Series 940) (Series 960/950)
Contents
1.0 General information on 7.0 Care and maintenance............................. 2-11
operating instructions ................................2-2 7.1 Setting instructions ............................................ 2-11
2.0 Notes on possible dangers........................2-2 7.1.1 Removing the cap .....................................2-11
2.1 Significance of symbols ...................................... 2-2 7.1.2 Changing the set pressure
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ............. 2-2 “without” spring change ........................... 2-12
7.1.3 Changing the set pressure
3.0 Storage and transport ...............................2-3 “with” spring change ................................ 2-12
4.0 Description..................................................2-3 7.2 Representation ................................................. 2-14
4.1 Scope of applications .......................................... 2-3
8.0 Troubleshooting ....................................... 2-15
4.2 Operating principles ............................................ 2-3
9.0 Troubleshooting table ............................ 2-15
4.3 Diagram............................................................... 2-4
4.3.1 Parts list ...................................................... 2-5
10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part... 2-17
4.4 Technical data - remarks ..................................... 2-6
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee ............................. 2-17
4.5 Marking ............................................................. 2-7
5.0 Installation...................................................2-8
5.1 General notes on installation............................... 2-8
6.0 Putting the valve into operation..............2-10
Rev. 0040401000 0319 english (englisch) - Translated original instructions -

SAFE, SAFE-P, SAFE-TC, SAFE-TCP/TCS
1.0 General information on operating instructions

These operating instructions provide information on mounting and maintaining the fittings.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer in case of problems which cannot be
solved by reference to the operating instructions.
They are binding on the transport, storage, installation, start-up, operation, maintenance
and repair.
The notes and warnings must be observed and adhered to.
- Handling and all work must be carried out by expert personnel or all activities must be
supervised and checked.
It is the owner’s responsibility to define areas of responsibility and competence and to
monitor the personnel.
- In addition, current regional safety requirements must be applied and observed when
taking the fittings out of service as well as when maintaining and repairing them.
The manufacturer reserves the right to introduce technical modifications at any time.
These operating instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.
2.0 Notes on possible dangers
2.1 Significance of symbols
ATTENTION !
... Warning of general danger.
Non-compliance with operating instructions is dangerous!

Read the operating instructions before installation, operation,
maintenance or disassembly and adhere to them strictly.
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information

In these Operating and Installation Instructions dangers, risks and items of safety
information are highlighted to attract special attention.
Information marked with the above symbol and “ATTENTION ! ” describe practices, a
failure to comply with which can result in serious injury or danger of death for users or third
parties or in material damage to the system or the environment. It is vital to comply with
these practices and to monitor compliance.
All other information not specifically emphasised such as transport, installation, operating
and maintenance instructions as well as technical data (in the operating instructions,
product documentation and on the device itself) must also be complied with to the fullest
extent in order to avoid faults which in turn can cause serious injury to persons or damage
to property.
Page 2-2 Rev. 0040401000 0319 - Translated original instructions -

3.0 Storage and transport

ATTENTION !
- Protect against external force (like impact, vibration, etc.).
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, hoods must not be used to
take external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
connecting points for lifting gear.
- Suitable materials handling and lifting equipment should be used.
See catalog sheet for weights.
- At -20 °C to +65 °C.
- The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage. Do
not damage paint protection.
4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of applications
Safety valves are used to protect pressurised systems.
ATTENTION !
- Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities.
- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.
- The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed
these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should
state the higher requirements when ordering
- Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject
to TRD 110.
- When media in Fluid Group 1 are used, seal exteriors must be designed so that
they pose no danger to humans or the environment.
- Open safety valves (open bonnet / open cap) are not permissible for fluids,
dusty atmospheres, open air use or for any Group 1 fluids in accordance with
Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
- Open safety valves (open bonnet / open cap) are not permissible for areas
subject to explosion hazards.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.
The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.
Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.
4.2 Operating principles
Safety valves are safety devices designed to prevent the pressure in any pressurised
system from exceeding the maximum permissible pressure by more than the permissible
tolerance of, usually +10%.
- Translated original instructions - Rev. 0040401000 0319 Page 2-3

4.3 Diagram
Fig. 901 Fig. 921 ig. 941 Fig. 961
Fig. 1
Fig. 902 / 912 / 903 / 904 / 922 / 924 / 945 / 946

Soft sealing /
EPDM bellows Stainless steel bellow
Vent hole
Vent hole G1/8
G1/4
Lever Disc
Fig. 951/952 Series 950 Series 900 Series 940

Fig. 961/962
Fig. 2

4.3.1 Parts list
Pos. Description Pos. Description

1 Body 32 Hex. nut
2 Seat (not changeable) 33 Lift bolt
2a Screwed seat 34 Screw
3 Stud 35 Lift fork
4 Spindle guide 36 Lifting lever
7 Gasket 37 Spring
8 Hex. nut 38 Screw
9 Lift limitation ring 39 Bolt
10 Spindle ring 40 Split pin
11 Bonnet, closed 41 Lever open
12 Disc unit 42 Bonnet, open
13 Lifting aid 43 Bellow
14 Spindle 44 Ring
15 Gasket 45 Ring
16 Spring type straight pin 47 Ball
17 Adjusting screw 48 Retaining ring
18 Ball 55 Bellow unit
19 Spindle cap 59 Protective rim
20 Parallel pin 60 Spacer
21 Lock nut 61 Coupling
22 Plug screw 62 Weight
23 Lead seal 63 Guide bush
25 Snap ring 65 Coupling
26 Spring plate 66 O-Ring
27 Gasket 67 Lift button
28 Cap, closed 68 Spring type straight pin
29 Cap open 70 Balanced piston
31 Ring
Refer to the data sheet for information about materials.

4.4 Technical data - remarks
for
- Principal dimensions
- Pressure-temperature-ratings, etc. refer to datasheet.
Series 900: DN 15/25 - DN 250/350, 1“x2“ - 6“x10“

EN-JL1040, EN-JS1049, 1.0619+N, 1.4408, SA 216 WCB
PN 16/16, PN 25/16, PN 40/16, ANSI 150/150, ANSI 300/150
Approval acc. to:
Figure 901, 902, 911, - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
912 TRD 421.
Application letter D/G and F
- ASME Code Section VIII-Division 1 (UV-Stamp)
Figure 903, 904, 990 -VdTÜV leaflet 100, -100/4, TRD 721, DIN EN 12828.
Application letter D/G/H and D (for Figure 904, 990)
Series 920: DN 20 - DN 100

EN-JL1040, 1.0619+N, 1.4408
PN 16, PN 40
Approval acc. to:
Figure 921-924 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
TRD 421.
Series 940: DN 15 - DN 25 (G 1/2“ - G 1“)

EN-JS1049, 1.4408
PN 40
Approval acc. to:
Figure 941-943 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2 and
TRD 421.
Figure 945-946 -VdTÜV leaflet 100, -100/4, TRD 721, DIN EN 12828.
Application letter D/G/H and D
Series 950/960: DN 15 - DN 25 (G 1/2“ - G 1“)

EN-JS1049, 1.4581
PN 100
Approval acc. to:
Figure 951-953 - DIN EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV leaflet 100, AD2000-A2.
Figure 961-963 Application letter D/G and F
Accessories: Stainless steel bellow for back-pressure compensation;

elastomer bellow; soft sealing disc; lock bush; proximity switch;
heating jacket; test gag; rupture disc; support tongues;
removable lifting aid

4.5 Marking
Fig.-No./Type Type-test approved No.
Safety valve (TÜV) Kdr
Manufacturer
EAC- Temperature d CE-marking
marking 0
Notified
body
Approval
Set pressure Adjusting services
Serial-No.
Disc design: Year of manufacture

E = EPDM -40°C up to 150°C Travel
V = Viton (FPM) -20°C up to 180°C
N = Neoprene -30°C up to 100°C
S = SHR -20°C up to 220°C
St = Stellitiert -60°C up to 450°C
Fig.-No./Type NB-stamp
EAC- Size ASME/UV-stamp CE-marking
marking
Safety valve (ASME)
Notified
body
Serial-No.
Year of manufacture
Manufacturer
Set pressure
Capacity/Unit
Disc design: SCFM = air
E = EPDM -40°C up to 150°C lb/h = steam
V = Viton (FPM) -20°C up to 180°C gal/min = water
N = Neoprene -30°C up to 100°C
S = SHR -20°C up to 220°C
Fig. 3: St = Stellitiert -60°C up to 450°C
Type test plates
Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.0
LS Bd
BA/BQ
Logo of external approvals
Fig. 4: Body (outlet)

Series with thread connections are marked on the body.

5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following points should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- Remove flange covers if present.
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles
- Note installation position with reference to flow, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are
avoided.
- Protect valves from dirt during construction work.
- Connection flanges must mate exactly.
- Connecting bolts for pipe flanges should be mounted preferably from the
counter flange side (hexagon nuts from the valve side).
At DN15-32: If valves should be mounted directly to valves, the upper flange
connecting bolts should be preferably executed with studs and hexagon nuts on
both sides.
- Valve mountings such as actuators, handwheels, bonnets must not be used to
See data sheet for weights.
- The blow-off line shall be sufficiently large to ensure that the internal back-
pressure while blowing-off does not exceed 10% (on request max. 15%) of the
set pressure. (Exception: safety valves with metallic bellow for back-pressure
compensation).
- If back pressure exceeds 10% (on request max. 15%) of set pressure, the
safety valve must be fitted with a metallic bellow seal for back pressure
compensation. The maximum back pressure must be specified by the
manufacturer. If necessary a leak detector should be provided to monitor the
back pressure compensating metallic bellow seal, but the leak detector must
not block the vent hole. With a closed vent hole the balanced piston loses it‘s
function (refer to Fig. 2).
- The ventilation hole in the bonnet of safety valves with a metallic bellow seal
must remain open as a matter of principle, although in the case of Group I fluids
(PED 2014/68/EU) a non-isolatable pipeline must be connected to remove the
medium safely (without back pressure if the bellow seal is damaged. The vent
hole must not be blocked by any leak detector used.
- No pipe sections or screws must protrude into the spring bonnet through the
inspection connection. Blockage hazard!
- The drainage system shall be adequate to remove the condensate.
- Blockage of the drainage system by dirt or foreign bodies shall be avoided.
- Freezing, sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs. If
necessary use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow with or without a
rupture disk.

- Safety valves shall be installed with vertical spindle. Differing valves of series
950 with set pressure > 5 bar can also be installed horizontally. Valves marked
with „Einbau nur horizontal (Installation only horizontal)“ shall be installed
horizontally (series 950 ≤5 bar set pressure).
- Flange gaskets shall be fitted concentrically and not restrict the flow cross
section.
- Keep the shaft of the spindle-unit free from paint (open bonnet / cap).
- Blow-off lines shall be laid with gradient.
- The ratio pao/po shall be taken into account when dimensioning the system.
- Safety valves shall be equipped with support tongues to absorb high reaction
forces.
- Pressure losses in the line to the safety valve shall not exceed 3%. This shall be
considered for selection of appropriate changeover valves.
- Ensure that adequate drip pans are used if setting media in Fluid Group
pursuant to PED 2014/68/EU.
- Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and
installing products.
- The valves are designed for application, not influenced from weather.
- For application outside or in adverse environments like corrosion-promoting conditions
(sea water, chemical vapours, etc.), special constructions or protective measures are
recommended.
- Refer to appropriate TRD 421, AD2000-A2, DIN, ASME Code rules for piping and
installation.
- Remove transport fasteners and protective caps for inlet and outlet immediately before
installation.
- Water shall be drained from the safety valve and blow-off line via the blow-off line
(drainage points always at the lowest point).
Support
Bellow
Drip pan
Drainage Drainage at lowest point
fig. 5

6.0 Putting the valve into operation

ATTENTION !
- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature
and direction of flow.
- Regional safety instructions must be adhered to.
- Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leakage.
- Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50°C) or low (< 0°C) media
temperatures can cause injury.
Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate!
- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature,
direction of flow and also check that the data of the valve are correct for the
plant
(refer to type test plate)
- Remove any test gag from cap and close opening with stopper.
- Remove protective caps and lever lock before putting the valve into operation
- Freezing, sticking or blocking of the safety valve must be avoided at all costs. If
necessary use a heating jacket and/or stainless steel bellow without a rupture
disk. (Note point 5.0).
- When operating without a blow-off line, medium may spurt from the valve outlet.
Injury hazard!
- Blowing off may generate loud flow noise.
- Medium may be discharged from the vent hole in the spring bonnet (safety
valves with stainless steel bellows and heating valves)
Injury hazard!
- Hot vapour may be discharged if the spring bonnet is open.
Before putting a new plant into operation or restarting a plant after repairs or
modification, always make sure that:
- All works has been completed!
- The valve is in the correct position for its function.
- Safety devices have been attached.

7.0 Care and maintenance

Maintenance and maintenance-intervals have to be defined by the operator according to
the requirements.
ATTENTION !
- Too frequent lifting for test purposes can increase wear of the sealing surfaces!
(by 85% from the set pressure) to ensure that the valve works correctly.
- The safety valve must be lifted from time to time in line with current regulations
(The intervals at which this must be done depends on various factors so that no
generally applicable interval can be specified)
- Original parts only should be fitted as spares as a matter of policy.
- In safety valves with an open spring bonnet there is a danger of being crushed
between the spring windings during lifting and setting.
- Lift the safety valve stem briefly (releasing the lever suddenly) to eliminate slight leaks due
to particles between the seat and disc.
- If this does not eliminate the leak, the sealing surfaces of the seat and/or disc have been
damaged.
This can only be rectified at our works or by an authorised contractor.
- With valves corresponding to Figures 901, 921 and 941, the lever must always be
returned to the original position after lifting the safety valve.
- With Fig. 951 and 961 the lift button must be pressed down again after lifting.
- The manufacturer accepts guarantee liabilities only if tampering by third parties is
prevented.
7.1 Setting instructions
ATTENTION !
The following work must only be carried out by authorised specialist workshops
or at the operator’s own responsibility with monitoring by an independent agency
(e.g. TÜV).
7.1.1 Removing the cap
ATTENTION !
If there is back pressure or during setting/lifting, medium may be discharged from
the open bonnet, or into the adjusting screw area if the bonnet is closed.
ATTENTION !
When changing to the cap without lifting device (series 911, 923, 943), the
spindel cap (pos. 19) must be removed.
Open caps
- Remove slit pin (pos. 40), bolt (pos. 39).
- Extract lifting lever (pos. 41).
- Remove screw (pos. 38).
- Unscrew cap (pos. 29).
Closed caps
- Press lifting lever (pos. 36) towards bonnet (pos. 11) and against stop.
- Unscrew cap (pos. 28).

Closed cap series 960/950
- Remove spring type straight pin (pos. 68)
- Remove lift button (pos. 67) or lifting lever (pos. 36)
- Unscrew cap (pos. 28)
7.1.2 Changing the set pressure “without” spring change
ATTENTION !
- When changing the set pressure in a pressurised system bear in mind vapour
discharge if bonnet is open, in adjusting screw area if bonnet is closed.
- Note spring setting range.
- Check the spring range.
- Spindle (pos. 14) must be held fast by all alterations.
- Loosen lock nut (pos. 21).
- Turn adjusting screw (pos. 17) clockwise to increase and anticlockwise to reduce the set
pressure.
- Secure spring setting by tightening lock nut (pos. 21).
- Assemble lifting device.
7.1.3 Changing the set pressure “with” spring change
ATTENTION !
- Depressurise the system before dismantling or opening the safety valve.
- For removing the cap refer to 7.1.1.

- Extract parallel pin (pos. 20) and lift off the spindle cap (pos. 19).
- Slacken locknut (pos. 21) and relieve spring (pos. 37) by turning adjusting screw (pos. 17)
anticlockwise.
- Unscrew nuts (pos. 8) at flange connection.
Fig. 940: loosen coupling (pos. 61)
Fig. 950/960: loosen bonnet (pos. 11)
ATTENTION !
- With higher set pressures the bonnet is under high spring preload! For
mounting of this bonnets, 2 of the studs (pos. 3) are designed longer. The nuts
(pos. 8) on the longer studs must be removed at last and simultaneously!
- Remove bonnet (pos. 11/42).
- Remove top spring-plate (pos. 26) and spring (pos. 37).
- Extract spindle (pos. 14) with disc (pos. 12/12a), guide plate (pos. 4/4a) and bottom
spring-plate (pos. 26).
- Clean seat (pos. 2) and disc (pos. 12).
- Insert spindle (pos. 14) with disc (pos. 12), guide plate (pos. 4), spring-plate (pos. 26) and
different spring (pos. 37).

- when carrying out any adjustment work hold the spindle (pos. 14) firm to prevent it
twisting.
ATTENTION !
- Torques must be observed:
M10 16-25 Nm screw joint BR940 100 Nm
M12 30-40 Nm screwed seat BR940 180 Nm
M16 70-90 Nm bonnet BR950/960 60 Nm
M20 150-175 Nm
- Check spring marking in accordance with manufacturer’s data.

- Note spring setting range.
- Change seals.
- Fit bonnet (pos. 11/42) and reset the set pressure; make sure spring setting range is
appropriate.
- Secure spring setting by means of lock nut (pos. 21).
- Assemble lifting device.
- If necessary, replace both spring plates (pos. 26) and use longer studs (pos. 3) when
fitting a spring for a higher set pressure.
- Further information obtainable from the manufacturer.
Only for series 900: DN20-100 (except safety valves with ASME approval)
ATTENTION !
When changing the set pressure and fitting a new spring, note that safety valves
with set pressures between 0.2 and 1.5 bar have a greater lift.
Therefore:
Set pressure in the range Spring change only in
the range
0.2 to 1.5 bar 0.2 to 1.5 bar
> 1.5 bar > 1.5 bar
Only for series 900: DN32 and DN65

ATTENTION !
When changing set pressure with spring change, notify that safety valves with set
pressure range 34,0 - 40,0 bar (DN32), 28,0 - 40,0 bar (DN65) are equipped with
a different lifting aid! Within this set pressure range a lifting aid appropriately
marked with „34,0 - 40,0 bar“ (DN32) resp. „28,0 - 40,0 bar“ (DN65) has to be
installed!
Only for series 950:

ATTENTION !
Safety valves for horizontal application, must also to be set in a
horizontal position ( 5 bar).

7.2 Representation
SAFE-TCS
SAFE-TCP
SAFE-TC
Bellow
Closed cap
Open cap
fig. 6

8.0 Troubleshooting
In the event of malfunction or faulty operating performance check that the installation and
adjustment work has been carried out and completed in accordance with these Operating
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
- It is essential that the safety regulations are observed when identifying faults.
-
If malfunctions cannot be eliminate with the help of the following table

“9.0 Troubleshooting table”, the supplier or manufacturer should be consulted.
9.0 Troubleshooting table

ATTENTION !
- read point 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair work!
- read point 6.0 before restarting the plant !
Fault Possible cause Corrective measures

Safety valve does not Flange covers not removed. Remove flange covers.
respond,
Test gag still in place. Remove test gag.
no flow
Spring blocked. Remove pipe or screw projecting into
bonnet through inspection connection.
Set pressure too high. Reset (point 7.1) or replace the safety
valve.
Stainless steel bellow defective, Replace the safety valve.
no back-pressure compensation.
Back-pressure not taken into account. Reset (point 7.1) or, if necessary,
replace the safety valve.
The use of a stainless steel bellow to
compensate for back-pressure should
be considered.
Medium viscous or sticky Use bellow / heating jacket. Insert
rupture disc upstream if necessary.
The valves and piping must be Heating !

protected against freezing and
solidifying media.
Stem cannot be lifted. Pressure less than 85% of set It must be possible to lift the spindle at
pressure. over 85% of the set pressure.
Safety valve seat leaking. Working pressure higher than 90% of Working pressure must be less than
set pressure. 90% of the set pressure.
At low pressures: lever not in neutral Press lever into neutral position
position with closed cap. (towards bonnet).
Safety valve flattering. Refer to separate point “Flattering”.
Medium contaminated; foreign body Raise spindle briefly or, if necessary,
between seat and disc. replace safety valve.
Use of a soft sealing disc should be
considered.


Flange broken. Damage during transport. Replace safety valve.
Flange bolts not evenly tightened. Replace safety valve.
Transfer of forces such as bending or Install free of tension.
torsional forces.
Pressure surges. Safety valve not installed at highest Install safety valve at highest point.
point.
Valve drainage inadequate or not fitted. Install drainage system a required by
regulations.
Valve constantly blows off. Transport fastening not removed. Remove transport fastening (red screw
above cap, Figure 990).
Spring corroded by medium and Replace safety valve.
broken. In the case of vapour, select open cap
or bonnet if possible.
Injury owing to medium. Danger of injury from medium (e.g. Replace safety valve.
liquids) emerging from valve. Select design with closed bonnet and
cap.
Install a guard if necessary.
Injury from vapour discharge Install a guard if necessary
(open bonnet / cap)
Flattering. Pressure loss >3% in line to valve. Reduce resistance by chamfering or
radius in connection socket. Select
larger line if necessary.
Poor welding (root pass), gaskets at Change conditions.
inlet and outlet flanges too small or not
concentric.
Safety valve capacity too high. Install smaller safety valve.
Burner capacity too low. Install smaller safety valve.
Blow-off line too long or diameter too Use larger diameter or back-pressure
small. compensation by stainless steel
bellow.
Inlet and/or outlet socket too small. Install with dimensions larger than DN
of inlet and outlet lines.
Back-pressure higher than 10%. Install stainless steel bellow for
pressure compensation.
Capacity too low. Safety valves not applied unsuitable for Select and install suitable safety
plant conditions. valves.
Safety valve not applied in line with Adjust conditions.
current DIN, AD, TRD, etc. rules.

10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part

ATTENTION !
The following points must be observed:
- Pressureless pipe system.
- Medium must be cool.
- Plant must be drained.
- Purge piping systems in case of caustic, inflammable, aggressive or toxic
media.
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and
Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG“ valid at the time of delivery or, by way of
departure, in the contract of sale itself.
We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the
confirmed application.
No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling
or disregard of operating and installation instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations.
This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under
conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.
Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist
appointed by us.
No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. The right to replacement
delivery is excluded.
The warranty shall not cover maintenance work, installation of external parts, design
modifications or natural wear.
Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the
competent cargo-handling depot, the railway company or carrier company immediately or
else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated.
The manufacturer will accept warranty liability only if there has been no third party
tampering.
Technology for the Future.

GERMAN QUALITY VALVES
ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33750 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock
Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159
Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com

ARI-SAFE
Safety valve
Full lift safety valve / Standard safety valve
ARI-SAFE
Full lift safety valve D/G
Standard safety valve F
• Type-test approved acc. to
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2 / TRD421
• TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G Figure 901/911
• TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F Figure 901/911 Fig. 901 902 911 912
• Further approvals: see inside Page 2
ARI-SAFE
Standard safety valve
for the heating technology
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / DIN EN 12828 / TRD 721
• TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D/G/H Figure 903
• TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D Figure 904 Fig. 903 904
Page 14
ARI-SAFE-P
Standard safety valve D/G/F Fig. 900 Fig. 940
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2
• TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G Figure 921/923
• TÜV · SV · . . -811 · F Figure 921/923 Fig. 921 922 923 924
Page 20
ARI-SAFE-TC
Full lift safety valve D/G
Standard safety valve F
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2 / TRD421
• TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G Figure 941-943
• TÜV · SV · . . -995 · F Figure 941/943 Fig. 941 942 943
Page 26
ARI-SAFE-TC
for the heating technology
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / DIN EN 12828 / TRD 721
• TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D/G/H Figure 945
Fig. 920 Fig. 950/960
• TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D Figure 946 Fig. 945 946 Page 30
ARI-SAFE-TCP
Standard safety valve D/G/F
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G Figure 961-963
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · F Figure 961/963 Fig. 961 962 963
Page 34
ARI-SAFE-TCS Features:
Standard safety valve D/G/F • Direct loaded with spring
• Type-test approved acc. to • Wear resistant seat/disc
DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / AD2000-A2 • Precision disc alignment and guide
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G Figure 951-953 • Possible with soft seal disc
• TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · F Figure 951/953 Fig. 951 952 953 • Possible with EPDM bellows
ALSO FOR HORIZONTAL APPLICATION • Possible with stainless steel bellows
Page 38
• ARI-SAFE-TC/TCP/TCS:
All common thread types
Edition 09/19 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com! Data sheet 900005 englisch (english)
ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-- Full lift safety valve D/G, Standard safety valve F
Fig. ... .901 Fig. ... .902 Fig. ... .911 Fig. ... .912
closed lifting device, open lifting device, gastight cap, open lifting device,
closed bonnet open bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet
Flangeholes /
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter Temperature range Flange
-thickness tolerances
12.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +300°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
23.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN25/16 (PN25/10) EN-JS1049 DN200/300 - 250/350 -10°C to +350°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2534/2533
25.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN40/16 EN-JS1049 DN20/32 - 250/350 -10°C to +350°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2535/2533
34.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN25/16 (PN25/10) 1.0619+N DN200/300 - 250/350 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2544/2543
35.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 PN40/16 1.0619+N DN15/25 - 250/350 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
55.901 / 911 PN40/16 1.4408 DN15/25 - 250/350 -60°C to +400°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
Construction
Safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded
Requirement
Acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, material selection observe TRB 801 No. 45!
Type-test approval
Full lift safety valve:
Fig. 901/902/911/912 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G
(acc. to VdTÜV-leaflet 663)
Standard safety valve: Fig. 901/911 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD421 and AD2000-A2.
Details required
Medium gasform: Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), Isotropic exponent, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Medium liquid: Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (barg), back pressure (barg)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-Safety valve, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...bar
DN15/25 - 100/150 optional:
standard: without metal bellows
with metal bellows (refer to page 14)
Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed on request
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request) on request
2 Edition 09/19 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com!

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.901/902/911/912 Fig. 23./25.901/902/911/912 Fig. 34./35.901/902/911/912 Fig. 55.901/911
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
2 Seat X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218 A4 - 70
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT (≥ DN65: EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
7 x Gasket Pure graphite (CrNi laminated with graphite)
8 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181 A4
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
12 Disc X39CrMo17-1+QT, 1.4122+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
22 Plug screw 5.8 A4
27 x Sealing ring CuFA (≥ DN125: Graphit) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
28 Cap, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
29 Cap, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
31 x Packing rings Pure graphite
35 Lift fork EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030 (DN200: GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N) GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
36 Lever, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
37 x Spring FDSiCr / 51CrV4, 1.8159 X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
42 Bonnet, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
43 Bellows (optional) EPDM 70 Shore A
55 Bellows unit (optional) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
Balanced piston
70
(at bellows) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Spring ranges: Standard design

(barü) 0,2 - 0,45 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,3 0,2 - 0,3
(barü) > 0,45 - 0,9 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,4 - 0,75 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,3 - 0,5 > 0,3 - 0,35
(barü) > 0,9 - 1,3 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 0,75 - 1,1 > 1 - 1,5 > 0,5 - 0,85 > 0,35 - 0,6
(barü) > 1,3 - 2 > 1,5 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,1 - 1,5 > 1,5 - 1,9 > 0,85 - 1,1 > 0,6 - 0,7
(barü) > 2 - 2,5 > 2,5 - 4,5 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 1,9 > 1,9 - 2,3 > 1,1 - 1,4 > 0,7 - 0,9
(barü) > 2,5 - 3,2 > 4,5 - 8,5 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 3 > 1,9 - 2,5 > 2,3 - 2,7 > 1,4 - 1,8 > 0,9 - 1,5
(barü) > 3,2 - 4,3 > 8,5 - 19 > 3,6 - 5 > 3,6 - 5 > 3 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 2,95 > 2,7 - 3,3 > 1,8 - 2,0 > 1,5 - 1,9
(barü) > 4,3 - 5,6 > 19 - 28 >5-9 >5-9 > 3,6 - 5 > 2,95 - 4 > 3,3 - 4,1 > 2,0 - 2,2 > 1,9 - 2,6
(barü) > 5,6 - 10 > 28 - 35 > 9 - 16 > 9 - 14 >5-9 > 4 - 5,7 > 4,1 - 5,5 > 2,2 - 2,4 > 2,6 - 3,0
Fig. 901/902/911/912
Full lift safety valve
(barü) > 10 - 20 > 35 - 40 > 16 - 22 > 14 - 19 > 9 - 14 > 5,7 - 8,2 > 5,5 - 7,4 > 2,4 - 2,7 > 3,0 - 4,5
(barü) > 20 - 25,9 > 22 - 28 > 19 - 25 > 14 - 19 > 8,2 - 12 > 7,4 - 11 > 2,7 - 3,1 > 4,5 - 6,0
(barü) > 25,9 - 40 > 28 - 34 > 19 - 24 > 12 - 17 > 11 - 16 > 3,1 - 4,0 > 6,0 - 7,0
(barü) > 34 - 40 > 17 - 24 > 16 - 21 > 4,0 - 4,8 > 7,0 - 8,5
(barü) > 24 - 27 > 21 - 26 > 4,8 - 5,6 > 8,5 - 10,0
(barü) > 5,6 - 6,8 > 10,0 - 11,5
(barü) > 6,8 - 7,8 > 11,5 - 13,0
(barü) > 7,8 - 9,5 > 13,0 - 14,0
(barü) > 9,5 - 11,0 > 14,0 - 15,0
(barü) Information / restriction of technical rules need to be observed! > 11,0 - 13,0 > 15,0 - 16,0
(barü) A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available. > 13,0 - 15,0 > 16,0 - 20,0
(barü) The engineer, designing a system or a plant, is responsible for the selection of the correct valve. > 15,0 - 17,5
(barü) Resistance and fitness must be verified > 17,5 - 21,0
(barü) (contact manufacturer for information, refer to Product overview and Resistance list). > 21,0 - 25,0
Spring ranges: Bellows design (optional)

(barü) 5 - 6,4 3 - 3,7 2,5 - 3,3 2,5 - 3,2 2,6 - 3,6 2,8 - 3,4 2,5 - 3,7 2,5 - 3,3 2,5 - 3,5 1,1 - 1,5 1,1 - 1,3 2,4 - 2,7 2,1 -2,4
(barü) > 6,4 - 7,7 > 3,7 - 4,6 > 3,3 - 4,6 > 3,2 - 4 > 3,6 - 4,5 > 3,4 - 4,5 > 3,7 - 4,6 > 3,3 - 4,5 > 3,5 - 4,2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,3 - 1,7 > 2,7 - 2,9 > 2,4 - 2,6
(barü) > 7,7 - 10 > 4,6 - 6,3 > 4,6 - 5,4 > 4 - 5,5 > 4,5 - 5,6 > 4,5 - 8,4 > 4,6 - 5,9 > 4,5 - 5,8 > 4,2 - 4,9 > 2 -2,5 > 1,7 - 2,1 > 2,9 - 3,1 > 2,6 - 2,9
(barü) > 10 - 16 > 6,3 - 8,4 > 5,4 - 7 > 5,5 - 6,4 > 5,6 - 7,5 > 8,4 - 10 > 5,9 - 8 > 5,8 - 7,5 > 4,9 - 5,6 > 2,5 - 2,9 > 2,1 - 2,4 > 3,1 - 3,3 > 2,9 - 3,2
(barü) > 16 - 18,5 > 8,4 - 10,2 > 7 - 9 > 6,4 - 7,9 > 7,5 - 10 > 10 - 11,5 > 8 - 10 > 7,5 - 8,9 > 5,6 - 7 > 2,9 - 3,5 > 2,4 - 2,8 > 3,3 - 3,6 > 3,2 - 3,6
(barü) > 18,5 - 26 > 10,2 - 13 > 9 - 11,7 > 7,9 - 11,5 > 10 - 12,5 > 11,5 - 16 > 10 - 18 > 8,9 - 10,5 >7-8 > 3,5 - 4,2 > 2,8 - 3,1 > 3,6 - 3,9 > 3,6 - 4,1
(barü) > 26 - 40 > 13 - 17 > 11,7 - 16 > 11,5 - 18,5 > 12,5 - 16 > 16 - 18,5 > 18 - 24 > 10,5 - 13 > 8 - 9,3 > 4,2 - 5,1 > 3,1 - 3,4 > 3,9 - 4,1 > 4,1 - 4,6
(barü) > 17 - 27,5 > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 25 > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 23 > 24 - 26 > 13 - 18 > 9,3 - 11,5 > 5,1 - 6,5 > 3,4 - 3,9 > 4,1 - 4,3 > 4,6 - 5,2
Fig. 901/911
(barü) > 22 - 30 > 18 - 23 > 11,5 - 14 > 6,5 - 7,5 > 3,9 - 4,8 > 4,3 - 4,8 > 5,2 - 5,8
(barü) > 14 - 20 > 7,5 - 9 > 4,8 - 5,8 > 4,8 - 5,5 > 5,8 - 6,5
(barü) > 9 - 10,5 > 5,8 - 6,8 > 5,5, - 6,5 > 6,5 - 7,2
(barü) > 10,5 - 12,6 > 6,8 - 8,1 > 6,5 - 7,9 > 7,2 - 8,3
(barü) > 12,6 - 17 > 8,1 - 9,7 > 7,9 - 9,5 > 8,3 - 9,3
(barü) > 17 -25 > 9,7 - 11,3 > 9,5 - 12,3 > 9,3 - 10
(barü) > 11,3 - 13 > 12,3 - 15,9 > 10 - 10,8
(barü) > 13 - 15 > 15,9 -20 > 10,8 - 11,5
(barü) > 15 - 18 > 11,5 - 12,2
(barü) > 12,2 - 13
Edition 09/19 - Data subject to alteration - Regularly updated data on www.ari-armaturen.com! 3

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 13 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125 165 200
A0 (mm2) 133 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272 21382 31416
l (mm) 80 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225 300 325
l1 (mm) 90 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285 305 340
H (mm) 260 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890 1105 1175
H (Bellows design) (mm) 290 310 335 390 445 500 620 690 808 919 953 1215 1262
X (mm) 150 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500 500 500
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408 -- --
C
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408 521 600
(Widthupport
1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 362 408 521 600
tongues)
1.4408 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 362 408 521 600
(inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Drainhole with plug
Standard for EN-JL1040, EN-JS1049 1.0619+N, optional at 1.4408
Weights
standard (kg) 7 8,5 10 14 20 28 40 53 80 125 165 280 430
optional: Bellows design (kg) 7,5 9,5 11,5 16 22,5 32 47 59 93 140 180 310 470
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 -- --
ØD1 PN25 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 360 425
PN40 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300 375 450
PN10 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 445 505
ØD2
PN16 (mm) 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405 460 520
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 -- --
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- 18 18 18 19 20 22 24 24 27 29 37 40
b1
1.0619+N (mm) 16 20 20 20 21 22 24 26 28 31 34 37 40
1.4408 (mm) 16 16 16 18 19 20 22 22 23 26 28 37 40
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32 -- --
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 31 33 33 35
b2
1.0619+N (mm) 18 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 27 29 33 35
1.4408 (mm) 18 15 16 17 17 17 17 19 19 24 26 33 35
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2543 / 2545 / 28605 / 28607, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
Standard-Flangeholes
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
ØK (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 400 460
PN10 DIN 2532
n x Ød (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 12x22 16x22
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355 410 470
PN16 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26 12x26 16x26
ØK (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 310 370 -- --
PN25 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 12x26 12x30 -- --
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 320 385 -- --
PN40 DIN 2545
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26 12x30 12x33 -- --
1) also with 8 bore holes acc. to DIN EN 1092-1/-2 possible.
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined by linear interpolation of the given
Pressure-temperature-ratings
temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
EN-JS1049 25 (bar) on request 25 24,3 23 21,8 20 17,5 -- --
EN-JS1049 40 (bar) on request 40 38,8 36,8 34,8 32 28 -- --
acc. to manufacturers standard -60°C to <-10°C 1) -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.0619+N 25 (bar) 18,7 25 23,9 22 20 17,2 16 14,8 8,2
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
1) Studs and nuts made of A4-70 (at temperatures below -10°C)
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: DN15-100; 250 < 3,5 bar, DN125-200 < 4,0 bar)
DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G 0,74 0,7 0,75 0,7
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F 0,52 0,54 0,48 0,45 0,56 0,52

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Capacity: Saturated steam
Capacity saturated steam (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Set pressure Saturated steam (kg/h)
0,2 (barg) 42 81 126 210 324 506 855 1295 2024 2510 3490 6937 8931
0,4 (barg) 60 120 185 307 473 739 1250 1890 2960 3630 5050 9694 12615
0,5 (barg) 67 132 207 344 529 827 1400 2120 3310 4070 5660 10859 14204
0,6 (barg) 74 147 230 383 590 923 1560 2360 3690 4470 6220 11934 15698
0,8 (barg) 87 174 272 453 698 1090 1840 2790 4360 5240 7280 13901 18492
1 (barg) 100 203 317 526 811 1270 2140 3245 5070 6030 8385 15868 21306
1,5 (barg) 133 272 425 707 1090 1700 2875 4355 6800 8050 11200 20739 28637
2 (barg) 164 305 477 792 1220 1900 3220 4880 7625 10125 14080 25647 36333
2,5 (barg) 194 366 572 950 1460 2285 3865 5855 9145 11990 16660 30689 43601
3 (barg) 224 424 662 1100 1695 2645 4475 6775 10600 13880 19300 35874 50185
4 (barg) 280 535 837 1390 2140 3350 5650 8570 13400 17550 24400 45676 62689
5 (barg) 335 640 1000 1665 2565 4000 6770 10260 16000 21000 29250 54723 75043
6 (barg) 390 745 1165 1940 2990 4665 7890 11950 18650 24500 34050 63698 87350
7 (barg) 445 850 1330 2210 3400 5320 9000 13600 21300 27900 38800 72658 99638
8 (barg) 500 957 1495 2485 3820 5980 10100 15300 23900 31350 43600 81599 111898
9 (barg) 554 1060 1660 2755 4245 6630 11200 16950 26500 34800 48400 90525 124139
10 (barg) 609 1165 1820 3025 4665 7290 12300 18650 29150 38250 53200 99452 136381
11 (barg) 664 1270 1985 3300 5080 7940 13400 20300 31750 41600 58000 108370 148610
12 (barg) 718 1375 2150 3570 5500 8590 14500 22000 34350 45100 62700 117282 160831
13 (barg) 773 1480 2310 3840 5920 9250 15600 23650 37000 48500 67500 126197 173057
14 (barg) 827 1580 2475 4110 6340 9900 16700 25350 39600 52000 72300 135113 185284
15 (barg) 882 1690 2640 4385 6760 10550 17800 27000 42200 55400 77000 144035 197518
16 (barg) 936 1790 2800 4655 7170 11200 18950 28700 44800 58800 81800 152960 209758
17 (barg) 991 1900 2965 4930 7590 11850 20050 30350 47400 62200 86600 161889 222002
18 (barg) 1046 2000 3130 5200 8010 12500 21150 32050 50100 65700 91400 170826 234257
19 (barg) 1101 2100 3295 5470 8430 13150 22250 33700 52700 69100 96200 179777 246532
← max. set pressure stainless steel version
20 (barg) 1156 2210 3460 5750 8850 13800 23350 35400 55300 72600 101000 188724 258800
21 (barg) 1210 2320 3620 6020 9250 14500 24500 37100 57900 76000 105800 197693
22 (barg) 1265 2420 3790 6290 9700 15150 25600 38800 60600 79500 110900 206658
24 (barg) 1375 2635 4120 6840 10500 16450 27850 42100 65900 86500 120600 224640
25 (barg) 1431 2740 4280 7120 10950 17100 28950 43800 90200 125500 233648
26 (barg) 1486 2850 4450 7390 11350 17800 30050 93700 130300
27 (barg) 1541 2950 4620 7670 11820 18460 31220 96950
28 (barg) 1597 3060 4780 7950 12250 19100 32300
30 (barg) 1708 3270 5120 8500 13100 20450 34550
32 (barg) 1819 3490 5450 9060 13950 21800 36800
34 (barg)
40 (barg)

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Capacity: Air
Capacity air (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Set pressure Air 0°C and 1,013 bara (Nm3/h)
0,2 (barg) 49 95 148 246 380 594 1003 1520 2375 2945 4100 8150 10398
0,4 (barg) 72 143 223 370 570 891 1505 2280 3565 4380 6090 11695 15219
0,5 (barg) 82 161 252 419 646 1009 1705 2585 4035 4970 6910 13256 17340
0,6 (barg) 91 182 284 472 728 1135 1920 2910 4545 5520 7675 14731 19376
0,8 (barg) 110 218 341 567 873 1365 2305 3490 5460 6555 9115 17428 23182
1 (barg) 126 255 398 661 1019 1590 2690 4075 6370 7575 10530 19963 26803
1,5 (barg) 168 344 538 894 1378 2150 3640 5510 8610 10195 14180 26284 36294
2 (barg) 209 388 607 1008 1550 2425 4100 6210 9700 12890 17920 32693 46314
2,5 (barg) 248 468 731 1215 1870 2925 4945 7490 11700 15330 21300 39310 55850
3 (barg) 288 544 850 1410 2175 3400 5750 8700 13600 17840 24800 46140 64547
4 (barg) 362 692 1080 1800 2770 4330 7310 11080 17300 22725 31600 59135 81161
5 (barg) 436 834 1300 2160 3330 5210 8800 13340 20840 27350 38000 71211 97653
6 (barg) 510 975 1520 2530 3900 6090 10300 15600 24370 31900 44400 83238 114146
7 (barg) 583 1115 1745 2900 4465 6970 11790 17860 27900 36600 50900 95264 130638
8 (barg) 657 1255 1965 3260 5030 7860 13280 20100 31430 41200 57300 107291 147130
9 (barg) 730 1395 2185 3630 5590 8740 14770 22370 34960 45800 63800 119318 163623
10 (barg) 804 1540 2400 3990 6150 9610 16250 24600 38500 50500 70200 131344 180115
11 (barg) 878 1680 2625 4360 6720 10500 17750 26900 42000 55100 76600 143371 196607
12 (barg) 951 1820 2845 4730 7290 11380 19240 29150 45500 59700 83100 155398 213099
13 (barg) 1025 1960 3070 5090 7850 12270 20730 31400 49000 64400 89500 167424 229592
14 (barg) 1099 2100 3290 5460 8400 13150 22200 33650 52600 69000 96000 179451 246084
15 (barg) 1173 2245 3500 5830 8980 14030 23700 35900 56100 73600 102400 191477 262576
16 (barg) 1246 2385 3725 6190 9540 14900 25200 38200 59600 78200 108800 203504 279069
17 (barg) 1320 2530 3950 6560 10100 15800 26700 40400 63100 82900 115300 215531 295561
18 (barg) 1394 2670 4170 6920 10670 16650 28100 42700 66700 87500 121700 227557 312053
19 (barg) 1467 2800 4390 7300 11240 17550 29600 44900 70200 92100 128100 239584 328546
20 (barg) 1541 2950 4610 7660 11800 18400 31150 47200 73700 96800 134600 251610 345038
21 (barg) 1614 3090 4830 8020 12370 19300 32650 49400 77300 101400 141000 263637
22 (barg) 1688 3230 5050 8390 12930 20200 34150 51700 80800 106000 147500 275664
24 (barg) 1835 3515 5490 9120 14060 21970 37100 56200 87900 115300 160400 299717
25 (barg) 1909 3655 5710 9490 14620 22850 38600 58500 120000 166900 311743
26 (barg) 1983 3800 5930 9850 15190 23730 40100 124600 173300
27 (barg) 2057 3930 6160 10240 15770 24630 41650 129350
28 (barg) 2130 4080 6370 10600 16320 25500 43100
30 (barg) 2277 4360 6810 11320 17450 27250 46100
32 (barg) 2425 4640 7250 12050 18570 29000 49100
34 (barg) 2572 4925 7700 12790 19700 30800 52050
40 (barg) 3014 5770 9030 14477 23810 36100 61000

ARI-SAFE 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Capacity: Water
Capacity water (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN1 / DN2 15 / 25 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250 200 / 300 250 / 350
Set pressure Water 20°C (t/h)
0,2 (bar) 1,63 3,28 5,13 8,53 13,1 20,5 30,8 46,7 73 94,9 132 286 390
0,5 (bar) 2,60 5,19 8,12 13,5 20,8 32,5 48,8 73,9 115 150 209 452 616
1 (bar) 3,68 7,35 11,5 19,1 29,4 45,9 69 104 163 212 295 639 872
2 (bar) 5,20 10,4 16,2 27 41,6 64,9 97,5 148 231 300 417 903 1233
3 (bar) 6,38 12,7 19,9 33 50,9 79,5 119 181 283 368 511 1106 1510
4 (bar) 7,36 14,7 22,9 38,1 58,7 91,8 138 209 326 424 590 1278 1743
5 (bar) 8,24 16,4 25,7 42,6 65,5 102 154 233 365 474 660 1428 1949
6 (bar) 9,02 18 28,1 46,7 72 112 169 256 400 520 723 1565 2135
7 (bar) 9,75 19,4 30,4 50,4 77,7 121 182 276 432 562 781 1690 2306
8 (bar) 10,41 20,8 32,5 53,9 83,1 130 195 295 461 600 835 1807 2465
9 (bar) 11,05 22 34,4 57,2 88,1 138 207 313 490 637 885 1917 2615
10 (bar) 11,64 23,2 36,3 60,3 92,9 145 218 330 516 671 933 2020 2756
11 (bar) 12,21 24,4 38 63,2 97,4 152 229 346 540 703 977 2119 2891
12 (bar) 12,76 25,4 39,7 66 102 159 239 362 565 735 1022 2213 3019
13 (bar) 13,28 26,5 41,4 68,7 106 165 249 376 587 764 1062 2303 3143
14 (bar) 13,78 27,5 42,9 71,3 110 172 258 391 611 794 1104 2390 3261
16 (bar) 14,73 29,4 45,9 76,3 117 184 276 418 653 849 1181 2555 3486
18 (bar) 15,62 31,2 48,7 80,9 125 195 293 443 692 900 1252 2710 3698
19 (bar) 16,05 32 49,9 82,9 128 200 300 454 710 923 1284 2785 3799
20 (bar) 16,47 32,8 51,3 85,3 131 205 308 467 730 949 1320 2857 3898
21 (bar) 16,87 33,7 52,6 87,4 135 210 316 479 748 973 1350 2928
24 (bar) 18,04 36 56,2 93,4 144 225 338 512 800 1040 1443 3130
25 (bar) 18,41 36,7 57,4 95,3 147 229 345 522 1059 1473 3194
26 (bar) 18,78 37,4 58,5 97,2 150 234 352 1080 1502
27 (bar) 19,13 38,2 59,6 99 153 238 358 1100
28 (bar) 19,49 38,9 60,7 101 155 243 365
30 (bar) 20,17 40,2 62,9 104 161 251 375
32 (bar) 20,83 41,5 64,8 108 166 259 380
34 (bar) 21,47 42,8 66,9 111 171 268 400
40 (bar) 23,29 46,4 72,5 124,8 185,4 289,7 435

ARI-SAFE-SN ANSI (Semi-Nozzle-TÜV) 901 / 902 / 911 / 912
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-SN ANSI (Semi-Nozzle) - Full lift safety valve D/G, Standard safety valve F
Fig. ... .901 Fig. ... .902 Fig. ... .911 Fig. ... .912
closed bonnet open bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet

32.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 ANSI150/150 SA216 WCB 1" x 2" - 6" x 10" -29°C to +425°C ASME B16.5
35.901 / 902 / 911 / 912 ANSI300/150 SA216 WCB 1" x 2" - 6" x 10" -29°C to +425°C ASME B16.5
52.901 / 911 ANSI150/150 SA351 CF8M 1" x 2" - 6" x 10" -60°C to +400°C ASME B16.5
55.901 / 911 ANSI300/150 SA351 CF8M 1" x 2" - 6" x 10" -60°C to +400°C ASME B16.5
Type-test approval
Fig. 901/902/911/912 TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G
Construction / Application
Safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded; steam, gases, vapours and liquids
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 421 / AD2000-A2
Sizing
Calculation acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD-leaflet A2
Details required
Medium: Gas Mass flow (kg/h), molar mass (kg/kmol), temperature (°C), set pressure (bar), back gauge pressure (bar)
Medium: Liquid Mass flow (kg/h), density (kg/m3), viscosity, temperature (°C), set pressure (bar), back gauge pressure (bar)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-SN ANSI - safety valve, Figure ..., Nominal diameter .../..., ANSI ..., Material ..., Set pressure ... bar
standard: without metal bellows 1" x 2" - 6" x 10" optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (gauge) (higher on request) on request

Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 32.901/902/911/912; 35.901/902/911/912 Fig. 52.901/911; 55.901/911
1 Body SA216 WCB SA351 CF8M
2 Seat SA479 Gr.316 Ti SA479 Gr.316 Ti
3 Studs SA193 B7 SA193 B8
4 x Spindle guide NPS ≤ 2": SA276 Gr.420; NPS > 2": SA395 / SA276 Gr.440 NPS ≤ 2": SA479 Gr.316 Ti; NPS > 2": SA351 CF8M
7 x Gasket GRAPHIT (CrNi laminated with graphite)
8 Hexagon nut SA194 2H SA194 8
11 Bonnet, closed SA395 SA351 CF8M
12 x Disc SA276 Gr.440 SA479 Gr.316 Ti
14 x Spindle SA276 Gr.420 SA479 Gr.316 Ti
17 Adjusting screw SA276 Gr.420 SA479 Gr.316 L
22 Plug screw (optional) SA193-B7 SA193-B8
27 x Sealing ring CuFA SA479 Gr.316 Ti
28 Cap, closed SA395 SA351 CF8M
29 Cap, open SA395 --
30 Cap, gastight SA395 SA351 CF8M
31 x Packing ring GRAPHIT
35 Lift fork SA395 SA351 CF8M
36 Lever, closed SA395 SA479 Gr.316 Ti
37 x Spring SA401 Gr.9254, SA29 Gr.6150 SA313 Gr.316
41 Lever, open SA395 --
42 Bonnet, open SA395 --
55 Stainless steel bellows unit (optional) SA240 / SA479 Gr.316 Ti SA240 / SA479 Gr.316 Ti
70 Balanced piston SA240 Gr.316 Ti SA479 Gr.316 Ti
└ Spare parts
Coefficient of discharge Kdr VdTÜV (Values for D/G variabel: 1" - 4" < 3,5 bar, 6" < 4,0 bar)
1 1/2"x2"
NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
1 1/2"x2 1/2"
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · D/G (bar) 0,74 0,70
TÜV · SV · . . -663 · F (bar) 0,54 0,48 0,45
Intermediate values for max. permissible operational pressures can be determined

by linear interpolation of the given temperature / pressure chart.
acc. to ASME 16.34 -29°C bis 38°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 325°C 350°C 375°C 400°C 425°C
SA216WCB ANSI150 (bar) 19,6 19,2 17,7 15,8 13,8 12,1 10,2 9,3 8,4 7,4 6,5 5,5
SA216WCB ANSI300 (bar) 51,1 50,1 46,6 45,1 43,8 41,9 39,8 38,7 37,6 36,4 34,7 38,8
acc. to ASME 16.34 -60°C bis 38°C 50°C 100°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 325°C 350°C 375°C 400°C 425°C
SA351CF8M ANSI150 (bar) 19 18,4 16,2 14,8 13,7 12,1 10,2 9,3 8,4 7,4 6,5 --
SA351CF8M ANSI300 (bar) 49,6 48,1 42,2 38,5 35,7 33,4 31,6 30,9 30,3 29,9 29,4 --
Information / restriction of technical rules need to be observed!

A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available.
The engineer, designing a system or a plant, is responsible for the selection of the correct valve.
Resistance and fitness must be verified (contact manufacturer for information, refer to Product overview and Resistance list).

Technical data / Spring ranges
NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Center-to-face dimensions acc. to API 526 (dedicated to API-Orifice)

Bodysize D, E F G H J L M P Q R
l (mm) 114,3 120,7 120,7 123,8 123,8 165,1 184,2 228,6 241,3 266,7
l1 (mm) 104,8 123,8 123,8 130,2 136,5 155,6 177,8 181 239,7 239,7
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 22,5 29 29 36 45 58,5 90 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 398 661 661 1018 1590 2688 6362 6362 8825 12272
H (mm) 280 330 330 390 435 545 690 690 845 890
H (with stainless steel bellows) (mm) 335 390 390 445 500 620 808 808 919 953
X (mm) 150 200 200 250 300 350 500 500 500
C (Width of support tongues) (mm) -- -- -- -- 204 242 332 362 405
(inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Drainhole with plug
Optional, not standard
Weights
Standard (kg) 12 18 18 23 30 47 80 82 140 170
Option: stainless steel bellows (kg) 13,5 20 20 25,5 34 54 90 92 155 185
Standard-flange dimensions Flanges acc. to ASME / ANSI B16.5

ANSI150 (mm) 108 127 127 127 153 191 229 280 280
ØD1
ANSI300 (mm) 124 156 156 156 165 210 254 318 318
ØD2 ANSI150 (mm) 153 153 178 191 191 229 280 343 407
ANSI150 (mm) 17,5 20,6 20,6 20,6 22,3 28,6 31,8 36,5 36,5
b1
ANSI300 (mm) 17,5 20,6 20,6 20,6 22,3 28,6 31,8 36,5 36,5
b2 ANSI150 (mm) 19,1 19,1 22,3 23,8 23,8 23,8 25,4 28,6 30,2
NPS 1" 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10"
ØK (mm) 79 98 120,5 140 152,5 190,5 241,5 298,5 362
ANSI150
n x Ød (mm) 4 x 16 4 x 16 4 x 19 4 x 19 4 x 19 8 x 19 8 x 22 8 x 22 12 x 25
ØK (mm) 89 114,5 127 -- 168 200 270 -- --
ANSI300
n x Ød (mm) 4 x 19 4 x 22 8 x 19 -- 8 x 22 8 x 22 12 x 22 -- --
1 1/2“x2“
NPS 1“x2“ 1 1/2“x3“ 2“x3“ 3“x4“ 4“x6“ 6“x8“ 6“x10“
1 1/2“x2 1/2“

(barü) 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,5
(barü) > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,4 - 0,75 > 0,5 - 1
(barü) > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 0,75 - 1,1 > 1 - 1,5
(barü) > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,1 - 1,5 > 1,5 - 1,9
(barü) > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 1,9 > 1,9 - 2,3
(barü) > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 3 > 1,9 - 2,5 > 2,3 - 2,7
Full lift safety valve > 3,6 - 5 > 3 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 2,95 > 2,7 - 3,3
(barü)
Fig. 901902/911/912 (barü) >5-9 > 3,6 - 5 > 2,95 - 4 > 3,3 - 4,1
(barü) > 9 - 16 >5-9 > 4 - 5,7 > 4,1 - 5,5
(barü) > 16 - 22 > 9 - 14 > 5,7 - 8,2 > 5,5 - 7,4
(barü) > 22 - 28 > 14 - 19 > 8,2 - 12 > 7,4 - 11
(barü) > 28 - 34 > 19 - 24 > 12 - 17 > 11 - 16
(barü) > 34 - 40 > 17 - 24 > 16 - 21
(barü) > 24 - 27 > 21 - 26
Spring ranges: Stainless steel bellows (optional)

(barü) 2,5 - 3,3 2,5 - 3,2 2,6 - 3,6 2,8 - 3,4 2,5 - 3,7 2,5 - 3,5 1,1 - 1,5 1,1 - 1,3
(barü) > 3,3 - 4,6 > 3,3 - 4 > 3,6 - 4,5 > 3,4 - 4,5 > 3,7 - 4,6 > 3,5 - 4,2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,3 - 1,7
(barü) > 4,6 - 5,4 > 4 - 5,5 > 4,5 - 5,6 > 4,5 - 8,4 > 4,6 - 5,9 > 4,2 - 4,9 > 2 - 2,5 > 1,7 - 2,1
(barü) > 5,4 - 7 > 5,5 - 6,4 > 5,6 - 7,5 > 8,4 - 10 > 5,9 - 8 > 4,9 - 5,6 > 2,5 - 2,9 > 2,1 - 2,4
(barü) >7-9 > 6,4 - 7,9 > 7,5 - 10 > 10 - 11,5 > 8 - 10 > 5,6 - 7 > 2,9 - 3,5 > 2,4 - 2,8
(barü) > 9 - 11,7 > 7,9 - 11,5 > 10 - 12,5 > 11,5 - 16 > 10 - 18 >7-8 > 3,5 - 4,2 > 2,8 - 3,1
(barü) > 11,7 - 16 > 11,5 - 18,5 > 12,5 - 16 > 16 - 18,5 > 18 - 24 > 8 - 9,3 > 4,2 - 5,1 > 3,1 - 3,4
Standard safety valve (barü) > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 25 > 16 - 22 > 18,5 - 23 > 24 - 26 > 9,3 - 11,5 > 5,1 - 6,5 > 3,4 - 3,9
(barü) > 22 - 30 > 11,5 - 14 > 6,5 - 7,5 > 3,9 - 4,8
Fig. 901/911
(barü) > 14 - 20 > 7,5 - 9 > 4,8 - 5,8
(barü) > 9,0 - 10,5 > 5,8 - 6,8
(barü) > 10,5 - 12,6 > 6,8 - 8,1
(barü) > 12,6 - 17 > 8,1 - 9,7
(barü) > 17 - 25 > 9,7 - 11,3
(barü) > 11,3 - 13
(barü) > 13 - 15
(barü) > 15 - 18


NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Set pressure Saturated steam kg/h
0,2 (barg) 126 210 210 324 506 855 2024 2510 3490
0,4 (barg) 185 307 307 473 739 1250 2960 3630 5050
0,5 (barg) 207 344 344 529 827 1400 3310 4070 5660
0,6 (barg) 230 383 383 590 923 1560 3690 4470 6220
0,8 (barg) 272 453 453 698 1090 1840 4360 5240 7280
1 (barg) 317 526 526 811 1270 2140 5070 6030 8385
1,5 (barg) 425 707 707 1090 1700 2875 6800 8050 11200
2 (barg) 477 792 792 1220 1900 3220 7625 10125 14080
2,5 (barg) 572 950 950 1460 2285 3865 9145 11990 16660
3 (barg) 662 1100 1100 1695 2645 4475 10600 13880 19300
4 (barg) 837 1390 1390 2140 3350 5650 13400 17550 24400
5 (barg) 1000 1665 1665 2565 4000 6770 16000 21000 29250
6 (barg) 1165 1940 1940 2990 4665 7890 18650 24500 34050
7 (barg) 1330 2210 2210 3400 5320 9000 21300 27900 38800
8 (barg) 1495 2485 2485 3820 5980 10100 23900 31350 43600
9 (barg) 1660 2755 2755 4245 6630 11200 26500 34800 48400
10 (barg) 1820 3025 3025 4665 7290 12300 29150 38250 53200
11 (barg) 1985 3300 3300 5080 7940 13400 31750 41600 58000
12 (barg) 2150 3570 3570 5500 8590 14500 34350 45100 62700
13 (barg) 2310 3840 3840 5920 9250 15600 37000 48500 67500
14 (barg) 2475 4110 4110 6340 9900 16700 39600 52000 72300
15 (barg) 2640 4385 4385 6760 10550 17800 42200 55400 77000
16 (barg) 2800 4655 4655 7170 11200 18950 44800 58800 81800
17 (barg) 2965 4930 4930 7590 11850 20050 47400 62200 86600
18 (barg) 3130 5200 5200 8010 12500 21150 50100 65700 91400
19 (barg) 3295 5470 5470 8430 13150 22250 52700 69100 96200
20 (barg) 3460 5750 5750 8850 13800 23350 55300 72600 101000
21 (barg) 3620 6020 6020 9250 14500 24500 57900 76000 105800
22 (barg) 3790 6290 6290 9700 15150 25600 60600 79500 110900
24 (barg) 4120 6840 6840 10500 16450 27850 65900 86500 120600
25 (barg) 4280 7120 7120 10950 17100 28950 90200 125500
26 (barg) 4450 7390 7390 11350 17800 30050 93700 130300
27 (barü) 4620 7670 7670 11820 18460 31220 96950
28 (barg) 4780 7950 7950 12250 19100 32300
30 (barg) 5120 8500 8500 13100 20450 34550
32 (barg) 5450 9060 9060 13950 21800 36800
34 (barg) 5800 9650 9650 14850 23250 39100
40 (barg)

Capacity: Air

NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Set pressure Air in Nm3/h (0°C; 1,013 bara)
0,2 (barg) 148 246 246 380 594 1003 2375 2945 4100
0,4 (barg) 223 370 370 570 891 1505 3565 4380 6090
0,5 (barg) 252 419 419 646 1009 1705 4035 4970 6910
0,6 (barg) 284 472 472 728 1135 1920 4545 5520 7675
0,8 (barg) 341 567 567 873 1365 2305 5460 6555 9115
1 (barg) 398 661 661 1019 1590 2690 6370 7575 10530
1,5 (barg) 538 894 894 1378 2150 3640 8610 10195 14180
2 (barg) 607 1008 1008 1550 2425 4100 9700 12890 17920
2,5 (barg) 731 1215 1215 1870 2925 4945 11700 15330 21300
3 (barg) 850 1410 1410 2175 3400 5750 13600 17840 24800
4 (barg) 1080 1800 1800 2770 4330 7310 17300 22725 31600
5 (barg) 1300 2160 2160 3330 5210 8800 20840 27350 38000
6 (barg) 1520 2530 2530 3900 6090 10300 24370 31900 44400
7 (barg) 1745 2900 2900 4465 6970 11790 27900 36600 50900
8 (barg) 1965 3260 3260 5030 7860 13280 31430 41200 57300
9 (barg) 2185 3630 3630 5590 8740 14770 34960 45800 63800
10 (barg) 2400 3990 3990 6150 9610 16250 38500 50500 70200
11 (barg) 2625 4360 4360 6720 10500 17750 42000 55100 76600
12 (barg) 2845 4730 4730 7290 11380 19240 45500 59700 83100
13 (barg) 3070 5090 5090 7850 12270 20730 49000 64400 89500
14 (barg) 3290 5460 5460 8400 13150 22200 52600 69000 96000
15 (barg) 3500 5830 5830 8980 14030 23700 56100 73600 102400
16 (barg) 3725 6190 6190 9540 14900 25200 59600 78200 108800
17 (barg) 3950 6560 6560 10100 15800 26700 63100 82900 115300
18 (barg) 4170 6920 6920 10670 16650 28100 66700 87500 121700
19 (barg) 4390 7300 7300 11240 17550 29600 70200 92100 128100
20 (barg) 4610 7660 7660 11800 18400 31150 73700 96800 134600
21 (barg) 4830 8020 8020 12370 19300 32650 77300 101400 141000
22 (barg) 5050 8390 8390 12930 20200 34150 80800 106000 147500
24 (barg) 5490 9120 9120 14060 21970 37100 87900 115300 160400
25 (barg) 5710 9490 9490 14620 22850 38600 120000 166900
26 (barg) 5930 9850 9850 15190 23730 40100 124600 173300
27 (barü) 6160 10240 10240 15770 24630 41650 129350
28 (barg) 6370 10600 10600 16320 25500 43100
30 (barg) 6810 11320 11320 17450 27250 46100
32 (barg) 7250 12050 12050 18570 29000 49100
34 (barg) 7700 12790 12790 19700 30800 52050
40 (barg) 9030 14477 14477 23810 36100 61000

Capacity: Water

NPS 1"x2" 1 1/2"x2" 1 1/2"x2 1/2" 1 1/2"x3" 2"x3" 3"x4" 4"x6" 6"x8" 6"x10"
Set pressure Water m3/h
0,2 (barg) 5,13 8,53 8,53 13,1 20,5 30,8 73 94,9 132
0,5 (barg) 8,12 13,5 13,5 20,8 32,5 48,8 115 150 209
1 (barg) 11,5 19,1 19,1 29,4 45,9 69 163 212 295
2 (barg) 16,2 27 27 41,6 64,9 97,5 231 300 417
3 (barg) 19,9 33 33 50,9 79,5 119 283 368 511
4 (barg) 22,9 38,1 38,1 58,7 91,8 138 326 424 590
5 (barg) 25,7 42,6 42,6 65,5 102 154 365 474 660
6 (barg) 28,1 46,7 46,7 72 112 169 400 520 723
7 (barg) 30,4 50,4 50,4 77,7 121 182 432 562 781
8 (barg) 32,5 53,9 53,9 83,1 130 195 461 600 835
9 (barg) 34,4 57,2 57,2 88,1 138 207 490 637 885
10 (barg) 36,3 60,3 60,3 92,9 145 218 516 671 933
11 (barg) 38 63,2 63,2 97,4 152 229 540 703 977
12 (barg) 39,7 66 66 102 159 239 565 735 1022
13 (barg) 41,4 68,7 68,7 106 165 249 587 764 1062
14 (barg) 42,9 71,3 71,3 110 172 258 611 794 1104
16 (barg) 45,9 76,3 76,3 117 184 276 653 849 1181
18 (barg) 48,7 80,9 80,9 125 195 293 692 900 1252
19 (barg) 49,9 82,9 82,9 128 200 300 710 923 1284
20 (barg) 51,3 85,3 85,3 131 205 308 730 949 1320
21 (barg) 52,6 87,4 87,4 135 210 316 748 973 1350
24 (barg) 56,2 93,4 93,4 144 225 338 800 1040 1443
25 (barg) 57,4 95,3 95,3 147 229 345 1059 1473
26 (barg) 58,5 97,2 97,2 150 234 352 1080 1502
27 (barg) 59,6 99 99 153 238 358 1100
28 (barg) 60,7 101 101 155 243 365
30 (barg) 62,9 104 104 161 251 375
32 (barg) 64,8 108 108 166 259 390
34 (barg) 66,9 111 111 171 268 400
40 (barü) 72,5 124,8 124,8 185,4 289,7 435

ARI-SAFE 903
Technical data
ARI-SAFE - Heating-safety valve
(Construction DN 20-100) (Construction DN125-150)

EPDM-disc, soft seal insert; EPDM-bellows
Fig. ... .903

open lifting device,
closed bonnet
Flangeholes /
12.903 (max. 10 bar) PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
25.903 PN40/16 EN-JS1049 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2535/2533
35.903 PN40/16 1.0619+N DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545/2543
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded metal seat with EPDM insert, EPDM-bellows, closed spring bonnet with control hole, open lifting device,
stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
Acc. to DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 6, material selection observe TRD!
• Fig. 12.903 (EN-JL1040) max. 10 bar
• > 10 bar Fig. 25.903 (EN-JS1049) or Fig. 35.903 (1.0619+N)
Type-test approval
Spring loaded: Fig. 903 TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D/G/H
Sizing
acc. to TRD Part 6.2.5 (see capacity-tables Figure 903)
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-spring loaded, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg

ARI-SAFE 903
Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.903 Fig. 25.903 Fig. 35.903
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N
2 Seat X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
8 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
12 Disc X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / EPDM
14 x Spindle X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X14CrMoS17+QT, 1.4104+QT
29 Cap, open EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030
37 x Compression spring FDSiCr / 51CrV4, 1.8159
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030
43 Bellows EPDM 70 Shore A
└ Spare parts
DN1 / DN 2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250

(barü) 0,2 - 0,5 > 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,5
(barü) > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,4 - 0,75 0,5 - 1
(barü) > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 1 - 1,5 > 0,75 - 1,1 1 - 1,5
(barü) > 1,5 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,5 - 2 > 1,11 - 1,5 1,5 - 1,9
(barü) > 2,5 - 4,5 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,7 > 2 - 2,5 > 1,5 - 1,9 1,9 - 2,3
(barü) > 4,5 - 8,5 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,7 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 3 > 1,9 - 2,5 2,3 - 2,7
Spring loaded
Fig. 903
(barü) > 8,5 - 19 1) > 3,6 - 5 > 3,6 - 5 > 3,6 - 5 > 3 - 3,6 > 2,5 - 2,95 2,7 - 3,3
(barü) > 19 - 28 >5-9 >5-9 >5-9 > 3,6 - 5 > 2,95 - 4 3,3 - 4,1
(barü) > 28 - 35 > 9 - 16 1) > 9 - 16 1) > 9 - 14 1) >5-9 > 4 - 5,7 4,1 - 5,5
(barü) > 35 - 40 > 16 - 22 > 16 - 22 > 14 - 19 > 9 - 14 1) > 5,7 - 8,2 5,5 - 7,4
(barü) > 22 - 28 > 22 - 28 > 19 - 25 > 14 - 19 > 8,2 - 12 1) 7,4 - 11 1)
(barü) > 28 - 34 > 19 - 24 > 12 - 17 11 - 16
(barü) > 17 - 24 16 - 21
(barü) > 24 - 27 21 - 26
1) Fig. 12.903 max. 10 bar; > 10 bar 25.903 or 35.903

ARI-Valves of EN-JL1040 are not allowed to be operated in systems acc. to TRD 110.
ARI-SAFE 903
Technical data / Capacity: Water
DN1 / DN 2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272
l (mm) 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225
l1 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285
H (mm) 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890
X (mm) 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500
C EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
(Width support EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
tongues) 1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- 204 242 280 332 362 408
Drainhole with plug (optional) (inch) G1/4" G3/8"
Weights
standard (kg) 8,5 9,5 13,5 20 26 39 53 82 125 165
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 220 250 285
ØD1 105 115 140 150 165 185 200
PN40 (mm) 235 270 300
ØD2 PN16 (mm) 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405
EN-JL1040 (mm) 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26
b1 EN-JS1049 (mm) 18 18 18 19 20 22 24 24 27 29
1.0619+N (mm) 20 20 20 21 22 24 26 28 31 34
EN-JL1040 (mm) 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32
b2 EN-JS1049 (mm) 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 31 33
1.0619+N (mm) 19 19 20 20 20 20 22 22 27 29
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2543 / 2545 / 28605 / 28607, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
DN 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355
PN16 DIN 2533
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250 -- --
PN40 DIN 2545
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26 -- --
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
Sizing safety valves for the volume flow of water expansion (DIN 4751 T2 - item 8.1 / DIN EN 12828 - item E.3)
DN1 (inlet) / DN2 (outlet)
Set pressure
20 / 32 25 / 40
1 (barg) (kg/h) 7300 11500
2 (barg) (kg/h) 10400 16000
3 (barg) (kg/h) 12700 20000
4 (barg) (kg/h) 14700 23000
5 (barg) (kg/h) 16400 25500
6 (barg) (kg/h) 18000 28000
Water 20°C (kg/h)
7 (barg) (kg/h) 19400 30500

8 (barg) (kg/h) 21000 32500
9 (barg) (kg/h) 22000 34500
10 (barg) (kg/h) 23000 36500
11 (barg) (kg/h) 24500 38000
12 (barg) (kg/h) 25500 40000
13 (barg) (kg/h) 26500 41500
14 (barg) (kg/h) 27500 42500
15 (barg) (kg/h) 28000 44000
16 (barg) (kg/h) 29500 46000
Sizing: 1 l/h =^ 1 kW

ARI-SAFE 903
Capacity: Saturated steam / Heating capacity
Capacity saturated steam incl. 10% overpressure

Calculated acc. to TRD 721 Part 6 and AD2000-A2
Set pressure
20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
(kg/h) 203 317 526 811 1270 2140 3245 5070 6030 8385
1 barg
(kW) 124 193 321 495 774 1310 1980 3095 3680 5120
(kg/h) 272 425 707 1090 1700 2875 4355 6800 8050 11200
1,5 barg
(kW) 164 257 427 658 1030 1740 2630 4110 4870 6770
(kg/h) 305 477 792 1220 1900 3220 4880 7625 10125 14080
2 barg
(kW) 183 285 474 731 1140 1930 2920 4570 6060 8430
(kg/h) 366 572 950 1460 2285 3865 5855 9145 11990 16660
2,5 barg
(kW) 217 340 565 870 1360 2300 3480 5440 7120 9900
(kg/h) 424 662 1100 1695 2645 4475 6775 10600 13880 19300
3 barg
(kW) 250 391 649 1000 1560 2640 4000 6250 8190 11400
(kg/h) 482 754 1250 1930 3015 5100 7720 12050 15600 21700
3,5 barg
(kW) 283 442 735 1130 1770 2990 4530 7070 9150 12700
(kg/h) 535 837 1390 2140 3350 5650 8570 13400 17550 24400
4 barg
(kW) 312 488 810 1250 1950 3300 5000 7800 10200 14200
(kg/h) 588 920 1530 2355 3680 6215 9410 14710 19300 26850
4,5 barg
(kW) 341 533 885 1360 2130 3600 5460 8520 11100 15600
(kg/h) 640 1000 1665 2565 4000 6770 10260 16000 21000 29250
5 barg
(kW) 370 578 960 1480 2310 3900 5910 9240 12100 16900
(kg/h) 694 1085 1800 2775 4340 7330 11100 17350 22770 31660
5,5 barg
(kW) 398 622 1030 1590 2490 4200 6370 9950 13000 18200
(kg/h) 745 1165 1940 2990 4665 7890 11950 18650 24500 34050
Heating capacity (kW)
Saturated steam (kg/h)
6 barg
(kW) 426 666 1100 1700 2660 4500 6820 10600 14000 19400
(kg/h) 800 1250 2075 3200 4995 8440 12790 20000 26220 36450
6,5 barg
(kW) 454 709 1180 1810 2840 4790 7260 11300 14900 20700
(kg/h) 850 1330 2210 3400 5320 9000 13600 21300 27900 38800
7 barg
(kW) 481 752 1250 1930 3000 5080 7700 12000 15800 22000
(kg/h) 904 1415 2345 3615 5650 9550 14470 22600 29660 41250
7,5 barg
(kW) 509 795 1320 2030 3180 5370 8140 12700 16700 23200
(kg/h) 957 1495 2485 3820 5980 10100 15300 23900 31350 43600
8 barg
(kW) 536 837 1390 2140 3350 5660 8580 13400 17600 24500
(kg/h) 1060 1660 2755 4245 6630 11200 16950 26500 34800 48400
9 barg
(kW) 590 921 1530 2360 3685 6230 9435 14740 19340 26900
(kg/h) 1165 1820 3025 4665 7290 12300 18650 29150 38250 53200
10 barg
(kW) 643 1000 1670 2570 4010 6790 10300 16000 21100 29300
(kg/h) 1270 1985 3300 5080 7940 13400 20300 31750 41600 58000
11 barg
(kW) 695 1085 1800 2780 4340 7340 11100 17400 22800 31700
(kg/h) 1375 2150 3570 5500 8590 14500 22000 34350 45100 62700
12 barg
(kW) 745 1165 1940 2990 4670 7890 12000 18700 24500 34000
(kg/h) 1480 2310 3840 5920 9250 15600 23650 37000 48500 67500
13 barg
(kW) 798 1250 2070 3190 4990 8430 12800 20000 26200 36400
(kg/h) 1580 2475 4110 6340 9900 16700 25350 39600 52000 72300
14 barg
(kW) 850 1325 2200 3390 5300 8970 13600 21200 27900 38700
(kg/h) 1690 2640 4385 6760 10550 17800 27000 42200 55400 77000
15 barg
(kW) 900 1405 2330 3590 5620 9500 14400 22500 29500 41000
(kg/h) 1790 2800 4655 7170 11200 18950 28700 44800 58800 81800
16 barg
(kW) 950 1480 2460 3790 5930 10000 15200 23700 31100 43300
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G/H variable: DN20-100 < 3,5 bar / DN125-150 < 4 bar)
DN1 / DN2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
TÜV · SV · . . - 688 · D/G/H (bar) 0,74 0,70

ARI-SAFE 904
Technical data
ARI-SAFE - Low pressure steam - safety valve
(Construction DN 20-100) (Construction DN125-150)

Disc metal seat; EPDM-Bellows seal
Fig. ... .904

closed bonnet
Flangeholes /
12.904 PN16/16 EN-JL1040 DN20/32 - 150/250 -10°C to +120°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533/2533
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded, EPDM-bellows, closed bonnet with control hole, open lifting device, stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
For low pressure steamgenerators up to 1 bar,
acc. to DIN 4750 and DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to TRD 721 Part 5
Type-test approval
Low pressure steam - safety valve: Fig. 904 TÜV · SV · . . -688 · D
Sizing
refer to "Capacity".
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-Low pressure steam - safety valve, Figure ..., DN .../..., PN ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg

ARI-SAFE 904
Technical data / Capacity: Saturated steam
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.904
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218
8 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040
12 Disc X39CrMo17-1+QT, 1.4122+QT
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
29 Cap, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040
37 x Spring FDSiCr
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
43 Bellows EPDM 70 Shore A
└ Spare parts
DN1 / DN2 20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 18 22,5 29 36 45 58,5 72 90 106 125
A0 (mm2) 254 398 661 1018 1590 2688 4072 6362 8825 12272
l (mm) 85 100 110 115 120 140 160 180 200 225
l1 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 170 195 220 250 285
H (mm) 270 280 330 390 435 545 610 690 845 890
X (mm) 150 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 500 500
C (Width support tongues) (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- 280 332 362 408
Drainhole with plug (inch) G 1/4" G 3/8"
Weights
standard (kg) 8,5 9,5 13,5 20 26 39 53 82 125 165
Flanges
ØD1 PN16 (mm) 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285
ØD2 PN16 (mm) 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285 340 405
b1 EN-JL1040 (mm) 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26
b2 EN-JL1040 (mm) 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 26 30 32
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
DN 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250
ØK (mm) 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240 295 355
PN16
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 12x22 12x26
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C* -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
Capacity Saturated steam (incl. 10% overpressure)

Set pressure
20 / 32 25 / 40 32 / 50 40 / 65 50 / 80 65 / 100 80 / 125 100 / 150 125 / 200 150 / 250
0,2 barg (kg/h) 72 113 187 289 451 763 1155 1805 2241 3116
0,3 barg (kg/h) 92 144 239 368 575 972 1472 2300 2867 3986
0,4 barg (kg/h) 110 172 286 440 688 1163 1762 2753 3380 4700
0,5 barg (kg/h) 125 196 325 501 783 1325 2006 3135 3858 5365
0,6 barg (kg/h) 142 223 370 569 889 1503 2277 3557 4317 6004
0,7 barg (kg/h) 158 248 412 634 990 1675 2537 3964 4748 6603
0,8 barg (kg/h) 173 271 450 693 1082 1830 2772 4331 5201 7233
0,9 barg (kg/h) 179 292 485 746 1166 1971 2986 4666 5616 7809
1 barg (kg/h) 203 317 526 811 1270 2140 3245 5070 6030 8385
Conversionrates: 1 kW = 860 kcal/h* = 0,86 Mcal/h* = 3,6 MJ/h * not lawful units
1 Mcal/h* = 1000 kcal/h* = 1,163 kW


ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-P - Standard safety valve D/G/F
Fig. ... .921 Fig. ... .922 Fig. ... .923 Fig. ... .924
closed bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet open bonnet
Flangeholes /
12.921 / 922 / 923 / 924 PN16 EN-JL1040 DN15 - 100 -10°C to +300°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533
22.921 / 922 / 923 / 924 PN16 EN-JS1049 DN125 - 150 -10°C to +350°C DIN EN 1092-2 DIN 2533
35.921 / 922 / 923 / 924 PN40 1.0619+N DN15 - 100 -10°C to +450°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545
55.921 / 923 PN40 1.4408 DN15 - 100 -60°C to +400°C DIN EN 1092-1 DIN 2545
Construction
Requirement
Acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, TRD 421, observe TRB 801 No. 45 at material selection!
Type-test approval
Standard safety valve: Fig. 921/923 TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1 and AD2000-A2.
Details required
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-P - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ..., PN .. , Material ........, Set pressure .... barg
standard: without metal bellows optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)

ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 12.921/922/923/924 Fig. 22.921/922/923/924 Fig. 35.921/922/923/924 Fig. 55.921/923
EN-GJS-400-18U-LT,
1 Body EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 GP240GH+N, 1.0619+N GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
EN-JS1049
3 Studs 25CrMo4, 1.7218 A4 - 70
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
8 Hexagon nut C35E, 1.1181 A4
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
27 x Sealing ring CuFA X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
28 Cap, closed EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
29 Cap, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
31 x Packingrings Pure graphite
35 Lift fork EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
42 Bonnet, open EN-GJL-250 , EN-JL1040 EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 --
70 Balanced piston (optional) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150

(barg) 0,3 - 0,5 0,3 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,6 0,2 - 0,55 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,4 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,6 0,2 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,6 0,2 - 0,4
(barg) > 0,5 - 1 > 0,5 - 1 > 0,6 - 1,1 > 0,55 - 0,8 > 0,4 - 0,6 > 0,4 - 0,6 > 0,5 - 1,2 > 0,6 - 1,2 > 0,5 - 1,1 > 0,6 - 1,1 > 0,4 - 0,6
(barg) > 1 - 1,4 > 1 - 1,4 > 1,1 - 2 > 0,8 - 1,2 > 0,6 - 1,1 > 0,6 - 1,2 > 1,2 - 2 > 1,2 - 2,1 > 1,1 - 1,7 > 1,1 - 2 > 0,6 - 1
(barg) > 1,4 - 1,9 > 1,4 - 1,9 > 2 - 2,7 > 1,2 - 2 > 1,1 - 1,8 > 1,2 - 1,8 > 2 - 2,7 > 2,1 - 2,6 > 1,7 - 2,4 > 2 - 2,6 > 1 - 1,9
(barg) > 1,9 - 2,5 > 1,9 - 2,5 > 2,7 - 3,7 > 2 - 3,3 > 1,8 - 2,7 > 1,8 - 2,5 > 2,7 - 3,4 > 2,6 - 3,2 > 2,4 - 3,1 > 2,6 - 3,7 > 1,9 - 2,5
Fig. 921/922/923/924
(barg) > 2,5 - 3,5 > 2,5 - 3,5 > 3,7 - 5 > 3,3 - 5,2 > 2,7 - 4,3 > 2,5 - 3,2 > 3,4 - 4,5 > 3,2 - 4,2 > 3,1 - 4 > 3,7 - 4,3 > 2,5 - 3,5
(barg) > 3,5 - 5 > 3,5 - 4 >5-8 > 5,2 - 8 > 4,3 - 6 > 3,2 - 4,5 > 4,5 - 5,5 > 4,2 - 5,5 >4-5 > 4,3 - 7 > 3,5 - 4,3
(barg) >5-7 > 4 - 5,5 > 8 - 10,5 > 8 - 11,5 >6-9 > 4,5 - 8,5 > 5,5 - 6,8 > 5,5 - 6,5 >5-8 >7-9 > 4,3 - 5,5
(barg) > 7 - 10 > 5,5 - 7 > 10,5 - 15 > 11,5 - 16,5 > 9 - 12 > 8,5 - 13 > 6,8 - 8,5 > 6,5 - 9 > 8 - 11 > 9 - 15 > 5,5 - 6,5
(barg) > 10 - 16 > 7 - 10,5 > 15 - 23 > 16,5 - 22 > 12 - 17 > 13 - 17 > 8,5 - 14 > 9 - 12 > 11 - 17,5 > 15 - 22 > 6,5 - 11
(barg) > 16 - 25 > 10,5 - 17 > 23 - 35 > 22 - 30 > 17 - 30 > 17 - 23 > 14 - 23 > 12 - 16,5 > 17,5 - 27,5 > 22 - 28 > 11 - 16
(barg) > 25 - 33 > 17 - 25 > 35,1 - 40 > 30 - 40 > 30 - 40 > 23 - 34 > 23 - 34 > 16,5 - 20 > 27,5 - 40 > 28 - 33 > 16 - 25
(barg) > 33 - 40 > 25 - 37 > 34 - 40 > 34 - 40 > 20 - 33 > 33 - 40
(barg) > 37 - 40 > 33 - 40

(barg) 4-5 3 - 5,5 3 - 4,8 3 - 4,5 3 - 4,5 3 - 3,5 3 - 3,5 3 - 3,5 3 - 4,5 5-7 5 - 5,3
(barg) >5-6 > 5,5 - 8 > 4,8 - 6 > 4,5 - 8 > 4,5 - 5,7 > 3,5 - 5 > 3,5 - 4,3 > 3,5 - 4,9 > 4,5 - 6,5 >7-8 > 5,3 - 7
(barg) >6-9 > 8 - 12 >6-8 > 8 - 11 > 5,7 - 10 >5-7 > 4,3 - 5,9 > 5,9 - 7 > 6,5 - 10 >8-9 >7-9
Fig. 921/923
(barg) > 9 - 14 > 12 - 21 > 8 - 12,5 > 11 - 14,5 > 10 - 16 > 7 - 10,5 > 6,9 - 7,5 >7-9 > 10 - 18 > 9 - 12,5 > 9 - 12,5
(barg) > 14 - 26 > 21 - 27,5 > 12,5 - 16 > 14,5 - 21 > 16 - 22 > 10,5 - 15,5 > 7,5 - 8,8 > 9 - 11 > 18 - 35 > 12,5 - 18 > 12,5 - 16
(barg) > 26 - 30 > 27,5 - 40 > 16 - 20,5 > 21 - 40 > 22 - 31 > 15,5 - 20 > 8,8 - 14 > 11 - 14,7 > 18 - 23 > 16 - 18,5
(barg) > 30 - 40 > 20,5 - 30 > 31 - 40 > 20 - 40 > 14 - 21 > 14,7 - 18,8 > 23 - 29 > 18,5 - 25
(barg) > 30 - 40 > 21 - 30 > 18,8 - 35 > 29 - 34
(barg) > 30 - 40 > 34 - 40

A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available (acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 EN-JL1040 is not allowed.)
ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Technical data
DN 1 / DN 2 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Dimensions
d0 (mm) 12 12 15 18 20 29 36 44 55 71 86
A0 (mm2) 113 113 177 254 314 661 1018 1520 2376 3959 5808
l (mm) 90 95 100 105 115 125 145 155 175 200 225
H (mm) 260 260 270 285 290 290 340 400 450 563 631
H (Bellows design) (mm) 285 285 300 325 330 345 400 455 515 631 703
X (mm) 130 130 130 150 150 150 200 250 300 350 400
EN-JL1040 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Y
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 254 298
(Width support
1.0619+N (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 254 298
tongues)
1.4408 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Weights
standard (kg) 5 5 5,5 8 9,5 11,5 15,5 20,5 33 57 66
optional: Bellows design (kg) 5,4 5,4 6 9 10,5 12,8 17,5 23 37 64 72
Flanges
PN16 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 220 250 285
ØD
PN40 (mm) 95 105 115 140 150 165 185 200 235 270 300
EN-JL1040 (mm) 14 16 16 18 18 20 20 22 24 -- --
EN-JS1049 (mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 26 26
b
1.0619+N (mm) 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 22 24 26 28
1.4408 (mm) 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 22 24 -- --
Flanges acc. to DIN EN 1092-1 / -2, Flangeholes/-thickness tolerances acc. to DIN 2533 / 2545, raised face, facing acc. to DIN 2526 form C
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180 210 240
PN16
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 4x18 1) 8x18 8x18 8x18 8x22
ØK (mm) 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 190 220 250
PN40
n x Ød (mm) 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18 4x18 8x18 8x18 8x22 8x26 8x26
EN-JL1040 16 (bar) -- 16 14,4 12,8 11,2 9,6 -- -- --
EN-JS1049 16 (bar) on request 16 15,5 14,7 13,9 12,8 11,2 -- --
1.0619+N 40 (bar) 30 40 38,1 35 32 28 25,7 23,8 13,1
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: < 3 bar)
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
TÜV · SV · . . -811 · D/G 0,37 0,34 0,37 0,34 0,37 0,34 0,44 0,46
TÜV · SV · . . -811 · F 0,26 0,23 0,26 0,23 0,26 0,23 0,28 0,32

ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Set pressure Saturated steam (kg/h)
0,2 (barg) -- -- 22 33 44 85 142 195 305 710 1292
0,3 (barg) 20 20 28 41 56 107 82 247 386 868 1333
0,4 (barg) 23 23 34 48 65 126 209 290 450 1002 1581
0,5 (barg) 27 27 39 55 74 144 239 332 520 1129 1765
0,6 (barg) 30 30 43 62 82 162 267 372 580 1259 1959
0,8 (barg) 36 36 51 73 100 189 323 435 680 1467 2289
1 (barg) 41 41 59 84 114 218 370 500 785 1677 2613
2 (barg) 68 68 99 139 188 362 610 830 1300 2789 4291
3 (barg) 95 95 137 197 265 510 860 1180 1840 3846 5908
4 (barg) 119 119 171 246 330 640 1070 1470 2300 4908 7532
5 (barg) 142 142 205 295 396 765 1280 1760 2750 5943 9115
6 (barg) 166 166 239 343 460 890 1495 2050 3200 6917 10611
7 (barg) 189 189 272 391 525 1015 1700 2340 3650 7891 12103
8 (barg) 213 213 306 440 590 1140 1910 2630 4100 8861 13593
9 (barg) 236 236 339 490 655 1265 2120 2910 4550 9831 15080
10 (barg) 259 259 370 535 720 1390 2330 3200 5000 10800 16567
12 (barg) 306 306 440 630 850 1640 2750 3780 5900 12737 19537
14 (barg) 352 352 505 730 980 1890 3170 4350 6800 14673 22507
16 (barg) 400 400 570 825 1105 2140 3590 4920 7700 16612 25480
18 (barg) 445 445 640 920 1235 2390 4000 5500 8600 18552 28456
20 (barg) 490 490 705 1020 1365 2640 4430 6080 9500 20496 31438
22 (barg) 540 540 775 1110 1495 2890 4850 6660 10400 22444 34425
24 (barg) 585 585 840 1210 1630 3140 5270 7240 11300 24396 37421
25 (barg) 609 609 875 1260 1690 3270 5480 7530 11760 25375 38921
26 (barg) 630 630 910 1310 1760 3400 5700 7820 12200 26354
28 (barg) 680 680 975 1405 1890 3650 6120 8400 13100 28317
30 (barg) 730 730 1040 1505 2020 3900 6550 8990 14000 30286
32 (barg) 775 775 1110 1600 2150 4160 6980 9580 15000 32260

ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Capacity: Air

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Set pressure Air 0°C and 1,013 bara (Nm3/h)
0,2 (barg) -- -- 27 27 51 100 167 229 358 835 1225
0,3 (barg) 24 24 34 49 67 128 217 294 460 1035 1588
0,4 (barg) 28 28 41 41 78 152 252 349 546 1209 1908
0,5 (barg) 32 32 47 47 90 176 292 405 632 1379 2156
0,6 (barg) 37 37 53 53 102 199 330 459 717 1555 2418
0,8 (barg) 45 45 63 63 125 237 404 545 852 1839 2871
1 (barg) 52 52 73 73 144 274 466 631 986 2110 3288
2 (barg) 86 86 123 123 240 461 777 1061 1657 3556 5471
3 (barg) 123 123 176 176 340 658 1103 1514 2365 4947 7601
4 (barg) 154 154 221 221 428 826 1385 1902 2970 6355 9754
5 (barg) 185 185 266 266 515 995 1665 2290 3580 7735 11865
6 (barg) 217 217 311 311 602 1165 1950 2680 4180 9041 13868
7 (barg) 248 248 356 356 689 1330 2230 3065 4790 10348 15872
8 (barg) 279 279 401 401 776 1500 2515 3450 5390 11654 17876
9 (barg) 311 311 446 446 863 1670 2800 3840 6000 12961 19880
10 (barg) 342 342 491 491 950 1835 3080 4225 6600 14267 21884
12 (barg) 405 405 581 581 1125 2170 3645 5000 7800 16880 25892
14 (barg) 468 468 671 671 1300 2510 4200 5780 9000 19493 29899
16 (barg) 530 530 761 761 1475 2845 4770 6550 10200 22106 33907
18 (barg) 593 593 851 851 1645 3180 5340 7320 11450 24718 37915
20 (barg) 656 656 941 941 1820 3520 5900 8100 12650 27331 41922
22 (barg) 718 718 1031 1031 1995 3855 6465 8870 13850 29944 45930
24 (barg) 781 781 1121 1121 2170 4190 7030 9650 15100 32557 49938
25 (barg) 812 812 1167 1167 2250 4360 7310 10040 15680 33863 51942
26 (barg) 844 844 1211 1211 2340 4530 7595 10400 16300 35170
28 (barg) 907 907 1302 1302 2520 4860 8160 11200 17500 37782
30 (barg) 969 969 1390 1390 2690 5200 8720 12000 18700 40395
32 (barg) 1032 1032 1480 1480 2870 5540 9290 12750 19900 43008
35 (barg) 1126 1126 1620 1620 3130 6040 10130 13900 21700 46927
36 (barg) 1155 1155 1665 1665 3215 6220 10420 14300 22360 48234
40 (barg) 1283 1283 1840 1840 3560 6880 11500 15850 24700 53459

ARI-SAFE-P 921 / 922 / 923 / 924
Capacity: Water

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150
Set pressure Water 20°C (t/h)
0,2 (bar) -- -- 0,97 1,4 1,95 3,63 6,33 8,36 13,06 26,4 44,3
0,3 (bar) 0,84 0,84 1,16 1,67 2,33 4,30 7,46 9,80 15,22 32,3 54,3
0,5 (bar) 1,11 1,11 1,54 2,21 3,09 5,74 10,0 13,22 20,6 41,8 70,1
1 (bar) 1,57 1,57 2,17 3,13 4,37 8,12 14,15 18,69 29,2 59,1 99,1
2 (bar) 2,22 2,22 3,07 4,42 6,17 11,48 20,0 26,4 41,3 83,6 140,2
3 (bar) 2,72 2,72 3,76 5,42 7,56 14,07 24,5 32,4 50,6 102,4 171,7
4 (bar) 3,14 3,14 4,35 6,26 8,73 16,24 28,3 37,4 58,4 118,2 198,3
5 (bar) 3,51 3,51 4,86 7,0 9,76 18,16 31,6 41,8 65,3 132,2 221,7
6 (bar) 3,85 3,85 5,32 7,66 10,69 19,89 34,6 45,8 71,6 144,8 242,9
7 (bar) 4,16 4,16 5,75 8,28 11,55 21,5 37,4 49,5 77,3 156,4 262,3
8 (bar) 4,45 4,45 6,14 8,85 12,35 23,0 40,0 52,9 82,6 167,2 280,4
9 (bar) 4,72 4,72 6,52 9,39 13,1 24,4 42,4 56,1 87,6 177,4 297,5
10 (bar) 4,97 4,97 6,87 9,89 13,81 25,7 44,7 59,1 92,4 187,0 313,5
12 (bar) 5,44 5,44 7,53 10,84 15,12 28,1 49,0 64,8 100,2 204,8 343,5
14 (bar) 5,88 5,88 8,13 11,71 16,34 30,4 52,9 69,9 109,3 221,2 371,0
16 (bar) 6,29 6,29 8,69 12,51 17,46 32,5 56,6 74,8 116,8 236,5 396,6
18 (bar) 6,67 6,67 9,22 13,27 18,52 34,4 60,0 79,3 123,9 250,9 420,7
20 (bar) 7,03 7,03 9,72 14,0 19,53 36,3 63,3 83,6 130,6 264,4 443,4
22 (bar) 7,37 7,37 10,19 14,7 20,5 38,1 66,3 87,7 137,0 277,4 465,1
24 (bar) 7,7 7,7 10,64 15,33 21,4 39,8 69,3 91,6 143,1 289,7 485,8
25 (bar) 7,86 7,86 10,86 15,64 21,8 40,6 70,7 93,3 146,0 295,7 495,8
26 (bar) 8,0 8,0 11,06 15,92 22,2 41,3 72,0 95,1 148,6 301,5
28 (bar) 8,3 8,3 11,47 16,52 23,1 42,9 74,7 98,7 154,2 312,9
30 (bar) 8,6 8,6 11,88 17,1 23,9 44,4 77,3 102,2 159,7 323,9
35 (bar) 9,28 9,28 12,83 18,47 25,8 47,9 83,5 110,4 172,5 349,8
36 (bar) 9,4 9,4 13,0 18,7 26,1 48,7 84,7 111,9 174,9 354,8
40 (bar) 9,92 9,92 13,71 19,75 27,6 51,3 89,3 118,0 184,4 374,0

ARI-SAFE-TC 941 / 942 / 943
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-TC - Full lift safety valve D/G, Standard safety valve F
Fig. ... .941 Fig. ... .942 Fig. ... .943

closed lifting device, open lifting device, gastight cap,
closed bonnet closed bonnet closed bonnet
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter Temperature range Thread

25.941 / 942 / 943 PN40 EN-JS1049 DN 15 - 25 -10°C to +350°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
55.941 / 943 PN40 1.4408 DN15 - 25 -60°C to +400°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Construction
Requirement
acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2, TRD 421
Type-test approval
Fig. 941/942/943 TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2.
Details required
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TC - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar
standard: without metal bellows optional: with metal bellows (refer to page 42)

ARI-SAFE-TC 941 / 942 / 943
Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 25.941/942/943 Fig. 55.941/943
1 Body EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
2 Screwed seat X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
4 Spindle guide X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
27 x Sealing ring CuFA X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
28 Cap, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
35 Lift fork EN-GJS-400-15, EN-JS1030 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2, 1.4408
61 Coupling X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
70 Balanced piston (optional) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25

(barg) 0,3 - 0,6 0,3 - 0,48 0,2 - 0,4
(barg) > 0,6 - 0,9 > 0,48 - 0,68 > 0,4 - 0,88
(barg) > 0,9 - 1,35 > 0,68 - 1,35 > 0,88 - 1,5
(barg) > 1,35 - 2,2 > 1,35 - 2,1 > 1,5 - 2,1
(barg) > 2,2 - 3,3 > 2,1 - 3 > 2,1 - 2,6
Full lift safety valve
Fig. 941/942/943
(barg) > 3,3 - 4,5 >3-4 > 2,6 - 3,2

(barg) > 4,5 - 5,5 > 4 - 5,5 > 3,2 - 4,2
(barg) > 5,5 - 6,7 > 5,5 - 7,7 > 4,2 - 6,2
(barg) > 6,7 - 8,2 > 7,7 - 11,4 > 6,2 - 8
(barg) > 8,2 - 11 > 11,4 - 15 > 8 - 10
(barg) > 11 - 13 > 15 - 20 > 10 - 15,5
(barg) > 13 - 18,5 > 20 - 28 > 15,5 - 18
(barg) > 18,5 - 32,4 > 28 - 35 > 18 - 29,9
(barg) > 32,4 - 40 > 35 - 40 > 30 - 40

(barg) 5,7 - 6,5 4 - 5,7 4 - 5,4
(barg) > 6,5 - 8 > 5,7 - 7 > 5,4 - 6,4
(barg) > 8 - 9,3 > 7 - 9,9 > 6,4 - 7,4

Fig. 941/943
(barg) > 9,3 - 11 > 9,9 - 14 > 7,4 - 8,4

(barg) > 11 - 15 > 14 - 21 > 8,4 - 10,4
(barg) > 15 - 19 > 21 - 28,9 > 10,4 - 13,4
(barg) > 19 - 29 > 29,9 - 40 > 13,4 - 16,4
(barg) > 29 - 40 > 16,4 - 20,4
(barg) > 20,4 - 28

A production permission acc. to TRB 801 No. 45 is available.
ARI-SAFE-TC 941 / 942 / 943
Technical data
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1 1/4"
d0 (mm) 12 15 18
A0 (mm2) 113 177 254
GE (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 3/4" 1" 1 1/4"
b (mm) 15 16 18
l (mm) 50 50 50
l1 (mm) 53 55 58
H (mm) 260 260 260
H (Bellows design) (mm) 295 295 300
X (mm) 120 120 120
C (mm) 69 69 69
Weights
standard (kg) 3,5 3,5 3,8
optional: Bellows design (kg) 4,4 4,4 4,7
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
1.4408 40 (bar) 40 40 36,3 33,7 31,8 29,7 28,5 27,4 --
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G variable: < 3,5 bar)
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . -995 · D/G 0,64 0,60 0,75
TÜV · SV · . . -995 · F 0,45 0,42 0,53

ARI-SAFE-TC 941 / 942 / 943
Capacity: Saturated steam / Air / Water
Capacity saturated steam / air / water (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN 15 20 25 15 20 25 15 20 25
Inlet: Male (inch) G1/2" G3/4" G1" G1/2" G3/4" G1" G1/2" G3/4" G1"
Outlet: Female (inch) G3/4" G1" G1 1/4" G1 1/2" G3/4" G1" G1 1/4" G1 1/2" G3/4" G1" G1 1/4" G1 1/2"
do (mm) 12 15 18 12 15 18 12 15 18
Set pressure Saturated steam (kg/h) Air 0°C and 1,013 bara (Nm3/h) Water 20°C (t/h)
0,2 (barg) 75 75 88 88 3,22 3,22
0,3 (barg) 35 47 94 94 41 56 112 112 1,49 2,17 3,94 3,94
0,5 (barg) 46 65 124 124 57 79 151 151 1,92 2,80 5,10 5,10
1 (barg) 72 103 188 188 91 129 237 237 2,72 3,96 7,19 7,19
2 (barg) 120 172 320 320 153 219 405 405 3,85 5,60 10,17 10,17
3 (barg) 162 238 430 430 209 305 552 552 4,71 6,86 12,46 12,46
4 (barg) 206 300 545 545 266 390 702 702 5,44 7,92 14,39 14,39
5 (barg) 246 360 650 650 320 469 845 845 6,08 8,85 16,10 16,10
6 (barg) 285 420 755 755 375 549 988 988 6,66 9,70 17,62 17,62
7 (barg) 325 480 860 860 429 628 1130 1130 7,20 10,47 19,04 19,04
8 (barg) 370 540 970 970 483 708 1275 1275 7,69 11,20 20,30 20,30
9 (barg) 410 600 1075 1075 537 787 1415 1415 8,16 11,88 21,60 21,60
10 (barg) 450 655 1180 1180 592 867 1560 1560 8,60 12,52 22,70 22,70
11 (barg) 490 715 1290 1290 646 946 1705 1705 9,02 13,13 23,80 23,80
12 (barg) 530 775 1395 1395 700 1026 1845 1845 9,42 13,72 24,90 24,90
13 (barg) 570 835 1500 1500 754 1105 1990 1990 9,81 14,27 25,90 25,90
14 (barg) 610 890 1605 1605 809 1185 2130 2130 10,18 14,81 26,90 26,90
15 (barg) 650 950 1710 1710 863 1265 2275 2275 10,54 15,33 27,90 27,90
16 (barg) 690 1010 1820 1820 917 1345 2420 2420 10,88 15,84 28,80 28,80
17 (barg) 730 1070 1925 1925 971 1420 2560 2560 11,22 16,32 29,70 29,70
18 (barg) 770 1130 2030 2030 1025 1500 2705 2705 11,54 16,80 30,50 30,50
19 (barg) 810 1190 2135 2135 1080 1580 2850 2850 11,86 17,26 31,40 31,40
20 (barg) 850 1245 2245 2245 1135 1660 2990 2990 12,17 17,71 32,20 32,20
22 (barg) 930 1365 2455 2455 1240 1820 3275 3275 12,76 18,57 33,70 33,70
24 (barg) 1015 1485 2670 2670 1350 1980 3560 3560 13,33 19,40 35,20 35,20
26 (barg) 1095 1600 2885 2885 1460 2140 3850 3850 13,87 20,20 36,70 36,70
28 (barg) 1175 1725 3100 3100 1570 2300 4135 4135 14,40 20,90 38,10 38,10
30 (barg) 1260 1845 3320 3320 1675 2455 4420 4420 14,90 21,70 39,40 39,40
32 (barg) 1340 1965 3535 3535 1785 2615 4705 4705 15,39 22,40 40,70 40,70
34 (barg) 1895 2775 4990 4990 15,86 23,10 41,90 41,90
36 (barg) 2000 2940 5270 5270 16,28 23,8 43,1 43,1
40 (barg) 2220 3250 5850 5850 17,21 25,00 45,50 45,50

ARI-SAFE-TC 945 / 946
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-TC - Spring loaded Fig. 945, Low pressure steam - safety valve Fig. 946
Fig. ... .945

EPDM-disc, soft seal insert; EPDM-bellows
Fig. ... .946

Disc metal seat, EPDM-Bellows seal
Fig. ... .945

closed bonnet
Figure Nominal pressure Material Nominal diameter (inlet) Temperature range Thread
25.945 PN40 EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 -10°C to +120°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
25.946 PN40 EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 -10°C to +120°C DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Fig. 945 Fig. 946
Construction
Standard safety valve, spring loaded, direct loaded disc with EPDM Standard safety valve, spring-/weight loaded, direct loaded with
insert, EPDM-bellows, closed spring bonnet with control hole, open EPDM-bellows, closed bonnet with control hole, open lifting device,
lifting device, stainless steel seat and spindle stainless steel seat and spindle
Application
For low pressure steamgenerators up to 1 bar,
acc. to DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
acc. to DIN 4750 and DIN EN 12828 Heating systems in buildings
Requirement
acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 6 acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-1 / TRD 721 Part 5
Type-test approval
Spring loaded: TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D/G/H Low pressure steam - safety valve: TÜV · SV · . . -997 · D
Sizing
Acc. to TRD 721 Part 6.2.5, refer to "Capacity". refer to "Capacity"
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TC - spring loaded, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., ARI-SAFE-TC - Low pressure steam - safety valve, Figure ...,
PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... barg DN ... / ..., PN .. / ..., Material ..., Set pressure ...barg

Technical data
Parts
Pos. Sp.p. Description Fig. 25.945/946
1 Body EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
2 Screwed seat X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
12 x Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT
29 Cap, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
37 x Spring FDSiCr
41 Lever, open EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049
└ Spare parts
DN (inlet) 15 20 25

(barg) 0,3 - 0,6 0,3 - 0,5 0,2 - 0,4
(barg) > 0,6 - 0,9 > 0,5 - 0,7 > 0,4 - 0,9
(barg) > 0,9 - 1,35 > 0,7 - 1,35 > 0,9 - 1,5
Low pressure steam - safety valve
(barg) > 1,35 - 2,2 > 1,35 - 2,1 > 1,5 - 2,1
(barg) > 2,2 - 3,3 > 2,1 - 3 > 2,1 - 2,6
Spring loaded
Fig. 945
Fig. 946
(barg) > 3,3 - 4,5 >3-4 > 2,6 - 3,2

(barg) > 4,5 - 5,5 > 4 - 5,5 > 3,2 - 4,2
(barg) > 5,5 - 6,7 > 5,5 - 7,7 > 4,2 - 6,2
(barg) > 6,7 - 8,2 > 7,7 - 11,5 > 6,2 - 8
(barg) > 8,2 - 11 > 11,5 - 15 > 8 - 10
(barg) > 11 - 13 > 15 - 16 > 10 - 15,5
(barg) > 13 - 16 > 15,5 - 16

Technical data / Capacity: Water
DN (inlet) 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1 1/4" 1" x 1 1/2"
d0 (mm) 12 15 18 18
A0 (mm2) 113 177 254 254
GE (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
GA (inch) 3/4" 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2"
b (mm) 15 16 18 18
l (mm) 50 50 50 50
l1 (mm) 53 55 58 58
H (mm) 260 260 260 260
X (mm) 120 120 120 120
Weights
standard (kg) 3,5 3,5 3,8 3,8
acc. to DIN EN 1092-2 -60°C to <-10°C* -10°C to 120°C 150°C 200°C 250°C 300°C 350°C 400°C 450°C
Certified coefficient of discharge Kdr (Values for D/G/H variable: < 3,5 bar)
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 997 · D/G/H (bar) 0,64 0,60 0,75
Capacity water incl. 10% overpressure

Sizing safety valves for the volume flow of water expansion (DIN 4751 T2 - item 8.1 / DIN EN 12828 - item E.3)
DN (inlet)
Differential pressure
15 20 25
1 (barg) (kg/h) 2700 3900 7000
2 (barg) (kg/h) 3800 5600 10000
3 (barg) (kg/h) 4700 6800 12400
4 (barg) (kg/h) 5400 7900 14300
5 (barg) (kg/h) 6000 8800 16000
6 (barg) (kg/h) 6600 9700 17600
Water 20°C (kg/h)
7 (barg) (kg/h) 7200 10400 19000

8 (barg) (kg/h) 7600 11200 20300
9 (barg) (kg/h) 8100 11800 21600
10 (barg) (kg/h) 8600 12500 22700
11 (barg) (kg/h) 9000 13000 23800
12 (barg) (kg/h) 9400 13700 24900
13 (barg) (kg/h) 9800 14200 25900
14 (barg) (kg/h) 10000 14800 26900
15 (barg) (kg/h) 10500 15300 27900
16 (barg) (kg/h) 10800 15800 28800
Sizing: 1 l/h =^ 1 kW

Capacity: Saturated steam / Heating capacity
Fig. 945: Capacity saturated steam incl. 10% overpressure

Calculated acc. to TRD 721 Part 6 and AD2000-A2
DN (inlet)
Set pressure
15 20 25
(kg/h) 72 103 188
1 (barg)
(kW) 44 63 115
(kg/h) 97 136 254
1,5 (barg)
(kW) 58 82 154
(kg/h) 120 172 320
2 (barg)
(kW) 72 103 191
(kg/h) 142 205 376
2,5 (barg)
(kW) 85 122 224
(kg/h) 162 238 430
3 (barg)
(kW) 96 140 253
(kg/h) 185 272 489
3,5 (barg)
(kW) 109 159 287
(kg/h) 206 300 545
4 (barg)
(kW) 120 176 316
(kg/h) 226 331 596
4,5 (barg)
(kW) 131 192 346
(kg/h) 246 360 650
5 (barg)
(kW) 142 208 375
(kg/h) 267 391 703
5,5 (barg)
(kW) 153 224 403
Heating capacity (kW)
(kg/h) 285 420 755

6 (barg)
(kW) 164 240 432
(kg/h) 307 450 810
6,5 (barg)
(kW) 174 256 460
(kg/h) 325 480 860
7 (barg)
(kW) 185 271 488
(kg/h) 348 509 917
7,5 (barg)
(kW) 195 286 516
(kg/h) 370 540 970
8 (barg)
(kW) 206 302 543
(kg/h) 410 600 1075
9 (barg)
(kW) 227 332 598
(kg/h) 450 655 1180
10 (barg)
(kW) 247 362 651
(kg/h) 490 715 1290
11 (barg)
(kW) 267 391 705
(kg/h) 530 775 1395
12 (barg)
(kW) 287 421 757
(kg/h) 570 835 1500
13 (barg)
(kW) 307 449 809
(kg/h) 610 890 1605
14 (barg)
(kW) 326 478 860
(kg/h) 650 950 1710
15 (barg)
(kW) 346 506 911
(kg/h) 690 1010 1820
16 (barg)
(kW) 365 534 962
Fig. 946: Capacity saturated steam incl. 10% overpressure

DN (inlet)
Set pressure
15 20 25
0,2 (barg) (kg/h) -- -- 67
0,3 (barg) (kg/h) 32 43 86
0,4 (barg) (kg/h) 38 53 103

0,5 (barg) (kg/h) 44 62 117
0,6 (barg) (kg/h) 50 71 133
0,7 (barg) (kg/h) 56 78 146
0,8 (barg) (kg/h) 62 86 163
0,9 (barg) (kg/h) 67 95 175
1 (barg) (kg/h) 72 103 188
Conversionrates: 1 kW = 860 kcal/h* = 0,86 Mcal/h* = 3,6 MJ/h * not lawful units
1 Mcal/h* = 1000 kcal/h* = 1,163 kW

ARI-SAFE-TCP 961 / 962 / 963
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-TCP - Standard safety valve D/G/F
Fig. ... .961 Fig. ... .962 Fig. ... .963 Fig. ... .961 / Fig. ... .962
closed lifting device open lifting device gastight cap optional with lever

-10°C to +300°C
67.961 / 962 / 963 PN100 1.4581/EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 DIN ISO 228 Part 1
(up to +400°C on request)
-60°C to +300°C
57.961 / 963 PN100 1.4581 DN15 - 25 DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Construction
Requirement
Acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2
Type-test approval
Standard safety valve: Fig. 961/962/963 TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2
Details required
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TCP - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar

Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request)

ARI-SAFE-TCP 961 / 962 / 963
Technical data
Parts
1 Body GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
4 Spindle guide X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
12 Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
27 x O-ring FPM
28 Cap, closed GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
29 Cap, open GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
Lever, closed
36 EN AC-4420 (Al)
(optional: Fig. ... .961 / Fig. ... .962)
37 x Spring FDSiCr X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
66 O-ring FPM
67 Lift button X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25

(barg) 0,2 - 0,25
(barg) > 0,25 - 0,5
(barg) > 0,5 - 1
(barg) > 1 - 1,4
(barg) > 1,4 - 2,95

Fig. 961/962/963
(barg) > 2,95 - 4,9

(barg) > 4,9 - 12
(barg) > 12 - 20
(barg) > 20 - 27
(barg) > 27 - 35
(barg) > 35 - 45
(barg) > 45 - 59
(barg) > 59 - 100


ARI-SAFE-TCP 961 / 962 / 963
Technical data
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 1/2" 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1"
d0 (mm) 12 12 12 12 12 12
A0 (mm2) 113 113 113 113 113 113
GE (inch) 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
b (mm) 15 15 16 16 16 18
l (mm) 42 47 42 47 50 50
l1 (mm) 34 34 34 34 34 34
H (mm) 189 189 189 189 189 189
X (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Weights
standard (kg) 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
1.4581 100 (bar) 50 100 98 93,3 88,5 83,3 80,4 78 --
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · D/G 0,30
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · F 0,23

ARI-SAFE-TCP 961 / 962 / 963
Capacity saturated steam / Air / Water (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN 15 20 25 15 20 25 15 20 25
(inch) G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1" G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1" G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1"
Connections (inch) G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4" G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4" G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4"
(inch) G3/4" x 1" G3/4" x 1" G3/4" x 1"
do (mm) 12 12 12
0,2 (barg) 14 14 14 16 16 16 0,62 0,62 0,62
0,5 (barg) 24 24 24 29 29 29 0,98 0,98 0,98
1 (barg) 35 35 35 44 44 44 1,39 1,39 1,39
2 (barg) 56 56 56 71 71 71 1,97 1,97 1,97
3 (barg) 75 75 75 96 96 96 2,41 2,41 2,41
4 (barg) 96 96 96 125 125 125 2,78 2,78 2,78
5 (barg) 116 116 116 150 150 150 3,11 3,11 3,11
6 (barg) 135 135 135 176 176 176 3,41 3,41 3,41
7 (barg) 153 153 153 201 201 201 3,68 3,68 3,68
8 (barg) 172 172 172 227 227 227 3,93 3,93 3,93
9 (barg) 191 191 191 252 252 252 4,17 4,17 4,17
10 (barg) 210 210 210 277 277 277 4,40 4,40 4,40
11 (barg) 229 229 229 303 303 303 4,61 4,61 4,61
12 (barg) 248 248 248 328 328 328 4,82 4,82 4,82
13 (barg) 267 267 267 354 354 354 5,01 5,01 5,01
14 (barg) 286 286 286 379 379 379 5,20 5,20 5,20
15 (barg) 304 304 304 405 405 405 5,39 5,39 5,39
16 (barg) 323 323 323 430 430 430 5,56 5,56 5,56
17 (barg) 342 342 342 455 455 455 5,73 5,73 5,73
18 (barg) 361 361 361 481 481 481 5,90 5,90 5,90
19 (barg) 380 380 380 506 506 506 6,06 6,06 6,06
20 (barg) 399 399 399 532 532 532 6,22 6,22 6,22
25 (barg) 494 494 494 659 659 659 6,95 6,95 6,95
30 (barg) 590 590 590 786 786 786 7,62 7,62 7,62
35 (barg) 686 686 686 913 913 913 8,23 8,23 8,23
40 (barg) 784 784 784 1040 1040 1040 8,79 8,79 8,79
45 (barg) 883 883 883 1165 1165 1165 9,33 9,33 9,33
50 (barg) 983 983 983 1295 1295 1295 9,83 9,83 9,83
55 (barg) 1085 1085 1085 1420 1420 1420 10,31 10,31 10,31
60 (barg) 1185 1185 1185 1550 1550 1550 10,77 10,77 10,77
65 (barg) 1290 1290 1290 1675 1675 1675 11,21 11,21 11,21
70 (barg) 1400 1400 1400 1800 1800 1800 11,63 11,63 11,63
75 (barg) 1500 1500 1500 1930 1930 1930 12,04 12,04 12,04
80 (barg) 2055 2055 2055 12,44 12,44 12,44
85 (barg) 2185 2185 2185 12,82 12,82 12,82
90 (barg) 2310 2310 2310 13,19 13,19 13,19
95 (barg) 2438 2438 2438 13,5 13,5 13,5
100 (barg) 2565 2565 2565 13,76 13,76 13,76

ARI-SAFE-TCS 951 / 952 / 953
Technical data
ARI-SAFE-TCS - Standard safety valve D/G/F
ALSO FOR HORIZONTAL APPLICATION

(please indicate installation position horizontal/vertical up to 5 bar set pressure with your order)
Fig. ... .951 Fig. ... .952 Fig. ... .953 Fig. ... .951 / Fig. ... .952
closed lifting device open lifting device gastight cap optional with lever

-10°C to +300°C
67.951 / 952 / 953 PN100 1.4581/EN-JS1049 DN15 - 25 DIN ISO 228 Part 1
-60°C to +300°C
57.951 / 953 PN100 1.4581 DN15 - 25 DIN ISO 228 Part 1
Construction
Requirement
acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, VdTÜV-leaflet 100, AD2000-A2
Type-test approval
Standard safety valve: Fig. 951/952/953 TÜV · SV · . . -1041 · D/G
Sizing
for steam, air and water refer to capacity tables, calculations acc. to EN ISO 4126-1, TRD 421 and AD2000-A2
Details required
Order data:
ARI-SAFE-TCS - Safety valve, Figure ....., DN ... / ..., PN .. / .., Material ........, Set pressure .... bar, Installation position ....

Superimposed back pressure no backpressure allowed
Built up back pressure max. 10% from set pressure (higher on request)

ARI-SAFE-TCS 951 / 952 / 953
Technical data
Parts
1 Body GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
11 Bonnet, closed EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
12 Disc X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
14 x Spindle X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
17 Adjusting screw X2CrNiMo17-12-2, 1.4404
27 O-ring FPM
28 Cap, closed GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
29 Cap, open GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
30 Cap, gastight EN-GJS-400-18U-LT, EN-JS1049 GX5CrNiMoN19-11-2, 1.4581
Lever, closed
36 EN AC-4420 (Al)
(optional: Fig. ... .951 / Fig. ... .952)
37 x Spring FDSiCr X10CrNi18-8, 1.4310
63 Guide bush X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
66 O-ring FPM
67 Lift button X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571
└ Spare parts
DN 15 20 25

(barg) 0,5
(barg) > 0,5 - 1
(barg) > 1 - 1,4
(barg) > 1,4 - 2,95
(barg) > 2,95 - 4,9
Standard safety (barg) > 4,9 - 12
valve
Fig. 951/952/953 (barg) > 12 - 20
(barg) > 20 - 27
(barg) > 27 - 35
(barg) > 35 - 45
(barg) > 45 - 59
(barg) > 59 - 100


ARI-SAFE-TCS 951 / 952 / 953
Technical data
DN 15 20 25
Dimensions
G (inch) 1/2" x 1/2" 1/2" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" 3/4" x 1" 1" x 1"
d0 (mm) 12 12 12 12 12 12
A0 (mm2) 113 113 113 113 113 113
GE (inch) 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1"
GA (inch) 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1"
b (mm) 15 15 16 16 16 18
l (mm) 42 47 42 47 50 50
l1 (mm) 34 34 34 34 34 34
H (mm) 189 189 189 189 189 189
X (mm) 100 100 100 100 100 100
Weights
standard (kg) 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2
1.4581 100 (bar) 50 100 98 93,3 88,5 83,3 80,4 78 --
DN 15 20 25
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · D/G 0,26
TÜV · SV · . . - 1041 · F 0,19

ARI-SAFE-TCS 951 / 952 / 953
Capacity saturated steam / air / water (incl. 10% overpressure)

DN 15 20 25 15 20 25 15 20 25
(inch) G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1" G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1" G1/2" x 1/2" G3/4" x 1/2" G1" x 1"
Connections (inch) G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4" G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4" G1/2" x 3/4" G3/4" x 3/4"
G3/4" x 1" G3/4" x 1" G3/4" x 1"
do (mm) 12 12 12
0,5 (barg) 20 20 20 24 24 24 0,81 0,81 0,81
1 (barg) 30 30 30 37 37 37 1,15 1,15 1,15
application
← horizontal
2 (barg) 48 48 48 62 62 62 1,62 1,62 1,62

3 (barg) 68 68 68 86 86 86 1,99 1,99 1,99
4 (barg) 84 84 84 108 108 108 2,30 2,30 2,30
5 (barg) 100 100 100 130 130 130 2,57 2,57 2,57
6 (barg) 117 117 117 152 152 152 2,81 2,81 2,81
7 (barg) 133 133 133 174 174 174 3,04 3,04 3,04
8 (barg) 149 149 149 196 196 196 3,25 3,25 3,25
9 (barg) 166 166 166 218 218 218 3,45 3,45 3,45
10 (barg) 182 182 182 240 240 240 3,63 3,63 3,63
11 (barg) 198 198 198 262 262 262 3,81 3,81 3,81
12 (barg) 215 215 215 284 284 284 3,98 3,98 3,98
13 (barg) 231 231 231 306 306 306 4,14 4,14 4,14
14 (barg) 247 247 247 328 328 328 4,3 4,3 4,3
15 (barg) 264 264 264 351 351 351 4,45 4,45 4,45
16 (barg) 280 280 280 373 373 373 4,59 4,59 4,59
17 (barg) 297 297 297 395 395 395 4,74 4,74 4,74
18 (barg) 313 313 313 417 417 417 4,87 4,87 4,87
19 (barg) 329 329 329 439 439 439 5,01 5,01 5,01
20 (barg) 346 346 346 461 461 461 5,14 5,14 5,14
25 (barg) 428 428 428 571 571 571 5,74 5,74 5,74
30 (barg) 512 512 512 681 681 681 6,29 6,29 6,29
35 (barg) 595 595 595 791 791 791 6,80 6,80 6,80
40 (barg) 680 680 680 901 901 901 7,26 7,26 7,26
45 (barg) 765 765 765 1010 1010 1010 7,71 7,71 7,71
50 (barg) 852 852 852 1120 1120 1120 8,12 8,12 8,12
55 (barg) 940 940 940 1230 1230 1230 8,52 8,52 8,52
60 (barg) 1030 1030 1030 1340 1340 1340 8,90 8,90 8,90
65 (barg) 1120 1120 1120 1450 1450 1450 9,26 9,26 9,26
70 (barg) 1200 1200 1200 1560 1560 1560 9,61 9,61 9,61
75 (barg) 1300 1300 1300 1675 1675 1675 9,95 9,95 9,95
80 (barg) 1785 1785 1785 10,27 10,27 10,27
85 (barg) 1895 1895 1895 10,59 10,59 10,59
90 (barg) 2005 2005 2005 10,90 10,90 10,90
95 (barg) 2110 2110 2110 11,16 11,16 11,16
100 (barg) 2220 2220 2220 11,36 11,36 11,36

ARI-SAFE
Special design / Accessories
Soft sealing disc

Body design Pos. Description P min. Material Temperature range Abbreviation
0,5 bar X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / EPDM -40 °C to +150 °C E
EN-JL1040, 0,5 bar X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / FPM Viton (FKM) -20 °C to +180 °C V
EN-JS1049, 12 Disc
1.0619+N 0,5 bar X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / CR Neoprene -30 °C to +100 °C N
1,0 bar 1) X20Cr13+QT, 1.4021+QT / SHR 2) -20 °C to +220 °C S
(lower values on request)

0,5 bar X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / EPDM -40 °C to +150 °C E
1.4408, 0,5 bar X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / FPM Viton (FKM) -20 °C to +180 °C V
12 Disc
1.4581 0,5 bar X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / CR Neoprene -30 °C to +100 °C N
1,0 bar 1) X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571 / SHR 2) -20 °C to +220 °C S
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / EPDM -40 °C to +150 °C E
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / FPM Viton (FKM) -20 °C to +180 °C V
SA216WCB 12 Disc
0,5 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / CR Neoprene -30 °C to +100 °C N
1,0 bar SA276 Gr. 440 / SHR -20 °C to +220 °C S
Fig. 950/960 with soft sealing disc max. 40 bar 1) DN20/32 min. 2,0 bar 2) only Fig. 900
EPDM-Bellows seal (DN15 - 150)

Pos. Description Material Temperature range
43 EPDM-Bellows seal EPDM 70 Shore A -10 °C to +120 °C
Balanced stainless steel-bellows

(Only for closed version!)
Pos. Description Material
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571;
55 Bellows unit
SA240 / SA479 Gr.316 Ti (SAFE-SN ANSI)
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2, 1.4571;
70 Balanced piston (DN15-100)
SA479 Gr.316 Ti (SAFE-SN ANSI)
Test: German "TA-Air TÜV-Test-No. 922-960324
Vent hole
Vent hole G1/8
G1/4
SAFE 900 SAFE-TC 940

ARI-SAFE
Special design / Accessories
Proximity switch Changeover valve
Rupture disc
Lock bushing Test gag (Sizing refer to page 40.)
Seat 1.4571 / Stellite No. 21 DN15-100 DN125-250

Disc 1.4571 / Stellite No. 6
Sitz SA479Gr.316Ti / Stellit No. 21 (SAFE-SN ANSI)
Kegel SA479Gr.316Ti / Stellit No. 6 (SAFE-SN ANSI)
removable lifting aid removable lifting aid
Body- DN1 x DN2 A B C Ø S H

Material (mmxmm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
1.0619+N 50 x 80 176 70 204 155
14 12
1.4408 65 x 100 212 90 242 175
EN-JL1040 80 x 125 245 130 280 205
EN-JS1049
18 16
1.0619+N 100 x 150 295 165 332 230
1.4408
EN-JL1040 125 x 200 318 183 362 20 260
22
1.0619+N 150 x 250 360 200 408 22 295
125 x 125 226 110 254 14 10 205
EN-JS1049 150 x 150 262 146 298 18 14 232
1.0619+N 200 x 300 465 256 521 26 22 305
250 x 350 544 300 600 26 24 337
Body- NPS A B C Ø S H
Material (inch) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
2" x 3" 176 70 204 143
14 12
3" x 4" 212 90 242 162
SA216WCB 4" x 6" 295 165 332 18 16 186
6" x 8" 318 183 362 22 20 248
6" x 10" 360 200 405 22 22 251
Heating jacket
Support tongues, drilled

ARI-SAFE
Safety valve approvals
SAFE- TCS/
SAFE SAFE-SN SAFE-P SAFE-TC
TCP
Fig. 900 BR 900 Fig. 920 Fig. 940
Fig. 950 / 960
Fig. 951-953
Fig. 901-912 Fig. 903 Fig. 904 Fig. 901-912 Fig. 921-924 Fig. 941-943 Fig. 945 Fig. 946
Fig. 961-963
Pressure equipment directive
PED 2014/68/EU X X X X X X X X X
Module H1, B+D
BV Bureau Veritas
X -- -- X X X -- -- X
Frankreich / France
DNV Det Norske Veritas

X -- -- X X X X X X
Norwegen / Norway
GL
X -- -- X X X -- -- X
Germanischer Lloyd
LROS (LRS)
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Lloyds Register of Shipping
SELO (SQLO)
X X X X X X X X X
China / Chine
ASME Code
-- -- -- X -- -- -- -- --
Section VIII-Division 1 (UV-stamp)
Canada Registration
X -- -- X -- -- -- -- --
(UV-stamp)
EAC
X X X X X X X X X
Russland / Russia
RMROS (RS)
X X X X X X X X X
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Promatomnadzor
X X X X X X X X X
White russia (Rep. of Belarus)
Prombezpeka
X X X X X X X X X
Ukraine
Rostechnadzor (Gosgortechnadsor)
X X X X X X X X X
Russland / Russia
Single approvals
Arbejdstilsynet
X X X X X X X X X
Danish emploment protection
ABS
X X X X X X X X X
American Bureau of Shipping
AIB Vincotte
X X X X X X X X X
Belgien / Belgium
IBR
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Indien Boiler Regulations
ISPESL
X X X X X X X X X
Italien / Italy
RINA
X -- -- X X X -- -- --
Italien / Italy
Stoomwezen
X X X X X X X X X
Niederlande / Netherlands
NK
X X X X X X X X X
Japan
UDT
X X X X X X X X X
Polen / Poland

ARI-myValve® / Approvals
Sizing
myValve® - Your Valve Sizing-Program.

myValve® is a powerful software tool that not only helps you size your system components; it also gives you instant access to all other data about the selected product, such
as order information, spare parts drawings, operating instructions, data sheets, etc., whenever you need it.
Contents: Module ARI-Safety valve SAFE-Calculation

- Sizing of valve-size with given capacity, temperature, set pressure and back pressure;
- Sizing acc. to SAFE DIN EN, AD2000, ASME VIII, API520.
Media: Integrated media-databank (more than 160 media) with conditions:

- Vapours / gases
- Steam (saturated and superheated)
- Liquids
Special features: - Project administration of the calculation and product data incl. spare part drawings concerning to project and tag number.
- Direct output or calculation and product data in PDF format.
- Product data could be taken for a direct order.
- SI- and ANSI-units with direct conversion to another databank.
- Settings with over pressure or absolute pressure.
- All ARI valves are integrated in a databank.
- Direct access relating to the product on data sheets, operating instructions, pressure-temperature-diagram, controller characteristics,
spare part drawings and CAD-symbols on the website.
- Operation in company networks possible (no complex installations on individually PC‘s necessary).
- Extensive catalogue extending over several product groups.
System requirements: Windows operating systems, Linux, etc.

ARI-SAFE
Rupture disc before safety valves - Checklist
To ARI-Armaturen to the att. of Mrs./Mr. ............................................................................ Fax No. +49 52 07 / 994 - ...................................................
If the type of bursting disc is not yet determined, we are offering our assistance for sizing.
Please send us the questionnaire containing the appropriate data.
Customer: ......................................................................... Telephone: ................................................................
......................................................................... Fax: ................................................................
Handled by: ......................................................................... E-mail: ................................................................
Date: ......................................................................... ................................................................
Necessary data
Medium:
..................................................................................
□ liquid □ gas
Temperature: ....................°C
Safety valve
Type / Figure: ....................................... Set pressure: .................................... bar(g)
Nominal diameter:
(Input / Output) DN .............. / ................ Flow diameter d0: .................................... mm
Nominal pressure:
(Input / Output) PN .............. / ................ Flow cross-section A0: .................................... mm2
Certified coefficient of
discharge Kdr (αw): ....................................
Rupture disc
Bursting pressure: ....................................... bar(g) Material: □ 1.4401
(Bursting pressure = Set pressure of the safety valve) □ Nickel
Tolerance: □ + 10% □ Inconel
□ Monel
□ .......%
□ Aluminium
Quantity: piece □ Teflon foil medium side
(incl. reserve) (minimum 3 pieces recommended)
□ other ................................
TÜV-approval: □ yes □ no
Halter (incl. 1/4"-vent)

Nominal pressure: PN ................................. Material: □ 1.4571
Quantity (Holder): .......................................................... piece □ other ................................

Indication device
(Pressure gauge / excess
flow valve) Quantity: .......................................................... piece
Burst disc alarm Quantity: .......................................................... piece
Bursting disc selection
Construction □ Reverse buckling bursting disc Manufacturer / Type: □ ................................

□ other ..................................................................
Nominal size selection of the bursting disc DN

• Acc. to DIN EN ISO 4126-3 and API 520 „90%-determination“
Example: Remark:
Max. capacity SAFE 900, DN 50, 10 bar without bursting disc = 9610 Nm³/h
Max. capacity SAFE 900, DN 50, 10 bar with bursting disc = 0,9 x 9610 Nm³/h = 8649 Nm³/h
• Acc. to AD2000-A1 (5.4.2.2)
Ageom x α > 1,5 x A0 x αw
ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33750 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock,
Tel. +49 52 07 / 994-0, Telefax +49 52 07 / 994-158 or 159 Internet: https://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com

Operation and Installation Manual
Ball Valves

Impressum
© by END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved. END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG claims copyright over this documentation.
This documentation may neither be altered, expanded , reproduced nor passed to third parties without the
written agreement of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG . This restriction also applies to the corresponding
drawings.
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG has the right or change parts of the valves and armatures at any time without
prior or direct notice to the client. The contents of this publication are subject to change without notice.
This publication has been written with great care. However, END-Armaturen GmbH & Co.KG cannot be held
responsible, either for any errors occuring in this publication or for their consequences.
The products are specified by the statements in this documentation; no assurance or the properties is given.

Oberbecksener Straße 78
Telefon: 05731 / 7900 - 0
Telefax: 05731 / 7900 - 199
Internet: http://www.end.de
E-Mail: post@end.de
Edition: 07/2016
Contents
Inhalt
1 Foreword 4
2 General advice 5
2.1 Validity 5
2.2 Inward monitoring 5
2.3 Complaints 5
2.4 Warranty 5
2.5 Symbols and their signification 6
3 Safety advice 7
3.1 Personal advice 7
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting 7
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting 7
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing 8
3.2 Device safety 9
4 Name-plate 10
5 Ball valves 11
5.1 General 11
5.2 Corresponding use 11
5.3 Operation 11
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly 11
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection 12
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection 13
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve 13
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends 14
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part 15
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection 16
5.5 Maintenance 17
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland 18
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing 19
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection 19
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection 22
Foreword
1 Foreword
Dear customer,
Dear assembler / user,
these operation and installation manuals are intended to give you the knowledge, which is
necessary for you to be able to carry out the mounting and adjustment of the ball valves rapaidly
and correctly.
Please read these instructions carefully and pay particular attention to the advice and warning
notes.
Only instructed and qualified mechanician should mount, adjust or maintain the ball valves.
If you have any questions in relation to the ball valves we shall be pleased to answer them.
The telephone number will be found on the inside cover of these operation and installation manual.
Yours
General advice
2 General advice
2.1 Validity
These mounting and installation manual is valid for the standard version of the ball valves.
2.2 Inward monitoring
Please check
• directly after delivery the ball valves for any transport damages and defi-
ciencies.
• with reference to the accompanying delivery note the number of parts.
Do not leave any parts in the package.
2.3 Complaints
Claims for replacement or goods which relate to transport damage can only be considered valid if
the delivery company is notified without delay.
In case of returns (because of transport damage / repairs), please make a damage protocol and
send the parts back to the manufacturer, if possible in the original packaging.
In case of a return, please mention the following:

• Name and address of the consignee
• Stock-/ ordering-/ article-number
• Description of the defect
2.4 Warranty
For our ball valves we give a guarantee period in accordance with the sales contract.
The end of the normal duration of life of the wearing parts represents no defect.
The warranty and guarantee rules of END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG are applicable.
Symbols and their signification
2.5 Symbols and their signification
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices; this also includes
advices for averting health risks. Observe these paragraphs without fail!
Paragraphs which are identified with this symbol contain very important advices, this also includes
how to avoid damage to property. Observe these papgraphs without fail!
This symbol indicates paragraphs which contain comments / advices or tips.
This spanner identifies the description of actions which you should carry out.
Safety advice
3 Safety advice
Depending on the technical circumstances and the time under and at which the armatures and
valves are mounted, adjusted and commissioned, you must take into account particular safety
aspects in each case!
If, for example, a pneumatic actuator works a slide in an operational chemical plant, the potential
hazards of commissioning have another dimension from that when this is only being carried out for
test purposes an a „dry“ part of the plant in the assembly room!
Since we do not know the circumstances at the time of the mounting/adjustment/commissioning,

you may find advices on hazards in the following descriptions which are not relevant to you.
Please observe (only) the advices which applies to your situation!
3.1 Personal advice
3.1.1 Safety advices for mounting
We wish to point out expressly that the mounting, adjusting and at accessories the pneumatical
and eletrical installation of the armatures and valves must be carried out by trained specialist
personnel having mechanical, pneumatical and electrical knowledge!
Secure that the machine / plant come up to the Machinery Directice after the mounting and instal-
ling of the armatures and valves.
Switch off all the devices / machines / plant affected by mounting or repair.
If appropriate, isolate the devices / machines / plant from the mains.
Check (for example in chemical plants) whether the switching off of devices / machines / plant
will cause potential danger.
If appropriate, in the event of a fault in the armature / valve (in a plant which is in operation)
inform the shift forman / safety engineer or the works manager without delay about the fault, in
order, for example, to avoid an outflow / overflow of chemicals or the discharge of gases in good
time by means of suitable measures!
Before mounting or repairing, remove the pressure from pneumatic / hydraulic devices / machi-
nes / plant.
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up of the devices /
machines / plant.
Observe the respective relevant professional safety and accident prevention regulations when
carrying out the mounting / repair work.
Check the correct functioning of the safety equipment (for example the emergency push off but-
tons/ safety valves, etc)!
3.1.2 Safety advice for adjustment / starting
As a result of the starting (pneumactic, electric or by hand) of the armatures and valves the flow
of gases, steam, liquids, etc. may be enabled or interrupted! Satisfy yourself that, as a result of
the starting or the test adjustment no potential hazards will be produced for the personnel or the
environment!
Safety advice
If necessary, set up warning signs in order to prevent the inadvertent starting up or shutting down
of the device / machine / plant.!
By ending the adjustment check the correct function and should the occasion arise the position
of the slide / valve / flap.
Check the function of the limit switches (option)!
Check, whether the slide / valve / flap will be closed totally, if the control signals the appropriate
limit stop!
Through suitable measures, prevent links being trapped by moving actuating elements!
Check the right function of all safety devices (for example emergency push off buttons / safety
valves)!
Carry out the starting and the adjustments only in accordance with the instructions discribed in
this documentation!
Adjusting switch on armatures and valves with options (e.g. actuators, solenoid valves, limit
switches) there is the risk that live parts (230 V AC~) can be touched!
Therefore the adjustments must be carried out only by the electrican or a person having adequate
training, who is aware of the potntial hazard!
3.1.3 Safety advice for maintaining / repairing
Do not carry out any maintenances / repairs if the armature / valve will be under pressure.
Before disassembling or a armature or valve some essential points should be clarified!

• Will the armature/valve to be disassembled be replaced by another immediately?
• If appropriate, does the production process of the plant needed to be stopped?
• Is it necessary to inform specific personnel about the disassmbly?
If necessary, inform the shift foreman/ safety engineer or the manager about the maintenance
or repair without delay in order, for example, to avoid an outflow/ overflow of chemicals or a
discharge of gases in good time by means of suitable measures!
Observe that some valves / armatures are able to enclose the pressured medium e.g. the ball
in the ball valve. You have to relieve the pressure in the pipes in which the armture/valve is
mounted.
Switch off pilot pressure and the power supply and relieve the pressure in the pipes.
If necessary set up warning signs in order to prevent

• the inadvertent starting up of the devices/machines/plants in which the armature/
valve is mounted
• the switching on of pilot medium supply, pilot power supply and/or the power supply
of actuators and accessories.
In case of defect in the armature/valve make contact to the supplier. The telephone number will
be found on the back cover of these mounting and installation manual.
Safety Advice
If you ascertain a damage of the armature/valve, isolate the device from the mains. Please
observe the safefy advices.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
3.2 Device safety
The armatures/valves
• are quality products which are produced in accordance to the recognized industrial
regulations.
• left the manufacturer`s work in a perfect safety condition.
In order to maintain this condition, as installer / user you must carry out your task in accordance
with the description in these instructions, technically correctly and with the greatest possible
precision .

We assume, as a trained specialist you are having mechanical and electrical knowledge!
Satisfy yourself that the armatures/vales will only be used within their admissible limiting value
(see the technical data) .
The armatures/valves must be used only for a purpose corresponding to their construction!
The armatures/valves must be used within the values specified in the technical data!
The operating of the armature/valve outside the nominal temperature range could destroy the
sealings and the bearings.
The operating of the armatures/valves outside the nominal pressure range could destroy the inner
parts and the body.
Never remove a cap or a other component part if the armature/valve will be under pressure.
Do not mount, start or adjust the armature/valve if itself, the pipes or a mounted actuator will be
damaged.
After the maintenance or repair check the right function of the armature/valve and the tightness
Name-plate
4 Name-plate
In some cases the armatures/valves will be provided with a nameplate, which permitts a definite identification
of the armatures/valves and shows the most important technical data to you. The name-plate should not be
displaced or changed
omation GmbH & Co. KG END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG

Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
1 - 7901-0 www.end.de +49 (0)5731 - 7901-0 www.end.de
22050 Art. No.:� AE311028
Serial:� 220885
:� 8 bar Pressure range (PS):� 16 bar
6 bar Pilot pressure:� - bar
-30°C ... +180°C Temperature range (TS): -20°C ... +180°C
50 / G2" Size (DN):�� 50 / G2"
60 bar Testing pressure (PT):� 60 bar
1 Fluidgroup:� 1
14.02.2002 Date of manufacturing: 14.02.2002
0062
Fig. 4.1 - Name-plate
Art.No. article number of the valve / armature

Serial order- or production- number
Pressure range (PS) max. admisable working pressure of the valve / armature [bar]
Pilot pressure recommend pilot pressure for correct function of the valve / armature [bar]
(only at pneumatic actuated valves / armatures)
Size (DN) connecting size of the valve / armature
Testing pressure (PT) testing pressure of the body of the valve / armature
Fluidgroup allowed fluidgroup of the valve / armature
Date of manufacturing month and year of manufacturing of the valve / armature
Ball Valves
5 Ball valves
5.1 General
Before you are mount, adjust, start, operate or disassemble a ball valve you have to read the
Safety advices
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
5.2 Corresponding use
Ball valves will be used to cut off medium flow.

It should only be used clean liquids and gases, on which the material of the ball valve will be resi-
stant. Pollution or using outside the nominal pressure range and/or the nominal temperature range
should causes damages on the armature especially on the seals.
In some cases you have to install an equalization boring into the ball, that there will be no overpres-
sure between the body and the ball by changing temperatures.
5.3 Operation
The ball valve will be open or close totally by using a handle or an pneumatic or electric actuator
(option).
During the operation of the ball valve take care that there won`t be insert any objects or limbs
into the armature. Heavy injuries or damages will be the consequence. If it is necessary you have
to install a protective device.
5.4 Mounting / Disassembly
The mechanical installation will be same at all variants of the ball valve. There will be differences
in the type of connection.
Observe the flow direction: the handle should point at the flow direction.
Remove the package and the safety devices (e.g. caps or plugs). Take care that there will be no
parts of the package or other parts in the armature.
Clean up the pipes in which the ball valve will be mounted. Pollution could affect the safety in
operation and the duration of life of the armature. If necessary you have to install a Y- strainer in
front of the ball valve.
Avoid stress in case of non align pipes.
Ball valves
5.4.1 Mounting with threaded connection
Before lay on sealing compounds, check the hardly screwing by the pipes into the valve body.
Lay on the correct sealing compounds on the pipes end. By using PTFE-ribbon or hemp sealings
observe the screw direction. Don`t use sealing compounds which are not prescribed for your
employment.
Screw the pipes into the connection ends of the valve. Don`t use the handle as a lever.
Strike up the pipes with pressure after that time the manufacturer of the sealing compounds pre-
tends to harden it.
Check the tightness of all connections.
sealing compound
harden
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.1 - ball valves, mounting threaded connection (Fig.: Art. TB111025)
Ball valves
5.4.2 Mounting with welded connection
Before welding you have to disassemble the center part of the ball valve to prevent the sealings
from damages.
5.4.2.1 Disassembly of the center part of the ball valve
Clamp the valve between a vice carfully. By using guard plates you can prevent the damage of the
ends of the body.
Loosen the nuts crossvice and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully. To attach the center parts and the connection ends at a later mounting you
can sign the parts.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
ren ha · po
atu Oeyn d.de
D -Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.2 - ball valves, mounting welded connection, disassembly of the center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
Ball Valves
5.4.2.2 Welding of the connection ends
The center part of the ball valve must be substitute by a distance part as long as the center part
during the welding.
By welding the valve body with the pipes observe appropriate demands and guide lines.
The safety demands by welding are depending on the place and the position of the point of weld.
Welding the parts at a serviceable device/machine/plant the potential of danger is as higher as
welding the parts in a welding room.
If appropriate, inform the shift foreman/safety engineer or the works manager and the fire brigade
of your factory.
By welding observe your own national guide lines about safety and pevention of accidents.
Fig. 5.3 -ball valves,mouting welded connections, welding of the connection ends(Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
Ball valves
5.4.2.3 Mounting of the center part
Before mounting the center part let the connection ends cool down.
Disassemble the distance part.
Insert the center part between the connection ends. Attach the center parts to the right connec-
tion ends.
Observe the correct seat of the sealings and that there will be no pollution in the seats of the seal-
ings and in the ball.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
Check the function of the ball valve.
G y
o. K man
& C er d.de
bH n · G en
Gm se st@
en hau po
tur yn e ·
r ma d Oe nd.d
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h cool down !
N
PE
F·O OS
E
AU
·CL
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.4 - ball valves, mounting welded connections, mounting of the center part of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
Ball valves
5.4.3 Mounting with flanged connection
In the following discription we assume that you have mounted the flanges at the end of the pipes
and the ball valve (welded flanges) and they are cooled down.
Insert the ball valve and the flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the required and the
max. torque of the ball valve, the flanges, the flanges seals and the screws.
G y
o. K an
& C erm .de
bH n · G end
Gm use st@
D
ren ha · po
atu Oeyn d.de
-Arm Bad w.en
EN 2547 ://ww
cool down !
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O SE
AU
·CLO
ZU
o.k.
flow direction
Fig. 5.5 - ball valves, mounting flanged connection (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
Ball valves
5.5 Maintenance
Before you maintain or shut down the valves you have to read the
Safety advice
If you have not read the safety advices until now, read this important advices now and turn back
to this point.
On normal accounts the ball valve is maintenance free.In periodical turns the controlling of the
function and the tightness should happen:
• check the tighness of the gland

• check the tightness of the ball seats
Depending on the version of the ball valve for decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be
readjust. See also chapter 5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
Ball valves in a multiple part design could be disassemble to exchange the seals and/or the ball.
See also chapter: 5.5.2. „Exchange of the ball and the sealings“.
In case of a defect of the valve make a contact to the supplier. The telephone number will be
found on the back or these operation and installation manual.
If you ascertain a demage of the valve switch off the device/ machine/ plant! However before
doing this, it is essential to refer to the
Safety advice.
Ball valves
5.5.1 Readjusting of the gland
For decreasing tightness at the stem the gland could be readjust.
By keeping the nominal pressure you have to tighten up the screw of the gland until the tightness
of the the gland will be restored
After the readjusting the ball of the valve must be able to move slightly.
At ball valves with spring forced sealings or o-ring sealings at the stem the readjustment isn`t
necessary.
o.k. tightness
Fig. 5.6 - ball valves, readjusting of the gland (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
Ball valves
5.5.2 Exchange of the ball and the sealing
For decreasing tightness the ball and/or the sealings of the ball valve could be exchange. The
availability of the spare parts kit you can see in the data sheet of your ball valve.
Corresponding to the wear of the parts exchange the sealings and the ball. By the replacement of
the ball you should also exchange the sealing.
In the following description we assume, that your ball valve will be actuated by hand. If your ball
valve will be actuated be a pneumatic or electric actuator, please also observe the opration and
installation manual of the actuator.
Cut off the media flow and relieve the media pressure.
Keep ready some fit tanks to catch up leaking liquids.
If it`s necessary remove the additional limt switches and gear boxes.
5.5.2.1 3-part ball valve with threaded or welded connection
At 3-part ball valve it will do when you remove the center part of the ball valve. Loosen the nuts
crosswise and remove the screws out of the body.
Take the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball. Put the
parts aside carefully.
. KG ny
Co rma e
H & · Ge end.d
mb en
n G aus post@
a ture eynh .de ·
rm d O nd
D-A Ba w.e
EN 2547 ://ww
3 ttp
h
N
PE
F·O SE
AU
·CLO
ZU
Fig. 5.7 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of th center part (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
Ball valves
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Take the parts aside carefully. Place a mark on the body and the connection ends that you will be
able to join the correct parts by a subsequent mounting.
Remove the ball seals and the ball out of the body.
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Clean all parts and check them for damages.
Throw away the old pieces by observing the appropriate demands and guide lines.
& er .de
. K ny
bH n · G end
Co ma
@
G
n G us st
re ha o
tu yn · p
e
ma Oe .de
Ar d d
D- Ba .en
m
EN 547 www
32 tp:/
ht
E S
LO
·C
N
ZU
PE
F·O
AU
Fig. 5.8 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZE311064)
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Insert the stem from the inside into the body.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Put the ball sealings and the ball into their seats at the center part of the ball valve. Observe, that
you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Move the center part of the body between the connection ends. If need be arange the center parts
to the correct connection ends.
Insert the screws into the borings of the connection ends.Tighten the nuts equally and crosswise.
Observe the max. torque of the screws.
For mounting read the advices at chapter
5.4.2.3. „Mounting of the center part“.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
Ball valves
5.5.2.2 Multiple part ball valve with flanged connection
Remove the ball valve out of the pipes. Loosen the flange screws and pull the screws out of the
flange.
Take the ball valve from the pipes.
Dismantle the ball balve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to screw out the screw of the body, or
• you have to screw the screw joint out of the body.
Observe, that you didn´t drop the sealings or the ball.
Observe that ball valves could enclose medium inside the ball.
Put the parts aside carefully. Place marks on the parts that you will be able to join the correct parts
by a subsequent mounting of the ball valve.
Remove the ball sealing and the ball out of the body.
. KG any
& Co Germ d.de
bH ·
Gm sen st@en
uren nhau · po
mat d Oey d.de
D-Ar en
EN 547 Bawww.
32 tp://
ht
N
PE
F·O E
AU OS
·CL
ZU
Fig. 5.9 - Ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the ball valve (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
Ball valves
Perhaps you have to turn the handle to remove the ball out of the body. Do not insert any limbs into
the ball valve. Heavy injuries will be the consequences..
Remove the second ball sealing.
Loosen the nut of the handle and take the handle and all discs und washers aside.
Depending on the version of the ball valve loosen the nut on the stem or loosen the gland nut
Remove the stem and all other sealings, washers and discs out of the body.
Clean all parts and check them for damages.
& erm .de
. K ny
bH n · G nd
Co a
Gm e e
n us t@
G
re ha pos
atu eyn e ·
rm d O d.d
D-A Ba .en
EN 547 ww
32 p://w
htt
SE
LO
·C
EN
ZU
OP
F·
AU
Fig. 5.10 - ball valves, replacement of the sealing kit: removement of the inner parts (Fig.: Art. ZP311007)
Ball valves
Make the stem with the new sealings and discs complete.
Insert the stem from the inside into the body.
Depending on the version of the ball valve mount the other sealings, discs and spring washers at
the stem, and screw the nut or the gland nut onto the stem.
Place the first ball seal into the seat in the body.
Insert the ball into the body. The dihedral of the stem must engage in the grove of the ball. If need
be you have to turn the stem.
Place the second ball seal into the seat in the body.
Assemble the ball valve. Depending on the version of the ball valve:
• you have to join the parts of the body together and to screw them up with the fit
screws; or
• you have to screw up the screw joint with the body.
If need be attach the different parts of the boby.
Put the handle onto the stem. Observe the correct function of the limit switches and take care that
the handle and the boring of the ball will align.
Fix the nut of the handle onto the stem and tighten it.
Before mounting the center part clean the connection ends at the end of the pipes.
Insert the ball valve with new flange sealings between the flanges.
Align the flange borings und put fit screws through the borings.
Put fit nuts on the screws and tighten them equally and crossvice. Observe the max. torque of the
screws.
For mounting read the advices at chapter
5.4.3 „Mounting with flanged connection“.
If need be adjust the gland of the stem. Please read the advices at chapter
5.5.1. „Readjusting of the gland“.
Notes
watergates
knife-gate-valves - Stoffschieber
END-Armaturen GmbH & Co. KG Watergates GmbH & Co. KG

Oberbecksener Str.78 Oberbecksener Str.70
D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen D-32547 Bad Oeynhausen
Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0 Telefon +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-0
Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199 Telefax +49 (0) 5731 / 7900-199
Internet http://www.end.de Internet http://www.watergates.de
E-Mail post@end.de E-Mail post@watergates.de
Type 0
121, 0330, 0331
(0124, 0125, 0332, 0333)
2/2- and 3/2-Way Solenoid Valve
2/2- und 3/2-Wege-Magnetventil
Électrovanne à 2/2 et 3/2 voies
Operating Instructions
Bedienungsanleitung
Manuel d‘utilisation
Table of Contents 1 The operating instructions
1 The operating instructions...................................................................................................2 The operating instructions contain important information.
▶▶ Read the instructions carefully and follow the safety instructions.
2 Authorized use...............................................................................................................................3
▶▶ Keep the instructions in a location where they are available to every
3 Basic safety instructions.......................................................................................................4 user.
The liability and warranty for the device are void if the operating
4 System description.....................................................................................................................5
instructions are not followed.
5 Technical data................................................................................................................................5
1.1 Symbols
6 Assembly............................................................................................................................................9
▶▶ Designates instructions for risk prevention.
7 Electrical connection.............................................................................................................11 →→Designates a procedure which you must carry out.
8 Disassembly..................................................................................................................................13
Danger!
9 Maintenance, troubleshooting........................................................................................14
Immediate danger! Serious or fatal injuries.
10 Transportation, storage, disposal.................................................................................15
Warning!
Possible danger! Serious or fatal injuries.
Caution!
Danger! Moderate or minor injuries.
2 english
Note! 2 Authorized use
Warns of damage to property. The device is designed to control, shut off and meter neutral
and aggressive media up to a viscosity of 37 mm²/s.
▶▶ Use according to the authorized data, operating conditions and
Important tips and recommendations. conditions of use specified in the contract documents and operat-
ing instructions.
Refers to information in these operating instructions or in other ▶▶ Provided the cable plug is connected and installed correctly, e.g.
documentation. Bürkert Type 2518, the device satisfies degree of protection IP65
in accordance with DIN EN 60529 / IEC 60529.
▶▶ Only operate the device when in perfect condition and always ensure
1.2 Definitions of terms proper storage, transportation, installation and operation.
▶▶ Use the device only as intended.
In these instructions, the term "device" always refers to the Type 0121,
0330, 0331, (0124, 0125, 0332, 0333). 2.1 Restrictions
If exporting the device, observe any existing restrictions.
english 3
3 Basic safety instructions Risk of injury due to malfunction of valves with alternating
These safety instructions do not make allowance for any contingencies voltage (AC).
and events which may arise during assembly, operation and maintenance. Sticking core causes coil to overheat, resulting in a malfunction.
▶▶ Monitor process to ensure function is in perfect working order.
General hazardous situations.
Risk of injury from high pressure in the system/device. To prevent injuries:
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the pressure ▶▶ In a potentially explosive area, the device may be used only in accor-
and vent/drain lines. dance with the specification on the type label. For the use, observe
Risk of injury due to electrical shock. the supplementary instructions manual enclosed with the device with
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power supply safety instructions for the explosion-risk area.
and secure to prevent reactivation. ▶▶ The enclosed UL instructions must be followed in the UL area.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for ▶▶ Do not carry out any external or internal modifications and do not
electrical equipment. subject the device to mechanical loads (e.g. by placing objects on
it or standing on it).
Risk of burns/risk of fire if used for a prolonged switch-on time
▶▶ Secure the device against unintentional activation.
through hot device surface.
▶▶ Only trained technicians may perform installation and maintenance
▶▶ Keep device away from highly flammable substances and media and work.
do not touch with bare hands.
▶▶ The valves must be installed in accordance with the regulations
Risk of short-circuit/escape of media through leaking screw applicable in the country.
joints. ▶▶ After an interruption in the power supply, ensure that the process is
▶▶ Ensure seals are seated correctly. restarted in a controlled manner.
▶▶ Carefully screw valve and pipelines together. ▶▶ Observe the general rules of technology.
4 english
4 System description 5 Technical data
The pivoted armature valves are direct acting 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid The following values are indicated on the type label:
valves in a wide variety of circuit functions and models. Solenoid system • Voltage (tolerance ±10 %) / current type
and media chamber are separated from one another by a separating
• Coil power consumption (active power in W - at operating
diaphragm system. The valves are fast acting and have a long service life.
temperature)
• Pressure range
Type 0121 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, socket connection • Body material (MS=brass, VA=stainless steel, PV=PVC,
Type 0330 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, socket connection TE=PTFE, PP=polypropylene, PD=PVDF)
Type 0331 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, flange connection • Seal material (F=FKM, A=EPDM, B=NBR, C=FFKM)
Type 0332 Bistable 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve ▶
with 2 coil windings, socket connection 5.1 Conformity
Type 0333 Bistable 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve ▶ The Types 0121, 0330, 0331, (0124, 0125, 0332, 0333) are compliant
with 2 coil windings, flange connection with the EC Directives according to the EC Declaration of Conformity
(if applicable).
Type 0124 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, socket connection
Type 0125 2/2 or 3/2-way solenoid valve, flange connection 5.2 Standards
The applied standards, which are used to demonstrate compliance with
the EC Directives, are listed in the EC type test certificate and/or the EC
Declaration of Conformity (if applicable).
english 5
5.3 Operating conditions 5.4 Mechanical data
Ambient temperature ▶ Dimensions see data sheet
Type 0121 max. +50 °C▶
Coil material epoxide
Other types max. +55 °C
Connections G 1/4 ▶
Duty cycle▶
(NPT 1/4, G 1/8, G 3/8, Rc 1/4 on request)
for body material ▶
Brass or stainless steel long-term operation, duty cycle 100 %▶
5.5 Fluidic data
Plastic max. permissible duty cycle ▶
see data sheet Media aggressive, neutral, gaseous and liquid media, ▶
which do not attack body and seal materials.
Important information for functional reliability. (see resistance table at www.burkert.com).
If switched off for a long period, 1-2 switching actions are ▶
recommended prior to restart. Medium temperature for seal material▶
FKM 0 °C to +90 °C
Service life High switching frequency and high pres-
sures reduce the service life. EPDM –30 °C to +90 °C
NBR 0 °C to +80 °C
Degree of protection IP65 in accordance with DIN EN 60529
/ IEC 60529 with correctly connected FFKM +5 °C to +90 °C
and installed cable plug, e.g. Bürkert
Type 2518
6 english
For UL Listed valves the following values must be observed:
Fluid Temperatures NBR [°F] NBR [°C] EPDM [°F] EPDM [°C] FKM [°F] FKM [°C]
Fluid +32 to +176 0 to +80 –22 to +194 –30 to +90 +32 to +194 0 to +90
Air
Ambient +32 to +131 0 to +55 +14 to +131 –10 to +55 +32 to +131 0 to +55
Fluid +41 to +176 +5 to +80 +41 to +194 +5 to +90 +41 to +194 +5 to +90
Water
Fluid +32 to +176 0 to +80 –22 to +194 –30 to +90 +32 to +194 0 to +90
Inert gas
Fluid +32 to +194 0 to +90
Oil – –
Ambient +32 to +131 0 to +55
Fluid +32 to +194 0 to +90
LP-gas – –
Ambient +32 to +131 0 to +55
Fluid +32 to +194 0 to +90
Oxygen – –
Ambient +32 to +131 0 to +55
english 7
Circuit functions 5.6 Electrical data
2 (A) Connections DIN EN 175301-803 (DIN 43 650), shape A for
A▶ 2/2-way valve, ▶
cable plug Type 2518 or 2509
(NC) 1 (P) closed in rest position
B▶
2 (A)
2/2-way valve, ▶ 5.7 Type label (example)
(NO) 1 (P) open in rest position Body material
2(A)
C▶ 3/2-way valve; closed in rest position, Seal material
(NC) 1(P) 3(R) output A unloaded Orifice
4(B)
D▶ 3/2-way valve, in rest position, output B Circuit function
(NO) 1(P) 3(R) pressurized Type
2(A) 3/2-way mixing valve; in rest position, 0330 C 2,0 FKM MS▶
Made in Germany
E pressure connection P2 connected to G1/4 0-6 bar▶
1(P) 3(R)
output A, P1 closed 24V DC 8W
2(A) 4(B) 3/2-way distribution valve,▶ CE

00450000 W14UN
F in rest position, pressure connection P
1(P)
connected to output B Identification number
2(A) Voltage, frequency, output
T 3/2-way all purpose valve Port connection, nominal pressure
1(P) 3(R)
Fig. 1: Description of the type label
8 english
6 Assembly 6.1 Before installation
DANGER! Installation position:
The installation position is optional. Preferably: Actuator at the top.
Risk of injury from high pressure in the system/device. →→Prior to installation check pipelines for dirt and clean if necessary.
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the pressure
and vent/drain lines. Dirt filter: To ensure that the solenoid valve func-
tions reliably, a dirt filter (≤ 500 µm) must be
Risk of injury due to electrical shock.
installed in front of the valve input.
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power sup-
ply and secure to prevent reactivation.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for
electrical equipment. 6.2 Installation
→→Observe flow direction: ▶
Warning! Functioning of the device is only ensured if the circuit function is
maintained.
Risk of injury from improper assembly.
▶▶ The assembly may be carried out only by trained technicians and Devices with socket connection
with the appropriate tools.
▶▶ Secure system against unintentional activation.
→→Use PTFE tape as seal material.
▶▶ Following assembly, ensure a controlled restart. →→Determine the maximum screw-in depth of the connecting threads
as this does not comply with any standard.
english 9
Note! 6.3 Manual control
Caution risk of breakage.
▶▶ Do not use the coil as a lifting arm. Note!
▶▶ When the manual control is locked, the valve cannot be actuated
→→Hold the device with a suitable tool (open-end wrench) on the electrically.
body; screw into the pipeline.
Attaching the device: Manual control
→→Via bore holes M4x8 (made from brass or stainless steel) or self-
tapping screws 3.9 DIN 7970 (made from plastic, max. screw-in
depth 10 mm) on the bottom side of the body at drill pattern
Press 1
38x24.
Devices in flange model

Attaching the device: Turn 2
→→Via supplied screws on basic devices or manifold. Fig. 2: Manual control
→→Tighten fastening screws on the coil to a maximum torque of 2 Nm.
10 english
7 Electrical connection 7.1 Standard device
DANGER! →→Connect L1/+ and N/– to terminals 1 and 2, independent of the
polarity.
Risk of injury due to electrical shock. →→Connect protective conductor.
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power sup-
ply and secure to prevent reactivation. →→Attach seal and check for correct fit.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations for →→Tighten cable plug (Type 2518 or 2509 in accordance with DIN EN
electrical equipment. 175301-803 (DIN 43 650), shape A, for order numbers see data
If the protective conductor is not connected, there is a risk of sheet); while doing so, observe the maximum torque of 1 Nm.
electric shock. →→Check electrical continuity between coil and body (protective con-
▶▶ Always connect protective conductor and check electrical continuity ductor function).
between coil and housing.
7.2 Pulse variant (CF 02)
max. 1 Nm
In accordance with the terminals on the valves, the connection
terminals in the cable plug are marked with the numbers 1 to 3.
Approved cable plug, e.g. Type Seal
2518 or other suitable cable plug →→Connect as shown in “Fig. 4”. Pulse on terminal 1 closes the valve;
in accordance with▶
DIN EN 175301-803 shape A
pulse on terminal 2 opens the valve.
→→Attach seal and check for correct fit.
Fig. 3: Connecting the cable plug to the power supply
→→Tighten cable plug (Type 2518 or 2509 in accordance with DIN EN
175301-803 (DIN 43 650), shape A, for order numbers see data
Note the voltage and current type as specified on the type label.
sheet); while doing so, observe the maximum torque of 1 Nm.
english 11
→→Check electrical continuity between coil and body (protective con- 7.3 Kick-and-drop-electronic variant
ductor function). (solenoid coil ACP016)
4 2 3
Information on the solenoid coil Type ACP016 can be found in the
Terminal 1
corresponding operating manual at www.burkert.com.
(=) ∼
(+) L1 Terminal 2 Danger
(–) N Terminal 3 If solenoid coils feature a terminal box, also observe the
following:
Protective
PE ▶▶ Insert permanently installed cables and lines only.
1 conductor
▶▶ Use a suitable cable and line entry. Observe specifications in the
Fig. 4: Electrical connection pulse variant (CF 02) operating instructions ACP016.
Note! ▶▶ The terminals in the terminal box are intended for wires between
0.5 mm2 and 2.5 mm2.
▶▶ Prevent simultaneous pulsing on both coil windings. ▶▶ Tighten terminal screws to 0.25 Nm.
▶▶ Parallel to the terminals, no other consumers (relay, etc.) may be ▶▶ Lock housing cover properly. Tighten lock screw to 2 Nm.
connected. ▶▶ Check continuity of the protective conductor connection.
▶▶ The respective coil connection that does not carry current must be ▶▶ Before opening the housing cover, disconnect the power supply.
galvanically isolated (open). ▶▶ Connect maximum two conductors to each terminal.
▶▶ In case two or more valves are connected in parallel, the use of two-
pole or multi-pole switches must ensure that this requirement is met.
12 english
7.3.1 Solenoid coils with cable outlet 8 Disassembly
The connection cable is encapsulated with the solenoid coil DANGER!
Type ACP016 and cannot be removed.▶
Observe the indicated voltage according to the type label. Risk of injury from high pressure in the system/device.
Wire assignment: ▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the pressure
Wire color Terminal assignment and vent/drain lines.
green / yellow Protective conductor Risk of injury due to electrical shock.
black Phase / positive pole (+) ▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power
black Neutral conductor / ▶ supply and secure to prevent reactivation.
negative pole (–) ▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations
for electrical equipment.
7.3.2 Solenoid coils with terminal box
Position Terminal assignment Warning!
Protective conductor Risk of injury from improper disassembly.

▶▶ Disassembly may be carried out only by trained technicians and
Neutral conductor / with the appropriate tools.
negative pole (–) Risk of injury from hazardous media.
Phase / ▶ ▶▶ Before loosening lines or valves, flush out hazardous media,
positive pole (+) depressurize and drain the lines.
Fig. 5: Terminal box
english 13
9 Maintenance, troubleshooting 9.1 Malfunctions
DANGER! If malfunctions occur, check whether:
→→the device has been installed according to the instructions,
Risk of injury from high pressure in the system. →→the electrical and fluid connections are correct,
▶▶ Turn off the pressure and vent the lines before loosening lines or
valves. →→the device is not damaged,
Risk of injury due to electrical shock. →→all screws have been tightened,
▶▶ Before working on the system or device, switch off the power →→the voltage and pressure have been switched on,
supply and secure to prevent reactivation. →→the pipelines are clean.
▶▶ Observe applicable accident prevention and safety regulations
for electrical equipment. Malfunction Possible cause
Valve does not Short circuit or coil interrupted
Warning! switch Medium pressure outside the permitted
pressure range
Risk of injury from improper maintenance work.
Manual control locked
▶▶ Maintenance may be carried out only by trained technicians and
with the appropriate tools. Valve does not close Inner compartment of the valve is dirty
▶▶ Secure system against unintentional activation. Manual control locked
▶▶ Following maintenance, ensure a controlled restart. 9.1.1 Repairs
Repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer. Operating data
may change if spare parts are replaced by the user.
14 english
10 Transportation, storage,
disposal
Note!
Transport damage.
Inadequately protected devices may be damaged during
transportation.
▶▶ Protect the device against moisture and dirt in shock-resistant
packaging during transportation.
▶▶ Prevent the temperature from exceeding or dropping below the
permitted storage temperature.
Incorrect storage may damage the device.
▶▶ Store the device in a dry and dust-free location.
▶▶ Storage temperature -40 to +80 °C.
Damage to the environment caused by parts contaminated
with media.
▶▶ Dispose of the device and packaging in an environmentally friendly
manner.
▶▶ Observe applicable disposal and environmental regulations.
english 15
Bürkert Fluid Control Systems▶
Sales Center▶
Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17▶
D-74653 Ingelfingen▶
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111▶
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448▶
E-mail: info@burkert.com
International address
www.burkert.com
Manuals and data sheets on the Internet: www.burkert.com▶
Bedienungsanleitungen und Datenblätter im Internet: www.buerkert.de▶
Manuels d'utilisation et fiches techniques sur Internet : www.buerkert.fr
© Bürkert Werke GmbH & Co. KG, 2014 - 2019

Operating Instructions 1911/06_EU-ML_00893047 / Original DE
www.burkert.com
Type 5281 Sicherheit Safety Sécurité
Manual de instrucciones
2/2-Wege-Magnetventil Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung Proper Usage Utilisatio
Operating instructions
für neutrale Medien
Bitte beachten Sie die Hinweise dieser Betriebsanleitung To ensure the proper function of the device and promote Af
2/2-way solenoid valve sowie die Einsatzbedingungen und zulässigen Daten ge- long service lift, you must comply with the information in pe
for neutral media mäß Datenblatt Typ 5281, damit das Gerät einwandfrei these Operating Instructions and the application conditions and contenues
Èlectrovanne à 2/2 voies funktioniert und lange einsatzfähig bleibt. Bei Nichtbeachtung specifications provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation
dieser Hinweise sowie bei unzulässigen Eingriffen in das Gerät the device in a manner that is contrary to these Operating technique
pour fluides neutres entfällt jegliche Haftung unsererseits, ebenso erlischt die Garantie Instructions or the application conditions and specifications tions et d’i
r 24V
Válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos auf Geräte u. Zubehörteile! Das Gerät dient ausschließlich als 2/ provided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons
2 V o para medios neutrales 2-Wege-Magnetventil für die lt. Datenblatt zulässigen Medien. your warranty. This device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les access
ge 1 lid with
Eine andere oder darüber hinausgehende Benutzung gilt als solenoid valve for the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2
o l t a y
nicht bestimmungsgemäß. Für hieraus resultierende Schäden sheet. Any other use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre
V R va pply onl
haftet Bürkert nicht. Das Risiko trägt allein der Anwender. not be responsible for any improper use of the device. considérée
U
dommages
/
UL er su
toute respo
o w ACHTUNG! ATTENTION!
s2p
• Halten Sie sich bei Einsatzplanung und Betrieb des • Be sure to observe generally accepted safety rules •
clas
Gerätes an die einschlägigen allgemein anerkannten when planning, installing and using this device. For
sicherheitstechnischen Regeln. example, take suitable measures to prevent
• Treffen Sie geeignete Maßnahmen, um unbeabsichtig- unintentional operations of the device.
tes Betätigen oder unzulässige Beeinträchtigungen • Do not impair the operation of the device. •
auszuschließen. • Do not attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or
• Beachten Sie, daß in Systemen, die unter Druck valves in the system that are under pressure, and
Notice d'utilisation
stehen, Leitungen und Ventile nicht gelöst werden always be sure to switch off the voltage supply •
Betriebsanleitung
dürfen. Schalten Sie vor Eingriffen in das System in before working on the system.
jedem Fall die Spannung ab! • When attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure
• Achten Sie auf den einwandfreien Sitz der Dichtung the seal is properly seated.
beim Verschrauben der Spule mit der Geräte- • Jammed coils can cause coil overheating with AC!
steckdose. • For explosion-proof models, data from the conformity •
• Festsitzender Kern bewirkt bei Wechselspannung certificate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be
(AC) Spulenüberhitzung! complied with! •
• Bei Ausführungen mit Explosionsschutz sind zusätz-
lich die Angaben der Konformitätsbescheinigung PTB WARNING! •
Nr. 00ATEX 2129 X zu beachten. • Do not touch the coil during use as it becomes very
hot.
WARNUNG!
• Verletzungsgefahr! Bei Dauerbetrieb kann die Spule •
sehr heiß werden.
Fluid Control Systems
Sécurité Seguridad Sicherheit Sicherheit
Utilisation conforme aux prescriptions Utilización con arreglo a las disposiciones Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad
e the proper function of the device and promote Afin que l’appareil puisse fonctionner parfaitement et Se ruega observar las indicaciones contenidas en este Ma-
vice lift, you must comply with the information in pendant longtemps, veuillez observer les instructions nual de instrucciones así como las condiciones de uso y datos Spannungsfreie Montage / Voltage-free assembly Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection
nstructions and the application conditions and contenues dans cette notice d’utilisation ainsi que les conditions admisibles con arreglo a la hoja de servicio Tipo 5281, de modo que el Montage sans tension / Montaje libre de tensión Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
vided in the Type 5281 Data Sheet. Usage of d’utilisation et les données admissibles mentionnées dans la fiche aparato funcione impecablemente y permanezca durante largo tiempo
anner that is contrary to these Operating technique du type 5281. En cas d’inobservation de ces instruc- apto para el empleo. La inobservancia de estas indicaciones así como
e application conditions and specifications tions et d’interventions non autorisées dans l’appareil, nous las inter-venciones inadmisibles en el aparato suponen la declinación
ype 5281 Data Sheet is improper and will void déclinons toute responsabilité et la garantie couvrant l’appareil et por nuestra parte de toda clase de responsabilidad, además de la
his device serves exclusively as a 2/2-way les accessoires s’éteint! L'appareil sert uniquement d’électro- extinción de la garan-tía de los aparatos y de las piezas de los accesorios.
the media stated to be permissible on the data vanne 2/2 voies pour les fluides admis selon la fiche technique. El aparato sirve ex-clusivamente como válvula magnética de 2/2 pasos
use is considered improper use. Bürkert will Une autre utilisation ou une utilisation excédant ce contexte sera para los medios autorizados según la hoja de datos. Cualquier otra
ble for any improper use of the device. considérée comme non conforme aux prescriptions. Pour les utilización que vaya más ella no será conforme a las disposiciones.
dommages qui en résulteraient, le fabricant/fournisseur décline El fabricante / suministrador no es responsable de los daños que de ello
toute responsabilité. L’utilisateur seul en assume le risque. pudieran resultar. El riesgo corresponde únicamente al usuario. 0 bar, psi, kPa Du
Dir rchflu
ATTENTION! ATTENTION! ¡ATENCIÓN! Se ectio ß
re to observe generally accepted safety rules • Pour la planification de l’utilisation et l’exploitation de • Para la planificación y operación del aparato atenerse Se s d'é n flo
n
ntid cc
planning, installing and using this device. For l’appareil, veuillez vous en tenir aux règles applicables a las correspondientes reglas generales y re- o d ou
ep
as
ple, take suitable measures to prevent et généralement reconnues en matière de technique conocidas de la técnica de seguridad.
entional operations of the device. de sécurité. • Tomar las medidas apropiadas para excluir
ot impair the operation of the device. • Prenez les mesures nécessaires pour exclure tout accionamien-tos no intencionados o perjuicios Elektrischer Anschluß / Electrical connection
ot attemp to detach or unscrew any lines or actionnement involontaire ou des altérations inadmisibles; prestar atención a que en el caso de Raccordement électrique / Conexión eléctrica
s in the system that are under pressure, and inadmissibles. sistemas que se encuentren bajo presión no deben
s be sure to switch off the voltage supply • Notez qu’il n’est pas permis de desserrer des desconec-tarse conducciones y válvulas.
e working on the system. conduites ou des vannes se trouvant sous pression • Antes de proceder a intervenciones en el sistema
attaching the coil to the plug socket, be sure dans des systèmes! Avant d’intervenir dans le desco-nectar siempre la tensión.
eal is properly seated. système, coupez l’alimentation électrique dans tous • Prestar atención al asiento impecable de la empaque-
med coils can cause coil overheating with AC! les cas! tadura al atornillar la válvula con la caja de enchufe
xplosion-proof models, data from the conformity • Veillez à ce que le joint repose parfaitement lorsque para aparatos eléctricos.
icate PTB No. 00ATEX 2129 X must also be vous visserez la bobine avec le connecteur. • Con tensión alterna (AC), el macho de asiento duro
lied with! • Un noyau bloqué provoque en cas d’alimentation en provoca sobrecalentamiento de la bobina!
tension alternative (AC) une surchauffe de la bobine! • En las ejecuciones con protección debe tenerse
WARNING! • Dans les exécutions antidéflagrantes, les indications adicio-nalmente en cuenta los datos de la declaración
ot touch the coil during use as it becomes very de l'attestation de conformité PTB N° 00ATEX 2129 X de con-formidad PTB n° 00ATEX 2129 X.
doivent observées en plus.
AVERTISSEMENT! ¡AVISO!
• Risque de blessure! En cas de fonctionnement • ¡Peligro de lesiones! En estado de operación continua
permanent, la bobine peut devenir très chaude. la bobina puede ponerse muy caliente.
Sicherheit Technische Daten Technische Daten
Caractéristiques techniques / Datos técnicos

Safety / Sécurité / Seguridad Technical Data
Umgebungstemperatur Température d' ambiante
Fluidischer Anschluß / Fluid connection Temperature of Surroundings Temperatura de ambiente
Raccordement fluidique / Conexión fluídica
Boîtier/Caja
Gehäuse/Housing Laiton/Latón
Messing/brass Acier fin/Acero inoxidable
Edelstahl/Stainless steel
Dichtwerkstoff Temp.
Matériau d’étanchéité Temp.
Sealing material Medium
Material de estanqueidad Fluide/Medio
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
NBR -10 .. +90 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
EPDM -40 .. +120 °C
0 bar, psi, kPa Du FKM -10 .. +120 °C
FKM -10 .. +120 °C
Dir rchflu
Se ectio ßrich Nennweite/Nominal size Dimension nominale
Se s d'é n flow tung
n
ntid cc Anchura nominal
o d oule
ep Wirkungsweise
as ment
o Circuit function Fonctionnement
A Funcionamiento
A
Typ/ Type
Type/Tipo
MADE IN GERMANY
MADE IN GERMANY
5281 A 13,0 FKM MS 5281 A 13,0 FKM MS
Beispiel 0,2 -16 bar 0,2 -16 bar
24V 50-60Hz 8W Exemple 24V 50-60Hz 8W
Example
Ejemplo
450000Y W14UN
450000Y W14UN
Bestell-Nr. / Id. No. N° id. / N° de pedido

Spannung (±10 %) - Frequenz - Leistung Tension (±10%) - fréquence - puissance
Voltage (±10 %) - Frequency - Power Tensión (±10 %) - frecuencia - potencia
Druckbereich/Pressure range Plage de pression / Gama de presión
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten Sous resérve de modification techniques.

We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice Nos reservamos el derecho de llevar a cabo modificaciones tècnicas
sin previo aviso.
Niederlassungen / Branch Offices Montage Montage Montage
Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage

Contact addresses / Kontaktadressen
Germany / Deutschland / Allemange
Spulenmontage / Coil assembly / Einbaulage beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Ab
Bürkert Fluid Control System
Montage de la bobine / Montaje de bobina de montage quelconque / Sentido de montaje Se
Sales Centre
discrecional Eta
Chr.-Bürkert-Str. 13-17
Mutter Vorzugsrichtung Ato
D-74653 Ingelfingen Nut Preffered direction
Tel. + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 111 Ecrou Orientation préférentielle
Fax + 49 (0) 7940 - 10 91 448 Tuerca Colector de lodo
E-mail: info@de.buerkert.com
International
Contact addresses can be found on the internet at:
Die Kontaktadressen finden Sie im Internet unter: max. 5 Nm
Les adresses se trouvent sur internet sous :
www.burkert.com Bürkert / Company / Locations
Schmutzfänger
Dirt trap
O-Ring
Collecteur d’impuretés
Joint torique Ge
Anillo en O Sentido de paso
en
Schutzleiterfunktion / Protective conductor function /
Fonctionnement du conducteur de protection / Función del Sc
conductor de protector Alw
Nach Spulenmontage immer prü- con
fen! flow Ra
Always test function after assembly of d cas
tion ida
of coil! irec nque tec
/ D ta
Toujours vérifier après montage de ng t / Es Co
htu
la bobine! ric men de
¡Tras el montaje de bobina hfluß oule tier
rc c
pruébese siempre la function¡ Du s d’é
n
se
Widerstand Prüfspannung Prüfstrom Rohrleitungen reinigen
resistance test voltage test current Cleaning the piperuns
résistance tension d’essai courant d’essai Nettoyer les conduites
intensidad tensión de prueba corriente de prueba
Limpieza tuberías
max. 0,1 Ω 12 V 1A
Operating Instructions 0512/13_EU-ML_00803312 12/05/1'M
Montage Montage Störungen Ersatzteile
sembly/ Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje Troubleshooting / Dérangements / Averías Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza
e beliebig / Any assembly position / Position Abdichtung Einschrauben der Rohrleitungen / Screwing in the pipe Spannung und Stromart prüfen!
age quelconque / Sentido de montaje Seal connections Check the voltage and type of current!
al Etanchéification Vissage les conduites / Averías las tuberías Vérifier la tension et le genre de courant! Spulensatz
tung Atornillado Comprobar tensión y clase de corriente!
rection Coil kit
préférentielle PTFE
lodo
Jeu de bobines
Juego de bobina
Druck prüfen! / Check the pressure! Verschleißteilsatz

Vérifier la pression! / Comprobar presión!
änger Set of Wearing Parts
Normeinschraubtiefe nicht überschreiten!
r d’impuretés Do not exceed standard screw-in depth! Jeu de pièces d'usure
e paso Gerätesteckdose / Instrument socket / Connecteur / Caja de Ne pas dépasser la profondeur filetée
enchufe para aparatos eléctricos normalisée!
Juego del piazas de cierre
¡No sobrepasar la profundidad de
Schutzleiter immer anschließen! roscado normalizada!
bar, psi, kPa
Always connect the protective Dichtung
conductor! Seal
flow Raccordez dans tous les Joint d'étanchéité
of d cas le conducteur de pro-
tion ida Sellado Rohrleitungen prüfen! / Check the piperun!
irec nque tection!
/ D ta Vérifier les conduites! / Comprobar tuberías! Dichtungssatz
ng t / Es Conectar en todo caso el conductor
htu
ric men de puesta a
hfluß oule tierra!
1 Nm
Set of Seals
rc c
Du s d’é
n
se
Jeu de joints
ngen reinigen
the piperuns Juego de estanqueidad
es conduites
tuberías Type 2508
Ersatzteile Ersatzteile Ersatzteile
Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts / Pièces de rechange / Pieza de repuesto Spare parts/Pièces de rechange/Pieza de repuesto
Spannung Leistung Id-Nr. D ich tw erksto ff Id -N r.

Nennw eite
Voltage Power Id. No. Sealing m aterial Id . N o.
No m in al diam eter
M atière de jo int N o cd e .
Tension Puissance No cde. D iam ètre nom inal
Spulensatz M aterial de No de
Tensión Potencia No de pedito A n ch ura no m in al
estan queidad p edito
[V] [W]
Coil kit N BR 645 561 A
Europa, 024 / DC 8 126 434 R
Europe 13 - 65 FK M 645 562 B
Jeu de bobines
024 / 56 8 645 556 D E P DM 645 563 C
Juego de bobina 110 / 56 8 645 557 E

NBR 624 012 J
230 / 56 8 645 558 P 13 FKM 624 013 K
N.A.F.T.A. EPDM 624 014 L

024 / DC 8 126 434 R
Verschleißteilsatz NBR 624 015 M
024 / 56 8 645 556 D 20 FKM 624 016 N
Set of Wearing Parts EPDM 624 017 P
120 / 60 8 643 802 B
NBR 624 018 Y
Jeu de pièces d'usure 240 / 60 8 643 803 C
25 FKM 624 019 Z
Juego del piazas de cierre A.P.A.C. 024 / DC 8 126 434 R EPDM 624 020 W
024 / 56 8 645 556 D NBR 624 021 K
32, 40 FKM 624 022 L

100 / 56 8 645 559 Q
EPDM 624 023 M
110 / 56 8 645 557 E NBR 624 024 N
Dichtungssatz
200 / 56 8 645 560 M 50 FKM 624 025 P
Set of Seals
EPDM 624 026 Q
230 / 56 8 645 558 P
Jeu de joints Lors de la commande de pièces de rechange, indiquez, en
Bitte geben Sie bei der Bestellung von Verschleißteilen zusätz- plus de leur numéro de commande, celui de commande de
Juego de estanqueidad lich zur Bestellnummer der Ersatzteile auch die Bestellnummer votre appareil complet.
Typ 5281
Ihres Komplettgerätes an. Con ocasión del pedido de las pieza de repuesto, rogamos
When ordering spare parts, please also quote the order number indicar además del número de pedido de la pieza de
of your complete appliance in addition to the order number of the requesto también el número de pedido de su aparato
replacement parts. completo.
- Product information -
Solenoid valve block for water distribution Project 10168
Multi-valve block with adjustment and display of the output pressure
TECHNICAL DATA
Materials Valves Type 5281, DN13
Valve block Brass (alternative: Cv-value valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
brass, nickel-plated) Operating voltage 24 V DC (alternative: 120 V AC)
Coil jacket PA Voltage tolerance 10 %
Armature guide tube Stainless steel Nominal power 8 W per valve
Seal material EPDM / (alternative Nominal operating Long-term operation;
FKM) mode duty cycle 100 %
Medium Water Electrical connection Plug tabs DIN 43650 A
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C with pre-wired device
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C sockets incl. 1.6 m of cable
Medium feed pressure max. 10 bar Degree of protection IP 65 with device socket
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar Special feature Manually actuated valves
Operating range 1 to 6 bar Filter sieve 0.25 mm stainless steel
Connections Block fixing with 2 screws M8x50
Input E G 3/4 internal thread through housing drill holes
Output A1 M22x1.5; external Installation position of any, preferably drives at top
Output A2 M14x1.5; external block
A
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
A differential pressure of 0.5 bar is required to open the full valve cross section.
The minimum pressure at the system input is 1 bar.
OF VALVE
A 2/2-way valve, pilot-operated,
normally closed
DIMENSIONS [MM]
DESCRIPTION
The valve block consists of a brass
block, two or three valves of Type
Front view 5281 with manual actuation, a pres-
sure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) and a pressure gauge.
Valve V 1 is used as a safety valve at
the inlet and - if present - directs the
medium to the pressure controller.
Otherwise, the valve position is
sealed by a cover plate. Ball valve,
tube and dirt trap form a module that
can be rotated through 180° when
necessary, enabling medium feed
from the opposite side.
The valve seats are integrated in the
block. The block operates so that the
same respective water flow is applied
to each valve output in parallel opera-
tion. The water volumes flowing
through the valves can be adjusted
Rear view
via the set-point of the pressure con-
troller. The pressure gauge indicates
the set pressure.
The block is fixed in place with 2 hex-
agonal socket head screws via the
drill holes in the valve block.
Legend
V1 optional cover plate or safety valve (solenoid valve Type 5281, DN13);
the double block with cover plate is presented in the graphic
V2, V3 dosing valves
VS lock screw for sieve
SW7 external hex. screw (SW7 - wrench size 7) for setting the pressure set-point value
Ordering table water distributor

Housing material Seal material Voltage Number of valves EEx Order no.
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 2 no 175 777 Fixing
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 2 yes 183 535 screws 2 x M8x50
Brass FKM 24 V DC 2 no 187 621
Brass EPDM 24 V DC 3 no 200 670
Brass, nickel-plated EPDM 24 V DC 2 no 230 044
Brass EPDM 120 V AC 2 no 235 122
FLUID CONTROL SYSTEM
PI-10168_EN_2014-06-11.docx/bi/11/06/2014 Technical changes reserved

TFU006
Pressure regulator for water
• Brass version with DVGW and international drinking

water approvals
• Stainless steel version with DVGW approval for drinking water
• Compact plastic version
• Manometer port at pressure output
The water pressure regulator works on the Technical data – Version I

principle of pressure reduction. It is prefer-
Body material EN 1982 CC770S
ably for use in the provided water systems.
Seal material EPDM
The pressure regulator consists of a hous-
Diaphragm EPDM
ing, a piston or diaphragm valve with an
adjustable spring and a spring cap. The inlet Valve type Single seat valve, relieved
pressure reaches the target value, opens Material valve seat Stainless steel (AISI 304)
the piston or diaphragm against the spring Strainer Mesh-size 0.51 mm
force of the control valve and builds up the Pressure gauge connection G ¼ (without pressure gauge)
output pressure. The output pressure is the Port connections ½" to 2" (threaded male)
controlled variable. When exceeding the Medium temperature + 60 °C
nominal value the valve closes, when there Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
is a shortfall the valve opens and thus the Outlet pressure 1 - 6 bar1)
output pressure is kept almost constant. By Default setting 3 bar1)
changing the spring tension, the spring set-
Flow rate 1 - 2 m/s (optimum values)
point can be continuously adjusted.
Noise class II < 30
Mounting place If possible directly behind the counter
The pressure regulator is available in four
Installation Horizontal or vertical, preferably spring cap upright.
versions:
bserve flow direction!
O
Version I Approvals
brass housing with DIN DVGW and interna-
tional drinking water approvals AS 1357.2
C of C 02467
1) Pressure values (bar): Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure

Version II
brass housing with inspectable strainer, DIN
DVGW and international drinking water ap-
provals
Version III
stainless steel housing with DIN DVGW ap-
proval
Version IV
plastic housing with union connection G ⅛"
and G ¼" Type TFU006 with plastic body
and ported connection G ⅛ and G ¼
www.burkert.com 1/5
TFU006
Technical data – Version II

Body material Brass DZR
EN 12165 CW617N
Seal material EPDM
Diaphragm EPDM
Valve type Single seat valve, relieved
Material valve seat Stainless steel (AISI 304)
Strainer Inspectable, mesh-size 0.51 mm
Pressure gauge connection G ¼ (without pressure gauge)
Port connections ½" to 1" (threaded male)
Medium temperature + 40 °C
Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
Outlet pressure 1 - 6 bar1)
Default setting 3 bar1)
Noise class II < 30
Installation Horizontal or vertical, preferably spring cap upright.
Observe flow direction!
Approvals
AS 1357.2
C of C 02467
Technical data – Version III

Body material Stainless steel 1.4305
Seal material NBR
Diaphragm NBR
Valve type Single seat valve, relieved
Material valve seat Stainless steel
Material strainer bowl Stainless steel
Pressure gauge connection Both ways ¼" (without pressure gauge)
Port connections ½" to 2" (threaded male)
Medium temperature + 70 °C
Inlet pressure 25 bar1)
Outlet pressure 1.5 - 6 bar1)
Default setting 3 bar1)
Noise class II < 30
Installation In horizontal direction, strainer bowl downwards
Approvals
Technical data – Version IV

(plastic body, with threaded ports G ⅛ and G ¼)
Body material Technopolymer
Threaded port Brass
Special roller diaphragm NBR
Medium Water
Medium temperature Max. + 50 °C
Pressure gauge connection G ⅛ (without pressure gauge)
Port connections Threaded port G ⅛ or G ¼
Inlet pressure Max. 13 bar1)
Outlet pressure 0 - 4 bar1)
(continuously adjustable) 0 - 8 bar1)
0 - 12 bar1)
Setpoint adjustment Only ascending pressure, screw can be locked
Installation As required, preferably controller handle upright.
Observe flow direction!
Approvals None
1)
Pressure values (bar): Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
2/5
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water

be
Version I Hau
Port
connec- A B E F Ø Cover KVS Article
tions [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [m3/h] no.
D (inch)
F
½ 140.00 76.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 1.27 788439 
¾ 160.00 90.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 2.27 788440 
1 180.00 95.00 20.50 112.00 54.00 3.60
D
788441 
E
1¼ 200.00 110.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 5.80 788442 
B
1½ 220.00 120.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 9.10 788443 
2 250.00 130.00 40.00 178.00 73.00 14.00 788444  A
The pressure regulator version I has a

pressure gauge G ¼ for measuring the output
pressure. Delivered without pressure gauge.
Version II
E Delivered without
Port
pressure gauge.
connec- B C D E G KVS Article
tions [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [m3/h] no.
A (inch)
D
½ 169.00 86.50 100.50 54.00 58.00 1.27 771130 
¾ 180.00 89.00 98.00 54.00 58.00 2.27 770991 
1 205.00 88.50 99.50 54.00 58.00 3.60 770992 
A
A
C
F
B
Spare parts Version I and II
Spare parts Article no.
Cartridge for ½" 771847 

Cartridge for ¾" 771847 
Cartridge for 1" 771848 
Cartridge for 1¼" 771849 
Cartridge for 1½" 770243 
Cartridge for 2" 770243 
Tool for filter case 771851 
Filter for 771852 
Version II Cartridge Filter Filter case
Filter case for 771853 
Version II
3/5
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water in stainless steel (continued)

Version III
Port
connec- A B H H KVS Article
H
tion [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [m3/h] no.
R (inch)
½ 140.00 80.00 89.00 58.00 2.40 770977 
R "
¾ 160.00 90.00 89.00 58.00 3.10 771854 
1 180.00 100.00 111.00 64.00 5.80 771855 
h
1¼ 200.00 105.00 111.00 64.00 5.90 771856 
1½ 225.00 130.00 173.00 126.00 12.60 771857 
2 255.00 140.00 173.00 126.00 12.00 771858  B
A
Spare parts, Version III
Spare parts Article no.
Valve insert 772210 

½" and ¾"
1" and 1¼"
1½" and 2"
Replacement 772213 
strainer
½" and ¾"
strainer
1" and 1¼"
strainer
1½" and 2"
Tool for releasing 772217 
4/5
TFU006
Ordering chart pressure regulator for water in plastic (continued)

Version IV 40
(plastic body, with threaded ports G ⅛ and G ¼)
30x1.5
Operating
LTA threaded
pressure Article no.
port
[bar] 1)
G⅛ 0 - 4 783256 
0 - 8 783257 
0 - 12 783258 
77
G¼ 0 - 4 783259 
0 - 8 783260 
35
0 - 12 783261  The pressure regulator version IV has
a pressure gauge of G ⅛ for measur-
12
1) Pressure values [bar]: Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure
ing the output pressure.
Ordering note:
For manometer please see datasheet, Type TAU001.
Ordering chart, control panel nut Mounting bracket for control panel mounting, steel galvanized
For version IV
Article no. 772062
Thread Materials Article no.
65
M30 × 1.5 POM 772065  44.4
38
5.4
6.6
43
33.8
21
13
4.2
48
Ø 31
.2
To find your nearest Bürkert office, click on the orange box www.burkert.com
In case of special application conditions, Subject to alterations

please consult for advice. © Christian Bürkert GmbH & Co. KG 1807/9_EU-en_00895122
5/5
Intended use
The user must comply with the information in these operating instruc- Safety instructions
tions to ensure that the device functions perfectly and safely and has  Do not operate the block without first releasing the manual con-
a long service life and must observe the operating conditions and trols of the valves, otherwise the coils may burn out!
permitted data according to the data sheet and rating plate. The gen-  Never exceed the maximum media input pressure; otherwise
eral rules of technology must be observed for application planning and there is a danger of bursting!
operation of the device. Unintentional actuation or unacceptable im-  Do not install the valve block in a twisted position, as this may
pairments must be prevented by taking suitable measures. result in mechanical stress and impairment of the block function!
 Observe the specified screw tightening torques when changing
Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may work spare parts.
on the block.  Caution risk of hot surfaces! The solenoid drives may become
very hot during prolonged operation.
Operating principle of the single valves
A 2/2-way solenoid valve,  The electrical connection is made with device sockets using pre-
pilot-controlled, assembled cables (cable length 1.60 m).
A closed when de-energized (NC)  Make the correct connections and carefully connect the ground
wires.
 Ensure that the flat seal is correctly fitted between the coil and
Structure device socket! The tightening torque for fastening screws of the
The valve block consists of a brass block, two or three valves of Type device socket is 1 Nm.
5281 with manual control, a pressure controller, a dirt trap (with 0.25
mm sieve) as well as a pressure gauge. Valve V1 is used – if fitted - Start-up/pressure setting
as a safety valve at the input and conveys the medium into the pres-  Before starting up the electrical system, release all manual con-
sure controller. Ball valve, hose and dirt trap form one module which trols on the valves.
can be rotated by 180° if required and therefore allows media connec-  Build up the media pressure. During the initial start-up the pres-
tion from the opposite side. sure gauge indicates 6 bar (factory setting).
The valve seats are integrated in the block. The block operates in  Set the required pressure using the set-point value screw A/F7
such a way that each valve output is supplied in parallel operation with on the pressure controller. The set pressure is indicated on the
the same water current. The volume of water flowing through the pressure gauge.
valves can be adjusted using the set-point value of the pressure con-  Apply the operating voltage and start the process.
troller. The pressure gauge indicates the set pressure.
If faults occur
Technical data  Check electrical connections, operating voltage, wire connec-
Also observe the specifications on the rating plate! tions, operating pressure and installation and rectify any errors.
Medium Water  If the valve still does not switch, please contact your Bürkert
Media temperature -10 to +80 °C Service representative.
Ambient temperature max. +55 °C
Operating voltage of valves 24 V DC
Nominal power of valves 8 W per valve Components / wire connections
Orifice of valves DN 13
Media input pressure max. 10 bar
Pressure control range 1 to 6 bar
Kv value water valves 4.0 m³/h (1.11 l/sec)
Housing and seal materials

Valve block Brass
Coil jacket Polyamide
Core guide pipe Stainless steel
Seal material EPDM / alternatively FKM
Line connections Input E: G 3/4; inside
Output A1: M22x1.5; outside
Output A2: M14x1.5; outside
Installation
 Check that the operating conditions comply with the performance
data of the block! E G 3/4; inside SW7 hexagon head A/F7
 Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de- A1 M22x1.5; outside for setting the
energized and depressurized! A2 M14x1.5; outside set-point pressure
 Before installing the block, clean the line connections and the V1 optional cover plate value
ends of the hose! or safety valve MS 2 mounting screws
(cover plate here) M8x50 with 6 mm
 The installation position is freely selectable.
Recommendation: Solenoid drives of the dosing valves face up. V2, V3 dosing valves Hexagon socket
VS lock screw
 Attach the block by screwing two hexagonal socket head screws
for sieve
M8x50 through the designated 9 mm holes.
 Connect the outputs. Ensure that the connection points are tight.
Caution! Bürkert Werke GmbH Bürkert Werke GmbH

To open the full valve cross-section, a differential pressure of 0.5 bar Christian-Bürkert-Str. 13-17 Christian-Bürkert-Str. 2
is required. The minimum pressure at the system input is D 74653 Ingelfingen D 01900 Großröhrsdorf
1 bar. Tel. +49 (0)7940 / 10-91-111 Tel. +49 (0)5952 / 36-300
Fax +49 (0)7940 / 10-91-448 Fax +49 (0)5952 / 36-551
info@de.buerkert.com info@de.buerkert.com
http://www.buerkert.com http://www.buerkert.com
BA-10168_EN_01_2015-06-25.docx/bi Page 1 of 3
Spare parts
Item Designation Order no.  Check the O-ring (22x2.5 mm) for damage. An undamaged O-
1 Pressure controller installation set 788 692 ring can be reused. A defective O-ring must be replaced (see
2 Ball valve G 3/4 inside/inside 781 755 spare parts).
3 Pressure gauge 787 035  Moisten the O-ring before installation and ensure that the O-ring
4 Filter sieve VA; 0.25 mm 788 812 is fitted properly during installation.
5.1 O-ring on filter lock screw – EPDM 9353 4827 Caution! Do not use any oil or grease!
5.2 O-ring on filter lock screw – FKM 902 478  Place the sieve unit - now offset by 180° - on the housing so that
6.1 O-ring on sieve unit – EPDM 786 525 the locking pin fits into the guide hole in the housing.
6.2 O-ring on sieve unit – FKM 790 667  Fix the sieve unit using the 2 fastening screws and washers.
7.1 Coil set 126 434  Tighten the fastening screws (see figure for “torques”).
7.2 Coil set – EEx 133 547  Reconnect the pressure and power.
8.1 Valve actuator – EPDM 145 458
8.2 Valve actuator – FKM 143 574 Sieve unit:
9.1 Wearing parts set – EPDM 624 014
9.2 Wearing parts set – FKM 624 019
10.1 Core, complete – EPDM 631 964
10.2 Core, complete – FKM 606 396
11 Device socket, assembled for V3 786 346
14 Both ends of hose fitted with union nut M30x2 786 122
Locking pin in first hole
Conversion and repair work (ex works)
Safety instructions second hole for locking pin (for 180° rotation)
 Caution! Only authorized technicians using suitable tools may
work on the block.
 Before starting work, order the required spare parts according to Changing the filter sieve (see figure of valve block 2)
the order table. If the filter sieve is very dirty, it should be cleaned or changed.
 Before performing any work on the block, ensure that it is de-
energized and depressurized! Valve block 2:
Rotating the sieve unit by 180° (conversion)

If required, the sieve unit can be rotated by 180° so that the input ball
valve is offset from the factory setting by exactly 180° (see diagram of
valve block 1).
 De-energize and depressurize the block.
 Loosen both fastening screws on the sieve unit (hexagon socket
5 mm).
 Remove the sieve unit from the locking pin (pin is tight, therefore
a little stiff).
 Remove the locking pin form the first guide hole in the sieve unit
(see figure of the “sieve unit”).
 Insert the locking pin into the second guide hole in the sieve unit.
Valve block 1:
Copper collar on the sieve O-ring Lock screw
 Have a new filter sieve ready.

 Loosen the lock screw on the filter unit (A/F 22).
 Remove the filter sieve.
 Assess whether the sieve should be cleaned or replaced.
 Re-insert the cleaned or new sieve in the correct position (cop-
per collar inwards).
 Screw the lock screw hand-tight to form a good seal. The O-ring
on the lock screw acts as the sealing element.
 Reconnect the pressure and power.
Fastening screws on the

sieve unit
(Hexagon socket 5 mm)
Locking pin O-ring
Changing the pressure gauge and ball valve Changing a pilot control diaphragm in the valve
The pressure gauge and the manual ball valve are screwed in with (see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
thread sealant (Loctite 542 or 577). The diaphragm is an important element for pilot control of the valve.
 Use the square head or hexagon head on the components to The diaphragm is subject to natural wear.
screw them out and in. Change the diaphragm as follows.
 Before screwing in the parts, place a little Loctite 542 or 577 on  Have a new diaphragm ready.
the thread and screw in the parts to form a good seal.  De-energize and depressurize the block.
 Mark the mounting position of the actuator with respect to the
housing.
Spare parts sets for the valve Type 5281  Loosen the fastening screws (tool Tx20) between actuator and
housing.
 Remove the valve actuator.
 Note the installation position and remove the diaphragm.
 If required, clean the valve housing.
Coil set  Insert the new diaphragm into the housing collar in the correct
SET1 position so that the middle plate of the diaphragm with the larger
diameter is visible.
 Place the valve actuator in the correct position.
 Attach the actuator and tighten the 4 screws crosswise (see
figure for “torques”).
Valve actuator
Screw tightening torques:
Core, complete
Wearing parts set

SET3
(parts list changed for
DN13
Changing a valve core

(see also information in the operating instructions Type 5281)
A complete core set consists of an iron core with a seal and a spring.
In particular, the valve seal is subject to natural wear. If a closed valve
is leaking, the core should be changed as follows.
 Have a new complete core ready.
 Loosen the fastening screw on the device socket and remove
the device socket.
 Loosen the fastening nut on the coil (A/F 14) and remove the
coil.
 Remove the plastic cover.
 Loosen the 4 fastening screws (tool Tx20). Note the local as-
signment of the screws which vary in length.
 Remove the core feed pipe upwards and use your other hand to
prevent the core from falling.
 If required, clean the inner parts of the valve.
 Insert the new core into the cleaned core feed pipe so that the
seat seal is visible.
 Place the core with the core feed pipe in the correct position on
the valve seat and hold the components with one hand.
 With the other hand, attach the core feed pipe using the fas-
tening screws. In doing so, ensure that the long and short fas-
tening screws are in the correct position.
 Tighten the fastening screws crosswise (see figure for “torques”).
 Attach the plastic cover so that one of the recesses is located
above the manual control.
 Place the coil in the correct position. Ensure that the coil locks
every 90° and can otherwise be placed in any position.
 Screw the fastening nut onto the coil (see figure for “torques”).
Einteilig handbetriebene Kugelhähne DEUTSCH
One piece ball valves manually operated

ENGLISH
Original Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung

Translation of the original installation and
maintenance manual
Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig durch.
Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!

Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
Please pay attention to the safety advices!
BW-1tlg.-KH-Gew-Hand
©2005 - MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Vlotho
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder
weitere Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme
verarbeitet, vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. It is
not allowed to change or duplicate even parts of it without written permission.

Auflage: August 2011, Revision 5

Edition: August 2011, Revision 5
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
- DE 2 -
BW-1tlg.-KH-Gew-Hand DEUTSCH
Sicherheitshinweise
Sicherheitshinweise für die Montage und Inbetriebnahme: Die Inbetriebnahme der Armatur darf erst
erfolgen, wenn die Bestimmungen der MRL 2006/42/EG für die Gesamtmaschine erfüllt sind.
Alle Montage-, Wartungs- und Reparaturarbeiten an den Armaturen dürfen nur von autorisiertem und
qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
Eigenmächtige Veränderungen sowie die Verwendung von nicht Originalersatzteilen schließen eine
Haftung für die daraus resultierenden Schäden aus.
Nationale Vorschriften zur Unfallverhütung sowie ortsgebundene Sicherheitsvorschriften des

Betreibers werden durch diese Betriebsanleitung nicht ersetzt und sind in jedem Fall als vorrangig zu
betrachten.
Es darf keine Armatur betrieben werden, deren zugelassene Druck-/Temperaturgrenzen und

Medienbeständigkeit für die Betriebsbedingungen nicht ausreichen.
Wenn eine Armatur aus einer Rohrleitung ausgebaut werden muss, kann Medium aus der Leitung
oder aus der Armatur austreten. Bei gesundheitsschädlichen oder gefährlichen Medien muss die
Rohrleitung vollständig entleert sein, bevor die Armatur ausgebaut wird. Vorsicht bei Rückständen,
die nachfließen könnten.
Zum Anschluss des Kugelhahns an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel.
Alle Arbeiten dürfen nur an einer drucklos und stromlos geschalteten Armatur erfolgen.
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet ist!
Missbrauchen Sie bei der Montage den Handhebel/Antrieb/Spule nicht als Hebel!
Die Spannungsversorgung muss bauseits durch eine Elektrofachkraft erfolgen!
Verletzungsgefahr! Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in die Armatur kann zu

Durch Rückstände des Betriebsmediums können Gefahren entstehen, gegebenenfalls

Sicherheitshandschuhe, Schutzbrille etc. tragen.
- DE 3-
DEUTSCH BW-1tlg.-KH-Gew.-Hand
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Sicherheitshinweise..........................................................................................................................................3
Inhaltsverzeichnis.............................................................................................................................................4
Zu dieser Anleitung...........................................................................................................................................5
Ziel der Anleitung............................................................................................................................................5
Aktuelle Dokumentation..................................................................................................................................5
Gültigkeit der Anleitung...................................................................................................................................5
Abkürzungen und Symbole.............................................................................................................................5
Leistungsbeschreibung....................................................................................................................................6
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung................................................................................................................6
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ...................................................................................................................6
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen.....................................................................................................................6
Gerätebeschreibung .........................................................................................................................................7
Wartung .............................................................................................................................................................7
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung Kugelhahn ................................................................................................................8
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Kugelhahns mit Gewindeanschluss....................................................8
- DE 4 -
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen, die Armatur fachgerecht zu installieren

und zu warten.
Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. Es wird vorausgesetzt, dass
bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden
können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei MIT.
Aktuelle Dokumentation
Handbetriebene Armaturen dieser Baureihen unterliegen nur der Richtlinie 97/23/EG

(Druckgeräterichtlinie), wenn Artikel 3, Absatz 1.3 oder Absatz 3 der Richtlinie zutrifft. MIT erklärt
die Konformität gemäß Konformitätserklärung. Die Konformitätserklärung kann bei Bedarf
angefordert werden.
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de abrufen.
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
dienen, vor.

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
- DE 5-
Pneumatisch angetriebene Kugelhähne der Baureihen AKA01, BKA03, EKA05, EKA08, EKA15,
EKA25, EKA35, EKA55, KKA01, KKB01, NKA01, NKA02, NKA04, NKA07, NKA27, NKA51,
NKB01, NKB02, NKB04, NKB51, SKA02, SKB02, SKA03, SKA09, und SKA53 der MIT
Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG sind zum Einsatz im industriellen Bereich geeignet.
Die Armaturen ermöglichen das Absperren gasförmig- und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und
Dichtmaterialien müssen für das eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich
geeignet sein.
Verletzungsgefahr! Hineinführen von Körperteilen und Gegenständen in den Kugelhahn kann zu


MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit oder
Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn zu
entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei untergebracht
werden. Lange Lagerzeiten können eine Erhöhung des Losbrechmomentes zu Folge haben. Erst
nach Betätigung des Kugelhahns wird das Nenndrehmoment wieder erreicht.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir jedoch nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei Ihnen
eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine
Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte Mängel sind
unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als genehmigt.
Das Verpackungsmaterial und die Armatur sind nach den örtlichen gesetzlichen Bestimmungen
und Verordnungen sachgerecht zu entsorgen. Auf die Beachtung der abfallrechtlichen
Bestimmungen bei der Entsorgung der aus der Anlage entnommenen Stoffe wird hingewiesen.
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespült werden.
Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der Inbetriebnahme! Diese
Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingungen getestet und eingestellt werden.
Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet werden. Die Endlagen
(offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter
oder andere elektrische Geräte zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung
überprüfen!
- DE 6 -
Gerätebeschreibung
Abb. NKA01
Spindel
Handhebel
Mutter
Stopfbuchsmutter
Anschluss
Gehäuse
Wartung
Einteilige Kugelhähne sind wartungsfrei!
Folgende Probleme können auftreten:
Fehler Mögl. Ursache Abhilfe

Stopfbuchsmutter Stopfbuchsmutter nach
Undichtigkeit
gelöst ziehen
Kugel durch
Bitte setzen Sie sich mit
Medium/Schmutz in
Undichtigkeit ihrem Servicepartner in
den Leitungen
Verbindung
verschlissen
Kugelhahn Verschmutzung der Reinigen der Kugel /
Schwergängig Kugel des Kugelhahns
Wir empfehlen ihnen, bei einem defekten einteiligen Kugelhahn die ganze Armatur aus zu
tauschen
- DE 7-
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung Kugelhahn
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Kugelhahns mit Gewindeanschluss
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen. Missbrauchen Sie bei der Montage den
Antrieb nicht als Hebel!
Zum Anschluss des Kugelhahns an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel.
Geeignetes Dichtmaterial an die Rohrleitungsenden anbringen, bei

PTFE-Band oder Hanfdichtungen die Einschraubrichtung beachten.
Nur dem Einsatzzweck entsprechende Dichtmaterialien
verwenden!
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet
ist!
Rohrleitungsenden in Gewindeenden des Kugelhahns einschrauben

dabei nur die Schlüsselflächen des Kugelhahnes, nicht den Antrieb
benutzen!
Aushärtezeit des Dichtmaterials abwarten erst dann die Rohrleitung

mit Druck beaufschlagen.
Bilder sind nur beispielhafte Darstellungen!
- DE 8 -
BW-1tlg.-KH-Gew-Hand ENGLISH
Translation of the original installation and maintenance manual

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for assembly and initiation: The initiation of the valve is unauthorized until it
complies with the conditions of the machinery directive 2006/42/EC.
Assembly, maintenance and repairing of the valves are allowed for authorised and qualified
professionals only.
Modifications of the valve and the use of non-authorized spare parts exclude the liability of resulting
damage.
National directives for the prevention of accidents as well as local safety instructions of the user are
paramount and are not replaced by this document.
It is not allowed to use the valves, if the operating conditions do not match the pressure-temperature-
diagram and the medium resistance.
If you demount a valve in a piping, medium may drop out. Therefore, if the medium is hazardous to
health, the piping must be emptied completely. Be careful with residues that may flow out later.
Installation in unpressurized and non-energized state only!
For connecting the valve to the piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Do not abuse the hand lever / actuator / solenoid as a lever!
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds means are suitable for the flowing
medium!
The power supply must be done on site by a qualified electrician!
Danger of injury! Do not put parts of your body or other things into the valves. This can cause heavy
injuries and should be absolutely avoided!
Residue of the operating medium may cause danger. If necessary wear safety shoes, gloves and
glasses.
- EN 9-
ENGLISH BW-1tlg.-KH-Gew-Hand
Content
Safety instructions............................................................................................................................................9
Content ............................................................................................................................................................10
This manual .....................................................................................................................................................11
Intention of this manual.................................................................................................................................11
Latest documentation ...................................................................................................................................11
Validity of the manual ...................................................................................................................................11
Shortcuts and symbols .................................................................................................................................11
Specification of service ..................................................................................................................................12
Intended usage.............................................................................................................................................12
Storage, transport, disposal..........................................................................................................................12
Terms of general application ........................................................................................................................12
Device description ..........................................................................................................................................13
Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................................13
Activity description ball valve........................................................................................................................14
Installation of a ball valve with threaded connection .....................................................................................14
- EN 10 -
This manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve.

This manual is for skilled employees. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at MIT!
Latest documentation
Manual driven valves of this series subject only to the directive 97/23/EC (pressure equipment
directive), if Article 3, section 1.3 or 3 of the directive is valid. MIT declares the conformity with a
declaration of conformity. Please order it if required.
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited and
represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG at the
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG declares that it reserves its right to modify both
the manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.

Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.


Supply items
needed!
- EN 11-
Intended usage
Hand lever ball valves of the series AKA01, BKA03, EKA05, EKA08, EKA15, EKA25, EKA35,
EKA55, KKA01, KKB01, NKA01, NKA02, NKA04, NKA07, NKA27, NKA51, NKB01, NKB02,
NKB04, NKB51, SKA02, SKB02, SKA03, SKA09 and SKA53 made by MIT Moderne
IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG are suitable for the producing industries. The armatures allow
the distribution of neutral gaseous and liquid media. The body and sealing compounds must be
suitable for the assigned medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! Don´t put parts of your body or articles into the ball valve. This can cause
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt. We
recommend removing the packing only briefly before beginning of assembly in order to protect
the devices against impurities.
During storage it is to be made certain that the devices are dry and dirt-free accommodated.
After a long period of storage the breakaway torque may increase. After opening and closing the
ball valve manually for one time the rated breakaway torque can be reached again
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform us
immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical parameters
and a visual product check should take place immediately after delivery. Subsequent complains
can not be accepted.
The packaging material and the valve need to be properly disposed of according to the local legal
requirements and regulations.
Please consider the waste legislation requirements for the disposal of substances withdrawn from
the system.
Goods faults or divergences of the amount must be indicated at the latest 7 days on receipt of
the product in writing, otherwise the guarantee claim expires!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the piping. Automated valves need a special attention in
time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT only under workshop conditions.
Security positions should be simulated and tested straight. The final positions must be checked
(opened/closed) and be re-adjusted if necessary! Additional switches or other electric devices to
the position feedback must be likewise checked for correct alignment.
- EN 12 -
Device description
Abb. NKA01
Spindle
Hand Lever
Nut
Gland Nut
Thread
Body
Maintenance
One-piece ball valves are maintenance-free.
The following problems are possible:
Problem Possible cause Solution

Change sealing
Undensity Defective seal
compound
Undensity at the
Gland nut loose Fix the gland nut
spindle
Clean the ball / ball
Ball valve treacly Soiling of the ball
valve
We recommend you to exchange the whole valve if it is defective.
- EN 13-
Activity description ball valve

Installation of a ball valve with threaded connection
The installation may occur in state without pressure only. Do not abuse the actuator as lever!
To the connection of the ball valve with your pipe system you need a spanner width from X mm.
Attach suitable sealing compounds to the pipe ends, if you use PTFE
tape or hemp seals follow the direction of thread.
Use only to the purpose suitable sealing compound.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds means are suitable for the
flowing medium!
Screw pipe ends into the threaded ends of the ball valve, only use the
spanner surfaces of the ball valve - do not use the hand lever!
Do not give pressure on the piping before the sealing material is

hardened.
Pictures are only exemplary view!
- EN 14 -
- EN 15-
BW-1tlg.-KH-Gew-Hand
Kontakt / Contact:

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
- EN 16 -
Rückschlagventile - Schrägsitz DEUTSCH
Check-valves – Y seated
ENGLISH
Original Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung

Translation of the original installation and
maintenance manual
 Bitte lesen Sie vor Installation Ihrer Armatur diese Betriebs- und Wartungsanleitung sorgfältig durch.
 Die Installation und Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal durchgeführt werden.
 Bitte beachten Sie die in dieser Anleitung aufgeführten Sicherheitshinweise!

 Before installing and maintaining your valve, read this manual carefully.
 Installation and maintenance is allowed for skilled employees only.
 Please pay attention to the safety advices!
BW-Rückschlagventil-Schrägsitz
©2019 - MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Vlotho
Dieses Handbuch darf nicht, auch nicht in Auszügen, in irgendeiner Form (Druck, Fotokopie, Mikrofilm oder
weitere Verfahren) ohne schriftliche Zustimmung reproduziert oder unter Verwendung elektronischer Systeme
verarbeitet, vervielfältigt oder verbreitet werden.
The property rights of all texts and pictures are subject to MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. It is
not allowed to change or duplicate even parts of it without written permission.

Auflage: Januar 2019, Revision 1

Edition: January 2019, Revision 1

Please adress your inquiry in writing to:

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
- DE 2 -
BW-Rückschlagventil-Schrägsitz DEUTSCH
Sicherheitshinweise
Sicherheitshinweise für die Montage und Inbetriebnahme: Die Inbetriebnahme der Armatur darf erst
erfolgen, wenn die Bestimmungen der MRL 2006/42/EG für die Gesamtmaschine erfüllt sind.
Alle Montage-, Wartungs- und Reparaturarbeiten an den Armaturen dürfen nur von autorisiertem und
qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
Eigenmächtige Veränderungen sowie die Verwendung von nicht Originalersatzteilen schließen eine
Haftung für die daraus resultierenden Schäden aus.
Nationale Vorschriften zur Unfallverhütung sowie ortsgebundene Sicherheitsvorschriften des

Betreibers werden durch diese Betriebsanleitung nicht ersetzt und sind in jedem Fall als vorrangig zu
betrachten.
Das Rohrleitungssystem muss fachgerecht verlegt sein und dessen Funktion regelmäßig überprüft
werden.
Es darf keine Armatur betrieben werden, deren zugelassene Druck-/Temperaturgrenzen und

Medienbeständigkeit für die Betriebsbedingungen nicht ausreichen.
Wenn eine Armatur aus einer Rohrleitung ausgebaut werden muss, kann Medium aus der Leitung
oder aus der Armatur austreten. Bei gesundheitsschädlichen oder gefährlichen Medien muss die
Rohrleitung vollständig entleert sein, bevor die Armatur ausgebaut wird. Vorsicht bei Rückständen,
die nachfließen könnten.
Zum Anschluss des Rückschlagventils an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel!
Alle Arbeiten dürfen nur an einer drucklos und stromlos geschalteten Armatur erfolgen
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet ist!
Die Spannungsversorgung muss bauseits durch eine Elektrofachkraft erfolgen!

Durch Rückstände des Betriebsmediums können Gefahren entstehen, gegebenenfalls

Sicherheitshandschuhe, Schutzbrille etc. tragen.
- DE 3-
DEUTSCH BW-Rückschlagventil-Schrägsitz
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Sicherheitshinweise..........................................................................................................................................3
Inhaltsverzeichnis .............................................................................................................................................4
Zu dieser Anleitung...........................................................................................................................................5
Ziel der Anleitung ............................................................................................................................................5
Aktuelle Dokumentation ..................................................................................................................................5
Gültigkeit der Anleitung...................................................................................................................................5
Abkürzungen und Symbole.............................................................................................................................5
Leistungsbeschreibung....................................................................................................................................6
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ................................................................................................................6
Lagerung, Transport, Entsorgung ...................................................................................................................6
Allgemeine Einsatzbedingungen.....................................................................................................................6
Gerätebeschreibung .........................................................................................................................................7
Wartung .............................................................................................................................................................7
Tätigkeitsbeschreibung ....................................................................................................................................8
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Schrägsitz-Rückschlagventils .............................................................8
- DE 4 -
Zu dieser Anleitung
Ziel der Anleitung
Die vorliegenden Informationen ermöglichen es Ihnen, die Armatur fachgerecht zu installieren

und zu warten.
Die Anleitung richtet sich an technisch qualifiziertes Personal. Es wird vorausgesetzt, dass
bestimmtes Fachvokabular verstanden wird und dass technische Zeichnungen gelesen werden
können.
Sollte dies nicht der Fall sein, informieren Sie bitte Ihren zuständigen Kundenbetreuer bei MIT.
Aktuelle Dokumentation
MIT erklärt die Konformität gemäß Konformitätserklärung. Die Konformitätserklärung kann bei
Bedarf angefordert werden.
Drucks aktuellen Informationsstand MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG. Aktuelle
Informationen zu Ihrem Produkt können Sie jederzeit unter www.systemarmaturen.de abrufen.
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG behält sich Änderungen an der Armatur sowie
dienen, vor.

lesen! Oberfläche!
Werkzeug Vorsicht!
notwendig Spannung
Zu Ihrer Dokumente

gefahr! Anleitung
Betriebsstoff
notwendig
- DE 5-
Schrägsitzventile der Baureihe RVA55 und der MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG
sind zum Einsatz im industriellen Bereich geeignet. Die Armaturen ermöglichen das Absperren
neutraler gasförmiger und flüssiger Medien. Die Gehäuse- und Dichtmaterialien müssen für das
eingesetzte Medium und den angegebenen Temperaturbereich geeignet sein.

MIT-Produkte sind i.d.R. durch Umverpackungen vor äußeren Einflüssen wie Feuchtigkeit oder
Schmutz geschützt. Wir empfehlen, diese Umverpackung erst kurz vor Montagebeginn zu
entfernen, um die Geräte vor Verunreinigungen zu schützen.
Bei Einlagerung ist darauf zu achten, dass die Geräte trocken und schmutzfrei untergebracht
werden. Lange Lagerzeiten können eine Erhöhung des Losbrechmomentes zu Folge haben. Erst
nach Betätigung des Kugelhahns wird das Nenndrehmoment wieder erreicht.
Auf die Handhabung beim Transport können wir jedoch nur mit Ihrer Hilfe Einfluss nehmen – bitte
informieren Sie uns unverzüglich wenn die Ware bereits mit beschädigter Verpackung bei Ihnen
eintrifft! Die Kontrolle der Produkte muss unmittelbar nach Wareneingang erfolgen und sollte eine
Prüfung der technischen Parameter und eine Sichtprüfung beinhalten. Verdeckte Mängel sind
unverzüglich nach Entdeckung zu rügen, andernfalls gilt die Ware als genehmigt.
Das Verpackungsmaterial und die Armatur sind nach den örtlichen gesetzlichen Bestimmungen
und Verordnungen sachgerecht zu entsorgen. Auf die Beachtung der abfallrechtlichen
Bestimmungen bei der Entsorgung der aus der Anlage entnommenen Stoffe wird hingewiesen.
Rohrleitungen sollten vor Einbau, spätestens jedoch vor Inbetriebnahme durchgespült werden.
Automatisierte Armaturen bedürfen einer besonderen Beachtung bei der Inbetriebnahme! Diese
Geräte können im Werk nur unter Werkstattbedingungen getestet und eingestellt werden.
Sicherheitsstellungen sollten gezielt simuliert und getestet werden. Die Endlagen
(offen/geschlossen) müssen überprüft und ggf. nachjustiert werden! Zusätzliche Wegschalter
oder andere elektrische Geräte zur Stellungsrückmeldung ebenfalls auf richtige Justierung
überprüfen!
- DE 6 -
Gerätebeschreibung
1. Gehäuse
2. Dichtung metallisch
3. Sitzdichtung
4. Schrauben
5. Scheibe
6. Feder
7. Deckel
8. Dichtung
Wartung
Diese Schrägsitzventile sind wartungsfrei.
Folgende Probleme können auftreten:
Fehler Mögl. Ursache Abhilfe

falsche Einbaulage Einbaulage korrigieren
Sitz / Kegel beschädigt

Armatur im Sitz Armatur austauschen
durch Fremdkörper
undicht
Armatur reinigen,
verschmutztes Medium
Schmutzfänger vor der
(Feststoffe)
Armatur einbauen
verunreinigter Sieb reinigen /
geringer Schmutzfänger austauschen
Durchfluss Verstopfung im Rohrleitungssystem
Rohrleitungssystem prüfen
- DE 7-
Installation und Inbetriebnahme eines Schrägsitz-Rückschlagventils
Der Einbau darf nur in drucklosem Zustand erfolgen! Armaturenaufbauten nicht als Hebel
missbrauchen!
Die Rohrleitungen vor der Montage reinigen. Transportsicherungen und Verschlussstopfen an

dem Ventil entfernen.
Bezüglich der Einbaulage ist die Durchströmrichtung - wie auf der Armatur gekennzeichnet - zu
beachten. Der Medien-Druck muss unter dem Kegel anstehen. Rückschlagventile werden
aufrecht stehend in horizontale Rohrleitungen eingebaut. Zur Verwendung in vertikalen
Rohrleitungen muss das Rückschlagventil mit einer Schließfeder ausgerüstet sein.
Der Einbau von Rückschlagventilen auf dem Kopf ist nicht zulässig!
Zum Anschluss des Schrägsitzventils an Ihr Rohrsystem benötigen Sie passende Schlüssel.
Geeignetes Dichtmaterial an die Rohrleitungsenden anbringen, bei

PTFE-Band oder Hanfdichtungen die Einschraubrichtung
beachten.
Nur dem Einsatzzweck entsprechende Dichtmaterialien
verwenden
Bitte achten Sie darauf, dass das verwendete Dichtmittel für das Durchfluss-Medium geeignet
ist!
Wärmedehnungen der Rohrleitung müssen von Kompensatoren ausgeglichen werden.
In kritischen Einsatzbereichen, in denen starke Turbulenzen oder pulsierende Druckstöße des

Mediums auftreten (z.B. direkt hinter Pumpen, Kompressoren usw.) sollte eine Kegeldämpfung
eingesetzt werden.
- DE 8 -
Kontakt:

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
- DE 9-
ENGLISH BW-check valves - y-seated
Translation of the original installation and maintenance manual

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for assembly and initiation: The initiation of the valve is unauthorized until it
complies with the conditions of the machinery directive 2006/42/EC.
Assembly, maintenance and repairing of the valves are allowed for authorised and qualified
professionals only.
Modifications of the valve and the use of non-authorized spare parts exclude the liability of resulting
damage.
National directives for the prevention of accidents as well as local safety instructions of the user are
paramount and are not replaced by this document.
It is not allowed to use the valves, if the operating conditions do not match the pressure-temperature-
diagram and the medium resistance.
The swing check valve is to be mounted, removed and repaired by qualified personnel
If you demount a valve in a piping, medium may drop out. Therefore, if the medium is hazardous to
health, the piping must be emptied completely. Be careful with residues that may flow out later.
For connecting the valve to the piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Installation in unpressurized and non-energized state only!
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds means are suitable for the flowing
medium!
The power supply must be done on site by a qualified electrician!
Danger of injury! Do not put parts of your body or other things into the valves. This can cause
Residue of the operating medium may cause danger. If necessary wear safety shoes, gloves and
glasses.
- EN 10 -
BW-check valves - y-seated ENGLISH
Content
Translation of the original installation and maintenance manual............................................................... 10
Safety instructions .......................................................................................................................................... 10
Content ............................................................................................................................................................ 11
This manual .................................................................................................................................................. 11
Latest documentation on the internet............................................................................................................ 12
Validity of the manual ...................................................................................................................................12
Shortcuts and symbols ................................................................................................................................. 12
Specification of service .................................................................................................................................. 13
Device description .......................................................................................................................................... 14

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................... 14
Activity description ......................................................................................................................................... 15
Installation of a check-valve- Y seated ......................................................................................................... 15
- EN 11-
This manual
This information enables you to install and maintain your valve.

This manual is for skilled employees. We assume that you are familiar with the common valve
If you don’t meet these expectations please inform your personal customer advisor at MIT!
Latest documentation on the internet
MIT declares the conformity with a declaration of conformity. Please order it if required.
Please check regularly for updated versions of this document. This manual is not audited and
represents only the current information of MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG at the
MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH & Co. KG declares that it reserves its right to modify both
the manual and the valve if necessary for technical advancement.

Danger!
Tools necessary
Voltage.


Supply items
needed!
- EN 12 -
Intended usage
Check-valves –Y seated of the series RVA55 made by MIT Moderne IndustrieTechnik GmbH &
Co. KG are suitable for the producing industries. The armatures allow the distribution of neutral
gaseous and liquid media. The body and sealing compounds must be suitable for the assigned
medium and temperature range.
Danger of injury! Don´t put parts of your body or articles into the armature. This can cause
MIT-products are protected by packing against external influences such as humidity or dirt. We
recommend removing the packing only briefly before beginning of assembly in order to protect
the devices against impurities.
During storage it is to be made certain that the devices are dry and dirt-free accommodated.
After a long period of storage the breakaway torque may increase. After opening and closing the
ball valve manually for one time the rated breakaway torque can be reached again
We can only take influence on the transport process with your assistance - please inform us
immediately if the commodity arrives with damaged packing! Examination of technical parameters
and a visual product check should take place immediately after delivery. Subsequent complains
can not be accepted.
The packaging material and the valve need to be properly disposed of according to the local legal
requirements and regulations.
Please consider the waste legislation requirements for the disposal of substances withdrawn from
the system.
Goods faults or divergences of the amount must be indicated at the latest 7 days on receipt of
the product in writing, otherwise the guarantee claim expires!
Please ensure that no humidity gets into the piping. Automated valves need a special attention in
time of initial operation! These devices can be tested at MIT only under workshop conditions.
Security positions should be simulated and tested straight. The final positions must be checked
(opened/closed) and be re-adjusted if necessary! Additional switches or other electric devices to
the position feedback must be likewise checked for correct alignment.
- EN 13-
Device description
1. body
2. metal gasket
3. seat
4. bolt
5. disc
6. spring
7. cap
8. gasket
Maintenance
These check-valves-y seated are maintenance-free.
The following problems are possible:
Problem Possible cause Solution

check and adjust installation
incorrect installation position
position
undensitiy at valve
seat / cone damaged by impurities change valve
seat
clean valve, install strainer in
soiled medium (solids)
front of the valve
soiled strainer clean / change sieve
little flow
blockage in piping system check piping system
- EN 14 -
Activity description
Installation of a check-valve- Y seated
The installation may occur in state without pressure only. Do not abuse any superstructural
parts as lever!
Clean piping before installation. Remove transportation safety devices and sealing plugs.
In terms of the installation position consider the flow direction as marked on the valve body. The
medium pressure has to be set below the cone.
In horizontal piping systems check valves are installed in upright position. For use in vertical
piping systems the valve has to be equipped with a pressure spring.
Installation of check valves in headfirst position is not allowed!
For connecting the check valve to your piping system a suitable wrench is required.
Attach suitable sealing compounds to the conduit ends, if you

use PTFE tape or hemp seal follow the direction of thread.
Make sure that the sealing compounds are suitable for this
purpose.
Please pay attention to the fact that the used sealing compounds are suitable for the flowing
medium!
Thermal expansions of the piping system have to be balanced by compensators.
For the use in critical operating conditions with strong turbulences or water hammers (e.g. when
installed directly behind pumps or compressors) the use of a cushioning of the cone is
recommended.
- EN 15-
BW-check valves - y-seated
Contact:

Industriestr. 9
32602 Vlotho
Germany
Tel. +49 (5228) 952-0
Fax +49 (5228) 952-90
- EN 16 -
Bauart / Type:
CHECK VALVE BRASS M14X1,5 CW614N-MS FKM 114266


Range of application:
• opening pressure: ca. 0,03 bar
• medium temperature
FKM: -20°C up to +130°C
 


1  Position Part Brass
1 Body CW614N
2 Sealing FKM
2
3 3   Spindle 
 CW614N
   
   4 Spring 1.4310
 
   
   
  
 4
   
   

       
    
 
  
 
 
 
  


  


 
  
   
   
 


  







  
  
 





Errors and changes excepted. Revision: 11/2019-001
 
  


   
   
  
 


 

  
  


SYSTEM

VALVES
 

 Strong Basis. Individual Solutions. SYSTEM VALVES

Bauart / Type:
ANGULAR SEATED CHECK VALVE RVA55
Description: Range of application:
• female thread acc. to EN10226 • used to prevent backstrokes
• PN40 • opening pressure: 0,4bar
• media temperature: -20°C up to +150°C
Comments:
Threads acc. to EN 10226: It describes the threaded connection of a conical male thread (R) with a parallel female
thread (Rp).
part stainless steel

body 1.4408 O
inlaying parts 1.4408 O
sealing PTFE T
match code connection L [mm] H [mm] C [mm]

size
[inch]
RVA55-06OTO 1 90 65,7 18
RVA55-08OTO 11/2 119,5 79,5 22
Please ask for field specifications that are not listed

in this data sheet!
Before installation please consider installation and
maintenance manual, especially the safety indica-
tions!
Order information:
Fehler und Änderungen vorbehalten. Änderungsstand: 11/2019-002
1: type: RVA55 • 2. Stelle: Dichtungen:

T = PTFE
RVA55 - [XX] [OTO] - [XX] 2: connection size (see table): 06+08 • 3. digit: sealing:
3: materials: O = stainless steel

1 2 3 4
• 1. digit: body 4: options: none
O = stainless steel
SYSTEM VALVES
Strong Basis. Individual Solutions. SYSTEM VALVES
1 Content
Sensor Block
2062-8828-000 (HFO/0136)
2062-8828-010 (LO/0196)
- Operating Instructions -
We reserve the right to make technical changes

without notice.
The Declaration of Conformity for the specific device
can be requested from the manufacturer.
1 CONTENT
1 Content ................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2 Operating Instruction / Presentation Symbols .................................................................................................. 1
3 Intended Use ........................................................................................................................................................ 2
4 General Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................................ 2
5 Technical Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 3
6 Description of the System .................................................................................................................................. 5
6.1 Design and Function.................................................................................................................................... 5
6.2 Circuit Function of Valves ............................................................................................................................ 5
6.3 Fluidic Plan .................................................................................................................................................. 5
6.4 Pin Assignment............................................................................................................................................ 7
7 Mounting and electrical Connection .................................................................................................................. 8
8 Initialization .......................................................................................................................................................... 8
9 Operation / Function............................................................................................................................................ 8
9.1 Function ....................................................................................................................................................... 8
9.2 Sampling ..................................................................................................................................................... 8
10 Maintenance / Troubleshooting / Spare Parts ................................................................................................... 9
10.1 Mounting and Demounting at the System .................................................................................................... 9
10.2 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 18
10.3 Spare Parts................................................................................................................................................ 19
10.4 Fastening Torques ..................................................................................................................................... 20
11 Packaging / Transport / Storage ....................................................................................................................... 20
12 Shutdown / Disposal ......................................................................................................................................... 21
2 OPERATING INSTRUCTION / PRESENTATION SYMBOLS

WARNING!
The operating instructions contain important safety information!
Ignoring these instructions may result in hazardous situations.
The operating instructions must be read and understood.
Keep these instructions in a location which is accessible to every user and make these instructions available
to every new owner of the device.
A danger symbol indicates:

DANGER (death or serious injury are the result of non-compliance with the safety instructions) or
WARNING (Potentially dangerous situation with serious injuries or death may the result) or
CAUTION (Medium or light injuries may result from non-compliance with the safety instructions)
This symbol indicates:

property damages or
important additional information, tips and recommendations
(BA_Projekt10128_EN_v02_200131.DOC) page 1/20

3 Intended Use
 Marks a procedure/section you have to carry out.
3 INTENDED USE
The device has been designed for the use as a sensor unit for the hood of the separators of the company GEA
Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH. It may only be used in conjunction with such a separator for the
measurement of pressure and conductivity of the media and to control the media streams.
When using the device consider the protection class IP 54, i.e. the device is protected against dust and splash water
from entering inside.
The device must not be exposed to conditions that are contrary to the technical specification.
 Feed no aggressive media into the media connectors of the system except the below mentioned!
 No exposure to unacceptable temperatures, even if not operated!
 Do not physically stress the housing (by placing objects on it or use as a step)!
 Do not close ventilation and leakage slots!
 Do not make any external changes to the device housings!
Do not paint/lacquer the housing parts and screws!
4 GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

These safety instructions do not take any incidents and occurrences into account which may occur during assembly,
operation and maintenance of the devices. Also it does not regard for local safety regulations where the operating
party is responsible for its compliance, also regarding to the installation staff.
DANGER!
- because of high pressure!
Before loosening pneumatic lines and valves, turn off the pressure and vent the lines
- because of wrong operating voltage!

All components of the sensor block must be operated with 24 V DC!
- Danger of explosion!
When working with oils flammable and explosive gases can be produced. Therefore any manipulation
of the technological course of the process is prohibited!
Consider significant terms and conditions of explosion protection!
WARNING!
- Risk of burning / fire hazard at continuous operation by hot surface of the unit!
Keep the device away of easily combustible material and fluids and do not touch with bare hands!
General Hazardous Situations. To prevent injuries, ensure that:

- the system cannot be activated unintentionally,
- Installation and maintenance work, as well as operator control actions may be carried out by
authorized, qualified technicians only and with the appropriate tools,
- After an interruption in the power supply or fluidic supply, ensure that the process is restarted in a
defined or controlled manner,
- The device may be installed and operated only when in perfect condition and in consideration of the
operating instructions,
- The general rules of technology apply to application planning and operation of the device.
The device was developed with due consideration given to accepted safety rules and is state-of-the-
art. Nevertheless, dangerous situations may occur.
The device may be operated only when in perfect condition and in consideration of the operating
instructions.
Ignoring this operating manual and its operating instructions as well as unauthorized tampering with the
device release us from any liability and also invalidate the warranty covering the devices and
accessories!

5 Technical Data
5 TECHNICAL DATA
Materials
Fluid block AlMgSi1, anodised achromaticly
Housing components Polyamide, glass fiber reinforced - PA6/6T-GF25 - black
Seals/gaskets
Flange to separator 3x O-ring 23x3 (FKM)
Flange solenoid valves 6x O-ring 6x1.5 (FKM)
Seat solenoid valves 2x Membrane F (FKM)
Water detector 1x O-ring 28x2 (FKM)
Pressure transmitter 2x O-ring 13.1x1.6 (FKM)
Shut-off valves 4x O-ring 10.82x1.78 (FKM)
Screws for Shut-off valves 2x O-ring 4x1.8 (FKM)
Testing flange 2x O-ring 11x2.5 (FKM)
Blank plug O-rings (NBR) fluid contacting
Housing seal O-rings (NBR) not fluid contacting and silicone caps
Cover for testing flanges O-rings (NBR) fluid contacting
Media specification
Media All types of oils, especially heavy fuel and lubricating oil,
water and sea water,
gases and mixtures of these media
Media pressure 0 to 10 bar above atmospheric ambient pressure
Media temperature 0 to +100 °C
Inner temperature of housing 0 to +100 °C
Ambient temperature 0 to +80 °C
Electrical specification
Electrical connection Connecting the board cables to the terminal strip,
2x cable glands M16x1.5 for board cable
Operating voltage 24 V ±10 %; DC
Power consumption 8 W per solenoid valve
Duty cycle of solenoid valves Max. 25% power-on time at 100°C media temperature referred to a duration of
30 min, i.e. do not power-on longer than 7.5 min
Valves
Solenoid valves Type 331, 2/2-way-valve, seal material: FKM
Nominal diameter - valve DN3,0
Miscellaneous
Media connections Flange to fluid block (see flange pattern),
2x testing flanges, closed with blank plugs G1/4
2x double nipples with M14x1.5, one of them closed
Protection class IP54 (attended to the installation position)
Installation position Ventilation- and leakage slots of the housing downward
Mounting of the fluid block 3x screws DIN912 - M8, compatible to hole pattern on the separator hood
Conformity
EG Declaration of Conformity CE sign, 2004/108/EG - EMC

5 Technical Data
2.3 deep
Figure 1: Main dimensions and flange pattern of the sensor block

6 Description of the System
6 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM

6.1 DESIGN AND FUNCTION
The sensor block consists of an anodised aluminium fluid block with integrated conduits and of glass fiber reinforced
polyamide housing components which protect the sensor and actuator components.
The sensor unit has:
2 Solenoid valves (SV),
1 Water detector (CS),
2 Pressure transmitters (PT),
2 Media inputs (I),
5 Media outputs (O).
The sensor block will be used to measure pressure and capacitance of the medium and to control the media streams.
6.2 CIRCUIT FUNCTION OF VALVES

Circuit function A
2/2-way solenoid valve, direct acting, normally closed,
Type 331
6.3 FLUIDIC PLAN

Connection ports at connection flange to the separator
Figure 2: Fluid plan

Figure 3: In-/Outputs and components of the sensor block
Inputs: Sensors:
I1: Input - circuit PT1: Pressure transmitter - outlet pure oil
I2: Input - outlet pure oil PT2: Pressure transmitter - circuit
Measuring range: 0 ... 16 bar
Outputs: Output signal: 4 ... 20 mA
O1: Output - circuit CS1: Water detector
O2: Output - outlet water Measuring range: depends on the adjusting,
O3: Output - testing flange - circuit see chapter 10.1.6
O4: Output - testing flange - outlet pure oil Operating voltage: 24 V DC
O5: Output - circuit closed Output signal: changeover switch
Actuators:
SV1: Solenoid valve - circuit
SV2: Solenoid valve - outlet water
Power consumption: 8 W
Max. pressure: 10 bar
Circuit function: 2/2-way solenoid valve
Both valves have a manual override. Through this, the valve can be opened manually by groping. One can
reach the manual override from the outside via the flexible protection caps on the bottom of the sensor
block.
NOTE!
The manual override of solenoid valves can be fixed, but this is not part of the intended
functionality. If a failure of a solenoid valve or its power supply occurs, using the manual override can
be an auxiliary measure - but the result is the loss of the protection class! For this purpose remove
the relevant protection cap. Now, press down the button of the manual override and rotate it clockwise
by 90°. By that the position of the manual override is fixed. A reverse rotation of the button loosens the
manual override.
BV1: Shut-off valve for testing flange – circuit

BV2: Shut-off valve for testing flange – outlet pure oil
The shut-off valves for testing flanges are only manually operable with a screwdriver. They have a stop
in both directions. Never operate the valves with violence! A torque of about 1.0 Nm signalises the stop.
However, should medium emit out of the closed testing flange, usually it is caused by a leak at the seal
between the valve and fluid block. In this case does not help to screw it more tight - the shut-off valve for
testing flange has to be replaced.

1: Housing cover
2: Upper housing
3: Fluid block
4: Openings for pressure equalization of the interior
and for leak detection (do not close!)
5: Testing flange – outlet pure oil
6: Testing flange – circuit
7: Protection caps of the manual override button of
the solenoid valves
8: Cable glands
9: Double nipple – outlet water
10: Double nipple - circuit, closed
11: 3 Mounting screws of the sensor block
12: 5 Mounting screws of the upper housing with
spring washer and large washer
13: 2 Mounting screws of the upper housing with
spring washer, normal washer and O-ring
14: Cap holder
15: Terminal strip
Figure 4: Designation of sensor block (except components)
6.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT
Figure 5: Pin assignment

7 Mounting and electrical Connection
7 MOUNTING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

DANGER!
Observe the General Safety Instructions in chapter 4!
All mentioned procedures are described in detail in chapter 10.1!
 Dismount the housing cover!

 Install/screw the sensor block at the hood of the separators:
(Mounting screws, washer and O-rings to seal the flange are enclosed)
- Put the O-rings in the 3 grooves of the sensor block flange,

- Add the Allen head screws with a washer, put them in the through borings of the fluid block,
- Screw the sensor block on the hood of the separator (fastening torque: 20 Nm)
 Connect the nipple of the water outlet
 Put the board cables through the cable glands at the side of the sensor block
 Carry out the cabling according to the pin assignment (see chapter 6.4)
 Make sure that the shut-off valves for testing flanges are closed:
turn the screws clockwise with a screwdriver until a torque of approx. 1.0 Nm is reached
 Put on the housing cover and tighten it with screws – consider the correct position of the cover seal!
8 INITIALIZATION
The functionality is reached if the sensor block is mounted on the hood of the separator and if the cabling is carried
out correctly.
9 OPERATION / FUNCTION
Dismount the housing cover to reach the components inside the sensor block.
The electrical connections of the components (except the manually operated shut-off valves for testing flanges) are
wired with the terminal strip. Usually the connections will be operated externally via the board cables which have
to be fed through the two cable glands into the interior of the sensor block and have to be wired with the terminal
strip. Exceptions are described in the following list of components:
9.1 FUNCTION
 Circuit:
A water detector (CS1) determines the conductivity of the separating media by means of capacitive
measurement. The integrated solenoid valves (SV) will be switched via an external controller basing on
respective signals of the conductance sensor:
- Solenoid valve (SV1) for return to the separator (circuit)  on output (O1),
- Solenoid valve (SV2) to outlet (water outlet)  on output (O2).
Both valves have a manual override. Through this, the valve can be opened manually by groping. One can reach
the manual override from the outside via the flexible protection caps on the bottom of the sensor block.
The pressure in the circuit is monitored by a pressure transmitter (PT2) in the sensor block.
 Pure oil outlet:
It is a separate port connected to the outlet for pure oil. Its pressure is monitored by a pressure transmitter (PT1)
in the sensor block.
9.2 SAMPLING
 Each testing flange allows the sampling from the circuit and from the pure oil outlet
 Shut-off valves for testing flanges are integrated for closing the testing flanges:
- in circuit (BV1) to output (O3) and
- in pure oil outlet (BV2) to output (O4).
The shut-off valves for testing flanges can be manually operated with a slotted screwdriver (1.2x6.5) after
removing the housing cover.

10 Maintenance / Troubleshooting / Spare Parts
10 MAINTENANCE / TROUBLESHOOTING / SPARE PARTS

10.1 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING AT THE SYSTEM
DANGER!
- because of high pressure!
Before loosening pneumatic lines and valves, turn off the pressure and vent the lines
- Danger of explosion!
When working with oils flammable and explosive gases can be produced. Therefore any manipulation
of the technological course of the process is prohibited!
Consider significant terms and conditions of explosion protection!
WARNING!
- Risk of burning / fire hazard at continuous operation by hot surface of the unit!
Keep the device away of easily combustible material and fluids and do not touch with bare hands,
especially do not touch metallic parts!
Consider further safety instructions in chapter 4!
10.1.1 Housing Cover

Demounting:
 Unscrew the 4 neck collar screws at the corners of the housing cover (Allen key, wrench size 4)
 Remove the housing cover off the upper housing
 Save the O-ring 165x2.5 from the upper housing against loss!
Mounting:
 Mount it in reverse order, fastening torque of the screws: 2.0 Nm
DANGER!
Danger of bursting! Danger of short circuit!
The labyrinth-like tunnel under the seal at the bottom of the housing must not be closed!
It ensures pressure compensation and ventilation of the housing interior and dismisses any leak
medium to the outside in order to prevent the filling of the sensor block with medium in the event of
leakage, which could cause a short circuit or bursting.
NOTE!
Seal in the upper housing
Ensure that the O-ring 165x2.5 is inserted in the upper housing and is put properly in its groove!
(In the delivery status this O-ring is glued on the four corners, but this is not necessary.)
neck collar screws
O-ring 165x2.5
Ventilation of the housing
Figure 6: Housing cover - Mounting

10.1.2 Sensor Block and Hood of the Separator

Demounting:
 Demount the housing cover (see chapter 10.1.1)
 Unscrew the 3 fastening screws DIN 912 - M8x45 (sunken in the fluid block) (Allen key, wrench size 6),
while holding the sensor block well and remove carefully from the hood of the separator,
save Allen head screws against loss!
 Save the 3 O-rings 23x3.0 from the flange of the sensor block against loss!
Mounting:
 Mount it in reverse order!
 Put the 3 O-rings 23x3.0 into the flange of the sensor block
 Tighten the 3 fastening screws (Allen head) with fastening torque of 20 Nm
Flange surface
Fastening screws M8 to the hood of
the separator
O-rings 23x3.0
Figure 7: Sensor block - Mounting
10.1.3 Upper Housing

Demounting:
 Remove the cables from the solenoid valves, the pressure transmitters and the water detector (see Figure 3:
SV1, SV2, PT1, PT2 and CS1)
 Separate the PE-conductor to solenoid valve with protective conductor from the fluid block,
to do this unscrew the cylinder head screw DIN 912 - M4x12 with an Allen key (wrench size 3) from the fluid
block
(On this screw are -starting from the screw head- a lock washer, a washer, the cable eye, a washer and a
tooth lock washer.)
 Unscrew the 7 cylinder head screws DIN 912 - M3x10 with an Allen key (wrench size 2.5), which are used to
screw together the upper housing with the fluid block. (see Figure 4, positions 12 and 13)
5 screws (in the stiffened plates with ribs) have each a lock washer and a washer DIN 7349 (wide).
The remaining two screws have a lock washer, a washer according to DIN 7089 (typical) and below an
O-ring 2.5x1.5. The small parts are not saved against loss!
 Remove the upper housing from the fluid block
 Save the O-ring 140x2.5 between fluid block and upper housing against loss!
Mounting:
 Tighten the 7 cylinder head screws with an Allen key (wrench size 2.5) with a fastening torque of 1.0 Nm
 Connect/cable the components according to the pin assignment, see chapter 6.4,
fastening torque for protective conductor: 3.0 Nm

DANGER!
Grounding
For the mounting it is important to re-connect the protective earth (PE) conductor to the fluid block!
Only in this way, the grounding of the metallic touchable parts is guaranteed.
NOTE!
Seal in the upper housing
Ensure that the O-ring 140x2.5 is inserted in the upper housing and is put properly in its groove!
Connection for PE-conductor
Interstice with O-ring 140x2.5
Cable of the components
Figure 8: Upper housing - Mounting
10.1.4 Solenoid Valves

Demounting:
 Unscrew the connecting cable with a Phillips screwdriver and remove the cable plug
 Unscrew the solenoid valves from fluid block with a slotted screwdriver (1.2 x 6.5) – but unscrew only the two
unpainted screws
 Press from outside on the manual override button of the valve  then the valve can be removed from
the interior of the sensor block
 Save the 3 O-rings 6.5x1.5 at the flange of the valve against loss!
NOTE!
Cleaning the valve interior in case of blockage
In case of a blockage the valve can be opened by unscrewing also the two painted screws – but this
will void the warranty.
Extreme care when opening the valve!
Attention! Never pull the metal part of the pivoted armature out of the coil housing, but hold it
tight! Otherwise, the spring of the manual override loosens and the valve can not be mounted again!
But considering this restriction it is possible to clean the fluidic valve interior and to replace the
diaphragm of the valve.
Mounting:
 Put the 3 O-rings 6.5x1.5 into the flange of the valve

 Put the seal under the cable plug

 Tighten the screws: Solenoid valves - fastening torque: 1.6 Nm
Cable plug - fastening torque: 1.0 Nm
The button of the manual override has to be aligned to the direction of the protection caps in the housing
wall and has to be pressed while inserting.
Attention: unscrew ONLY

these unpainted screws
3 O-rings 6.5x1.5
Press the buttons

Figure 9: Solenoid valve - Mounting for (De-)Mounting
10.1.5 Pressure Transmitter

Demounting:
 Unscrew the gland nut of the connecting cable and remove the cable plug
 Unscrew the pressure transmitter with a deep socket wrench (wrench size 19) out of the fluid block
 Save the O-ring 13.1x1.6 on the pressure transmitter against loss!
Mounting:
 Put the O-ring 13.1x1.6 on the pressure transmitter
 Fastening torque of the pressure transmitter: 20 Nm
O-ring 13.1x1.6
Pressure transmitter
Figure 10: Pressure transmitter - Mounting

10.1.6 Water Detector

Demounting:
 Remove the cable plug of the connection cable
 Unscrew the water detector with a socket wrench (wrench size 32) out of the fluid block
 Save the O-ring 28.0x2.0 on the water detector against loss!
Mounting:
 Lubricate the O-ring 28.0x2.0 with grease (or if not available with machine oil) and put it on the water detector.
Screw the water detector into the fluid block, thereby the O-ring must not be squeezed!
 Fastening torque of the water detector: 20 Nm
NOTE!
2 types of water detectors: HFO and LO
The two types of water detectors („HFO“ and „LO“) are differently adjusted.
For selecting the spare parts it must be ensured that the respective sensor fits with the sensor block.
The description you can find on the type plate on the top of the sensor block and at one of the six
spanner flats of the water detector.
Model: CLS50 0022 001V1 Part-No.: 0005-1464-070

(replaces Model: SK1-HT125-HFO; Part-No.: 0005-1464-050)
used in sensor block model: HFO/0136; Part-No.: 2062-8828-000
Model: CLS50 0023 001V1 Part-No.: 0005-1464-080

(replaces Model: SK1-HT125-LO; Part-No.: 0005-1464-060)
used in sensor block model: LO/0196; Part-No.: 2062-8828-010
O-ring 28.0x2.0 - Always use a

new O-ring after the demounting!
Water detector
Figure 11: Water detector - Mounting
10.1.7 Shut-off Valves for Testing Flanges

Demounting:
 Unscrew the shut-off valves for testing flanges with a socket wrench (wrench size 15) out of the fluid block
 Save the 2 O-rings 10.82x1.78 on the shut-off valves for testing flanges against loss!

Mounting:
 Lubricate the 2 O-rings 10.82x1.78 with grease (or if not available with machine oil) and put them on the shut-
off valves for testing flanges
 Fastening torque for the mounting (not for operating!) of the shut-off valves for testing flanges: 10 Nm
 Caulk the shut-off valves for testing flanges by a hit with a punch.
Therefore is a crescent-shaped space in the fluid block into which collar material of the shut-off valves can be
deformed.
2 O-rings 10.82x1.78
Shut-off valves
for testing
flanges
Figure 12: Shut-off valves for testing flanges - Mounting
10.1.8 Testing Flanges

Demounting:
 Unscrew the 2 blank plugs G1/4 with Allen key (wrench size 6) out of the testing flanges
 Remove the sensor block from the hood of the separator (see chapter 10.1.2)
 Unscrew the headless screws DIN 914 M5x8-A2 with a long Allen key (wrench size 2.5) from the side
with the flanges
NOTE!
Risk of damage to testing flange and fluid block!
First unscrew the headless screws after that the testing flanges because these headless screws
prevent the accidental loosening of the testing flanges.
If the test flange will be unscrewed with violence before removing the headless screws, it is inevitably
destroyed! In this case damages to the fluid block can also not be excluded!
 Unscrew the testing flanges with a flat spanner out of the fluid block
 Save the O-rings 11x2.5 in the testing flanges against loss!
Mounting:
 Lubricate the O-rings 11x2.5 with grease (or if not available with machine oil) and put it back in the grooves at
the testing flanges
 Fastening torque for testing flanges: 20 Nm
 Save the testing flanges with headless screws, fastening torque: 2.0 Nm

Testing flanges
Spanner flat
Blank plug G1/4
O-ring 11x2.5
Headless screws -
unscrew before
demounting!
Figure 13: Testing flange - Mounting
10.1.9 Blank Plugs

Demounting:
 Remove the 3 blank plugs G1/8 and 2 blank plugs G1/4 (each with an O-ring) out of the fluid block:
- unscrew blank plugs G1/8 with Allen key (wrench size 3)
- unscrew blank plugs G1/4 with Allen key (wrench size 6)
Mounting:
 Screw
- blank plugs G1/8 with Allen key (wrench size 3)  fastening torque: 3.0 Nm
- blank plugs G1/4 with Allen key (wrench size 6)  fastening torque: 10.0 Nm
10.1.10 Double Nipples (with Plug)

Demounting:
In the fluid block are 2 double nipples G1/4 - M14x1.5, one of it is closed with a plug and a gland nut.
Each double nipple has a flat seal, the plug has an O-ring.
These flat seals are not particularly saved against loss but not available separately!
 Loosen the gland nut of the plug with a wrench (wrench size 17)
 Unscrew the double nipple with a wrench (wrench size 19)
 Save the seals against loss!
Mounting:
 Put in the correct seal
 Screw the double nipple with a wrench (wrench size 19)  fastening torque: 20.0 Nm
Screw the gland nut of the plug with a wrench (wrench size 17)  fastening torque: 6.0 Nm
10.1.11 Terminal Strip and Cabling

Demounting:
 Disconnect the cables of solenoid valves, pressure transmitters and water detector (see chapter 10.1.3 and
Figure 8)
 Disconnect the PE-conductor to the solenoid valve with protective conductor from the fluid block.
Unscrew the cylinder screw DIN 912 - M4x12 with an Allen key (wrench size 3) out of the fluid block

(On this screw are -starting from the screw head- a lock washer, a washer, the cable eye, a washer and a
tooth lock washer.)
 Screw off the terminal strip from the upper housing:
- loosen the 2 fillister head screws with a screwdriver (Torx TX15) – it is not necessary to hold up the square
nut
- each fillister head screw is sealed with an O-ring 4.0x1.0.
 Save all small pieces against loss!
 Take off the terminal strip from the upper housing
The disassembling of the terminal strip is not part of this document. The pin assignment (chapter 6.4) contains the
additional information and is used to document the original state.
Mounting:
 Screw the 2 fillister head screws with a screwdriver (Torx TX15), fastening torque: 3.0 Nm
and save supplemental with a nut lock
 Cabling of the components as described in the pin assignment, see chapter 6.4,
fastening torque for the PE-conductor: 3.0 Nm
DANGER!
Grounding
For the mounting it is important to re-connect the protective earth (PE) conductor to the fluid block!
Only in this way, the grounding of the metallic touchable parts is guaranteed.
Fillister head screw
O-ring 4.0x1.0
Square nut (lock)

Marking of the broken clips
of the cross-connection
(No. 4, 5 and 8)
Figure 14: Terminal strip - Mounting
10.1.12 Protective Caps for the Manual Override of the Solenoid Valves
Demounting:
 Demount the terminal strip – all the components can stay cabled
 Now loosen the accessible 4 plastic self-cutting screws on the cap holders with a screwdriver (Torx TX08)
 Pull the cap holders out of its guidance
 Remove the protective caps out of the openings of the housing

Mounting:
 Mount it in reverse order
 Screw the 4 plastic self-cutting screws on the cap holders with a screwdriver (Torx TX08),
fastening torque: 0.3 Nm
Plastic self-cutting screws
Pull the cap holders in the

direction of the arrows
(forward)
Figure 15: Cap holders - Mounting
10.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
Failure of Sensors or Actuator Components
If a failure of sensor components occurs, please check the cabling/wiring for loose connections! This concerns the
on-board electronics as well as the contacts on the terminal strip and the respective component. Check also if all
cables are wired as the described in the pin assignment plan (see chapter 6.4)! The use of a Multimeter helps
checking the signals. If it is ensured that the electrical connections are made correctly, it could be also possible that
the conditions in the medium (pressure and water-oil-ratio) are not the expected conditions, although this is
assumed.
Pollution / Blockage of the Fluidic Channels
If that was not the cause for the failure, it could be that a channel or the sensor have become inoperable by
pollution. So it has to be cleaned. Therefore take the plant out of operation, demount the respective component and
check its operability again. If it is still unoperable mount a spare part. But if pollution was the cause for
unoperability it is advisable to clean up the entire block.
Leackage
If medium drains off at one point of the sensor block, find out the location of the leakage first. Restore the tightness of
the block by replacing the respective seal/O-ring (of the set of seals) or the whole component.
Mechanical Destruction of the Housing
A set of housing parts can be ordered if the housing was mechanically damaged because of an act of violence. The
plastic parts of the housing must be replaced to ensure the compliance with the protection class.

10.3 SPARE PARTS

Main list of spare part sets:
Spare part GEA - Part-No. Localisation
Shut-off valve 2062-8828-910 See following Figure 16
Water detecor HFO/0136 0005-1464-070 See following Figure 16
Water detecor LO/0196 0005-1464-080
Solenoid valve Type 331 DN3 0018-8133-600 See following Figure 16
Pressure transmitter incl. plug and cable 0005-1529-300 See following Figure 16
Set of housing parts 2062-8828-920 See following Figure 17
Set of seals 2062-8828-930 See following table
Spare parts for components:
2x shut-off valve (2062-8828-910)
1x water detector
(0005-1464-070 or
0005-1464-080)
2x pressure transmitter
(0005-1529-300)
2x solenoid valve (0018-8133-600)
Figure 16: Spare parts for components
Set of housing parts (2062-8828-920):
1: 1x Upper housing with threaded bushings

2: 1x Housing cover, pre-mounted with 4x neck collar screws and
washers
3: 2x Protective cap, pre-mounted with cap holders and plastic self-
cutting screws
4: 5x Screw M3x10 with lock washer and a wide washer for the
mounting, enclosed in a bag
5: 2x Screws M3x10 with lock washer and small washer,
O-ring 2.5x1.5 for the mounting, enclosed in a bag
6: 1x O-ring 165x2.5 pre-mounted as seal for housing cover
7: 1x O-ring 140x2.5 as seal for upper housing, enclosed in a bag
Figure 17: Set of housing parts

11 Packaging / Transport / Storage
Set of seals (2062-8828-930):

Spare part Amount Use Localisation
O-ring 2.5x1.5 2x Fixing the upper housing Figure 4, Position 13
O-ring 165x2.5 1x Seal for the housing cover Figure 6
O-ring 140x2.5 1x Seal for the upper housing Figure 8
O-ring 23x3 (FKM) 3x Flanges to the separator Figure 7
O-ring 6x1.5 (FKM) 6x Solenoid valves Figure 9
O-ring 13.1x1.6 (FKM) 2x Pressure transmitters Figure 10
O-ring 28x2 (FKM) 3x Water detector, only 1x at the sensor Figure 11
block, 2x additional
O-ring 10.82x1.78 (FKM) 4x Shut-off valves for testing flanges, Figure 12
except pilot lot
Membrane F (FKM) 2x Solenoid valve, seat, see Note in chapter 10.1.4
for temporary repairs
10.4 FASTENING TORQUES

Component Size Fastening torque
Fastening screws of housing cover M5 2.0 Nm
Fastening screws of upper housing M3 1.0 Nm
Fastening screws of sensor block M8 20 Nm
Solenoid valves M4 1.6 Nm
Cable plugs M3 1.0 Nm
Pressure transmitter SW 19 20 Nm
Water detector SW 32 20 Nm
Shut-off valve for testing flange SW 15 10 Nm (and caulk)
Blank plug G1/8 G1/8 3.0 Nm
Blank plug G1/4 of sensor block G1/4 10 Nm
Double nipple G1/4 20 Nm
Gland nut of the plug at the double nipple M14x1.5 6.0 Nm
Testing flange G1/2 20 Nm
Headless screws at the testing flange M5 2.0 Nm
Blank plug G1/4 in the testing flange G1/4 3.0 Nm
Fastening screw of the PE-conductor M4 3.0 Nm
Fastening screws of the terminal strip M4 3.0 Nm
Screws of the cap holders (self-cutting) 0.3 Nm
Cable glands M16x1.5 4.0 Nm
11 PACKAGING / TRANSPORT / STORAGE

NOTE!
Transport damages and Storage damages!
Inadequately protected equipment may be damaged during transport and storage.
Store the device protected of moisture and dirt and transport it in a shock-resistant packaging.
Avoid effects of heat and cold which could result in temperatures above or below the permitted storage
temperature (0 to +80 °C).

12 Shutdown / Disposal
12 SHUTDOWN / DISPOSAL
NOTE!
Damage to the environment caused by device components contaminated with media.
Observe the relevant disposal and environmental protection regulations!

Straight through control valves - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446
Series 440, 445 Series 441, 446

Contents
1.0 General information on operating 7.1 Replacement of stem sealings .......................... 2-12
instructions ..................................................2-2 7.1.1 PTFE V-ring unit design................................ 2-12
2.0 Notes on possible dangers.........................2-2 7.1.2 Stuffing box packing design .......................... 2-13
7.1.3 Bellows seal design ...................................... 2-14
2.1 Significance of symbols ...................................... 2-2
7.2 Replacement of internal parts ........................... 2-16
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information ............. 2-2 7.2.1 Replacement of plug and stem .................... 2-16
3.0 Storage and transport ................................2-2 7.2.2 Replacement of seals of pressure
4.0 Description...................................................2-3 balanced plugs ............................................. 2-17
4.1 Scope of applications .......................................... 2-3 7.2.3 Replacement of the seat ring........................ 2-17
4.2 Operating principles ............................................ 2-37.3 Tightening torques............................................. 2-18
7.3.1 Tightening torques for hexagon nuts .......... 2-18
4.3 Diagram .............................................................. 2-4
7.3.2 Tightening torques for seat rings ................ 2-18
4.3.1 Plug design .................................................... 2-7
4.4 Technical data ..................................................... 2-8 8.0 Troubleshooting ........................................ 2-18
4.5 Marking ............................................................... 2-8 9.0 Troubleshooting table ............................. 2-19
5.0 Installation....................................................2-9 10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part ... 2-20
5.1 General notes on installation............................... 2-9 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee .............................. 2-20
5.2 Requirements at the place of installation .......... 2-10
5.3 Installation instructions concerning actuators ....2-11
6.0 Putting the valve into operation............... 2-11
7.0 Care and maintenance ..............................2-12
Rev. 0040301000 3516 englisch page 2-1

Str. thr. control valves - STEVI® 440 / 441, 445 / 446

and repair.
These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.
ATTENTION !

to property.

ATTENTION !
- Protect against external force (like impact, vibration, etc.).
See catalog sheet for weights.
- At -20°C to +65°C.
- The paint is a base coat to protect against corrosion during transportation and storage. Do
not damage paint protection.
Page 2-2 Rev. 0040301000 3516

4.0 Description
4.1 Scope of applications
Valves are used for „controlling the flow of liquids, gases and vapours in chemical and other
processing plants and for plant engineering“.
ATTENTION !
- Refer to the data sheet for applications, limits on use and possibilities.
- Certain media require or preclude the use of special materials.
- The valves are designed for standard operating conditions. If conditions exceed
these requirements, e.g. aggressive or abrasive media, the operator should
state the higher requirements when ordering.
- Valves made from grey cast iron are not authorised for use in systems subject
to TRD 110.
The information complies to the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
It is the responsibility of the machine planner to ensure compliance.
The special markings on the valve must be taken into account.
Refer to the catalogue sheet to see which materials are used in standard versions.
Please contact the supplier or the manufacturer if you have any questions.
4.2 Operating principles

The control valves are especially suitable for actuation by pneumatic or electrical actuators.
Four plug types are available to suit the various applications:
parabolic plug (standard)
perforated plug
V-port plug
pressure balanced plug
The flow through control valves is always against the closing direction.
In the case of control valves with perforated plugs, gases and vapours flow against the
closing directions, but liquids flow through in the closing direction. If a pneumatic actuator is
to be used on a straight-way valve with a perforated plug with the fluid moving in the closing
direction, a higher closing force will be needed. This is to prevent vibration as the plug
approaches the closed position.
If the forces generated by the actuators are too low, arrangements should be made to
relieve the pressure as far as this is compatible with service conditions.
Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-3

4.3 Diagram
Fig. 1: Series 440 DN15-100 Fig. 2: Series 441 DN15-100
Page 2-4 Rev. 0040301000 3516

Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-5


(only stainless steel) (only stainless steel)
Bild 9: Series 445 DN125-150 Bild 10: Series 446 DN125-150

(only stainless steel) (only stainless steel)
Page 2-6 Rev. 0040301000 3516
Fig. 11: Series 445 DN200-250 (only stainless steel)

4.3.1 Plug design
Fig. 12: Design with perforated plug Fig. 13: Design with V-port plug
(Design with pressure balanced plug refer to Fig. 27)
Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-7

4.4 Technical data
for
- Principal dimensions
- Pressure-temperature-ratings, etc. refer to data sheet.
4.5 Marking
Type-Number
Flow characteristic:
e.g. GLP - equal percentage Manufacturer
LIN - linear
Kvs-value
Nominal diameter CE-marking
Nominal pressure
Notified body
Material of
internal parts
Customer-specific
information
Serial-No.
Plug design:
e.g. WD 200°C - PTFE-soft sealing Stem sealing:
ST - stellited e.g. V-Ring 220°C - PTFE-V-ring unit
LAK - V-port plug PTFE 250°C - PTFE-packing
LOK - Perforated plug Year of manufacture Graphit - Graphit packing
EK 200°C - Pressure balancing plug clear speech (1. and 2. position) O-Ring 130°C - EPDM-O-ring sealing
Faltenbalg - Stainless steel bellows seal
Fig. 14: DIN
Type-Number
Flow characteristic:
e.g. GLP - equal percentage Manufacturer
LIN - linear
Cv-value
Nominal diameter CE-marking
Nominal pressure
Notified body
Material of
internal parts
Customer-specific
information
Serial-No.
Plug design:
e.g. WD 392°F - PTFE-soft sealing Stem sealing:
ST - stellited e.g. V-Ring 428°F - PTFE-V-ring unit
LAK - V-port plug PTFE 482°F - PTFE-packing
LOK - Perforated plug Year of manufacture Graphite - Graphit packing
EK 392°F - Pressure balancing plug clear speech (1. and 2. O-Ring 266°F - EPDM-O-ring sealing
position) Bellows - Stainless steel bellows seal
Fig. 15: ASME
Address of manufacturer: refer to item 11.0 Warranty / Guarantee
According to the Pressure Equipment Directive table 6, annex II, valves without safety
function are only allowed to bear the CE-marking DN32 onwards.
Valves with safety function are:
Type 440 DP-G / 441 DP-G and
Type 440 / 440-D with FR2.1 and Ü-sign
Page 2-8 Rev. 0040301000 3516

5.0 Installation
5.1 General notes on installation
The following items should be taken into account besides the general principles governing
installation work:
ATTENTION !
- Remove flange covers if present.
- The interior of valve and pipeline must be free from foreign particles.
- Note installation position with reference to flow, see mark on valve.
- Steam line systems should be designed to prevent water accumulation.
- Lay pipelines so that damaging transverse, bending and torsional forces are
avoided.
- Protect valves from dirt during construction work.
- Connection flanges must mate exactly.
- Connecting bolts for pipe flanges should be mounted preferably from the
counter flange side (hexagon nuts from the valve side).
At DN15-32: If valves should be mounted directly to valves, the upper flange
connecting bolts should be preferably executed with studs and hexagon nuts on
both sides.
Refer to data sheet for weights.
- Keep the thread and shaft of the stem free from paint.
- Centre gaskets between the flanges.
- Strainers or filters should be installed before the valves.
- Planners / construction companies or operators are responsible for positioning and

installing products.
- The valves are designed for application, not influenced from weather.
- For application outside or in adverse environments like corrosion-promoting conditions
(sea water, chemical vapours, etc.), special constructions or protective measures are
recommended.
Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-9

5.2 Requirements at the place of installation
The place of installation should be easily accessible and provide ample space for
maintenance and removing the actuator. Stop valves should be installed before and after
the control valve to enable maintenance working without draining the piping system. The
valve should preferably installed vertically with the actuator at the top. Inclined or horizontal
installation without supports is permissible only with light actuators.
For this installation position, the two distance columns (or joke) have to be above each
other in the vertical plane.
Fig. 16: Pipeline vertically Fig. 17: Pipeline horizontally

Permissible actuator weights for valves with unsupported horizontal stems:
20 kg for DN 15 - 32 55 kg for DN125v-150v
25 kg for DN 40 - 65 (only series 445/446)
35 kg for DN 80-100 55 kg for DN200-250
40 kg for DN125-150
The pipes must be lagged to protect the actuators from excessive heat. Sufficient space
must be left for the maintenance of the stem packing.
To ensure that the control valves function correctly, the pipe run should be straight for at
least 2 x n.d. upstream and 6 x n.d. downstream of the valve.
Page 2-10 Rev. 0040301000 3516

5.3 Installation instructions concerning actuators
Normally, control valves are supplied complete with actuator fitted.
It is not permitted to mantle / dismantle actuators with valves operating and service
conditions (temperature and pressure). The actuators must be assemble as describe in the
operating instructions during conversion and maintenance. The actuators will be
dismantled or assembled incl. adapter flange (pos. 34). The cylinder screws (pos. 35) need
to be loosen or tighten for it.
During assembly work, the plug is not be turned on its seating at closing pressure.
ATTENTION !
Care must be taken with the bellow type valves when actuators are mounted or
removed. (Hold the valve-stem against turning with an open-end wrench!)
When retrofitting actuators, the maximum permissible force for valve actuation must be
taken into account:
Series 440 / 445 Series 441 / 446
12kN for DN 15- 50 18kN for DN 15-100
29kN for DN 65-100 37kN for DN 125-150
40kN for DN125-150 37 kN for DN200-250
59 kN for DN125v-150v (only BR441)
(only BR445/446)
59 kN for DN200-250
6.0 Putting the valve into operation
ATTENTION !
- Before putting the valve into operation, check material, pressure, temperature
and direction of flow.
- Regional safety instructions must be adhered to.
- Residues in piping and valves (dirt, weld beads, etc.) inevitably lead to leakage.
- Touching the valve when it is operating at high (> 50 °C) or low (< 0 °C) media
temperatures can cause injury.
Affix warning notice or protective insulation as appropriate!
- All works has been completed!
- The valve is in the correct position for its function.
- Safety devices have been attached.
Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-11


Maintenance and maintenance intervals have to be defined by the operator according to
the service conditions.
7.1 Replacement of stem sealings

7.1.1 PTFE V-ring unit design
PTFE V-ring unit (pos. 12) consisting of:
1 backing ring
4 sealing rings
1 cover ring
Owing to the installed compression spring (pos. 15), this
stem packing is self-adjusting. If the stem starts leaking,
the ring pack is worn out and must be replaced.
Replacement of PTFE V-ring units:
ATTENTION !
Refer to item 10.0 and 11.0 before
dismantling the valve.
- Remove actuator.
(Refer to operating instructions for actuator!)
- When replacing PTFE V-ring unit (pos. 12), make sure
that the parts are installed in the correct order and
positions (refer to Fig. 18).
- Gasket (pos. 17) must be replaced.
Damaged stems must also be replaced (refer to item 7.2
for instructions) since a new ring pack will soon start
leaking again if the stem is damaged. Fig. 18:
V-ring unit DN15-150
Page 2-12 Rev. 0040301000 3516

7.1.2 Stuffing box packing design
- The stuffing box packing (pos. 23) requires maintenance.
- If leaks develop, immediately tighten the screw joint (pos. 25) gradually until the packing
(pos. 23) stops leaking.
- The service life of stuffing box packings (pos. 23) can be increased by checking regularly
leakage.
- If leaks can no longer be stopped by tightening the screw joint (pos. 25), a new packing
ring (pos. 23) must be inserted into the gland.
Replacement of stuffing box packings:
ATTENTION !
Refer to item 10.0 and 11.0 before dismantling the valve.
- Remove actuator. (Refer to operating instructions for actuator!)
- Insert new packing ring as shown in Fig. 19 - Fig. 21.
Fig. 19: Stuffing box packing Fig. 20: Stuffing box packing
DN15-150 DN125v-150v / DN200-250
If a split packing ring is used, cut with a chamfer

as shown in Fig. 21.
Fig. 21: Split packing ring

Damaged stems must also be replaced (refer to item 7.2 for instructions) since a new ring
pack will soon start leaking again if the stem is damaged.
Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-13

7.1.3 Bellows seal design
If the stem leaks, the bellows seal (pos. 20.3) is defective. The leak can initially be stopped
by tightening the screw joint (pos. 20.17).
Stem and bellows (pos. 20.3) can only be replaced together.
Replacement of bellows seals:
ATTENTION !
- Remove actuator.
DN15-150:
- Loose nuts (pos. 11).
- Detach bellows assembly (pos. 20).
- Slacken screw joint (pos. 20.17) by about one turn.
- Press stem/bellows unit (pos. 20.3) down.
- Drive pin (pos. 4) out with a drift.
- Unscrew plug (pos. 3).
- Loose nuts (pos. 20.8).
- Detach mounting bonnet (pos. 20.2).
- Extract stem/bellows unit (pos. 20.3) from the
bellows housing (pos. 20.1).
- Bolt new parts together and drill them.
- Replace 2 gaskets (pos. 20.6) and 1 gasket (pos. 9).
- Assemble in reverse order.
- Secure with nuts (pos. 10 u. 20.8) and tighten them
crosswise.
(For tightening torques refer to item 7.3.1)
- Tighten screw joint (pos. 20.17) gradually up to
tightness of the stuffing box packing (pos. 20.10).
Fig. 22: Series 441/446
Page 2-14 Rev. 0040301000 3516

DN200-250:
- Detach bellows assembly (pos. 20) incl. stuffing
box housing (pos. 33).
- Slacken sleeve nut (pos. 20.16) by about one turn.
- Lift bellows housing (pos. 20.1)
- Drive spring pin (pos. 13) out with a drift.
- Unscrew stem extension (pos. 6) with plug.
- Loose nuts (pos. 20.8).
- Detach stuffing box housing (pos. 20.13)
- Extract stem/bellows-unit (pos. 20.3) from the
bellows housing (pos. 20.1).
- Bolt new parts together and drill them.
- Replace 2 gaskets (pos. 20.6), 1 gasket (pos. 9)
and 1 gasket (pos. 39).
ATTENTION at DN125-150!
- Ensure that the torsion lock is correctly
positioned when inserting new stem/
bellows unit. Introduce the grooved pin
(pos. 20.9) into the torsion lock groove.
Make sure it runs smoothly!
- Secure with nuts (pos. 11, 20.8 and 40) and tighten
them crosswise.
(For tightening torques refer to item 7.3)
- Tighten sleeve nut (pos. 20.16) gradually up to
tightness of the stuffing box packing (pos. 20.10).
Fig. 23: Series 441 DN200-250
Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-15

7.2 Replacement of internal parts
7.2.1 Replacement of plug and stem
ATTENTION !
- Remove actuator.
Series 440/445:
- Detach mounting bonnet (pos. 7).
- Slacken screw joint (pos. 19 or 25) by about 1 turn.
- DN200-250: Slacken nuts (Pos. 38) by about 2-3 turns.
- DN15-100: Extract plug/stem assembly (pos. 3).
- DN125-250: Extract plug (pos. 3) and stem (pos. 5).
- DN125-250: Drive pin (pos. 4) out with a drift.
- DN125-250: Unscrew plug (pos. 3).
- DN125-250: Bolt new parts together, drill and pin them. Fig. 24: Series 440 / 445
DN15-100
- Replace gasket (pos. 9).
- Secure with nuts (pos. 11) and tighten them crosswise.
(For tightening torques refer to item 7.3.1.)
Fig. 25: Series 440 / 445 DN125-150 Fig. 26: Series 440 / 445 DN200-250
Page 2-16 Rev. 0040301000 3516

Series 441/446:
For replacement of plug and stem with bellows sealing (Series 441/446) refer to item 7.1.3.
7.2.2 Replacement of seals of pressure balanced plugs

ATTENTION !
- Remove actuator.
- Remove plug as described in item 7.2.
- Prise worn piston seal (pos. 32) out of groove in
plug with suitable tool (e.g. screwdriver).
- Insert new piston seal (pos. 32), taking care that
it is in the correct position (refer to Fig. 27).
- Replace guide ring (pos. 31).
- Clean sliding surface of guide bush (pos. 30);
smooth with fine abrasive if necessary.
- Replace 2 gaskets (pos. 9).
- Secure with nuts (pos. 11) and tighten them
crosswise. Fig. 27: Pressure balanced plug
7.2.3 Replacement of the seat ring
Only with control valves series 445 / 446 the seat ring is screwed in.
ATTENTION !
- Remove actuator. (Refer to operating instruction for actuator!)
- Detach valve top part.
- Unscrew seat ring (pos. 2) with a special wrench (can be obtained from the manufacturer).
- Clean thread and seat ring taper in body (pos. 1).
- Replace respectively recondition and clean seat ring (pos. 2).
- Apply sealing taper (body / seat ring) with suitable lubricant (e.g. Epple 37).
- Install seat ring (pos. 2). (For tightening torques refer to item 7.3.2.)
- Replace gasket (pos. 9).
- Assemble valve top part.
- Secure with nuts (pos. 11) and tighten them crosswise.
Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-17

7.3 Tightening torques
7.3.1 Tightening torques for hexagon nuts
M 10 = 15 - 30 Nm
M 12 = 35 - 50 Nm
M 16 = 80 - 120 Nm
M 20 = 150 - 200 Nm
M 24 = 340 - 410 Nm
7.3.2 Tightening torques for seat rings

DN 15/ 20 = 140 Nm
DN 25/ 32 = 205 Nm
DN 40 = 305 Nm
DN 50 = 460 Nm
DN 65 = 720 Nm
DN 80 = 980 Nm
DN100 = 1550 Nm
DN125 = 1700 Nm
DN150 = 2000 Nm
DN200 = 3300 Nm
DN250 = 3850 Nm
! Refer to operating instructions for actuator concerned for

installing actuators !
8.0 Troubleshooting
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
-

Page 2-18 Rev. 0040301000 3516


ATTENTION !
- read item 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair work!
- read item 6.0 before restarting the plant !

No flow Valve closed. Open valve (using actuator).
Flange covers not removed. Remove flange covers.
Little flow Valve not sufficiently open. Open valve (using actuator).
Dirt sieve clogged. Clean / replace sieve.
Piping system clogged. Check piping system.
Kvs value of valve unsuitable. Fit valve with higher Kvs value.
Valve stem moves in jerks. Stuffing box sealing too tight Slacken screw joint (pos. 25/20.17)
(for valves with graphite packings). slightly. Valve must nor start leaking!
Valve plug slightly seized owing to Clean internals, smooth rough spots.
solid dirt particles.
Valve stem or plug cannot be Seating and plug clogged with dirt; Clean seating and plug with suitable
moved. especially with V-port and perforated solvent.
plugs.
Valve plug seized in seating or guide Replace plug and seating; use parts
owing to deposits or dirt in medium. made from different material if neces-
sary.
Valve stem leaking. PTFE V-ring unit damaged or worn. Replace ring pack (pos. 12);
refer to item 7.1.1
Stuffing box gland too slack in valves Tighten screw joint (pos. 25);
with stuffing box packings. refer to item 7.1.2.
Bellows defective in valves with bellow Replace bellows unit;
seal. refer to item 7.1.3
Leakage too high when Sealing surfaces of plug eroded or Replace plug;
valve is closed. worn. refer to item 7.2.1.
Sealing edge of seating damages or Replace seating
worn. (only at Series 445/446); refer to item
7.2.3, fit strainer if necessary.
Piston sealing ring worn (pressure- Replace sealing ring;
relieved valves). refer to item 7.2.2
Seating and/or plug dirty. Clean internals of valve;
fit dirt sieve if necessary.
Pneumatic actuator not completely Vent actuator air chamber completely.
vented; spring force not fully effective.
Actuator not powerful enough. Install more powerful actuator.
Check service data.
Rev. 0040301000 3516 Page 2-19

10.0 Dismantling the valve or the top part

ATTENTION !
The following points must be observed:
- Pressureless pipe system.
- Medium must be cool.
- Plant must be drained.
- Purge piping systems in case of caustic, inflammable, aggressive or toxic
media.
11.0 Warranty / Guarantee

The extent and period of warranty cover are specified in the "Standard Terms and
Conditions of Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG“ valid at the time of delivery or, by way of
departure, in the contract of sale itself.
We guarantee freedom of faults in compliance with state-of-the-art technology and the
confirmed application.
No warranty claims can be made for any damage caused as the result of incorrect handling
or disregard of operating and installation instructions, datasheets and relavant regulations.
This warranty also does not cover any damage which occurs during operation under
conditions deviating from those laid down by specifications or other agreements.
Justified complaints will be eliminated by repair carried out by us or by a specialist
appointed by us.
No claims will be accepted beyond the scope of this warranty. The right to replacement
delivery is excluded.
The warranty shall not cover maintenance work, installation of external parts, design
modifications or natural wear.
Any damage incurred during transport should not be reported to us but rather to the
competent cargo-handling depot, the railway company or carrier company immediately or
else claims for replacements from these companies will be invalidated.
Technology for the Future.

GERMAN QUALITY VALVES
ARI-Armaturen Albert Richter GmbH & Co. KG, D-33750 Schloß Holte-Stukenbrock
Telephone (+49 5207) 994-0 Telefax (+49 5207) 994-158 or 159
Internet: http://www.ari-armaturen.com E-mail: info.vertrieb@ari-armaturen.com
Page 2-20 Rev. 0040301000 3516

Westfalia Separator
Operating and Installation Instructions
Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO 1,6kN
Contents
1.0 General information on operating instructions... 2 5.4 Electrical connection.......................................... 10
2.0 Notes on possible dangers ................................... 2 5.4.1 Connection ......................................................11
2.1 Significance of symbols ....................................... 2 5.5 Settings ............................................................. 12
5.5.1 Torque and travel switches.............................. 12
2.2 Explanatory notes on safety information .............. 3
6.0 Putting the actuator into operation ................... 12
3.0 Storage and transport............................................ 3
7.0 Care and maintenance ........................................ 13
4.0 Description ............................................................. 4
4.1 Field of application ............................................... 4 8.0 Troubleshooting................................................... 13
4.2 Method of functioning........................................... 4 9.0 Troubleshooting table ........................................ 14
4.3 Technical data ...................................................... 5 10.0 Dismantlement of thrust actuator ................... 15
4.4 Dimensions .......................................................... 5
5.0 Installation ............................................................. 6
5.1 General installation data ...................................... 6
5.2 Manual operation ................................................. 8
5.3 Installation instructions for mounting to valves..... 9
5.3.1 Mounting for valve-lift up to 30 mm
(yoke version) ..................................................... 9
Rev. 0040501002 2608 englisch

Thrust actuator ARI-PREMIO Westfalia Separator
and repair.
These Operating Instructions comply with the requirements of EU Directives.
ATTENTION !
ATTENTION !
... Warning of dangerous voltage.
Exposed to injury!
Don’t touch the turning handwheel when the motor is running.
Exposed to injury!
Don’t put your hand into the up or downwards moving
appliance.
Danger when not observing the operating and installation

instructions!
Before installing, operating, maintenance or dismantling read
and observe the instructions.
Danger though voltage!

Before dismantling the hood, switch of the electrical source
and secure against turning on again.
Page 2 0040501002 2608

to property.

ATTENTION !
- Valve mountings such as drives, handwheels, hoods must not be used to take
external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
Non-compliance may lead to death, injury or damage to property due to
persons falling or parts being dropped.
See “4.3 Technical data” for weights.
- At -20° to +70°C dry, free from dirt.

- Do not unpack thrust drive or setting equipment assembly prior to installation.
- Protect against external force (impact, vibration etc.).
- Do not soil or damage type identification plate and wiring diagram on the controller.
0040501002 2608 Page 3

4.0 Description
4.1 Field of application
ARI-PREMIO linear thrust actuators are employed to actuate control or shut-off valves
requiring a nominal linear stroke distance of up to 80 mm and thrust from 2.2 kN to 15 kN.
The thrust actuators are set to the thrust forces specified in the technical data. If supplied
with the valve, the lift of the thrust actuator will be set to the stroke distance of the valve.
Selection of the proper actuator version in alignment with the corresponding fitting as well
as use of the thrust actuator in accordance with the specified technical data is the
responsibility of the systems engineer.
See data sheet for areas of application, application limits and potential.
Any use of the thrust actuator beyond the specified technical data or improper use of the
actuator is deemed to be not for the intended purpose.
The ambient conditions have to be conform to the actual electromagnetic compatibility
directives. Additional the compatibility to this directives has to be maintained in case of
expansion or other changing of the ambient conditions.
4.2 Method of functioning

The thrust actuator, fitted with a yoke, is mounted to the valve.
Transfer of force is effected via a coupling safeguarded against torsion.
The torsion safeguarding feature also serves as a lift indicator.
The lift settings can be read off on a lift dial attached to the yoke.
The electrical components are accommodated separately from the gearbox underneath a
sealed hood, thus being protected against operating and environmental effects.
Following removal of the hood, easy access is provided to the switchgear and indicating
feature.
The rotary motion of the motor is transmitted to the spindle nut by means of spur gear.
The drive spindle, which is safeguarded against torsion, screws its way into the spindle nut
and thus performs a pull or push motion depending on the sense of rotation.
In the final positions of the valve, the spindle nut is pressed against a set of springs so as to
produce closing force.
The motor is switched off by means of two load-dependent switches. The load-dependent
switches will also switch off the motor if foreign bodies have lodged themselves between
the valve seat and cone.
The load-dependent switches serve to protect the valve and thrust actuator against
damage.
Page 4 0040501002 2608

4.3 Technical data
Type ARI-PREMIO GEA Westfalia Separator 1,6 kN
Thrust force kN 1,6
Stroke distance max. mm 30
Duty classification acc. to EN 60034-1/
S3 80% 1200 c/h
A11
Control speed mm/sec. 0,25
Motor voltage 230V - 50Hz / 60Hz *
Power consumption VA 11,7
2 Stück, permanently wired switching capacity 10A,
Torque switch
250V~
Enclosure EN 60529 IP 65
Max. permissible ambient temperature -20 °C ... +70 °C
Handwheel Yes (rotating during operation)
Any. Exception: motor must not be suspended
Mounting position
downwards
Gear lubricant für Getriebe Klüber Isoflex Topas NB152
Weight kg 5,4
* Control speed and power consumption are 20% higher at frequency of 60 Hz
4.4 Dimensions
Clearance required for

removal of hood
ARI-PREMIO 1,6 kN
Stroke distance max. 30 mm
Fig. 1
0040501002 2608 Page 5

5.0 Installation
ATTENTION !
- Work on electrical systems or equipment must only be carried out by qualified
electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supervision of a
qualified electrician in compliance with regional electrical safety requirements
and regulations.
- Valve mountings such as drives, handwheels, hoods must not be used to take
external forces, e.g. they are not designed for use as climbing aids, or as
Non-compliance may lead to death, injury or damage to property due to
persons falling or parts being dropped.
- Actuator components which rotate or move during operation are coloured red.
Crushing and injury hazard!
5.1 General installation data

- In addition to general installation guidelines, the following points are required to be
observed:
- Planners / construction firms and operators are responsible for positioning and installing
the products.
ATTENTION !
- A voltage is induced in the thrust actuator motor. This induction voltage may be
higher than the operating voltage.
- For this reason relays and electronic load relays for thrust actuator control
require a protective circuit. The contacts of unprotected relays may stick after a
while.
- This may result in reversed directions of rotation or defective switch-off
Recommended safety circuit for relays and electronic load relays:

Connect a varistor or RC module parallel to each relay point.
Varistor S10K385 to S10K460
RC module 100 Ohm / 100nF
Where relay points and electronic load relays are particularly sensitive a coil should be
connected in series additionally to each relay point.
Recommended coil:
Toroidal coil 2mH / 2A
- Contactors of 16A and upwards do not need a safety circuit.
- Check thrust actuator for damage prior to fitting.
Damaged parts must be replaced by original spares.
- Existing operating instructions for valve.
- Complete valve with crossarm.
- Valve cone approximately in mid lift position - on no account supported inside a seat!
- Electrical installation in accordance with current regional regulations.
- Conductor cross-section selected to correspond to the given drive power and existing line
length.
Page 6 0040501002 2608

- Mains fuse rating max. 6A.
- Circuit breakers in the plant to cut off the mains supply to the actuator.
- Conformity of technical data on thrust actuator with field conditions.
- Mains voltage in accordance with data specified on rating plate of thrust actuator.
- Thrust actuator complete with yoke and coupling parts intended for mounting to the
corresponding valve.
- Ease of access to installation site.
- Adequate clearance space above the thrust actuator for removing the hood
(refer to point 4.4 Dimensions).
- Install where there is protection against high-energy heat radiation.
- The ambient temperature must be between -20°C and +70°C.

If installed outdoors, the thrust actuator must be provided with an additional cover to protect
against
- rain,
- direct insulation,
- dust.
In case of widely fluctuating ambient temperatures, high atmospheric humidity and
temperatures below the freezing point, your are recommended to install a heating resistor
to minimise condensation buildup in the actuator.
- Thrust actuator mountable in any position except in downward suspended position.
If installed with a horizontal connecting rod, the thrust actuator must be mounted so both
yoke legs are on top of one another in the vertical plane (see Fig. 2 ).
Correct Incorrect
Fig. 2
0040501002 2608 Page 7

5.2 Manual operation
ATTENTION !
- The manual operating device always rotates during motor-driven operation
(running indicator). Never activate manual operation while the motor is running.
Injury hazard!
- In the manual operating mode pay careful attention in the final positions that the
handwheel is only turned to the point where the torque switch trips (audible
click) as otherwise damage will be caused to the thrust actuator! Since the
handwheel always follows during motor-driven operation (running indication),
never operate by hand while the motor is running - potential injury hazards!
With the motor in the stationary state, the thrust actuator can be run in the retracted and
extended state with the manual operating device firmly meshed with the gear.
Proceed as follows:
- Turn manual operation device (pos. 50.130) by wrench or similar tool ...
... in clockwise direction --> extending spindle.
... in counter-clockwise direction --> retracting spindle.
retracting spindle extending spindle
Fig. 3
Page 8 0040501002 2608 (Rev.2)

5.3 Installation instructions for mounting to valves
5.3.1 Mounting for valve-lift up to 30 mm (yoke version)
turn
Hexagon nut Hexagon nut

Valve spindle Valve spindle
Fig. 4
To mount the thrust actuator to a valve having a nominal lift of up to 30mm, proceed
as follows:
- Screw coupling (pos. 50.27) out of torsion safety feature (pos. 50.32) of thrust
actuator (not illustrated).
- Position valve cone approximately in mid lift position.
Fig. A: - Turn flat hexagon nut if not present on valve spindle.
Fig. A-B: - Slip coupling (pos. 50.27) over valve spindle.
- Screw threaded bush (pos. 50.87) matching the valve onto the valve spindle in
accordance with setting dimension (Y) and lock with hexagon nut.
ATTENTION !
Setting dimension (Y) and fitting-projection (X) are measured with
inserted valve spindle. This means for
- 2-way valves at closed valve,
- 3-way valves with mixing plug at closed way B,
- 3-way valves with diverting plug at closed way A
After measuring put the valve plug back in the mid lift position!
- Setting dimension (Y) for fitting-projection (X) 60 and 83mm = 102mm.
Fig. C: - Place thrust actuator (pos. 50) on valve.
- Mount thrust actuator (pos. 50) on fitting with two T-head bolts (pos. 50.19), two
washers (pos. 50.20), two spring washers (pos. 50.21), two hexagon nuts
(pos. 50.22).
Fig. D/E: - Turn the hexagon nut (pos. 50.130) by a screw wrench and use it to move out
the thrust actuator until the driving spindle (pos. 50.30) comes to rest on the
threaded bush (pos. 50.87).
0040501002 2608 (Rev.2) Page 9

Fig. F: - Screw the coupling (pos. 50.27) firmly into the torsion safety feature
(pos. 50.32) and secure in place using grub screw M6 (pos. 50.35).
- Run valve to lowest position.
- Clip lift dial (pos. 50.23) onto yoke in such a way that top edge of torsion safety
feature is in alignment with tip of arrow mark on lift dial.
- Run valve to both final positions and check to ensure that these are safely
reached
- Carry out electrical connection (see point 5.4).
5.4 Electrical connection
Wire connections of the different valve types

3-way valve 3-way valve
Straight through valve with mixing plug with diverting plug
closed A-AB open AB-B open
open B-AB open AB-A open
Fig. 5
Page 10 0040501002 2608

5.4.1 Connection
ATTENTION !
- Work on electrical systems or equipment must only be carried out by qualified
electricians or by trained individuals under the guidance and supervision of a
qualified electrician in compliance with regional electrical requirement and
regulations.
- When connecting the thrust actuator the supply line must be disconnected from
the mains (not live) during connection work. It must be impossible to switch the
power on unintentionally while the mains are disconnected in this way. Failure
to comply may result in death, serious injury or substantial damage to property.
To connect the thrust actuator up to the electrical power supply, proceed as follows:
- Run the thrust actuator a few mm out of the lower final position applying the manual
operating device.
- Loosen hexagon screw in hood, carefully remove hood in upward direction.
- Remove blind plug fom the cable connection.
- Insert the connection line through this cable inlet until sufficient conductor length is
available up to the corresponding terminals; then tighten the cable connection until the
connecting cable is clamped in place inside it.
- Strip connecting cable approx. 1-1.5 cm above cable inlet.
- Strip the individual conductors approx. 5mm away from the end and fit with conductor end
sleeves.
- Connect protective conductor of connecting cable up to protective conductor terminal of
thrust actuator.
- Connect neutral N/MP conductor of connecting cable up to terminal 1/N of thrust-actuator
terminal strip.
- Connect pulse line for move-out connecting rod up to terminal 11 of thrust-actuator
terminal strip.
- Connect pulse line for move-in connecting rod up to terminal 14 of thrust-actuator terminal
strip.
- Place hood on carefully from above and mount firmly onto thrust actuator with hexagon
screw and rubber gasket.
- Connect supply line to mains and run thrust actuator to each of the final positions so as to
check whether the final-position travel switches effect switching off, also checking to see
whether the direction of movement on the thrust actuator corresponds to the desired
direction.
- If the directions of movement are contrary to those desired, the pulse lines governing the
move-in and move-out connecting rod will need to be exchanged.
0040501002 2608 Page 11

5.5 Settings
ATTENTION !
- The thrust actuator may only be operated for a short time without the hood for
unavoidable setting operations to the potentiometers, travel switches and the
electrical options. While these operations are in progress, the thrust actuator
has hazardous, live, uninsulated parts exposed as well as moving and rotating
parts.
- Improper execution of the setting operations or lack of care may cause death,
grievous bodily injury or substantial property damage.
- Operation of the thrust actuator without the hood for any purpose other than
that described above is strictly prohibited.
- Operation of the actutor without hood is forbidden!
The internal parts of the actuator are under voltage. The parts are rotating and
moving. Failure to comply may result in death, serious injury or substantial
damage to property.
5.5.1 Torque and travel switches

The thrust actuators are equipped with a load-dependent travel switch for the extending
direction (S1) and a load-dependent travel switch for the retracting direction.
The load-dependent travel switches (S1, S2) are permanent wired and switches off the
motor as soon as the factory-set thrust force is attained.
ATTENTION !
- The settings of the load-dependent travel switches must on no account
whatsoever be changed!
6.0 Putting the actuator into operation

ATTENTION !
- Actuator components which rotate or move during operation are coloured red.
Crushing or injury hazard!
- all works has been completed!
- Regional safety instructions must be observed as a matter of policy.
- hood of thrust actuator assembled.
When placing into service proceed as follows:
- Using the handwheel, run the thrust actuator to approximately mid lift position.
- Apply brief pulses to the thrust actuator for each direction of movement and check
whether the directions of movement correspond to those desired. If this is not the case,
the pulse lines governing the retracting and extending action must be exchanged on the
thrust actuator.
- Run thrust actuator to the final position in each direction of movement and check whether
it switches off automatically and whether all externally moving parts are able to move
freely.
- If failing to function properly, check all installation and setting work previously carried out,
correcting if necessary, and afterwards place into service once again.
Page 12 0040501002 2608
The thrust actuator requires very little maintenance. Accordingly maintenance in specified
intervals is not necessary.
Depending on the conditions governing use, the maintenance and maintenance-intervals
have to be defined by the operator.
The thrust actuator must not be cleaned with high-pressure equipment or aggressive
solvents or detergents injurious to health or highly inflammable.
During and after cleaning, an inspection should be carried out of the sealing points on the
thrust actuator.
If there is any sign of lubricant escaping or dirt having accumulated, the sealing elements
must be repaired.
8.0 Troubleshooting
Instructions.
ATTENTION !
-

0040501002 2608 Page 13

ATTENTION !
- read point 10.0 and 11.0 prior to dismantling and repair work!
- read point 6.0 before restarting the plant !
Fault Possible Causes Remedy

Thrust actuator fails to move Power failure Ascertain and eliminate cause
Fuse has blown Replace fuse
Thrust actuator not properly Rectify connection on thrust
connected actuator in accordance with wiring
diagram
Short circuit due to: Ascertain exact cause,
- moisture - Dry the thrust actuator and
eliminate leakage
- wrong connection - Rectify connection on thrust
actuator in accordance with
wiring diagram
- motor has burned out - Check whether the mains voltage
agrees with the voltage specified
on the rating plate. Have motor
changed.
Connector contacts not plugged in/ Insert connector firmly in jack strip
not properly plugged into jack strip thus affected
Thrust actuator alternates Motor operating capacitor Have motor operating capacitor
between clockwise and defective replaced
counter-clockwise rotation
Thrust actuator fails to run to Load-dependent travel switches Remove thrust actuator and send
final positions and also out of to factory for repair
produces chatter
/ defective
Voltage drop due to excessively Lay connecting cables in
long connecting cables or accordance with requisite output
inadequate conductor cross-
section
Mains fluctuations beyond Arrange for "clean" mains system
permissible tolerance travels within requisite tolerances
System pressure too high Reduce system pressure
Periodic failure on thrust Loose connection on feedline Tighten connections on terminal
actuator strips
Page 14 0040501002 2608

10.0 Dismantlement of thrust actuator
ATTENTION !
- The supply line for connecting up the thrust actuator must be in the dead state
i.e. disconnected while dismantlement work is being carried out. After being
disconnected, the mains power must be prevented from being switched back
on again accidentally.
- The system must be run down (depressurised state) as the valve cone is not
held without the thrust actuator and would thus be conducted by the system
pressure.
- Valve plug approximately in mid lift position - on no account supported inside a
seat!
To dismantle the thrust actuator proceed as follows:
- Loosen hexagon nut on the hood, carefully remove hood.
- Disconnect all cables led into thrust actuator from outside and remove from thrust
actuator.
- Place hood on carefully from above and fix in place with hexagon nut.
- Loosen grub screw inside torsion safety feature; screw coupling out of torsion safety
feature.
- Loosen clamping bolts connecting the thrust actuator to the fitting.
- Remove thrust actuator from valve.
Westfalia Separator
Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Customer Support Center
Am Neuländer Gewerbepark 6
21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Phone +49 40 58 96 500

Fax +48 40 73 80 585
Mail to: info@gea-westfalia.de
0040501002 2608 Page 15

Page 16 0040501002 2608

Operating 1. Safety gauge, it must be protected against being blocked
instructions EN WARNING!
by debris and dirt. With safety pressure gauges
(see k) there must be a free space of > 15 mm
Before installation, commissioning and
behind the blow-out back.
operation, ensure that the appropriate
After installation, open the vent valve (if available)
Pressure gauges pressure gauge has been selected in
or set from CLOSE to OPEN. With
terms of measuring range, design and
models 4 and 7, do not open the
suitable wetted material (corrosion) for the specific
flange mounting screws. The version
measuring conditions. In order to guarantee the
of the vent valve depends on the
measurement accuracy and long-term stability
Examples: model and can deviate from the above illustration!
specified, the corresponding load limits must be
observed. Requirements for the installation point
Only qualified persons authorised by the plant If the line to the measuring instrument is not
manager are permitted to install, maintain and adequately stable, a measuring instrument holder
service the pressure gauges. should be used for fastening (and possibly via a
Model 732.14, flexible capillary). If vibrations cannot be avoided
For hazardous media such as oxygen, acetylene,
overpressure safety by means of suitable installation, instruments
flammable or toxic gases or liquids, and refrigera-
up to 400 bar with liquid filling should be used. The instruments
tion plants, compressors, etc., in addition to all
Model 432.56, should be protected against coarse dirt and wide
standard regulations, the appropriate existing
overpressure safety fluctuations in ambient temperature.
codes or regulations must also be followed.
up to 100 bar Note for model 732.14, for front bezel mounting:
From pressure gauges which do not correspond The front bezel serves as centring and as the
Model 213.40 to a safety version per EN 837 highly pressurised aperture in the mounting panel. Securing and thus
media might leak out through the possibly burst- the weight-bearing must be made via the pressure
ing window in case of a component failure. For connection piping.
gaseous media and working pressures > 25 bar a
pressure gauge with safety version S3 is recom- 3. Permissible ambient and operating
mended per EN 837-2. temperatures
After an external fire, pressure media can leak out, When mounting the pressure gauge it must be
Notes per current pressure equipment directive particularly at soft solder joints. All instruments ensured that, taking into consideration the influ-
The pressure gauges are defined as “pressure must be checked and, if necessary, replaced ence of convection and heat radiation, no deviation
accessories” before recommissioning the plant. above or below the permissible temperature limits
The volume of the “pressure-bearing housings” of can occur. Observe the influence of temperature
Non-observance of the respective regulations on the indication accuracy!
WIKA pressure gauges is < 0.1 L
can cause serious injuries and/or damage to the
The pressure gauges carry CE marking for fluid
equipment. 4. Storage
group 1 per annex II, diagram 1 when their permis-
sible working pressure is > 200 bar 2. Mechanical connection To protect the pressure gauges from mechanical
damage keep them in the original packaging until
Instruments that do not carry the mark are manufactured In accordance with the general technical regula- installation.
per article 4, paragraph 3 “sound engineering practice”. tions for pressure gauges (e.g. EN 837-2). When Protect the measuring instruments from humidity
screwing the instruments in, the force required to and dust.
Applicable standards (depending on model) do this must not be applied through the case, but Storage temperature range: -40 ... +70 °C
EN 837-1 Bourdon tube pressure gauges, dimensions, only through the spanner flats provided for this Storage temperature range model
metrology, requirements and testing purpose, and using a suitable tool. PG23LT: -70 ... +70 °C
EN 837-2 Selection and installation recommendations For parallel threads, use flat gaskets, lens-type
for pressure gauges sealing rings or WIKA profile sealings at the 5. Maintenance and repairs
EN 837-3 Diaphragm and capsule pressure gauges, The pressure gauges are maintenance-free.
dimensions, metrology, requirements and Regular checks should be carried out to ensure
testing Installation with the measurement accuracy. Checks or recalibra-
Specifications: See data sheet at www.wika.de open-ended tions must only be carried out by qualified skilled
spanner personnel with the appropriate equipment. When
Subject to technical modifications. dismounting, close the vent valve (if available).
© WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG 2009 Sealing of the pressure gauge connections
WARNING! Residual media in
Sealing in dismounted pressure gauges can
Spanner flats the thread result in a risk to persons, the environ-
 ment and equipment. Take sufficient
Sealing face  precautionary measures.
sealing face . With tapered threads (e.g. NPT
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG threads), sealing is made in the threads  using
Alexander-Wiegand-Straße 30 additional sealing materials, e.g. PTFE tape
2408976.06 12/2016
63911 Klingenberg/Germany (EN 837-2).

Tel. +49 9372 132-0 The torque depends on the sealing used. In order
Fax +49 9372 132-406 to orientate the measuring instrument so that it
info@wika.de can be read as well as possible, a connection with
www.wika.de clamp socket or union nut should be used.
When a blow-out device is fitted to a pressure
Pressure
Bourdon tube pressure gauge, copper alloy

Stainless steel case, liquid filling, NS 50, 63 and 100
Model 213.53
WIKA data sheet PM 02.12
for further approvals see

page 3
Applications
■■ For measuring points with high dynamic pressure loads
and vibrations
■■ For gaseous and liquid media that are not highly viscous
or crystallising and will not attack copper alloy parts
■■ Hydraulics
■■ Compressors, shipbuilding
Special features
■■ Vibration and shock-resistant
■■ Especially robust design
■■ Type approval for the shipbuilding industry
■■ Scale ranges up to 0 ... 1,000 bar
Bourdon tube pressure gauge, model 213.53.100,

lower mount
Description
The liquid-filled model 213.53 Bourdon tube pressure gauge The cases of the model 213.53 are available in nominal sizes
is constructed with a case from stainless steel and wetted of 50, 63 and 100 mm and fulfil IP65 ingress protection. With
parts from copper alloy. an accuracy of up to class 1.0, this pressure gauge is suitab-
le for a wide range of applications in industry.
The model 213.53 meets the requirements of the internati-
onal industry standard EN 837-1 for Bourdon tube pressure For mounting in control panels, the pressure gauges with a
gauges. back mount process connection can be fitted with a mounting
flange or with a triangular bezel and mounting bracket.
Due to the liquid filling in the case, the pressure element and
movement are efficiently damped. Therefore, these instru-
ments are particularly suited to measuring points with high
dynamic loads, such as fast load cycles or vibrations.
WIKA data sheet PM 02.12 ∙ 07/2019 Page 1 of 4
Data sheets showing similar products:

Stainless steel case, liquid filling, NS 40, 80 and 100; model 113.53; see data sheet PM 01.08
Specifications Dial
NS 50, 63: Plastic ABS, white, with pointer stop pin
Design NS 100: Aluminium, white, black lettering
EN 837-1
Pointer
Nominal size in mm NS 50, 63: Plastic, black
50, 63, 100 NS 100: Aluminium, black
Accuracy class Case

NS 50, 63: 1.6 Stainless steel, natural finish
NS 100: 1.0 Sealing towards process connection with O-ring
With all scale ranges, the filling plug can be vented for inter-
Scale ranges nal pressure compensation.
NS 50: 0 ... 1 to 0 ... 1,000 bar
NS 63, 100: 0 ... 0.6 to 0 ... 1,000 bar Position of blow-out device
NS 50: Case back, at 12 o‘clock
Pressure limitation NS 63, 100: Case circumference, at 12 o‘clock
NS 50, 63: Steady: 3/4 x full scale value
Fluctuating: 2/3 x full scale value Window
Short time: Full scale value Plastic, crystal-clear
NS 100: Steady: Full scale value
Fluctuating: 0.9 x full scale value Ring
Short time: 1.3 x full scale value Crimped triangular bezel, stainless steel, glossy finish
Permissible temperature Filling liquid

Ambient: -20 … +60 °C Glycerine
Medium: +60 °C maximum
Temperature effect Options

When the temperature of the measuring system deviates
from the reference temperature (+20 °C): max. ±0.4 %/10 K ■■ Other process connection
of the span ■■ Sealings (model 910.17, see data sheet AC 09.08)
■■ Measuring system and movement from stainless steel
Ingress protection per IEC/EN 60529 (model 233.53)
IP65 ■■ NS 100: Zero point adjustment (in front)
■■ Increased medium temperature with special soft solder
Process connection - NS 50, 63: 100 °C
Copper alloy - NS 100: 150 °C
Lower mount or back mount ■■ Extended ambient temperature range -40 ... +60 °C with
NS 50, 63: G ¼ B (male), SW 14 silicone oil filling
NS 100: G ½ B (male), SW 22 ■■ Panel mounting flange, stainless steel, for back mount
connection
Pressure element ■■ Surface mounting flange, stainless steel (only NS 63, 100)
NS 50: ■■ Mounting clamp, for back mount
Copper alloy, C-type or helical type
NS 63:
≤ 400 bar: Copper alloy, C-type or helical type
> 400 bar: ≥ 400 bar: Stainless steel 316L, helical type
NS 100:
< 100 bar: Copper alloy, C-type
≥ 100 bar: Stainless steel 316L, helical type
Movement
Copper alloy

Approvals
Logo Description Country
EU declaration of conformity European Union
Pressure equipment directive
PS > 200 bar, module A, pressure accessory
GOST (option) Russia
Metrology, measurement technology
KazInMetr (option) Kazakhstan
- MTSCHS (option) Kazakhstan
Permission for commissioning
BelGIM (option) Belarus
UkrSEPRO (option) Ukraine
Uzstandard (option) Uzbekistan
- CPA China
GL International
Ships, shipbuilding (e.g. offshore)
- CRN Canada
Safety (e.g. electr. safety, overpressure, ...)
Certificates (option)
■■ 2.2 test report per EN 10204 (e.g. state-of-the-art
manufacturing, material proof, indication accuracy)
■■ 3.1 inspection certificate per EN 10204 (e.g. indication
accuracy)
Approvals and certificates, see website

Dimensions in mm
Standard version
Lower mount (radial)
1224557.01
NS 50, 63, centre back mount NS 100, lower back mount
31059155.01
11081163.01
NS Dimensions in mm Weight in kg
a b ±0.5 b2 ±0.5 D1 D2 e f G h ±1 SW
50 12 30 55 55 50 5.5 - G¼B 48 14 0.15
63 13 32 56 68 62 6.5 - G¼B 54 14 0.21
100 15.5 48 81.5 107 100 8 30 G½B 87 22 0.80
Process connection per EN 837-1 / 7.3
Ordering information
Model / Nominal size / Scale range / Process connection / Connection location / Options
© 09/2008 WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG, all rights reserved.
The specifications given in this document represent the state of engineering at the time of publishing.
We reserve the right to make modifications to the specifications and materials.
07/2019 EN
WIKA Alexander Wiegand SE & Co. KG

Alexander-Wiegand-Straße 30
63911 Klingenberg/Germany
Tel. +49 9372 132-0
Fax +49 9372 132-406
info@wika.de
www.wika.de
NAE 8256
Engine Pressure
Transmitter
Swiss based Trafag is a leading international supplier of high quality
sensors and monitoring instruments for measurement of pressure
and temperature. The engine and shipbuilding pressure transmitter
NAE 8256 features the extremely robust and stable thin-film-on-steel
sensor element. The NAE 8256 is the smallest pressure transmitter of
its kind with ship approvals. The wide temperature range from -40°C
up to +125°C and triple overpressure safety makes it the first choice
in rough environments such as marine applications.
04/2019
Applications Features
NN Shipbuilding NN Measuring accuracy 0.3 %, 0.5 %
NN Engine manufacturing NN Completely welded steel sensor system without additional
Data sheet H72305i

NN Hydraulics seals
NN Smallest design
NN High resistance to over pressure
NN Excellent long-term stability
Subject to change
Technical Data
Measuring principle Thin film on steel Media temperature –40°C ... +125°C
Measuring range 0 ... 6 to 0 ... 600 bar Ambient temperature –40°C ... +125°C
0 ... 100 to 0 ... 7500 psi
Output signal 4 ... 20 mA Approval / conformity ABS, BV, DNV-GL, KRS, LRS, NKK, RINA,
RMRS
Accuracy @ 25°C typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.5 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.3 % FS typ.
Trafag sensors & controls Industriestrasse 11 Tel. +41 44 922 32 32 www.trafag.com

Switzerland 8608 Bubikon Fax +41 44 922 32 33 trafag@trafag.com
NAE 8256
Ordering information/type code
8256 . XX XX XX XX XX XX
Measuring Pressure
Over Burst
Pressure
Over Burst
measurement measurement
range 1) pressure pressure pressure pressure
range range
[bar] [bar] [psi] [psi]
[bar] [psi]
0 ... 6 5) 6) 18 100 77 0 ... 100 5) 6) 300 1450 G7
0 ... 10 30 200 78 0 ... 150 450 2500 G8
0 ... 16 48 200 79 0 ... 200 600 2500 GA
0 ... 25 75 300 80 0 ... 250 750 2500 G9
0 ... 40 120 300 81 0 ... 300 900 4000 HA
0 ... 60 180 400 82 0 ... 400 1200 4000 H0
0 ... 100 300 500 83 0 ... 500 1200 4000 H1
0 ... 160 480 750 85 0 ... 1000 3000 5000 H2
0 ... 250 750 1000 74 0 ... 1500 4500 7000 H3
0 ... 400 1000 2000 84 0 ... 2000 6000 10000 H5
0 ... 600 1500 2500 86 0 ... 3000 9000 14500 G4
0 ... 5000 12500 21750 H4
0 ... 7500 18750 29000 H6
Sensor Relative pressure, accuracy: 0.5 % 25

Relative pressure, accuracy: 0.3 % 23
Pressure G1/4" male, seal: DIN 3869 (accessories 61/63/83) 17

connection G1/4" male (Manometer) EN 837 6) 53
1/4" NPT male 30
M10x1 male 32
Electrical Male electrical plug, industrial standard, contact distance 9.4 mm, Mat. PA 01
connection Male electrical plug M12x1, 4-pole, Mat. PA, IEC 61076-2-101 32
Male electrical plug M12x1, 5-pole, Mat. PA, IEC 61076-2-101 35
Output Signal output Load resistance I (supply) U (supply)

signal 4 ... 20 mA s See graphic 24 (9 ... 32) VDC 19
Accessories Female electrical plug M12x1, 5-pole 2) 33

Female electrical connector industrial standard 3) 34
Pressure peak damping element ø 0.4 mm 44
Seal FPM, -18°C ... +125°C 4) 61
Seal EPDM, -40°C ... +125°C 4) 63
Seal NBR, -25°C ... +100°C 4) 83
Special electrical connection: Pin 2 +, Pin 3 ground, Pin 4 -
90
(only for male electrical plug 01, industrial standard)
Special electrical connection: Pin 1 +, Pin 2 -, Pin 4 ground
E1
(only for output signal 19 and male electrical plug 32, M12x1, 4-pole)
1)
Customized pressure ranges upon request
2)
For electrical connections 32 and 35
3)
For electrical connection 01
4)
Only with pressure connection 17 (G1/4")
5)
Only with sensor 23 (accuracy 0.3 %)
6)
Only with ship approval DNV-GL
H72305i
page 2/6
NAE 8256
Standard products (extra short lead time)
Product No. Type Code Pressure range Over pressure Supply Accuracy @ 25°C
[bar] max. [VDC] typ.
[bar] [%]
NAE6.0A 8256 77 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 6 18 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE10.0A 8256 78 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 10 30 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE16.0A 8256 79 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 16 48 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE25.0A 8256 80 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 25 75 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE40.0A 8256 81 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 40 120 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE100.0A 8256 83 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 100 300 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE250.0A 8256 74 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 250 750 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE400.0A 8256 84 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 400 1000 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
NAE600.0A 8256 86 2317 32 0000 0000 19 33 44 61 0 ... 600 1500 9 ... 32 ± 0.3
H72305i
page 3/6
NAE 8256
Specifications
Accuracy TEB typ. @ -25 ... +85°C 0.5 %: ± 1.75 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 1.0 % FS typ.
Accuracy @ 25°C typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.5 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.3 % FS typ.
NLH @ 25°C (BSL) typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.2 % FS typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.2 % FS typ.
TC zero point and span typ. 0.5 %: ± 0.03 % FS/K typ.
0.3 %: ± 0.01 % FS/K typ.
Long term stability 1 year typ. ± 0.1 % FS typ.
Electrical Data Output / supply voltage 4 ... 20 mA: 24 (9...32) VDC
Rise time Typ. 1 ms / 10 ... 90 % nominal pressure
Switch-on-delay 100 ms
Inverse-polarity protection, short-circuit strength 4 ... 20 mA: to Usupply = 32 V
@ 25°C during 5 min.
Environmental conditions Media temperature –40°C ... +125°C
Ambient temperature –40°C ... +125°C
Protection 1)
IP65, IP67
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30
(damp heat cyclic, 100 % RH @ +55°C)
Vibration 15 g RMS (20...2000 Hz)
25 g sin (80...2000 Hz), 1 oct./min, (1x @ 25°C)
Shock 50 g / 11 ms
EMC Protection Emission EN/IEC 61000-6-3
Immunity EN/IEC 61000-6-2
Mechanical Data Sensor (wetted parts) 1.4542 (AISI630)
Pressure connection (wetted parts) 1.4542 (AISI630)
Housing 1.4301 (AISI304)
Sealing FPM/NBR/EPDM
Male electrical plug See ordering information
Weight ~ 50 g
Mounting torque 25 Nm
1)
See electrical connection
Measuring accuracy 0.5 % Measuring accuracy 0.3 %

7
6
5
4 4
3 3
Accuracy (%)
Accuracy (%)
2 2
1 1
0 0
-1 -1
-2 -2
-3 -3
-4 -4
-5
-6 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
-7 Temp. (°C)
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 max. typ. TEB (-25...+85)
Temp. (°C)
max. typ. TEB (-25...+85)
H72305i
page 4/6
NAE 8256
Dimensions
27.5 7 28 10.2
3 2
4
Ø 18.8
3
M12x1
Ø 18.8
9.4
2 1
4
1
8256.XX.XXXX.01.XX.XX 8256.XX.XXXX.32.XX.XX
28 10.2
5 3 2
4 M12x1
1 Ø 18.8
8256.XX.XXXX.35.XX.XX
21 24 26
12 15 17
EN837
G1/4"
Ø 9.5
1/4“ NPT
Ø5
G1/4"
2
Seal
SW19
4
Ø 21
SW19
SW19
Ø 21
DIN 3869
Ø21
8256.XX.XX17.XX.XX.XX 8256.XX.XX53.XX.XX.XX 8256.XX.XX30.XX.XX.XX
20.1
54 ... 60 max. 5 mm 26
DIN EN ISO 6149-2
9.5
~Ø20
M10x1
M3
27
SW19
Ø 21
8256.XX.XX32.XX.XX.XX 8256.XX.XXXX.XX.XX.33 8256.XX.XXXX.XX.XX.34
H72305i
page 5/6
NAE 8256
Protection / electrical connection
IP65*) IP67*)
Industrial standard M12x1
Contact distance 9.4 mm 4-pôle 5-pôle
01 32 35
3 3 2
2 5
3
2 1
4 4 4
1 1
90 E1
Output signal
2 2 1 1 4
1 4 3 2 1
4 3 4 4 5
8256.xx.xxxx.xx.19
*) Provided female connector is mounted according to instructions
4...20mA: min./max resistor vs. supply voltage @ Pmax = 100%

1200
1000 ........ Rmax

Rmin 100°C
Rmin 125°C
Customer Load Resistor (Ohm)
800
600
400
200
...
0 ....
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Customer Supply Voltage (V)
Additional information
Documents Data sheet www.trafag.com/H72305
Instructions www.trafag.com/H73303
Flyer www.trafag.com/H70684
H72305i
page 6/6
SIKA Thermometers
Version for heating - air conditioning - ventilation (HVAC)
Quality by Tradition
SIKA thermometers for heating and air conditioning applications

As their name implies, industrial thermometers have their
origin in industrial applications. They found their way
early on into heating and later air conditioning technology
and today it is hard to imagine these areas without them.
The advantages of a glass thermometer over other
thermometers which are commonly found in heating
technology, such as dial thermometers or electronic
versions, are obvious: no mechanically moving parts,
no material fatigue, no electrical energy requirement,
but a high level of accuracy and a very long service life.
In other words, as long as a glass thermometer is not
mechanically destroyed, it remains accurate for the
duration of its service life.
SIKA, which both developed and gave its name to this
type of thermometer, has been producing the SIKA
thermometer for over 70 years.The SIKA thermometer is
characterised by quality and durability and ultimately offers
a price-performance ratio that has yet to meet its match.
Industrial thermometers specifically for heating and air

conditioning applications are available in two separate
versions:
With aluminium casing
Industrial thermometers with gold-coloured aluminium
casing make up the standard range of glass thermometers
for heating and air conditioning. There are three
different casing sizes available, each in a straight
or 90° angle version, with eight different temperature
ranges up to 200 °C and immersion tube lengths up to
250 mm. All thermometers have a brass immersion tube
with G ½ connection thread.
If thermometers with other measuring ranges, other
immersion tube materials or connection types and threads
are required, please refer to our industrial versions in the
„Industrial thermometers for industrial applications“ data
sheet.
With polyamide casing
Thermometers with black polyamide casing complete the
established range of glass thermometers for heating and
air conditioning applications. The plastic versions are par-
ticularly suited to price-critical large quantity applications
in the lower temperature range (measuring range up to
200 °C), at which ambient temperatures of 160 °C are
not exceeded. A further area of use for these versions are
refrigeration applications, since thanks to its smaller heat
dissipation, the polyamide casing prevents the formation
of condensation.
-2-
Details of Construction
Casing Thermometric liquid

Aluminium, v-shaped, painted in a gold colour, (types In the standard version up to 200 °C blue wetting
271 HBZ to 175 WBZ). Alternatively, versions with plastic liquid („Fü“).
casing top section made from polyamide PA6,
Immersion tube
black-coloured, are available (types 471 B to 475 B).
The numbers of the measuring range are printed on the Standard version made from brass, type B with
right side and are long-lasting. Connection of casing and connection thread G ½. The diameter of this
immersion tube through grooved adapter piece and immersion tube is 10 mm, with a wall thickness of 1 mm.
locking screw. Advantage: When mounting the Scale intervals and error limits
thermometer, it is not necessary to turn the casing.
SIKA thermometers fulfil the requirements of
Glass Inserts (Capillaries) DIN 16195 „Requirements and testing of industrial
Capillary tube of solid glass, bar-shaped, prismatic, glass thermometers“. Scale intervals and error limits are
diameter approx. 6 to 8 mm, with white background for defined in relation to the casing size and the
blue fluid column. Scale is deeply burnt in black, thus measuring range. For example, a 291 HBZ thermometer,
being absolutely resistant. The main graduations, which typical for heating applications, with a temperature
correspond with the printing on the casing, are especially range of 0 to 120 °C, has a scale interval of 2 °C and an
clearly outlined. error limit of 1 °C.
-3-
Thermometers with aluminium casing
Painted in a gold colour - max. ambient temperature 160 °C
Order-Example 271 8 35 1 1 063 2 1

Thermometer type
Nominal size 200
gold-coloured, straight 271
gold-coloured, angle 90° 272
Nominal size 150

Nominal size 110

Immersion tube type
Straight HBZ = 8
Angle 90° WBZ = 4
Measuring range
-30...50 °C = 35
-10...50 °C = 04
0...30 °C = 83
0...60 °C = 06
0...100 °C = 10
0...120 °C = 12
0...160 °C = 16
0...200 °C = 20
Scale
Celsius (°C) 1
Filling
Standard blue fluid for measuring ranges up to 200 °C Fü = 1
Immersion tube length
l1 in mm
63 = 63
100 = 100
160 = 160
250 = 250
Fixed brass external thread
(other threads on request) G ½ / SW 27 = 2
Immersion tube material
Brass (hexagon CW614N / tube CW702R or CW508L), brazed, or
up to immersion tube length I1 = 63, G ½ from CW614N.
Solid material possible at our discretion. 1
Steel (hexagon 1.0718 / tube 1.0308, welded in) 2
Stainless steel 1.4571 (hexagon and tube) 3
* Dimensions in accordance with DIN 16181-16190, accuracy in accordance with DIN 16195
-4-
Dimensions
-5-
Thermometers with polyamide casing
Polyamide PA 6, black-coloured, max. ambient temperature 160 °C
Order-Example 471 2 35 1 1 063 2 1

Thermometer type
Nominal size 200
black, straight 471
black, angle 90° 472
Nominal size 150

black, straight 491
Nominal size 110

black, straight 474
Immersion tube type
Straight + Angle 90° B= 2
Measuring range
-30...50 °C = 35
-10...50 °C = 04
0...60 °C = 06
0...100 °C = 10
0...120 °C = 12
0...160 °C = 16
0...200 °C = 20
Scale
Celsius (°C) 1
Filling
Standard blue fluid for measuring ranges up to 200 °C Fü = 1
Immersion tube length
l1 in mm
63 = 63
100 = 100
160 = 160
250 = 250
Fixed brass external thread
(other threads on request) G ½ / SW 27 = 2
Immersion tube material
Brass (hexagon CW614N / tube CW702R or CW508L), brazed, or
up to immersion tube length I1 = 63, G ½ from CW614N.
Solid material possible at our discretion. 1
Steel (hexagon 1.0718 / tube 1.0308, welded in) 2
Stainless steel 1.4571 (hexagon and tube) 3
* Dimensions in accordance with DIN 16181-16190, accuracy in accordance with DIN 16195
-6-
Dimensions
-7-
Our Production and Sales Range
®
Flow Sensors without moving Parts Turbine Flow Sensors Flow Switches
Pressure Gauges and Pressure Sensors Industrial Thermometers Electronic Digital Thermometers, Dial Thermometers
Measuring Instruments Temperature Sensors Calibrators, DKD-Laboratory
Your competent partner

for measurement and control
...measurement...control ...calibration
Phone: 0700 CALL SIKA
Phone: +49 5605 803-0
Fax: +49 5605 803-54
E-Mail: info@sika.net
Internet: http://www.sika.net
Struthweg 7-9, 34260 Kaufungen
P. O. Box 11 13, 34254 Kaufungen
Germany SIKA_Thermometer_HKL_e 09/2011
Inductive sensor NJ5-11-N-G
Dimensions
M14x1
Ø 11
14
31
3
19
0102
Model Number
NJ5-11-N-G
Features
• Comfort series
• 5 mm not embeddable
Technical Data
• Usable up to SIL2 acc. to IEC 61508
General specifications
Switching element function NAMUR, NC
Connection Rated operating distance sn 5 mm
Installation not embeddable
Output polarity NAMUR
Assured operating distance sa 0 ... 4.05 mm
BN Reduction factor rAl 0.4
L+
Reduction factor rCu 0.3
Reduction factor r304 0.85
BU Nominal ratings
L- Nominal voltage Uo 8V
Switching frequency f 0 ... 3000 Hz
Hysteresis H typ. 5 %
Current consumption
Measuring plate not detected ≥ 3 mA
Measuring plate detected ≤ 1 mA
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ... 100 °C (-13 ... 212 °F)
Mechanical specifications
Connection type cable PVC , 2 m
Core cross-section 0.34 mm2
Housing material Stainless steel 1.4305 / AISI 303
Sensing face PVDF
Protection degree IP68
General information
Use in the hazardous area see instruction manuals
Category 2G; 1D
Compliance with standards and directives
Standard conformity
NAMUR EN 60947-5-6:2000
Standards EN 60947-5-2:2007
IEC 60947-5-2:2007
Approvals and certificates
UL approval cULus Listed, General Purpose
Date of issue: 2012-02-09 112726_eng.xml
CSA approval cCSAus Listed, General Purpose

Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47
Subject to modifications without notice Copyright Pepperl+Fuchs

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
www.pepperl-fuchs.com
USA: +1 330 486 0001
fa-info@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
fa-info@pepperl-fuchs.com
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
fa-info@sg.pepperl-fuchs.com
1
ATEX 2G
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 2G for use in hazardous areas with gas, vapour and mist
Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity EN 60079-0:2006, EN 60079-11:2007
Ignition protection "Intrinsic safety"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 2G Ex ia IIC T6
EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 00 ATEX 2048 X

Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual. The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to
be observed. The special conditions must be adhered to!
Directive 94/9/EG and hence also EC-Type Examination Certificates apply in gene-
ral only to the use of electrical apparatus under atmospheric conditions.
The use in ambient temperatures of > 60 °C was tested with regard to hot surfaces
by the mentioned certification authority.
If the equipment is not used under atmospheric conditions, a reduction of the per-
missible minimum ignition energies may have to be taken into consideration.
Highest permissible ambient temperature The temperature ranges, according to temperature class, are given in the EC-Type
Examination Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed. The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appro-
priate related apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Protection from mechanical danger When used in the temperature range below -20 °C the sensor should be protected
from knocks by the provision of an additional housing.
Electrostatic charging Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

2 Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
ATEX 1D
Instruction Manual electrical apparatus for hazardous areas
Device category 1D for use in hazardous areas with combustible dust

Directive conformity 94/9/EG
Standard conformity IEC 61241-11:2002: draft; prEN61241-0:2002
type of protection intrinsic safety "iD"
Use is restricted to the following stated conditions
CE symbol 0102
Ex-identification ¬ II 1D Ex iaD 20 T 108 °C (226.4 °F)

The Ex-relevant identification may also be printed on the accompanying adhesive
label.
EC-Type Examination Certificate ZELM 03 ATEX 0128 X
Appropriate type NJ 5-11-N...
Effective internal capacitance Ci ≤ 45 nF ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
Effective internal inductance Li ≤ 50 µH ; a cable length of 10 m is considered.
General The apparatus has to be operated according to the appropriate data in the data
sheet and in this instruction manual.
The EC-Type Examination Certificate has to be observed.
The special conditions must be adhered to!
Maximum housing surface temperature The maximum surface temperature of the housing is given in the EC-Type Exami-
nation Certificate.
Installation, Comissioning Laws and/or regulations and standards governing the use or intended usage goal
must be observed.
The intrinsic safety is only assured in connection with an appropriate related
apparatus and according to the proof of intrinsic safety.
The associated apparatus must satisfy at least the requirements of category ia IIB
or iaD. Because of the possibility of the danger of ignition, which can arise due to
faults and/or transient currents in the equipotential bonding system, galvanic isola-
tion in the power supply and signal circuits is preferable. Associated apparatus wit-
hout electrical isolation must only be used if the appropriate requirements of IEC
60079-14 are met.
The intrinsically safe circuit has to be protected against influences due to lightning.
When used in the isolating wall between Zone 20 and Zone 21 or Zone 21 und
Zone 22 the sensor must not be exposed to any mechanical danger and must be
sealed in such a way, that the protective function of the isolating wall is not
impaired. The applicable directives and standards must be observed.
If the Ex-relevant identification is exclusively printed on the included adhesive label,
this must be applied in the direct vicinity of the sensor! The surface to which the
label is to applied must be clean and free from grease! The applied adhesive label
must be durable adlegible to protect it against the possibility of chemical corrosion!
Maintenance No changes can be made to apparatus, which are operated in hazardous areas.
Repairs to these apparatus are not possible.
Special conditions
Electrostatic charging The connection cables are to be laid in accordance with EN 50281-1-2 and must not
normally be subjected to chaffing during use.
Electrostatic charges must be avoided on the mechanical housing components.
Dangerous electrostatic charges on the mechanical housing components can be
avoided by incorporating these in the equipotential bonding.
112726_eng.xml
Release date: 2012-02-09 14:47 Date of issue: 2012-02-09

Pepperl+Fuchs Group
USA: +1 330 486 0001
Germany: +49 621 776-4411
Singapore: +65 6779 9091
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
drawing may not be used without our approval for any purpose other than that for which it has
been entrusted to the recipient. Any non-compliance shall obligate the violator to compensate
The copyright to this drawing belongs to us. No duplication or transfer to, providing access to
for damages. In case any patent is issued or a utility model is registered, or in case of any
or communicating to any third parties is allowed of its contents or excerpts thereof. This
Technical data
A Medium water, coolant A
Function maximum - operating current (oc)
Operating voltage 12 / 24 V (-25% / +50%) (9 - 36 VDC)
Current consumption < 8 mA
other industrial property rights, all such rights must be reserved for us.
Block diagram
Output high side switch
1 A over the whole temperature range
short-circuit and overload protected over the ambient
+Ub
temperature range. At inductive loads freewheeling diode voltage EMC
B e.g. 1N4007, has to be mounted at the load. 27 controller filter GND B
Mounting thread M30x1,5
Function control 0 seconds 5%
Fault indication delay 0 seconds 5%
Connection connector ISO 15170-A1-3.1-Sn/K1
0,5
(former DIN72585)
Housing material X5CrNi18 10 HEX32
44
C EN 10088-3:1.4301 C
6
capacitive connected to ground
o-ring 28x2 FPM 80 function:
Probe coating Tefzel ETFE sensor oscillator output
switching point Signal
10,5
Probe protection IP 69K to DIN40050 with mounted mating connector
switchpoint
23 6 mm
element level
vertically
Weight approx. 190 g times
Marking a customer; customer-part-no.; manufacturer no.; M30x1.5
50 +- 02
SN; year / week; approvals
(torque max. 30 Nm)
Switch point hysteresis < 3 mm
D Medium temperature -40 C to +125 C (-40 F to +257 F) D
BEDIA Motorentechnik GmbH & Co.KG,
Ambient temperature -40 C to +125 C (-40 F to +257 F)

Storage temperature -50 C to +125 C (-58 F to +257 F)
Mounting position optional Functional diagram for MAXIMUM Probes
5 +- 10
Altdorf bei N rnberg
Reverse polarity protection inbuilt between positive and negative terminal

switchpoint
Water / Oil-
horizontally 2 mm
level
Caution !!
E E
Do not connect positive potential to signal terminal of the sensor
and negative potential to positive terminal of the sensor. medium not present medium present medium not present
Approvals ABS, BV, CCS, DNV, GL, KR, LR, NKK, RINA, RMRS
Customs tariff number 90261029
1
3
Environmental simulations
2
F Vibration ISO 16750-3:2007 10 Hz - 2000 Hz 20 g F
t
Free Fall IEC 16750
Das Urheberrecht an dieser Zeichnung geh rt uns. Vervielf ltigung, berlassung, Zug nglichkeit
nicht benutzt werden. Zuwiderhandlung verpflichtet zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte, f r den Fall
oder Mitteilung des Inhalts, auch auszugsweise, an Dritte ist nicht gestattet. Die Zeichnung darf
Mechanical Shock DIN EN 60068-2-27:1995; 100 g / 11 ms

1 = positive (+)
ohne unsere Zustimmung, zu einem anderen Zweck als sie dem Empf nger anvertraut wird,
Dry Cold DIN EN 60068-2-1:2006; -40 C / 24 h (-40 F / 24 h)

2 = negative (-) Output ON
Dry Heat DIN EN 60068-2-2:2008; +125 C / 96 h (+257 F / 96 h) 3 = signal (S)
einer Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmustereintrag oder anderer Schutzrechte, sind uns
Temperature cycling DIN EN 60068-2-14:2000

Damp Heat DIN EN 60068-2-78:2002
Damp Heat, steady state DIN EN 60068-2-30:2006
G G
Salt spray DIN EN 60068-2-52:1996 Output OFF
Flame retardant DIN 75 200
Pressure resistance 2,5 MPa (25 bar / 362,6 psi) (25 C / 77 F / 1 h) t
+ (1)
EMC - (2) -
Conducted emmission from
S (3) S
the power port CISPR 16 10 kHz - 30 MHz
H Electric field radiaded emmissions CISPR 16 150 kHz - 2 GHz H
RF electromagnetic fields EN 61000-4-31 MHz - 2 GHz; 100 V / m
Conducted interference 150 kHz - 80 MHz; 10 V
Customer-part-no.: 0005-1464-070
EN 61000-4-6 Relay coil
Zul. Abweichung / Oberfl che / Ma stab / Sprache / Blatt /
Conducted interference IEC 60533 50 Hz - 10 kHz; 3 V / 0,5 V admissible tolerance surface scale 1:1 language ENU sheet 1 /1
ESD EN 61000-4-2 8 kV Contact / Air discharge - - -
Burst EN 61000-4-4 2 kV DC power port / signal lines ISO2768-mK - - -
Datum / date Name / name Benennung / description
Surge EN 61000-4-5 1 kV line <-> ground
CLS-50 water level sensor
Erstellt /
created by 14.03.2012 M derer
Gepr ft /
0,5 kV line <-> line checked by 14.03.2012 Sa
high side switch - operating current
I Format / Ma einheit /
vorbehalten.
High voltage IEC 60092-504 550 V Size dimension unit

with connector ISO 15170-A1-3.1-Sn/K1
A2 in [mm]
Power supply variations and interruptions EN 61000-4-11 Ub +50% / -25% Zeichnungsnummer / drawing number Zng. Art/
drw.type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
a
Zust. /
rev.
marking 06.03.14 M derer/Sa
nderung/modification Datum/date
Name/Gepr ft
checked by
500268 DRW
Betriebsanleitung (Original) / Translation / Traduction)
Betriebsanleitung.................................................. Seite 1 - 16
Operating manual ................................................page 17 - 32
Notice d'utilisation................................................page 33 - 48
Widerstandsthermometer
Typ W083
Messbereich von -40 °C bis +200 °C.
© SiKA • Ba_W083.pdf 12/2011.
Bewahren Sie diese Betriebsanleitung zum Nachschlagen auf.

Geben Sie diese Betriebsanleitung bei der Veräußerung des Gerätes mit.
SiKA Dr.Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG y Struthweg 7–9 y D-34260 Kaufungen y Germany
℡ +49 5605 803-0 y +49 5605 803-54 y info@sika.net y www.SIKA.net
Widerstandsthermometer
Inhaltsverzeichnis Seite
0 Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung ................................................................................. 3
1 Gerätebeschreibung.................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung ........................................................................ 5
2 Sicherheitshinweise .................................................................................................. 6
3 Aufbau und Funktion .................................................................................................7
4 Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers ......................................................................8
4.1 Einbauhinweise .......................................................................................................8
4.2 Montage ..................................................................................................................8
5 Elektrischer Anschluss ............................................................................................ 10
5.1 Anschlussvarianten ............................................................................................... 11
5.2 Überprüfung des Oberflächenwiderstandes (Ausführung W083…X) .................... 11
6 Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme ......................................................................... 12
7 Demontage und Entsorgung ................................................................................... 13
8 Schutzrohre............................................................................................................. 13
9 Werkstofftabelle ...................................................................................................... 14
10 Technische Daten ................................................................................................... 14
11 Abmessungen ......................................................................................................... 15
12 Herstellererklärung.................................................................................................. 16
Urheberschutzvermerk:
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Betriebsanleitung, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhalts
sind verboten, soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz.
Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patent-, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vor-
behalten.
-2- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung
0 Hinweise zur Betriebsanleitung

• Die Betriebsanleitung richtet sich an Facharbeiter und angelernte Arbeitskräfte.
• Lesen Sie vor jedem Arbeitsschritt die dazugehörigen Hinweise sorgfältig durch und
halten Sie die vorgegebene Reihenfolge ein.
• Lesen Sie den Abschnitt „Sicherheitshinweise“ besonders aufmerksam durch.
• Die Abbildungen in der Betriebsanleitung sind beispielhaft und gelten für alle Typen
von Widerstandsthermometern.
• Abschnitte oder Beschreibungen die nicht alle Typen von Widerstandsthermometern
betreffen, sind entsprechend gekennzeichnet.
Sollten Sie Probleme oder Fragen haben, wenden Sie sich an Ihren Lieferanten oder direkt
an:
Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

Struthweg 7-9 • D - 34260 Kaufungen
℡ 05605-803 0 • 05605-803 54
info@sika.net • www.sika.net
Verwendete Gefahrenzeichen und Symbole:

VORSICHT! Hohe Temperatur!
Dieses Zeichen kennzeichnet Gefahren durch hohe Temperaturen, die zu gesundheitlichen
Schäden führen oder erheblichen Sachschaden verursachen können.
WARNUNG! / VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr!
Diese Zeichen kennzeichnet Gefahren, die Personenschäden verursachen, die zu gesundheit-
lichen Schäden führen oder erheblichen Sachschaden verursachen können.
VORSICHT! Materialschaden!
Dieses Zeichen weist auf Handlungen hin, die mögliche Sach- und Umweltschäden ver-
ursachen können.
HINWEIS!
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG BEACHTEN! Diese Zeichen gibt Ihnen wichtige Hin-
weise, Tipps oder Informationen.
KEIN HAUSMÜLL!
Das Gerät darf nicht zusammen mit
Hausmüll entsorgt werden.
Beachten und befolgen Sie die damit ge- Überprüfen Sie die angegebenen Punkte
kennzeichneten Informationen. oder Hinweise.
ª Befolgen Sie die angegebenen An- J Verweis auf einen anderen Abschnitt,
weisungen bzw. Handlungsschritte. Dokument oder Quelle.
Halten Sie die Reihenfolge ein. • Gliederungspunkt.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten -3-

Gerätebeschreibung Widerstandsthermometer
1 Gerätebeschreibung
Das Widerstandsthermometer hat zwei, redundant aufgebaute Pt100 Temperatursensoren.
Es dient der Fernüberwachung von flüssigen und gasförmigen Medien in Rohrleitungen oder
Behältern, sowie Maschinen oder Anlagen.
Die beiden Sensoren des Widerstandsthermometer befinden sich an der gleichen Messstelle.
Baugruppen:
Die wichtigsten Baugruppen des Widerstandsthermometer sind der Anschlusskopf und das
Tauchrohr.
Anschlusskopf:
Der Anschlusskopf dient dem Anschluss des
elektrischen Temperatursensors für die Fernüber-
wachung. In ihm befindet sich der Messeinsatz.
Tauchrohr:
Das Tauchrohr dient dem Prozessanschluss der An-
lage oder Maschine. Es wird im Bereich der Mess-
stelle eingebaut.
Bei Anwendungen mit besonderen Belastungen ist der
Einbau von Schutzrohren erforderlich.
Messstelle:
Die Temperaturmessung erfolgt im unteren Teil des Tauchrohres. Dort befinden sich die
temperaturempfindlichen Bereiche des Messeinsatzes (J § 3 "Aufbau und Funktion").
Ausführungen:
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist in den Ausführungen W083 und W083…X lieferbar. Die
Ausführung W083…X kann im Ex-Bereich eingesetzt werden.
Typenschild:
Auf dem Typenschild finden Sie die wichtigsten Daten und das Anschlussbild des gelieferten
Widerstandsthermometers.
W083:
W083…X:
Lieferumfang:
• 1x Widerstandsthermometer.
• 1x Betriebsanleitung.
• ggf. Verpackung oder Transportschutz.
Zubehör:
• Schutzrohre nach DIN 43772:2000.
-4- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Gerätebeschreibung
1.1 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung

Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur zur Temperaturanzeige bzw. -überwachung von
flüssigen und gasförmigen Medien in Rohrleitungen oder Behältern, Maschinen oder Anlagen
verwenden werden.
WARNUNG! Kein Sicherheitsbauteil!

Die Widerstandsthermometer W083 und W083…X sind keine Sicherheitsbauteile im
Sinne der Richtlinie 2006-42-EG (Maschinenrichtlinie).
ª Verwenden Sie dies Widerstandsthermometer niemals als Sicherheitsbauteil.
Die Betriebssicherheit des gelieferten Gerätes ist nur bei bestimmungsgemäßer Verwendung
gewährleistet. Die angegebenen Grenzwerte (J § 10 "Abmessungen") dürfen keinesfalls
überschritten werden.
VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr oder Materialschaden!

Das Widerstandsthermometer kann im Betrieb sehr heiß werden und darf keinen
mechanischen Belastungen ausgesetzt werden.
ª Verwenden Sie das Widerstandsthermometer niemals als Haltegriff oder Trittfläche.
Überprüfen Sie vor dem Einbau, ob die benetzten Werkstoffe des Gerätes für das ver-
wendete Medium geeignet sind (J § 9 "Werkstofftabelle").
Ausführung W083…X:
Das Widerstandsthermometer W083…X ist für den Einsatz in Bereichen mit explosions-
fähiger Atmosphäre vorgesehen.
ª Beachten Sie die weiterführenden Informationen in § 12 "Herstellererklärung".
ª Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Maßnahmen:
Zündtemperatur des zu überwachenden Mediums:
ª Die Zündtemperatur des zu überwachenden Mediums muss mindestens 10 K
oberhalb des Temperaturbereichs liegen. Beim W083…X also ≥ 210 °C.
Wackelkontakt an elektrischen Anschlüssen:
ª Anschluss des Gerätes an einen bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis.

Sicherheitshinweise Widerstandsthermometer
2 Sicherheitshinweise
Bevor Sie das Widerstandsthermometer installieren, lesen Sie diese Betriebsanleitung
sorgfältig durch. Werden die darin enthaltenen Anweisungen, insbesondere die Sicher-
heitshinweise nicht beachtet, können Gefahren für Mensch, Umwelt, Gerät und Anlage
die Folge sein.
Die Widerstandsthermometer entsprechen dem aktuellen Stand der Technik. Dies betrifft die
Genauigkeit, die Funktionsweise und den sicheren Betrieb der Geräte.
Um eine sichere Bedienung zu gewährleisten, ist sachkundiges und sicherheitsbewusstes
Verhalten der Bediener erforderlich.
SiKA gewährt persönlich oder durch entsprechende Literatur Hilfestellung für die Anwendung
der Produkte. Der Kunde prüft die Einsetzbarkeit des Produktes auf der Basis unserer
technischen Informationen. In kunden- und anwendungsspezifischen Tests überprüft der
Kunde die Eignung des Produktes für seinen Verwendungszweck. Mit dieser Prüfung gehen
Gefahr und Risiko auf unseren Kunden über; unsere Gewährleistung erlischt.
Qualifiziertes Personal:
Das Personal, das mit der Inbetriebnahme und Bedienung des Widerstandsthermometers
beauftragt wird, muss eine entsprechende Qualifikation aufweisen. Dies kann durch
Schulung oder entsprechende Unterweisung geschehen.
Dem Personal muss der Inhalt der vorliegenden Betriebsanleitung bekannt und jederzeit
zugänglich sein.
Der elektrische Anschluss darf nur von einer Elektrofachkraft vorgenommen werden.
Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise:
Bei allen Arbeiten sind die bestehenden nationalen Vorschriften zur Unfallverhütung und
Sicherheit am Arbeitsplatz einzuhalten. Vorhandene interne Vorschriften des Betreibers
sind zu beachten, auch wenn diese nicht in dieser Anleitung genannt werden.
Schutzart nach DIN EN 60529:
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Umgebungsbedingungen am Einsatzort die Anforderungen
der angegebenen Schutzart (J § 10 "Technische Daten") nicht überschreiten.
Setzen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer keinen mechanischen Beanspruchungen aus.
Verwenden Sie es niemals als Haltegriff oder Trittfläche.
Verwenden Sie das Widerstandsthermometer nur in einwandfreiem Zustand. Be-
schädigte oder fehlerhafte Geräte müssen sofort überprüft und ggf. ersetzt werden.
Verwenden Sie bei Montage, Anschluss und Demontage des Widerstandsthermometers
nur passende Werkzeuge.
Typenschilder oder sonstige Hinweise auf dem Gerät dürfen weder entfernt noch un-
kenntlich gemacht werden, da sonst jegliche Garantie und Herstellerverantwortung er-
lischt.
Spezielle Sicherheitshinweise:
Warnhinweise, die sich speziell auf einzelne Funktionsabläufe oder Tätigkeiten beziehen,
finden Sie vor den entsprechenden Stellen in dieser Betriebsanleitung.
-6- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Aufbau und Funktion
Sicherheitshinweise für Ausführung W083…X:

Beim Einsatz des Widerstandsthermometers in explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen müssen
zusätzlich noch die nachfolgenden Sicherheitshinweise beachtet werden.
Alle Arbeiten, die den Ex-Bereich betreffen, dürfen nur von einer entsprechend quali-
fizierten Elektrofachkraft vorgenommen werden.
Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur an einem bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis
betrieben werden. Das Abklemmen der Anschlussdrähte innerhalb des Ex-Bereiches ist
aufgrund der bescheinigten Eigensicherheit zulässig.
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist durch den Einbau in eine metallische Rohrleitung oder
Behälter in den Potenzialausgleich mit einzubeziehen.
Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand beim Widerstandsthermometer nach Durch-
führung des elektrischen Anschlusses (J § 5.2).
Überprüfen Sie in regelmäßigen Zeitabständen (3 Monate) das Widerstandsthermometer
auf Korrosion / Korrosionsspuren (J § 6 "Wartung Ausführung W083…X").
3 Aufbau und Funktion

Aufbau:
c
Anschlusskopf und Tauchrohr:
d
Kopfgehäuse.
Deckel mit Dichtung, Schrauben und Zahn-
e
scheiben.
Kabelverschraubung mit Dichtung und Druckring.
f
g
Kontermutter.
Tauchrohr mit Gewindeanschluss.
h
Messeinsatz:
i
Klemmsockel
j
Fühlerleitungen und Sensorrohr.
2x Pt100 Temperaturfühler.
Funktion des Messeinsatzes:

Der Messeinsatz arbeitet nach dem Prinzip der Widerstandsänderung. Die Temperatur an
der Messstelle wird durch den Temperaturfühler in einen entsprechenden Widerstandswert
umgewandelt.
Die beiden Pt100 Temperaturfühler befinden sich unten im Sensorrohr. Ein Kabel im Inneren
des Sensorrohres verbindet die Temperaturfühler mit dem Klemmsockel im Kopfgehäuse.
Die elektrischen Signale der Temperaturfühler liegen direkt am Klemmsockel an.

Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers Widerstandsthermometer
4 Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers
4.1 Einbauhinweise
POSITION DER MESSSTELLE!

Für eine präzise Temperaturmessung ist die richtige Positionierung der Messstelle des
Widerstandsthermometer am Einbauort erforderlich.
Beachten Sie die nachfolgenden Einbauhinweise:
Die Messstelle muss sich in der Mitte der Rohr- Achten Sie bei Isolierungen auf ein aus-
leitung befinden. reichend langes Tauchrohr.
Zu kurze oder zu lange Tauchrohre führen zu
einer falschen Temperaturanzeige.
Das Widerstandsthermometer W083…X ist durch den Einbau in eine metallische Rohrleitung
oder einen metallischen Behälter in den Potenzialausgleich mit einzubeziehen.
4.2 Montage
VORSICHT! Hohe Temperatur!

Die Oberfläche des Widerstandsthermometers kann beim Betrieb sehr heiß werden!
ª Berühren Sie niemals das heiße Widerstandsthermometer.
VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr und Materialschaden!

Bei ungeeigneten Dichtwerkstoffen kann heißes Medium austreten! Es besteht die Gefahr von
Personenschäden, sowie von Schäden an der Anlage und Verunreinigung der Umwelt.
ª Verwenden Sie nur geeignete Dichtstoffe.
Überprüfen Sie vor dem Einbau, ob

die Anlage ausgeschaltet ist und sich in einem sicheren und stromlosen Zustand befindet.
die Anlage drucklos und abgekühlt ist.
ein Einschraubstutzen am Einbauort der Anlage oder Maschine vorhanden ist.
ein geeigneter Dichtstoff verwendet wird.
-8- © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Einbau des Widerstandsthermometers
GEEIGNETE WERKZEUGE:
Verwenden Sie nur geeignete Werkzeuge der passenden Größe.
Einbau:
ª 1. Abdichten ª 2. Einsetzen
ª 3. Tauchrohr festziehen ª 4. Kontermutter lösen
Anzugsmoment: 55 + 5 Nm
ª 5. Ausrichten ª 6. Kontermutter anziehen
Anzugsmoment: 55 + 5 Nm

Elektrischer Anschluss Widerstandsthermometer
5 Elektrischer Anschluss
Im Anschlusskopf des Widerstandsthermometers wird der Messeinsatz elektrisch angeschlossen.
Dabei wird die Anschlussleitung mit dem Klemmsockel des Messeinsatzes verbunden.
VORSICHT! Elektrischer Strom!

Der elektrische Anschluss des Widerstandsthermometer darf nur von einer Elektrofach-
kraft vorgenommen werden.
ª Schalten Sie die Anlage spannungsfrei, bevor Sie die das Widerstandsthermometer
anschließen.
ª 1. Lösen Sie die Schrauben des Deckels. ª 4. Führen Sie die Anschlussleitung durch
ª 2. Nehmen Sie den Deckel mit Schrauben, die Überwurfmutter und den Klemmein-
Zahnscheiben und Dichtung vom Kopf- satz in das Kopfgehäuse.
gehäuse ab. ª 5. Stülpen Sie die Abschirmung der Leitung
ª 3. Lösen Sie die Überwurfmutter der über den Klemmeinsatz.
Kabelverschraubung. ª 6. Stecken Sie den Klemmeinsatz in den
Gewindestutzen. Sichern Sie den
Klemmeinsatz mit der Überwurfmutter.
Beachten Sie das Anschlussbild auf dem Typenschild des Widerstandsthermometer.
ª 7. Schließen Sie die Anschlussleitung ent- ª 9. Setzten Sie den Deckel mit Dichtung auf
sprechend dem Anschlussbild an das Kopfgehäuse.
(J § 5.1 "Anschlussvarianten"). Achten Sie auf den richtigen Sitz der
ª 8. Ziehen Sie die Kabelverschraubung fest. Dichtung des Deckels.
Achten Sie darauf, dass die Anschluss- ª 10. Drehen Sie die Schrauben fest.
leitungen zugfrei sind!
- 10 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Elektrischer Anschluss
Das Widerstandsthermometer darf nur an einem bescheinigten eigensicheren Stromkreis
betrieben werden. Das Abklemmen der Anschlussdrähte innerhalb des Ex-Bereiches ist
aufgrund der bescheinigten Eigensicherheit zulässig.
Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand beim Widerstandsthermometer nach Durch-
führung des elektrischen Anschlusses (J § 5.2").
5.1 Anschlussvarianten
Der Temperaturfühler des Messeinsatzes ist mit dem Klemmsockel verbunden. Der An-
schluss erfolgt am Klemmsockel.
FARBMARKIERUNG:
Die Klemmen des Sockels sind farblich markiert. Ist keine Farbe an der Klemme vor-
handen, so entspricht dies "weiß" im Anschlussbild.
ª Verbinden Sie die Anschlussleitung mit dem Klemmsockel entsprechend dem Anschluss-
bild ihres Widerstandsthermometers.
Pt 100:
2-Leiter
5.2 Überprüfung des Oberflächenwiderstandes (Ausführung W083…X)

Nach Durchführung des elektrischen Anschlusses muss der Oberflächenwiderstand des
Widerstandsthermometers durch eine entsprechend qualifizierte Elektrofachkraft überprüft
werden.
Dazu wird mit Hilfe eines Multimeters der elektrische Wider-
stand zwischen den markierten Bauteilen gemessen. Der
Oberflächenwiderstand zwischen den Messpunkten liegt
idealerweise bei 1 Ω.
Nach DIN EN 13463-1: 2009 darf der Oberflächen-

widerstand bei 23 ±2 °C und einer relativen Luftfeuchte
von 50 ±5 % einen Wert von 109 Ω nicht überschreiten.
ª Überprüfen Sie den elektrischen Widerstand zwischen
den folgenden Messpunkten:
c Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Rohrleitung
d Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Kabelverschraubung
e Sechskant Tauchrohr <=> Deckelschraube
Wird der Normwert überschritten, muss der Einbau des W083…X auf Kontaktprobleme hin
überprüft werden. Eine Inbetriebnahme darf nicht erfolgen!
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten - 11 -

Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme Widerstandsthermometer
6 Wartung, Reinigung und Probleme

Wartung:
Das Widerstandsthermometer ist wartungsfrei. Die einzelnen Baugruppen sind teilweise voll-
ständig vergossen und enthalten keinerlei Bauteile, welche vom Anwender repariert oder
ausgetauscht werden können.
Bei einem Defekt muss das Gerät ausgetauscht oder zur Reparatur an den Hersteller
zurückgeschickt werden.
Wartung Ausführung W083…X:

Das Widerstandsthermometer ist in regelmäßigen Zeitabständen (3 Monate) durch visuelle
Kontrolle auf Korrosion (Aluminiumoxidation) zu überprüfen.
ª Entfernen Sie vorhandene Oxidationsbildung an den Messpunkten mit geeigneten
Reinigungsmitteln (z. B. Alureiniger).
ª Überprüfen Sie den Oberflächenwiderstand des Widerstandsthermometers (J § 5.2).
Ist der Oberflächenwiderstand kleiner als der Normwert, darf das Widerstandsthermometer
bis zum nächsten Wartungsintervall betrieben werden.
Anderenfalls muss der Einbau des Widerstandsthermometer auf Kontaktprobleme hin über-
prüft werden.
Wird der Normwert weiterhin überschritten, muss das Widerstandsthermometer ausgetauscht
werden.
Reinigung:
ª Reinigen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer mit einem trockenen oder feuchten anti-
statischem Tuch.
ª Verwenden Sie beim Reinigen keine scharfen Gegenstände oder aggressive
Reinigungsmittel.
Probleme:
Welche Probleme Sie wie beheben können, ist in der nachfolgenden Tabelle ausgeführt.
Problem mögliche Ursache Abhilfe

Messeinsatz:
kein Ausgangssignal Anschluss ohne Kontakt. Überprüfen Sie den elektrischen
Anschluss.
Messeinsatz defekt. Gerät zur Reparatur einschicken.
Temperaturabweichung Falscher Einbau. Einbausituation überprüfen.
Messeinsatz
Normwert Überschritten Kontaktprobleme zwischen den Einbau auf Kontaktprobleme hin
(Prüfung Oberflächenwiderstand) Bauteilen. überprüfen.
Können Sie ein Problem nicht beheben, senden Sie bitte das Gerät mit einer kurzen Fehlerbeschreibung,
den Umgebungsbedingungen und der Einsatzdauer bis zum Eintreten der Störung zur Reparatur ein.
- 12 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Demontage und Entsorgung
7 Demontage und Entsorgung

VORSICHT! Verletzungsgefahr!
Entfernen Sie niemals das Widerstandsthermometer aus einer im Betrieb befindlichen Anlage.
ª Sorgen Sie dafür, dass die Anlage fachgerecht ausgeschaltet wird.
Vor der Demontage:

Überprüfen Sie vor der Demontage, ob
die Anlage ausgeschaltet ist und sich in einem sicheren und stromlosen Zustand befindet.
die Anlage drucklos und abgekühlt ist.
Demontage:
ª Entfernen Sie die elektrischen Anschlüsse.
ª Bauen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer mit passenden Werkzeugen aus.
Entsorgung:
KEIN HAUSMÜLL!
Das Widerstandsthermometer besteht aus unterschiedlichen Werkstoffen. Es darf nicht
zusammen mit Hausmüll entsorgt werden.
ª Führen Sie das Widerstandsthermometer der

lokalen Wiederverwertung zu
oder
ª schicken Sie das Widerstandsthermometer an

Ihren Lieferanten bzw. SiKA zurück.
8 Schutzrohre
Bei Anwendungen mit besonderen Belastungen muss ein zusätzliches Schutzrohr, nach
DIN 43772:2000, verwendet werden.
• hohen Druck und / oder hoher Temperatur in der Anwendung.

Besondere Belastungen entstehen durch
• hohe Durchflussgeschwindigkeiten des Mediums.

• korrosive und / oder abrasive Eigenschaften des Mediums.
Bei der Verwendung von Schutzrohren können Widerstandsthermometer während des Be-
triebes ein- und ausgebaut werden. Die Anlage kann dabei unter Druck bleiben und die
Leitungen müssen nicht geleert werden.

Werkstofftabelle Widerstandsthermometer
9 Werkstofftabelle
Bauteil W083 Bauteil
benetzt
Kopfgehäuse Aluminium Druckguss
Deckel Aluminium Druckguss
Dichtung NBR
Deckelschrauben (Zahnscheiben)
Kontermutter Messing 2.0401
Tauchrohr mit
Edelstahl 1.4571 X
Gewindeanschluss
Kabelverschraubung:
- Überwurfmutter Messing vernickelt
- Klemmeinsatz Polyamid
- O-Ring CR / NBR
- Gewindestutzen Messing vernickelt
10 Technische Daten
Bitte beachten Sie die Angaben auf dem Typenschild.
Kenndaten W083
Messbereich -40…200 °C
Genauigkeit Klasse B
Ansprechzeit 25 °C ---> 90 °C: 15 s (vorläufig)
t90 in Wasser
Temperaturfühler
- Sensor 2x Pt100/B/2 • IEC 751
- Nennwiderstand 100 Ω
bei 0 °C ±0,3 °C
- zulässiger Messstrom 1 mA
Ausführung W083…X
Maximaler Strom Ii = 20 mA
Maximale Spannung Ui = 30 VDC
Prozessgrößen
Elektrischer Anschluss Anschlusskopf Form J, drehbar
mit Kabelverschraubung M16 x 1,5
Tauchrohr:
- Durchmesser 8 x 1 mm
- Länge 50 mm
- Material / Nenndruck Edelstahl 1.4571 / PN 40
Medium Verträglichkeit mit Tauchrohrmaterial muss gegeben sein,
siehe auch 8."Schutzrohre"
Mediumstemperatur siehe Messbereich
Umgebungstemperatur 0…70 °C
Prozessanschluss *1) G½A
Vibrationsbeständigkeit Kennlinie 2, 4g
Zulassungen ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, RINA, Class NK
- 14 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Widerstandsthermometer Abmessungen
11 Abmessungen

Herstellererklärung Widerstandsthermometer
12 Herstellererklärung
- 16 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_de.doc 12/2011

Operating manual (Translation)
Betriebsanleitung ................................................. Seite 1 - 16
Operating manual ................................................page 17 - 32
Notice d'utilisation................................................page 33 - 48
Resistance thermometer
Type W083
Measuring range from -40 °C to +200 °C.
© SiKA • Ba_W083.pdf 12/2011.
Please keep this operating manual for future reference.

If the device is resold, please provide the operating manual along with it.
SiKA Dr.Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG y Struthweg 7–9 y D-34260 Kaufungen y Germany
℡ +49 5605 803-0 y +49 5605 803-54 y info@sika.net y www.SIKA.net
Resistance thermometer
Table of contents page

0 About this operating manual.................................................................................... 19
1 Device description................................................................................................... 20
1.1 Intended use ......................................................................................................... 21
2 Safety instructions................................................................................................... 22
3 Construction and function ....................................................................................... 23
4 Installation of Resistance thermometer.................................................................... 24
4.1 Installation instructions.......................................................................................... 24
4.2 Assembly .............................................................................................................. 24
5 Electrical connection ............................................................................................... 26
5.1 Connection types .................................................................................................. 27
5.2 Checking the surface resistance (W083…X version) ............................................ 27
6 Maintenance, cleaning and problems...................................................................... 28
7 Disassembly and disposal....................................................................................... 29
8 Protective tube ........................................................................................................ 29
9 Materials table.........................................................................................................30
10 Technical data......................................................................................................... 30
11 Dimension ...............................................................................................................31
12 Manufacturer declaration......................................................................................... 32
Copyright notice:
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this operating manual as well as the communication of
its contents to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the
payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
- 18 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer About this operating manual
0 About this operating manual

• The operating manual is aimed at specialists and semi-skilled personnel.
• Before each step, read through the relevant advice carefully and keep to the specified
order.
• Thoroughly read and understand the information in the section “Safety instructions ”.
• The figures in the operating manual are examples and apply to all types of Resistance
thermometers.
• Sections or descriptions that do not apply to all types of Resistance thermometers are
marked accordingly.
If you have any problems or questions, please contact your supplier or contact us directly
at:
Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

Struthweg 7-9 • D - 34260 Kaufungen
℡ 05605-803 0 • 05605-803 54
info@sika.net • www.sika.net
Hazard signs and other symbols used:

CAUTION! High temperature!
This sign indicates dangers resulting from high temperature that can lead to health defects or
considerable damage to property.
WARNING! / CAUTION! Risk of injury!
This sign indicates dangers that cause personal injuries that can lead to health defects or
cause considerable damage to property.
CAUTION! Material damage!
This sign indicates actions which could lead to possible damage to material or environmental
damage.
NOTICE!
ADHERE TO OPERATING MANUAL! This symbol indicates important notices,
tips or information.
NO DOMESTIC WASTE!
The device must not be disposed of
together with domestic waste.
Pay attention to and comply with information Check the specified points or notices.
that is marked with this symbol. J Reference to another section, document or
ª Follow the specified instructions and steps. source.
Adhere to the given order. • Item.
Technical changes reserved - 19 -

Device description Resistance thermometer
1 Device description
The Resistance thermometer has two redundant Pt100 temperature sensors. It is used for
the remote monitoring of liquid and gaseous media in pipes, tanks, machines or plants.
Both sensors of the Resistance thermometer located at the same measuring point.
Assemblies:
The most important assemblies of the Resistance thermometer are the connection head and
the immersion tube.
Connection head:
The connection head allows the connection of an
electrical temperature sensor for remote monitoring.
The measuring insert is to be found within it.
Immersion tube:
The immersion tube is used to create the process
connection to the installation or machine. It is installed
in proximity to the measuring point.
Use in particularly high-stress situations requires the
fitting of protective tubes.
Measuring point:
The temperature measurement is carried out in the lower part of the immersion tube. There are
the temperature-sensitive parts of the measuring insert (J § 3 "Construction and function").
Versions:
The Resistance thermometer is available in the W083 and W083…X versions. The W083…X
version can be used in explosion hazard areas.
Type plate:
The type plate contains the most important data and the connection diagram of the
Resistance thermometer supplied.
W083:
W083…X:
Scope of delivery:
• 1x Resistance thermometer.
• 1x Operating manual.
• Packaging or transport protection (if applicable).
Accessories:
• Protective tubes certified according to DIN 43772:2000.
- 20 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Device description
1.1 Intended use

The Resistance thermometer may only be used to display or monitor the temperatures of liq-
uid or gaseous media in pipes, tanks, machines or plants.
WARNING! NO SAFETY COMPONENT!

The Resistance thermometer W083 and W083…X are not safety components in
accordance with Directive 2006-42-EC (Machine Directive).
ª Never use the Resistance thermometer as a safety component.
The operational safety of the device supplied is only guaranteed by intended use. The
specified limits (J § 10 "Technical data ") may under no circumstances be exceeded.
CAUTION! Risk of injury or material damage!

The Resistance thermometer must not be subjected to mechanical stress and can be-
come very hot when in operation.
ª Never use the Resistance thermometer as a carrying handle or tread.
Before installing the device, check that the wetted device's materials are suitable for the
medium intended for use (J § 9 "Materials table ").
Version W083…X:
The Resistance thermometer W083…X is intended to be used in areas with potentially ex-
plosive atmospheres.
ª Observe the additional information in § 12 "Manufacturer declaration ".
ª Observe the following requirements:
Ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored:
ª The ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored must be at least 10 K
higher than the temperature range. With the W083…X, this means ≥ 210°C.
Intermittent electrical connection:
ª Connect the device to a certified intrinsically safe circuit.

Safety instructions Resistance thermometer
2 Safety instructions
Before you install the Resistance thermometer, read through this operating manual
carefully. If the instructions contained within it are not followed, in particular the safety
guidelines, this could result in danger for people, the environment, and the device and
the system it is connected to.
The Resistance thermometer correspond to the state-of-the-art technology. This concerns
the accuracy, the operating mode and the safe operation of the device.
In order to guarantee that the device operates safely, the operator must act competently and
be conscious of safety issues.
SiKA provides support for the use of its products either personally or via relevant literature.
The customer verifies that our product is fit for purpose based on our technical information.
The customer needs to carry out his/her own specific tests to ensure this device is suitable
for the intended application. With this verification all hazards and risks are transferred to our
customers; our warranty is not valid.
Qualified personnel:
The personnel who are charged for the installation, operation and maintenance of the
Resistance thermometer must hold a relevant qualification. This can be based on training
or relevant tuition.
The personnel must be aware of this operating manual and have access to it at all times.
The electrical connection should only be carried out by a fully qualified electrician.
General safety instructions:

In all work, the existing national regulations for accident prevention and safety in the
workplace must be complied with. Any internal regulations of the operator must also be
complied with, even if these are not mentioned in this manual.
Degree of protection according to EN 60529:
Ensure that the ambient conditions at the site of use does not exceed the requirements
for the stated protection rating (J § 10 "Technical data ").
Do not subject the Resistance thermometer to any mechanical strain. Never use it as a
carrying handle or a tread.
Only use the Resistance thermometer if it is in perfect condition. Damaged or faulty
devices must be checked without delay and, if necessary, replaced.
When fitting, connecting and removing the Resistance thermometer use only suitable
appropriate tools.
Do not remove or obliterate nameplates or other markings on the device, as otherwise
the warranty is rendered null and void.
Special safety instructions:

Warnings that are specifically relevant to individual operating procedures or activities can be
found at the beginning of the relevant sections of this operating manual.
- 22 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Construction and function
Safety instructions for version W083…X:

The following safety instructions must also be observed when Resistance thermometers are
used in explosion hazard areas.
All work involving an explosion hazard area must be performed by a suitably qualified
electrician.
The Resistance thermometer may only be used in combination with a certified intrinsically
safe electrical circuit. Disconnecting the connection wires within the explosion hazard
area is allowed due to the certified intrinsic safety.
Integrate the Resistance thermometer in the potential equalisation system by installing it
on a metallic pipe or tank.
Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer after making the electrical
connection (J § 5.2).
Check the Resistance thermometer at regular intervals (every 3 months) for corrosion or
signs of corrosion (J § 6 "W083…X maintenance").
3 Construction and function

Construction:
c
Connection head and immersion tube:
d
Head housing.
Cover with gasket, screws and tooth lock
e
washers.
Cable fitting with gasket and compression ring.
f
g
Counter nut.
Immersion tube with threaded connector.
h
Measuring insert:
i
Terminal socket
j
Sensor wire and sensor tube.
2x Pt100 Temperature sensor.
Function of the measuring insert:

The measuring insert works according to the principle of changes in resistance. The tempera-
ture recorded at the measuring point is converted by the temperature sensor into a corre-
sponding resistance value.
The both temperature sensor are located at the bottom of the sensor tube. The sensors are
connected to the terminal socket in the head housing via a cable inside the sensor tube.
The electrical signals from the temperature sensors are directly applied to the terminal
socket.

Installation of Resistance thermometer Resistance thermometer
4 Installation of Resistance thermometer
4.1 Installation instructions
MEASURING POINT LOCATION!

For accurate temperature measurement, the right measuring point location for the
Widerstandsthermometer should be selected at the installation site.
Please observe the following installation instructions:
The measuring point must be located in the If the pipe is lagged ensure that a long
centre of the pipe. enough immersion tube is used.
If the immersion tube is too short or too long it
will be impossible to gauge the temperature
accurately.
Version W083…X:
Integrate the Resistance thermometer W083…X in the potential equalisation system by in-
stalling it on a metallic pipe or a metallic tank.
4.2 Assembly
CAUTION! High temperature!

The surface of the Resistance thermometer can become very hot when the device is op-
erational!
ª Never touch the hot Resistance thermometer.
CAUTION! Risk of injury and material damage!

The use of unsuitable sealants can lead to the escape of hot medium. There is a risk of
injury as well as of damage to the plant and environmental pollution.
ª Be sure only to use suitable sealants.
Before installing, check that

the equipment is switched off and is in a safe and de-energised state.
the equipment is depressurised and has coolde down.
a screw-in fitting is available at the measuring location on the plant or the machine.
a suitable sealant is used.
- 24 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Installation of Resistance thermometer
SUITABLE TOOLS:
Use only suitable tools of the correct size.
Installation:
ª 1. Sealing ª 2. Insert
ª 3. Fully tighten immersion tube ª 4. Loosen counter nut
Tightening torque: 55 + 5 Nm
ª 5. Align ª 6. Fully tighten counter nut
Tightening torque: 55 + 5 Nm

Electrical connection Resistance thermometer
5 Electrical connection
The measuring insert is connected inside the connection head of the Resistance thermometer.
The connecting cable is connected with the terminal socket of the measuring insert.
CAUTION! Electric current!

The electrical connection of the Resistance thermometer should only be carried out by a
fully qualified electrician.
ª De-energize the electrical system before connecting the Resistance thermometer.
ª 1. Loosen the cover screws. ª 4. Guide the connecting cable into the
ª 2. Remove the cover complete with head housing through the union nut and
screws, tooth lock washers and gasket the terminal insert.
from the head housing. ª 5. Pull the cable shield over the seal ring.
ª 3. Loosen the union nut of the cable ª 6. Insert the seal ring into the threaded
connector. connector. Secure the sealing ring with
the union nut.
Follow the connection diagram on the Resistance thermometer type plate.
ª 7. Connect the cable according to the in- ª 9. Place the cover with gasket on the head
structions on the connection diagram housing.
(J § 5.1 "Connection types "). Ensure that the cover gasket is correctly
ª 8. Fully tighten the cable connection. positioned.
Ensure that the connecting cables are ª 10. Fully tighten the screws.
not under strain!
- 26 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Electrical connection
W083…X version:
The Resistance thermometer may only be used in combination with a certified intrinsically
safe electrical circuit. Disconnecting the connection wires within the explosion hazard
area is allowed due to the certified intrinsic safety.
Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer after making the electrical
connection (J § 5.2").
5.1 Connection types

The temperature sensor of the measuring insert is connected to the terminal socket.
Connection takes place at the terminal socket.
COLOUR CODING:
The terminal sockets are colour coded. If a particular terminal clamp is not colour coded,
this is labelled “white” on the connection diagram.
ª Connect the connecting cable to the terminal socket in accordance with the connection
diagram on your Resistance thermometer.
Pt 100:
2-wire
5.2 Checking the surface resistance (W083…X version)

After the electrical connection is made, the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer
must be checked by a suitably qualified electrician.
To do this, use a multimeter to measure the resistance be-
tween the marked components. The surface resistance be-
tween the test points should ideally be 1 Ω.
According to EN 13463-1:2009, the surface resistance

may not exceed 109 Ω at 23 ±2 °C with 50 ±5% relative
humidity.
ª Check the resistance between the following test points:
c Immersion tube hex flats and pipe
d Immersion tube hex flats and cable gland
e Immersion tube hex flats and cover screw
If the value specified by the standard is exceeded, the in-
stallation of the W083…X must be checked for contact
problems. Do not put the device into service!

Maintenance, cleaning and problems Resistance thermometer
6 Maintenance, cleaning and problems

Maintenance:
The Resistance thermometer is maintenance-free. The individual components are in some
cases fully potted; they thus contain no sub-assemblies which can be repaired or replaced by
the user.
In case of a defect, the device must be replaced or returned to the manufacturer for repair.
W083…X maintenance:
Visually inspect the Resistance thermometer at regular intervals (3 months) for corrosion
(aluminium oxidation).
ª Use a suitable cleaning product (e.g. aluminium cleaner) to remove any oxidation build-
up at the measuring points.
ª Check the surface resistance of the Resistance thermometer (J § 5.2).
If the surface resistance is lower than the standard value, the Resistance thermometer may
continue to be used until the next maintenance event.
Otherwise the installation of the Resistance thermometer must be checked for contact prob-
lems.
If the standard value is still exceeded, the Resistance thermometer must be replaced.
Cleaning:
ª Clean the Resistance thermometer using a dry or damp antistatic cloth.
ª Never use sharp objects or aggressive cleaning agents to clean the device.
Problems:
The following table details what problems you can solve yourself and how to solve them.
Problem Possible cause Remedy

Measuring insert:
no output signal Open-circuit connection. Check electrical connection.
Faulty measuring insert . Submit device for repair .
Temperature deviations Improper installation . Check installation situation.
Measuring insert
Standard value exceeded Contact problems between com- Check installation for contact prob-
(Surface resistance test) ponents. lems.
If you are unable to remedy a particular problem, please send the device for repair with a brief
description of the fault, the environmental conditions and the length of time the device was operational
before the problem occurred.
- 28 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Disassembly and disposal
7 Disassembly and disposal

CAUTION! Risk of injury!
Never remove the Resistance thermometer from a plant in operation.
ª Make sure that the plant is shut down professionally.
Before disassembly:
Prior to disassembly, ensure that
the equipment is switched off and is in a safe and de-energised state.
the equipment is depressurised and has cooled down.
Disassembly:
ª Remove the electrical connectors.
ª Remove the Resistance thermometer using suitable tools.
Disposal:
NO HOUSEHOLD WASTE!
The Resistance thermometer consists of various different materials. It must not be
disposed of with household waste.
ª Take the Resistance thermometer to your local

recycling plant
or
ª send the Resistance thermometer back to your

supplier or to SiKA.
8 Protective tube
If the device is to be used for high-stress applications, then an additional protective tube certi-
fied according to DIN 43772:2000 is required.
• high pressure and / or temperature in the application.

High-stress situations arise due to the following
• high medium flow speeds.

• corrosive and / or abrasive medium properties.
If protective tubes are used, it is possible to install and remove Resistance thermometers dur-
ing machine operation. The plant can thus remain pressurised, and it is unnecessary to
empty the pipes.

Materials table Resistance thermometer
9 Materials table
Component W083 Component-
wetted
Head housing Aluminium Druckguss
Head housing Aluminium Druckguss
Gasket NBR
Cover screw
(Tooth lock washers)
Conter nut Messing 2.0401
Immersion tube with
Edelstahl 1.4571 X
threaded connector
Cable gland:
- Union nut Messing vernickelt
- Terminal insert Polyamid
- O-ring CR / NBR
- Threaded connection Messing vernickelt
10 Technical data
Please observe the informations specified on the type plate.
Characteristics W083
Measuring range -40…200 °C
Accuracy Class B
Response time 25 °C ---> 90 °C: 15 s (temporarily)
t90 in water
Temperaturfühler
- Sensor 2x Pt100/B/2 • IEC 751
- Nominal resistance 100 Ω
at 0 °C ±0,3 °C
- permissible measuring current 1 mA
Version W083…X
Maximum current Ii = 20 mA
Maximum voltage Ui = 30 VDC
Process variables
Electrical connection Type J connection head, rotatable
with cable gland M16 x 1,5
Immersion tube:
- Diameter 8 x 1 mm
- Length 50 mm
- Material / Nominal pressure Stainless steel 1.4571 / PN 40
Medium Must be cleared for compability with immersion tube material,
see also 8."Protective tube "
Medium temperature see measuring range
Ambient temperature 0…70 °C
Process connection *1) G½A
Resistance to vibration Characteristic curve 2, 4g
Approvals ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LRS, RINA, Class NK
- 30 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Resistance thermometer Dimension
11 Dimension

Manufacturer declaration Resistance thermometer
12 Manufacturer declaration
- 32 - © SiKA • Ba_W083_en.doc 12/2011

Manufacturer Declaration
We hereby declare that the resistance thermometer type
W083P220502J02WX
manufactured by
SIKA Dr. Siebert & Kühn GmbH & Co. KG

has undergone ignition hazard evaluation in accordance with EN 13463-1: 2009 and does not have
any inherent potential sources of ignition when used as intended. It is therefore not subject to Directive
94/9/EC.
The resistance thermometer constitutes a simple electrical device for connection to a certified
intrinsically safe electrical circuit as described in EN 60079-11: 2007. The effective internal
inductances and capacitances are negligibly small.
The resistance thermometer is intended to be used in areas where a potentially explosive atmosphere
is present. The resistance thermometer may be used in Zone 1. The ignition energy of the potentially
explosive atmosphere may be less than 60 µJ (Explosion Group IIC).
The following additional requirements must be observed:
The ignition temperature of the medium to be monitored must be at least 10 K above the temperature
measuring range. This yields an ignition temperature of 210 °C (200 °C + 10K), corresponding to
Temperature Class T2.
It must be ensured that all metallic parts of the resistance thermometer are connected to the potential
equalisation system. This can for example be done by installing the device on a metallic piping
system. This must be ensured before the device is put into service.
Attachment in Zone 0:
To prevent potential ignition sources from becoming effective in the event of foreseeable or rare
disturbances, a protective tube compliant with DIN 43772: 2000 must be used as a protective
measure. If this protective tube is used, the device may be attached to equipment in Zone 0 explosion
hazard areas.
Maximum currency Ii = 20mA;
Maximum voltage Ui = 30VDC
Installation and commissioning must be performed by suitably qualified staff.
Kaufungen, the 31. August 2012
i.V.
Dipl.- Ing. K. Ulloth
(CE- Koordinator und Produktsicherheitsbeauftragter)
(Manager CE- Coordination and Safety Supervisor)
Herstellererklärung Widerstandsthermometers W083P220502J02WX_engl-ID15.doc

Motors | Automation | Energy | Transmission & Distribution | Coatings
Manual geral de instalação, operação e

manutenção de motores elétricos
Installation, operation and maintenance manual
of electric motors
Manual general de instalación, operación y
mantenimiento de motores eléctricos
Installations-, betriebs- und wartungsanleitung für
elektrische motoren
Manual de instalare, exploatare şi întreţinere a
motoarelor electrice
Ръководство за монтаж, експлоатация и
поддръжка на електродвигатели
Руководство по установке, эксплуатации и
техническому обслуживанию электрических
двигателей
--
www.weg.net
Português 2
English 57
Español 111
Deutsch 166
Română 221
Български 275
Русский 332
ENGLISH
Manual of Electric Motors 57

www.weg.net
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL OF ELECTRIC MOTORS
This manual provides information about WEG induction motors fitted with squirrel cage,
permanent magnet or hybrid rotors, low, medium and high voltage, in frame sizes IEC 56
to 630 and NEMA 42 to 9606/10.
The motor lines indicated below have additional information that can be checked in their
respective manuals:
g Smoke Extraction Motors;
g Electromagnetic Brake Motors;
g Hazardous Area Motors.
These motors meet the following standards, if applicable:

g NBR 17094-1: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 1: trifásicos.
g NBR 17094-2: Máquinas Elétricas Girantes - Motores de Indução - Parte 2: monofásicos.
g IEC 60034-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 1: Rating and Performance.
g NEMA MG 1: Motors and Generators.
g CSA C 22.2 N°100: Motors and Generators.
g UL 1004-1: Rotating Electrical Machines - General Requirements.
If you have any questions regarding this manual please contact your local WEG branch,
contact details can be found at www.weg.net.
58 Manual of Electric Motors

www.weg.net
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. TERMINOLOGY 61
2. INITIAL RECOMMENDATIONS 62
2.1. WARNING SYMBOL........................................................................................................................... 62
2.2. RECEIVING INSPECTION................................................................................................................. 62
2.3. NAMEPLATES.................................................................................................................................... 63
3. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 66
4. HANDLING AND TRANSPORT 67

4.1. LIFTING............................................................................................................................................... 67
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt....................................................................................... 67
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts....................................................................................... 68
4.1.3. Vertical motors . ...................................................................................................................... 69
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position................................................ 69
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF and W50 motors in the vertical position............................... 70
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position.............................. 71
5. STORAGE 73
5.1. EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES.................................................................................................. 73
5.2. STORAGE.......................................................................................................................................... 73
ENGLISH
5.3 BEARINGS.......................................................................................................................................... 74
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings..................................................................................................... 74
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings............................................................................................................ 74
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings.................................................................................................... 75
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing.......................................................................................................................... 75
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................. 75
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement...................................................................................... 75
6. INSTALLATION 78
6.1. FOUNDATIONS................................................................................................................................... 79
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING.......................................................................................................................... 81
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 81
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors......................................................................................................... 81
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors.............................................................................................................. 82
6.3. BALANCING....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4. COUPLINGS....................................................................................................................................... 82
6.4.1. Direct coupling......................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling.................................................................................................................... 83
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling......................................................................................................... 83
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors....................................................................................... 83
6.5. LEVELING.......................................................................................................................................... 84
6.6. ALIGNMENT....................................................................................................................................... 84
6.7. CONNECTION OF OIL LUBRICATED OR OIL MIST LUBRICATED MOTORS............................... 85
6.8. CONNECTION OF THE COOLING WATER SYSTEM...................................................................... 85
6.9. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION............................................................................................................ 85
6.10. CONNECTION OF THE THERMAL PROTECTION DEVICES........................................................ 89
6.11. RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS (PT-100)................................................................. 90
6.12. CONNECTION OF THE SPACE HEATERS..................................................................................... 91

www.weg.net
6.13. STARTING METHODS..................................................................................................................... 92

6.14. MOTORS DRIVEN BY FREQUENCY INVERTER........................................................................... 93
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter.................................................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire....................................................................................... 93
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils................................................................................................ 93
6.14.2. Bearing insulation................................................................................................................. 94
6.14.3. Switching frequency.............................................................................................................. 94
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation................................................................................................. 94
7. COMMISSIONING 95
7.1. INITIAL START-UP ............................................................................................................................ 95
7.2. OPERATING CONDITIONS .............................................................................................................. 97
7.2.1.Limits of vibration . .................................................................................................................. 98
8. MAINTENANCE 99
8.1. GENERAL INSPECTION.................................................................................................................... 99
8.2. LUBRICATION.................................................................................................................................... 99
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings...................................................................................... 100
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting.............................................................................................. 103
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting.................................................................................................... 103
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases............................... 104
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings......................................................................................................... 104
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings................................................................................................. 105
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings..................................................................................................................... 105
ENGLISH
8.3. MOTOR ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................... 106

8.3.1. Terminal box........................................................................................................................... 107
8.4. DRYING THE STATOR WINDING INSULATION............................................................................ 107
8.5. SPARE PARTS................................................................................................................................. 108
9. ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION 109

9.1. PACKAGING..................................................................................................................................... 109
9.2. PRODUCT......................................................................................................................................... 109
10. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART X SOLUTIONS 110

www.weg.net
1. TERMINOLOGY
Balancing: the procedure by which the mass distribution of a rotor is checked and, if necessary, adjusted to
ensure that the residual unbalance or the vibration of the journals and/or forces on the bearings at a frequency
corresponding to service speed are within specified limits in International Standards.
[ISO 1925:2001, definition 4.1]
Balance quality grade: indicates the peak velocity amplitude of vibration, given in mm/s, of a rotor running free-
in-space and it is the product of a specific unbalance and the angular velocity of the rotor at maximum
operating speed.
Grounded Part: metallic part connected to the grounding system.
Live Part: conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal operation, including a neutral
conductor.
Authorized personnel: employee who has formal approval of the company.
Qualified personnel: employee who meets the following conditions simultaneously:

g Receives training under the guidance and responsibility of a qualified and authorized professional;
g Works under the responsibility of a qualified and approved professional.
Note: The qualification is only valid for the company that trained the employee in the conditions set out by the authorized and qualified
professional responsible for training.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
2. INITIAL RECOMMENDATIONS
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. Therefore, it is recommended that transportation, storage,
installation, operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Also the applicable procedures and relevant standards of the country where the machine will be installed must
be considered.
Noncompliance with the recommended procedures in this manual and other references on the WEG website
may cause severe personal injuries and/or substantial property damage and may void the product warranty.
For practical reasons, it is not possible to include in this Manual detailed information that covers all construction
variables nor covering all possible assembly, operation or maintenance alternatives.
This Manual contains only the required information that allows qualified and trained personnel to carry out their
services. The product images are shown for illustrative purpose only.
For Smoke Extraction Motors, please refer to the additional instruction manual 50026367 available on the
website www.weg.net.
For brake motors, please refer to the information contained in WEG 50021973 brake motor manual available on
the website www.weg.net.
For information about permissible radial and axial shaft loads, please check the product technical catalogue.
The user is responsible for the correct definition of the installation environment and application
characteristics.
During the warranty period, all repair, overhaul and reclamation services must be carried out by WEG
ENGLISH
authorized Service Centers to maintain validity of the warranty.
2.1. WARNING SYMBOL
Warning about safety and warranty.
2.2. RECEIVING INSPECTION

All motors are tested during the manufacturing process.
The motor must be checked when received for any damage that may have occurred during the transportation.
All damages must be reported in writing to the transportation company, to the insurance company and to
WEG. Failure to comply with such procedures will void the product warranty.
You must inspect the product:
g Check if nameplate data complies with the purchase order;
g Remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand to ensure that it rotates freely;
g Check that the motor has not been exposed to excessive dust and moisture during the transportation.
Do not remove the protective grease from the shaft, or the plugs from the cable entries. These protections must
remain in place until the installation has been completed.

www.weg.net
2.3. NAMEPLATES
The nameplate contains information that describes the construction characteristics and the performance of the
motor. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 show nameplate layout examples.
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 - IEC motor nameplate

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.1 - IEC motor nameplate

www.weg.net
ENGLISH
Figure 2.2 - NEMA motor nameplate

www.weg.net
3. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The motor must be disconnected from the power supply and be completely stopped before conducting
any installation or maintenance procedures. Additional measures should be taken to avoid accidental
motor starting.
Professionals working with electrical installations, either in the assembly, operation or maintenance,
should use proper tools and be instructed on the application of standards and safety requirements,
including the use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) that must be carefully observed in order to
reduce risk of personal injury during these services.
Electric motors have energized circuits, exposed rotating parts and hot surfaces that may cause serious
injury to people during normal operation. It is recommended that transportation, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance services are always performed by qualified personnel.
Always follow the safety, installation, maintenance and inspection instructions in accordance with the applicable
standards in each country.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
4. HANDLING AND TRANSPORT

Individually packaged motors should never be lifted by the shaft or by the packaging. They must be lifted only by
means of the eyebolts, when supplied. Use always suitable lifting devices to lift the motor. Eyebolts on the frame
are designed for lifting the machine weight only as indicated on the motor nameplate. Motors supplied on pallets
must be lifted by the pallet base with lifting devices fully supporting the motor weight.
The package should never be dropped. Handle it carefully to avoid bearing damage.
Eyebolts provided on the frame are designed for lifting the machine only. Do not use these eyebolts for
lifting the motor with coupled equipment such as bases, pulleys, pumps, reducers, etc..
Never use damaged, bent or cracked eyebolts. Always check the eyebolt condition before lifting the motor.
Eyebolts mounted on components, such as on end shields, forced ventilation kits, etc. must be used for lifting
these components only. Do not use them for lifting the complete machine set.
Handle the motor carefully without sudden impacts to avoid bearing damage and prevent excessive mechanical
stresses on the eyebolts resulting in its rupture.
To move or transport motors with cylindrical roller bearings or angular contact ball bearings, use always
the shaft locking device provided with the motor.
All HGF motors, regardless of bearing type, must be transported with shaft locking device fitted.
Vertical mounted motors with oil-lubricated bearings must be transported in the vertical position. If necessary to
move or transport the motor in the horizontal position, install the shaft locking device on both sides (drive end
and non-drive end) of the motor.
4.1. LIFTING
ENGLISH
Before lifting the motor ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly and the eyebolt shoulders are in
contact with the base to be lifted, as shown in Figure 4.1. Figure 4.2 shows an incorrect tightening of the
eyebolt.
Ensure that lifting machine has the required lifting capacity for the weight indicated on the motor nameplate.
Figure 4.1 - Correct tightening of the eyebolt Figure 4.2 - Incorrect tightening of
the eyebolt
The center-of-gravity may change depending on motor design and accessories. During the lifting
procedures the maximum allowed angle of inclination should never be exceeded as specified below.
4.1.1. Horizontal motors with one eyebolt

30° Max.
For horizontal motors fitted with only one

eyebolt, the maximum allowed angle-of-
inclination during the lifting process should
not exceed 30º in relation to the vertical
axis, as shown in Figure 4.3.
Figure 4.3 - Maximum allowed angle-of-inclination for motor with one eyebolt

www.weg.net
4.1.2. Horizontal motor with two eyebolts

When motors are fitted with two or more eyebolts, all supplied eyebolts must be used simultaneously for the
lifting procedure.
There are two possible eyebolt arrangements (vertical and inclined), as shown below:
g F
or motors with vertical lifting eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.4, the maximum allowed lifting angle should not
exceed 45° in relation to the vertical axis. We recommend to use a spreader beam for maintaining the lifting
elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface;
45° Max.
Figure 4.4 - Maximum resulting angle for motors with two or more lifting eyebolts
g F
or HGF, W40 and W50 motors, as shown in Figure 4.5, the maximum resulting angle should not exceed 30° in
relation to the vertical axis;
ENGLISH
30° Max.
Figure 4.5 - Maximum resulting angle for horizontal HGF, W40 and W50 motors
g For motors fitted with inclined eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.6, the use of a spreader beam is required for
maintaining the lifting elements (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor
surface.
Figure 4.6 - Use of a spreader beam for lifting

www.weg.net
4.1.3. Vertical motors

For vertical mounted motors, as shown in Figure 4.7, the use of a spreader beam is required for maintaining the
lifting element (chain or rope) in vertical position and thus preventing damage to the motor surface.
Figure 4.7 - Lifting of vertical mounted motors
Always use the eyebolts mounted on the top side of the motor, diametrically opposite, considering the
mounting position. See Figure 4.8.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.8 - Lifting of HGF and W50 motors.
4.1.3.1. Procedures to place W22 motors in the vertical position

For safety reasons during the transport, vertical mounted Motors are usually packed and supplied in horizontal
position.
To place W22 motors fitted with eyebolts (see Figure 4.6), to the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Remove the motor from the packaging, using the top mounted eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.9;
Figure 4.9 - Removing the motor from the packaging

www.weg.net
3. Install a second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.10;
Figure 4.10 - Installation of the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts to start the motor rotation, as shown in Figure 4.11. This
procedure must be carried out slowly and carefully.
ENGLISH
Figure 4.11 - End result: motor placed in vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.1.3.2. Procedures to place HGF and W50 motors in the vertical position
HGF motors are fitted with eight lifting points: four at drive end and four at non-drive end. W50 motors are fitted
with nine lifting points: four at drive end, one in the central part and four at non-drive end. The motors are
usually transported in horizontal position, however for the installation they must be placed in the vertical
position.
To place an these motors in the vertical position, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the motor by using the four lateral eyebolts and two hoists, see Figure 4.12;
Figure 4.12 - Lifting of HGF and W50 motors with two hoists

www.weg.net
2. Lower the hoist fixed to motor drive end while lifting the hoist fixed to motor non-drive end until the motor
reaches its equilibrium, see Figure 4.13;
Figure 4.13 - Placing HGF and W50 motors in vertical position
3. Remove the hoist hooks from the drive end eyebolts and rotate the motor 180° to fix the removed hooks into
the two eyebolts at the motor non-drive end, see Figure 4.14;
ENGLISH
Figure 4.14 - Lifting HGF and W50 motors by the eyebolts at the non-drive end
4. Fix the removed hoist hooks in the other two eyebolts at the non-drive end and lift the motor until the vertical
position is reached, see Figure 4.15.
Figure 4.15 - HGF and W50 motors in the vertical position
These procedures will help you to move motors designed for vertical mounting. These procedures are also
used to place the motor from the horizontal position into the vertical position and vertical to horizontal.
4.2 Procedures to place W22 vertical mount motors in horizontal position
To place W22 vertical mount motor in horizontal position, proceed as follows:

www.weg.net
1. Ensure that all eyebolts are tightened properly, as shown in Figure 4.1;
2. Install the first pair of eyebolts and lift the motor as shown in Figure 4.16;
Figure 4.16 - Install the first pair of eyebolts
3. Install the second pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.17;

ENGLISH
Figure 4.17 - Install the second pair of eyebolts
4. Reduce the load on the first pair of eyebolts for rotating the motor, as shown in Figure 4.18. This procedure
must be carried out slowly and carefully;
Figure 4.18 - Motor is being rotated to horizontal position
5. Remove the first pair of eyebolts, as shown in Figure 4.19.
Figure 4.19 - Final result: motor placed in horizontal position

www.weg.net
5. STORAGE
If the motor is not installed immediately, it must be stored in a dry and clean environment, with relative humidity
not exceeding 60%, with an ambient temperature between 5 ºC and 40 ºC, without sudden temperature
changes, free of dust, vibrations, gases or corrosive agents. The motor must be stored in horizontal position,
unless specifically designed for vertical operation, without placing objects on it. Do not remove the protection
grease from shaft end to prevent rust.
If the motor are fitted with space heaters, they must always be turned on during the storage period or when the
installed motor is out of operation. Space heaters will prevent water condensation inside the motor and keep
the winding insulation resistance within acceptable levels. Store the motor in such position that the condensed
water can be easily drained. If fitted, remove pulleys or couplings from the shaft end (more information are given
on item 6).
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.
5.1. EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES

All exposed machined surfaces (like shaft end and flange) are factory-protected with temporary rust inhibitor. A
protective film must be reapplied periodically (at least every six months), or when it has been removed and/or
damaged.
5.2. STORAGE
The stacking height of the motor packaging during the storage period should not exceed 5 m, always
considering the criteria indicated in Table 5.1:
Table 5.1 - Max. recommended stacking height
ENGLISH
Packaging type Frame sizes Maximum stacking quantity
IEC 63 to 132 Indicated on the top side of
Cardboard box
NEMA 143 to 215 the cardboard box
IEC 63 to 315
06
NEMA 48 to 504/5
IEC 355
Wood crate 03
NEMA 586/7 and 588/9
W40 / W50 / HGF IEC 315 to 630
Indicated on the packaging
W40 / W50 / HGF NEMA 5000 to 9600
Notes:
1) Never stack larger packaging onto smaller packaging;
2) Align the packaging correctly (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2);
Figure 5.1 - Correct stacking

X
Figure 5.2 - Incorrect stacking

www.weg.net
3) The feet of the crates above should always be supported by suitable wood battens (Figure 5.3) and never stand on the steel tape or
without support (Figure 5.4);
Figure 5.3 - Correct stacking

X XFigure 5.4 - Incorrect stacking
4) When stacking smaller crates onto longer crates, always ensure that suitable wooden supports are provided to withstand the weight
(see Figure 5.5). This condition usually occurs with motor packaging above IEC 225S/M (NEMA 364/5T) frame sizes.
ENGLISH
Figure 5.5 - Use of additional battens for stacking
5.3 BEARINGS
5.3.1 Grease lubricated bearings
We recommend rotating the motor shaft at least once a month (by hand, at least five revolutions, stopping the
shaft at a different position from the original one). If the motor is fitted with shaft locking device, remove it before
rotating the shaft and install it again before performing any handling procedure. Vertical motors may be stored
in the vertical or in horizontal position. If motors with open bearings are stored longer than six months, the
bearings must be relubricated according to item 8.2 before commissioning of the motor.
If the motor is stored for longer than 2 years, the bearings must be replaced or removed, washed, inspected
and relubricated according to item 8.2.
5.3.2 Oil lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the center of the sight glass.
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least
five revolutions, thus achieving an even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good
operating conditions. Reinstall the shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be replaced
according to Item 8.2, before starting the operation. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the
bearings must be replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and
relubricated according to Item 8.2. The oil of vertical mounted motors is removed to prevent oils leaks during
the transport. After receiving the motor the bearings must be lubricated.

www.weg.net
5.3.3 Oil Mist lubricated bearings

The motor must be stored in horizontal position. Lubricate the bearings with ISO VG 68 mineral oil in the
amount indicated in the Table 5.2 (this is also valid for bearings with equivalent dimensions). After filling with oil,
rotate the shaft by hand, at least five revolutions)
During the storage period, remove the shaft locking device (if any) and rotate the shaft by hand every week, at
least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Reinstall the shaft locking device
every time the motor has to be moved. If the motor is stored for a period of over two years, the bearings must
be replaced or removed, washed according to manufacturer instructions, checked and relubricated according
to item 8.2.
Table 5.2 - Amount of oil per bearing
Bearing size Amount of oil (ml) Bearing size Amount of oil (ml)
6201 15 6309 65
6202 15 6311 90
6203 15 6312 105
6204 25 6314 150
6205 25 6315 200
6206 35 6316 250
6207 35 6317 300
6208 40 6319 350
6209 40 6320 400
6211 45 6322 550
6212 50 6324 600
6307 45 6326 650
6308 55 6328 700
ENGLISH
The oil must always be removed when the motor has to be handled. If the oil mist system is not operating after
installation, fill the bearings with oil to prevent bearing rusting. During the storage period, rotate the shaft by
hand, at least five revolutions, stopping it at a different position from the original one. Before starting the motor,
all bearing protection oil must be drained from the bearing and the oil mist system must be switched ON.
5.3.4 Sleeve bearing

The motor must be stored in its original operating position and with oil in the bearings. Correct oil level must be
ensured. It should be in the middle of the sight glass. During the storage period, remove the shaft locking
device and rotate the shaft by hand every month, at least five revolutions, and at 30 rpm, thus achieving an
even oil distribution inside the bearing and maintaining the bearing in good operating conditions. Reinstall the
shaft locking device every time the motor has to be moved.
If the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be replaced,
according to Item 8.2, before starting the operation.
If the motor is stored for a period longer than the oil change interval, or if it is not possible to rotate the motor
shaft by hand, the oil must be drained and a corrosion protection and dehumidifiers must be applied.
5.4. INSULATION RESISTANCE

We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
5.4.1. Insulation resistance measurement

We recommend measuring the winding insulation resistance at regular intervals to follow-up and evaluate its
electrical operating conditions. If any reduction in the insulation resistance values are recorded, the storage
conditions should be evaluated and corrected, where necessary.
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.

www.weg.net
The insulation resistance must be measured with a megohmmeter. The machine must be in cold state and
disconnected from the power supply.
To prevent the risk of an electrical shock, ground the terminals before and after each measurement.
Ground the capacitor (if any) to ensure that it is fully discharged before the measurement is taken.
It is recommended to insulate and test each phase separately. This procedure allows the comparison of the
insulation resistance between each phase. During the test of one phase, the other phases must be grounded.
The test of all phases simultaneously evaluates the insulation resistance to ground only but does not evaluate
the insulation resistance between the phases.
The power supply cables, switches, capacitors and other external devices connected to the motor may
considerably influence the insulation resistance measurement. Thus all external devices must be disconnected
and grounded during the insulation resistance measurement.
Measure the insulation resistance one minute after the voltage has been applied to the winding. The applied
voltage should be as shown in Table 5.3.
Table 5.3 - Voltage for the insulation resistance
Winding rated voltage (V) Testing voltage for measuring the insulation resistance (V)
< 1000 500
1000 - 2500 500 - 1000
2501 - 5000 1000 - 2500
5001 - 12000 2500 - 5000
> 12000 5000 - 10000
The reading of the insulation resistance must be corrected to 40 °C as shown in the Table 5.4.
Table 5.4 - Correction factor for the insulation resistance corrected to 40 °C

ENGLISH
Measuring temperature Correction factor of the Measuring temperature of Correction factor of the
of the insulation insulation resistance the insulation resistance insulation resistance
resistance (°C) corrected to 40 °C (°C) corrected to 40 °C
10 0.125 30 0.500
11 0.134 31 0.536
12 0.144 32 0.574
13 0.154 33 0.616
14 0.165 34 0.660
15 0.177 35 0.707
16 0.189 36 0.758
17 0.203 37 0.812
18 0.218 38 0.871
19 0.233 39 0.933
20 0.250 40 1.000
21 0.268 41 1.072
22 0.287 42 1.149
23 0.308 43 1.231
24 0.330 44 1.320
25 0.354 45 1.414
26 0.379 46 1.516
27 0.406 47 1.625
28 0.435 48 1.741
29 0.467 49 1.866
30 0.500 50 2.000

www.weg.net
The motor insulation condition must be evaluated by comparing the measured value with the values indicated in
Table 5.5 (corrected to 40 °C):
Table 5.5 - Evaluation of the insulation system
Limit value for rated voltage Limit value for rated voltage
Situation
up to 1.1 kV (MΩ) above 1.1 kV (MΩ)
Dangerous. The motor can not
Up to 5 Up to 100
be operated in this condition
5 to 100 100 to 500 Regular
100 to 500 Higher than 500 Good
Higher than 500 Higher than 1000 Excellent
The values indicated in the table should be considered only as reference values. It is advisable to log all
measured values to provide a quick and easy overview on the machine insulation resistance.
If the insulation resistance is low, moisture may be present in the stator windings. In this case the motor should
be removed and transported to a WEG authorized Service Center for proper evaluation and repair (This service
is not covered by the warranty). To improve the insulation resistance through the drying process, see section
8.4.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
6. INSTALLATION
The insulation resistance must be measured in a safe environment.
Check some aspects before proceeding with the installation:
1. Insulation resistance: must be within the acceptable limits. See item 5.4.
2. Bearings:
If the motor is installed without running immediately, proceed as described in item 5.3.
3. Operating conditions of the start capacitors: If single-phase motors are stored for a period of over two years,
it is recommended to change the start capacitors before motor starting since they lose their operating
characteristics.
4. Terminal box:
a. the inside of the terminal box must be clean and dry;
b. the contacts must be correctly connected and corrosion free. See 6.9 and 6.10;
c. the cable entries must be correctly sealed and the terminal box cover properly mounted in order to ensure
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate.
5. Cooling: the cooling fins, air inlet and outlet openings must be clean and unobstructed. The distance between
the air inlet openings and the wall should not be shorter than ¼ (one quarter) of the diameter of the air inlet.
Ensure sufficient space to perform the cleaning services. See item 7.
6. Coupling: remove the shaft locking device (where fitted) and the corrosion protection grease from the shaft
end and flange just before installing the motor. See item 6.4.
7. Drain hole: the motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is at the lowest position (If there is any
indication arrow on the drain, the drain must be so installed that the arrow points downwards).
Motors supplied with rubber drain plugs leave the factory in the closed position and must be opened
periodically to allow the exit of condensed water. For environments with high water condensation levels and
motor with degree of protection IP55, the drain plugs can be mounted in open position (see Figure 6.1).
ENGLISH
For motors with degree of protection IP56, IP65 or IP66, the drain plugs must remain at closed position (see
Figure 6.1), being opened only during the motor maintenance procedures.
The drain system of motors with Oil Mist lubrication system must be connected to a specific collection system
(see Figure 6.12).
Closed position Open position
Figure 6.1 - Detail of the rubber drain plug mounted in closed and open position

www.weg.net
8.Additional recommendations:
a. C
heck the direction of motor rotation, starting the motor at no-load before coupling it to the load;
b. Vertical mounted motors with shaft end down must be fitted with drip cover to protect them from liquids or
solids that may drop onto the motors;
c. V
ertical mounted motors with shaft end up should be fitted with water slinger ring to prevent water ingress
inside the motor.
d. The fixing elements mounted in the threaded through holes in the motor enclosure (for example, the
flange) must be properly sealed.
Remove or fix the shaft key before starting the motor.
Changes on the motor construction (features), such as installation of extended grease fittings or
modification of the lubrication system, installation of accessories at alternative locations, etc., can be
carried out only after prior written consent from WEG.
6.1. FOUNDATIONS
The foundation is the structure, structural element, natural or prepared base, designed to withstand the
stresses produced by the installed equipment, ensuring safe and stable performance during operation. The
foundation design should consider the adjacent structures to avoid the influences of other installed equipment
and no vibration is transferred through the structure
The foundation must be flat and its selection and design must consider the following characteristics:
a) T
he features of the machine to be installed on the foundation, the driven loads, application, maximum
allowed deformations and vibration levels (for instance, motors with reduced vibration levels, foot flatness,
flange concentricity, axial and radial loads, etc. lower than the values specified for standard motors).
ENGLISH
b) Adjacent buildings, conservation status, maximum applied load estimation, type of foundation and fixation
and vibrations transmitted by theses constructions.
If the motor is supplied with leveling/alignment bolts, this must be considered in the base design.
Please consider for the foundation dimensioning all stresses that are generated during the operation of
the driven load.
The user is responsible for the foundation designing and construction.
The foundation stresses can be calculated by using the following equations (see Figure 6.2):
F1 = 0,5 * g * m - (4 * Tb / A)
F2 = 0,5 * g * m + (4 * Tb / A)
Where:
F1 and F2 = lateral stresses (N);

g = gravitational acceleration (9,8 m/s2);
m = motor weight (kg);
Tb = breakdown torque (Nm);
A = distance between centerlines of mounting holes in feet or base of the machine (end view) (m).

www.weg.net
The motors may be mounted on:

g Concrete bases: are most used for large-size motors (see Figure 6.2);
g Metallic bases: are generally used for small-size motors (see Figure 6.3).
F1 F1
A
F2 F2
Figure 6.2 - Motor installed on concrete base Figure 6.3 - Motor installed on metallic base
A
The metallic and concrete bases may be fitted with sliding system. These types of foundations are generally used
where the power transmission is achieved by belts and pulleys. This power transmission system is easier to
assemble/disassemble and allows the belt tension adjustment. Other important aspect of this foundation type is
the location of the base locking screws that must be diagonally opposite. The rail nearest the drive pulley is
placed in such a way that the positioning bolt is between the motor and the driven machine. The other rail must
be placed with the bolt on the opposite side (diagonally opposite), as shown in Figure 6.4 .
To facilitate assembly, the bases may have the following features:

g Shoulders and/or recesses;
g Anchor bolts with loose plates;
ENGLISH
g Bolts cast in the concrete;

g Leveling screws;
g Positioning screws;
g Steel & cast iron blocks, plates with flat surfaces.
Figure 6.4 - Motor installed on sliding base
After completing the installation, it is recommended that all exposed machined surfaces are coated with suitable
rust inhibitor.

www.weg.net
6.2. MOTOR MOUNTING
Footless motors supplied with transportation devices, according to Figure 6.5, must have their devices
removed before starting the motor installation.
Figure 6.5 - Detail of the transportation devices for footless motors
6.2.1. Foot mounted motors

The drawings of the mounting hole dimensions for NEMA or IEC motors can be checked in the respective
technical catalogue.
The motor must be correctly aligned and leveled with the driven machine. Incorrect alignment and leveling may
result in bearing damage, generate excessive vibration and even shaft distortion/breakage.
For more details, see section 6.3 and 6.6. The thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at
ENGLISH
least 1.5 times the bolt diameter. This thread engagement length should be evaluated in more severe
applications and increased accordingly.
Figure 6.6 shows the mounting system of a foot mounted motor indicating the minimum required thread
engagement length.
L = 1.5 x D
D
Figure 6.6 - Mounting system of a foot mounted motor
6.2.2. Flange mounted motors
The drawings of the flange mounting dimensions, IEC and NEMA flanges, can be checked in the technical
catalogue.
The coupling of the driven equipment to the motor flange must be properly dimensioned to ensure the required
concentricity of the assembly.
Depending on the flange type, the mounting can be performed from the motor to the driven equipment flange
(flange FF (IEC) or D (NEMA)) or from the driven equipment flange to the motor (flange C (DIN or NEMA)).
For the mounting process from the driven equipment flange to the motor, you must consider the bolt length,
flange thickness and the thread depth of the motor flange.
If the motor flange has tapped through-holes, the length of the mounting bolts must not exceed the
tapped through-hole length of the motor flange, thus preventing damage to the winding head.

www.weg.net
For flange mounting the thread engagement length of the mounting bolt should be at least 1.5 times the bolt
diameter. In severe applications, longer thread engagement length may be required.
In severe applications or if large motors are flange mounted, a foot or pad mounting may be required in addition
to the flange mounting (Figure 6.7). The motor must never be supported on its cooling fins.
Figure 6.7 - Mounting method of flange mounted motors with frame base support
Note:
When liquid (for example oil) is likely to come into contact with the shaft seal, please contact your local WEG representative.
6.2.3. Pad mounted motors

Typically, this method of mounting is used in axial fans. The motor is fixed by tapped holes in the frame. The
dimensions of these tapped holes can be checked in the respective product catalogue. The selection of the
motor mounting rods/bolts must consider the dimensions of the fan case, the installation base and the thread
depth in the motor frame.
ENGLISH
The mounting rods and the fan case wall must be sufficiently stiff to prevent the transmission of excessive
vibration to the machine set (motor & fan). Figure 6.8 shows the pad mounting system.
Figure 6.8 - Mounting of the motor inside the cooling duct
6.3. BALANCING
Unbalanced machines generate vibration which can result in damage to the motor. WEG motors are
dynamically balanced with “half key” and without load (uncoupled). Special balancing quality level must be
stated in the Purchase Order.
The transmission elements, such as pulleys, couplings, etc., must balanced with “half key” before they
are mounted on the motor shaft.
The balance quality grade meets the applicable standards for each product line.
The maximum balancing deviation must be recorded in the installation report.
6.4. COUPLINGS
Couplings are used to transmit the torque from the motor shaft to the shaft of the driven machine. The following
aspects must be considered when couplings are installed:
g Use proper tools for coupling assembly & disassembly to avoid damages to the motor and bearings;
g W
henever possible, use flexible couplings, since they can absorb eventual residual misalignments during the
machine operation;
g T
he maximum loads and speed limits informed in the coupling and motor manufacturer catalogues cannot be
exceeded;
g Level and align the motor as specified in sections 6.5 and 6.6, respectively.

www.weg.net
Remove or fix the shaft key firmly when the motor is operated without coupling in order to prevent
accidents.
6.4.1. Direct coupling

Direct coupling is characterized when the Motor shaft is directly coupled to the shaft of the driven machine
without transmission elements. Whenever possible, use direct coupling due to lower cost, less space required
for installation and more safety against accidents.
Do not use roller bearings for direct coupling, unless sufficient radial load is expected.
6.4.2. Gearbox coupling

Gearbox coupling is typically used where speed reduction is required.
Make sure that shafts are perfectly aligned and strictly parallel (in case of straight spur gears) and in the right
meshing angle (in case of bevel and helical gears).
6.4.3. Pulley and belt coupling

Pulleys and belts are used when speed increase or reduction between motor shaft and driven load is required.
Excessive belt tension will damage the bearings and cause unexpected accidents such as breakage of
the motor shaft.
6.4.4. Coupling of sleeve bearing motors
Motors designed with sleeve bearings must be operated with direct coupling to the driven machine or a
ENGLISH
gearbox. Pulley and belts can not be applied for sleeve bearing motors.
Motors designed with sleeve bearings have 3 (three) marks on the shaft end. The center mark is the indication
of the magnetic center and the 2 (two) outside marks indicate the allowed limits of the rotor axial movement, as
shown in Figure 6.9.
The motor must be so coupled that during operation the arrow on the frame is placed over the central mark
indicating the rotor magnetic center. During start-up, or even during operation, the rotor may freely move
between the two outside marks when the driven machine exerts an axial load on the motor shaft. However,
under no circumstance, the motor can operate continuously with axial forces on the bearing.
Axial clearance
Figure 6.9 - Axial clearance of motor designed with sleeve bearing

www.weg.net
For coupling evaluation consider the maximum axial bearing clearance as shown in Table 6.1.
The axial clearance of the driven machine and coupling influence the maximum bearing clearance.
Table 6.1 - Clearance used for sleeve bearings
Bearing size Total axial clearance (mm)

9* 3+3=6
11* 4+4=8
14* 5 + 5 =10
18 7,5 + 7,5 = 15
* For Motors in accordance with API 541, the total axial clearance is 12.7 mm
The sleeve bearings used by WEG were not designed to support axial load continuously.
Under no circumstance must the motor be operated continuously at its axial clearance limits.
6.5. LEVELING
The motor must be leveled to correct any deviations in flatness arising from the manufacturing process and the
material structure rearrangement. The leveling can be carried out by a leveling screw fixed on the motor foot or
on the flange or by means of thin compensation shims. After the leveling process, the leveling height between
the motor mounting base and the motor cannot exceed 0.1 mm.
If a metallic base is used to level the height of the motor shaft end and the shaft end of the driven machine,
level only the metallic base relating to the concrete base.
Record the maximum leveling deviations in the installation report.
6.6. ALIGNMENT
The correct alignment between the motor and the driven machine is one of the most important variables that
extends the useful service life of the motor. Incorrect coupling alignment generates high loads and vibrations
ENGLISH
reducing the useful life of the bearings and even resulting in shaft breakages. Figure 6.10 illustrates the
misalignment between the motor and the driven machine.
Motor shaft Driven machine shaft
Max.
misalignment
Driven machine
offset (mm)
Motor
offset (mm)
Figure 6.10 - Typical misalignment condition
Alignment procedures must be carried out using suitable tools and devices, such as dial gauge, laser alignment
instruments, etc.. The motor shaft must be aligned axially and radially with the driven machine shaft.
The maximum allowed eccentricity for a complete shaft turn should not exceed 0.03 mm, when alignment is
made with dial gauges, as shown in Figure 6.11. Ensure a gap between couplings to compensate the thermal
expansion between the shafts as specified by the coupling manufacturer.
Dial gauge
Reference
Line
GAP
Parallel alignment Angular alignment
Figure 6.11 - Alignment with dial gauge

www.weg.net
If alignment is made by a laser instrument, please consider the instructions and recommendations provided by
the laser instrument manufacturer.
The alignment should be checked at ambient temperature with machine at operating temperature.
The coupling alignment must be checked periodically.
Pulley and belt couplings must be so aligned that the driver pulley center lies in the same plane of the driven
pulley center and the motor shaft and the shaft of the driven machine are perfectly parallel.
After completing the alignment procedures, ensure that mounting devices do not change the motor and
machine alignment and leveling resulting into machine damage during operation.
It is recommended to record the maximum alignment deviation in the Installation Report.
6.7. CONNECTION OF OIL LUBRICATED OR OIL MIST LUBRICATED MOTORS

When oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors are installed, connect the existing lubricant tubes (oil inlet and
oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown in Figure 6.12. The lubrication system must ensure continuous
oil flow through the bearings as specified by the manufacturer of the installed lubrication system.
Inlet
Drain
ENGLISH
Outlet
Figure 6.12 - Oil supply and drain system of oil lubricated or oil mist lubricated motors
6.8. CONNECTION OF THE COOLING WATER SYSTEM

When water cooled motors are installed, connect the water inlet and outlet tubes to ensure proper motor
cooling. According to item 7.2, ensure correct cooling water flow rate and water temperature in the motor
cooling system.
6.9. ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Consider the rated motor current, service factor, starting current, environmental and installation conditions,
maximum voltage drop, etc. to select appropriate power supply cables and switching and protection devices.
All motors must be installed with overload protection systems. Three-phase motors should be fitted with phase
fault protection systems.
Before connecting the motor, check if the power supply voltage and the frequency comply with the
motor nameplate data. All wiring must be made according to the connection diagram on the motor
nameplate. Please consider the connection diagrams in the Table 6.2 as reference value.
To prevent accidents, check if motor has been solidly grounded in accordance with the applicable standards.

www.weg.net
Table 6.2 - Typical connection diagram for three-phase motors.

1 2 3
1
1
1 22
2 33 3
1 2 3
Type of 111 222 333
Configuration Quantity of leads Connection
L1 1
L1 L2
L1
L2 2 diagram
L2 L3L33
L3 LL
L
connection L1
L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
L2 L3
L3
L
L
L
L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L3
L3 3 L1
L
L1 L2 L3
3 - 66 44 55
66 44 55 6 66 44
6 4L1 55 L2 6 L3 4 55 6 4L
6
6 4 4 5 5 6 4
6 4 5
4 5 6
6 4 4
666
11 422 5334 4 5 6 611 4422 5533 666
11 4422
4
116 224 335 1 16 224 335 116 224
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1
1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2
1
1L1
L1 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1L1
L1
1 L2 222 L3
L2
L2 33
L3
L3 1
1L1
L1 222
L2
L2
6 Δ-Y
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2
L2 2 L333 L1
L3 L1
L1 1 L2
L2 2 L333
L3
L1
L1
L1
1 L2
1 L2 L2 2
L1
L1 L2 6 L2 L3 4 L3 5 L1 L2 L3 5
L1 6 L2 4 L3 L16 L2
L1 L2 4
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 55 66 4 5 6 44 55
4 5 6 L144 4 L2 55 5L3 66 6 4 5
4L1 L2
4
7
4 5 L36
5
8
5 6
9
6 4
7
4 5
8
5 6
9 4L1 L2
4
7
5
5
8
44777 5588 8 6699 9 7 5588
4477 8 666 99
9 4
44777 558 58
8
1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825 9 3
936 1
714 8
7 2
825
771 1 8822 9933 7711 8822 9933 771 1 8822
YY - Y L1L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L333
39 L1
3 L1
L1
17 L2
1
11 L2 L2
L2
28 L3
2
22 L3 L3
L3
33
39
3 L1L1 1 L2
1117 L2
L1 L2 2
2228
L2
L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2
L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5 L3 6 L1 4 L2 5
L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 L1 1 L2 L2 2 L3 L3 3 L1 1 L2
L1 L2 2
L17 L28 L39 L17 L28 L39 L17 L28
9 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
44 5 66 4 5 6 44 5
L1 44 L25 5 L3 6 L144 4 L25 5 L36 6 L1 4 L25 5
47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6 47 5
7
4 58 6
8
5 69
9
6
4
47 5
7 58
8
ΔΔ - Δ 447 7 5588 669 9 4477 5
588 6699 444
77 55
58 8
Single speed 777
1
71
14 88 2
82
25 99 3
9336 1
71
77714 88 2
82
25 99 3
93
36 1
71
77714 88 2
8225
L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28 L3 93
39 L1 1
17 L2 82
28
L1L1
L11 1 L2
L2
L22 2 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2L2
L2
22 L3
L3
L33 3 L1L1
L1
1 1 L2L2
L222
L1 1
L1 1 L2 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 2
L2 2 L3 3
L3 3 1
L1 1 L2
L1 2
L2 2
L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5 L3 L3 6 L1
L1 4 L2 L2 5
11 12 10 L1 11 L2 12L39 10 L1
11 7 12 L210 L39 11 12 10 11 12 10 L1 11 L2
11 12
11
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 12
11 12 10
12 10
10 11
11
11 1212810
12 10 11
10 11 12
11 12 10 10 11 12
11 12 10
12 10 7 11
10 118 11
11 1
5
11
5 12
11 6
126 10 4
10
104 1 5
11
11 2
5 12 6
12
126 10 3
104
104 5
11
11 1
5 12 6
12
126 10 2 4
10
104 311 55 12
11
11 66 10
12
12 44
10
10
11
5
11
5 12
11 6
12
126 10 4
10
104 1 55 2 1
11
11 6
1
1
11 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 12 6 10 4 5 6 4 5
581112
5
11
8
5
6
12
6
699 4
10
4
7
47 L1 11
115
5
8
5L2
8
126
6
69 9 L3 4
10
44
77
1111
L15
5
8
12447710 558811669912447710 558811669912447710 5588116699124477
58
126
6
9
6 9L2 4
10
4
7
47 L3 115
5
8
58
6
12
6
9
6 9
4
10
4
7
4
115
11
8
5
6
5811 12
6991210
6 4
4
7710
4 L1 11 11 5
5L2
8
5 8
12
166
69
ΔΔ - YY - Δ - Y 558
28 669 39 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1710 558
28 669 39 447 17 5582 811669 3
82
82 93
93 71
7 8
8 2 9
9 3 7
71 882 9
9 3 7
71 8
82 9
9 3 7
71 82
25 99 93
36 77 71 8225 99 9
882
L2
5
2 L3 993 6
3 L1 77114
17 L2 882 5
2
2 L3 993 36
3 L1 771 4
1
17 L2 882 5
2
2 L3 993 36
3 L1 771 4
1 882
17 L2
25
2 L3 993 6
3
3 L1 77114
17 888
L2 2
2 L3 933 L1 7114
17 L2 8882
2 L3 933
L22 8 L3 3 9 L11 L2 2 8 L3 3 9 L1 1 L2 2 8 L3 3 9 L11 L2 2 8 L33 9 L11 L22 8 L3 3 9 L11 L2 2 L3
3331
L2
2
L2
L2 11
2 L3 L3
3
L3 12
3 L1 L1
11
L1 10 L2
L2
L2
2 11
2 L3 L3
3
L3 12
3 L1 L1
L1
11 10 L2
L2
L2
2 11
2 L3 L3
3
L3 12
3 L1 L1
1
L1 10
1 L2 L2
L2
2 11
2 L3 L3
3
L3 12
3 L1 L1
1
L11 10 L2
2
L2
L2 11
2 L3 L3
3
L3 12
3 L1 L1
11
L1 10 L2
L2
L2
228 L3
11 L3
L3
L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L252L3 L363L1 L141 L2 L252L3 L3
L2
L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2 L25L3 L36L1 L141 L2
L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L2 L3 9 L1
8 PART-WINDING 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 L17 L2
9WYE-DELTA 8 L3 9 L1 7 L2 8 L3 9 L1 7
PART-WINDIN L2 8 L
PART-WINDING WYE-DELTA PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDIN
12 PART-WINDING
2 PART-WINDING
3 1
PART-WINDING 2 3 1 2 3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
1
WYE-DELTA 2 3 1 2 PART-WINDING
3 1
PART-WINDIN
PART-WINDING
2
L2STARTPART-WINDING
PART-WINDING
L3 L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2 START L3 WYE-DELTA
WYE-DELTA
L1 L2 RUN
L3 L1 L2 PART-WINDING
PARTIDAPART-WINDING
L3 L1 OPERA
L2 L3
PART-WINDING
START
START RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTARUN RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA PART-WINDIN OPER
OPER
START
START PART-WINDING RUN
RUN START
START WYE-DELTA RUN
RUN PARTIDA
PARTIDA OPERA
OPERA
12START
12
START 1010 11 1111 1212 RUN
RUN 1010 11 11
11 12START
12 10
START 1010 11 11
11 12 12
12 RUN
RUN 10
10 11 11
11 12
PARTIDA
12
PARTIDA 1010 1111 OPERA
OPERA 1212 11
Δ - PWS 1212
START 1010 11 1212 RUN 1010 11 12
START
12 10 11 12 RUN1010 11 PARTIDA
1212 1010 1111 OPERA1212 1 1
12
77 10
12 10
START88 11
10 11
99
11 12
77 10
12 10
RUN88 11
10 11
99
11 12
1266START 10
1044 11
5
115 12
6
126 10
RUN
44 11
10 11
55
11 12
12 10
7PARTIDA
88
10 11
99
11 12
OPER77 10
12 18
1
12
127 10 PART-WINDING
8 11 9 12
127 7 10 8 8 119 9 12
12 66 10
104 4 11
11
55
WYE-DELTA 12
12
6 6 10
10
44 11
55 12
127
7 1010 PART-WINDIN
8 1111 9 12
127 7 18 8
8
Part-winding start 7
6
712 84
6
76
8
4
8 10 95 9
5
911 776
5 6
7 12884
6 4
8 10995
4 5
9 11 667
5 6
7712 448 4
810559
8 5
911 667
9 6
7 12448
7 4
8810559 5
911
9
7
6
712 84
6
8
4
8 10 95
4
9
5
9511 776 6
7 12884
6 4
8 4
776
6
1 884
4
2
4 995
5
3 76
6
1 844
2 95
5
3 671 482 59
3 67
1 48
2 59
3 777
6
6
1
6 884
4
PARTIDA
2 995
5
3 76
OPER 6
1 844
2
61 START 2 53 17 44RUN 28 55 39 7 START
16 88 824 99 935 77 7 16 88 8
RUN
24 99 935 17 44 28 53 53 17 42 42
66117 444 2 28 553 39 6661 1 42 2 53 3 77711 82 2 933 71 1 822 933 61
661 42 2 5339 66161
422
L1112
1 6 L2210
2 4 L3311
3 5 L1 112
1 6 L2 210
2 4 L3 311
3 5 L1 112
1 7 22 L222
10 L3
8 33 3
311
9 1L1 L11
112 2
L2
210 L33
311 L1112
1 6 L2210
2 4 L3311
5 L1 112
1 6 L2 21
L1 22
11
L1
L1 L2 L3
L2 L3
33
L3 L1
1L1
1 22 L2 L3
L2 33L3
L3 L1
11
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 17 22
L1 L2
L2 8 33 L3
L3 9 L1 22
11
L1 L2 L3
L2 L3 L1
33
L3 L1
1L1
1 22 L
L
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L393 L1
82 L3 L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93
L1
L161 L2
L1 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L3 53 L1
L1
L161 L2 L2
L2 42 L3
L3
L353 L1
L171 L2
L1 L2
L2 L3
82 L3 93 L1 L171 L2 L2
L2 8
L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664 L3 L35 L1 L1 L2 L244L3 L3 55 L1 L166 L2 L2 L3 L3 L1
L16 L2 L24 L3 L35 44 L1 L1 556 L2 L2 664
L1 L2 L34 4 5
L1 6 6
L2 L3 7
L1 L2 8 4 9 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 L6
4 5 5 6 44 L35 5 6 6L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L34 4 5 5L1 6 6
1 2 3444 11 555 21 666 32 3 1 4424 11 3555 2 666 31 2 3 1 2 3444 11 522 6332
5 5 1 6 6
14 22 25 33 36 14 22 25 33 36 1 225 33
YY - Y L1 L2 L31 1 L1
2 L2
3 L3 L1 L2 11 L3 2 L1
3 L2 L3 L1 L2 L31 14 L1 2 L3
111 222 333 111 222 333 111 222 333
ENGLISH
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 L2 L3
Variable Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L36 L1
L1
L1 4 L252 L3
1 L2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2 L3 L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTAÇ
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOW LOW L2 L3
SPEED L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L1 1 L2
LOW
LOW L2
L33
SPEED
2SPEED
SPEED L3
L1
HIGH
HIGH
HIGHL1 1 L2 L22
SPEED
L33
SPEED
SPEED L3
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1
L2
ROTAÇ
ROTAÇ
1 ROTAÇ L2 2 L3 L3
LOW
44 5SPEED SPEED 66 HIGH 44 SPEED SPEED
55 66 MENOR
MENOR 44 ROTAÇ 55 66
LOW
LOW 4 55 5SPEED 6 HIGH
HIGH 4 SPEED 5 66 MENOR 4 ROTAÇ 5 6
4
4LOW
4 5 SPEED 6
6 4
HIGH4 5 5SPEED 6 4 ROTA
4 5
5 6 6
4
L1411 L2 55522 6L3 6
633
4
4L1
411 L2 555
22 6L3 6
63 4
L14
411 L2 555
22 6L 6
63
14 225 336 14 225 33 3 14 225 33 3
1
1LOW 2 SPEED 3 11 2 2SPEED 36 MENOR 1
1 ROTA 2 3 3
Δ - YY 1
11 22 33 2 3 HIGH1
11 22 33 3 1
11 22 33 2
6 L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Constant Torque L1
L1
L1 4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 6 L1 L1
L1 L2
4 L25 L3 L3
L363 L1
L1
1 L2
4 L25 L3 2 L
L6
L1
L1 LOW L2 SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
ROTA
L2 L3
L3
L1
L1LOW LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3 L1
HIGH
L1 L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3 MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2 ROTA
ROTA L3
L1
LOW
1 2SPEED SPEED 3 HIGH
HIGH 1 L2 SPEED
SPEED
2 3 MENOR
MENOR ROTA
ROTA 2 L3 3
44 L2
LOW
LOW SPEED
55SPEED L366 HIGH
HIGHL144 SPEED 55 L3
SPEED
SPEED 6 MENOR
MENOR L1 L2
ROTA
44 ROTAÇ 55 L6
Double speed LOW
LOW4 4 5SPEED 5SPEED 6 6 HIGH
HIGH 44 SPEED 5 66 6 MENOR 4 ROTA 5
44LOW 5 SPEED
5 66 HIGH4 5
4 5SPEED
5 6
6 MENOR 4
4 ROTA
4
5
55 6 66
Dahlander 4
L1 411 L2 5522 L3 6 633 4411 L2
L1 5522 6L3 633 4
L1411 L2 552 L63 6
14 225 336 14 225 336 1 2 2
1
1 2 2 3 3 1
1 2 3 3 14 2
1 25 3 3
111LOW 22 SPEED 33 111 222SPEED
HIGH 33 MENOR 111 2ROTA 2
2 33
3
YY - Δ L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 2 L3 L1 L2 2 L3
L1L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L3 63 L1 L1
L1 41 L2 L2
L25 L3 L3
L363 L1L1
L1
1
4 L2 L2
L25 L3 L
L
Constant Output L1
L1 LOW L2SPEED
L2 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1
HIGH L2SPEED L3
L3 MENOR L1 L2
L1 L2 L3
ROTA L3
L1
L1 LOW L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3 L1
HIGH
L1 L2
L2 L3
SPEED
L3 MENOR
MENOR L1
L11 L2 L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L1
LOW
LOW
LOW1 L2 SPEED
2SPEED
SPEED L33 HIGH
HIGH
HIGHL1 1 L2 SPEED
SPEED
2 L3
SPEED 3 MENOR
MENOR
MENOR L1 ROTA ROTA
L2
ROTA 2 L3 L
LOWLOW SPEED
SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED
SPEED MENOR
MENOR ROTAÇ
ROTAÇ
77 8LOW 99SPEED 77 88 HIGH 99HIGHSPEED 77 88 99 77 8
MENOR 88 ROTA 99
7 88 8LOW 9 SPEED 77 8 99 SPEED
7 88 99 7 7 8 99
7 9 8 7 7
11 882L18 9
33 L
777
71 8
1 2L1
8 L293 L3
3
9 71 2
17 82 39 93L1 L2 7 71L3 8
1 822 99 93
3 777 1 2 2 9L2 9 3
1 82 2 993 3 771 1 882 93 7711 82 3 117 82 28 9 3
117 82
4 28LOW
5 3
669SPEED11 17 82
4 28 93
5 3 9
6HIGH 17 82
SPEED
4 28 93
5 3669 14
4 222
11MENOR
4 5 5
5 33
3
3669
ROTA
111
4 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 14 4
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
66
6 11
1
44
4 22
2
5 5
5 33
3
6 6 441 5 52 6
5 63
6
41
4 55 66 5 2 6 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 4
4 55 663
1 5 2 6 444 55 L3 66 6
44
L1 L258 L3 69 444 L2
L1 555 L3 666 4L1
4L1 L258 L3 69 L1L1
L1
L2
74 L2L2
L2 85L3 L3
L396
9 Δ - Y - YY L1
7
L1
4 L2 L2
L2 L3
L3 L1
L1 7 L2
L2 8 L3
L3 9 7
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 L1
L1
L1
L1 L25L3
L2 L3 6
L3 L14 L2
L1
L1 L25 L3
L2 L36
L3
L1
L1
ONLY
ONLY
L1
4 L2 L2FOR
L2
5L3
FORL3 6
L3 L1
L1
L1
L1 1
L2 L3
MENOR
L2
MENOR
L22L3
L2
MENOR
MENOR
L3
L3 3
LOWL1
L1 1 L2
SPEED
L2 2L3 L3 3 HIGH L11L2
L1 SPEED
L2 2L3 L33 L11 L2
ONLY
L1
ONLY L2FOR2FOR
L3L3 3 MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW
LOW
LOW L1 SPEED
SPEED
L2
SPEED L3 HIGH
HIGH
HIGH L1 SPEED
SPEED
L2
SPEED L3 ONLY
STARTING
ONLYL1
STARTING L2FOR
FOR L3 L1
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
4 L2 5 L36
LOW 4 SPEED 5 6 HIGH 4SPEED 5 6 STARTING
ONLY 4
STARTING
ONLY FOR
FOR6
5 ROTAÇÃO
MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED
LOW HIGH SPEED STARTING MENOR
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED ONLY FOR
STARTING
STARTING
STARTING
ROTAÇÃO
ROTAÇÃO
LOW SPEED
L1 L211 11L3 2 22 3 3 HIGH
3 L1 L2 L3 66 SPEED 6 6 4 4 L15 5
4STARTING5L2 L3 L1 L2
ROTAÇÃO 11 L322 33
1 2 33
1 2 2 3 3 6 4 4 5 5 MENOR 11 2 2 3
LOW SPEED 111 222 333 HIGH SPEED 666 444ONLY 555 FOR 111 222 333
L1 1 L2 2 L3 3 L1 6 L2 L3
STARTING
4 5 ROTAÇÃO L1 1 L2 L3
Double speed L1L1 L2
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1 L2
L1 L2 L3 L3
L3 L1
L1 L22 L3
L2 L3
L
6 - LOWL1 L2
L1 L2
L2 SPEED L3
L3 HIGH
L1
L1 L2
L1 L2
SPEED
L2 L3
L3 MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L1
L2
L2ROTA
ROTA L3
L3
Double winding LOW
L1
LOW
L1
LOW
LOW
L2
L2
1 SPEED
SPEED
SPEED
2 L3
SPEED
L3
L3 3
HIGH
L1
HIGH
L1
HIGH
HIGH
L2
L2
6 SPEED
SPEED
SPEEDL3
4 L3
SPEED
L3 5
MENOR
MENOR
MENOR
L1
L1 L2
L2
1 ROTA
ROTA
ROTA
ROTA2 L
L3
L3 3
LOW L1 L2
SPEED HIGH L1 L2
SPEED MENOR
MENOR L1 L2
LOW
LOW SPEED SPEED HIGH
HIGH SPEED SPEED MENOR ROTAÇ ROTA
LOW SPEED HIGH SPEED MENOR ROTA
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L
MENOR ROTA
Equivalent table for lead identificationLOW SPEED HIGH SPEED
Lead identification on the wiring diagram 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

NEMA MG 1 Part 2 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12
IEC 60034-8 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U3 V3 W3 U4 V4 W4
Single speed
JIS (JEC 2137) - up to 6 terminals U V W X Y Z
JIS (JEC 2137) - above 6 terminals U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U5 V5 W5 U6 V6 W6
Double speed NEMA MG 1 Part 21) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
(Dahlander / IEC 60034-8 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
Double winding) JIS (JEC 2137) 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
1) NEMA MG 1 Part 2 defines T1 to T12 for two or more winding, however WEG adopts 1U to 4W.

www.weg.net
WARNING - Local Standards have priority on the definition of the connection standards.
The connections presented below are a reference for the connection of the customer’s power cables on low
voltage motors with terminal block. The terminal blocks presented below are the standard for each product line,
however variations may occur.
It is recommended the use of terminals made of electrolytic copper or brass, similar to the terminals used on
the motors cables.
W21 and W22

Terminal block pin Terminal block pin
Nut Nut
Power supply terminal Power supply terminal
Bridge
Motor lead terminal Motor lead terminal
Delta connection Wye connection
Figure 6.13 - Connetion for W21 and W22 motors with terminal block
W50 and HGF
Terminal block pin Terminal block pin

Nut
Power supply terminal Nut
Power supply terminal
ENGLISH
Bridge
Motor lead terminal
Motor lead terminal
Delta connection Wye connection
Figure 6.14 - Connetion for W50 and HGF motors with terminal block
If motors are supplied without terminal blocks, insulate the cable terminals with suitable insulation material that
meets the power supply voltage and the insulation class indicated on the motor nameplate.
Ensure correct tightening torque for the power cable and grounding connections as specified in Table 8.11
The clearance distance (see Figure 6.15) between non-insulated live parts with each other and between
grounded parts must be as indicated in Table 6.3.

www.weg.net
Clearance distance
Clearance distance Clearance distance
Clearance distance
Figure 6.15 - Clearance distance representation
Table 6.3 - Minimum clearance distance (mm) x supply voltage
Voltage Minimum clearance distance (mm)

U ≤ 440 V 4
440 < U ≤ 690 V 5.5
690 < U ≤ 1000 V 8
1000 < U ≤ 6900 V 45
6900 < U ≤ 11000 V 70
11000 < U ≤ 16500 V 105
ENGLISH
Even when the motor is off, dangerous voltages may be present inside the terminal box used for the
space heater supply or winding energization when the winding is used as heating element.
Motor capacitors will hold a charge even after the power has been cut off. Do not touch the capacitors
and/or motor terminals, before discharging the capacitors completely.
After the motor connection has been completed, ensure that no tool or foreign body has been left inside
the terminal box.
Take the required measures in order to ensure the degree of protection indicated on the motor
nameplate:
- unused cable inlet holes in the terminal boxes must be properly closed with blanking plugs;
- components supplied loose (for example, terminal boxes mounted separately) must be properly closed and
sealed.
The cable inlets used for power supply and control must be fitted with components (for example, cable-glands
and conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations in each country.
If the motor is fitted with accessories, such as brakes and forced cooling systems, these devices must
be connected to the power supply according to the information provided on their nameplates and with
special care as indicated above.
All protection devices, including overcurrent protection, must be set according to the rated machine conditions.
These protection devices must protect the machine against short circuit, phase fault or locked rotor condition.
The motor protection devices must be set according to the applicable standards.
Check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft. If there is no limitation for the use of unidirectional fans, the
shaft rotation direction can be changed by reversing any two of the phase connections. For single-phase
motor, check the connection diagram indicated on the motor nameplate.

www.weg.net
6.10. CONNECTION OF THE THERMAL PROTECTION DEVICES

If the motor is supplied with temperature monitoring devices, such as, thermostat, thermistors, automatic thermal
protectors, Pt-100 (RTD), etc., they must be connected to the corresponding control devices as specified on the
accessory nameplates. The non-compliance with this procedure may void the product warranty and cause
serious material damages.
Do not apply test voltage above 2.5 V on thermistors and current above 1 mA on RTDs (Pt-100) according
to IEC 60751 standard.
Figure 6.16 and Figure 6.17 show the connection diagram of the bimetal thermal protector (thermostats) and
thermistors, respectively.
Figure 6.16 - Connection of the bimetal thermal protectors (thermostats)
ENGLISH
Figure 6.17 - Thermistor connection
The alarm temperature limits and thermal protection shutdowns can be defined according to the application;
however these temperature limits can not exceed the values in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 - Maximum activation temperature of the thermal protections

Maximum temperature of the protection setting (°C)
Component Insulation class
Alarm Tripping
B - 130
Winding F 130 155
H 155 180
Bearing All 110 120
Notes:
1) The number and type of the installed protection devices are stated on the accessory nameplate of the motor.
2) If the motor is supplied with calibrated resistance, (for example, Pt-100), the motor protection system must be set according to the
operating temperatures indicated in Table 6.4.

www.weg.net
6.11. RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS (PT-100)

The thermocouples Pt-100 are made of materials, whose resistance depends on the temperature variation,
intrinsic property of some materials (usually platinum, nickel or copper), calibrated resistance. Its operation is
based on the principle that the electric resistance of a metallic conductor varies linearly with the temperature,
thus allowing a continuous monitoring of the motor warm-up through the controller display ensuring a high level
of precision and answer stability. These devices are widely used for measuring temperatures in various industry
sectors.
In general these devices are used in installations where precise temperature control is required, for example, in
installation for irregular or intermittent duty.
The same detector may be used for alarm and tripping purposes.
Table 6.5 and Figure 6.18 show the equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature.
Table 6.5 - Equivalence between the Pt-100 resistance and the temperature
ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω ºC Ω
-29 88.617 17 106.627 63 124.390 109 141.908 155 159.180
-28 89.011 18 107.016 64 124.774 110 142.286 156 159.553
-27 89.405 19 107.404 65 125.157 111 142.664 157 159.926
-26 89.799 20 107.793 66 125.540 112 143.042 158 160.298
-25 90.193 21 108.181 67 125.923 113 143.420 159 160.671
-24 90.587 22 108.570 68 126.306 114 143.797 160 161.043
-23 90.980 23 108.958 69 126.689 115 144.175 161 161.415
-22 91.374 24 109.346 70 127.072 116 144.552 162 161.787
-21 91.767 25 109.734 71 127.454 117 144.930 163 162.159
-20 92.160 26 110.122 72 127.837 118 145.307 164 162.531
-19 92.553 27 110.509 73 128.219 119 145.684 165 162.903
-18 92.946 28 110.897 74 128.602 120 146.061 166 163.274
-17 93.339 29 111.284 75 128.984 121 146.438 167 163.646
ENGLISH
-16 93.732 30 111.672 76 129.366 122 146.814 168 164.017

-15 94.125 31 112.059 77 129.748 123 147.191 169 164.388
-14 94.517 32 112.446 78 130.130 124 147.567 170 164.760
-13 94.910 33 112.833 79 130.511 125 147.944 171 165.131
-12 95.302 34 113.220 80 130.893 126 148.320 172 165.501
-11 95.694 35 113.607 81 131.274 127 148.696 173 165.872
-10 96.086 36 113.994 82 131.656 128 149.072 174 166.243
-9 96.478 37 114.380 83 132.037 129 149.448 175 166.613
-8 96.870 38 114.767 84 132.418 130 149.824 176 166.984
-7 97.262 39 115.153 85 132.799 131 150.199 177 167.354
-6 97.653 40 115.539 86 133.180 132 150.575 178 167.724
-5 98.045 41 115.925 87 133.561 133 150.950 179 168.095
-4 98.436 42 116.311 88 133.941 134 151.326 180 168.465
-3 98.827 43 116.697 89 134.322 135 151.701 181 168.834
-2 99.218 44 117.083 90 134.702 136 152.076 182 169.204
-1 99.609 45 117.469 91 135.083 137 152.451 183 169.574
0 100.000 46 117.854 92 135.463 138 152.826 184 169.943
1 100.391 47 118.240 93 135.843 139 153.200 185 170.313
2 100.781 48 118.625 94 136.223 140 153.575 186 170.682
3 101.172 49 119.010 95 136.603 141 153.950 187 171.051
4 101.562 50 119.395 96 136.982 142 154.324 188 171.420
5 101.953 51 119.780 97 137.362 143 154.698 189 171.789
6 102.343 52 120.165 98 137.741 144 155.072 190 172.158
7 102.733 53 120.550 99 138.121 145 155.446 191 172.527
8 103.123 54 120.934 100 138.500 146 155.820 192 172.895
9 103.513 55 121.319 101 138.879 147 156.194 193 173.264
10 103.902 56 121.703 102 139.258 148 156.568 194 173.632
11 104.292 57 122.087 103 139.637 149 156.941 195 174.000
12 104.681 58 122.471 104 140.016 150 157.315 196 174.368
13 105.071 59 122.855 105 140.395 151 157.688 197 174.736
14 105.460 60 123.239 106 140.773 152 158.061 198 175.104
15 105.849 61 123.623 107 141.152 153 158.435 199 175.472
16 106.238 62 124.007 108 141.530 154 158.808 200 175.840

www.weg.net

5HVLVWrQFLD2KP

(Ohm)

Resistance

7HPSHUDWXUD&
Temperature (ºC)
Figure 6.18 - Ohmic resistance of the Pt-100 x temperature
6.12. CONNECTION OF THE SPACE HEATERS

Before switching ON the space heaters, check if the space heaters connection have been made according to
the connection diagram shown on the space heater nameplate. For motors supplied with dual voltage space
ENGLISH
heaters (110-127/220-240 V), see Figure 6.19.
Figure 6.19 - Dual voltage space heater connection
The space heaters should never be energized when the motor is in operation.

www.weg.net
6.13. STARTING METHODS

Whenever possible, the motor starting must be Direct On Line (DOL) at rated voltage. This is the most simple
and feasible starting method. However, it must only be applied when the starting current does not affect the
power supply. Please consider the local electric utility regulations when installing a motor.
High inrush current may result in:
a) high voltage drop in the power supply line creating unacceptable line disturbance on the distribution system;
b) requiring oversized protection system (cables and contactor) increasing the installation costs.
If DOL starting is not allowed due to the reasons mentioned above, an indirect starting method compatible with
the load and motor voltage to reduce the starting current may be used.
If reduced voltage starters are used for starting, the motor starting torque will also be reduced.
Table 6.6 shows the possible indirect starting methods that can be used depending on the number of the
motor leads.
Table 6.6 - Starting method x number of motor leads
Number of leads Possible starting methods
Autotransformer
3 leads
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
6 leads Autotransformer
Soft-starter
Series/Parallel
Part winding
9 leads
Autotransformer
ENGLISH
Soft-starter
Star-Delta
Series/Parallel
12 leads Part winding
Autotransformer
Soft-starter
Table 6.7 shows examples of possible indirect starting methods to be used according to the voltage indicated
on the motor nameplate and the power supply voltage.
Table 6.7 - Starting methods x voltage
Nameplate Operating Autotransformer Starting by series/ Part-winding Starting by
Star-delta
voltage voltage starting parallel switch starting Soft-starter
220 V YES YES NO NO YES
220/380 V
380 V NO YES NO NO YES
220 V NO YES YES YES YES
220/440 V
230 V NO YES YES YES YES
230/460 V
380/660 V 380 V YES YES NO NO YES
220 V YES YES YES YES YES
220/380/440 V 380 V NO YES YES YES YES
440 V YES YES NO NO YES
The WQuattro line motors must be started direct on-line (DOL) or driven by a frequency inverter in scalar
mode.

www.weg.net
6.14. MOTORS DRIVEN BY FREQUENCY INVERTER
The operation with frequency inverter must be stated in the Purchase Order since this drive type may
require some changes of the motor design.
Wmagnet Motors must only be driven by WEG frequency inverter.
The frequency inverter used to drive motors up to 690 V must be fitted with Pulse With Modulation (PWM) with
vector control.
When a motor is driven by a frequency inverter at lower frequencies than the rated frequency, you must reduce
the motor torque to prevent motor overheating. The torque reduction (derating torque) can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available on the site
www.weg.net.
If the motor is operated above the rated frequency, please note:

g That the motor must be operated at constant output;
g That the motor can supply max. 95% of its rated output;
g Do not exceed the maximum speed and please consider:
g max. operating frequency stated on the additional nameplate;
g mechanical speed limitation of the motor.
Information on the selection of the power cables between the frequency inverter and the motor can be found in the item
6.4 of the “Technical Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.
6.14.1. Use of dV/dt filter

6.14.1.1. Motor with enameled round wire
ENGLISH
Motors designed for rated voltages up to 690 V, when driven by frequency inverter, do not require the use of
dV/dT filters, provided that following criteria are considered.
Criteria for the selection of motors with round enameled wire when driven by frequency inverter
Inverter MTBP 2
Peak voltage at the dV/dt
Motor rated votage 1 Rise Time 2 Time between pulses
motor terminals (max) inverter output (max)
(min.) (min)
Vnom < 460 V ≤ 1600 V ≤ 5200 V/µs
460 ≤ Vnom < 575 V ≤ 2000 V ≤ 6500 V/µs ≥ 0,1 µs ≥ 6 µs
575 ≤ Vnom ≤ 1000 V ≤ 2400 V ≤ 7800 V/µs
Notes:
1. For the application of dual voltage motors, example 380/660 V, consider the lower voltage (380 V).
2. Information supplied by the inverter manufacturer.
6.14.1.2. Motor with prewound coils

Motors with prewound coils (medium and high voltage motors regardless of frame sizes, and low voltage
motors from IEC 500 / NEMA 800 frame on), designed for the use with frequency inverters, do not require the
use of filters, provided they comply with the criteria in Table 6.8.
Table 6.8 - Criteria to be considered when using motor with prewound coils to be drive by frequency inverters
Turn to turn insulation (phase-phase) Phase-ground insulation

Type of Peak voltage at Peak voltage at
Motor rated voltage dV/dt at the motor dV/dt at the motor
modulation the motor the motor
terminals terminals
terminals terminals
Sinusoidal ≤ 5900 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 3400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
690 < Vnom ≤ 4160 V
PWM ≤ 9300 V ≤ 2700 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 2700 V/µs
Sinusoidal ≤ 9300 V ≤ 500 V/µs ≤ 5400 V ≤ 500 V/µs
4160 < Vnom ≤ 6600 V
PWM ≤ 14000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs ≤ 8000 V ≤ 1500 V/µs

www.weg.net
6.14.2. Bearing insulation

Only the motors in IEC frame size 400 (NEMA 680) and larger are supplied, as standard, with insulated bearing. If
motor must be driven by frequency inverter, insulate the bearing according to Table 6.9.
Table 6.9 - Recommendation on the bearing insulation for inverter driven motors
Frame size Recommendation
IEC 315 and 355 g Insulated bearing/end shield
NEMA 445/7 to L5810/11 g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
IEC 400 and larger g Insulated NDE bearing
NEMA 680 and larger g Grounding between shaft and frame by grounding brush
When motors are supplied with shaft grounding system, monitor the grounding brush constantly during
its operation and, when it reaches the end of its useful life, it must be replaced by another brush with the
same specification.
6.14.3. Switching frequency

The minimum inverter switching frequency must not be lower than 2 kHz and should not exceed 5 kHz.
The non-compliance with the criteria and recommendations indicated in this manual may void the
product warranty.
6.14.4. Mechanical speed limitation

Table 6.10 shows the maximum speeds allowed for motors driven by frequency inverter.
ENGLISH
Table 6.10 - Maximum motor speed (in rpm)

Frame size Maximum speed for
DE-bearing
IEC NEMA standard motors
6201
6202
63-90 143/5 6203 10400
6204
6205
100 - 6206 8800
6207 7600
112 182/4
6307 6800
132 213/5 6308 6000
160 254/6 6309 5300
180 284/6 6311 4400
200 324/6 6312 4200
6314 3600
6315 3600
6316 3200
6319 3000
6218 3600
6220 3600
225-630 364/5-9610 6320 2200
6322 1900
6324 1800
6328 1800
6330 1800
6224 1800
6228 1800
Note:
To select the maximum allowed motor speed, consider the motor torque derating curve.
For more information on the application of frequency inverters, contact WEG or check the “Technical
Guidelines for Induction Motors driven by PWM Frequency inverters” available at www.weg.net.

www.weg.net
7. COMMISSIONING
7.1. INITIAL START-UP
After finishing the installation procedures and before starting the motor for the first time or after a long period
without operation, the following items must be checked:
g If the nameplate data (voltage, current, connection diagram, degree of protection, cooling system, service
factor, etc.) meet the application requirements;
g If the machine set (motor + driven machine) has been mounted and aligned correctly;
g If the motor driving system ensures that the motor speed does not exceed the max. allowed speed indicated
in Table 6.10;
g Measure the winding insulation resistance, making sure it complies with the specified values in item 5.4;
g Check the motor rotation direction;
g Inspect the motor terminal box for damage and ensure that it is clean and dry and all contacts are rust-free,
the seals are in perfect operating conditions and all unused threaded holes are properly closed thus ensuring
the degree of protection indicated on the motor nameplate;
g Check if the motor wiring connections, including grounding and auxiliary equipment connection, have been
carried out properly and are in accordance with the recommendations in item 6.9;
g Check the operating conditions of the installed auxiliary devices (brake, encoder, thermal protection device,
forced cooling system, etc.);
g Check bearing operating conditions. If the motors are stored and/or installed for more than two years without
running, it is recommended to change the bearings, or to remove, wash, inspect and relubricate them before
the motor is started. If the motor is stored and/or installed according to the recommendations described in
item 5.3, lubricate the bearings as described in item 8.2. For the bearing condition evaluation, it is
recommended to use of the vibration analysis techniques: Envelope Analysis or Demodulation Analysis.
g For roller bearing motors with oil lubrication, ensure:
g The oil level should be in the center of the sight glass (see Figure 8.1 and 8.2);
g That if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
ENGLISH
before starting the motor.
g When motors are fitted with sleeve bearings, ensure:
g Correct oil level for the sleeve bearing. The oil level should be in the center of the sight glass (see Figure 8.3);
g That the motor is not started or operated with axial or radial loads;
g That if the motor is stored for a period equal or longer than the oil change interval, the oil must be changed
before starting the motor.
g Inspect the capacitor operating condition, if any. If motors are installed for more than two years, but were
never commissioned, it is recommended to change the start capacitors since they lose their operating
characteristics;
g Ensure that the air inlet and outlet opening are not blocked. The minimum clearance to the nearest wall (L)
should be at least ¼ of the fan cover diameter (D), see Figure 7.1. The intake air temperature must be at
ambient temperature.
Figure 7.1- Minimum clearance to the wall

www.weg.net
Please consider the minimum distances shown in the Table 7.1 as reference value;
Table 7.1 - Minimum distance between the fan cover and wall
Frame size Distance between the fan cover and the wall (L)
IEC NEMA mm inches
63 - 25 0.96
71 - 26 1.02
80 - 30 1.18
90 143/5 33 1.30
100 - 36 1.43
112 182/4 41 1.61
132 213/5 50 1.98
160 254/6 65 2.56
180 284/6 68 2.66
200 324/6 78 3.08
225 364/5
85 3.35
250 404/5
444/5
280 445/7 108 4.23
447/9
L447/9
504/5
315 122 4.80
5006/7/8
5009/10/11
586/7
588/9
355 136 5.35
5807/8/9
5810/11/12
6806/7/8
400 147 5.79
6809/10/11
450 7006/10 159 6.26
500 8006/10 171 6.73
ENGLISH
560 8806/10 185 7.28

630 9606/10 200 7.87
g E
nsure correct water flow rate and water temperature when water cooled motors are used. See item 7.2;
g Ensure
that all rotating parts, such as pulleys, couplings, external fans, shaft, etc. are protected against
accidental contact.
Other tests and inspections not included in the manual may be required, depending on the specific installation,
application and/or motor characteristics.
After all previous inspections have been carried out, proceed as follows to start the motor:
g S tart the motor on no-load (if possible) and check the motor direction of rotation. Check for the presence of
any abnormal noise, vibration or other abnormal operating conditions;
g E nsure the motor starts smoothly. If any abnormal operating condition is noticed, switch off the motor, check
the assembly system and connections before the motor is started again;
g If excessive vibrations are noticed, check if the motor mounting bolts are well tightened or if the vibrations are
not generated and transmitted from adjacent installed equipment. Check the motor vibration periodically and
ensure that the vibration limits are as specified in item 7.2.1;
g S
tart the motor at rated load during a short time and compare the operating current with the rated current
indicated on the nameplate;
g C
ontinue to measure the following motor variables until thermal equilibrium is reached: current, voltage,
bearing and motor frame temperature, vibration and noise levels;
g R
ecord the measured current and voltage values on the Installation Report for future comparisons.
As induction motors have high inrush currents during start-up, the acceleration of high inertia load requires an
extended starting time to reach full speed resulting in fast motor temperature rise. Successive starts within
short intervals will result in winding temperature increases and can lead to physical insulation damage reducing
the useful life of the insulation system. If the duty cycle S1 / CONT. is specified on the motor nameplate, this
means that the motor has been designed for:
g T
wo successive starts: first start from cold condition, i. e., the motor windings are at room temperature and
the second start immediately after the motor stops;
g O
ne start from hot condition, i. e., the motor windings are at rated temperature.
The Troubleshooting Chart in section 10 provides a basic list of unusual cases that may occur during motor
operation with the respective corrective actions.
www.weg.net
7.2. OPERATING CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise stated in the Purchase Order, electric motors are designed and built to be operated at
altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea level and in a temperature range from -20 °C to +40 °C. Any deviation
from the normal condition of motor operation must be stated on the motor nameplate. Some components must
be changed if the ambient temperature is different from the specified one. Please contact WEG to check the
required special features.
For operating temperatures and altitudes differing from those above, the factors indicated in Table 7.2 must be
applied to the nominal motor power rating in order to determine the derated available output (Pmax = Pnom x
correction factor).
Table 7.2 - Correction factors for altitude and ambient temperature
Altitude (m)
T (°C)
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
10 0.97 0.92 0.88
15 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.86
20 1.00 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83
25 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.81
30 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.78
35 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.80 0.75
40 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.80 0.76 0.71
45 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.85 0.81 0.78 0.74 0.69
50 0.92 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.72 0.67
55 0.88 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.70 0.65
60 0.83 0.82 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.62
65 0.79 0.76 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.62 0.58
70 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.58 0.53
75 0.70 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.53 0.49
80 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.48 0.44
Motors installed inside enclosures (cubicles) must be ensured an air renewal rate in the order of one cubic
meter per second for each 100 kW installed power or fraction of installed power. Totally Enclosed Air Over
ENGLISH
motors - TEAO (fan and exhaust / smoke extraction) are supplied without cooling fan and the manufacturer of
the driven machine is responsible for sufficient motor cooling. If no minimum required air speed between motor
fins is indicated on the motor nameplate, ensure the air speed indicated in the table 7.3 is provided. The values
shown in Table 7.3 are valid for 60 Hz motors. To obtain the minimum air speed for 50 Hz motors, multiply the
values in the table by 0.83.
Table 7.3 - Minimum required air speed between motor fins (metres/second)
Frame Poles
IEC NEMA 2 4 6 8
63 to 90 143/5 13 7 5 4
100 to 132 182/4 to 213/5 18 12 8 6
160 to 200 254/6 to 324/6 20 15 10 7
225 to 280 364/5 to 444/5 22 20 15 12
315 to 450 445/7 to 7008/9 25 25 20 15
The voltage and frequency variations may affect the performance characteristics and the electromagnetic
compatibility of the motor. The power supply variations should not exceed the values specified in the applicable
standards. Examples:
ABNT NBR 17094 - Parts 1 and 2. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for a combined
g
variation in voltage and frequency:

g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency;
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods.
g IEC 60034-1. The motor has been designed to supply the rated torque for combined variation in voltage and
frequency:
g Zone A: ±5% of the rated voltage and ±2% of the rated frequency;
g Zone B: ±10% of the rated voltage and +3% -5% of the rated frequency.
When operated continuously in Zone A or B, the motor may show performance variations and the operating
temperature may increase considerably. These performance variations will be higher in Zone B. Thus it is not
recommended to operate the motor in Zone B during extended periods. For multivoltage motors (example 380-
415/660 V), a ±5% voltage variation from the rated voltage is allowed.
www.weg.net
g NEMA MG 1 Part 12. The motor has been designed to be operated in one of the following variations:
g ±10% of the rated voltage, with rated frequency;
g ±5% of the rated frequency, with rated voltage;
g A combined variation in voltage and frequency of ±10%, provided the frequency variation does not exceed
±5%.
If the motor is cooled by ambient air, clean the air inlet and outlet openings and cooling fins at regular intervals
to ensure a free airflow over the frame surface. The hot air should never be returned to the motor. The cooling
air must be at room temperature limited to the temperature range indicated on the motor nameplate (if no room
temperature is specified, please consider a temperature range between -20 °C and +40 °C).
Table 7.4 shows the minimum required water flow for water cooled motors considering the different frame sizes
and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor. The inlet
water temperature should not exceed 40 °C.
Table 7.4 - Minimum required water flow and the maximum allowed temperature rise of the cooling water after circulating through the motor
Frame size Flow rate Maximum allowed water
IEC NEMA (litres/minute) temperature rise (°C)
180 284/6 12 5
200 324/6 12 5
225 364/5 12 5
250 404/5 12 5
444/5
280 445/7 15 6
447/9
315 504/5 16 6
586/7
355 25 6
588/9
Motors fitted with oil mist lubrication systems can be operated continuously for a maximum of one hour after
the failure of the oil pumping system.
ENGLISH
Considering the sun’s heat increases the operating temperature, externally mounted motors should always be
protected from direct sunlight exposure.
Each and every deviation from the normal operating condition (tripping of the thermal protection, noise and
vibration level increase, temperature and current rise) should be investigated and corrected by WEG Authorized
Service Centers.
Motors fitted with cylindrical roller bearings require a minimum radial load to ensure a normal operation.
For information regarding the radial preload, please contact WEG.
7.2.1.Limits of vibration
The vibration severity is the maximum vibration value measured at all positions and in all directions as
recommended in the standard IEC 60034-14. Table 7.5 specifies the limits of the maximum vibrations
magnitudes according to standard IEC 60034-14 for shaft heights IEC 56 to 400, for vibrations grades A and B.
The vibration severity limits in Table 7.5 are given as RMS values (Root Mean Square values or effective values)
of the vibration speed in mm/s measured in free suspension condition.
Table 7.5 - Recommended limits for the vibration severity according to standard IEC 60034-14
Shaft height [mm] 56 < H < 132 132 < H < 280 H > 280
Vibration grade Vibration severity on elastic base [mm/s RMS]
A 1.6 2.2 2.8
B 0.7 1.1 1.8
Notes:
1 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid for measurements carried out with decoupled machines (without load) operated at rated voltage and
frequency.
2 - The values in Table 7.5 are valid regardless of the direction of rotation of the machine.
3 - The values in Table 7.5 are not applicable to single-phase motors, three-phase motors powered by a single-phase system or to
machines mounted in situ or coupled with inertia flywheels or to loads.
According to NEMA MG 1, the allowed vibration limit for standard motors is 0.15 in/s (peak vibration in in/s).
Note:
For the load operation condition, the use of the standard ISO 10816-3 is recommended for evaluating the motor vibration limits. In the
load condition the motor vibration will be influenced by several factors, such as, type of the coupled load, condition of the motor fixation,
alignment condition under load, structure or base vibration due to other equipments, etc..

www.weg.net
8. MAINTENANCE
The purpose of the maintenance is to extend the useful life of the equipment. The non-compliance with one of
these previous items can cause unexpected machine failures.
If motors with cylindrical roller or angular contact bearings are to be transported during the maintenance
procedures, the shaft locking device must always be fitted. All HGF motors, regardless of the bearing type,
must always be transported with the shaft locking device fitted.
All repairs, disassembly and assembly related services must be carried out only by qualified and well-trained
personnel by using proper tools and techniques. Make sure that the machine has stopped and it is
disconnected from the power supply, including the accessory devices (space heater, brake, etc.), before any
servicing is undertaken.
The company does not assume any responsibility or liability for repair services or maintenance operations
executed by non-authorized Service Centers or by non qualified service personnel. The company shall have no
obligation or liability whatsoever to the buyer for any indirect, special, consequential or incidental loss or
damage caused or arising from the company’s proven negligence
8.1. GENERAL INSPECTION
The inspection intervals depend on the motor type, application and installation conditions. Proceed as follows
during inspection:
g Visually inspect the motor and coupling. Check if abnormal noises, vibrations, excessive heating, wear signs,
misalignment or damaged parts are noticed. Replace the damaged parts as required;
g Measure the insulation resistance according to the item 5.4;
g C lean the motor enclosure. Remove oil spills and dust accumulation from the motor frame surface to ensure
a better heat transfer to the surrounding ambient;
g Check cooling fan condition and clean the air inlet & outlet openings to ensure a free air flow over the motor;
Investigate the actual condition of the seals and replace them, if required;
ENGLISH
g
g Drain the condensed water from inside the motor. After draining, reinstall the drain plugs to ensure the degree
of protection as indicated on the motor nameplate. The motor must always be positioned so the drain hole is
at the lowest position (see item 6);
g Check the connections of the power supply cables, ensuring the correct clearance distance between live and
grounded parts, as specified in Table 6.3;
g Check if the tightening torque of the bolted connections and mounting bolts meets the tightening torque
specified in Table 8.11;
g Check the status of the cable passages, the cable gland seals and the seals inside the terminal box and
replace them, if required;
g Check the bearing operating conditions. Check for the presence of any abnormal noise, vibration or other
abnormal operating conditions, like motor temperature rise. Check the oil level, the lube oil condition and
compare the workings hours with the informed life time;
g Record and file all changes performed on the motor.
Do not reuse damaged or worn parts. Damaged or worn parts must be replaced by parts supplied by
the manufacturer and must be installed as if they were the original parts.
8.2. LUBRICATION
Proper lubrication plays a vital role in the motor performance. Only use the grease or oil types, amounts and
lubrication intervals recommended for the bearings. This information is available on the motor nameplate and
the lubrication procedures must be carried out according to the type of lubricant (oil or grease).
When the motor is fitted with thermal protection devices for bearing temperature control, consider the operating
temperature limits shown in Table 6.4.
The maximum operating temperature of motors used in special applications may differ from those shown in
Table 6.4. The grease and oil disposal should be made in compliance with applicable laws in each country.
Please contact WEG when motors are to be installed in special environments or used for special
applications.

www.weg.net
8.2.1. Grease lubricated rolling bearings
Excess grease causes bearing overheating, resulting in bearing failure.
The lubrication intervals specified in Table 8.1, Table 8.2, Table 8.3, Table 8.4, Table 8.5, Table 8.6, Table 8.7
and Table 8.8 consider an absolute temperature on the bearing of 70 °C (up to frame size IEC 200 / NEMA
324/6) and 85 °C (for frame size IEC 225 / NEMA 364/5 and above), the motor running at rated speed, a motor
mounted in horizontal position and greased with Mobil Polyrex EM grease. Any variation of the parameters
listed above must be evaluated.
Table 8.1 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings
Lubrication intervals (hours)
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing Amount of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (g) (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2
4
90 143/5 6205 4 - - 20000 20000
6
8
2
4
100 - 6206 5 - - 20000 20000
6
8
2
4 6207/
112 182/4 9 - - 20000 20000
6 6307
8
ENGLISH
2 20000 18400
4
132 213/5 6308 11 - - 25000 25000
6 20000 20000
8
2 18100 15700
4
160 254/6 6309 13 20000 20000
6 20000 20000
8
2 13700 11500
4
180 284/6 6311 18 20000 20000
6 20000 20000
8
2 11900 9800
4
200 324/6 6312 21 20000 20000
6 20000 20000
8
2 18000 14400 4500 3600 5000 4000
4 11600 9700 14000 12000
6314 27
6 20000 20000 16400 14200 20000 17000
364/5 8 19700 17300 24000 20000
404/5 *Upon *Upon *Upon
2 14000 3500 4000
444/5 request request request
225 445/7 4 6316 34 10400 8500 13000 10000
250 447/9 6 20000 20000 14900 12800 18000 16000
280 L447/9
8 18700 15900 20000 20000
315 504/5
355 5008 2 *Upon request
5010/11 4 9000 7000 11000 8000
6319 45
586/7 6 20000 20000 13000 11000 16000 13000
588/9 8 17400 14000 20000 17000
4 7200 5100 9000 6000
6 6322 60 20000 20000 10800 9200 13000 11000
8 15100 11800 19000 14000

www.weg.net
Table 8.2 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings

Lubrication intervals (hours)
Amount
Frame W21 TEFC W22 TEFC
Bearing of ODP
Poles (Totally Enclosed Fan (Totally Enclosed Fan
designation grease (Open Drip Proof)
Cooled) Cooled)
(g)
IEC NEMA 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 19600 13300 9800 16000 12000
4
160 254/6 NU309 13 20000
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
8
2 18400 12800 9200 6400 11000 8000
4 19100
180 284/6 NU311 18
6 20000 20000 20000 25000 25000
20000
8
2 15200 10200 7600 5100 9000 6000
4 17200 21000
200 324/6 NU312 21
6 20000 20000 20000 25000
20000 25000
8
4 17800 14200 8900 7100 11000 9000
364/5 6 NU314 27 13100 11000 16000 13000
20000 20000
404/5 8 16900 15100 20000 19000
444/5 4 15200 12000 7600 6000 9000 7000
225 445/7 6 NU316 34 19000 11600 9500 14000 12000
250 447/9 20000
8 20000 15500 13800 19000 17000
280 L447/9
315 504/5 4 12000 9400 6000 4700 7000 5000
355 5008 6 NU319 45 19600 15200 9800 7600 12000 9000
5010/11 8 20000 20000 13700 12200 17000 15000
586/7 4 8800 6600 4400 3300 5000 4000
588/9 6 NU322 60 15600 11800 7800 5900 9000 7000
8 20000 20000 11500 10700 14000 13000
ENGLISH
Table 8.3 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
2 6314 27 3100 2100
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8T and
6320 50 4500 4500
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T 4-8
6316 34 4500 4500
2 6314 27 3100 2100
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9T and
6322 60 4500 4500
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6315 30 2700 1800
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8T and
6324 72 4500 4500
400 C/D/E 6809/10/11T 4-8
6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2500 1400
6328 93 4500 3300
4
450 7006/10 6322 60 4500 4500
6328 93 4500 4500
6-8
6322 60 4500 4500
6330 104 4200 2800
4
6324 72 4500 4500
500 8006/10
6330 104 4500 4500
6-8
6324 72 4500 4500
560 8806/10 4-8
*Upon request
630 9606/10 4-8

www.weg.net
Table 8.4 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - HGF line
Frame Bearing Amount of Lubrication intervals (hours)
Poles
IEC NEMA designation grease (g) 50 Hz 60 Hz
315L/A/B and 5006/7/8 and 4 4300 2900
NU320 50
315C/D/E 5009/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
355L/A/B and 5807/8/9 and 4 3500 2200
NU322 60
355C/D/E 5810/11/12 6-8 4500 4500
400L/A/B and 6806/7/8 and 4 2900 1800
NU324 72
400C/D/E 6809/10/11 6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 7006/10 6 NU328 93 4500 3200
8 4500 4500
4 1700 1000
500 8006/10 6 NU330 104 4100 2900
8 4500 4500
4 75 2600 1600
560 8806/10 NU228 + 6228
6-8 106 4500 4500
4 92 1800 1000
630 9606/10 6 NU232 + 6232 120 4300 3100
8 140 4500 4500
Table 8.5 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - W50 line
Frame DE Amount of 50 Hz 60 Hz NDE Amount of 50 Hz 60 Hz

Poles (h) (h) (h) (h)
IEC NEMA Bearing grease (g) Bearing grease (g)
2 6314 27 3500 6314 27 3500
315 H/G 5009/10
4-8 6320 50 4500 6316 34 4500
Horizontal mounting
4500 4500
2 6314 27 3500 6314 27 3500
Ball bearings
355 J/H 5809/10

4-8 6322 60 4500 6319 45 4500
400 L/K and 6806/07 and 2 6218 24 3800 2500 6218 24 3800 1800
ENGLISH
400 J/H 6808/09 4-8 6324 72 4500 4500 6319 45 4500 4500
2 6220 31 3000 2000 6220 31 3000 2000
450 L/K and 7006/07 and 4 3300
450 J/H 7008/09 6328 93 4500 6322 60 4500 4500
6-8 4500
2 7314 27 2500 1700 6314 27 2500 1700
315 H/G 5009/10 4 4200 3200
6320 50 6316 34 4500 4500
6-8 4500 4500
2 7314 27 2500 1700 6314 27 2500 1700
Vertical mounting
355 J/H 5809/10 4 3600 2700 3600

6322 60 6319 45 4500
Ball bearings
6-8 4500 4500 4500

2 7218 24 2000 1300 6218 24 2000 1300
400 L/K and 6806/07 and 4 3200 2300 3600
400 J/H 6808/09 6 7324 72 4300 6319 45 4500
4500 4500
8 4500
2 7220 31 1500 1000 6220 31 1500 1000
450 L/K and 7006/07 and 4 2400 1700 3500 2700
450 J/H 7008/09 6 7328 93 4100 3500 6322 60
4500 4500
8 4500 4500
Table 8.6 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - W50 line
Frame DE Amount of 50 Hz 60 Hz NDE Amount of 50 Hz 60 Hz

Poles (h) (h) (h) (h)
4 4300 2900
315 H/G 5009/10 NU320 50 6316 34
6 -8 4500 4500
Horizontal mounting
Roller bearings
4 3500 2200
355 J/H 5809/10 NU322 60
6-8 4500 4500
6319 45
400 L/K and 6806/07 and 4 2900 1800 4500 4500
400 J/H 6808/09 NU324 72
6-8 4500 4500
4 2000 1400
450 L/K and 7006/07 and 6 NU328 93 3200 6322 60
450 J/H 7008/09 4500
8 4500

www.weg.net
Table 8.7 - Lubrication intervals for ball bearings - W40 line
Frame DE Amount of NDE Amount of

Poles 50 Hz (h) 60 Hz (h) 50 Hz (h) 60 Hz (h)
2-8 6309 13 20000 20000 6209 9 20000 20000
160M/L 254/6
2-8 6311 18 20000 20000 6209 9 20000 20000
2-8 6311 18 20000 20000 6211 11 20000 20000
180M/L 284/6
2-8 6312 21 20000 20000 6211 11 20000 20000
2-8 6312 21 20000 20000 6211 11 20000 20000
200M/L 324/6
2-8 6314 27 18000 14400 6211 11 20000 20000
2 6314 27 18000 14400 6212 13 20000 20000
225S/M 364/5
Horizontal mounting
4–8 6314 27 18000 14400 6212 13 20000 20000

2 6314 27 18000 14400 6212 13 20000 20000
Ball bearings
250S/M 404/5
4–8 6316 34 20000 20000 6212 13 20000 20000
2 6314 27 18000 14400 6212 13 20000 20000
280S/M 444/5
4–8 6319 45 20000 20000 6314 27 20000 20000
2 6314 27 18000 14400 6314 27 18000 14400
280L 447/9
4–8 6319 45 20000 20000 6314 27 20000 20000
2 6314 27 4500 4500 6314 27 4500 4500
315G/F 5010/11
4–8 6319 45 4500 4500 6314 27 4500 4500
2 6218 24 2200 2200 6218 24 2200 2200
355J/H L5010/11
4–8 6224 43 4500 4500 6218 24 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2200 2200 6220 31 2200 2200
400J/H L5810/11
4–8 6228 52 4500 4500 6220 31 4500 4500
2 6220 31 2200 2200 6220 31 2200 2200
450K/J L6808/09
4–8 6228 52 4500 4500 6220 31 4500 4500
Table 8.8 - Lubrication intervals for cylindrical roller bearings - W40 line
Frame DE Amount of NDE Amount of

Poles 50 Hz (h) 60 Hz (h) 50 Hz (h) 60 Hz (h)
225S/M 364/5 4–8 NU314 27 20000 20000 6314 27 20000 20000
Horizontal mounting
250S/M 404/5 4–8 NU316 34 20000 20000 6314 27 20000 20000

Roller bearings
280S/M 444/5 4–8 NU319 45 20000 18800 6314 27 20000 20000

280L 447/9 4–8 NU319 45 20000 18800 6314 27 20000 20000
ENGLISH
315G/F 5010/11 4–8 NU319 45 4500 4500 6314 27 4500 4500
355J/H L5010/11 4–8 NU224 43 4500 4500 6218 24 4500 4500
400J/H L5810/11 4–8 NU228 52 4500 3300 6220 31 4500 4500
450K/J L6808/09 4–8 NU228 52 4500 3300 6220 31 4500 4500
For each increment of 15 ºC above the bearing temperature, the relubrication intervals given in the Table must
be halved. The relubrication interval of motors designed by the manufacturer for mounting in horizontal position,
but installed in vertical position (with WEG authorization), must be halved.
For special applications, such as: high and low temperatures, aggressive environments, driven by frequency
inverter (VFD - frequency inverter), etc., please contact WEG about the required amount of grease and the
relubrication intervals.
8.2.1.1. Motor without grease fitting
Motors without grease fittings must be lubricated in accordance with the existing Maintenance Plan. Motor
disassembly must be carried out as specified in Item 8.3. If motors are fitted with shielded bearings (for
example, ZZ, DDU, 2RS, VV), these bearings must be replaced at the end of the grease service life.
8.2.1.2. Motor with grease fitting
To lubricate the bearings with the motor stopped, proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Lift grease inlet protection;

g
Remove the grease outlet plug;

g
Pump in approximately half of the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate and run the motor for about
g
1 (one) minute at rated speed;

Switch-off the motor and pump in the remaining grease;
g
Lower again the grease inlet protection and reinstall the grease outlet protection.
g

To grease the motor while running, proceed as follows:
Before lubricating, clean the grease nipple and immediate vicinity thoroughly;
g
Pump the total grease indicated on the motor nameplate;

g
Lower again the grease inlet protection.

g
For lubrication, use only manual grease gun.
If Motors are provided with a spring device for grease removal, the grease excess must be removed by pulling
the rod and cleaning the spring until the spring does not remove more grease.
www.weg.net
8.2.1.3. Compatibility of the Mobil Polyrex EM grease with other greases
The Mobil Polyrex EM grease has a polyurea thickener and a mineral oil and it is not compatible with other
greases.
If you need another type of grease, contact WEG.
It is not recommended to mix different types of greases. In such a case, clean the bearings and lubrication
channels before applying new grease.
The used grease must have in its formulation corrosion and oxidation inhibitors.
8.2.2. Oil lubricated bearings

To change the oil of oil lubricated motor proceed as follows:
g S
witch-off the motor;
g R
emove threaded oil drain plug;
g O
pen the valve and drain the oil;
g C
lose the drain valve again;
g R
einstall the threaded oil drain plug;
g F
ill-up with the type and amount of oil as specified on the nameplate;
g C
heck oil level. The oil level is OK when the lubricant can be viewed approximately in the center of the sight
glass;
g R
einstall oil inlet plug;
g C
heck for oil leaks and ensure that all not used threaded plugs are closed with plugs.
Oil inlet
ENGLISH
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Oil outlet valve
Figure 8.1 - Oil lubricated bearing - vertical mounting
Oil inlet
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Figure 8.2 - Oil lubricated bearing - horizontal mounting

www.weg.net
The bearing lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes in the oil
properties are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked
every day and must be kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities should be used.
Note:
The HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust are supplied with grease lubricated DE-bearings and with oil lubricated NDE-
bearings. The DE-bearings must be lubricated according to recommendations in item 8.2.1. Table 8.9 specifies the oil type and the
amount of oil required for this motor lubrication.
Table 8.9 - Oil properties for HGF vertical mounted motors with high axial thrust
Frame Bearing Lubricant

Poles Oil (liters) Interval (h) Lubricant
Mounting - high axial thrust
IEC NEMA designation specification

315L/A/B e 5006/7/8T e
4-8 29320 20
315C/D/E 5009/10/11T
355L/A/B e 5807/8/9T e FUCHS ISO VG150
4-8 29320 26
355C/D/E 5810/11/12T Renolin mineral oil with
400L/A/B e 6806/7/8T e 8000 DTA 40 / antifoam and
4-8 29320 37 Mobil SHC antioxidant
400C/D/E 6809/10/11T
629 additives
450 7006/10 4-8 29320 45
8.2.3. Oil mist lubricated bearings

Check the service conditions of the seals and if replacement is required use only original components. Clean
the seal components before assembly (bearing caps, end shields, etc.).
Apply joint sealant between the bearing caps and end shields. The joint sealant must be compatible with the
used lubricating oil. Connect the oil lubricant tubes (oil inlet and oil outlet tubes and motor drain tube), as shown
in Figure 6.12.
ENGLISH
8.2.4. Sleeve bearings
The lubricating oil of sleeve bearings must be changed at the intervals specified in Table 8.10. To replace the oil,
proceed as follows:
NDE-bearing: remove the protection plate from the fan cover;
g
Drain the oil through the drain hole located at the bottom of the bearing (see Figure 8.3);
g
Close the oil drain hole;

g
Remove the oil inlet plug;

g
Fill the sleeve bearing with the specified oil and with the amount of oil specified in;
g
Check the oil level and ensure it is kept close to the center of the sight glass;
g
Install the oil inlet plug;

g
Check for oil leaks.

g
Oil inlet
Oil sight glass
Oil outlet
Figure 8.3 - Sleeve bearing

www.weg.net
Table 8.10 - Oil properties for sleeve bearings
Frame Bearing Oil Lubricant

Poles Interval (h) Lubricant
IEC NEMA designation (liters) specification
315 5000 ISO VG32
355 5800 FUCHS mineral oil with
2 9-80 2.8 8000 Renolin antifoam and
400 6800 DTA 10 antioxidant
450 7000 additives
315 5000 9-90
2.8 ISO VG46
355 5800 9-100
mineral oil with
FUCHS
400 6800 4-8 11-110 8000 antifoam and
Renolin DTA 15
antioxidant
450 7000 4.7
11-125 additives
500 8000
The lubricating oil must be replaced as specified on the nameplate or whenever changes on the oil properties
are noticed. The oil viscosity and pH must be checked periodically. The oil level must be checked every day
and kept in the center of the sight glass.
Please contact WEG, when oils with different viscosities are to be used.
8.3. MOTOR ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY
All repair services on motors should be always performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
the applicable laws and regulations in each country. Always use proper tools and devices for motor
disassembly and assembly.
Disassembly and assembly services can be carried out only after the motor has been disconnected from
the power supply and is completely stopped.
ENGLISH
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals inside the terminal box since capacitors can
retain electrical charge for long periods of time even when they are not connected directly to a power source or
when space heaters are connected to the motor or when the motor windings are used as space heaters.
Dangerous voltages may be present at the motor terminals when they are driven by frequency inverter even
when they are completely stopped.
Record the installation conditions such as terminal connection diagram, alignment / leveling conditions before
starting the disassembly procedures. These records should be considered for later assembly.
Disassemble the motor carefully without causing scratches on machined surfaces or damaging the threads.
Assemble the motor on a flat surface ensuring a good support base. Footless motors must be fixed/locked on
the base to prevent accidents.
Handle the motor carefully to not damage the insulated components such as windings, insulated rolling
bearings, power cables etc..
Seal elements, such as joint seals and bearing seals should always be replaced when wear or damage is
noticed.
Motors with degree of protection higher than IP55 are supplied with joint and screw seal Loctite 5923 (Henkel)
Clean the components and apply a new coat of Loctite 5923 on the surfaces before assembly.
For the W50 and HGF motor lines provided with axial fans, the motor and the axial fan have different markings
for indicating the direction of rotation for prevent incorrect assembly.
The axial fan must be assembled so that the indicative arrow for direction of rotation is always visible, viewing
the non-drive end side. The marking indicated on the axial fan blade, CW for clockwise direction of rotation or
CCW for counterclockwise direction of rotation, indicates the direction of rotation of the motor viewing the drive
end side.

www.weg.net
8.3.1. Terminal box

Proceed as follows to remove the terminal box cover and to disconnect/connect the power supply cables and
the cables of the accessory devices:
Ensure that during the screw removal the terminal box cover does not damage the components installed
g
inside the terminal box;

If the terminal box cover is fitted with lifting eyebolt, lift the terminal box cover always by its lift eyebolt;
g
If motors are supplied with terminal blocks, ensure the correct tightening torque on the motor terminals as
g
specified in Table 8.11;

Ensure that the cables do not contact sharp edges;
g
Ensure that the original IP degree of protection is not changed and is maintained as indicate on the motor
g
nameplate. The power supply cables and the control cables must always be fitted with components (cable
glands, conduits) that meet the applicable standards and regulations of each country;
Ensure that the pressure relief device is in perfect operating condition, if provided. The seals in the terminal
g
box must be in perfect condition for reuse and must be reinstalled correctly to ensure the specified degree of
protection;
Ensure the correct tightening torque for the securing bolts of the terminal box cover as specified in Table 8.11.
g
Table 8.11 - Tightening torque for the securing bolts [Nm]

Screw type and seal M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M20
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt 115 to 230 to
- 3,5 to 5 6 to 9 14 to 20 28 to 40 45 to 70 75 to 110
(rigid joint) 170 330
Combined slotted screw
1,5 to 3 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 - - - - -
(rigid joint)
Hex bolt/hex socket bolt
- 3 to 5 4 to 8 8 to 15 18 to 30 25 to 40 30 to 45 35 to 50 -
(flexible joint)
Combined slotted screw
- 3 to 5 4 to 8 8 to 15 - - - - -
(flexible joint)
ENGLISH
15,5 to
Terminal blocks 1 to 1,5 2 to 4 1) 4 to 6,5 6,5 to 9 10 to 18 - 30 to 50 50 to 75
30
115 to
Grounding terminals 1,5 to 3 3 to 5 5 to 10 10 to 18 28 to 40 45 to 70 - -
170
Note: 1) For 12-pin terminal block, apply the minimum torque of 1.5 Nm and maximum torque of 2.5 Nm.
8.4. DRYING THE STATOR WINDING INSULATION

Dismantle the motor completely. Remove the end shields, the rotor with the shaft, the fan cover, the fan and the
terminal box before the wound stator with the frame is transferred to the oven for the drying process. Place the
wound stator in the oven heated to max. 120 °C for two hours. For larger motors a longer drying time may be
required. After the drying process has been concluded, allow the stator to cool to room temperature. Measure
the insulation resistance again as described in item 5.4. Repeat the stator drying process if the required
insulation resistance does not meet the values specified in Table 5.3. If the insulation resistance does not
improve despite several drying processes, evaluate the causes of the insulation resistance drop carefully and an
eventual replacement of the motor winding may be required. If in doubt contact WEG.
To prevent electrical shock, discharge the motor terminals immediately before, and after each
measurement. If the motor is equipped with capacitors, these must be discharged before beginning any
repair.

www.weg.net
8.5. SPARE PARTS

When ordering spare parts, always provide complete motor designation, indicating the motor type, the code
number and the serial number, which are stated on the motor nameplate.
Spare parts must always be purchased from WEG authorized Service Centers. The use of non-original spare
parts can cause motor failure, performance drop and void the product warranty.
The spare parts must be stored in a clean, dry and properly ventilated room, with relative air humidity not
exceeding 60%, with ambient temperature between 5 °C and 40 °C, free of dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive
smokes and at constant temperature. The spare parts must be stored in their normal mounting position
without placing other components onto them.
Terminal box cover
Terminal box support
Terminal box
Fan cover
Nameplate
Eyebolt
DE shield
ENGLISH
Bearing
DE bearing cap
Shaft W-ring
Fan
NDE shield
Rotor Key
NDE bearing cap
Frame Wound stator
Figure 8.4 - Exploded view of the components of a W22 motor

www.weg.net
9. ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
9.1. PACKAGING
WEG electric motors are supplied in cardboard, plastic or wooden packaging. These materials can be recycled
and must be disposed according to the applicable laws and regulations in each country. All wood used in the
packaging of WEG motors come from the company reforestation program and is not submitted to any chemical
conservation treatment.
9.2. PRODUCT
Electric motors consist mainly of ferrous metals (steel plates and cast iron), non ferrous metals (copper and
aluminum) and plastic materials.
In general, electric motors have relatively long service live. However when they must be discarded, WEG
recommends to dismantle the motor, sort the different materials and send them for recycling.
No-recyclable materials should be disposed of at industrial landfills according to the applicable environmental
laws and regulations in each country, or co-processed in cement kilns or incinerated.
The recycling service providers, the disposal in industrial landfills, the waste co-processing or the incineration
process must be properly authorized by the state environment agency to carry out these activities.
ENGLISH

www.weg.net
10. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART X SOLUTIONS

This troubleshooting chart provides a basic list of problems that may occur during motor operation, possible
causes and recommended corrective actions. In case of doubts, please contact WEG Service Center.
Problem Possible cause Corrective action

Check the control panel and the motor
Power cables are interrupted
power supply cables
Blown fuses Replace blown fuses
Motor does not start, neither coupled nor
decoupled Correct the motor connection according to
Wrong motor connection
connection diagram
Check motor shaft to ensure that it rotates
Locked rotor
freely
Load toque is too high during start-up Do not start the motor on load
The motor starts at no-load, but fails when
load is applied. It starts very slowly and Check the installation dimensioning
does not reach the rated speed Too high voltage drop in the power cables (transformer, cable cross section, relays,
circuit breakers, etc.)
Defective transmission component or Check the transmission force, the coupling
defective driven machine and the alignment
Align / level the motor with the driven
Misaligned / unleveled base
machine
Unbalanced components or unbalanced
Balance the machine set again
driven machine
Abnormal/excessive noise Different balancing methods used for motor
Balance the motor again
and coupling balancing (halve key, full key)
Wrong motor direction of rotation Reverse the direction of rotation
Loose bolts Retighten the bolts
Foundation resonance Check the foundation design
ENGLISH
Damaged bearings Replace the bearings

Clean air inlet and outlet and cooling fins
Check the minimum required distance
Insufficient cooling between the fan cover and nearest walls.
See item 7
Check air temperature at inlet
Measure motor current, evaluate motor
Overload
application and if required, reduce the load
Number of starts per hour is too high or the
Reduce the number of starts per hour
load inertia moment is too high
Check the motor power supply voltage.
Motor overheating Power supply voltage too high Power supply voltage must not exceed the
tolerance specified in item 7.2
Check the motor power supply voltage and
the voltage drop. Power supply voltage
Power supply voltage too low
must not exceed the tolerance specified in
item 7.2
Interrupted power supply Check the connection of the power cables
Check for blown fuses, wrong commands,
Voltage unbalance at the motor terminals voltage unbalance in the power line, phase
fault or interrupted power cables
Direction of rotation is not compatible with Check if the direction of rotation matches
the unidirectional fan the rotation arrow indicated on end shield
Excessive grease/oil
Clean the bearing and lubricate it
Grease/oil aging
according to the provided
The used grease/oil does not matches the recommendations
specified one
Bearing overheating
Lubricate the bearing according to the
Lack of grease/oil provided recommendations
Excessive axial or radial forces due to Reduce the belt tension
the belt tension Reduce the load applied to the motor

ARGENTINA DENMARK JAPAN SWITZERLAND
WEG EQUIPAMIENTOS WEG SCANDINAVIA DENMARK* WEG ELECTRIC MOTORS BIBUS AG*
ELECTRICOS S.A. Sales Office of WEG Scandinavia AB JAPAN CO., LTD. Allmendstrasse 26
Sgo. Pampiglione 4849 Verkstadgatan 9 - 434 22 Yokohama Sky Building 20F, 2-19-12 8320 – Fehraltorf
Parque Industrial San Francisco, Kumgsbacka, Sweden Takashima, Nishi-ku, Yokohama City, Phone: + 41 44 877 58 11
2400 - San Francisco Phone: +46 300 73400 Kanagawa, Japan 220-0011 www.bibus-holding.ch
Phone: +54 (3564) 421484 www.weg.net/se Phone: + 81 45 5503030
www.weg.net/ar www.weg.net/jp UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
FRANCE The Galleries, Block No. 3, 8th Floor,
AUSTRALIA WEG FRANCE SAS * MEXICO Office No. 801 - Downtown Jebel Ali
WEG AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. ZI de Chenes - Le Loup13 / 38297 WEG MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V. 262508, Dubai
14 Lakeview Drive, Scoresby 3179, Saint Quentin Fallavier, Rue du Morel- Carretera Jorobas-Tula Phone: +971 (4) 8130800
Victoria lon - BP 738 / Rhône Alpes, 38 > Isère Km. 3.5, Manzana 5, Lote 1 www.weg.net/ae
Phone: +03 9765 4600 Phone: + 33 47499 1135 Fraccionamiento Parque
www.weg.net/au www.weg.net/fr Industrial - Huehuetoca, UNITED KINGDOM
Estado de México - C.P. 54680 WEG (UK) Limited*
AUSTRIA GREECE Phone: +52 55 53214275 Broad Ground Road - Lakeside
WATT DRIVE ANTRIEBSTECHNIK MANGRINOX* www.weg.net/mx Redditch, Worcestershire B98 8YP
GMBH* 14, Grevenon ST. Phone: + 44 1527 513800
Wöllersdorfer Straße 68 GR 11855 - Athens, Greece NETHERLANDS www.weg.net/uk
2753, Markt Piesting Phone: + 30 210 3423201-3 WEG NETHERLANDS *
Phone: + 43 2633 4040 Sales Office of WEG Benelux S.A. ERIKS *
www.wattdrive.com GERMANY Hanzepoort 23C, 7575 DB Oldenzaal Amber Way, B62 8WG
WEG GERMANY GmbH* Phone: +31 541 571090 Halesowen, West Midlands
LENZE ANTRIEBSTECHNIK Industriegebiet Türnich 3 www.weg.net/nl Phone: + 44 (0)121 508 6000
GES.M.B.H* Geigerstraße 7
Ipf - Landesstrasse 1 50169 Kerpen-Türnich PORTUGAL BRAMMER GROUP *
A-4481 Asten Phone: + 49 2237 92910 WEG EURO - INDÚSTRIA PLC43-45 Broad St, Teddington
Phone: +43 (0) 7224 / 210-0 www.weg.net/de ELÉCTRICA, S.A.* TW11 8QZ
www.lenze.at Rua Eng. Frederico Ulrich, Phone: + 44 20 8614 1040
GHANA Sector V, 4470-605 Maia, Apartado
BELGIUM ZEST ELECTRIC MOTORS (PTY) LTD. 6074, 4471-908 Maia, Porto USA
WEG BENELUX S.A.* 15, Third Close Street Airport Phone: +351 229 477 705 WEG ELECTRIC CORP.
Rue de l’Industrie 30 D, 1400 Nivelles Residential Area, Accra www.weg.net/pt 6655 Sugarloaf Parkway,
Phone: +32 67 888420 Phone: +233 3027 66490 Duluth, GA 30097
www.weg.net/be www.zestghana.com.gh RUSSIA Phone: +1 678 2492000
WEG ELECTRIC CIS LTD* www.weg.net/us
BRAZIL HUNGARY Russia, 194292, St. Petersburg, Pro-
WEG EQUIPAMENTOS AGISYS AGITATORS & spekt Kultury 44, Office 419 VENEZUELA
ELÉTRICOS S.A. TRANSMISSIONS LTD.* Phone: +7 812 3632172 WEG INDUSTRIAS VENEZUELA C.A.
Av. Pref. Waldemar Grubba, 3000, Tó str. 2. Torokbalint, H-2045 www.weg.net/ru Centro corporativo La Viña
CEP 89256-900 Phone: + 36 (23) 501 150 Plaza, Cruce de la Avenida
Jaraguá do Sul - SC www.agisys.hu SOUTH AFRICA Carabobo con la calle Uzlar de la
Phone: +55 47 3276-4000 ZEST ELECTRIC MOTORS (PTY) LTD. Urbanización La Viña /
www.weg.net/br INDIA 47 Galaxy Avenue, Linbro Business Jurisdicción de la Parroquia
WEG ELECTRIC (INDIA) PVT. LTD. Park - Gauteng Private Bag X10011 San José - Valencia
CHILE #38, Ground Floor, 1st Main Road, Sandton, 2146, Johannesburg Oficinas 06-16 y 6-17, de la planta
WEG CHILE S.A. Lower Palace, Orchards, Phone: +27 11 7236000 tipo 2, Nivel 5, Carabobo
Los Canteros 8600, Bangalore, 560 003 www.zest.co.za Phone: (58) 241 8210582
La Reina - Santiago Phone: +91 804128 2007 www.weg.net/ve
Phone: +56 2 2784 8900 www.weg.net/in SPAIN
www.weg.net/cl WEG IBERIA INDUSTRIAL S.L.*
ITALY C/ Tierra de Barros, 5-7
CHINA WEG ITALIA S.R.L.* 28823 Coslada, Madrid
WEG (NANTONG) ELECTRIC MOTOR Via Viganò de Vizzi, 93/95 Phone: +34 91 6553008
MANUFACTURING CO. LTD. 20092 Cinisello Balsamo, Milano www.weg.net/es
No. 128# - Xinkai South Road, Phone: + 39 2 6129 3535
Nantong Economic & www.weg.net/it SINGAPORE
Technical Development Zone, WEG SINGAPORE PTE LTD
Nantong, Jiangsu Province FERRARI S.R.L.* 159, Kampong Ampat, #06-02A KA
Phone: +86 513 8598 9333 Via Cremona 25 26015 PLACE. 368328
www.weg.net/cn Soresina (CR), Cremona Phone: +65 68581081
Phone: + 39 (374) 340-404 www.weg.net/sg
COLOMBIA www.ferrarisrl.it
WEG COLOMBIA LTDA SWEDEN
The values shown are subject to change without prior notice.
Calle 46A N82 - 54 STIAVELLI IRIO S.P.A.* WEG SCANDINAVIA AB*

Portería II - Bodega 6 y 7 Via Pantano - Blocco 16 - Capalle Box 27, 435 21 Mölnlycke
San Cayetano II - Bogotá 50010 , Campi Bisenzio (FI) Visit: Designvägen 5, 435 33
Phone: +57 1 416 0166 Phone: + 39 (55) 898.448 Mölnlycke, Göteborg
Cod: 50033244 | Rev: 28 | Date (m/y): 08/2018
www.weg.net/co www.stiavelli.com Phone: +46 31 888000

www.weg.net/se
* European Union Importers

2451088515 / 00 / 09.04.2021
We live our values.
GEA Group is a global engineering company with multi-billion euro sales and
operations in more than 50 countries. Founded in 1881, the company is one of the
largest providers of innovative equipment and process technology. GEA Group is
listed in the STOXX® Europe 600 Index.

Tel.: +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
www.gea.com

Technical Documentation: Technische Dokumentation

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Technical Documentation: Technische Dokumentation

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

EDITION / AUSGABE - 09.04.2021

CUSTOMER / KUNDE: Taizhou Sanfu Ship Engineering Co., Ltd.

MODEL / MODELL: 1 x CCP2 for HFO

engineering for a better world www.gea.com

Die Verfasser freuen sich immer über Kommentare und Ratschläge

The authors are always for comments and suggestions for

© GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

8 VALVES, FITTINGS, ASSEMBLY

8.3 SHUT OFF FLAP

8.4 SPRING SAFETY VALVE

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

8.5 BALL VALVE

8.6 SOLENOID VALVE

8.7 SOLENOID-VALVE BLOCK, COMPLETE

8.8 BALL VALVE

8.9 NON-RETURN VALVE

M14X1,5 CW614N-MS FKM

8.10 SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.

8.11 CONTROL VALVE

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

9.2 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

9.3 MACHINE THERMOMETER

9.4 PROXIMITY SENSOR

9.5 WATER DETECTOR

9.6 RESISTANCE THERMOMETER

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH

Designation: Safety precautions

engineering for a better world GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Mechanical Equipment

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

For your safety

• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

• Follow the instructions in the manual.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.1 Safety markings ....................................................................................... 5

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.1 Safety markings

1.1.1 Safety markings and their meaning

Be sure to adhere to the plant

Disconnect power prior to start-

Before carrying out work on the

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Frequency converter operation!

Warning of extreme surface

The surfaces of the plant components

Danger due to electrical current!

Before working on electrical com-

• Lock the installation to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Potential equalisation (protec-

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

1.2 Performing work on a plant

The plant works reliably, provided that

Special attention must be given to:

1.2.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

The operator of the plant

GEA Westfalia Separator Group

Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-